CST Ma 1

SUMMARY OF
TABLE OF CONTENTS
100 Contract Administration
200 Earthwork
300 Subgrade Preparation
400 Lighting, Signs, and Traffic Control
500 Bituminous Pavement
600 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
700 Bridges, Culverts, and Related Construction
800 Roadside Development and Erosion Control
900 Incidental Construction
1000 Material Details
1100 Environmental
1200 Site Manager
1300 Project Surveys
Appendices
NDR Forms
FHWA Forms
Example
Field Book Records
Tables
Index
Construction Manual
1998 Version
2002 Update
April, 2002
Page Action Description
TOC 100-1 Change Reverse of a Changed Page.
TOC 100-2 Add Added in 4 More Subcategories.
TOC 100-3 Add Added in Calendar Day Category and FHWA/Cert. Acceptance Category
TOC 100-4 Add Added in Field Sitemanager Category to Replace Field Notebooks
TOC 100-5 Delete Removed Filling Out the Form and Line-by-Line Instructions Categories.
TOC 200-1 Add/Delete Added categories of Rounding of Hinge Points and Erosion Control;
deleted “and Embankment” from 205.00 Excavation; Added Nebraska
Game and Parks Commission Approval of Borrow Sites; Added Tentative
Acceptance Categories.
TOC 500-1 Add Added in Adjusting Asphalt Cement Contents; Section 502.40.5 and 2
subcategories; 502.40.6a.
TOC 500-2 Add/Change Section 502.50.3 and 4 Subcategories; Section 507.00 and 5
Subcategories (formerly 502.40.4)
TOC 600-1 Change New Table of Contents Page But No Change.
TOC 700-1 Change New Table of Contents Page Complete Chapter Reorganization
TOC 800-1 Add Added in 807.02 Filter Fabric
TOC 1000-1 Move/Add Moved Access Commands to 1002.02 from 1003.02 and Now the Rest of
the 1003 Sequence is Renumbered. Added in 1003.05 and 1003.06
3 Change Changed Labor Compliance Phone Number
4 Change Grammatical Corrections
15 Change Updated FHWA Notification Limit to $50,000.00
17 Change New Title For “Deputy Director”
18 Added DBE Subcontract Approval Check
19 Change Field Approval Level For Subcontracted Work Raised To $50,000.00
28 Deleted Removed Paren. Phrase Referring To CICS3.
33 Change New Railroad Insurance Procedures In SiteManager
42 Change Additional EEO Noncompliance Requirement
43 Change Grammatical Corrections/New 1391 Location On NDOR Website
44 Added PM Will Report EEO Violations To EEO Section For Investigation
47 Added Form-298 Now On NDOR Website.
50 Change New Phone Extension For EEO Posters
54 Change New DBE Notification Procedure
55 Added Added DBE Commercially Useful Function
59 Change Page Formatting Correction
79 Deleted Deleted Outdated Reference To Old COFA file For Change Orders
81 Change Updated The FHWA Limit On Oversight Projects
82 Change Updated Change Order Procedures With Site Manager
88 Change Updated Documentation Procedure To Require SiteManager Entry
89 Change Updated Sign Deduction Requirements
90 Change Update English (metric) Position.
93 Change Updated Documentation Procedure To Require SiteManager Entry
102 Change Updated English/Metric Units
103 Change Revised Cancelled Items Procedure To Meet SiteManager Requirements
104 Change Revised Measurement & Payment Items Procedure To Meet
SiteManager Requirements
105 Change Revised Measurement & Payment Items Procedure To Meet
SiteManager Requirements
106 Change Revised Contractor Estimate Procedure To Meet SiteManager
Requirements
108 Change Revised Contractor Estimate Procedure To Meet SiteManager
Requirements
122 Change Updated Appendix Reference
123 Change Revised Final Quantity Procedure To Meet SiteManager
Requirements/Changed Reference To Logistic Division
124 Change Changed Reference To Logistic Division
129 Change Clarified Acceptance Of Plan Quantities
132 Deleted Deleted Requirement For Bridge Deck Survey Following Repairs
136/137 Change Updated Contractor Evaluation Procedures
138 Change Deleted All Text and Moved Text Forward.
139/140 Deleted Deleted Contractor Evaluation Text
141 Changed Changed Title “Letter Of Transmittal—Finaled Projects”
158 Added Added Requirement To Install Silt Fence Before Grading Starts
160 Added Clarification Of Tree Circumference Included In “Clearing & Grubbing”
162 Changed Updated the Estimated Quantities Requirements
212 Change Updated Flagger Requirements
-2-
222 Change Update Sign Deduction Procedures
241 Change Relocated Tack Coat Requirements
242 Added Added Clarification On Test Strip
244 Added Added Explanation Of Tender Zone
245 Added Added Policy For Placement Of Template Correction
245a Changed Additional Page Required To Accommodate Template Correction
260a/260b Change Relocation Of Tack Coat Emulsion
270 Added Added 5th Cylinder Requirement
295 Added Updated Tining Requirements
296 Added Added Tining Requirements
315-434x Change Complete Rewrite/Reorganization Of Division 700—Bridges, Culverts,
And Related Construction
451a Added Added Filter Fabric Details
452/452a/ Added Added Bale Check Requirements
452b
455 Added Added Silt Fence Details
455a Added Added in this Page for Overflow of Previous Page.
455b/456 Added Added in this Page to Maintain Page Numbering/ Update English (metric)
Position
466 Change Revised Guardrail Checklist
467 Change Grammatical Correction
468 Added New Shop Plan Requirements For Guardrail End Treatments
469 Change Grammatical Correction. Changed Measurement Specs in Rail Height.
470 Change Moved End Anchorage & Bridge Connection Paragraphs
471 Change New Location For End Anchorage & Bridge Connection Paragraphs.
Added Text to Paragraph Above End Anchorage Section.
478 Change Moved Approved Products Access Commands
480 Change New Location Of The Approved Products List On The Website. Moved
1003.02 to this page from page 481.
481 Added Added Requirement On White Pigmented Curing Compound
Documentation. Moved Section 1003.02 to page 480 and Changed
1003.03 to 1004.01 and Added 1004.00 PCC Requirements.
481a & b Added New Concrete Cylinder Policy. Changed Section Numbering.
481 c Added New M & R Final Review Procedures. Changed Number to 1005.00.
481d Change Changed Phone Number.
495 Change Revised 404 Determination Checklist
497 Change Grammatical Correction.
498 Deleted Deleted Water Well Requirements.
499 Added Added Reference to NDEQ Website.
500 Change Changed Reference to DEQ to SFM and Changed Tank Removal
Procedures.
501 Change Changed Reference to DEQ to SFM and Sampling Requirements.
502 Added Added “No Smoking” Requirement & reference to DEQ Pamphlet on
USTs.
503 Change Changed reference to English (metric) numbers
504 Added Added requirement to send copy of closure report to SFM and changed
-3-
reference to DEQ to SFM.
505 Change Changed reference to DEQ when fuel is released.
506 Added Added Clarification on soil; requirement for street address; Closure
Assessment Report requirements
507 Change Changed Soil Disposal reference; Changed Contaminated Soil Reporting
requirement; and Construction Division reporting requirements.
508 Change Changed reference to DEQ to SFM.
518 Change Updated Storage Of Waste Paint Requirements
527 Added Added SiteManager Guidance
528 & 528a Change Updated SiteManager Support List
530 to 590 Change Complete Rewrite/Reorganization Of Division 1300—Project Surveys
-4-
DIVISION 100
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION & INSPECTION PROCEDURES
101.00 CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION............................................................................1
101.01 PURPOSE OF MANUAL ...........................................................................................1
101.02 ENGINEER'S DUTIES AND AUTHORITY...............................................................1
Authority of the Director.............................................................................................................1
General...................................................................................................................................1
Delegation of Authority ...........................................................................................................1
General ......................................................................................................................................1
101.03 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION ....................................................................................2
101.04 CHAIN OF COMMAND...............................................................................................4
101.05 CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER.................................................................................4
Interpretation of Specifications ............................................................................................4
101.06 DISTRICT ENGINEER (DE) .....................................................................................5
101.07 DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER (DCE)...................................................5
101.08 PROJECT MANAGER (PM)......................................................................................6
Delegation of Responsibility.................................................................................................7
101.09 CONSTRUCTION TECHNICIAN (CT).....................................................................7
102.00 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES..................................................................................9
102.01 PROMPT EXERCISE OF AUTHORITY...................................................................9
102.02 APPEALED DECISIONS ...........................................................................................9
102.03 INTEGRITY OF EMPLOYEES ...............................................................................10
Removing Materials from Projects.....................................................................................11
102.04 PRESENCE ON SITE..............................................................................................12
102.05 PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS.....................................................................12
102.06 PLAN ERRORS/OMISSIONS .................................................................................12
102.07 ENGINEER RELATIONS ........................................................................................13
102.08 PUBLIC RELATIONSHIPS .....................................................................................13
General Project Supervision ..............................................................................................13
Residents Along Construction Projects ............................................................................13
Services Relationships........................................................................................................13
News Media Relationships ..................................................................................................14
Relations with Cities and Counties....................................................................................14
102.09 CONTRACTOR (PARTNERING) RELATIONSHIPS (SSHC Section 113)..........15
102.10 FHWA & OTHER OUTSIDE AGENCIES RELATIONSHIPS ................................15
102.11 EMPLOYMENT OF CONSULTANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING AND
INSPECTION ..............................................................................................................................16
Agreement Responsibilities................................................................................................16
Project Manager....................................................................................................................16
102.12 PERSONNEL............................................................................................................17
102.13 EMPLOYEE POLICIES ...........................................................................................17
102.14 STAFF REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................17
Field Estimates......................................................................................................................17
Adjustments ...........................................................................................................................17
Field Personnel Duties & Staff Requirements .................................................................17
Table of Contents 100 - 1

2002
102.15 SUBCONTRACTS ....................................................................................................18
Subcontract Request And Approval...................................................................................18
Contractor's Requirements..................................................................................................18
Project Manager Involvement...............................................................................................19
Field Approval of Subcontract Work ....................................................................................19
Exemptions from Subcontract Requirements .....................................................................20
102.16 DETOUR REPORT ..................................................................................................24
102.17 CONTROL NUMBERS AND CONTRACT NUMBERS ............................................24
102.18 PROJECT DOCUMENTS DISPOSITION ................................................................24
103.00 PRECONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................25
103.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ..................................................................25
103.02 ADMINISTRATION DETAILS.....................................................................................26
103.03 PROJECT DETAILS .................................................................................................32
103.04 ADDITIONAL TOPICS FOR DISCUSSION..............................................................35
103.10 ONE CALL NOTIFICATION.......................................................................................37
Fiber Optic Cable ..................................................................................................................37
103.11 UTILITIES AND RAILROAD REHABILITATION ........................................................37
General.................................................................................................................................37
Preventing Damage to Utility Properties ..............................................................................37
Beginning Rehabilitation.......................................................................................................38
Inspecting Rehabilitation Work.............................................................................................38
103.12 HAUL ROADS (SSHC Section 107) ........................................................................39
103.20 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION ............................................................................40
103.21 NEBRASKA & FHWA FORMS & REPORTS - PREPARED BY CONTRACTOR..40
103.22 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH................................................................41
103.23 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EEO)..................................................42
Contractor's Responsibility..............................................................................................42
Project Manager Involvement .........................................................................................42
103.24 TRAINING & TRAINEE PROGRAMS........................................................................44
Contractor's Responsibility.................................................................................................44
Project Manager's Involvement..........................................................................................46
103.25 WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT ................................................................................47
103.26 DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACTS REQUIREMENTS (Payrolls)..................49
103.27 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) SUBCONTRACTOR ..........54
103.28 LEASE OF PROPERTY BEYOND THE HIGHWAY RIGHT-OF-WAY.....................59
103.29 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF HIGHWAY RIGHT-OF-WAY......................................59
103.30 “CONTRACT QUANTITIES”................................................................................59\\
103.31 CONTRACTOR'S SALES TAX EXEMPTION .......................................................60
103.32 LOTUS NOTES – NOTIFICATION.........................................................................60
103.33 PRIME CONTRACTORS/SUBCONTRACTORS..................................................60
103.40 FREIGHT RATES ....................................................................................................61
103.50 BARRICADES, DANGER, WARNING, AND DETOUR SIGNS.............................62
103.60 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION ......................63
103.61 Responsibility of Contractor .................................................................................63
Safety Inspections ................................................................................................................63
Postings .................................................................................................................................63
Checklist Safety Program ....................................................................................................63
Crystalline Silica Exposure & OSHA Notification ....................................................................64
2002
104.00 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION................................................................................66
104.01 CONTRACT TIME DETERMINATION ......................................................................66
Tentative Beginning Date ...................................................................................................66
Notice to Proceed.................................................................................................................66
Beginning the Counting of Working Days .........................................................................67
Calendar Day .........................................................................................................................67
Working Day...........................................................................................................................67
Current Controlling Operation............................................................................................67
Working Day Report and Diary Record ..............................................................................69
104.02 CHARACTER OF WORKPERSONS, METHODS, AND EQUIPMENT ...............70
104.03 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK..............................................................71
Specification Provisions......................................................................................................71
Specialty Items, Time Suspensions....................................................................................71
104.04 PROGRESS OF WORK ..........................................................................................73
104.05 WINTER WORK .......................................................................................................74
104.06 WEEKLY REPORT OF WORKING DAYS .............................................................74
104.07 RENTAL RATE GUIDELINES.................................................................................75
104.08 CHANGE ORDER - SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENTS
(SSHC Subsection 104.02) ........................................................................................................79
Policy for Change Orders....................................................................................................79
Subcontracted Items ............................................................................................................79
Contract Unit Price ...............................................................................................................79
Change Order Approval Limits ...........................................................................................80
FHWA/Certification Acceptance ..........................................................................................80
Cost Overrun/Underrun Notification (DR Form 74) ................................................................86
Work Orders............................................................................................................................86
Force Account Agreements and Statements..........................................................................87
Force Account Agreements..............................................................................................87
Force Account Statements ...............................................................................................89
Alterations of Plans or Character of Work......................................................................90
104.09 VALUE ENGINEERING ...........................................................................................91
104.10 PLANT INSPECTION................................................................................................93
104.11 PLANT REPORTS...................................................................................................94
104.20 FIELD TESTS ...........................................................................................................95
104.21 FIELD TESTING ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS..............................................95
Materials.................................................................................................................................95
Project Acceptance Sampling and Testing .......................................................................95
Assurance Sampling and Testing .......................................................................................95
104.30 TRUCKS/HAULING OF MATERIALS........................................................................96
104.40 SCALES....................................................................................................................97
104.41 SCALE TICKETS.....................................................................................................97
104.42 TRUCK PLATFORM SCALE APPROVAL .............................................................98
Truck Platform Scale Use ....................................................................................................98
104.50 SMOOTHNESS.........................................................................................................99
104.51 TESTING ...................................................................................................................99
104.52 EVALUATION ...........................................................................................................99
Bridge Approach Smoothness ............................................................................................99
2002
Bridge Deck Smoothness....................................................................................................99
104.53 BUMP CORRECTION ............................................................................................100
104.60 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES & EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME ..........................100
Liquidated Damages...........................................................................................................100
Contract Time Extensions .................................................................................................100
104.70 ACCIDENTS...........................................................................................................102
105.00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..........................................................................103
105.01 GENERAL ...............................................................................................................103
105.02 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES AND COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED
QUANTITIES............................................................................................................................103
105.03 CANCELLED ITEMS (MATERIALS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR AND
NOT USED DUE TO CHANGES IN PLANS).....................................................................104
105.04 PARTIAL PAYMENT ..............................................................................................104
105.05 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ...........................................................105
Photographs and Video Tapes..........................................................................................105
Field Records - General.....................................................................................................105
Field SiteManager Entries or SiteManager Item Documentation ................................105
Scale Tickets .......................................................................................................................106
105.06 CONTRACTOR'S ESTIMATES..............................................................................107
Stockpiling ...........................................................................................................................108
Contractor's Statement of Compliance............................................................................109
Contractor's Statement of Materials and Labor .............................................................110
105.07 FIELD COMPUTATIONS FOR FINAL PAYMENT ...............................................110
General ....................................................................................................................................110
Roadway Excavation...........................................................................................................110
Data Collector ..................................................................................................................110
Planimeter Method ..........................................................................................................111
Overhaul ..............................................................................................................................113
Foundation Course .............................................................................................................113
Gravel Surfacing.................................................................................................................114
Prime Coat and Tack Coat .................................................................................................114
Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course and Base Course .................................................115
Concrete Pavement............................................................................................................115
Removal of Existing Structures and Preparation of Existing Structures...................115
Removal of Existing Structures.....................................................................................115
Preparation of Existing Box Culverts...........................................................................116
Excavation for Structures..................................................................................................116
Excavation for Bridges...................................................................................................116
Concrete Seal Course ....................................................................................................116
Excavation for Culverts..................................................................................................117
General .............................................................................................................................117
Typical Channel Section.................................................................................................117
Piles and Pile Driving.........................................................................................................118
Sheet Piling .........................................................................................................................118
Concrete Construction and Reinforcement....................................................................119
Culverts................................................................................................................................119
Concrete Pipe Culverts..................................................................................................119
2002
Corrugated Metal Pipe and Pipe Arch Culverts..........................................................120
Corrugated Metal Pipe....................................................................................................120
Corrugated Metal Pipe Arches ......................................................................................120
Pipe Ordered But Not Used...........................................................................................120
Culvert Pipe .....................................................................................................................121
Sewers..................................................................................................................................121
Excavation ........................................................................................................................121
Pipe Computations ..........................................................................................................121
Guardrail ..............................................................................................................................122
Seeding and Slope Protection..........................................................................................122
105.08 BORROW AND LOCAL PIT MATERIALS OBTAINED BY THECONTRACTOR .122
Borrow and Local Pit Materials Furnished by the State or County and Not Involving
the Contractor .....................................................................................................................123
105.09 SUMMARY OF FINAL QUANTITIES....................................................................124
105.10 MOBILIZATION......................................................................................................124
Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment.............................................................124
105.11 SALVAGED PROJECT MATERIALS REPORTING ...............................................124
106.00 PROJECT FINALIZATION.........................................................................................125
106.01 FINAL PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR ...................................................................125
106.02 PRICE ADJUSTMENT CHANGE ORDERS...........................................................125
106.03 EQUIPMENT PURCHASED BY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS .......................125
106.04 PROJECT ACCEPTANCE AND AUTHORIZATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT .........125
Notification of Project Completion (DR Form 91) - All Projects....................................126
106.05 FINAL PACKAGE ....................................................................................................126
106.06 FINAL COMPUTATIONS.........................................................................................126
106.07 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................................126
Final Inspection and Acceptance ..........................................................................................126
Interest Payments on Delayed Estimates........................................................................127
106.08 FINAL RECORDS...................................................................................................128
Introduction .........................................................................................................................128
Right-of-Way........................................................................................................................128
Crop Damage .......................................................................................................................128
Alternate Crop Damage Procedure ..................................................................................129
106.09 STATEMENT OF MATERIALS AND LABOR ......................................................132
106.10 AS BUILT PLANS ....................................................................................................133
Clearance Letter .................................................................................................................137
106.11 OVERRUNS AND UNDERRUNS LETTER............................................................137
106.12 CONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS.............................................................................137
106.13 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL ................................................................................141
106.14 FINALING PROCEDURES .....................................................................................141
106.15 UNAUTHORIZED WORK .......................................................................................142
106.16 USE OF ADJACENT LAND UNDER CONTRACT OR LEASE .............................142
106.17 FINAL CLEANING UP..............................................................................................142
106.18 CONSULTANT INSPECTION.................................................................................143

2002
DIVISION 200 -- EARTHWORK
SECTION 201.00 -- EARTHWORK INSPECTION CHECKLIST ......................145
202.00 GENERAL GRADING INSTRUCTIONS........................................................................146
Grading Inspection ...................................................................................................................146
Blue Tops...................................................................................................................................146
Rounding of Hinge Points .......................................................................................................146
Erosion Control.........................................................................................................................146
203.00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ........................................................................................148
203.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ...................................................................................148
Disposal of Waste .....................................................................................................................148
204.00 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS..............................................161
Removal and Disposal of Old Pavement ...............................................................................161
Disposal of Asphaltic Concrete Pavement............................................................................161
Hazardous Material (Wells, Asbestos Fibers in ACC, Building Removal, Underground
Storage Tanks, Archeological Remains)................................................................................161
205.00 EXCAVATION ..................................................................................................................162
205.01 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................162
205.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................162
Embankment and Excavation Soils Criteria ..........................................................................162
Unsuitable Material...................................................................................................................163
Rock Material.............................................................................................................................163
Contractor Furnished Borrow Areas......................................................................................163
Approval For Soil Type.............................................................................................................164
Preservation of Cultural Resources ......................................................................................164
Nebraska Game and Parks Commission Approval of Borrow Sites...................................164
205.03 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................166
Overweight Axle Loads............................................................................................................166
Hauling On or Over Surfaced Roads .....................................................................................166
205.04 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ....................................................................................166
Embankment Construction ......................................................................................................166
Site Preparation ........................................................................................................................166
Deposition of Embankment Material ......................................................................................166
Compaction................................................................................................................................167
Moisture Density Curves.........................................................................................................168
Construction of Embankment Toe Berms .............................................................................168
Construction of Bridge Approach Fills ..................................................................................169
Earthwork-Measured-in-Embankment ...................................................................................169
Prewatering Plan.......................................................................................................................169
Payment for Water for Embankment Construction...............................................................169
Finishing.....................................................................................................................................170
Tentative Acceptance ..............................................................................................................170
206.00 TOPSOIL .........................................................................................................................171
Stripping, Salvaging, and Spreading .....................................................................................171
Topsoil on Roadway Cuts and Embankments.......................................................................171
206.02 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..................................................................................................171
207.00 OVERHAUL .....................................................................................................................172
Table of Contents 200-1
2002
DIVISION 300 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION
301.00 CHECKLISTS (See Division 200)...................................................................................175
302.00 BASE COURSE AND SUBGRADE INSPECTION .......................................................176
303.00 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND SHOULDER SUBGRADE PREPARATION........177

303.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ..........................................................................177
Prime Coat ...........................................................................................................178
Subgrade Preparation After Removal of Existing Approach Slabs......................178
303.02 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ........................................................................179
304.00 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION........................................................................................180

304.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................180
304.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................180
304.03 EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................180
305.00 EARTH SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................181

305.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................181
306.00 FOUNDATION COURSE ...............................................................................................182

306.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................182
306.04 BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................185
307.00 ROCK OR AGGREGATE SURFACING........................................................................186

307.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................186
307.03 EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................186
307.06 BASIS OF PAYMENT .........................................................................................188

2002
DIVISION 400
LIGHTING, SIGNS, TRAFFIC SIGNALS & TRAFFIC CONTROL
401.00 LIGHTING CHECKLIST .........................................................................................193

SSHC References ................................................................................................................193
Other References .................................................................................................................193
402.00 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................197
402.01 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................197
SSHC References ................................................................................................................197
Other References .................................................................................................................197
General Comment ................................................................................................................197
Special Construction Items...................................................................................................197
402.02 PRECONSTRUCTON CONFERENCE .............................................................197
402.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIALS LIST ......................................................198
402.04 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS...................................................................198
Staking of Light Pole and Tower Foundations ......................................................................198
Wood Poles Used on Lighting Projects ................................................................................198
Testing of Lighting Systems .................................................................................................198
Poles and Towers.................................................................................................................199
Poles and Tower Foundations ..............................................................................................199
Luminaires ............................................................................................................................199
Lighting Control Centers .......................................................................................................200
High Mast Lowering System .................................................................................................200
Temporary Lighting System..................................................................................................200
402.05 PAYMENT FOR ELECTRIC POWER USED BY THE LIGHTING SYSTEM........201
402.06 COMPLETION -AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT..................................201
403.00 TRAFFIC SIGNALS...................................................................................................202
403.01 GENERAL .............................................................................................................202
403.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE .............................................................202
403.03 PRELIMINARY STAKING ......................................................................................202
403.04 SAW CUT LOOP LOCATION...............................................................................202
403.05 TEMPORARY SIGNAL..........................................................................................202
403.06 ELECTRICAL POWER ........................................................................................203
403.07 STATE SUPPLIED MATERIAL .............................................................................203
403.08 SAFETY.................................................................................................................203
403.09 ITEMS TO CHECK WHEN INSTALLING ..............................................................203
403.10 FINAL SIGNAL TURN ON......................................................................................206
404.00 CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .........................................207
404.01 TRAFFIC CONTROL SPECIFICATION REFERENCES .....................................207
404.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNING CHANGES..........................................................207
404.03 CONSTRUCTION ZONE ACCIDENT REPORTING............................................208
Investigation Procedure ........................................................................................................208
Accident Notification Procedure............................................................................................209
Reporting of Severe Personal Injury and Fatal Accidents ....................................................209
404.04 STOP SIGNS ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS ..................................................209
404.05 "ROAD WORK AHEAD" AND "END ROAD WORK" SIGNS...............................210
404.06 NO PASSING ZONES ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS.................................210

2002
404.07 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE ...........................................................210
404.08 CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONE SIGNING DURING WINTER SHUTDOWN....211
Uncompleted Projects ..........................................................................................................211
Multi-Contract Projects .........................................................................................................211
Special Concerns .................................................................................................................212
404.09 FLAGGERS & PILOT CARS.................................................................................212
Flagger Bid Item ....................................................................................................................212
Slow/Slow Paddles ...............................................................................................................212
Slow/Slow Paddles ...............................................................................................................212
Method of Measurement .......................................................................................................213
404.10 INTERSTATE TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS ......................................213
Median Crossings .................................................................................................................213
Traffic Control Removal for Head-to-Head Projects.............................................................213
Raised Pavement Markers ...................................................................................................214
404.11 CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN GUIDELINES ...................................................214
404.12 FLASHING ARROW PANELS ..............................................................................214
404.13 SIGN MOUNTING DEVICES.................................................................................215
404.14 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS.......................................215
404.15 WORK AREA SPEED ZONE ...............................................................................216
Speed Limits in Maintenance Work Areas............................................................................216
Signing.................................................................................................................................218
Recordkeeping ...................................................................................................................220
404.16 BRIDGE APPROACH GUARD RAILS..................................................................220
404.17 INERTIAL BARRIER SYSTEMS ...........................................................................221
404.18 BARRICADES/PLASTIC DRUMS.........................................................................221
405.00 SIGNS .......................................................................................................................222
405.01 DEDUCTION FOR SIGNS ....................................................................................222
405.02 SIGN MAINTENANCE............................................................................................222

2002
DIVISION 500
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
501.01 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CHECKLIST.......................................................................227
502.00 ASPHALT PAVEMENT ..............................................................................................232
502.10 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESCRIPTION ...............................................................232
502.20 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................232
502.20.1 ASPHALT ACCEPTANCE AND TESTING ..........................................................232
Field Tests and Certification of Materials .......................................................................232
Asphalt Materials.................................................................................................................232
Aggregates...........................................................................................................................233
502.20.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND DOCUMENTING ASPHALT MIXTURE
PROPORTIONING CHANGES ..............................................................................................233
Adjusting Asphalt Cement Contents ................................................................................233
Documenting Corrective Action for Noncomplying Air Voids Test on Specimens
Taken from Constructed Pavement .................................................................................233
Adjusting Aggregate Proportions .....................................................................................234
Filler-Bitumen Ratio............................................................................................................234
502.20.3 ASPHALT REPORT FORMS..............................................................................234
Form Identification and Use ..............................................................................................235
502.30 ASPHALT PAVEMENT EQUIPMENT ..................................................................236
502.30.1 INSPECTION AT ASPHALT PLANTS..................................................................236
502.30.2 INSPECTING THE MIXING TIME OF ASPHALT PLANTS................................236
502.30.3 USE OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................237
Material Transfer Vehicle ..................................................................................................237
Mat Smoothness Machine .................................................................................................238
Windrow Pick-up Equipment .............................................................................................238
502.40 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION METHODS......................................239
502.40.1 UNSTABLE SUBGRADES AND SUBBASES ......................................................239
Locating Unstable Areas....................................................................................................239
Determining Cause .............................................................................................................239
Drying and Recompaction..................................................................................................239
Special Treatments.............................................................................................................240
502.40.2 GRADELINE STRINGS AND EDGE ALIGNMENT ...........................................240
502.40.3 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS ...................................................................................241
502.40.5 DENSITY CONTROLS FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION ..242
Procedures for Construction of Test Strips ...................................................................244
Resolving Density - Void Conflicts...................................................................................244
502.40.6 LAYING WIDTHS FOR ASPHALT ......................................................................245
502.40.6a POLICY FOR PLACEMENT OF TEMPLATE CORRECTION ON OVERLAY 245
502.40.7 PLACEMENT RATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT BASES, BINDER, AND
SURFACE COURSES.............................................................................................................246
502.40.8 COLD WEATHER ASPHALT CONSTRUCTION ..............................................246
502.40.9 RUMBLE STRIPS IN ASPHALT SHOULDERS................................................246
502.40.10 QUALITY CONTROL MONITORING ................................................................246
502.50 ASPHALT PAVEMENT METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT......251
2002
502.50.1 TESTING FOR SMOOTHNESS ........................................................................251
Incentive/Disincentive Payments for Asphaltic Concrete Smoothness .......................251
Use of Straightedge ...........................................................................................................253
502.50.2 CHECKING TRANSVERSE JOINTS FOR SMOOTHNESS............................253
502.50.3 PERFORMANCE GRADED BINDER.................................................................254
Tank Measurement and Asphalt Cement Content Determination ...............................254
Measuring Asphalt Cement for Small Quantities............................................................255
Asphalt Cement Quantities and Pay Adjustments ..........................................................255
Asphalt Cement Quantities and Pay Adjustments ..........................................................255
502.50.4 TARGET VALUES FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PRODUCED ...................255
502.50.5 MEASURING ASPHALT MATERIALS ...............................................................255
503.00 ASPHALT CURBS .....................................................................................................257
504.00 STATE MAINTENANCE PATCHING.......................................................................258
505.00 P.E.P. GUIDELINES .................................................................................................259
506.00 MILLINGS..................................................................................................................260
507.00 TACK COATS USING EMULSIONS ......................................................................260a
For Dilution ........................................................................................................................260a
Application Rate for Diluted Emulsion ...........................................................................260a
Sample for Compliance ....................................................................................................260a
Measurement for Pay .......................................................................................................260a
Settlement of Diluted Emulsions ....................................................................................260a

2002
DIVISION 600
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT

601.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT CHECKLISTS ..........................................................................263
601.01 CONCRETE PAVEMENT CHECKLIST .................................................................263
601.02 CONCRETE PLANT CHECKLIST .........................................................................265
601.03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPAIR CHECKLIST ..................................................267
602.00 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT .................................................269
602.10 DESCRIPTION.........................................................................................................269
602.20 PCC PAVEMENT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS..................................................270
602.201 Composition of Concrete .........................................................................270
602.202 Concrete Strength.....................................................................................270
602.203 Concrete Sampling Locations..................................................................270
602.204 Testing Procedures ..................................................................................271
602.205 Air Entrainment in Plastic Concrete ........................................................271
602.206 Ready Mix Concrete ..................................................................................271
602.207 Concrete Discharge Times ......................................................................271
602.208 Miscellaneous Material Requirements...................................................272
602.30 PCC PAVEMENT EQUIPMENT .............................................................................273
602.031 General .......................................................................................................273
602.032 Batching Equipment..................................................................................273
602.303 Cement Bulk Handling Equipment ..........................................................273
602.304 Scales..........................................................................................................273
602.305 Concrete Mixers........................................................................................273
602.306 Hauling Equipment ....................................................................................274
602.307 Subgrade Trimmer.....................................................................................275
602.308 Concrete Spreader....................................................................................275
602.309 Finishing Equipment .................................................................................275
602.3010 Slip Form Paving Equipment..................................................................276
602.3011 Saws Used on New Pavement & Unbonded PCC Overlays ..............276
602.3012 Miscellaneous Equipment ......................................................................276
602.3013 Accumulation of Materials in Transporting Vehicles..........................277
602.40 PCC PAVEMENT PRECONCRETING CONFERENCE .......................................278
602.401 PCC Daily Report of Pavement Laid (DR Form 85) ...............................278
602.50 PCC PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION METHODS.................................................279
602.501 Subgrade General .....................................................................................279
602.502 Preparation of Subgrade ..........................................................................279
602.503 Foundation Course....................................................................................279
602.504 Grades on Drives in Cities.......................................................................280
602.505 Protection of Pavement............................................................................280
602.506 Operating Finishing Equipment on Previously Placed Concrete in
Multiple-Lane Construction .................................................................................280
602.507 Surface Cleaning .......................................................................................280
602.508 Material Inspections..................................................................................280
602.509 Batching Inspections ................................................................................281
602.5010 Cement Hauling Inspections..................................................................283

2002
602.5011 Mixing and Hauling..................................................................................284
602.5012 Forms.........................................................................................................287
602.5013 Placing Reinforcing Steel.......................................................................288
602.5014 Tie-Bar Steel Inspection.........................................................................288
602.5015 Inlet and Utility Accesses........................................................................289
602.5016 Box-Outs for Utility Accesses................................................................289
602.5017 Box-Outs on Slip-Form Paving ..............................................................290
602.5018 Placing and Spreading............................................................................290
602.5019 Slip-Form Construction...........................................................................291
602.5020 Surface Finishing.....................................................................................293
602.5021 Use of Water in Finishing Concrete ......................................................294
602.5022 Tining ........................................................................................................295
Tine Determination......................................................................................296
Guidelines for Tining Concrete Pavement..............................................296
602.5023 Pavement Depression ............................................................................296
602.5024 Pavement Station Stamping...................................................................296
602.5025 Integral Curb Placement..........................................................................297
602.5026 Protection and Curing.............................................................................297
602.5027 Joints.........................................................................................................298
Sealing Joints .................................................................................................300
Hot Poured Sealants ......................................................................................300
Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type..............................................301
Silicone Sealants............................................................................................302
Mastic Sealants ..............................................................................................302
Cleaning Joints ...............................................................................................302
Sealing Sawed Joints .....................................................................................302
Joint Filling......................................................................................................302
Sealing Equipment .........................................................................................303
Backer Rod ....................................................................................................303
Doweled Support Assemblies........................................................................303
Dowel Tolerances ..........................................................................................303
Dowel Assembly Placement..........................................................................303
Marking Joint Locations ..................................................................................304
Blanking Bands ..............................................................................................304
Longitudinal Joint Design ...............................................................................304
Curing of Keyed and Doweled Joints .............................................................304
602.5028 Prevention of Rain Damage to Plastic Concrete ................................304
602.5029 Repair of Deficient Pavement................................................................305
Recommended Repair Method......................................................................305
602.5030 Mud Ball Repair .......................................................................................307
602.5031 Cold Weather Paving and Plant Operations ........................................308
Cold Weather Pavement Protection ..............................................................308
Cold Weather Plant Operation.......................................................................308
602.60 PCC PAVEMENT METHOD OF MEASUREMENT...............................................309
602.601 Smoothness Tests (Profilograph) ...........................................................309
602.602 Requirements for Thickness ...................................................................309
602.603 Material Quantities....................................................................................309
602.604 Concrete Driveways ..................................................................................309
602.605 Records and Reports................................................................................310

2002
603.00 PCC PAVEMENT PATCHING.............................................................................................311
603.10 Full Depth PCC Patches........................................................................................311
603.20 SAW CUTS IN FULL DEPTH PCC PATCHES .......................................................311

2002
DIVISION 700
BRIDGES, CULVERTS & RELATED CONSTRUCTION
701.00 CHECKLISTS...........................................................................................................315
701.01 PILES AND PILE DRIVING CHECKLIST............................................................315
701.02 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST ...................................................322
701.03 CONCRETE BRIDGE FLOORS CHECKLIST ..................................................323
701.04 STEEL STRUCTURES CHECKLIST .................................................................325
701.05 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK REPAIR WITH SILICA FUME CONCRETE ......326
702.00 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES (SSHC Section 702) ....................................328
702.01 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................328
702.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................328
Unsuitable Material Excavation .............................................................................................328
702.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ...........................................................................328
Culvert Excavation ................................................................................................................328
General Structure Backfilling ................................................................................................329
Concrete Seal Course..........................................................................................................330
Foundations ..........................................................................................................................330
Common Survey Errors........................................................................................................331
Encountering Old Substructures ..........................................................................................331
Bridge Deck Removal...........................................................................................................331
703.00 PILING AND PILE DRIVING (SSHC Section 703) .................................................332
703.01 EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................................332
Diesel Hammers...................................................................................................................332
Bearing and Penetration .......................................................................................................332
Dynamic Pile Analyzer..........................................................................................................333
Pile Driving Constraints ........................................................................................................333
Splicing Pile...........................................................................................................................333
Steel Pile Cutoffs ..................................................................................................................333
Pile Groups/Categories.........................................................................................................333
Inspection of Piles Prior to and During Installation ...............................................................336
Precast Concrete Piles.........................................................................................................336
Steel Pipe Piles .....................................................................................................................337
Steel Sheet Piles...................................................................................................................338
Inspection of Driving Equipment ...........................................................................................338
Inspection of Driving Equipment During Installation .............................................................340
Single Acting Diesel Hammers.............................................................................................340
Field Driving Problem............................................................................................................343
704.00 BRIDGES (STEEL STRUCTURES) (SSHC Section 708)....................................347
704.01 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................347
Falsework (SSHC Subsection 704.03) ................................................................................347
Temporary Fastenings..........................................................................................................347
Submitting Plans ...................................................................................................................348
Bridges-Steel Beam..............................................................................................................348
Structural Joints ....................................................................................................................349
434y
2002
High Strength Fasteners.......................................................................................................352
Welding .................................................................................................................................360
Shear Connectors.................................................................................................................360
Trouble Shooting...................................................................................................................364
Weld Spatter .........................................................................................................................365
Undercut................................................................................................................................365
Rough Welding .....................................................................................................................365
Porosity and Surface Holes ..................................................................................................365
Poor Fusion...........................................................................................................................366
Shallow Penetration ..............................................................................................................366
Cracking................................................................................................................................366
How to Reduce Arc Blow ......................................................................................................367
The Effects of Fixturing on Arc Blow ....................................................................................368
704.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .........................................................................369
704.05 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..........................................................................................369
705.00 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................................371
705.01 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................371
Placement and Checking......................................................................................................371
Slab Thickness .....................................................................................................................371
Clearance of Slab Reinforcement ........................................................................................372
Protection of Material ............................................................................................................372
Placing and Fastening ..........................................................................................................372
Special Attention Areas .........................................................................................................373
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement ..............................................................................................374
Care and Handling ................................................................................................................374
Field Inspection .....................................................................................................................375
Repair of Damaged Coating .................................................................................................376
Bar Designation System .......................................................................................................379
Splicing..................................................................................................................................379
705.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ..........................................................................381
706.00 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION..............................................................................382
706.01 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................382
Composition of Concrete......................................................................................................382
Admixtures ............................................................................................................................382
Air Entraining Admixtures......................................................................................................383
Water Reducing Admixtures (Type A) (optional)..................................................................384
High Range Water Reducing Admixtures (Type F) (optional)..............................................384
Retarding Admixtures (required)...........................................................................................385
Accelerating Admixtures (optional) .......................................................................................385
Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures ........................................................................................386
Concrete Temperatures .......................................................................................................388
Prepour Meeting....................................................................................................................390
Concrete Plant Inspector’s Checklist ...................................................................................391
Falsework..............................................................................................................................394
Forms....................................................................................................................................404

2002
Removal of Forms and Falsework .......................................................................................404
Use of Insulated Forms for Protection..................................................................................405
Placing Concrete ..................................................................................................................405
Placement Considerations ...................................................................................................406
Placement Methods ..............................................................................................................408
Pump Placement ..................................................................................................................409
Consolidation of Concrete ....................................................................................................410
Reinforcement Bar Cover.....................................................................................................410
Use of Finishing Machine......................................................................................................411
Straightedging .......................................................................................................................411
Tining.....................................................................................................................................411
Curing....................................................................................................................................412
Ways to Avoid Deck Cracks .................................................................................................412
Seal Bridge Deck Cracks .....................................................................................................413
Cold Weather Placement .....................................................................................................413
Floor Drains ..........................................................................................................................413
Flowable Fill ..........................................................................................................................413
Installation of Joints ...............................................................................................................414
Curing Concrete....................................................................................................................416
Concreting in Cold Weather .................................................................................................416
Simultaneous Casting of Deck and Approach Slabs ...........................................................417
Surface Checking (Not in Spec) ...........................................................................................417
Test Procedure for Smoothness ..........................................................................................418
Smoothness of Bridge Decks...............................................................................................418
Approach Sections................................................................................................................419
Setting Beams ......................................................................................................................420
706.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT .........................................................................420
707.00 DECKS AND OVERLAYS .......................................................................................421
707.01 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................421
General..................................................................................................................................421
Bridge Deck Curing...............................................................................................................423
Bridge Deck Joints................................................................................................................423
Deck Overlay Preparation.....................................................................................................423
Class I Floor Repair ..............................................................................................................423
Work on Adjacent Lanes.......................................................................................................423
708.00 Bridge Diaphragms.......................................................................................................424
709.00 Girder Shims ..................................................................................................................425
Definition ...............................................................................................................................425
710.00 Pot Bearings..................................................................................................................428
711.00 Barrier Rails ............................................................................................................429
Fixed Form Jersey & Retrofit Rail.........................................................................................429
Cast-In-Place (Retrofit) Barrier Rail......................................................................................429
Slip Form Barrier Rail ...........................................................................................................430
711.02 Material Requirements (See Section 706........................................................430
711.03 Construction Methods .......................................................................................430
Concrete Surface Finish (Rail and Beams...........................................................................430
Surface Finish.......................................................................................................................430

2002
712.00 HAND RAILS ............................................................................................................432
712.01 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................432
Ornamental Handrail.............................................................................................................432
713.00 PAINTING.................................................................................................................433
713.01 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................433
Painting .................................................................................................................................433
713.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................433
Mixing Paint ...........................................................................................................................433
713.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS .........................................................................434a
Painting Structural Steel .....................................................................................................434a
CULVERTS ...............................................................................................................................434b
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................434b
715.00 CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS ............................................................................434c
715.01 DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................434c
715.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................................434c
CONSTRUCTION METHODS .........................................................................................434c
General................................................................................................................................434c
Placing Concrete and Form Removal ................................................................................434c
Placing Concrete ................................................................................................................434c
Sheet Pile Turndown...........................................................................................................434d
Removal of Wall Forms......................................................................................................434g
Flume Reinforcement .........................................................................................................434g
Backfilling Culverts – Typical Grading ................................................................................434g
Joints ...................................................................................................................................434h
716.00 CULVERT PIPE ......................................................................................................434j
716.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................434j
716.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ..........................................................................434j
Culvert List...........................................................................................................................434j
Pipe Bedding........................................................................................................................434j
Temporary Culvert Pipe.......................................................................................................434j
Salvaged Culvert Pipe.........................................................................................................434k
CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS ................................................................................................434t
717.01 DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................434t
717.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS...........................................................................434t
Pipe Marking.........................................................................................................................434t
Ordering Material..................................................................................................................434t
717.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS .........................................................................434u
Excavation and Backfilling ..................................................................................................434u
Installation ...........................................................................................................................434v
718.00 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE CULVERTS........................................................434w
718.01 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................434w
718.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................434w
Pipe Marking.......................................................................................................................434w
Ordering Material................................................................................................................434w
718.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ........................................................................434w
Excavating and Backfilling .................................................................................................434w
Installation ..........................................................................................................................434w
2002
DIVISION 800
ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT AND EROSION CONTROL
800.00 GENERAL COMMENTS ...........................................................................................435

801.00 REMOVING AND RESETTING TREES ...................................................................438
801.01 REMOVING AND RESETTING TREES CHECKLIST ..........................................438
802.00 FURNISHING AND PLANTING OF PLANT MATERIALS..........................................439
802.01 FURNISHING AND PLANTING OF PLANT MATERIALS CHECKLIST.................439
803.00 SEEDING ..................................................................................................................442
803.01 SEEDING CHECKLIST.........................................................................................442
803.02 PERMANENT SEEDING DATES..........................................................................444
803.03 PREPARATION OF SEED BED ..........................................................................444
803.04 SEED ....................................................................................................................444
804.00 FERTILIZER..............................................................................................................445
804.01 FERTILIZER CHECKLIST (See Seeding Checklist) ............................................445
804.02 EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS .................................................................................445
804.03 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER ...........................................................................447
805.00 MULCH......................................................................................................................448
805.01 MULCHING CHECKLIST (See Seeding Checklist) ..............................................448
805.02 EXAMPLE CALCULATION....................................................................................448
805.03 WEEDS.................................................................................................................448
805.04 ACCEPTABLE MULCH.........................................................................................448
805.04 ACCEPTABLE MULCH.........................................................................................448
806.00 SODDING .................................................................................................................449
806.01 SODDING CHECKLIST ........................................................................................449
806.02 SOD PLACEMENT ...............................................................................................450
SHAPE SOD BED ................................................................................................................450
APPLY FERTILIZER .............................................................................................................450
PLACE SOD .........................................................................................................................450
FINISH SOD..........................................................................................................................450
WATER.................................................................................................................................450
TAMP.....................................................................................................................................450
807.00 EROSION CONTROL..............................................................................................451
807.01 EROSION CONTROL CHECKLIST.....................................................................451
807.02 FILTER FABRIC...................................................................................................452
808.00 EROSION CHECKS.................................................................................................452
808.01 EROSION CHECKS CHECKLIST........................................................................452
808.02 PLACEMENT ............................................................................................................452
Shape .......................................................................................................................................452
Check Slots...........................................................................................................................452
Finish.....................................................................................................................................452
Fertilize..................................................................................................................................452
Seed......................................................................................................................................452
Special Ditch Control Material...............................................................................................452
809.00 SILT FENCING..........................................................................................................454
809.01 SILT FENCING CHECKLIST.................................................................................454
809.02 SILT FENCE.........................................................................................................454
810.00 SLOPE PROTECTION.............................................................................................456
810.01 SLOPE PROTECTION CHECKLIST ...................................................................456
2002
811.00 SLOPE PROTECTION NETTING ............................................................................457
811.01 SLOPE PROTECTION NETTING CHECKLIST...................................................457
812.00 COVERCROP SEEDING.........................................................................................458
812.01 COVERCROP SEEDING CHECKLIST................................................................458
812.02 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (SOIL EROSION)..........................................458
812.03 TEMPORARY WATER POLLUTION, CONTROL (SOIL EROSION)..................459
812.04 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................459
813.00 PEAT MOSS .............................................................................................................461
813.01 PEAT MOSS CHECKLIST....................................................................................461

2002
DIVISION 900
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
901.00 FIELD LABORATORIES AND SCALE HOUSES.....................................................465
901.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................................465
901.02 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................465
901.03 BASIS OF PAYMENT............................................................................................465
902.00 GUARDRAIL CHECKLIST ........................................................................................466
903.00 W-BEAM/THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL....................................................................467
903.01 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................467
903.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................468
903.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS..............................................................................468
W-Beam and Thrie-Beam Guardrail Installation...................................................................469
Rail Alignment .......................................................................................................................469
Guardrail Posts .....................................................................................................................469
Rail Section Location ............................................................................................................469
Rail Height.............................................................................................................................469
Lapping of Guardrail..............................................................................................................470
Bridge Connections ..............................................................................................................470
End Anchorage .....................................................................................................................471
903.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................471
904.00 SUBDRAIN EARTHWORK.......................................................................................472
904.01 SUBDRAINS..........................................................................................................472
904.02 BACKSLOPE DRAINS..........................................................................................472
904.03 LONGITUDINAL DRAINS ......................................................................................472
Trench Excavation ................................................................................................................472
Outlets...................................................................................................................................472
Porous Backfill ......................................................................................................................472

2002
DIVISION 1000
MATERIAL DETAILS
1001.00 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................477

1001.01 MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS ...............................................................................477
1001.02 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION RECEIPT & INTEREST DATE DETERMINATION.477
1002.00 APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST ................................................................................478
1002.01 DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................478
1002.02 ACCESS COMMANDS ..........................................................................................478
1002.03 ADDITIONS/DELETIONS TO THE APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST....................479
1003.00 WHITE PIGMENTED CURING COMPOUND AND HOT-POUR JOINT SEALER....480
1003.01 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................480
1003.02 REPORTING MATERIAL USAGE .......................................................................480
1004.00 PCC REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................481
1004.01 CEMENT CERTIFICATIONS...............................................................................481
1004.02 CONCRETE STRENGTH..................................................................................481a
1004.03 CONCRETE CYLINDER POLICY.....................................................................481a
1005.00 MATERIAL & RESEARCH DIVISION’S FINAL REVIEW PROCEDURES..........481c

2002
DIVISION 1100
ENVIRONMENTAL
DIVISION 1100 - ENVIRONMENTAL .........................................................................................485
1100.10 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................485
1100.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS...................................................................486
1100.12 REGULATORY AUTHORITIES...........................................................................487
EPA.......................................................................................................................................487
OSHA ....................................................................................................................................487
Nebraska Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) ......................................................487
1100.13 ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS....................................................................................488
AHERA..................................................................................................................................488
CAAA.....................................................................................................................................488
CERCLA ...............................................................................................................................488
CWA......................................................................................................................................488
NPDES..................................................................................................................................488
OSHA ....................................................................................................................................488
RCRA....................................................................................................................................488
SARA.....................................................................................................................................489
SDWA...................................................................................................................................489
TSCA.....................................................................................................................................489
1100.14 WETLANDS...........................................................................................................489
Special Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................489
Army Corps 404 Permits ......................................................................................................493
Permit Determination and Acquisition ..................................................................................493
Note on Title Sheet of Plans .................................................................................................493
(DEC) Water Quality Certifications ......................................................................................494
Dept. of Water Resources Flood Plain Permits ...................................................................494
404 Determination Checklist.................................................................................................495
1100.15 WASTED GENERATED........................................................................................497
Solid Waste...........................................................................................................................497
Open Dumping......................................................................................................................497
Toxic and Hazardous Wastes ..............................................................................................497
Free Liquids ..........................................................................................................................497
1100.16 WATER WELLS ....................................................................................................497
1100.17 ARCHEOLOGICAL AND PALENTOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES ............................498
1100.20 UNDERGROUND TANKS...........................................................................................499
1100.21 REGISTRATION ...................................................................................................499
1100.22 REMOVAL OF USTs ............................................................................................500
Removal of Known Tanks.....................................................................................................500
Removal/Discovery of Unknown Tanks ("Orphan" Tanks) ..................................................505
1100.30 STORM WATER DISCHARGE................................................................................509
1100.31 NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI)..................................................................................509
1100.32 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION POLICIES.............................................................509
1100.33 QUESTIONS OFTEN ASKED .............................................................................510
1100.40 BRIDGE PAINTING..................................................................................................513
1100.41 METHODS OF PAINT REMOVAL .......................................................................514

2002
Open Abrasive Blast Cleaning..............................................................................................514
Closed Abrasive Blast - (Vacuum Blasting) .........................................................................515
Hand and Power Tool Cleaning ............................................................................................515
1100.42 CONTAINMENT....................................................................................................516
Design Considerations .........................................................................................................516
Rules-of-Thumb....................................................................................................................517
1100.43 PAINT WASTE DISPOSAL ...................................................................................517
Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure Testing ...............................................................517
Hazardous Waste Designation.............................................................................................518
Notice for Transfer of Nonhazardous Paint Waste ..............................................................518
1100.50 DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION WASTES..........................................................520
1100.51 ASBESTOS ...........................................................................................................520
Health Concerns.................................................................................................................520
Asbestos Removal..............................................................................................................520
1100.60 WELLS AND WATER POLLUTION..........................................................................522
1100.61 SURFACE WATER................................................................................................522
What Does This Mean? ........................................................................................................522
Who Do We Report To?.......................................................................................................522
Reportable Quantities ...........................................................................................................522
What is Meant by Contain and Clean-up? ............................................................................523
1100.62 WELLS...................................................................................................................523

2002
DIVISION 1200
SITEMANAGER
DIVISION 1200 -- SITEMANAGER.............................................................................................527
1200.01 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................527
1200.02 INFORMATIONAL GUIDANCE...............................................................................527
1200.03 SITEMANAGER SUPPORT LIST ..........................................................................528

2002
DIVISION 1300
PROJECT SURVEYS
DIVISION 1300 -- PROJECT SURVEYS ...................................................................................531

1300.01 GENERAL..............................................................................................................531
General. Horizontal and Vertical Control ..............................................................................531
Grade And Alignment Stakes ................................................................................................531
Staking...................................................................................................................................531
The Department’s ROW Line ...............................................................................................531
Consultant Survey Data ........................................................................................................531
Consultant Surveyors............................................................................................................531
Survey Accuracy ...................................................................................................................531
1300.02 CONSTRUCTION STAKES.................................................................................534
General - Construction Staking .............................................................................................534
Minimum Survey Requirements ............................................................................................535
Survey Stake Minimum Requirement Examples ..................................................................540
1300.03 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY BASIC REQUIREMENTS ....................................542
GeoPak Guidance .................................................................................................................542
Checking Bench Levels.........................................................................................................545
Reproducing And Referencing Centerline.............................................................................546
Checking Plan Grade And Calculating Grade Revisions ......................................................547
Staking Right-Of-Way Fence and Right-Of-Way Limit Listing .............................................548
Setting Slope Stakes .............................................................................................................548
Setting Finishing Stakes........................................................................................................550
Setting Trimming Or Paving Form Stakes ............................................................................550
Contractor’s Forms on Large Structures ..............................................................................551
Checking Culvert Lengths, Culvert Lists, Slope Stakes, Blue Top Stakes, Paving Hubs ....552
Culvert List – Box Culverts ....................................................................................................553
Staking Culverts And Structures ...........................................................................................555
Land Survey Monuments.......................................................................................................555
U.S. Survey Monuments........................................................................................................556
Preserving, Perpetuating.......................................................................................................557
Perpetuation Of Section Corner Markers..............................................................................559
Setting Witness Corners.......................................................................................................559
Installation Of Right-Of-Way Markers ...................................................................................562
Location Of Markers ..............................................................................................................562
Benchmarks ..........................................................................................................................562
Permanent Benchmarks Along Rural Highways...................................................................563
1300.04 TAKING PRECONSTRUCTION CROSS SECTIONS.......................................564
Preliminary Survey Requirements ........................................................................................564
Preliminary Survey with Data Collector/GeoPak...................................................................564
Preconstruction Cross Sections ...........................................................................................564
Cross Section Accuracy .......................................................................................................564
Preliminary Cross Sections Used to Compute Final Quantities...........................................565
Intersections ..........................................................................................................................565
Other Excavation Areas ........................................................................................................566
Cross Section Notes .............................................................................................................566
1300.05 FINAL CROSS SECTIONS AND FINAL QUANTITIES ......................................567
2002
General ..................................................................................................................................567
Final Cross Section Guidance ..............................................................................................567
Earthwork Calculations .........................................................................................................568
Surfacing Data.......................................................................................................................571
Shoulder Construction...........................................................................................................575
Preconstruction Cross Section Notes ..................................................................................575
Zero-Zero Sections ................................................................................................................575
Interpolated Cross Sections ..................................................................................................575
Width Of Preliminary And Preconstruction Cross Sections .................................................576
Example Of Note ...................................................................................................................576
Extension Made Without Note ...............................................................................................576
Preparation And Submittal of Records..................................................................................576
Plotting Cross Sections.........................................................................................................577
1300.06 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONSTRUCTION SURVEY .............................578
Construction Staking And Surveying As Contract Item.........................................................578
Additional Survey Work Payment..........................................................................................578
Contractor’s Responsibilities Include....................................................................................578
Department Responsibilities .................................................................................................579
Special Attention Items..........................................................................................................579
Documentation ......................................................................................................................579
Contract Administration.........................................................................................................579
1300.07 ENGINEERING EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES AND SERVICES ............................580
General ..................................................................................................................................580
Responsibility ........................................................................................................................580
Engineering, Surveying And Testing Equipment...................................................................580
Requisition And Transfer.......................................................................................................580
Precautions And Maintenance Of Survey Equipment...........................................................581
Total Stations (Maintenance).................................................................................................582
Electronic Digital Theodolite/Transit (Precautions)...............................................................582
Electronic Digital Theodolite/Transit (Maintenance)..............................................................583
Survey Levels (General Precautions) ...................................................................................583
Survey Levels (Maintenance) ................................................................................................584
Adjustment Of Instruments ...................................................................................................584
Transporting Equipment........................................................................................................585
Damaged Equipment ............................................................................................................585
Shipping.................................................................................................................................585
Care of Equipment ................................................................................................................586
Salvage Of Equipment ..........................................................................................................586
Supplies .................................................................................................................................586
Stakes....................................................................................................................................587
Local Purchase Of Services .................................................................................................587
Equipment Inventory..............................................................................................................587
Non-NDOR Equipment Calibration Policy.............................................................................587

2002
DIVISION 100
CONTRACT
ADMINISTRATION &
INSPECTION
PROCEDURES
Construction Organization
DIVISION 100
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION & INSPECTION PROCEDURES
101.00 -- CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION
101.01 PURPOSE OF MANUAL
• Establish uniform policies and procedures for contract administration and

inspection of construction projects, and provide interpretation and clarification of
specifications.
• Serve as a collecting point for new instructions and guidelines relating to

administration and inspection of construction projects.
• Describe the role of District Engineers, District Construction Engineers, Project

Managers, Construction Technicians, and others assigned to supervise and
inspect construction projects.
101.02 ENGINEER'S DUTIES AND AUTHORITY
I. Authority of the Director
A. General - The specifications are the Engineer's authority to decide

questions as to quality or acceptability of material furnished, work
performed, manner of performance, rate of progress of the work, and
interpretations of the plans and specifications.
The authority exercised by the Engineer as provided in

SSHC Subsection 104.02 and Subsection 105.01 includes the following:
1. Authority to enforce specific requirements and provisions of the

plans and specifications.
2. Authority to interpret the requirements and provisions of the plans

and specifications in cases of questionable or doubtful application.
3. Authority to authorize (approve) revisions or modifications in the

plans or specification requirements and/or to authorize or establish
new or additional plans or specification requirements.
4. Authority to suspend the work under certain conditions.
B. Delegation of Authority
General - The Director, exercising the responsibilities given him/her by the

statutes regarding the control, management, supervision, administration,
and direction of the Department of Roads, assigns and designates to
various engineering, management, and technical
1
personnel the responsibility for the performance of certain functions of the

highway construction operations.
The assignment and designation of responsibility for the performance,

supervision, or completion of any task by this Construction Manual also
includes the authority necessary to complete that task.
101.03 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

The Construction Division is the eventual authority for all your unresolved contract and
construction related questions. It provides:
• Direction and consultation to District Engineers, Construction Engineers, Project

Managers, Construction Technicians, and other central offices relating to
specifications, methods, techniques, and policies on highway construction,
inspection, and contract award and administration.
• Final decision capability for all disputes or questions regarding contract

administration.
The Construction Engineer is directly accountable to the Deputy Director for Engineering.
The organizational chart for the Construction Division is shown in Figure 101.1.
Responsibility for administering construction contracts on the roads, highways, and

interstate systems rests with the Construction Engineer. Responsibility for actual
construction work is delegated to the District Engineer and ultimately rests with the
Project Manager.
2
Construction Division
Construction Engineer
(Oie – 4532)
Office Manager
(4532)
Asst. Construction Asst. Construction Asst. Construction

Asst. Construction Engineer for Engineer for Engineer for External EEO & TRNS•PORT
Engineer for Grading, Bridges, Administration, Contracts Minority Business Coordinator
Pavements and Structures Specifications, and (Fredrickson – Coordinator (Daugherty – 4559)
(Henrichson – 4451) (Caples – 4452) Field Coordination 4528) (Kisicki – 3813)
(Bartos – 4455)
Final Plans Review Construction Manual Change Orders (4458) PS&E (4556) Contract Compliance Construction
Coordinator and Specifications Equipment Rental (4514) Web Site
(Brill – 4568) (4452) Rates Blue Book (4458) Estimating (4873) (4453 or 4454)
Finals Review DBE Certification
Spec. Provisions Pay Estimates (4428) Qualification & Letting (4844) TRNS•PORT Modules
Districts 1, 4, 8
(4568) (4456) Contractor Evaluations (4451) Support
(4458) External Training CES, PES, LAS,
Time Allowances Finals Review Advertisements (4451) (4844) CAS, BAMS/DSS,
Districts 3, 5 Flagger Certification
(4529) (4455) SiteManager,
(3838) Bid Packages (4525) Expedite
Finals Review Subcontract Approval
Spec. and Estimate (4453, 4454)
Districts 2, 6, 7 (4428)
Analysis (4568) Award and Execution
(3891) Notices to Proceed of Contracts (4851)
Scheduling (4568) Earthwork Comps (4428)
(3891) Fuel Costs (4429) Contracts and Bonds
Traffic Control (4851)
Plan Revisions (3830) Time Extension
Estimates (4568)
Labor Compliance Documents (4458)
(3830) Construction Data
Payrolls (3830) Retrievals (4429)
Figure 101.
3
2002
Chain of Command
101.04 CHAIN OF COMMAND
The normal chain of command for questions and business operations is as follows:
Inspectors
Project Manager
District
District Engineer
Other Other
Federal
NDR Nebraska
Agencies
Divisions Agencies
101.05 CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER
The Construction Engineer provides guidance to District Construction Offices to insure

compliance with Specifications and established policies and procedures in the timely
completion of NDR projects. The District Engineer, through the Project Manager, has
@ direct responsibility for construction projects. The Construction Engineer is the next level
of authority on approval of substantial change orders and the resolution of contract
disputes when District Engineer decisions are appealed.
Interpretation of Specifications
The Construction Division provides consultation and advice on construction problems

concerning the application and interpretation of Specifications and other contract
requirements. Providing this guidance on a statewide basis is intended to insure uniform
and fair contract administration.
4
2002
Chain of Command
101.06 DISTRICT ENGINEER (DE)
101.07 DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER - The District Engineer is responsible

to the Director for the proper administration and completion of each contract for
highway construction in his/her District.
The District Engineer has the responsibility and the authority to:
a. Manage the field staff that provides construction and materials inspection
on highway projects within each NDR District. This responsibility includes
oversight on contract administration issues, compliance of materials,
quality of work performed, and approval of most change orders.
b. Enforce specific requirements of the plans and specifications in the

completion of contracts for highway work. (Generally, he/she will actually
delegate this responsibility and authority to the Project Manager.)
c. Interpret or rule on disputes over requirements of the plans and

specifications and decide questions which may arise in all cases when
such interpretations and decisions will result in completion of the work in
accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications.
d. Prepare and recommend revisions and modifications in the requirements

or provisions in the plans or specifications, or prepare and recommend
additional requirements in cases where construction conditions appear to
warrant revisions or additional requirements. See SSHC
Subsection 104.02 for alterations which can be approved by the District
Engineer.
e. Delegate the direct responsibility for the engineering supervision and

inspection at the project level, generally through the District Construction
Engineer to Project Managers in the field.
DEs also provide field input into construction related problems for process
improvements. It is imperative that DEs maintain a close working relationship with all
central offices.
101.07 DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION ENGINEER (DCE)
The DCE is responsible for management of the field staff that provides construction and
materials inspection on highway projects within each NDR District. This responsibility
includes oversight on contract administration issues, compliance of materials, quality of
work performed, and approval of most change orders. DCEs also provide field input into
construction related problems for process improvements. It is imperative that DCEs
maintain a close working relationship with all central offices. The DCEs report to the DE.
The District Construction Engineer is responsible directly to the District Engineer for the
direct and close supervision of the construction work and the supervision of Project
Managers at the project level, as assigned to him/her by the District Engineer.
5
Chain of Command
The District Construction Engineer has the same authority as listed for the District
Engineer when carrying out and discharging the responsibilities assigned to him/her by
the District Engineer.
101.08 PROJECT MANAGER (PM)
The Project Manager, working directly under the supervision of the District Construction
Engineer (DCE), is responsible through the DCE to the District Engineer for the
construction of the project in accordance with the requirements of the plans and
specifications. The Project Manager is responsible for and has the authority to assign or
delegate the supervision, staking, or inspection of construction work phases or
operations to engineers or construction technicians working under his/her direction.
The Project Manager is the key person in the field organization. The Project Manager's
diligence, knowledge, and integrity are important in carrying out the work of planners and
designers. The assignment demands judgment, courage, ingenuity, foresight, and tact.
Its reward includes priceless experience in the arts of supervision, organization,
engineering, and public relations. It also furnishes pride and satisfaction in a job well
done.
In assuming the responsibility for proper fulfillment of assigned construction work, the
Project Manager is also accountable for:
• Maintaining good relations with contractors, affected property owners, and the
general public.
• Assigning personnel to inspection and survey operations on the project, along

with providing the supervision and instructions necessary to assure proper
performance of assigned duties.
• Keeping the District and Headquarters Office informed as to construction

progress, status, etc.
• Maintaining a complete record and proper documentation of all quantities and

transactions relative to the project.
• Assuring proper use of equipment and materials used in the performance of

assigned duties.
While Project Managers have responsibility for general supervision of the work, their main
concerns are compliance with specifications and project completion. It is not their
responsibility to direct the everyday activities of the contractor, and they should not do
so.
The Project Manager is authorized to assign or delegate the inspection and record
keeping required for the project. The Project Manager must monitor the delegated tasks
to insure they are being properly performed.
6
Chain of Command
In cases of questionable application of plan or specification requirements, the Project

Manager may decide such questions or make interpretation of specification requirements
if the decision or interpretation will clearly result in the completion of the work in
accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications.
If the intent of the plans or specifications is not clear or a dispute over interpretation of
plan or specification requirements develops, or if the provisions are clearly unworkable or
impractical, the Project Manager shall submit the question or problem to the District
Construction Engineer or District Engineer for determination.
If an immediate decision must be made, or question resolved, and the District Engineer
or the District Construction Engineer is not available, the Project Manager is authorized to
contact and consult the Construction Engineer or the appropriate Assistant Construction
Engineer who will, if required, contact the appropriate division engineer concerned
(Design, Bridge, Materials and Research, or Right of Way) for a determination.
Exceptions to the foregoing are questions considered routine in nature concerning
materials, in which case the Materials and Research Division may be contacted directly.
Delegation of Responsibility
The Project Manager cannot and should not expect to retain all the duties and
responsibilities assigned. In an efficient organization, each employee should be
delegated authority in line with their responsibilities and duties. The Project Manager
must check to see that duties delegated to the Construction Technicians are properly
performed.
Responsibility for inspection and surveying on a project should be delegated to one or
more experienced employees. This includes the responsibility for documentation of
quantities and administrative work necessary for preparation of the final estimate.
Inspectors must have authority to direct and coordinate activities of inspection or survey
personnel assigned to them.
All employees should be encouraged to accept delegated responsibility and to make
decisions within the authority delegated to them.
101.09 CONSTRUCTION TECHNICIAN (CT)
Construction Technician must review and understand the Plans, Special Provisions,
Specifications, utility agreements, railroad agreements, and municipal/county
agreements. A CT will be assigned to monitor or inspect specific construction
operations by the Project Manager. The CT will be responsible for and directly
accountable to the Project Manager for the proper performance of the task assigned.
The CT has the authority to inspect all work performed and materials furnished and to
enforce all specific requirements of the plans and specifications involved in the
operations to which he/she is assigned.
In cases of questionable application of plan or specification requirements to the work in
progress, and if an immediate decision is needed, the CT should, if the CT judges the
intent of the requirement to clearly warrant a reasonable interpretation, make such an
7
Chain of Command
interpretation. The CT should, when time permits, initially take such matters to the
Project Manager for interpretation. If an immediate decision is necessary and is made by
the inspector, the CT should have the Project Manager review and confirm the decision
or interpretation at the earliest opportunity.
If the intent of the plans or specifications is not clear, or if the provisions are unworkable,
the CT shall consult the Project Manager.
8
Chain of Command
102.00 -- GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES
102.01 PROMPT EXERCISE OF AUTHORITY
The three most common complaints of contractors are:
1. Often it is not clear to the contractor which of our personnel is responsible for the
inspection of various operations.
2. CTs do not exercise their authority to make decisions.
3. CTs do not promptly advise as to acceptability of the materials or work. This

results in delay to the contractor's operation while awaiting decisions on such
matters.
Clearly, the contractor is entitled to prompt decisions and prompt notice as to

acceptability or failure of the work or materials to conform to specified requirements.
All CTs should understand their duties, responsibility for the performance of the
assignment, the authority of the assignment, and the authority to carry out the
responsibility.
Making decisions is exercising authority. Decisions as to the acceptability or failure of

work or materials should be made promptly and as near to the actual site of the work as
possible. Accordingly, the large proportion of decisions and the largest exercise of
authority will be made by the inspector and the Project Manager at the site of the work.
These engineering personnel are on the site of the work in actual contact with the work
operation and with the contractor. If the work is not being performed or produced to meet
the specified requirements, they have the responsibility and the authority to advise the
contractor (or material producer), reject the material, suspend the improper operation, or
take remedial or corrective measures.
It is obvious that the decision of the Project Managers and the CTs are of primary and the
greatest importance in the completion of quality construction work. Failure or delay in the
exercise of assigned and delegated responsibility and authority can result in inferior or
unacceptable work or materials.
102.02 APPEALED DECISIONS
Authority exercised will sometimes be questioned by an appeal of the decision or

interpretation which was made. This procedure can be expected in the case of:
1. Decisions made or instructions given which are contrary to or inconsistent with

the plans or specifications.
Obviously, decisions should not be made or instructions should not be given

which are contrary to design requirements, the plans, or the Specifications.
However, through lack of knowledge, inadvertence, or complication of application
of the proper requirements, such decisions or instructions are sometimes made.
9
Chain of Command
In such cases, the decision or instruction should be rectified, whether by appeal

or otherwise, and without prejudice.
2. Decisions made in cases of conflicting plan or specification requirements or

interpretation made in the case of questionable application of plan or specification
requirements.
It will be realized that in cases of conflicting requirements or questionable

application of plan or specification requirements, the decision or interpretation
must be made on the basis of engineering analysis and judgment, precedent, or
policies previously established. In most cases, the engineer at the site of work
will be able to make a decision which will be supported by these factors.
However, in a few cases he/she may make a decision based on a limited
knowledge of the factors involved. Appeal of the decision may show that
additional factors or elements which were not known to the Project Manager may
make it necessary to overrule the original decision. This situation can be
compared to appeals of court decisions to higher courts where additional study
and comparison of preceding cases will sometimes result in reversed decisions.
Accordingly, an engineer making decisions or giving instructions in the case of
plan or specification requirements of questionable intent or application may
occasionally have such decisions or instructions appealed, overruled, or
reversed. The engineer should understand, however, that when such decisions
are necessary, they are made without prejudice to himself/herself or to the other
parties involved.
102.03 INTEGRITY OF EMPLOYEES
Complete integrity on the part of all government employees is essential. Integrity is

defined as "moral soundness; honesty; uprightness".
The wide national publicity given to the few inefficient or dishonest employees discovered
in the selected investigations, audits, and inspections make it necessary to officially
recognize and emphasize that complete integrity is an essential and required
qualification. It is also considered necessary to direct the attention of all our engineering
employees to the "conflict of interest" statutes, listing specific items which may be
prohibited by such statutes or which are incompatible with complete integrity.
Examples of serious conflict of interest acts which are forbidden:
1. Solicitation or acceptance of a cash loan or a gift of value from any

contractor, contractor's representative, or contractor's material supplier
doing business with the Department.
2. Performing engineering work or services for, or receiving compensation

for such work or services from, any contractor, contractor's
representative, or contractor's material supplier doing business with the
department.
3. The Project Manager and all inspectors shall report to the District
Engineer any salvage materials that will be required to be removed from
10
Chain of Command
the limits of the project but are not indicated on the plans. This may
include, but not be limited to, such items as: trees, fence, fence posts,
structures, crops, or any other item that may or may not appear to have
value. These materials are the property of the state and cannot be
removed and disposed of for personal gain.
The "conflict of interest" portion of the "Regulations for the Administration of Federal Aid
for Highways, effective May 11, 1960" reads in part as follows:
"No engineer, inspector, or other person performing services for a state or a

governmental instrumentality in connection with a project shall have, directly or
indirectly, a financial or other personal interest, other than his/her employment or
retention by a state or other governmental instrumentality, in any contract or
subcontract in connection with such project."
All contracts for construction on Federal-Aid highway projects include a statement in the
contract Special Provisions called:
“FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY PROJECTS”
This provision says the contractor, Project Manager, inspectors, and all others can be
fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both, for making
false statements.
The Project Manager and inspector should realize that as an employee of the public,
his/her conduct must be exemplary and merit the full confidence and appreciation of the
public. Accordingly, he/she should avoid conduct or acts which may seem harmless, but
which could be misinterpreted or appear questionable. Examples of conduct that could
possibly be classified as incompatible with complete integrity are:
1. Excessive fraternization between the Project Manager (PM) or

Construction Technicians (Inspectors) and the contractor or his/her
supervisory personnel;
2. Excessive fraternization between the PM or CT and the contractor's

material supplier or material promoter.
It is essential that all PMs and CTs be familiar with these requirements and comply with
the specific requirements of the regulations and statutes and conduct themselves with
complete integrity.
Removing Materials from Projects
NDR personnel are not allowed to remove any construction related materials from a
project during or after work hours for any reason other than official sampling and testing.
Such actions could be misconstrued by the public as accepting favors from a contractor
or private use of public property.
Construction materials are defined as, but not limited to, pile cut-offs, old plywood, broken
tools, piles of aggregate, erosion control materials and plantings, concrete test
11
Chain of Command
beams, samples of aggregates or other materials, and the products of project site
clearance.
Complete cleanup of the construction area or plant site, including test materials, is the
responsibility of the contractor.
102.04 PRESENCE ON SITE
As the Department's representative on the project, it is essential that the Project Manager
be available at all times to the contractor, his/her subordinates, and the supervisor. The
PM should never be absent from the job without his/her whereabouts being known to
someone, so that he/she may be contacted if necessary. The Project Manager's
absence from the project will certainly compromise his/her efficiency and can be most
embarrassing to his/her superiors.
102.05 PLANS AND WORKING DRAWINGS (SSHC 105.02)
"All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given in the
approved plans shall be in writing". Such alterations will generally be authorized by
revised plans, and the Project Manager should only authorize alterations on that basis.
102.06 PLAN ERRORS/OMISSIONS
The Project Manager, upon discovering or suspecting an error or omission in the plans,
will immediately send an e-mail note to the District Construction Engineer and the
Construction Division in Lincoln. The note should provide all available information. This
would include:
• A description of the problem and reasons for concluding a plan error or
omission.
• The sheet number(s) where the error is located.
• What alternatives are available.
The Construction Division will contact the Section Head responsible for the work where
the error or omission is suspected and determine if a problem exists.
• For consultant designed plans, the Section Head must notify the consultant
and Project Development’s Agreement Engineer if a problem with the plans
exist.
• The consultant must be included immediately in the discussion and resolution
of the problem. They may have a workable and less costly solution.
The final solution to the error or omission will be an agreed joint decision by the
Construction Division, the District, and the responsible Section Head, and the consultant
(when applicable).
For consultant designed plans, the District must send the Agreements Engineer a signed
copy of the “Contractor Change Order/Supplemental Agreement.”
12
2002
Engineer Relations
102.07 ENGINEER RELATIONS
102.08 PUBLIC RELATIONSHIPS
General Project Supervision
The PM should have the correct crew for each job.
Meeting the public with courtesy is always possible and will usually encourage a
willingness to cooperate. The general public will exhibit a natural interest in work
performed by or under the supervision of the Department of Roads, and employees
should carefully refrain from making any unauthorized interpretation of policy or careless
comment concerning the organization and its policies.
Project Managers and inspectors are among the most important individuals in
development of good public relations. Located throughout the state, they can contribute
toward a better understanding of the highway program and construction operations by
volunteering to appear before local civic organizations. Acquainting the public with
interesting details of highway construction is a proactive approach and usually avoids or
diffuses criticism.
Residents Along Construction Projects
Project Managers and their staffs and the contractor’s representative should contact
residents and businesses along the roads that will be under construction. Before work is
started, an effort should be made to advise these people of upcoming construction and
discuss the probable effect on their operations. This gives them an opportunity to
arrange their operations to fit the construction schedule. Both the Project Managers and
the contractors have a large interest in promoting local goodwill. Construction schedules
can always be arranged so that the least inconvenience will result to local residents and
businesses.
Highway construction operations can cause a major change in daily traffic patterns of
residents and business people. Most have no conception of road construction problems
but accept some inconvenience for the welcomed improvement.
Occasionally, Project Managers may encounter individuals that are critical of the
construction inconvenience. Their viewpoint must be understood to deal patiently with
their demands and criticisms. Give these individuals a chance to state the problem.
Sincere and courteous consideration could avoid development of ill feeling and anger.
Services Relationships
Many services such as mail delivery, school buses, fire protection, etc., may require
special attention. People in charge of these services should be advised of upcoming
construction and, where possible, arrangements made to provide a detour or access
across or through the project for services that must be continued during construction.
13
Engineer Relations
News Media Relationships
Consult the Communication Division’s Media Guide before making any public
comments.
Good relations with news media can help develop and maintain good public relations.
When time permits, always contact the Communication Division before going on the
record. While reporters may have very little knowledge of road construction, they are well
known by local residents and could have a big influence on attitudes of people living along
or otherwise affected by the construction project. News media contacts should be
professional and positive to maintain a good public image for the Department.
RULE #1: Never criticize another NDR division or employee in public (i.e., Don't say the
design was bad.)
The Project Manager represents a public agency spending public money and is not
entitled to withhold information from the public press. The Freedom of Information Act of
1983 opens most of our files to public scrutiny. Sensitive material should be cleared with
the NDR Assistant Attorney General prior to release to the public or outside attorneys.
Information should always be presented in as favorable and factual form as possible.

Project Managers should confine remarks to those areas over which they have personal
control. Any questions directed toward NDR policies or public criticism of their superiors
should be politely turned aside.
Relations with Cities and Counties
Cost overruns on projects where other governmental entities (cities or counties) bear a
portion of the cost, particularly County Federal-Aid Secondary projects, can cause an
unexpected financial burden for that governmental entity. On past occasions these
situations have provoked feelings of ill will against the Department of Roads when the
governmental entity was billed for the unexpected overrun of costs for which they had not
budgeted.
Accordingly, the Project Manager should maintain a watchful eye for this particular
situation and, if it becomes apparent that a significant overrun in engineering or
construction costs will occur, notify the governmental entity in writing of the approximate
amount of overrun.
When consultant engineering is used, the State’s representative needs to insure that the
Federal/State aid is being properly spent. Any doubts or problems should be discussed
with the consultant/county’s Project Manager. If it cannot be resolved at this level, a letter
detailing the problem must be sent to the chairman of the county board or village/city
council.
14
Contractor (Partnering) Relationships
102.09 CONTRACTOR (PARTNERING) RELATIONSHIPS (SSHC Section 113)
Under the contract system used in highway construction, contractors aim to perform the
work contracted and NDR Engineers see that the work performed is done according to
project plans and Specifications. Since these aims are essentially the same, Engineer-
contractor relations should be conducted in a spirit of mutual cooperation within the
framework of the Specifications and with the best interest of both contracting parties.
Establishing a cooperative and collaborative working relationship with contractors may
result in improved quality and fewer unresolved contract issues. This is the goal of
"Partnering."
Contractors should do no less than required by contract, nor should they expect
compensation for work done that was not required.
Good contractor relations can be promoted by keeping an open line of communication

and advising contractors when they are doing unacceptable work before such work is
completed.
• Good Project Managers know how the contractor should construct the project.
They go out of their way to make sure the contractor starts each phase of
construction using proper methods and the correct materials.
• It is 1,000 times easier to correct a subgrade problem with the grading crew than
with the paving crew.
The most common construction problem is the contractor being notified after the fact that
the work was not done according to the Specifications.
In general, relations with the contractor should be fair, firm, courteous, and based on
sound judgment under the guidance of specification requirements.
102.10 FHWA & OTHER OUTSIDE AGENCIES RELATIONSHIPS
FHWA has oversight authority only. FHWA representatives have the right to examine any
phase of work, including methods of testings, project records, material reports, etc., to
review performance of State inspection personnel assigned to the project, and to check
work for compliance with plans and specifications. Their responsibility or authority does
not extend to supervising or directing Project Managers or contractor forces.
Reports covering their inspections are forwarded to the Construction Division and then
are made available to the District Engineer and Project Manager.
Relations with FHWA personnel should be conducted in a spirit of cooperation and

courtesy, extending any assistance or facilities available. The FHWA Engineer should be
informed of anticipated plan changes or extra work when the value exceeds $50,000.00,
@ on full oversight projects (usually Interstate System with a contract value of $1,000,000 or
greater).
15
2002
Inquiries from other state or government agencies should be given prompt and courteous
consideration.
102.11 EMPLOYMENT OF CONSULTANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING

AND INSPECTION
From time to time, and with increasing frequency, various governing bodies hire
consultant services. Governing bodies could be cities, counties, or the State.
Agreement Responsibilities
Responsibilities of a consultant may be limited to providing professional advice to the

governing body on the best means of satisfactorily accomplishing the work or may
include specific project level engineering and/or inspection responsibilities. These
guidelines will address engineering and/or inspection responsibilities. The consultant's
contract should define respective authorities and responsibilities of the full-time publicly
employed project administrator in charge of the project and consultant's staff.
Under federal-aid regulations, however, prime responsibility for general supervision of

construction remains with the governing body. The state (county or city under agreement
with state) cannot be relieved of its responsibility to insure that work is performed in
accordance with project plans and specifications, even when we hire a consultant to do
the inspection or design.
Project Manager
When a consultant has been engaged to provide engineering and inspection services, a
Project Manager designated by the Department should also maintain working knowledge
of the project.
The designated Project Manager is responsible for being thoroughly knowledgeable of

day-to-day operations of both contractors and consultants providing the construction
inspection/engineering services. Knowledge of day-to-day operations is construed to
mean:
• Knowledge of current project status.
• Involvement in decisions relative to conditions which require change orders or

supplemental agreements.
• Involvement in authorization of progress payments even though the consultant

may furnish measurements or computation of quantities.
• Making periodic inspections, visits, or on-site reviews of the project; frequency

dependent upon the magnitude and complexity of the project.
• The PM must verify that the consultant understands what records are required,
how to record the data, and who can sign/verify each document. This is also true
when a city or county does the project engineering.
16
2002
• In regard to projects utilizing consultant inspection services, some

misunderstandings have arisen when our acceptance date preceded a date when
the county board “accepted” the project.
• Consultants utilized for engineering and inspection services must be given written
notice regarding project completion dates. The consultant agreements usually
specify the time allowed for the preparation and submittal of As -Built Plans and
other final records, and the consultants need to be told when the clock has
started. The consultant agreements state “The State will provide written
notification of construction acceptance to the Consultant.” At least one consultant
has reported they do not receive the required notice.
• Feel free to be somewhat flexible in “starting the clock,” but do put it in writing –
and send a copy of the letter to Lee Pavel in Project Development so that
he may begin his end-of-project paperwork, too. The consultant services
agreements and payments are audited by the Department, and it is important to
have the notification documented.
16a
16b
Personnel
102.12 PERSONNEL
102.13 EMPLOYEE POLICIES
Some of the personnel references that employees should read and follow include:
• Classified System Personnel Rules & Regulations
• Nebraska Association of Public Employees Labor Contract
• Employee Safety Manual
• Nebraska Department of Roads' Operating Instructions
• Davis-Bacon Act
102.14 STAFF REQUIREMENTS
A definite need exists to develop and maintain procedures to properly manage

engineering staff requirements necessary for highway construction projects. Proper
planning and staffing procedures provide the means to estimate staffing needs based on
anticipated workloads.
Field Estimates
District Construction Engineers provide an estimate of staffing needs to the Deputy

@ Director for each construction season. Each Project Manager analyzes their particular
workload according to the production schedule, and District Construction Engineers
collect and combine the data to determine minimum staffing for the upcoming
construction season. These figures provide a guide for temporary employee hires
(usually submitted in January or February each year).
Adjustments
@ As necessary throughout the year, the District Construction Engineers review their
personnel requirements with the Deputy Director.
Field Personnel Duties & Staff Requirements
The District Engineer and District Construction Engineer are responsible for providing the
Project Manager with a sufficient number of engineers and construction technicians to
adequately and properly supervise and inspect the construction operations. The
personnel furnished will have such education and experience, which, together with
instruction, training, or direction by the Project Manager, will qualify them for the proper
performance of the inspection or other duties assigned to them. It is the responsibility of
the Project Manager to assign and utilize such personnel effectively and economically to
obtain completed work of good quality and meeting the requirements of the plans and
specifications.
17
2002
Subcontracts
102.15 SUBCONTRACTS
Subcontract Request And Approval
All subcontracts are subject to the requirements of SSHC Subsection 108.01, and FHWA
1273 (when included in the contract documents), and approval of contracting authority
before they are recognized as valid. Subcontracts are required for independent trucking
companies when hauling is covered by the provisions of Davis-Bacon wages
(Construction Manual 102.26). Field forces shall not allow work to proceed without prior
approval of the District Construction Engineer or District Engineer. Contractors are
expected to make their application for subcontractor approval sufficiently in advance to
allow time for processing and approval. On rare occasions, this may not be possible.
Under these circumstances, a Project Manager may provide verbal approval provided the
contractor has submitted a written application for approval of the subcontract. If the
contract has a DBE goal on it, you shouldn’t assume the DBE subcontract has been
approved just because their name appears in the subcontract area. One way to tell is to
@ open up the subcontract record. If no approval date has been entered, the subcontract
has not been approved.
A. Contractor's Requirements
The prime contractor must initiate a letter requesting to sublet items in the
contract. This letter must be sent to the Construction Engineer and shall include
the following information:
1. Subcontractor's name, mailing address, and telephone number.
2. Prime contractor's identification number (used on employer's quarterly
federal tax return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941).
3. A check off indicating whether or not the subcontractor is registered with
the Division of Labor.
4. Estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontractor's work.
5. Items to be subcontracted with descriptions, quantities, unit prices, and
amounts of non-specialty and/or specialty items. Unit prices shown must
be the contract unit prices except when "labor only" or "place only" items
are subcontracted. In such cases, indicate that the "item unit price" is
approximate.
When a subcontracted item is used to satisfy a DBE goal, the amount

paid to a DBE must be shown and verified with signatures of the prime
contractor and the subcontractor. These signatures will document the
agreement for payment between a prime contractor and their
subcontractor and eliminate the need for a copy of a DBE
subcontract/agreement. Note the additional guidelines on the
administration of DBE subcontracts that follow.
6. It has been common practice for subcontractors to include appropriate

mobilization costs in their unit bid prices. Prime contractors may have
encouraged this practice. However, adjustments in unit prices due to
overruns or underruns will have to meet the test of "significant change".
18
2002
Subcontracts
To reduce the risk resulting from changes in quantities which are not
subject to price renegotiation, appropriate use of the mobilization item for
subcontractors is encouraged. On all subcontract requests, mobilization
must be listed for the item even if the dollar amount listed/subcontracted is
zero.
7. The Subcontract Request and Approval letter shall include the following
statement: "It is clearly understood by both the prime contractor and
the subcontractor that all terms of the prime contract shall apply."
When "Required Contract Provisions" (Form FHWA-1273) are part of the
contract documents, the prime contractor is responsible to see that a
copy of this form is physically attached to the subcontractor's copy of all
subcontracts. The prime contractor is responsible for fulfilling terms of
the contract, including construction work completed by approved
subcontractors, plus completing all required forms or reports. Refer to
SSHC Subsection 108.01 for requirements and limitations on contract
subletting.
B. Project Manager Involvement
If a Subcontract Request is received by the Project Manager, it should be

forwarded immediately to the Construction Division.
The Project Manager is responsible to make sure a subcontractor performs the

kinds of work described in the approved subcontract.
Occasionally, contractors may have to rent additional equipment and hire extra
employees to complete their work. However, when the entire crew and
equipment of another contractor is used to complete the work, the prime
contractor is violating the intent of SSHC Subsection 108.01 and is considered
brokering a project. If the District Engineer or the Project Manager observe work
performed by anyone other than the approved subcontractors, the Construction
Division should be notified. Assistance will be provided to investigate the
circumstances.
At the preconstruction conference, it will be beneficial to discuss methods of

keeping subcontractors informed of the work status. Although the prime
contractor is responsible to make progress payments to a subcontractor,
numerous incidents in the past have indicated a lack of timely progress payments
from the prime contractor to the subcontractor. Subcontractors may review a
copy of the "Contract Construction Progress Estimate" in the District office.
C. Field Approval of Subcontract Work
The District Engineers can approve a subcontract request for work up to a

@
maximum amount of $50,000 for each occasion. This is done on DR Form 42,
"Field Approval of Subcontract Work."
19
2002
Subcontracts
There are some specific items that need to be kept in mind at all times when
considering a request of the prime contractor to have certain work performed by
subcontract. These are as follows:
1. The contractor being considered to do the subcontract work must have

been approved by the Department to perform as a subcontractor. A
contractor is considered approved if he/she is prequalified to bid work; or
is presently a prime contractor on a current project; or is an approved
subcontractor on a current project; or has performed subcontract work in
the past under the same company name. This information is available on
CICS-3.
2. The subcontractor being considered must have current insurance. This

information is available on CICS-3.
3. The aggregate total of all work to be subcontracted cannot exceed

70 percent of the contract amount.
If you are not able to determine the status of any of the above or have a question
concerning the completion of the form, please contact Steve Bartos or Sharron
Magnuson (402-479-4455) in the Construction Division.
D. Exemptions from Subcontract Requirements
The following items of work may be exempted from the normal subcontracting
requirements: (It should be noted, however, that these exemptions do not prohibit
the contractor from executing a subcontract if he/she chooses to do so.)
Materials
1. Small amounts of asphaltic concrete. When small amounts of material

are needed to complete the work, such as for wedges at bridge ends,
tying into existing surfaces, etc., the contractor will be permitted to obtain
asphaltic material (and placement) from another contractor's portable (or
commercial) plant without the need for a subcontract.
2. Tack or prime oil. When small quantities and/or irregular areas are
involved, the contractor may obtain this material from another contractor
without the need for a subcontract. This exemption in no way relieves the
contractor from furnishing material which meets the requirements of the
specifications.
Equipment
1. Tree spading
2. Concrete pumping
3. Bump grinding. Equipment used for corrective grinding on asphaltic or

portland cement concrete pavement may be hired without the need for a
20
2002
Subcontracts
subcontract. A subcontract is still required for any anticipated milling or

grinding on a project.
4. Fertilizer spreading
5. Unanticipated horizontal boring
6. Sawing loop detectors
7. Profilograph. In emergency situations only, the contractor may employ

another contractor or company without the need for a subcontract. In
those cases where a contractor elects not to perform the surface testing
himself/herself on a regular basis, a subcontract will be required.
Services
1. Plumbing. A subcontract will not be required for miscellaneous plumbing

services (e.g., hook-ups, tap-ins.)
2. Sprinkler system work. A subcontract will not be required for those

situations where minor repairs or adjustments to existing sprinkler
systems are required. A subcontract is still required for the installation of
new equipment.
3. Dewatering and Well Drilling. No subcontract will be required for this

work. Pre-watering, however, is still subject to the normal subcontracting
requirements. (Permit requirements still apply.)
4. Engineering and Testing. Work performed by an outside engineering firm,

such as for the relocation of section corners or conducting a mixer
performance test, will not require the need for a subcontract.
Other miscellaneous items of work may also be considered for exemption from
the normal subcontracting requirements. Please contact the Construction
Division if you have an item of work which you think may be eligible.
Regardless of whether or not work is exempted from the normal subcontracting

procedures, contractors should be reminded that they are still responsible to see
that all insurance and safety requirements are being met.
The work of producing and hauling materials by any party other than the contractor may,
or may not, be considered as subcontracting, depending upon the classification and
ownership of the materials and/or trucks used in hauling the materials. The work of
hauling and/or producing materials under any of the conditions specified below shall not
be considered as subcontracting.
1. The production of materials from recognized commercial pits or plants.
2. The hauling of materials from recognized commercial pits or plants in
trucks owned or operated by the owner of the pit or plant.
21
Subcontracts
3. Any hauling of materials by a recognized commercial hauling company.
4. Any bona fide lease agreement between the contractor and the truck
owner.
A recognized commercial pit or plant shall be considered to include any pit or plant which
was producing or processing materials for sale prior to the date of the award of the
contract.
The term "recognized commercial hauling company" shall include any common or
contract carrier who has obtained an "RC" permit to operate as such.
To determine if a barricade or signing service company is doing work requiring

subcontracting approval, the following guidelines will be used.
If the barricade or signing service company only provides and delivers the materials to
the project site, he/she is considered to be a material supplier and a subcontracting
approval is therefore not required. This has been interpreted to also include the work of
replacement of batteries, lights, etc., on a routine basis. If, however, in addition to the
above, the barricade or sign service company also performs any work of installation,
maintenance, or removal and salvaging of signs, posts, fasteners, etc., on the project
site, subcontracting approval is required.
In the event a prime contractor elects not to subcontract but to "carry the workers on the
payroll", the question will arise that an unauthorized subcontract may actually exist. The
Project manager should then perform the following checks:
1. Check the prime contractor's payrolls to determine if the workers in

question and their supervisor(s) are included on his/her payroll, except for
those men working for and listed on an authorized subcontractor's payroll.
2. Request to see, on a random basis and prior to distribution, the payroll

checks of the workers in question who should be included on the prime
contractor's payroll to determine if the checks are drawn against the prime
contractor's account. (This could be done by a direct request to the prime
contractor or by requesting Department of Roads' auditors to check on
this.)
3. Request a copy of the lease agreement on equipment to ascertain that

compensation is on a time period basis rather than the amount of work
accomplished.
4. Check material supplier invoices or billings to ensure that the prime

contractor is or will make payment for the materials used in the work in
question.
If all the above conditions are satisfied, it can be assumed that an unauthorized
subcontract does not exist. However, if any or all of the above conditions are not
22
Subcontracts
satisfied, the matter should be immediately brought to the attention of the District
Construction Engineer for further handling, and the prime contractor should be
immediately notified of the unsatisfied condition or conditions.
The conditions referenced above can only be met concurrently or after work on the
project has started. A condition may arise where work has been performed prior to
approval of a subcontract, thereby making such work ineligible for payment. It is,
therefore, vital that in addition to a discussion of subcontracting requirements at the
preconstruction conference, the contractor be informed that the above mentioned checks
will be made in the event that he/she elects to place the workers on the payroll rather
than subcontract.
23
Miscellaneous
102.16 DETOUR REPORT
During the construction season, detour and shoofly maps are prepared every month to
show roads closed for construction or under construction but open to traffic with
restrictions. You should forward information for these maps to the Communication
Division via Lotus notes by the 20th of each month.
The District Engineer or his/her representative is responsible for identifying when project
work will begin and end, restrictions in vertical and horizontal clearance through the work
zone, and other information identified on the Detour Report. It is extremely important that
the information provided be current and accurately represent all traffic restrictions and
detours in effect. This information should be reported as soon as the construction
schedule is known so the information is available for Motor Carriers when applying for
truck permits.
102.17 CONTROL NUMBERS AND CONTRACT NUMBERS
DOR-OI 10-2 requires that, with the exception of letters for the Governor’s signature,
correspondence relating to a specific highway project will include the project number,
location, and control number.
102.18 PROJECT DOCUMENTS DISPOSITION
Contract Compliance Review
FHWA Form 86 Case File of review to determine compliance with equal employment
opportunity and affirmative action contract requirements. Kept in EEO for one year from
the compliance review, then sent to Archives. Dispose of after three years of receipt in
Archives.
Contract Payrolls
Salaries and wages paid to individual employees of contracting firm that receives low bid
awards. In District Construction Office for varying lengths of time depending on FHWA.
Stored on the Hill for three years. Dispose of three years after FHWA has paid off.
Contract Records
Including the following: prequalifying prospective bidders, qualifying low bidders,

advertising of bids, engineer’s estimates, awards of contract and concurrences,
agreement estimates, anti-collusion, certifications for force account construction, award
and execution correspondence, letting information (such as plan orders, etc.), and any
similar records considered necessary to document the contract. Retain two years plus
current year in Contracts Office – to Archives – microfilm annually and destroy original,
security microfilm, transfer to security storage; dispose of after 25 years.
24
Preconstruction
103 -- PRECONSTRUCTION
103.00 PRECONSTRUCTION
103.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
As soon as practical after a contract is awarded, the Project Manager will arrange a
preconstruction conference with the contractor. The number of people attending this
meeting will depend upon the complexity of the job. Usually it includes:
• Project Manager and assistants in charge of the project
• District Engineer
• District Construction Engineer/Assistant DCE
• Design Engineer
• Prime contractor
• Subcontractors (have prime invite them)
• Utility and railroad companies
• Local government (city and county) when associated with project
The following agencies may, on certain projects, be invited:
• Federal Highway Administration division office
• Law enforcement - highway patrol, sheriff, or city police
• Construction Office
• Minority Business Office
The conference is usually conducted by the Project Manager. During introductions by the
Project Manager, a form for names, addresses, and phone numbers of those present
should be circulated. Minutes of the meeting should also be kept by the Project Manager
and copies sent to all interested parties.
The purpose of the conference is to discuss:
• Safety of employees and the public (SSHC Subsection 107.07).
• The project plans and specifications.
• Unusual conditions and constructability.
25
Preconstruction
• Utility requirements (SSHC Subsection 105.06).
• Erosion Control Plans
• Contractor's plan and schedule of operation (SSHC Subsection 108.07).
• Type and adequacy of equipment.
• No materials are to be incorporated in the project until approved by the PM. All
electrical materials must be approved by the Construction Division before any
electrical work begins.
• Material Suppliers
• Sources of labor and labor requirements.
• Maintenance of traffic and business access.
• Other pertinent items that will result in a better job understanding.
• Partnering opportunities.
103.02 ADMINISTRATION DETAILS
Before discussing any project details, Subsections 103.00 to 103.61 of the Construction
Manual may be distributed to the contractor and subcontractors at the Project Manager’s
option.
Administrative issues to be discussed at the preconstruction conference include:
A. Change Orders
Before commencing any work not covered by the contract, the contractor and the Project
Manager must agree on the price or prices to be paid for the work (or the method used to
determine them). Extra work performed before this agreement is reached cannot be
considered for payment. The basis of payment for the cost of extra work follows four
general categories:
• Contract unit prices
• Agreed unit prices
• Agreed total prices
• Force account
On force account work, the contractor is required to prepare payrolls and invoices, in
duplicate, for labor, equipment and material furnished, using a "Force Account
Agreement" (DR Form 58). This form shall be signed by the inspector and contractor's
representative at the end of each day's work. Both the contractor and inspector will
retain a copy.
B. Contract Documents
Contractors must see that copies of plans, specifications, and special provisions are
available at all times to their representatives on the project.
26
Preconstruction
Plan revisions will be mailed to the contractor as soon as they are issued. Contractors
will be responsible for keeping their field representatives informed and supplied with such
revisions. If contractors feel such revisions require extra work, they should immediately
advise the Project Manager.
C. Wage Rates (Federal Aid Projects)
All wages paid must conform to wage and hour provisions prescribed in the contract.
Crafts must be listed exactly as shown in the wage decision. Crafts not listed but
needed shall be requested by the contractor through the Project Manager. Required
payrolls must be submitted weekly and within seven days after the last day covered by
the payroll.
It is suggested that the prime contractor collect, sign, and submit all payrolls of approved
subcontractors, as a group, to the Project Manager.
The Project Manager may withhold progress estimates if payrolls are more than two
weeks behind schedule.
D. Postings
The contractor shall be responsible for erecting and maintaining required postings as
outlined in Construction Manual Subsections 103.21 to 103.24.
E. Stockpiled Material
If contractors want payment for stockpiled material, they should provide receipted bills
showing the actual cost of the material stockpiled. For payment of stockpiled material,
refer to Construction Manual 105.06.
F. All plants shall be labeled.
The information on each plant's label shall described the plant's:
(1) Botanical genus.
(2) Species.
(3) Common name.
(4) Size or age.
Legible labels shall be attached by the nursery grower to individual plants, boxes,
bundles, bales, or other containers to insure that all species and varieties are
identified.
27
2002
Preconstruction
G. Subcontracting
1. On all projects, prime contractors must submit their subcontract requests

to the Construction Division in a letter or FAX.
2. The prime contractor is responsible for EEO and minimum wage

compliance by all subcontractors.
3. All subcontractors must be approved by the Construction Division prior to

the subcontractor starting work.
4. In the event a prime contractor elects not to subcontract and instead

“carry the people on the payroll”, the District Engineer and/or his/her
authorized representative may perform the following checks:
a. Request to see on a random basis and before distributing the

payroll checks of the people in question.
b. Request a copy of the lease agreement on equipment to verify that

compensation is on a time period basis rather than the amount of
work accomplished.
c. Check material supplier invoices or billings to insure that the prime

contractor is or will make payment for the materials used in the
work in question.
d. Check the prime contractor’s payrolls to determine if the people in

question and their supervisor(s) are included on the payrolls.
H. Project Supervision
The prime contractor shall submit in writing, to the Project Manager in charge, the name
of an authorized representative on the project. Representative will be empowered to
coordinate with all operations of subcontractors and negotiate with the Project Manager
any questions concerning extra work, including extra work performed by a subcontractor.
If the prime contractor wishes, this representative may be a subcontractor's employee
that is present when work on the project is being performed.
I. Weekly Report of Working Days
When working time is being charged, the Project Manager will prepare and furnish the
@ contractor the "Weekly Progress/Working Day Report" showing working days charged
that week. Objections to days charged must be made in writing by the contractor within
ten calendar days after receipt of the report. Objections based on delays due to
unavailability of materials should be accompanied by copies of orders placed,
acceptance of orders, and promised dates of delivery. All other objections must be
accompanied with documentation of the reason for objection. The Project Manager will
respond to the objection, indicating acceptance of the claim or reasons for rejection.
28
2002
Preconstruction
J. Right-of-Way
All parties are reminded that highway right-of-way abuts upon private property. Any
infringement or trespassing upon such private property could cause damage that would
become a liability to the person or organization involved. Maintaining good relations with
the public (especially private property owners) is very important.
K. Safety
Contractor must comply with provisions of the Federal and State Occupational Safety
and Health Acts.
L. Nebraska One Call Notification System shall be explained by the Project Manager.
The Diggers Hotline of Nebraska phone number is 1-800-331-5666.
M. Contractor has 48 hours to file notice with county sheriff when burial sites are
discovered.
N. Water Pollution & Wetlands
The contractor's schedule and methods for control of water pollution and protection of
wetlands should be reviewed. For more information, refer to Construction Manual
Division 1100.
All disposal sites require NDR approval.
O. EEO Requirements (Federal Aid Projects)
1. Forms PR-1391, Manpower reports required. (Distribute sample form)
A. The Contractor (prime and subs) shall send two copies to State
Contract Compliance Officer.
B. Submit by 10th of August.
C. Needed for the week of July 15th only.
D. If no minorities or women employed - explain why.
E. Required of subcontractors, also, with subcontract of $10,000 or

more.
2. All subcontract and purchase agreements must include E.E.O. provisions.
A. All sections of Form PR-1273 must be attached to these
agreements.
3. Not allowed to maintain segregated facilities of any kind.
4. Must pay comparable wages.
29
Preconstruction
5. Contractor must adopt an EEO policy statement.
A. Post it on job site and in home office.
B. Send it to outside referral sources.
6. Designate an E.E.O. Officer.
A. Should be in writing and signed by policy officer of the company.
B. Send the notice of designation to NDR project manager.
C. Post this designation where employees can see it.
D. E.E.O. Officer must be someone with authority.
7. Conduct E.E.O. meetings with supervisory personnel before the job

starts.
A. Review all the requirements of the contract.
B. Meetings must be held at least every six months.
C. Document and keep records of these meetings. (Can be formal

minutes or diary notes).
8. Disseminate E.E.O. policy to employees.
A. If done by meetings, document and record. (Diary Notes

acceptable)
B. May be done by pamphlets or other handouts.
There is no set way of doing this. The contractor may use

whatever system works best for the company. However, the
company must be able to document that employees are told about
E.E.O.
9. Put up E.E.O. posters.
A. Two required - Federal and State.
B. Must be at job site and home office.
10. When advertising for jobs, he/she must include the notation "An Equal
Opportunity Employer". Should keep copies of ads.
A. When advertising, place ads in local commuting area of job site.
30
Preconstruction
B. Use newspapers and other media likely to yield minority and

female applicants.
11. When hiring, the contractor should show some active recruitment in local
commuting area of job site.
A. Make personal recruitment visits to organizations, agencies, etc. in

the commuting area of the job site.
B. Write letters of recruitment to organizations and agencies in the

local commuting area.
C. Keep records of all recruitment activity (diary notes are acceptable

for personal visits).
12. Must show that some attempt is made to analyze the labor market where
the job is located.
A. Determine number of minorities and women in the commuting

area of job site.
B. Analyze staffing pattern of crew at job site.
C. Set up some type of goal or objective for utilizing minorities and

women on that particular job. If minorities and women will not be
utilized, be prepared to explain why. Keep records of this analysis
activity.
13. Will need to show that personnel actions are reviewed by top
management for discriminatory effects.
A. If a minority or women is discharged at the job site, make sure that

the home office knows about it and that the company E.E.O.
Officer gives the facts surrounding that discharge.
B. If a minority or women is transferred or promoted, the E.E.O.

Officer should know about it.
We are not advocating that contractors establish a highly formal

procedure for this, because in some cases, it would not be
practical or feasible. However, it is the contractor's responsibility
to show that this is being done regardless of the method used.
14. Must show some type of training activity. Must advise employees about
training opportunities available and encourage minorities and females to
participate.
31
2002
Preconstruction – Project Details
A. Document progress of trainees.
When training is given on an informal basis, the contractor will

need to show that it is given. Records of case histories should be
kept, subject to being verified by interviewing the trainee involved.
Keep records of all training activity.
15. Letters must be sent to known minority contractors regarding any

subcontract work. Documentation must be kept on the efforts made to
solicit minority businesses.
16. Keep records of the following:
A. Number of minority and women applicants referred and where they

come from.
B. Number of minorities and women hired - if not hired, reasons why.
C. Number of minorities and women transferred, terminated,

promoted, etc.
17. Identify minority and women employee files after hire.
Note: Each Federal-Aid project will stand by itself when being evaluated
for affirmative action. In other words, affirmative action on one project will
not satisfy the requirement of affirmative action on another project. The
contractor should satisfy himself/herself that the foregoing actions are
taken and that records are kept for each and every project under his/her
control.
103.03 PROJECT DETAILS
A. On many projects it may be necessary for the Project Manager to prepare and
present an enlarged plan or map for showing:
• Location.
• Terminal points.
• Type of construction involved.
• Special areas of concern, including installation of public utilities to be
fenced or marked if hazardous or sensitive.
• Restrictions due to lack of right-of-way or defined by right-of-way
agreements.
• Detours and staging of construction for traffic.
B. Contractor must present his/her detailed construction schedule, or else postpone
preconstruction conference.
1. Starting Date _________________ Completion Date _______________
Any date before Notice to Proceed must be approved in writing by the
@
Construction Division.
32
2002
Preconstruction – Project Details
2. Staging Schedule and/or Sequence of Operation.
3. Items to be sublet and names of subcontractors.
C. Sampling and material testing requirements shall be discussed.
D. Contractor Insurance requirements shall be verified.
E. Railroad Protective Insurance
The contractor must have appropriate insurance in force when working on the
railroad right-of-way.
The Controller Division will enter the effective dates of railroad insurance policies
in SiteManager. However, the Project Manager must, in the Key Dates area of
@ SiteManager, record the date that construction started and the date when
construction in the railroad right-of-way is complete. Check to make sure that
Railroad Protective coverage is in force. If not, do not allow the contractor on
the right-of-way and do give Controller Division (402-479-4631) a call so that they
can verify that insurance has, in fact, not been received. When work has been
completed on the railroad right-of-way, the same procedure should be used to
record the ending date.
33
Preconstruction
F. Utilities and Law Enforcement Attendance

At major project preconstruction meetings, attendance of utilities and law
enforcement personnel is highly beneficial to all concerned. The Project Manager
should expend extra effort to assure attendance or open communication with
utilities and appropriate law enforcement agencies.
Relocation of utilities is of extreme interest to all concerned in the progress of the
project. For safe control of traffic, the ability to discuss traffic control with both
contractors and law enforcement could be highly beneficial. The State Patrol,
local sheriff, or police should be invited to attend preconstruction meetings when
appropriate. The State Patrol can be contacted through the State Patrol District
Office charged with responsibility for the area of the project being discussed.
It is beneficial to discuss utilities relocation, project staging, and/or traffic control
early in the meeting before more detailed and time consuming construction
matters are approached. You may excuse utility companies early.
G. Plan and specification omissions must be discussed.
H. Traffic Control (PM shall present the NDOR Traffic Control Plan.)
In addition, the following must be verified:
1. Brand and model of barricade light proposed to be used are on the
Approved Products List.
2. Maintaining spare parts on project.
3. Checking barricades and signs at frequent intervals daily.
4. Phone number of person to call at night if barricades, or signs or devices
are down or not working.
Name and Number ____________________ _____-______
Name and Number ____________________ _____-______
5. Notify Project Manager before picking up signs and also at first notice of
damaged or stolen signs.
I. Prompt Submittal of Certificates of Compliance, Certified Analysis etc. to insure
payments.
J. Location of Field Laboratory and Field Offices
K. Subcontractors must be approved before they can begin working on project. We
need to be notified when they are going to be working on project.
L. Contractor’s Borrow Pits – Approval
M. Payrolls – Prime Contractor needs to check subcontractors
N. Welding on girders not allowed without written permission.
O. Labor, Payrolls, Wage Rates, Training & E.E.O.
E.E.O. Officer _____________________________________
Safety Officer _____________________________________
34
2002
Preconstruction
P. Extra Work Orders
Before commencing any work not covered by the contract, the contractor and the
engineer must agree on the price or prices to be paid for the work. Extra work
performed before this agreement cannot be considered for payment.
103.04 ADDITIONAL TOPICS FOR DISCUSSION
• Anticipated work starting dates.

• Clean up of cast-in-place concrete structures.
• Staging schedule.
• Falsework plans and falsework removal.

• Presentations by various utility representatives
• Please remind contractors at the preconstruction conference that they or their
suppliers are required to furnish 2 (two) 2.0 m (6 foot) sample lengths of
reinforcing bars whenever such samples are called for in the Standard
Specifications or Materials Sampling Guide.
• Signing, barricades, pavement marking, warning lights, and other temporary
traffic control devices according to:
u Department responsibilities (SSHC Sections 422 and 423;
Subsections 104.05, 105.01, 107.07, and 107.14).
u Contractor responsibilities (SSHC Sections 422 and 423;
Subsection 104.05, 105.05, 107.07, and 107.14).
u Contractor's work plan (SSHC Subsection 108.07).
• Project Lighting (if applicable).

• Remind contractor when ordering piling, he/she must tell manufacturer to stamp
the heat number on the piling. (SSHC Subsection 703.02)
• Presentation by county or city representatives.
• Names and chain of command for state or county forces assigned to project.
• Authority and duties of inspector. (SSHC Subsection 105.05)
• Assignment of contractor's personnel for:
u Person responsible to maintain traffic control devices (24 hour call
number). (SSHC Subsection 422.01).
u Person authorized to make decisions and sign extra work orders, etc.
u Project safety officer.
u EEO officer.
u Project supervisor (SSHC Subsection 105.05).
u Disadvantaged business enterprise liaison officers.
35
Preconstruction
• Discussion of items to be sublet, names of subcontractors, and commercially

useful function of DBE subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers should be
discussed.
• Construction staking requirements.

u The contractor must avoid destroying stakes
u The contractor must advise Department 48 hours in advance of
requirement.
• Equipment to be used - contractor should identify equipment with greater than

legal axle loads that is to be moved across bridges or pavements that will remain
in place. Equipment with greater than legal axle loads (SSHC Subsection 105.11)
must be either loaded on an appropriate trailer or specifically exempted.
Requests for exemptions will be analyzed on a case-by-case basis by the
Construction, Bridge, and Maintenance Divisions.
• Special notes on plans or proposals and special or unusual provisions that apply.
• Safety precautions and compliance with:

u Posting of OSHA Form 200.
u Public Convenience and Safety (SSHC Subsection 107.07).
• Contract quantity settlement.
• Frequency of estimate vouchers (normally once or twice each month).
• Covers on trucks hauling on highways when necessary.
• Specified working period.
• Contractor's submittal of work plans for:

u Control of water pollution and erosion (SSHC Sections 201, 204, and
Division 800).
u Control of fugitive dust.
u Compliance with storm water discharge requirements (Construction
Manual 1100.30).
• Equal Employment Opportunity responsibilities for statement of compliance and

required postings (Construction Manual 102.23).
• Statements by Federal Highway Administration and visiting Commission

personnel.
• Pre-concreting conferences.
• Value engineering incentive proposals submitted by the contractor

(SSHC Subsection 104.03 and Construction Manual 103.09).
36
Preconstruction
• Partnering Opportunities (SSHC Section 113)

u Workshops/Training
u Dispute resolution procedures
u Meeting schedule/location
103.10 ONE CALL NOTIFICATION
It is the law; anyone who digs a hole, pushes a pipe through the ground, or even
moves a stockpile of gravel must contact Diggers Hotline first. The Diggers
Hotline phone number is 1-800-331-5666.
Fiber Optic Cable Buried on Railroad Right-of-Way
Railroad Points of Contact for Location of Fiber Optic Cable

Burlington Northern Santa Fe Railway.....................................................800-533-2891
Nebraska Central Railroad Company ......................................................800-336-9193
Nebkota Railway.......................................................................................308-282-1550
Nebraska Northeastern Railway Company..............................................402-748-3535
Nebraska Kansas Colorado Railnet.........................................................817-571-2356
Union Pacific Railroad..............................................................................800-336-9193
Most railroad lines have fiber optic cables buried in the right-of-way.
The Union Pacific Railroad has an "800" number available 24 hours a day to determine if
fiber optic cable is buried on their right-of-way.
The number is 1-800-336-9193. Anyone calling the "800" number will need to give the
railroad milepost number to the operator.
When we have a construction project that may involve railroad right-of-way, a railroad
special provision will be added to the bid proposal. The contractor will be required to call
the appropriate "800" number before working on railroad right-of-way. The railroad
milepost number will be included in the special provision.
Project Managers should confirm that the contractor knows how to get clearances.
103.11 UTILITIES AND RAILROAD REHABILITATION

A. General - Work by utility companies and railroads in making necessary
rehabilitation of their facilities for our project construction will often require certain
advance preparations by the Project Manager and cooperation with the firm during
the progress of their work. In many cases it will be necessary that our right-of-
way be defined by setting of stakes prior to beginning rehabilitation work. Grade
stakes may be required at railroad crossings or in connection with pipe line or
pole line work on the project. The firm involved will generally be responsible for
furnishing their own stakes needed for the actual rehabilitation but will need basic
information from which to work. Cooperation with these firms will assist in getting
their facilities out of the way of our construction.
B. Preventing Damage to Utility Properties - The Project Manager should document
that proper precautions are taken to protect and prevent damage to the property
37
Preconstruction
of railroads, underground or overhead utilities, and pipelines in connection with

highway construction work.
No excavation will be permitted in the area of underground utility facilities until all
such facilities have been located and identified to the satisfaction of all parties.
The excavation must be accomplished with extreme care in order to avoid any
possibility of damage to the utility facility.
C. Beginning Rehabilitation - The utility firm will generally begin work shortly after
they have been notified to proceed. The Project Manager should provide them
with information regarding the contractor's schedule as soon as possible if the
facilities will be a material delay to progress of the construction. This will allow
the firm to schedule rehabilitation work in an order of priority over other
rehabilitation.
The Utilities Section of the Project Development Division tells the utility
companies to advise the Project Manager by letter when they begin work, their
tentative progress schedule, the name and address of their person in charge of
the work. The Utilities Section of the Project Development Division also tells the
utility company to furnish the Project Manager (and copy to utilities officer) with
the completion date of the revision work. These letters are to be confirmed with
appropriate field book entries.
D. Inspecting Rehabilitation Work - Whenever an agreement provides that certain

items of work are to be performed by a municipality, railroad, or utility, contact
with the work should be maintained. If the work is to be done at state expense,
the Project Manager shall keep a record of the work in sufficient detail to enable
him/her to determine that the charges are justified and in accordance with the
agreement. However, on most work of this nature, it would be difficult to keep a
detailed record of each and every item without involving considerable expense.
The Project Manager should consult with a representative of the organization
involved and arrange to obtain information as the work progresses on the labor,
equipment, and material used in the work and the material salvaged for future
use.
In some cases, such as the placing of pipeline crossings, ditching and backfilling
in the roadway area may require inspection to insure that compaction of the
backfill is properly performed.
The Utilities Engineer no longer requires that you keep and submit a separate field
notebook for all utility agreements. He/she does, however, ask that you notify
him/her of the completion date for all utility work on your projects.
Notification should be made using the UTILDONE program available on VMS (as
per Mark Ottemann's letter to District Construction Engineers on September 12,
1994).
Your inspection and documentation of utility rehabilitation work should be limited

to the amount necessary to complete the information required when using the
UTILDONE program.
38
Preconstruction
103.12 HAUL ROADS (SSHC Section 107)
Prior to beginning any work, the contractor is required to meet with all involved local
governmental entities and advise them of any intentions to use their local roads. The
contractor shall be responsible for resolving claims concerning damage to local roads
caused by his/her operation.
The contractor shall protect and indemnify the State and its representatives against any
claims or liabilities arising from damage to local roads caused by the contractor's
operation.
39
Contract Administration
103.20 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION (SEPARATE HANDOUT FOR ALL

CONTRACTORS)
This section provides instructions and guidance to contractors and Project Managers for
administration of construction contracts. Instructions include information on required
reports or forms, equal employment opportunity, wage reports, training program, minority
recruitment, and subcontracting. Copies of all NDR forms mentioned in the Construction
Manual are included in Appendix 1 -- NDR forms or Appendix 2 -- Federal Forms) and
can be copied as needed. (However, use stock forms when possible to cut reproduction
costs.)
103.21 NEBRASKA & FHWA FORMS & REPORTS - PREPARED BY CONTRACTOR
Office Where
Reference Forms are
Form No. Title Section Available
DR 298 Special Training Provision Monthly 102.24 DBE Office

On-Job-Training Report
DR 439 EEO Contractor’s Self-Analysis 102.23 DBE Office
FHWA-1391 Annual EEO Report (July) 102.23 DBE Office
FHWA-47 Statement of Material & Labor 102.25 Construction
WH 348 Statement of Compliance 102.25 District Const.
Office
Standard Request for Authorization, Additional 102.26 Construction
Form 1444 Classification and Rate
Postings
At the preconstruction conference, the Project Manager will supply copies of the
posters listed below:
a. Federal-Aid Contracts
Federal Poster - Equal Employment Opportunity is the Law

State Poster - Equal Opportunity Commission
WH-1420 - Your Rights under the Family and Medical Leave Act 1993
WH-1462 - Notice: Employee Polygraph Protection Act
FHWA-1022 - False Statements Notice
FHWA-1495 - Wage Rate Information
40
b. State Funded Contracts
State Poster - Equal Opportunity Commission

WH-1420 - Your Rights under the Family and Medical Leave Act 1993
WH-1462 - Notice: Employee Polygraph Protection Act
USDOL-1088 - Your Rights - Federal Minimum Wage
Examples are included in Appendix 2. Additional copies, if needed, can be

obtained from the Project Manager or the Construction Division (Mr. Dan Necas,
4453). In addition to postings noted above, a copy of the Policy Statement shall
be posted.
All required site postings shall be in a location that is easily accessible to all
employees. They may be fastened to a bulletin board, tool shed, or job office
trailer and protected from weather by glass or clear plastic. Postings that
become soiled, faded, or otherwise illegible should be replaced. More than one
posting may be necessary if there are multiple locations where workers report for
work. Such cases typically occur on complex or long projects involving several
different crews and/or subcontractors.
103.22 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) regulations (federal and state) apply to all
construction projects. (Federal OSHA regulations are codified in 29 CFR, Sections 1910
and 1926.) Contractors are responsible for compliance with OSHA regulations and shall
maintain a safe work site. Therefore, contractors and their employees must be familiar
with the health and safety requirements of the act.
• As an employer, contractors are required to keep employee occupational injury

and illness records at the location where their employees usually report for work.
The "Log and Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses" (OSHA Form 200)
must be completed within six days following a recordable occupational illness or
injury. A copy of the completed form must be maintained at the work site. In
addition, OSHA Form 200 is to be completed at the end of each calendar year
and posted at job sites before February 1. Detailed instructions are printed on the
back of each form.
• A poster entitled "Safety and Health Protection on the Job" must be displayed in a
prominent place at all times.
Contractors can obtain OSHA forms and posters from:
Regional Director-OSHA or Administrative Safety & Labor Standards

Federal Office Building Division
Lincoln Department of Labor
Lincoln
41
2002
Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO)
103.23 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EEO) (SSHC Subsection 102.09)
A. Contractor's Responsibility
Contractors and their staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and discharge
employees or recommend such action must understand the requirements of applicable
EEO specifications including "Required Contract Provision", Form FHWA 1273, and
Executive Order 11246 in the Special Provisions.
Policy Statement and Compliance Letter
All contractors must formally adopt an Equal Employment Opportunity Policy

Statement which:
• Prohibits discrimination of any kind or for any reason.
• Encourages employment of minorities and women.

Examples of minimum acceptable policy statements for both federal and
nonfederal aid projects appear in Appendix 2. When posted, these policy
statements must be on company letterhead.
A sample of an EEO proof of compliance letter, which lists the EEO requirements
and postings, is in Appendix 2. Written proof of compliance will not be required
for material suppliers, manufacturers, truckers, and surveyors.
B. Project Manager Involvement
Responsibility for complying with EEO requirements is solely the contractor's.
However, the Project Manager has oversight involvement to ensure that
contractors comply with these requirements and that proper forms and/or letters
have been received. When a contractor is not in compliance with EEO
requirements, the Project Manager shall advise the contractor, in writing, and
make a diary entry, that continued negligence in EEO requirements will result in
the withholding of progress payments. The Project Manager will also inform the
Contract Compliance Officer of the contractor’s noncompliance. The Contract
@ Compliance Officer will investigate all reports of noncompliance and make a
recommendation as to what the contractor must do to be in compliance. If the
contractor still fails to take corrective action relative to EEO noncompliance, the
Project Manager may, with concurrence from the Construction Engineer
@ (Lincoln), suspend work. All suspensions shall be documented in writing and
sent to the contractor.
1. Contracts and Subcontracts Over $10,000
a. Site Inspections
As soon as a major part of contract work is underway, an EEO project site
inspection must be completed by the EEO Office relative to work in progress. A
representative of each affected company shall be present and accompany the
inspector during an EEO inspection.
42
2002
Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO)
@ b. Training Program
Contractor training special provisions requires the contractor to have a formal

employee training program. During an EEO inspection, the training program
should also be checked.
c. Required Posting
During the inspection, all required postings should be checked. Project Managers
shall check to see that correct names and addresses appear in the boxes on
posters entitled "Wage Rate Information Federal-Aid Highway Project" (FHWA-
1495) and "Notice" (FHWA-1022). Copies of these forms are provided in
Appendix 2.
d. Reports
• "Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report"
Contractors and subcontractors (with contracts over $10,000) shall provide the
Contract Compliance Officer in the Construction Division two copies of
"Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report"
(FHWA-1391). A blank copy is provided in Appendix 2. 1391’s can also be
obtained off the NDOR website under Contractor’s Corner – DBE Information.
@ These forms are to be completed for all federal-aid contracts for which work was
performed during the week of July 15th.
NOTE: If Prime or Sub submit the 1391 to the Project Manager, return them and
tell the Prime or Sub that the 1391’s must be submitted directly to the Contract
Compliance Officer to avoid double counting.
A copy of Form FHWA-1391 is provided in Appendix 2. Copies can be ordered

@
from:
Construction Division
Nebraska Department of Roads
1500 Hwy. 2
P.O. Box 94759
Lincoln, Nebraska 68509-4759
Instructions for completing this form are provided by the Construction Division on
a yearly basis. Contractors are cautioned to be sure they have the CURRENT
instructions. If there is any question about revision dates, contact the
Construction Division in Lincoln (402) 479-4514.
Distribution: Route one copy to the Construction Division, Lincoln, and retain one
copy in project file.
43
2002
Training and Trainee Programs
2. Construction Contracts and Subcontracts $10,000 and Less
An EEO project site inspection is not necessary for these construction contracts.
3. Maintenance Contracts
On maintenance contracts, an EEO project site inspection is not necessary

regardless of contracted amount.
4. Complaints of EEO Violations
The Project Manager will report all complaints of EEO violations to the
@ Construction Division’s EEO section for investigation.
103.24 TRAINING & TRAINEE PROGRAMS
Contractor's Responsibility
1. Training Program
All prime contractors and subcontractors (with contracts over $10,000) must
develop, or have, an approved training program in accordance with the
Specifications. The Contracts Office (EEO Section) approves these programs
and can be contacted [(402) 479-4514] for answers to questions or assistance in
developing an approved program.
Shortly after a contract is awarded, the Contracts Office will verify that the
successful bidder has an approved training program on file. If not, the contractor
will be advised that a formal training program must be approved by the Contracts
Office within 30 days. Failure to submit a training program will be considered
noncompliance with the Specifications. A contractor who does not comply may
be refused bidding proposals for future lettings until requirements for a training
program are met. (Typically, contractors adopt and use the Associated General
Contractors' (AGC) training program. It is acceptable in Nebraska.)
An acceptable training program shall include information covering:
• Method of trainee recruitment.

• Crafts to be trained and upgraded.
• Number of expected trainees per year and what part of total will be female,
minority, and disadvantaged.
• Training procedures, including approximate training time.
• Commitment for keeping up-to-date records to summarize total time each
trainee is trained in each classification.
• Proposed use of trainee upon successful completion of training program
and commitment to issue a certificate or statement of successful
completion of training.
44
2002
• Number of total work force (Nebraska operation).
2. Trainee Program
Contractors responsible for fulfillment of reimbursable training hours on

federal-aid projects must obtain written approval from the Construction Division's
EEO Section for each trainee prior to the trainee's enrollment in the program.
a. Contractors shall submit their written requests for trainee approval to the
Construction Division, attention EEO Section, with a copy to the Project
Manager. Requests must include job classification, number of hours to be
fulfilled, trainee name, race, sex, address, phone number, and social
security number.
b. If additional trainees or replacements for terminated trainees are needed,

crafts and classifications must be approved by the Project Manager with a
follow-up letter to the EEO Section. Hiring of non-minority trainees to
replace semi-skilled or skilled workers may not be used to establish
eligibility for federal reimbursement since the trainee program is
designated for members of female, minority, or disadvantaged groups.
Note: Changes to the number or class of trainees initially requested must

be submitted and pre-approved by the Construction Division.
c. Trainee Reimbursement
In order to qualify for trainee reimbursement:
• Trainees must be registered in the appropriate program.
• Wage determination decisions of the Davis-Bacon Act are used as

the basic rate on any project involving federal aid.
• Minimum starting wage will be 60 percent of the rate established

for a craft or classification for the first half of a training period. This
percentage will change to 75 percent for the third quarter, and
90 percent for the last quarter. Certified payrolls shall specifically
identify each individual in trainee status, their base rate, and
applicable reduction percentage.
• After a trainee has completed his/her training program, the

trainee's base wage rate shall be increased to Davis-Bacon's
wage determination for that job classification.
45
• 3. Trainee Recruitment
The contractor's trainee program outline must include method of recruitment.
Occasionally, it may be impossible to recruit members of minority groups due to

minority unavailability at the project location. When this occurs, contractors must
have documented their efforts in attempting to recruit minorities. The Project
Manager and the Construction Division EEO Section should be informed of
recruitment problems. Recruitment which results in an inadequate number of
minority trainees does not eliminate a contractor's responsibility to fulfill the
requirements of the "Trainee Reimbursement bid item.
If minority recruitment results in less than the required number of qualified

individuals, the contractor shall then recruit non-minorities or use some of their
own employees for the training program. Any non-minority substitution requires
preapproval of the Project Manager and the Construction Division (EEO Section).
4. Reports
• "Reimbursable Trainee Training Record"
Each month the contractor must submit a DR Form 298 "Special Training
Provision Monthly On-Job-Training Report."
• If no trainees are employed during the early phase of work, the contractor
shall so advise the Project Manager and the Construction Division (EEO
Section).
Project Manager's Involvement
1. Training Program
Project Managers shall have a copy of the approved training program. Copies
may be obtained from the contractor or the Construction Division (EEO Section).
Since training programs have been standardized by AGC, any preapproved
program can be used as a model for evaluating a particular contractor's program
during inspection.
For convenience, training program inspections will be made concurrently with

EEO inspections. An inspection will include interviews with individuals enrolled in
the training program. Also, the contractor's training program will be spot-
checked. A copy of the contractor's program shall be available for review.
The Construction Division shall be notified if:
• A contractor does not have a training program.
• The contractor's program is deemed inadequate.
46
• Other training deficiencies are noted during the inspection.
It is the Construction Division's responsibility to work with the Project Manager

and contractor to rectify noted discrepancies. If after a reasonable time a
contractor fails to meet training requirements or ignores requests for corrective
actions, the Construction Division, working through the Project Manager, may
request suspension of work until corrective action(s) are implemented.
Suspending work will be used as a last resort. However, the offending
contractor's bidding ability on future contracts could be restricted until such time
that compliance with training is demonstrated.
2. Wage Rates
Wage rate interviews may also be completed during the EEO inspection.
• Interviews should be conducted a minimum of every six months for each
contractor and subcontractor.
• Projects whose duration is less than six months should have one interview
with each contractor and subcontractor.
• Each District must keep interviews on file for three years.
3. Reports
a. "Reimbursable Trainee Training Record"
Shortly after a letting, the Contracts Office (EEO Section) will prepare and
forward a letter listing projects that require a "Special Training Provision
Monthly On-Job-Training Report" (Form 298) along with a supply of these
forms. Additional forms can be obtained off of the NDOR website under
@ Contractor’s Corner – DBE Information.
Monthly, the contractor will be sending one completed Form 298 for each
trainee employee until training for that employee is completed or
terminated. The Project Manager will review, initial, copy, and forward the
original Form 298 to the Construction Division, EEO Section. The copy
will be placed and retained in the project file.
b. Occasionally, contractors train employees on contracts that do not have a

line number for trainee reimbursement. In this case, Project Managers
are not responsible for monitoring that program and Form 298 is not
required.
103.25 WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT
A. In order to comply with the requirements of the Freedom of Information Act
regarding protection of personal privacy, all requests for access to certified payroll
records shall be forwarded to the Construction Division. Requests must be in
writing, and if not made on behalf of an individual, the request must indicate the
name of the organization making the request.
B. Access to or copies of payrolls shall not be permitted until authorization has been
received from the Construction Division. (Adherence to these procedures during
investigation by the Department of Labor or FHWA is not required.)
47
2002
C. All contracts for highway construction work have certain requirements on wages
and conditions of employment. These requirements vary between Federal-aid
and State-funded contracts.
D. Some laws or regulations provide specific requirements in the contract

documents, while others may be cited by reference. Section 107 of the Standard
Specifications requires compliance with all laws and applicable regulations, and
accordingly, compliance is required whether or not specific listing or reference is
made in the contract.
E. Labor Laws Cited
1. Section 107 of the Specifications calls attention to certain State laws and
provides that additional regulations and restrictions will be set forth in the
special provisions in the contract. These additional regulations are
normally included in the required provisions or the special provisions. The
enforcement of contract provisions such as these cannot be ignored.
However, the inspection, reporting, and enforcement requirements vary
between contracts. A basic knowledge of the laws and the exercise of
good judgement and diplomacy are required when any enforcement action
is taken. Project Managers are advised to contact the Construction
Division for decisions on labor complaints for which answers are not
readily available. Knowledge concerning these problems is to be handled
in confidence, and complete records are a necessity. Certain standard
requirements are made a part of all contract provisions. These are as
follows:
a. A minimum employment age of sixteen years and the restricting of

employment of persons whose age or physical condition is such
as to make his/her employment dangerous to themselves or
others.
b. A provision prohibiting the employment of anyone currently serving

sentence to a penal or correction institution (this shall not be
interpreted to prohibit the use of persons on a bona fide work
release program).
c. A provision prohibiting discrimination on any grounds against

workers who are qualified for the work by training or experience,
and who are not disqualified by Paragraphs a. and b.
48
2002
2. These regulations are required by State law, but often are duplicated or
made more restrictive by Federal laws.
3. SSHC Section 110 refers to State law restrictions of hours and labor.
This would include the State Fair Labor Standards Law which is cited in
the Special Provisions in each State-funded project and requires the
contractors to comply with such a scale of wages and conditions of
employment as are paid and maintained by at least 50 percent of the
contractors in the same business or field of endeavor. Contracts for
State-funded projects do not contain an established scale of minimum
wage rates; however, no wages paid can be below the minimum wage of
the Fair Labor Standards Act. Questions which arise concerning the
payment of proper rate should be referred to the District Office, or to the
Construction Division (Mr. Dan Necas, 4453).
103.26 DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACTS REQUIREMENTS (Payrolls)
A. General Information
1. On selected contracts containing Federal-aid funds, Federal laws

(Davis-Bacon Act) and regulations require the Secretary of Labor to issue
a determination for minimum wage schedules to be included in each of
these Federal-aid contracts. Special instructions to the contractors are
issued by the Construction Engineer prior to the construction operations.
A copy of the current instructions are available in Appendix 2 (FHWA
Forms) under Form WH 348, "STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE."
2. Project Managers or their assistants shall conduct wage rate interviews

(Report of Labor Compliance Interviews DR Form 98) on the selected
Federal-aid projects in order to determine whether contractors and
subcontractors are properly classifying employees and are complying with
the minimum wage rate requirements of the Special Provisions.
3. The Project Manager is to make systematic spot interviews with the

contractor's or subcontractor's employees when he/she feels it is
necessary. As a matter of courtesy, the contractor's superintendent or
foreman should be advised that personal interviews with employees will
be made. The Project Manager shall select the employees to be
interviewed and these should be of different payroll classifications if
possible.
4. The number of different employees and classifications to be interviewed

shall be at the discretion of the Project Manager to ascertain compliance
with these requirements. If violations are discovered, the frequency and
number to be interviewed shall be increased and corrective action taken
until such violations have been eliminated. Depending on the size of the
crews, an attempt should be made to avoid repeating interviews with the
same individuals.
49
2002
Davis-Bacon
5. Employees should be privately interviewed; that is, without the presence of

other employees or their supervisor. The employee being interviewed
must not be informed of wage rates reported by fellow employees, but is
entitled to know the minimum rates specified for his/her classification.
6. Any apparent violations of labor classification or wage rates are to be

called to the attention of and discussed with the contractor's or
subcontractor's superintendent. In such cases, the Project Manager and
the superintendent, considering all the facts and conditions involved, must
reach agreement on the proper labor classification. The wage rate paid
must be at least the minimum specified for that classification. If a violation
in either proper classification or minimum specified wage rate is involved,
the contractor or subcontractor shall be directed to correct the
classification and/or wage rate being paid and to make any retroactive
payment necessary to provide strict compliance with the requirements.
7. In all cases of apparent violations of proper classification or minimum

wage rates paid, and the Project Manager and superintendent having
reached agreement on the proper classification or minimum wage rate
specified, the employee shall then be contacted and notified as to his/her
proper classification and the minimum wage rate specified for that
classification.
8. In unusual cases involving apparent violations, the Project Manager and

the superintendent may not be able to agree on the proper classification of
work performed by the employee. In such cases, the matter may be
submitted to higher authority, through proper channels, for decision. The
current Standard Labor Classifications and Descriptions for Highway
Construction shall be used in determining the proper classifications. (See
Appendix 2, Form WH 348, "STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE)”.
9. The interviews shall be recorded on DR Form 98, "Report of Labor

Compliance Interviews" and transmitted to the District Engineer for review
and distribution. The report should be submitted regularly, showing the
interview information as found, indicating any apparent existing
discrepancies. Information concerning the handling of such discrepancies
shall be shown, by means of an appropriate note, on that report or in the
subsequent report.
10. Any classification not covered by the wage determination included in the
contract will require the Project Manager to initiate Standard Form 1444,
"Request for Authorization of Additional Classification and Rate."
@ 11. The Construction Division (ext: 3830) will supply each District Office with
current applicable wage rates to be posted for each individual Federal-aid
contract and labor and E.E.O. posters.
12. Regardless of the source of funds, highway construction is associated

with interstate commerce and, therefore, is covered by the Federal Fair
Labor Standards Act. It has specific requirements for payment of a
50
2002
minimum wage rate and time and one-half for overtime over 40 hours in a
week, with certain supervisory or administrative employees exempted.
13. Contractors on selected Federal-aid contracts are permitted to employ

trainees and apprentices that are paid below the wage decision included in
the contract provided the following information is supplied:
a. Proof of certification by the Department of Transportation for

programs other than Nebraska and Iowa A.G.C. training programs.
b. Proof of registration of trainee in said program.
c. Proof of the number of previous hours of training the employee has

received.
d. The employees are listed as "trainees" on the payrolls.
14. The Nebraska and Iowa Associated General Contractors Manpower

Development and Training Programs have been approved by the
Department of Transportation.
B. Payrolls
1. On selected Federal-aid contracts, the contractor and each subcontractor

are required to submit to the Project Manager a certified copy of each
weekly payroll and Statement of Compliance - Form WH 348 or a
contractor's form with identical wording. The payrolls and Statement of
Compliance are to be submitted within seven days after the date the
employees are paid. The Project Manager may withhold progress
estimates until all delinquent payrolls, with attached Statement of
Compliance, have been received.
2. Required Contract Provisions Federal-Aid Construction Contracts - Form

FHWA 1273 requires us, as a contracting agency, to perform a certain
amount of checking of the submitted payrolls to comply with our oversight
responsibilities. The FIRST payroll received from any contractor or
subcontractor should be THOROUGHLY checked. (The Project Manager
may use some discretion in deferring this thorough check for several
weeks, such as in the case when only a few employees appear during the
first week or two of a project.) Random checking of all other payrolls is
approved.
51
3. The Project Manager should check the payrolls for:
a. The employee's full name, mailing address, and Social Security

number. (The employee's Social Security number need only
appear on the first payroll on which his/her name appears. The
employee's mailing address need only be shown on the first
submitted payroll on which the employee's name appears, unless
a change of mailing address necessitates a submittal to reflect the
new address.)
b. Each classification, title, and equipment capacity rating must be

verified to assure that they are the same (or recognizable
abbreviation) as listed in the Contract Wage Rate Decision
Schedule, with no deviations permitted.
c. Each employee's hourly rate must be verified and checked with a

red pencil mark indicating that at least the minimum hourly rate
and correct overtime rate has been paid for the listed
classification.
d. All deductions other than the allowable ones are explained.
e. Payroll computation (with the exception of the electronic machine

computations) shall be spot checked to verify accuracy.
f. Payrolls once transmitted to the Project Manager cannot be

returned to the contractor for correction of errors. Photocopies of
the payrolls may be made and appropriate notes placed on the
copies to explain the error(s) to the contractor. The contractor
must submit revised certified payrolls or other forms of applicable
evidence which provides documentation of the correction(s).
g. The Project Manager is to retain all payrolls until notified by the

Controller Division that they may be destroyed. When the payrolls
are complete, the Project Manager is to send a letter to the
Construction Division Final Review Section in Lincoln, indicating
the date the last payroll was received.
4. Most subsequent payrolls will require only a very cursory review. The
Project Manager is encouraged to consider such things as the length of
the project and the number of errors encountered on the first thorough
examination when determining how many additional thorough payroll
checks are performed.
5. On DR Form 84, "Record of Contractor Payrolls Received," the Project

Manager should pay particular attention to the column head "Date
Received" and to the "Payrolls Completed (Date)". A delay in submittal of
payrolls will negate payment of interest on retained monies until receipt by
the Project Manager.
52
6. The contractor and subcontractor payrolls are to be retained until three

years after the District Engineer is notified by Controller Division that the
final vouchers have been submitted to the Federal Highway
Administration.
(Each District should establish a central location for storing payrolls.)
C. Interpretation
1. The interpretation is taken from the U.S. Department of Labor Field

Operations Handbook dated June 1, 1987. (A copy of this manual is
available at each permanent field headquarters.)
2. Application of labor laws often becomes a matter of interpretation, such as

may be involved in instances when furnishing materials must be classified
as subcontracting and subject to highway contract labor regulations. This
usually applies to labor involved in producing materials from local pits but
is not necessarily limited to that operation. The following are examples of
elementary rules that may be used in this determination. It is requested
that these rules be followed in enforcing the minimum wage requirements
of the Special Provisions.
a. The contract labor standards provisions are not normally

applicable to employees of "established material suppliers"
engaged in the production and delivery of aggregates or materials
to the contractor, either to stockpiles or on the road. An
"established material supplier" is normally considered to be an
aggregate production plant, quarry, concrete plant, or asphalt plant
which has been established for commercial production not making
more than token amounts of sales to other Federal-aid projects.
b. When a contractor produces and hauls aggregates for his/her own

use from a previously established pit or quarry from which he/she
had been producing and selling aggregates immediately prior to
the award of the contract, his/her production and hauling
operations will be considered to be as an "established material
supplier" and the minimum wage rates will not apply.
c. When a new pit or quarry is opened or production equipment is

moved into a previously opened pit or quarry for the purpose of
producing material for a specific contract, none of the operations
will be considered to be commercial and the minimum wage rates
and conditions of employment shall apply to all labor employed in
producing and hauling the aggregate to the work.
d. The work of producing or loading material from a local pit shown in

the plans, or from a source substituted by the contractor for a local
pit shown in the plans, and the work of hauling materials from such
sources is considered to be part of the work
53
2002
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)
contemplated in the contract. As such, the minimum wage rates

shall apply to all operations performed by the contractor or his/her
subcontractor in processing, loading, and hauling the materials.
e. The minimum wage rate requirements do not apply to bona fide
owner-operators of trucks who are independent contractors. The
certified payrolls including the names of such owner-operators
need not show hours worked nor rates allegedly paid, but only the
notation "owner-operator".
f. The contractor is required to pay the minimum wage rates to
drivers which he/she employs to operate trucks which he/she
owns or leases from another party.
D. Apprentices
1. The contractor is not required to submit the Standard Form 1444
"Request for Authorization of Classification and Rate" for apprentices if
verification is received that the employee is registered in a bona fide
apprenticeship program.
E. Various outside agencies may request copies of payrolls under The Freedom of
Information Act. The FHWA processes these requests. If you receive a request
for copies of payrolls, have the person who is requesting a payroll contact the
FHWA. The FHWA will request the payrolls from the Construction Division. The
Construction Division will tell the PM to forward requested payrolls to the FHWA.
The FHWA will remove any personal information such as name and Social
Security Number before forwarding the information to the requesting agency.
103.27 DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) SUBCONTRACTOR
A. Contract Award
On Federal-aid projects with predetermined DBE participation goals, all bidders
@ will be required to submit a required DBE Participation Form (see bid proposal
package) with their bid. This form identifies DBE subcontractors, suppliers,
transporters, and/or manufacturers that will be used to satisfy the DBE goal. The
DBE Participation Form shall also include work or items to be subcontracted, and
dollar amount committed to each DBE.
Upon execution of a contract, the prime contractor becomes committed to those
DBEs goals listed on the form. This commitment is therefore a contractual
arrangement between the State and the prime contractor with the same
enforcement as any other provision specified in the contract documents. A prime
contractor is required to enter into a contractual arrangement with each DBE
listed by formally executing a written subcontract agreement specifying the work
to be performed and appropriate compensation for that work. This two-tier
process, which contractually obligates the prime contractor to both the State and
each participating DBE, formalizes implementation of all DBE contract provisions.
@ The DBE Office will review the low bidder's "Required DBE Participation Form" to
assure that certified DBEs are being used.
54
2002
@ The successful bidder must then submit a letter and copy of the DBE
Subcontract to the Construction Division to get subcontractors approved.
B. Commercially Useful Function

(1) A DBE performs a commercially useful function when it is responsible
for execution of the work of the contract and is carrying out its
@ responsibilities by actually performing, managing and supervising the
work involved. To perform a commercially useful function, the DBE must
also be responsible, with respect to materials and supplies used on the
contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering
the material, and installing (where applicable) and paying for the material
itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially useful
function, you must evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry
practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is
commensurate with the work it is actually performing and the DBE credit
claimed for its performance of the work, and other relevant factors.
To meet commercially useful function requirements of the regulations and

contract, the following statements are applicable:
55
2002
• DBE firm must manage the work contracted. Management shall

include scheduling work operations, ordering equipment and
materials (if materials are part of the contract), preparing and
submitting payrolls and all other required reports and forms, as
well as hiring and firing employees, including supervisory
employees.
• DBE shall perform work with employees normally employed by

and under the DBE's control. In all instances, the DBE shall be
responsible for payroll and labor compliance requirements
concerning all workers under their control. DBEs may use other
means to perform work on a limited basis when the contract
requires specialized knowledge, skills, or equipment. A DBE may
@ be allowed to augment their work force with personnel which
normally work for another firm. If the request can be approved
prior to commencing work.
NOTE: All arrangements must be presented in writing and

@ pre-approved by the DBE Office.
• DBE must supervise daily operations of their portion of

contracted work. The only two acceptable ways for a DBE
to supervise daily operations are:
1) The DBE owner may act as the superintendent and

directly supervise work, or
2) A skilled and knowledgeable superintendent

employed and paid wages by the DBE must directly
supervise that work.
If the latter is used, the DBE owner must be actively

involved in making operational and managerial decisions of
the firm. Basically, this means that all administrative
functions shall be performed by personnel responsible to,
or employed by, the DBE at facilities or locations under the
DBE's control.
• DBEs shall supervise and perform contracted work with

workers on their payroll and under their direct supervision.
The DBE and the superintendent must, on a full-time basis,
supervise and control contracted work. Supervision of
contract work by personnel normally employed by another
contractor or by personnel not under the DBE's control
constitutes failure to perform a commercially useful
function.
(Responsibilities include minimum requirements for DBE manufacturers,

@ dealers, transportation services, and subcontractors.) DBE
subcontractors that indicate work which will be performed by employees
56
2002
@ of another firm or with leased equipment should be questioned. The DBE

Office shall be notified in all cases where there is a question regarding
“commercially useful function”.
3. Partial Subcontract of an Item
It is not unusual for DBE subcontractors to be involved in only part of a

contract item.
For conditions where a subcontract does not exist but a DBE firm is
manufacturing, supplying, or trucking materials to the job site, this dollar
value will not be used to determine the percent subcontracted as specified
in the Specifications.
Inspection staff must monitor work performed and periodically inform the
Project Manager as to which individuals and equipment actually worked so
payrolls can be spot-checked.
C. Construction Period
The Project Manager and inspectors must review work subcontracted to DBE
subcontractors to assure work is being performed and that DBEs are performing
a commercially useful function. Where work is performed by any other contractor
or with equipment not owned by the DBE, the inspector shall issue a
noncompliance notice citing violation of Supplemental Specifications for Specific
Affirmative Action Responsibilities. This noncompliance shall be immediately
@ reported to the Project Manager, who will in turn immediately notify the DBE
Office.
Prime contractors will be given credit toward the DBE contract goal only when a
DBE performs a commercially useful function. The requirements for a
commercially useful function are outlined in the previous section "Subcontract
Approval."
A DBE may lease equipment consistent with standard industry practice provided
a rental agreement specifying the terms of the lease arrangement is approved
@ prior to a DBE starting work. If equipment is of a specialized nature, the lease
may include an equipment operator. No credit will be given for the cost of
equipment leased or rented from the prime contractor.
DBEs shall negotiate cost, arrange for delivery, and pay for materials and
supplies required for their portion of the contract work. Invoices for materials shall
be invoiced to the DBE firm and not to a prime contractor.
57
2002
A prime contractor may occasionally find it necessary to ensure that payments

are made to suppliers for materials used by subcontractors. When such a joint
@ check payment arrangement is pre-approved by the Highway Civil Rights
Coordinator, counting the cost of materials actually incorporated into the project
by a DBE subcontractor toward DBE participation will be allowable provided the
DBE:
• orders and schedules the delivery of materials, and
• is fully responsible for ensuring that materials meet Specifications.
When the DBE office approves such payments to be made by the prime
@
contractor, payments must be made by preparing jointly endorsed checks signed
by the DBE and supplier.
No credit shall be allowed toward the DBE goal for cost of materials placed by a
DBE subcontractor when payment is made by deducting this payment from the
prime contractor's payment to the DBE.
Project Managers must evaluate and document performance of the DBE's activity
on all projects as part of the normal project contract compliance monitoring. On-
site project monitoring by field personnel shall include employee assignments,
equipment used, and supervision of the work. All irregularities must be
documented in the field books and immediately reported to the prime contractor,
@
and the Contract Compliance Officer in the DBE Office.
@ Project Managers shall not allow a prime contractor or another contractor

to perform work that has been committed to a DBE subcontractor without
prior written approval from the DBE Office.
In situations where a DBE subcontractor cannot (or is not) performing, the prime
contractor must follow all steps described in Supplemental Specification for
Specific Affirmative Action Responsibilities. Upon receipt of a signed statement
from the DBE and documentation where the prime contractor will satisfy the goal
with other items or DBEs, the Project Manager may recommend to the DBE
Office that the commitment be waived and the required goal adjusted. The DBE
@ Office must provide written approval of all substitutions before any changes in
subcontracted work are performed.
D. Post Construction
Prime contractors shall submit a completed "Identification of DBE Goal

Achievement" (DR Form 441) with the final project documents to the DBE office.
@
The subcontractor submits DR Form 442 "Identification of Work Performed."
Blank forms are provided in Appendix 1 and at the website. These forms certify
the dollar amount paid to each DBE. DBE Office must compare the dollar
amounts on Forms 441 and 442 to dollar amounts committed to a DBE on
"Required DBE Participation Form." The prime contractor will be assessed a
penalty by change order for failure to satisfy the DBE commitments. This penalty
may be reduced when conditions described in
58
2002
Contract Quantities
@ Supplemental Specification for Affirmative Action Responsibilities are satisfied.

Project Managers must include a written explanation describing situations,
background, and findings which resulted in reductions or adjustments.
Unique problems have been noted with the goals and variables of the DBE
program. Documentation of any activity related to the program is important and
must not be overlooked. Record all telephone or personal contacts noting time,
place, and details.
The DR Form 440 Contractor EEO Compliance Record has been eliminated.
These records are no longer to be maintained.
103.28 LEASE OF PROPERTY BEYOND THE HIGHWAY RIGHT-OF-WAY
The NDR has found that it is more cost effective and quicker to have the contractor make
most land use agreements for areas outside the highway right-of-way. This means
borrow sites, plant sites, storage areas, parking lots, and so forth are the contractor's
responsibility to lease.
103.29 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF HIGHWAY RIGHT-OF-WAY
Occasionally a contractor requests permission to establish a plant site or a material

stockpile on highway right-of-way. In reviewing these requests, the District Engineer
must consider the impact of vehicles (trucks or equipment) entering and leaving these
sites on public traffic. In situations where these vehicles must enter an open ramp or
lane at a point where access is not allowed to the general public, the request shall
normally be denied. On two-lane roads if an access permit can be obtained and public
convenience and safety is not adversely affected, the request may be approved. On
closed sections of the highway, right-of-way may be used as long as trucks can enter
and leave the closed road safely.
Many times a contractor will have to exit a controlled-access facility to deliver materials
such as mulch, subdrain, guardrail, etc. These stockpiles may be allowed as long as the
material is to be used in the general vicinity where stockpiled and is stored beyond the
“clear zone”.
NOTE: In these situations, the contractor will be responsible to initiate and provide a
storm water permit for their operations in that area.
103.30 “CONTRACT QUANTITIES”
The Project Manager and the contractor may agree to a final payment for an item based
on contract quantities, i.e., plan quantity. The Project Manager shall verify that the plan
quantities are reasonably accurate. If the contractor concurs with the final quantities as
shown on the PM Final Estimate, the Project Manager will forward this concurrence to the
Construction Division with a copy to the contractor for information.
Final review corrections should be limited to errors of $150.00 or more per pay item. Do
not waste time and money making small corrections.
59
2002
Contractor’s Sales Tax Exemption
103.31 CONTRACTOR'S SALES TAX EXEMPTION
When a NDR contract is awarded, the Contracts Section of the Construction Division will
issue the prime contractor a "Purchasing Agent Appointment" (DR Form 2-A) and an
"Exempt Sale Certificate for Contracts" (DR Form 2-B). These forms allow the
contractor to purchase materials that are to be incorporated into a highway project
without paying any sales tax. The prime contractor is allowed to make copies of both
forms and provide them to the project subcontractors for their use. The prime contractor
must contact the Contracts Section [(402) 479-4851] to obtain an extension. The
Contracts Section completes the extension by issuing a new "Purchasing Agent
Appointment" (DR Form 2-A).
103.32 LOTUS NOTES – NOTIFICATION
Field personnel are strongly encouraged to open their electronic mail daily. The
Construction Division (and others) use it regularly and expect messages sent to be
messages read.
Any time a plan error/omission is discovered or if for any reason the contract must be
changed, the PM should send a Lotus note with appropriate details to the designer
(Bridge or Roadway), Construction Division, and if necessary, to Materials & Research.
103.33 PRIME CONTRACTORS/SUBCONTRACTORS
Project Managers should be reminded that correspondence pertaining to a subcontractor

should be directed to the prime contractor.
60
2002
Freight Rates
103.40 FREIGHT RATES
Nebraska does not regulate freight rates on bulk containerized materials like cement, fly
ash, and asphalt cement; and, therefore, the Construction Division will not make freight
rate adjustments.
61
Barricades, Danger, Warning and Detour Signs
103.50 BARRICADES, DANGER, WARNING, AND DETOUR SIGNS
SSHC Subsection 107.07 provides for furnishing, erection, and maintenance of

necessary barricades, lights, signs, and watchpersons, in accordance with the latest
edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (each
Project Manager should have a copy) and taking necessary precautions for the protection
of the work and safety of the public by the contractor. The contractor must erect
advance warning signs for traffic hazards created by his/her operations, and at points
where the work crosses or coincides with an existing road, in accordance with the plan
requirements.
Signs which have been furnished to the contractor at no cost for placement on projects
under construction must be returned to the appropriate NDR location in reusable
condition when they are no longer needed. A charge will be made to the contractor for
the value of signs damaged or not returned. The office issuing the sign will determine the
charge for damage or loss.
62
Safety and Health
103.60 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Nebraska provides job safety and health protection for all workers throughout the State of
Nebraska.
The Labor Department is responsible for administering safety policy. The Nebraska
Labor Department adopts federal occupational safety and health standards as State of
Nebraska standards. Employers and employees are required to comply with these
standards. The OSHA requirements are enforced by the Federal Government. The
Nebraska Department of Labor will, upon request, conduct consultation visits of the job
site.
103.61 Responsibility of Contractor
Contractors shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs for their employees in connection with the work. Furthermore,
contractors are responsible to provide a safe work site for NDR employees.
Safety Inspections
The contractor may conduct safety inspections at the start of all major phases of the
project. The contractor is to document inspections and provide a written report to the
Project Manager.
Postings
The contractor is required to have four documents regarding safety posted on the project
bulletin board:
• Job Safety & Health Protection (OSHA 2203)
• "Log and Summary of Occupational Injury and Illnesses" Poster (OSHA

Form 200) (11 or more employees)
• Emergency Action Fire Prevention Plan (See Appendix 3)
• Emergency Phone Numbers (i.e., 911, Poison Control, etc.) (See Appendix 3).
Checklist Safety Program
• Does the contractor have a definite safety program?
• Does the program have the active and continued support of company
management?
• Has responsibility for safety been assigned to a specific top company official? Is
there a staff for full time safety work?
63
Safety and Health
• Does the contractor know the governmental safety regulations and consider
carefully the cost of safety in bidding and executing the work under contracts?
• In dealing with labor, subcontractors, and material and equipment suppliers, does
the contractor make clear the safety responsibilities and requirements to be met?
• Does the contractor make frequent safety inspections of operations on the

project? Does this include subcontractor operations?
• Does the contractor train his/her employees to recognize and to avoid unsafe
conditions and practices related to their individual work assignments?
• Are all accidents investigated, recorded, and reported?
• Does the contractor keep in touch with responsible officials and organizations
concerned with standards and with enforcement of occupational safety and health
requirements?
This checklist may be used when discussing Safety at the pre-construction conference.
Crystalline Silica Exposure & OSHA Notification
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) has expressed some
concerns to the Department regarding the health hazards of exposure to crystalline silica
dust.
The Project Manager must notify OSHA of any project where any of the following types of
work are anticipated at some time during the life of the project.
1) Lead paint removal when the removal is identified in the Special Provisions as
being a hazard.
2) Sandblasting
3) Concrete removals done with a jackhammer
4) Concrete sawing
5) Concrete drilling
Notification will consist of furnishing OSHA:
1) The project number and general location

2) The project manager’s name and phone number.
3) A copy of the contractor’s schedule (one of the four required by
Subsection 108.07 of the 1997 Standard Specifications). Delete all references to
any contractor on the project.
64
Safety and Health
Notification should be made to:
Bernard Hauber, Industrial Hygienist

Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Overland-Wolfe Building, Suite 100
6910 Pacific Street
Omaha, NE 68106
After the original notification has been made, it will be OSHA’s responsibility to
determine if and when they choose or desire to make an on-site inspection.
65
2002
Construction Inspection – Contract Time Determination
104.00 -- CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION
104.01 CONTRACT TIME DETERMINATION (SSHC Subsection 108.02)

Tentative Beginning Date - The proposal will show a tentative date on which it is
anticipated that the contractor may begin operations.
In most cases, the tentative beginning dates are established several weeks in advance of
the letting date by determining the latest possible date the Department would like to see
the work completed and backing out the estimated number of days required to complete
the work. Consequently, any requests to delay the start of work on a project are
examined very carefully before being approved. Additionally, the approval to delay the
start of work on a project may be made contingent upon certain concessions by the
contractor (such as the imposition of a disincentive payment for a late completion).
In the case of contracts involving multiple time allowances, extensive utility relocation, or
work to be performed by others (e.g., railroads, cities, counties), it may be necessary to
delay the start of work for several weeks after the tentative starting dates shown in the
proposal.
If the tentative beginning date shown in the proposal appears to be earlier or later than
believed possible or practical due to job, weather, traffic, or other conditions relevant to
the project, the Construction Engineer should be notified promptly.
Notice to Proceed - The contractor will be given a Notice to Proceed by the
Construction Division, and work should not begin until the notice has been issued (or at
least verbally acknowledged) by the Construction Division.
Normally, the Notice to Proceed date will coincide with the tentative beginning date shown
in the proposal; and the Notice to Proceed will automatically be issued after the contract
is in place, usually a week or two prior to the starting date. In some cases, however,
such as for seeding or landscaping projects, the Construction Division will check with the
District Construction Engineer to verify that the site is ready for work to proceed before
issuing the notice. The issuance of the Notice will also be delayed when a project is let
far in advance of the tentative starting date -- almost always resulting in a request for an
early start by the contractor.
It should be noted that in SiteManager, the Notice to Proceed date is recorded in
SiteManager under “Key Dates” as the “Notice to Begin Work” date. SiteManager’s
“Notice to Proceed” date is actually the contract execution date.
Some contracts contain an “early start provision”. For those projects, the contractor may
begin work prior to the tentative starting date by notifying the District Engineer of his/her
intent to begin work early. The notice must be given two weeks prior to the intended
starting date and is not subject to review by the Department. When such notice is given,
@ the District should notify the Construction Division of the need to issue the notice and the
date for which it should be issued.
For those contracts which do not contain the “early start provision”, requests to begin
work prior to the tentative starting date should be made by the contractor directly to the
Construction Engineer in Lincoln. In many cases, such requests are made following
issuance of the original Notice to Proceed. If the request is approved, a revised notice
will be issued.
66
2002
Requests to begin work after the tentative starting date shown in the proposal should be
made by the contractor to the Construction Engineer in Lincoln.
Beginning the Counting of Working Days - The counting of working days or calendar
days must begin on the date established in the written Notice to Proceed or on the actual
beginning date, whichever is earlier. Accordingly, working day report entries should be
made beginning with the established beginning date or actual beginning date – whichever
occurs first. Entries should continue for each and every day (seven days per week) until
the project has been tentatively accepted. Reports may be suspended when the work is
suspended for an extended period.
Under specified conditions, some items of work may be performed for which working
days or calendar days will not be charged. Even under these circumstances, however,
working day reports must be created to document that work was performed without the
charge of working days or calendar days. Work subject to this rule is listed in
SSHC Subsection 108.02.
Calendar Day - SSHC Subsection 101.0313 gives the definition of a calendar day.
Working Day - SSHC Subsection 101.0399 gives the definition of a working day.
Current Controlling Operation - SSHC Subsection 101.0326 gives the definition of the
current controlling operation.
While the counting of calendar days is quite straightforward and is usually dependent only
on the passage of time, the counting of working days requires a determination of the
current controlling operation. A basic test for the determining the current controlling
operation on any given day is whether or not the non-performance of that operation will
delay the completion of the work.
The contractor’s project schedule can be a very useful tool in determining the current
controlling operation. The specifications require that the critical path activities be shown
on the schedule; and those activities, in essence, are the controlling activities. Because
the specifications allow several types of schedules and because contractors possess
varying degrees of skill in preparing the progress schedule, it is strongly recommended
that the Project Manager and Project Superintendent discuss the project schedule and
come to some mutual agreement concerning the path of critical activities - as may be the
case when a bar graph shows several activities occurring at the same time.
The contractor has the right to object to the charge of working days, and those kinds of
objections will be minimized if there is an “up front” agreement regarding the controlling
operation. There usually will be little dispute regarding whether or not the work was
performed.
The current controlling operation should be shown in the Project Manager’s diary and on
the working day reports. Any discussions or agreements with the contractor regarding it
should also be documented in the diary. The assessment of working days is a very
important task for the Project Manager, but should not be considered extremely difficult.
Common sense and fairness should prevail.
67
Following are the basic criteria for determining the charging of working days:
1. Weekdays, Monday through Friday, except for Martin Luther King Day,
Presidents’ Day, Arbor Day, Columbus Day, and Veterans Day, are to be
counted as working days -- whether the contractor works or not -- if
he/she is not prevented by weather, soil conditions beyond his/her control
from proceeding on the current controlling operation for at least 50 percent
of the hours in a normal schedule with 80 percent of the normal work
force. Martin Luther King Day, Presidents’ Day, Arbor Day, Columbus
Day, and Veterans Day -- regardless of whether or not the contractor
works -- are never counted as working days.
2. Saturdays will not be counted as working days, except for certain cases
when New Year’s Day, Independence Day, and Christmas Day fall on
Saturday and the contractor works (any work) and inspection or
engineering work by the Department is required.
3. Sundays will not be counted as working days unless the contractor works
(any work) and inspection or engineering work by the Department is
required.
4. New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day,

Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day will
not be counted as a working day unless the contractor works (any work)
and inspection or engineering work by the Department is required.
It is emphasized that if the Project Manager does not count working days because of
delays "beyond the contractor's control", the situation involved should be clearly beyond
the contractor's control. The Project Manager should be thoroughly familiar with the
provisions of Specification 108.02. For example, Paragraph 7 provides consideration will
not be given to possible "loss of efficiency" due to prosecution of the work during the
winter months in the charging of working days when the special provisions require
performance of work during cold weather periods. The following example illustrates the
application of this provision:
On a clear, cold day in January, a pile-driving operation may be 80 percent as efficient as

it would be on a fair, warm day in July. Under this provision, a working day would be
counted against the current controlling pile-driving operation even though the relative
efficiency of the operation was reduced. When bidding on work that is to be
accomplished during the winter months, the contractor is presumed to have accounted
for the loss of efficiency. However, if sufficient snowfall or extremes of wind or
temperature make it physically impractical to prosecute the pile driving operations,
working days would not be counted under such conditions.
Shortages of material delaying prosecution of the controlling operation would not normally
be considered beyond the contractor's control. Unusual, extensive, or industry-wide
situations (strikes, transportation tie-up conditions, industry-wide shortages) may
constitute delays beyond the contractor's control if the contractor has used due care and
planning in ordering and scheduling delivery of the materials. The
68
Project Manager investigates and determines when shortages of materials are beyond
the contractor's control.
Shortages of labor are specifically eliminated as justification for an extension of time

(SSHC Subsection 108.02, Paragraph 9).
SSHC Subsection 108.05 requires the contractor to employ sufficient equipment of

adequate size and in such mechanical condition as to meet the requirements of the
work. Accordingly, delays resulting from breakdown or malfunction of the contractor's
equipment are not considered to be beyond the contractor's control.
Working Day Report and Diary Record - SSHC Subsection 108.02, Paragraph 5
provides that the contractor will be furnished with a copy of the weekly report of working
days. These reports are generated, compiled, and mailed from the Lincoln office at
mid-week, so it is very important that the working day information is entered promptly
following the completion of the week’s work. Special efforts should be made to impress
upon consultants employed by the Department or other governmental agencies that they
must submit their working day report information without delay at the beginning of each
week.
In addition to our contractual requirement to furnish a copy of the working day report to
the contractor, these reports are reviewed by one or more individuals in the central office.
The following information should be included on each report:
• Notice to Proceed date (Notice for Work to Begin)

• Actual starting date (Work Begin)
• Current Controlling Operation
• Hours Worked on the CCO
• Hours worked on non-CCO work if CCO hours are zero
• Reason for charge or non-charge of a day if the charge is not what might normally
be expected. (Such comments must be entered into the “CCO” field in
SiteManager to be visible on the report.)
It is the contractor’s obligation to review the working day report when it is received and
promptly file any objections to it. The Project Manager is obligated to promptly review the
objections and rule on their validity. When such reviews are delayed until the project is
complete, there is too great a risk that the details affecting the decision can be forgotten.
Whatever the result, the decision should be documented -- either by letter (preferably) or
diary entry when the objection is denied or by the issuance of a Time Extension
Document when an adjustment to the time allowance is justified.
69
(This page is continued from Page 69)
Although the contractor is required to file an objection to the working day count within 14
days, claims often fail to surface until the latter stages of a job when the remaining
working days are few. For this reason, it is especially important that a complete and
accurate diary record be maintained. For purposes of making the initial assessment of
working days -- and any subsequent review -- the following information, if applicable,
should be recorded or documented daily in the Project Manager’s diary:
1. The current controlling operation

2. The weather
3. The work performed
4. Unusual or adverse weather or soil conditions encountered
5. Other unusual occurrences impacting work on the project
6. The times that major work operations halted and resumed and the
reasons why
7. Changes in the work force effecting work on the controlling operation
8. Major deviations from the contractor’s approved progress schedule
9. Conversations pertaining to any of the above
The need for this information isn’t always apparent until the work is completed or until a
request has been made for reconsideration of the charging of working days.
69a
69b
104.02 CHARACTER OF WORKPERSONS, METHODS, AND EQUIPMENT
The Project Manager may have the contractor remove intemperate or incompetent
superintendents or workers (SSHC Subsection 108.05). The PM may also order the
removal of unsatisfactory equipment (SSHC Subsection 107.01). However, the
contractor should be given complete latitude in the supervision, methods, and equipment
used in performing the work unless the specifications specifically prescribe the methods
and equipment to be used.
70
Construction Inspection - Temporary Suspension of Work
104.03 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK (SSHC Section 108)
Specification Provisions - If weather or other conditions are such as to clearly

determine the unsuitability of prosecution of the work for more than two weeks, the
Project Manager should discuss the situation with the District Construction Engineer, and
with his/her approval, temporarily suspend the work and the counting of working days.
The working day report should be clearly marked "Work Temporarily Suspended". The
condition or situation which makes the suspension necessary should be briefly described
under "Explanation of Delays" in the report which will constitute the written order
suspending the work. The term or estimated length of suspension should be included in
the explanation. Typical explanations are listed:
1. "One-half application of detour gravel placement completed. Work and working

day reports are suspended until approximately (date) when second one-half
application will be placed."
2. "Bituminous base (or mat) surface course operations and working day reports are
suspended because of lateness of season. The consideration of working days
resume approximately (date) with the return of weather conditions favorable to
the prosecution of this work."
3. "Grading operations and working day reports suspended until approximately

(date) when progress of the bridge work will permit backfilling and finishing
around the structures."
4. "Bridge operations and working day reports suspended until approximately

(date) when progress of grading work will permit construction of concrete
approach slabs and guard rail at the bridge locations."
5. Winter Work Provision: When the contract includes special provisions allowing
work through the winter without the charging of working days, reports must be
submitted showing the hours the contractor worked even though working days
are not charged. If the contractor suspends operations on the project, reports
may be suspended; but they must resume on the date specified in the special
provisions for the end of the winter work season or when the contractor resumes
work, whichever is first.
Specialty Items, Time Suspensions - There have been inquiries regarding the propriety
of temporarily suspending the work for short or limited periods of time, in the
performance of minor, specialized work items which are usually performed by
subcontractors or specialized personnel or technicians, rather than with the contractor's
own forces. Examples of such work items would be small quantities of electrical, traffic
control or lighting work, the painting of one or two small bridges, etc. Small quantities of
normal work items which are outside the contractor's field of skill and qualification would
also be included. Examples of the latter would be minor quantities of concrete items,
sodding, waterway protection, etc. included in a grading contract or minor items of
grading work included in a contract for bridges or for surfacing.
It is recognized that at times the contractor may have difficulty in getting the specialized
personnel or subcontractor, skilled in performing minor specialized items of work, to
71
Construction Inspection - Temporary Suspension of Work
schedule and perform such work precisely when the site is available. Accordingly, it is
considered proper to authorize a temporary suspension of the work in such cases,
subject to the following:
1. The work is minor, specialized work, which is to be performed by specialized

forces rather than the usual work forces.
2. The suspension will be for a limited, reasonable length of time; that such
suspension will not adversely affect the scheduled use of the completed facility by
the state; and that the suspension will not delay the work of any other contractor.
3. The contractor should make written request for such suspension to the Project
Manager, listing the reasons for and the length of the proposed suspension.
The Project Manager should discuss the matter with the District Construction Engineer
and may, with his/her approval, make such temporary suspension of the work, subject to
meeting the conditions listed above.
72
Construction Inspection - Progress of Work
104.04 PROGRESS OF WORK (SSHC Subsection 108.07)
The Project Manager should monitor the contractor's progress in relation to his/her
progress schedule and the requirements of SSHC Subsection 108.07. If a contractor's
progress falls seriously behind the schedule necessary to complete the work in the
allotted time, the Project Manager and the District Construction Engineer should review
the possible causes for this situation. If the contractor's progress is behind in proportion
to the working days charged, one of the three conditions listed will probably be the cause.
1. Working days are being improperly charged. Weather or other adverse

conditions or conditions beyond the contractor's control may be preventing the
contractor from working with 80 percent of forces or from working on the
controlling operation. If work days appear to have been improperly charged, the
matter should be discussed with the Project Manager; and, if necessary, revised
working day reports or Time Extension Documents should be prepared to correct
the working days charged.
2. Work is being delayed by causes beyond the contractor's control. It this is true, it
should be documented by letter from the contractor and also in field records
(diary). The District Construction Engineer must approve an extension in the time
allowance.
3. The contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient forces and equipment to
complete the contract within the specified time allowance.
Progress is considered not satisfactory if the work falls 10 percent behind the
contractor's work schedule. When this occurs and condition three appears to be the
cause, the District Construction Engineer shall immediately notify the contractor in writing
of the steps considered necessary to expedite completion of the work in a satisfactory
manner. The Construction Division will maintain a log of this action and, if necessary,
shall have the responsibility of taking further action as provided under the specifications.
73
Construction Inspection - Winter Work
104.05 WINTER WORK (Special Provision)
Determination of contract working days charged during the winter is made according to
the rules set forth in the Specifications unless the proposal contains what is commonly
referred to as the Winter Work Provisions. This special provision will generally permit the
contractor to work without the charge of days during the months of December, January,
February, and March. (Days near December 1 and March 31 may be selected to delimit
the period so that the affected period of time begins and ends on a Sunday or Saturday,
respectively.)
The “winter work” provisions are usually included in contracts where the Department
anticipates work to carry over from one construction season to the next. They may be
added to a contract by preparing a supplemental agreement to that affect, but they should
not be added automatically. For example, a contractor should not be rewarded with the
winter work provisions when he or she has failed to complete a project as scheduled
because of inadequate prosecution of the work.
On the other hand, a contractor desiring to start a project early or a contractor delayed for
reasons beyond his or her control should probably be granted the winter work provisions
as an encouragement to pursue the work.
The Project Manager may require the contractor to place temporary materials prior to a
suspension in the following situations:
• A project (or a required intermediate portion) is not completed within the allowed
contract time, and
• Work continues (or is required) after November 30th, and
• Due to weather conditions, work cannot be completed.
Typically, temporary materials will be required for safety or soil erosion considerations.
All temporary materials shall be furnished, placed, and removed (if required) prior to start-
up at the contractor's expense.
Project Suspensions
If work is suspended, with approval of the District Engineer, working days would not be
charged.
104.06 WEEKLY REPORT OF WORKING DAYS
Working day reports are maintained in and generated by SiteManager.
74
Construction Inspection - Equipment Rental Rates
104.07 RENTAL RATE GUIDELINES (SSHC Subsection 109.05 and Section 919)
Contractor-Owned Equipment
The following guidelines apply to the determination of rental rates for contractor-owned
equipment used on an “extra work” basis.
1. a. The Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment should be used to
determine the hourly rental rate of the equipment in question.
b. In order to determine the proper rental rate, equipment should be identified

as completely as possible (make, model, year of manufacture). When
practical to do so, it may prove helpful to examine the Blue Book before
beginning the task of identifying the equipment. Such an examination may
lend some insight into the identifying characteristics of the equipment
(such as bucket capacity, horsepower, fuel type, etc.) and the potential
equipment attachments that may qualify for additional payment.
c. The Serial Number Guide for Used Construction Equipment may be

helpful in identifying the age of a piece of equipment.
2. The hourly rental rate shall be calculated by dividing the monthly rental rate shown
in the Blue Book, including that of attachments actually used, by 176.
3. The hourly rental rate shall be:

a. increased or decreased by the regional/climatic ownership factor
published in the Blue Book. The Blue Book publishes an individual table in
each section showing the adjustment factor for each state. The tables
showing the regional/climatic factors are usually located at the beginning
of each section with other rate adjustment tables.
b. decreased (or allowed to remain the same) by the age factor found in the
Blue Book. (See 1.c. above)
4. The estimated hourly operating costs, including those of attachments used in the
prosecution of the work, shall be determined from the information shown in the
Blue Book. Adjustments due to age or regional/climatic conditions ARE NOT
applied to the estimated hourly operating costs.
5. a. The total hourly rate (sum of adjusted hourly rate and estimated operating
costs) shall be increased by 15% to compensate the contractor for
overhead and profit. (See “Additional Considerations”)
b. The 1995 Metric Supplemental Specifications have already incorporated
this change in policy (as will the 1997 Standard Specifications). By this
directive, dated March 28, 1997, authorization is granted to pay the
additional 15% for overhead and profit on contracts being built under the
1985 Standard Specifications. A change order will not be required.
75
6. a. Equipment operators, when applicable, shall be compensated according

to the rules set forth in the Specifications, average hourly wages being
calculated by dividing the total hours worked during the week, including
overtime, into the gross wages earned during the week.
b. Equipment may be shown as “fully operated” by adding an amount equal

to 150% of the operator’s average hourly wage to the rental rate. When
this method is chosen, the equipment rate will be eligible for the additional
15% for overhead and profit; the adjusted operator’s rate is not.
7. a. The number of hours of “equipment rental” for which payment will be

made for each item of equipment must be determined on a case-by-case
basis.
b. In general, when equipment is already on the project, payment hours shall

be limited to the actual hours of use, with no deductions being made for
minor interruptions of the work. If the equipment has been dedicated to
another operation and was actively being used in that operation when it
was reassigned to the “extra work”, consideration may be given to paying
for “standby time” for idle periods exceeding two consecutive hours which
are not the fault of the contractor.
Rented or Leased Equipment
The following guidelines apply to the determination of rental rates for rented or leased
equipment used on an “extra work” basis.
1. When it becomes necessary for the contractor to rent or lease equipment to

complete extra work, the contractor shall be compensated 115% of the actual
invoice cost of the rented or leased equipment. This procedure provides
compensation for overhead and profit.
2. a. The rental or lease rate shown on the invoice may be compared to rates
published in the AED Green Book to determine if it is reasonable.
3. Because the estimated hourly operating costs shown in the Blue Book include
costs associated with the maintenance and replacement of items such as tires,
pumps, and other components which are the responsibility of the owner, the
operating costs shown in the Blue Book shall not be included for payment.
However, if the contractor itemizes and documents the daily costs incurred for
fuel, lubricants, etc., those costs can be included for payment.
4. a. Equipment operators, when applicable, shall be compensated accordingly

to rules set forth in the Specifications, average hourly wages being
calculated by dividing the total hours worked during the week, including
overtime, into the gross wages earned during the week.
76
b. In some cases, where the invoice provides a convenient way to do so,

equipment may be shown as “fully operated” by adding an amount equal
to 150% of the operator’s average hourly wage to the rental rate.
Additional Considerations
1. Mobilization
a. If the equipment needed to perform extra work is not located on the

project, the contractor is entitled to compensation for mobilizing and
demobilizing the equipment. Labor and hauling equipment used to
transport the equipment to and from the project is eligible for
compensation. The equipment needed for the extra work is eligible for
compensation at “standby” rates if it is transported during normal working
hours.
b. Reasonable costs associated with readying the equipment for transport

(assembly and disassembly) shall also be allowed.
2. Standby Time
a. If the contractor is required to idle equipment engaged on “extra work” and

the equipment was:
1) already located on the project site and engaged in other

productive activities, or
2) brought onto the project for the specific purpose of performing

extra work,
he/she may be entitled to compensation for “standby time”. The

equipment must be idled due to reasons beyond the contractor’s control
and not be used for the performance of other work.
b. When payment for standby time is justified, payment for the idle hours
should be made at one-half of the established rental rate (excluding
estimated operating costs).
c. Additional compensation for overhead and profit shall not be made for any
equipment considered to be “on standby”.
d. Operators of idled equipment are eligible for compensation according to

the procedures previously described provided they are not reassigned to
other duties or taken off the payroll.
e. The sum of “active” and “standby” time for any piece of equipment or its
operator will generally be limited to 8 hours per day, but must be
monitored to insure that an unreasonable limitation is not placed on the
standby hours. For example, if a piece of machinery is utilized from 8:00
to noon, stops for lunch until 12:30, and then resumes working until 2:30
77
when an unavoidable delay stops activity on the “extra work” until the next
morning, the standby time should be limited to 2 hours -- the hours which
would have been utilized to complete an 8-hour day.
3. Reconciliation of Records
It is highly recommended that the Department’s records and the contractor’s

records of labor, equipment, and materials used on any “extra work” be
compared, reconciled, and documented daily.
78
Construction Inspection - Change Order
@ 104.08 CHANGE ORDER - SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENTS

(SSHC Subsection 104.02)
Change Orders are used to:
• Change the authorized quantity of a contract item. This includes increases,

decreases, or deletions to contract quantities.
• Add a new item or material to an existing contract. Often this is a result of plan
revisions or a change in scope from what was originally envisioned at time of
letting.
• Serve as a source document for the Controller Office.
• Officially document changes to the contract documents. CO/SAs and work

orders are written orders to a prime contractor which are initiated and prepared by
the Project Manager. Once signed by all parties, these documents become a
legally binding part of the contract ordering a specific change to the original
contract.
Policy for Change Orders
A. Contractor Markup
Subcontracted Items. Extra work performed by a subcontractor entitles a prime

contractor an allowance to cover administration expenses. This markup is not to
apply to incentive payments. The percentage allowed for administration expense
is discussed in SSHC Subsection 109.05.
Contract Unit Price. Change orders covering an overrun/underrun (SSHC

Subsection 104.02) of items at contract unit prices are NOT eligible for any
additive like an allowance for administration expenses. This includes work which
was done by a subcontractor. The contract unit price should have already
considered any necessary additives for administrative expenses.
The contractor may request a change order when additional work differs
materially in kind or nature from the work included in the originally proposed
construction.
A major item of work is defined as an item whose total original contract cost
exceeds 10 percent of its original group total amount. The price for a pay item
may require adjustment when a major item is increased in excess of 125 percent
or decreased below 75 percent of the original contract quantity. Any allowance for
an increase in quantity shall apply only to that portion in excess of 125 percent of
the original contract item quantity, or in case of a decrease below 75 percent, to
the actual amount of work performed.
79
2002
A contractor may request a price adjustment to recover lost administration

expense for underruns amounting to more than 25 percent of the bid amount for a
major item of work. A contractor is allowed to recover only that portion of lost
administration expense represented by the underrun.
By the same reasoning, a like price adjustment may be made to reduce the cost
of major items of work which overrun by more than 25 percent, since the
contractor should have already included overhead expenses in their bid. Overrun
price adjustments apply to only that portion/quantity which is more than
125 percent.
Agreed Unit Price. Extra work orders based on an agreed price or lump sum
should have overhead considered as a part of the negotiation. The agreed unit
price may include the cost of overhead for handling subcontracted items. It may
be included in lump sum items if justified. However, if negotiations specifically
excluded markup, the item may be shown as a separate entry on a cost work up
sheet.
Force Account. (SSHC Subsection 109.05) Specified force account
percentages for labor and material are intended to cover all costs that a
contractor may incur due to the work, regardless of who does that work (prime or
subcontractor). Force account work to a subcontractor will be authorized for
additional administration percentage to a prime.
Plan Revisions
Often, plan revisions result in Change Orders having to be negotiated.
Processing Change Orders resulting from plan revisions is sometimes delayed
due to disagreement on prices, lack of success in obtaining qualified
subcontractor(s), or various other reasons.
It is imperative that Project Managers actively pursue Change Order negotiations
to an early conclusion, especially if proposed work involves public safety
(guardrail, safety enhancement, etc.) or work related to a prolonged detour.
Obviously, agreement on unit prices is desirable. However, there are times that
work will have to proceed on a Force Account basis. In all cases, documented
agreements on the Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment for extra work
items must be obtained before the Change Order is written. NOTE: No work can
begin until the contractor has either agreed to a Change Order or agreed to a
basis of computing force account costs.
Change Order Approval Limits
Contracts are awarded for a specific dollar amount. Overruns or change orders expend
additional funds and can only be authorized by specific people.
FHWA/Certification Acceptance
FHWA projects that have full oversight have “FHWA” stamped in red on the front page of
the proposal. The Contracts Section makes the determination and affixes the red stamp.
80
2002
@ On FHWA oversight projects, current rules require that expenditures in excess of

$50,000 be discussed with the FHWA.
The following table shows the Department’s approval limits:
APPROVAL LIMITS
Deputy Director Over $150,000.00
Construction Engineer $50,000.00 to $150,000.00
District Engineer & DCE $0 to $50,000.00
Preparation of Change Order

The following instructions are applicable in the preparation of a Change Order-
Supplemental Agreement:
• Create a brief description of the work not in the contract.
• Show reasons for the change; or, if the document is a combination change order-
supplemental agreement, show purpose of the agreement. When the work to be
performed is not covered in the specifications, the name of the items shall be
worded to define the work to be performed. References should be made to
similar items in the specifications or plans and the method of measurement and
basis of payment definitely established.
• Show the basis of the unit prices established, such as comparison with unit
prices for similar contract items or the previous year's average contract unit
prices.
• Include statement as to the determination of a change in the contract time
allowance.
• Show the name of the FHWA engineer and date of discussion with him/her when
@ the Change Order is for more than $50,000.00 and the federal-aid contract is for
more than $1,000,000 and on the Interstate.
• Enter estimated increased and decreased changes in quantities of items of work.
Use standard item numbers and standard specification/contract wording, when
applicable, for the new item description you define.
All Change Orders (CO) and Change Order-Supplemental Agreements (CO/SA) shall
address the subject of additional working days or calendar days, if any, to be added to the
contract time allowance.
The original working day or calendar day allowance is calculated by assigning some
average rates of progress to the various items of work and then making some
assumptions as to which items might tend to overlap during the actual performance of
81
2002
the work. The system is not perfect; but, regardless of the result, it does provide all
bidders with a time frame upon which they can estimate a schedule for completion of the
work and prepare a bid.
The performance of extra work should not be cause to suspend the working day or
calendar day count. Working days or calendar days should be assessed for all extra and
originally contracted work according to the guidelines for doing so, and then any relief to
which the contractor might be entitled should be granted by issuing a time extension
document or addressing the time in a CO or CO/SA.
In SiteManager under Reference Tables/Standard Definitions there several option

@ clauses to be added to the Change Order. Four of the options pertain to
working/calendar days. They are further described below:
1. No additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance are
being granted. Additional working day or calendar day consideration is not
applicable to this change.
2. “_____” additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance
are being granted.
3. Additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance shall be
granted on the basis of the actual working days or calendar days charged for
performing the work under this agreement, provided that said work is judged to
be the controlling operation.
4. Additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance, if any,
shall be granted on the monetary value in accordance with Paragraph 10. of
Subsection 108.02 of the Standard Specifications.
The writer of the CO or CO/SA must use some judgment when determining which note
is appropriate. In fact, there may be instances when it will be necessary to write more
than one CO/SA because the items to be added to the contract do not all subject
themselves to the same rule. A little extra work, perhaps; but the right thing to do. The
discussion that follows should be helpful in determining which note to select.
Note 1 - No additional days
No additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance are
being granted. Additional working day or calendar day consideration is not
applicable to this change.
82
2002
@ This note could be used on any CO/SA which addresses subjects which are not
financial in nature. An example would be an early starting date coupled with the
conditional addition of the winter work special provision to the contract. A condition might
be that the contractor not make any claims for delays due to utilities not being out of the
way --- thus the need for a supplemental agreement requiring the contractor’s signature.
The work remains the same, however; and no change would be made in the contract
time allowance.
This note should also be used on any CO/SA that increases the value of the contract but
does not necessarily require additional time to perform the work. An example might be
the substitution of one type of asphaltic concrete for another. The concrete actually used
might be more expensive; but the time to mix, haul, lay, and roll it remains the same.
(This does not, however, preclude the granting of some additional time due to an overrun
of the final quantities.)
In general, this note could also be used on a CO/SA that has a negative financial impact
on the project. An example might be the substitution of an 18” culvert pipe for a 24” pipe.
The cost of the pipe and excavation is probably going to result in a savings to the project,
but it is not the Department’s policy to reduce the contract time allowance.
Note 2 - Specified number of days
“_____” additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance
are being granted.
This note is the preferred note in many cases and should be utilized whenever possible.
The Construction Division will rarely question the number of days granted, no
calculations are required by the Final Reviewers, and the fact that the CO/SA is signed
by the contractor leaves little opportunity for it to be contested. Obviously, the use of this
note is restricted to situations where the supplemental agreement is created after the
work is performed and the number of days required is known.
This note can appropriately be used in cases where the extra work is determined to be
the controlling operation when it was performed. It definitely should be used when the
time required to perform the work is grossly disproportionate to its monetary value. As an
extreme example, it may take just one day to add a million-dollar traffic controller on a
fifty-thousand-dollar project. Determination of an additional time allowance on the basis
of cost would obviously not be correct.
This note can also be used on a CO/SA that is more administrative in nature. As an
example, the contractor and the Department may negotiate some changes to the
contract for which a time adjustment is a condition of the agreement. This note is a
proper method to document the adjustment to the contract time allowance. It functions in
the same way as would a Time Extension Document.
83
2002
Note 3 - Unspecified number of days (controlling operation)
Additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance shall be
granted on the basis of the actual working days or calendar days charged for
performing the work under this agreement, provided that said work is judged to
be the controlling operation.
This note should be used in situations similar to those described for Note 2 when the
CO/SA is completed prior to the work being performed. When it can be anticipated that
the additional work will be the controlling operation or the value of the work is
disproportionate to the time required to perform it (especially when the work takes a long
time to complete but is not very expensive), this note should be used. In some cases, it
may be appropriate to grant some additional time on the basis of monetary value for extra
work performed when the work is not the controlling operation for the entire time required
to complete it.
The Project Manager should closely monitor the work when choosing this method of
calculating an increase to the contract time allowance. The completion of other work is
certainly not discouraged or prohibited, but the contractor should not be allowed to
intentionally slow the progress of the extra work to gain the advantage of allowing other
contract work to be completed concurrently during the time period being added.
Note 4 - Unspecified number of days (monetary value)
Additional working days or calendar days to the contract time allowance, if any,
shall be granted on the monetary value in accordance with Paragraph 10. of
Subsection 108.02 of the Standard Specifications.
This note serves to cover those situations not addressed by Notes 1, 2, or 3. It is an

inexact method, but is usually a fair way to provide additional time to the contract time
allowance when the methods associated with Notes 1, 2, and 3 are clearly not more
appropriate.
It should be used to address those additional items of work which are similar in nature to
other items of work in the contract but for which it is difficult to determine or monitor the
actual amount of time required to complete. An example might be additional work
performed sporadically over a long period of time or the addition of more work of a type
already in the contract --- such as may be added by a plan revision.
The use of this note does require the Finals Reviewers to calculate the amount of extra
time to be granted. The calculation should be done on the basis of the monetary value
alone, and no consideration should be given to whether or not working days or calendar
days were charged during the performance of the work. If the extra work to be added by
the CO/SA could have been anticipated prior to the letting, time certainly would have been
allowed for it; and it is only fair that an additional time allowance be considered after the
fact.
The Project Manager should have the best feel for the type of working day or calendar
day consideration that is most appropriate. He/she is encouraged to make a fair
84
2002
evaluation of the situation and select the method that fits. As indicated in the discussion
above, the use of Note 2 is encouraged.
85
2002
Cost Overrun/Underrun Notification (DR Form 74)
When project costs overrun or underrun by $50,000 or more and the change in cost is
not reflected in a "Change Order/Supplemental Agreement", the Project Manager shall
prepare and send a "Cost Overrun/Underrun Notification" (DR Form 74) to Laurie Burling
(BURLING) as an attachment via Lotus Notes. Laurie will print the form and circulate it
for the appropriate approval signatures.
DR Form 74 is available on Server 50 in the folder titled DORFORMS. Space is provided

in the identification block in the lower-left corner to provide a unique identification before
saving the file. The Project Manager’s name must be shown in the “Prepared by”
window, but an actual signature is not required to submit to the DR Form 74 to the
Controller Division.
Please note that the net change in the total project cost --- not an individual group --- shall
be the determining factor when deciding if an event should trigger the preparation of
DR Form 74. Caution is necessary as it is not always apparent when the costs have
overrun by more than $50,000. However, as soon as an overrun/underrun of $50,000 is
noticed, then a DR Form 74 must be initiated by the Project Manager.
Work Orders
(SSHC Subsection 109.05) - If there is sufficient time to execute a change order-
supplemental agreement or force account agreement prior to beginning the extra work,
no work order need be issued. The change order-supplemental agreement or force
account agreement shall provide the basis for authorization and payment for extra work.
The change order-supplemental agreement and force account agreement shall be
prepared in accordance with the instructions in this manual. The work order shall state
that the work will be done either by change order-supplemental agreement or by force
account agreement.
If prices can be agreed upon at the time of writing the work order (see
SSHC Subsection 109.05, Paragraphs 8 and 9 regarding rental rates), but insufficient
time exists to permit execution of a change order-supplemental agreement, a work order
shall be prepared authorizing such work and then be followed by a change
order-supplemental agreement formalizing the prices or basis of payment stated in the
work order.
If negotiated prices cannot be agreed upon at the time of writing the work order, the work
will be done by force account. Under certain circumstances, when approved by the
Construction Engineer, this may be changed at a later date to a change order-
supplemental agreement.
The work order shall be signed by both the Project Manager and the contractor or his/her
superintendent.
The Project Manager and District Office shall implement the following procedures to
expedite payment for extra work.
86
1. The Project Manager shall keep a file of work orders issued on a project
and shall take the necessary steps to get agreements consummated.
2. The Construction Division shall track the change orders progress.
3. Contractors must furnish back-up information to justify prices they quote

for extra work. Contractors should notify the state immediately of items of
work that they do not think are covered in the contract.
4. The introduction of any new item of work not included in the contract
items, no matter how small the quantity, must be covered by a change
order-supplemental agreement establishing a unit price for the new item.
5. Canceled items (materials furnished by the contractor and not used due to
a change in plans) will require the Project Manager to prepare an Imprest
Inventory Form 329 and a Change Order-Supplemental Agreement when
the material involved is to become the property of the State. Most often
involved are pieces of culvert pipe ordered but not installed. In some
cases the contractor may wish to retain the materials and no further
action need be taken when this is true. (See SSHC Subsections 109.06
for further information.)
Force Account Agreements and Statements (SSHC Subsection 109.05)
Force Account Agreements - It is necessary that force account agreements be

executed when the nature of the proposed work is such that the costs involved cannot be
accurately estimated or when there are no similar items included in the contract which
may be used as a basis in determining unit prices.
Before beginning the work or preparing the agreement, the Project Manager should have
a definite understanding with the contractor's representative regarding the labor,
equipment, and materials to be used and the manner in which the work is to be
prosecuted, and the rates to be paid for the equipment. If a satisfactory understanding
cannot be reached, the matter should be referred to the District Engineer.
In preparing the agreement, the Project Manager should be very careful to include rates
for all labor and equipment that may be used in the work. If it becomes necessary to use
labor or equipment for which rates are not established in the agreement, the Project
Manager normally shall negotiate the rental rates and shall immediately prepare and
submit for approval a force account agreement supplementing the original agreement
and establishing the rates to be paid for such labor and equipment. However, it will not
usually be necessary to issue supplemental force account agreements for additional
labor rates if the original agreement covers a rate range from the minimum required by
the detailed schedule listed in the contract Special Provisions to the rate the contractor is
paying or which he/she anticipates he/she will pay due to future rate increases.
Equipment rental rates are negotiated or determined as indicated in Construction Manual

Section 104.07.
87
The approved rental rates shall only apply to equipment used under the following
conditions:
The contractor's equipment that is available on the project. If equipment not

available on the project is needed only for the extra work, it may be necessary to
pay rates in excess of the approved rates or to pay compensation for the cost of
moving in the equipment. (Mobilization is explained in Construction Manual
Section 104.07.)
If it is necessary for the contractor to rent equipment for the extra work from a
third party, the rate established shall be the actual rental cost plus fifteen percent
for overhead and profit.
Equipment used on extra or additional work performed under normal working

conditions on a force account or contingent item basis.
If the equipment is to be used under working conditions involving abnormal

expenditures for maintenance, fuel, or service, it may be necessary to pay rates
in excess of the approved rates.
If major quantities or extended amounts of work are involved, it may be equitable

and necessary to negotiate rates at less than those indicated above.
The approved rates shall be paid only for the time actually used in the
performance of the work ordered by the Project Manager. Standby time, time
involved moving to and from the work and repairing and greasing time shall not
normally be included for payment.
If the contractor is required to hold equipment which he/she has brought in

specifically for the extra or additional work "on standby" because of
circumstances beyond his/her control, consideration may be given to payment for
normal schedule "standby time". In such cases, it will be necessary to negotiate
lower hourly rates with the contractor which will not include compensation for fuel,
oil, grease, repairs and other costs which would not be incurred on the equipment
"standing by".
The Project Manager should be careful to obtain the correct name, model size,
series number, and type of the equipment and major attachments - (loader or
dragline bucket, etc.) involved for each item of equipment for which a rental rate is
to be established. This information should be furnished to the District Office and
they may then determine the approved rate from the "Rental Rate Blue Book".
Complete information is needed to determine the proper rate since the rates vary
considerably depending on the model, series, etc. The name of the established
item should be descriptive but brief, for example, "Crawler Tractor Loader, 1 Cu.
Yd." The body of the force account or supplemental agreement should then
include all of the information necessary to determine and verify the correct rate,
for example "Caterpillar, Model 955 'H', 100 horsepower, 1 Cu. Yd."
If fully operated rates, including operators' wages are to be established, the rate
paid the operator shall be increased by 50 percent to cover insurance, social
88
2002
security taxes and profit and added to the approved rental rate, rounding to the
nearest five cents. When such rates are established, the words "fully operated"
shall be included in the equipment rental item.
The Project Manager should call or write to the general office of the contractor
advising him/her of the nature of the proposed work to be performed on a force
account basis and request that they advise by letter regarding their insurance
premium rates for workmen's compensation, public liability, and property
damage. Request that the contractor send copies of his/her letter to the District
and Construction Engineers. The letter stating the insurance rates should be
attached to the force account agreement to be filed as a part of the permanent
records. The agreement may also be prepared without the insurance rates and
sent to the contractor's office for signature with instructions that the contractor
place the rates on the agreement.
The reverse side of the agreement form must contain the "Estimate of Cost".
This itemized estimate of the cost of the work shall include an item for each class
of labor or piece of equipment for which a rate is established in the agreement.
The estimated number of hours that it is contemplated that each item of labor and
equipment will be employed shall be shown, extended at the established rates,
and totaled. Allowances for insurance, social security taxes, and profit shall be
shown and included in the total cost. In the event that the contractor will be
required to furnish materials in performing the work, the quantity and estimated
cost of each item of material should be shown and included in the totals.
The hourly labor rates to be used in the itemized estimate shall be the average
rates that would be earned, including overtime, if the laborer worked a full week.
Such rates shall be referenced with asterisks to the following note to be entered
below the estimate:
"Average rates earned at the established basic rates in a 40 hour week."
The heading of the "Estimate of Cost" on the reverse side should be on the same
end of the sheet as the signatures on the face of the form so that it will not be
obscured when it is placed in the Lincoln Office file.
Force Account Statements - A force account statement, signed by both the Project
Manager and the contractor's representative, is required for each calendar week during
which work is performed. These reports should be prepared and signed weekly. In the
event that overtime payment is involved and the agreement requires that reimbursement
be made at the average hourly rate earned during the week, the statement shall be
prepared and signed on the Monday following the week in which the work is performed.
A daily record of labor, equipment and materials used on force account work shall be
@ kept in SiteManager. Work on force account and contract items will often occur at the
same place at the same time. It will be the duty of the Project Manager or inspector to
record his/her estimate of the force account labor and equipment hours and check with
the contractor's foreman each day.
89
2002
A receipted invoice is required for all items of expense incurred by the contractor except
insurance, social security taxes, and the items for which rates are established in the
force account agreement. The quantity or amount of such services furnished or
materials used during each week may be included in the statement for that week, or the
total quantity or amount for all materials or other expense covered by the same
agreement may be included for payment on a later statement, substantiated by receipted
invoice. Payment cannot be made for such items until the receipted invoices are
received.
The contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with a copy of his/her weekly labor
payroll which contains the names of those personnel working on force account items.
The hours worked and the rates paid to labor on force account work shall be compared
with this transcript. Any discrepancies should be investigated and corrected to insure the
accuracy of the force account statements. See Pages 492 through 497 for instructions
and examples of force account agreements and statements.
Alterations of Plans or Character of Work (SSHC Subsection 104.02)
This subsection in the specifications authorizes the Department (Project Manager) to

increase or decrease quantities of contract items for which there are unit prices included
in the contract, if changes in plans or alterations of construction make such increases or
decreases necessary or desirable.
A CO/SA may be necessary when there is a significant change in the character of the
work. A “significant change” is defined in Subsection 104.02. A CO/SA will not be
required if the Project Manager and contractor agree that the additional work can be done
@ at the bid price. Such agreement, preferably including the contractor’s initials or
signature, should be documented in SiteManager and in the Project Manager’s diary.
@ Sign Deductions
The change order for sign deductions must indicate that “State Funds Only” shall be
used.
90
2002
Construction Inspection - Value Engineering
104.09 VALUE ENGINEERING (SSHC Subsection 104.03)
In accordance with SSHC Subsection 104.03 a contractor may submit a value

engineering proposal to the Project Manager with copies to the District and Construction
Division. The purpose of value engineering is to encourage alternative, cost effective
measures which produce equal or better quality end products.
Value Engineering proposals will not be accepted for:
• Changes in basic design of a bridge or pavement type. For example: Value

engineering a project from PCC to ACC will not be acceptable. Changing a
designed bridge to a box culvert is not acceptable.
• Changes which the contracting authority may already be considering.
• Basing a value engineering proposal on, or similar to, existing standard

Specifications, Special Provisions, or design plans and standards adopted by the
contracting authority. For example: A plan was let using 15 foot (4.6 m) PCC
@ joint spacing. A value engineering proposal would not be accepted changing this
to 20 feet (6 m) because Roadway Design Division standards have included this
spacing as an acceptable standard.
The written proposal shall have sufficient detail to be evaluated for compliance with the
requirements. The detail provided must also allow for reviewing how a proposal impacts
the entire project. It shall include:
• A description of existing requirements and proposed changes
• All affected contract items, including new, extra work items and supporting
justification for that extra work
• Unit prices requested for the work
• Effects on crew, equipment, and production needs for the project
• Impact on the construction period
• Schedule for obtaining all required materials
It is very important to pursue these requests quickly to maximize potential savings. Once
a proposal is received, the Project Manager should (a) discuss the merits of the VE
proposal with the District Engineer, and (b) initiate an office review and forward review
comments to the Construction Division within a week. The Construction Division will
coordinate the review with other offices, including selected section leaders (Design
and/or Bridge) and the FHWA, if appropriate. Following this review, the Constriction
Division will notify the District and Project Manager of approval or disapproval and any
special considerations or requirements. Following notification from the Construction
Division, the Project Manager will prepare a written notification to the contractor outlining
the review and conclusions of that review.
91
2002
Construction Inspection - Value Engineering
If a proposal is acceptable, this notification will form the basis for issuing a Change Order
and Supplemental Agreement to implement conditions of the value engineering proposal.
Therefore, a notification should include:
• A restatement of any changes
• All costs involved, and how costs will be addressed
• Any Specification requirements which result from changes or modifications to the

existing contract
• Details pertaining to special requirements for materials inspection and testing, if

applicable
• Any other special considerations or conditions
If a proposal is not approved, the notification needs to include reasons for rejection.
The Construction Division has established a goal of ten days to complete the entire
review and notification process.
92
Construction Inspection - Plant Inspection
104.10 PLANT INSPECTION
Portland Cement Concrete Paving Plant (SSHC Subsection 1002.02)
The National Ready Mixed Concrete Association Quality Control Manual, Section 3,
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities lists the minimum monitoring
requirements. A plant inspector (Construction Technician) will normally be assigned to
each project with duties split between plant and grade inspection. Plant inspectors
should schedule work so the plant can be visited daily during production. The amount of
time spent at the plant will depend on the overall quality control at the production plant.
Structural Concrete Plant
Ready mix tickets shall be prepared and signed by the person batching the concrete or
the plant inspector.
Asphaltic Concrete Paving Plant Inspection (SSHC Sections 503, and 1028)
Table 502.40.1 lists the ACC plant monitoring requirements. A plant monitor will normally
be assigned to each project with duties split between plant and grade inspection. The
plant monitor should schedule work so that the plant can be visited daily during
production. The amount of time spent at the plant will depend on the overall quality
control at the production plant. The contractor's QC inspector will be providing
production and placement information to be entered on the daily plant report. Visits of the
plant monitor to the plant laboratory for exchange of information and book work will
normally be done daily.
The plant monitor will be responsible for witnessing core sampling and performing
verification density tests.
Testing Equipment and Supplies
Necessary plant inspection forms will be furnished to the producer at no cost. The
producer can request these through the Materials & Tests Engineer or Project Manager.
It is a good idea for the plant monitor to carry a supply of forms and make these available
to the producers as needed.
NDR plant monitors can utilize contractor furnished equipment for testing required at the
plant site.
Samples
The contractor's inspector and NDR plant inspectors should indicate on the sample
submittal form the field lab telephone number and hours they can be contacted for test
results.
For QA/QC projects, the contractor is responsible for field sampling. The project
monitors should witness sampling to the extent that they are assured the samples are
taken properly. Additional witnessing of obtaining, identifying, splitting, testing, and storing
samples will be as directed by the QA/QC Specification.
93
Construction Inspection - Plant Reports
104.11 PLANT REPORTS
The Project Manager should make arrangements with the contractor's plant inspector for
timely receipt of plant reports. The original and all copies of the plant report shall be kept
at the plant until all documentation is completed. Normally, this will be the day following
the end of the reporting period. Review and distribution of the reports will be made by the
Project Manager. This distribution will include a copy to be returned to the contractor's
plant inspector. Prompt consultation between the plant inspector and the NDR plant
monitor shall follow any significant error or omission.
Documentation
@ A separate field book entry in SiteManager should be set up on each project to document
plant inspection. Some flexibility in the suggested format may be necessary depending
on project size, type of plant, and if the QA/QC Specification applies. It is important to
document discrepancies and corrective action taken by the contractor.
94
2002
Control of Materials
104.20 FIELD TESTS
104.21 FIELD TESTING ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
Materials
All sampling, measuring, and testing for construction project quality control shall be
performed as prescribed in the NDR Materials Sampling Guide and the NDR Standard
Method of Tests.
Project Acceptance Sampling and Testing
Both construction inspection personnel and the contractor are responsible for the field
sampling and testing portion of project acceptance tests. The Project Manager must
review inspector assignments and maintain a program of continuing training for
personnel and training of additional employees if required. Samples taken by inspectors
and submitted to District or Central materials laboratories must be properly and
completely identified on "Sample Identification Form" (DR Form 12) or other appropriate
forms as required.
The Materials Sampling Guide shows the minimum required frequency of tests for
various types of work. Additional tests should be made as necessary for adequate
project control. Reports showing test results must include all tests made.
Reports do not need to be included in field books or diaries.
Assurance Sampling and Testing
SSHC Section 1028 discusses the requirements related to asphalt assurance sampling
and testing, most of which are Materials and Research Office responsibilities.
Occasionally, assurance samples have not been taken on some projects because timely
notification of ongoing work was not made. This has been more common with test
cylinders from bridge deck pours and culvert projects.
While the actual taking of assurance samples remains the responsibility of Materials and
Research personnel, it is of equal importance that project inspectors provide timely
notification regarding available dates for testing.
95
2002
Trucks/Hauling of Materials
104.30 TRUCKS/HAULING OF MATERIALS
The Motor Carrier Permit Office is responsible for the monitoring and enforcement of
truck weights on roadways outside the project limits and on roadways within the project
limits utilized to maintain through traffic. Our involvement in monitoring hauling units in
these situations should normally be limited to notification of the appropriate Motor Carrier
Permit personnel if obviously overloaded trucks are suspected. The primary focus of our
attention should be insuring compliance with legal axle loads on pavements and
structures on roadways within the project limits that are closed to the traveling public.
96
Scales
104.40 SCALES
Aggregates are generally measured in the delivery vehicle on a platform scale. Asphaltic
mixtures may be measured over platform scales, in silos on load cells, in hoppers, or by
counting batches.
104.41 SCALE TICKETS
The contractor shall provide a scale ticket for each load showing the required mass
information on the procedure being used, the project number or contract description, the
truck number, the date, and the type of material.
The required data to be automatically printed on the scale tickets will vary according to
the method of measurement (hopper, silos on load cells, batch scales, or platform
scales) and type of system (automatic or semi-automatic).
Automatic or Semi-Automatic Measuring
• For hoppers, batch scales, or silos on load cells, all tickets printed automatically
shall include the gross mass, empty mass of the hopper or mass not discharged,
net mass of material for each drop, and the total net mass for the load. When
measured under the semi-automatic procedure, the scalemaster may include on
the ticket the calculated total net mass.
• For batch scales, the batch mass and batch count are to be automatically printed
under both procedures. The total net mass may be printed with a system or
calculated by a scalemaster with a semi-automatic system.
• For truck platform scales, all scale tickets printed automatically shall include
gross mass, tare mass of the truck, and net mass of the load. For
semi-automatic measuring, the printer shall print the gross mass, and the
scalemaster shall conduct all measurements and may enter by hand or by printer
the tare mass of the truck and calculate the true net mass.
Manual Measurement
• For manual measurement of loaded trucks (project quantities less than

10,000 Mg) (11,000 ton), scale equipment on truck platform scales may or may
not include a mechanical ticket printer. A scalemaster shall include the gross and
tare mass and calculate the net mass on the scale ticket. The Project Manager
may arrange for the measurement to be witnessed.
The inspector will collect the accompanying load ticket for each load of material on its
arrival at the work site and check to see that the ticket has been validated by the scale
inspector when such scale inspection is required. The inspector will observe each load
of delivered material to detect any obvious deficiencies in quality or in quantity and reject
any loads which are unsatisfactory.
The inspector will sign or initial the scale ticket for each accepted load to verify the
material was delivered and accumulate the tickets on a daily basis for determination of
97
Scales
pay quantities. Quantities for each day's operation shall be totaled and checked against
the contract records and any discrepancy promptly resolved.
The requirement that an inspector personally receive all load tickets at the time of delivery
may be relaxed only in cases of very small quantities or intermittent deliveries under
conditions where the Project Manager or inspector can visually determine the
approximate quantity delivered.
On asphalt projects, it is permissible for a contractor's employee to collect the tickets

and place them on a clipboard. An inspector must be present at the laydown operations
at all times and observe the collection of the tickets.
104.42 TRUCK PLATFORM SCALE APPROVAL
The SSHC Subsection 503.03 explains requirements for scales. A platform scale used
for measurement of items such as crushed stone, base and subbase material, and
asphaltic mixtures, contracted for and measured by the Megagram, shall meet these
criteria.
Truck Platform Scale Use
Each truck to be measured shall be tared twice a day. Taring of trucks should be on a
random basis during the day's operation, using the previous day's tare mass until a new
tare mass for that day is determined. No truck may be used for hauling material paid for
on a mass basis until tared.
98
Smoothness
104.50 SMOOTHNESS
104.51 TESTING
SSHC Sections 502 and 602 contain the current asphalt and concrete pavement
smoothness Specifications.
The special provisions provide the current smoothness Specification for bridge decks
and bridge deck overlays. They discuss the requirements of smoothness criteria for
bridge decks, new approaches, bridge deck overlays, and overlaid approaches. They will
also indicate when evaluation is excluded.
Any pavement and bridge deck areas carrying traffic, but excluded from profilograph
testing, must be checked with the 3 m (10 foot) straightedge or “bump buggy”.
Deviations in these areas shall not exceed 3 mm (1/8”) in 3 m (10 feet).
If two or more lanes are placed in a single pass with a full width paver, smoothness
results of adjoining lanes should be evaluated separately and independently so that each
lane has its own profilograph trace.
104.52 EVALUATION
Bridge Approach Smoothness
The final 1.8 m (6 feet) at a section end may be excluded from testing and evaluation only
when the contractor is not responsible for the adjacent section, but the entire header-to-
header section should be included in computations for price reduction or incentive
assessments.
The 1.8 m (6 feet) on either side of a 100 mm (4”) expansion joint may be excluded from
testing by the Project Manager, since the small averaging wheels on the profilograph may
fall into the joint and possibly damage the profilograph and affect the trace. Contractors
should fill these joints or cover them to allow the profilograph to run through the joint area.
A composite header, where one side is ACC and one side is PCC, is excluded from
profilograph testing only when this header is at the extreme end of the project (i.e., only
where one half of the header joint is existing pavement). If the composite header is
constructed as a single project, no exclusions for smoothness testing should occur since
both types of pavement (ACC and PCC) are under the same contract. The smoothness
index should be determined independently for each surface type, but the bump
specification should apply across the header.
Bridge Deck Smoothness
Profilograph tests will be conducted in each traffic lane approximately 1.0 m (3 feet) from
the outside lane line of each traffic lane segment of bridge decks and bridge deck
overlays.
99
Smoothness
The final 1.8 m (6 feet) at the end of a bridge and at an expansion joint are not included in
testing or evaluation, but should be included in computations for incentive or price
adjustment assessments. These areas will be evaluated for deviations exceeding 3 mm
(1/8”) in 3 m (10 feet).
Profilograph tests for bridge approach sections or overlay of bridge approach sections
are run 1.0 m (3 feet) from the outside lane line of each traffic lane. These areas shall be
corrected for smoothness and will not be used in the computation for incentive or price
reduction of bridge decks or bridge deck overlays.
104.53 BUMP CORRECTION
Exact location of 10 mm (3/8”) bumps requiring correction has proven difficult particularly
on resurfacing projects. Referencing by station location, string line, and rolling
straightedge often lacks the precision necessary for identification of exact bump
locations. Locate bumps on the pavement surface during initial profilograph testing with
spray paint or have a profilograph available during correction to locate bumps and
monitor correction results.
104.60 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES & EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME
Liquidated Damages (SSHC Subsection 108.08)
The Construction Division will assess liquidated damages based on the District’s
recommendation.
The Construction Division will be responsible for settling liquidated damage disputes.
If project level good faith efforts fail to resolve differences, the Project Manager shall
request negotiation assistance from the District Construction Engineer. In addition,
factual information relative to the issue(s) shall be forwarded to the Construction
Engineer.
Should combined efforts described above fail to resolve dispute(s), the issue will be
considered to have reached an impasse. At this point, a meeting with all affected parties
shall be scheduled with representatives from the Construction Division.
Contract Time Extensions (SSHC Subsection 108.02)
In SiteManager, all time extensions are change orders and the “Contract Time Allowance
Extension Document” (DR Form 16) is obsolete. The value of a time extension is the
liquidated damage amount times the number of days extended. The “Approved Limits”
chart in Subsection 104.08 applies to time extension change orders.
A good example would be when a contractor was held up due to a delay in delivery of
material and it was necessary to charge working days until the contractor provided
proper documentation. After proper documentation, the contract time allowance is
extended by the District for the amount of working days assessed during the delay.
It is intended to use this means to correct mischarged days rather than going back and
revising the working day report. An example of this would be when a contractor
100
Smoothness
contests the working day charges shown on the working day report and he/she is
considered to be correct.
The "Head to Head", "Detour" and "Earth Shouldering" time allowances are specific time
allowances within the time frame of the overall contract allowance. They usually are not,
but can be, affected by contract time extensions.
SSHC Subsection 108.02, Paragraph 6 says the Project Manager will grant an extension
in the working day time allowance consistent with delays resulting from conditions
beyond the contractor's control.
The Project Manager should be careful to keep complete and accurate records and
information on any conditions or circumstances which delay the work. The Project
Manager should keep good records, particularly on circumstances in connection with
acts by the State and delays (to the work) caused by other contractors. If such delays
are involved and the time allowance is exceeded, the contractor will surely request and
be entitled to an extension in the time allowance. In the fair handling of such requests,
the Construction Division review relies principally on the records kept by the Project
Manager, and accurate, complete records on any such delays are of prime importance.
If the working day time allowance has been exceeded, the Project Manager should
prepare a resume of the working days charged to accompany the final records. The
resume should be based on a review of the working days charged, considering any
requests for extensions in time made by the contractor.
101
Accidents
104.70 ACCIDENTS
Whenever a traffic accident occurs in a construction zone, the Attorney General

suggests that the Project Manager immediately video tape, photograph, and/or document
the area to verify the position of signage, obstructions, traffic control devices, and other
pertinent features.
Use the publication Collecting of Accident Data as an aid when reporting accidents.
102
2002
Measurement and Payment - General
105.00 -- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
105.01 GENERAL
The Project Manager may elect to pay the plan quantity for items like pavement when the
item is built to plan geometrics. Measurements are not always required when the item is
constructed to plan and specification requirements.
If the item of work does not conform to the specification requirements, a new item of
work must be added as extra work. Example: On guard rail, if it is necessary to leave
out a post because of a drainage structure and use a double safety beam section, this
section of guard rail must be paid for as extra work as it does not conform to the
specification requirements for guard rail.
105.02 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES AND COMPENSATION FOR ALTERED

QUANTITIES
All standard items of work listed in the contract are to be measured for payment using
@ English (metric) System of measurement. A list of standard contract items and their
units of measurement is available at each field headquarters and on Lotus Notes or the
NDR Web Page. Inspectors or survey parties concerned with measuring and/or
recording contract items will need to be informed of proper procedures to be followed.
The contractor may request that materials hauled to the project and paid for by the cubic
meter (cubic yard) be measured and a mass conversion factor be used for determining
the cubic meters (cubic yards) of material delivered. When the Project Manager
approves this procedure, the mass of the material must be obtained on approved scales,
the material must be hauled approximately the average haul to the point of delivery, and
then the volume of the material must be determined. The mass of the material in
kilograms (tons) divided by the volume of the material in cubic meters (cubic yards) will
be the mass conversion factor. The cubic meters (cubic yards) of material used may be
determined by dividing the total mass delivered by the mass conversion factor.
The Project Manager will determine the frequency for establishing mass conversion
factors. The frequency will be dependent on the quantity of material delivered, on
variations in the material’s characteristics (moisture content, gradation, etc.), and on
variations in the length of haul.
The final record for the contracted work must include all records and computations used
in determining the mass conversion factors.
If provision is made that payment of any contract item is to be made as an “established

quantity”, payment will be made on the established quantity listed unless authorized
alterations are made. Established quantities are often listed with prescribed tolerances
set forth to allow for minor construction changes without requiring that final measurement
be made. Authorized alterations are considered to be substantial changes in
construction items which would usually be authorized by revised plans or
103
2002
Measurement and Payment – Cancelled Items
specifications, and may be listed in two categories. (See SSHC Subsections 104.02,
109.01 and 109.04.)
• The first type would be an alteration of a minor item and does not involve
supplemental agreements. In this case, payment will be made at the contract unit
price for the actual total.
• The second type is an alteration of a major item involving an increase or decrease

of more than 25 percent of the item. This situation may involve a supplemental
agreement stipulating changes in the actual quantities of the work and
establishing (if necessary) a new price per unit price for such work. If there is an
overrun, the original contract quantity plus 25% is paid for at the bid price. The
extra quantity above 125% is paid for at the new negotiated cost. If there is an
underrun, the entire quantity is paid for at the new negotiated price per unit.
Payment would then be made at the new unit price for the increased orders and
quantity.
105.03 CANCELLED ITEMS (MATERIALS FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR AND

NOT USED DUE TO CHANGES IN PLANS)
The Department will, if the contractor desires, take over unused material at the cost
delivered to the location at which it is accepted by the Department.
It will be necessary for the District Engineer or the Project Manager to initiate a change
order providing for payment for such materials. The item included in this agreement shall
include the phrase, "delivered but not incorporated in the work", in order to specifically
identify such materials. The unit price established for items of material furnished by the
contractor and not used because of a change in plans will usually be based on the actual
cost of the materials, plus 10 percent to cover overhead, handling, other costs and profit.
To substantiate the unit price established, the Project Manager should obtain a copy of
the receipted invoice for the material and attach it to the supplemental agreement.
Change Order/Supplemental Agreement must be created to pay this. It will also be

@ necessary for the Project Manager to include an explanation of the transaction in the
Change Order/Supplemental Agreement. Complete information regarding the disposal
made of the material, such as the supply base to which it is delivered or the project on
which it is used, is essential. The party to whom it is delivered should prepare a DR
Form 329, “Imprest Inventory”, providing for the proper transfer of the charges for the
material.
Payment for such materials must be included in the final estimate as a nonparticipating
contingency.
105.04 PARTIAL PAYMENT
The contractor is to be paid once a month for satisfactory progress on the basis of work
completed during that month. The Project Manager prepares a contractor's estimate in
the computer stating the estimated quantities for items of completed work to date. This
104
2002
Field Measurement and Payment
document is forwarded to Lincoln through the District Engineer's office for processing
and payment via E-mail.
When the value of the work completed during the first half of the contractor's pay month
exceeds the amount stipulated in the specifications (usually $10,000.00), a semi-monthly
contractor's estimate is prepared. All partial payments are made on satisfactory work
and materials only, as evidenced by complete certifications or test results as required.
Defective work or material shall not be included for payment until the defect has been
remedied.
105.05 FIELD MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Photographs and Video Tapes - Documentation on film can save many questions and
provide critical answers. Take a picture any time it may be helpful.
Field Records - General - Payment for most contract items is based on the plan
quantities. Final measurements should be avoided as long as the specifications permit
and the contractor does not dispute the quantities. Their construction should, however,
be documented as described under "Inspection Notebooks" with the statement (if
applicable) "Constructed as per plans" and substantiating data or measurements, if
necessary, also entered in the record.
Field records must be properly kept to substantiate that the contractor has conformed to
the requirements of the plans, specifications, and Special Provisions both as to quantity,
usually involving measurements, and quality, usually involving tests, of the work or
material items used on the project.
Instructions and examples of preparation of specific records may be found in this manual
in Appendix 3.
@ Field SiteManager Entries or SiteManager Item Documentation - Field
measurements made for pay items of work and records of placement of materials shall
be entered directly in SiteManager.
@ Field and lab test results on quality of materials will be entered into SiteManager. Record
and document tests using approved Material Sampling Guide and SiteManager
procedures.
@ The item documentation records should indicate the stationing used, date placed or
constructed, and sketches with dimensions if necessary to give clear understanding of
the placement and material used. The names of the party or engineer making the
measurements and dates performed must be entered in SiteManager or included with
the supporting documentation. Materials used in the construction of the project for which
no direct payment is made but are considered subsidiary to other pay items should also
be documented in SiteManager, Materials Management Section.
105
2002
Field Measurement and Payment
@
SiteManager should contain a detailed summary of all shipments received for the project,
including the kind of material, the identification number, net mass, date received, delivery
point and, if possible, the point of origin. Include distribution to the proper group of the
contract and information on material received but not used on the project.
The laydown inspector shall enter in SiteManager the activities required in the
performance of his/her job. This would normally include such items as types of
@ equipment being used, equipment checks, tonnage checks, thickness checks,
temperature checks of mixture, etc. All entries are to be dated. Also, we would like to
bring to your attention that the inspectors are to sign the scale ticket on receipt and
acceptance of the material. Base all entries on facts, not opinions.
Final computations shall be entered directly into SiteManager or other approved recording
@ and documentation methods used in conjunction with SiteManager. Operations of
performing computations and checking computations shall be identified on each page of
computations by operation, date, and the name or initials of the individual.
Plans, tables, and sketches provide supplementary details necessary to clarify

@ SiteManager entries for pay items. Any such plan or sketch shall be saved electronically
in the project files. Supplementary plans and sketches are sometimes necessary to
define the extent of a pay item sufficiently enough to remove any doubt as to its limits.
@ • A good technique is to build the sketch or table in the computer and then save it
electronically.
Supplementary sketches are sometimes necessary to show measurements of irregular

areas for both pavement removal and the construction of new pavement.
Computation spreadsheets should be used where detailed computations are necessary

@ to determine pay quantities. These computations are made from SiteManager, cross
section, or sketch information and should be fully referenced in SiteManager. It is
necessary that all computations be referenced in SiteManager or saved electronically in a
project folder (Read Only Access) so that the computations can be checked for
correctness of method and accuracy.
Scale Tickets - Scale tickets are used to substantiate quantities of materials which are
paid for by mass. The original copies (white) should be submitted with the final records
of the project to the District Final Reviewer. Preparation of scale tickets and distribution
is discussed in the section pertaining to asphaltic concrete inspection
(Subsection 507.12 in this manual).
106
2002
Contractor’s Estimates
105.06 CONTRACTOR'S ESTIMATES
SSHC Subsection 109.07 allows payments to the contractor if satisfactory progress is

being made. These contractor's estimates will include quantities and amounts for items
of work completed to the date of the estimate.
@ Progress estimates are completed in SiteManager by the Project Manager and signed
electronically. It is the District Engineer’s responsibility to review and approve the
estimate in a timely manner, sign it electronically, and forward it electronically to the
Controller.
Upon receipt by the Controller, the estimate is processed further by the Construction and
Controller Divisions before it is released for payment.
On all Federal-Aid projects, it is necessary to separate participating and nonparticipating

items of work on the progress estimate form by dividing them into separate summaries
for each project in a contract. Each line is properly divided by the Controller Division
@
when the item is loaded in SiteManager. This procedure is done to comply with our
agreement with the Federal Highway Administration regarding procedures for current
billing and current audits. Items which are added to the contract should be included in
the proper group in the participating or nonparticipating summary as applicable. Items
added by change order-supplemental agreement should be considered as participating
unless the agreement form is marked "nonparticipating" when returned from the Lincoln
Office. The District Office should be consulted for further information on any item for
which there is some uncertainty regarding its status.
For contracts which include wage rates, progress estimates shall not be released by the
Project Manager until the contractor and subcontractor have submitted all delinquent
payrolls and Forms WH-348. These reports shall be considered delinquent when they
are not in the Project Manager's hands by the seventh day after the date on which the
employees are paid. Notify the contractor by letter, with a copy to the Construction
Division, of any delinquent payrolls and WH-348's in advance of the estimate date. The
estimate should be prepared at the regular time and forwarded immediately upon the
receipt of the payrolls.
Estimate Preparation
Please remember to update Line 2 (current quantity) on the estimate for all items added
by plan revision or supplemental agreement. This adjustment should be made as soon
as you receive the plan revision or supplemental agreement.
The Controller Division depends on Line 2 being accurate so they can allocate sufficient
funding to each project.
107
2002
DISTRICT ESTIMATE SCHEDULE

District No. Regular Estimate Date Alternate Estimate Date
(Only if money due contractor) ($10,000 or more must be paid)
*1 1st Saturday of Month 3rd Saturday of Month
2 2nd Saturday of Month 4th Saturday of Month
*3 1st Saturday of Month 3rd Saturday of Month
4 2nd Saturday of Month 4th Saturday of Month
5 4th Saturday of Month 2nd Saturday of Month
6 3rd Saturday of Month 1st Saturday of Month

* Districts 1 and 3 use the 5th Saturday of the month instead of the 1st Saturday of the future
month as Primary Cutoff day when there are 5 Saturdays in a month.
Stockpiling:
SSHC Subsection 109.07, Paragraph 4. provides that estimates may also be allowed for
acceptable nonperishable materials meeting the requirements of the plans and
specifications and delivered in the vicinity of the project or stored in acceptable storage
places. This will generally apply to aggregates, structural and reinforcing steel, metal
specialty items delivered but not incorporated in the work, and other materials which
cannot be used for extended periods of time because of delays beyond the contractor's
control. The amount included in the estimate will be determined by the PM, but in no
case shall it exceed 100-percent of the value of the materials as shown by copies of
receipted invoices or costs. Partial payments shall be listed under the stockpiling
category with an “800” series number.
As the material is used, the payment for this material should be reduced accordingly in
the stockpile item on the estimate.
Payment for stockpiled material is "permissive", and it should not be interpreted to be a

requirement in cases where the material will remain in storage a comparatively short
time (less than one month). When there is a question as to the inclusion of a material for
payment, the District Construction Engineer should be consulted for instructions.
SSHC Subsection 106.02 states that:
All materials are subject to and will be inspected, tested, and accepted by the Project
Manager before incorporation in the work.
108
2002
SSHC Subsection 1001.02 requires:
Materials which must be documented by a certificate of compliance, certified test, or test

reports shall not be incorporated into the work until such certificates have been delivered
to the Department and verified for compliance.
It follows from the above that material items which have not been tested and accepted, or
for which appropriate certification, as defined in the Materials and Research Manual, has
not been delivered to the State, should not be included on an estimate for payment.
Likewise, no material item which has been stored in accordance with Paragraph 4. of
Subsection 109.07 of the Specifications should be included on an estimate for payment
unless the appropriate test data or certifications for compliance with the specified
@ requirements are in the files of the Project Manager and documented in SiteManager.
The Project Manager shall maintain documentation of progress estimate quantities.
Types of Contractor Estimates – SiteManager has only three types of estimates:
• Progress – all estimates prior to the “Final Estimate.”

• Final – generated once District has completed its review and is ready to forward the
project to Lincoln for “Finaling.”
• Supplemental – all estimates generated to change the “Final Estimate.” Additional
estimates are obsolete in SiteManager. However, the PM must notify the
Construction Division when a project is complete – which used to be the purpose of
the additional estimate. In SiteManager, the PM must send a Lotus note to
“DOR-CONST-COMPLETION NOTIFICATION.” The Finaling Manual explains what
must be included in the “note.”
Processing Estimates – Each District should direct a copy of signed estimates to the
Construction Division printer (CON1) as soon as possible after affixing the electronic
signature.
Each District is encouraged to sign and print estimates as often as possible. The
uniform and steady arrival of estimates in Lincoln is encouraged and appreciated by both
the Construction Office and the Controller Division.
Contractor's Statement of Compliance (Form WH-348) - Form WH-348 shall be

submitted for each weekly payroll period by each contractor and subcontractor on all
projects financed by Federal Funds. (Form WH-348 is not required on other than
Federal-Aid projects.) The WH-348 form should be attached to and submitted to the
109
Measurement and Payment
Project Manager with the contractor's payrolls and kept in the District. The Project
Manager should maintain a record of WH-348s and payrolls received. The WH-348 for
the last week of work shall clearly indicate that it is the final report.
The contractor and subcontractor are required to submit the payrolls with Form WH-348
weekly. Payrolls shall be considered delinquent when they are not in the Project
Manager's hands by the seventh day after the date on which the employees are paid.
The Project Manager shall defer the release of progress estimates until contractors
comply with this rule. The Project Manager shall notify the contractor by letter of any
delinquent payrolls or Forms WH-348 in advance of the estimate date.
Contractor's Statement of Materials and Labor - (Form FHWA-47). Form FHWA-47,

"Statement of Materials and Labor", shall be submitted by the contractor as required and
explained in Section VI, Record of Materials, Supplies and Labor, Form FHWA-1273
(Rev. 4-93). The FHWA-1273 is included in every Federal Aid project. The contractor
shall submit one copy of this report to the Lincoln Construction Division. If this report has
not been received when the final records are sent to the Lincoln Office, the Construction
Division shall withhold release of the final estimate until the Form FHWA-47 is received.
105.07 FIELD COMPUTATIONS FOR FINAL PAYMENT
General - The quantity of each item of work on the project shall be computed and
checked by the Project Manager and his/her assistants. Computations must be
complete so that each step may be easily followed without completely checking the
mathematics. The date and initials of persons performing computations and verifications
should be shown on each sheet of the field notes, cross sections, and computations.
Unless this information is shown, it will be necessary for the work to be duplicated in the
District Office.
All computations will then be reviewed in the District Office to determine the correctness
of the method used in computing the quantities of the various items. Sufficient checks of
the mathematics should be made to determine the care and accuracy used in preparing
the computations. A check should be made to determine if all necessary, supplemental
and force account agreements have been executed. Considerable discretion must be
exercised during the District review in order to ascertain the accuracy of final
computations and yet eliminate needless rechecking.
The Construction Division will not check all projects. Only random audits will be
performed.
Roadway Excavation - Final earthwork quantities may be computed by either of two

methods or a combination of the two methods.
A. Data Collector - When the preliminary survey was entered in a Data Collector,
then all survey data during and after construction can be modeled with GeoPak.
Final cross sections are computed by GeoPak once the final surface shots are
input in the Data Collector. Cross sections can be taken at any location by
GeoPak.
110
B. Planimeter Method - After the final cross sections have been plotted and
checked, the areas of excavation which are enclosed by the original and final
cross sections are measured by the planimeter. In using the planimeter, for
areas plotted 60 mm (5 feet) to 1 mm (1”) horizontally and vertically, each area
should be circumscribed twice. The reading at the end of the second circuit
should be twice the reading at the end of the first circuit. The planimeter shall be
set so that the reading at the end of the second circuit is in square meters
(square yards) of end area. Without changing the planimeter setting, areas may
also be determined for cross sections plotted vertically 60 mm (5 feet) to 1 mm
(1”) and horizontally 120 mm (10 feet) to 1 mm (1”). The reading at the end of the
second circuit should be twice the reading at the end of the first circuit. The
reading at the end of the second circuit should then be divided by 2 for the area in
square meters (square yards).
Planimeters shall be checked frequently by running around 4 squares of the cross
section paper. Different individuals and different cross section sheets often require
different settings of the planimeter arm, and the machine should be checked when
changing operators or cross section sheets. Each area should be checked by another
person. In checking areas, the following shall be the allowable error:
ALLOWABLE AREA ERROR
(metric)
Areas of 3 to 38 m² 1 m²
Areas of 39 to 50 m² not over 2 m²
Areas over 500 m² 1 percent
ALLOWABLE AREA ERROR
(English)
Areas of 32 to 400 ft2 10 ft2

Areas of 400 to 550 ft2 not over 20 ft2
Areas of 550 to 1075 ft2 not over 30 ft²
Areas of 1075 to 2700 ft² not over 40 ft²
Areas of 2700 to 5400 ft² not over 50 ft²
Areas over 5400 ft² 1 percent
All excavation cross sections shall be inspected for closure and, if necessary, a
"field check" made. Sections must close in order that the end area may be
accurately determined.
If any excavation area occurs on a horizontal curve, it must be corrected for
curvature. This correction will be a reduction in area size on the inside of the
curve and an addition to the area size on the outside of the curve. If the entire
area is a cut section, the correction may be either a subtraction or an addition to
the original area size depending on the location of the center of gravity of the
cross section. The formula and an example of end area curvature correction for
both simple and spiral curves is shown here:
111
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CORRECTING EARTHWORK AREAS FOR CURVATURE

Excavation areas of cross sections on horizontal curves shall be corrected for curvature using the
formula C = Ae where:
R
A = the area of the cross section

e = the eccentricity
R = the centerline radius of the curve
The area A is the area of the section determined with a planimeter. The eccentricity is the distance
between the centerline or base line of the cross section and the center of gravity of the cross section, and is
a positive number when the center of gravity falls outside the centerline, and a negative number when the
center of gravity falls inside the centerline. The correction is positive or negative depending upon the sign of
the eccentricity.
The center of gravity of the cross section in most cases can be determined by inspection. If the area and
the eccentricity are large and the radius small, it may be necessary to determine the center of gravity of the
section by the moment arm method, after determining the center of gravity of the smaller portions of the
section by inspection.
In determining the center of gravity, it must be remembered that the center of area falls at the center of
gravity only when the area is rectangular in shape.
All computations for the correction for curvature may be made with a slide rule.
EXAMPLE
Assume a three degree curve to the left with the following cross section on the curve at Station 100+00.
e = 62 m Radius = 1910 m
Ez C.G. A = 595 StaM 100+00
C = 595 + 19 = 614
F=0
Then, C = 595 x 62 = 19
1910
RADIUS COMPUTATION FOR AREAS IN SPIRAL CURVE
When the above area falls in a spiral curve, the radius must be computed for each station and plus using the
formula r = RL where:
1
r = Radius at Required Station on the Spiral

R = Radius of Main Curve
L = Length of Spiral
1 = Distance from T.S. to Required Station
If the above Station 100+00 is 150 m from the T.S. and given a 300 m spiral, then
r = (1910) (300) = 3820 m, the radius at Station 100+00.
150
112
After the excavation areas have been carefully checked, they are transferred to
earthwork computation sheets (DR Form 99) and the volumes of cut areas
computed. These need be computed only as far as the fifth column (Sum End
Areas Corrected for Distance). The total of this column may be converted to
cubic meters (square yards) by multiplying it by the factor 50 (in English units use
factor 1.8518519.) Earthwork computations shall be computed to one decimal
place (0.1 m 3) (0.1 cy). Sheet totals to the nearest cubic meter (cubic yard)
should be summarized on DR Form 205.
Overhaul - Overhaul will be computed in the Lincoln Office using the mass diagram.
When overhaul is involved, the following procedures should be followed by field personnel
(See SSHC Section 209):
1. Recheck balance to determine that all plan excavation has been

incorporated.
2. Recheck embankment to insure that undue swelling or slope flattening

has not occurred.
3. Locate additional excavation within the balance if possible.
4. Inform the District Office of the existing conditions and shortages.
5. Take embankment sub final cross sections over the entire area where
embankment is deficient. Correlate this area to the project centerline.
6. Take preconstruction cross sections of the new borrow area and correlate
it to the project centerline. Should the borrow originate in an adjoining
balance, subfinal cross sections should be taken to complete the
separation of the two balances. Upon completion of the excavation and
placement in embankment, final cross sections over both areas
(excavation and embankment) are necessary to measure the quantity of
excavation moved and in order to compute the overhaul, if any. A diagram
of the source and final deposit area with "measured distances" will be very
helpful in making the final computations.
7. Transmit all notes, plotted cross sections and computations (DR

Form 99), diagrams, and pertinent information to the Lincoln Office for
analysis and overhaul computations.
8. The Project Manager will be advised of the quantity for payment and all
notes, diagrams, computations, and pertinent information will be returned.
Foundation Course - Foundation course may be of several types. It will be noted that
SSHC Subsection 307.04 provides that Foundation Course will be measured for
payment by the square meter (square yard) or Megagram (ton) as defined in the Bid Item
Schedule. When Foundation Course is measured by determining the mass, it is
important that the moisture content be maintained within the limits shown in the
113
specifications in order to avoid payment for extra water in the material. Frequent
moisture tests should be made at the time of measurement.
SSHC Subsection 307.04 says moisture content at time of measurement shall be

between optimum and 3 percent below optimum.
Gravel Surfacing - Gravel surfacing computations should be submitted on

DR Form 264.
Since the payment the contractor receives for gravel depends on test results and
computations shown on this form, it is extremely important that both the testing and the
arithmetic be accurate. Placing information shall be shown in the field books.
"Truck Capacity Computations", Form DR-101, are necessary when trucks are hauling
such items as gravel, sand, filler, etc. and payment is to be on a cubic meter (cubic yard)
basis. This form shall be prepared promptly at the beginning of the work and submitted
to the District Office. The type of material being hauled shall be noted on the form.
If trucks are transferred to another project under the inspection of the same Project
Manager or inspector during the construction season, it is not necessary to remeasure
the trucks or submit DR Form 101. However, always inform the District Office of the
transfer.
This information should include the name of the owner and license number, capacity of
the truck, original project number on which the truck was measured, and the new project
number.
Prime Coat and Tack Coat - (See SSHC Sections 504 and 517) - Asphaltic materials
for prime coat and tack coat shall be measured in liters, corrected to 15°C (60°F). If the
material is delivered in tank cars, the quantity is usually determined by measuring the
mass or metering at the source. If this is not done at the source, the mass of the
material must be measured at the point of delivery.
When material is transported directly to the work in trucks, the mass shall be measured
on scales.
If the material has been metered, the volume at 15°C (60°F) shall be determined.
(Contact Materials & Tests Division for proper conversion factors.) Any material that is
lost, wasted, used on private work, or transferred to other projects shall be deducted.
Tank cars and trucks shall be checked to verify that they have been entirely emptied
before returning to the refinery.
When asphaltic material is transferred from the project, the Project Manager shall
measure the material before it leaves the project and immediately notify the Materials and
Research Division that the material is being transferred. The Construction Division and
the District Engineer(s) should also be notified. The notice shall be by the DR Form 193,
Transfer of Asphaltic Material. If possible, it is advantageous for a copy of this report to
accompany the transferred asphaltic material.
114
Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course and Base Course - Tickets may be furnished by
the Department or by the contractor. The contractor may furnish the tickets if he/she
wishes to use automatic printing equipment. If the contractor desires a copy of the scale
tickets, they should be prepared in triplicate. The original should be received by the
laydown inspector. The first copy is the contractor's copy, and the second copy is for the
project records.
The liters of asphaltic cement shall be measured as shown in SSHC

Subsection 503.05). (HINT: A common final computation error is the failure to deduct
asphalt cement used in wasted asphaltic concrete from the final pay quantity.)
Concrete Pavement - The number of square meters (square yards) of concrete

pavement to be paid for will be the plan quantity. Widths and lengths of irregular areas
built other than as shown in the plans shall be measured and recorded in a data collector
and the areas computed, or computations made from staking data providing no changes
occurred during the actual construction. Quite often the plans indicate the quantity
(square meters) (square yards) involved in intersections, driveways, and the more
complex sections of the projects. In these instances, the quantity indicated on the plans
for a given area may be used as the final pay quantity, provided that no geometric
changes have been made from those shown on the plans and that a rough check of the
quantity shown has been made to determine if any apparent errors exist.
In determining the final quantities for concrete pavement or base course on an area
basis, deductions will be made for fixtures in the roadway having an area greater than 1.0
m² in accordance with SSHC Subsection 109.01, Paragraph 1.b.
When municipal paving projects involve several items of work for which payment is made
on an area or length basis, such as sidewalk, curb, curb and gutter, driveways,
pavement, etc., it is suggested that complete sketches be prepared in Microstation or on
cross section paper to show the actual work performed as well as the computations for
the pay quantities. As a general rule, two complete sets of sketches should be prepared.
One set should show the removal items and the other set should show the new work.
The measurements and dimensions included with these sketches should be clearly
identified as to whether they are actual field measurements or computed dimensions.
The computations should always be shown on, or accompany, such sketches.
When municipal paving projects contain various radii curves at street intersections,
concrete paving area measurements and computations may be based on the chord and
rise method. Dimensions used for final payment will be as staked dimensions. (This
assumes any difference is a contractor error.) The only exception would be if the area
was constructed smaller than it was staked.
Combination curb and gutter is measured for payment by the meter (linear foot).
(SSHC Section 606)
Removal of Existing Structures and Preparation of Existing Structures
(SSHC Section 203)
A. Removal of Existing Structures - Unless the contract contains a unit bid for the
removal of an old structure, the excavation necessary for such removal is paid
115
for by the cubic meter (cubic yard). Preconstruction cross sections shall be
taken for all removals.
Pipe removal excavation limits are shown in the SSHC in Figure 701.01.
Headwalls and box culverts may be removed on a unit basis and any removal
excavation will be subsidiary. The volume occupied by them within the limits of
the new work shall be included for payment as culvert excavation. However,
deductions will be made for openings in structures, other than pipe and pipe-arch
culverts, if the openings have an average cross sectional area over 2.0 m²
(21.5 square feet). This means the nominal opening of the old concrete box
regardless of the accumulated silt and debris. On old structures without paved
floors, the PM shall measure and compute the average cross sectional area of
the opening. (See SSHC Subsection 702.04.)
In the case of removal of old pipe and headwalls, where the headwall is removed
on a unit price basis, the excavation limits for the old pipe removal will extend
500 mm (18 inches) beyond the end of the pipe the same as would be applicable
if no headwalls were involved. Any necessary excavation for removing the old
headwalls outside the pipe excavation limits would still be subsidiary. (See SSHC
Subsections 702.04 and 702.05)
B. Preparation of Existing Box Culverts - When the contractor has the option of
breaking the box culvert back 600 mm (2 feet) or drilling dowel holes to insure a
structural tie, the concrete and excavation pay item quantities shall be only the
volume from the vertical plane that would be necessary for the doweling
procedure. When the plans stipulate or the Project Manager orders removal of
600 mm (2 feet) of the box culvert barrel then the pay quantities shall be
computed from the vertical plane 600 mm (2 feet) into the existing structure.
The excavation limits are to be computed as shown in SSHC in Figure 701.01.
Excavation for Structures
A. Excavation for Bridges - Excavation for bridges is computed in the Bridge

Division at the time the plans are prepared. Payment is a lump sum for all
abutments, piers and/or bents. No further computations need be made on this
item unless the station location of the bridge or the depth of the footings is
changed. The Project Manager should not change the location of any bridge
without first consulting with the District Engineer, and the Bridge Division.
If it is decided that a change in location is necessary, any required information

should be forwarded to the Bridge Division, via the Construction Division, for use
in redetermining the excavation quantity.
B. Concrete Seal Course - The construction of concrete seal course or removal of

unsuitable material is extra work (see SSHC Subsection 702.05). These
amounts shall be listed in the field book. The concrete seal course quantities
shall be negotiated before the contractor begins the work.
116
The cubic meters (cubic yards) of concrete in the seal course shall be paid for as
indicated in SSHC Subsection 704.05.
C. Excavation for Culverts
1. General - The Project Manager should be thoroughly familiar with SSHC

Section 702, "Excavation for Structures", before measuring or computing
the contractor's culvert quantities.
Following are listed some of the various classes of culvert excavation

listed for payment in State contracts: "Excavation for Pipe Culverts and
Headwalls", "Excavation for Box Culverts", "Excavation for Inlets and
Junction Boxes", "Excavation for Sewers", etc. Since these are separate
items in the contract, they should be kept separated in the field notebooks
and computations. Include sufficient information in the field notebook so
this separation may be checked during final review. If the plan data calls
for removing a pipe culvert and building a box culvert at the same location,
the excavation for removing the pipe culvert and headwalls would be
determined as if no box culvert were to be built at the removal location.
Any duplicated or overlapping excavation would be deducted from the
volume of excavation for the new box culvert.
2. Typical Channel Section - When the plans show a typical channel

section through a culvert site, the separation of grading and culvert
excavation should be handled as follows:
Slope stake the typical channel section through the culvert site.
Take final cross sections after the channel dirt is removed.
Do not pay for any of the excavation twice.
3. Excavation for New Structures.
Field Measured Culvert Excavation - In general, the Project Manager shall

bear in mind that:
There shall be no duplication of excavation when headwalls are

constructed.
No additional excavation will be allowed for concrete elbows. This is a

minor amount and since the kind of pipe is usually optional with the
contractor, the excavation quantity will be based on the use of corrugated
metal pipe.
The contractor is entitled to payment to the excavation limits specified

even though he/she may not actually remove the soil to those limits.
However, in all cases, the contractor should be held to a width adequate
for proper compaction of the backfill beneath the lowest 90 degrees of
pipe culverts and adjacent to all pipe-arch culverts at the widest
117
dimension. If slope is not properly laid back, other safety precautions

must be taken to protect people from a cave-in.
Following are the excavation limits to be used in computing the

contractor's culvert excavation. Since these limits are fixed by the
specifications, final computations may be completed at any time after
taking the preconstruction cross sections.
Box Culverts - 450 mm (18 inches) outside of the neat lines of the
concrete to the bottom of the box floor or footings. On box curtain walls
below the bottom of the floor and the footing beneath the lower break of
broken back boxes, the excavation shall be the same as the neat lines of
the concrete curtain wall or footing.
Pipe Culverts - the nominal inside diameter of the pipe plus 1 meter
(3 feet), and 450 mm (18 inches) beyond the end of the pipe and to the
flowline of the pipe.
Pipe Arches - the maximum nominal inside clear span dimension on the
arch plus 900 mm (3 feet), and 450 mm (18 inches) beyond the end of the
pipe and to the flowline of the pipe.
Concrete Headwalls - 450 mm (18 inches) outside the neat lines of the
concrete and to the bottom of the headwall. If it is necessary to construct
compacted embankment to the flowline elevation before laying the pipe,
headwall excavation shall be allowed from the flowline of the pipe to the
bottom of the headwall.
Concrete Elbows, Collars, and Collars with Bend - the excavation limits
for elbows and collars is the same as for pipe culverts without elbows,
collars or collars with bend.
All the above limits are increased when flowline is more than 1.25 m
(4 feet) below natural ground. There is an additional allowance for safe
excavation. See SSHC Specification Figure 701.01.
Piles and Pile Driving
The Project Manager shall measure all piling to ±30 mm (0.10 foot) before they are
placed in the leads by the contractor. Cutoffs shall also be measured to ±30 mm
(0.10 foot).
Sheet Piling - The quantity to be paid the contractor for this item is the number of
square meters (square yards) of piling remaining in the completed structure, except that
no payment shall be made for lengths in excess of those ordered by the Project Manager.
For steel sheet piling, the computation width shall be the manufacturer's nominal driving
width of each sheet, in accordance with SSHC Subsection 703.04. This has been
interpreted to mean in the case of bent sections for corners, the nominal width of the
118
sheet before bending regardless of angle of bend. The quantity of steel sheet piling cutoff
to be paid for shall be in accordance with SSHC Subsection 703.05 and shall be verified
by the inspector in the bridge book.
The computation width for concrete and timber sheet piling shall be the nominal width
shown on the plans. For timber sheet piling in sloping wingwalls, the contractor shall be
allowed payment for the square meters (square yards) of piling remaining in the
completed wingwall, plus payment as cutoff for the square meters (square yards) cutoff
to make the slope. The combined length of pile and cutoff shall not be in excess of the
plan order length or revised length ordered by the Project Manager.
In order to determine the final pay quantity for these items, it is essential that the total
length, the length of cutoff and the net length remaining in place be shown in the field
notebook for each sheet pile. All measurements shall be ±30 mm (0.10 foot) and in the
case of wing piling cutoff on the slope, the length of cutoff should be the average of the
long and short sides.
The field notebook for the bridges shall include definite information as to the final
quantities for all contract items even though a number of the items may have the same
final quantity as listed in the contract. Final quantities shall be summarized in the field
notebook. This eliminates questions on the part of the reviewer as to the correct final
quantity.
Concrete Construction and Reinforcement - Pay quantities for these two items are
computed from tables found on the standard plans. Plans for special structures also
contain this information.
The Project Manager shall not make a deduction from the concrete quantity shown on the
standard headwall plan when the pipe enters the headwall on a vertical (broken back
pipe) skew.
In computations for concrete quantities for junction boxes and inlets, the deductions for
pipe openings shall be computed on the basis of right angle openings even though the
actual opening may be on a skew. No correction shall be made for shell thickness of
concrete pipe culverts.
Culverts
A. Concrete Pipe Culverts - The contractor's payment for concrete pipe is based
on a measurement of the actual length of pipe in place, but in no case will a length
greater than order length be submitted for payment.
When elbows are required, the measurement shall be continuous through the
elbow. The additional allowance for elbows is provided in
When either prefabricated or field constructed elbows connect two sections of
new pipe, the pay length of the elbow will be the measured length on the
longitudinal axis of the pipe (average of the long and short sides), plus the
allowance (depending on the diameter) listed in the specifications or as amended
119
by the Special Provisions. No payment is allowed for the concrete and reinforcing
steel used to construct the elbow.
If the elbow, poured in place, connects old and new pipe, it will be considered as a
collar with a bend and no payment will be included for the elbow as such. In lieu
thereof the concrete and steel required for the elbow will be included for payment
under the items of concrete and reinforcing steel for collars.
The measurement for payment of all the types of culvert pipe is based on the
number of linear meters (linear feet) in place and accepted. This is interpreted to
mean that culverts are to be measured after material has been cut off for skewed
ends. Thus payment is not made for waste resulting from skew angle cuts on
either one or both ends of a culvert.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe and Pipe Arch Culverts (SSHC Subsection 718.04)
Corrugated Metal Pipe - The contractor's payment for corrugated metal pipe is
based on a measurement along the longitudinal axis of the pipe and payment will
not be made for lengths greater than order length.
When elbows are required, the measurement shall be continuous through the
elbow. To the measured length of each elbow shall be added the additional
allowance provided in SSHC Subsection 718.04. The pay length of the elbow will
be based on the centerline distance.
If field connections are required for the extension of existing corrugated metal
pipe, the contractor shall receive payment for the necessary connecting band.
When the Project Manager makes changes in his/her original pipe order after it
has been fabricated, the contractor shall receive payment for any connecting
bands made necessary by such changes. (See SSHC Subsection 718.04)
Corrugated Metal Pipe Arches - Corrugated Metal Pipe Arches shall be

measured for payment in the same manner as corrugated metal pipe culverts
along the flowline of the pipe-arch. Include elbow and skewed end dimension
sketches in the notebook.
Pipe Ordered But Not Used - The quantity of various pipe items is shown on
the Project Manager's field checked culvert list, the testing laboratory's delivery
records and in the final summary. These three records should be in agreement
or any differences fully explained before submitting the final estimate.
If any pipe is delivered but not installed, due to a change in plans, this should be
recorded in the notebook and the project records shall show the final disposition
of the pipe. If the pipe is transferred to the maintenance department, it shall be
included for payment on the final estimate under "Contingencies" nonparticipating.
For roadway pipe and driveway culvert pipe, payment shall be made to the
contractor on the basis of his/her actual delivered cost to the project plus a
handling charge of 10 percent. A supplemental agreement shall be executed to
120
establish this price which must be substantiated by a copy of the contractor's

invoice attached to the agreement.
Notify the District Office or the Maintenance Superintendent who will arrange to
pick up the pipe and issue a requisition crediting the project and charging the
supply base. Advise the person issuing the credit requisition of the name of the
contractor and unit price to be used in making the credit and charge.
C. Culvert Pipe - Some pipe items are "required" in the sense that the contractor
must furnish definite types and sizes of pipe if stipulated in the plan and in the
bidding proposal. A required pipe is one that the plan definitely states the type and
size of pipe to be furnished. This may be an extension of an existing pipe so that
the contractor must furnish the same type and diameter. The plans may definitely
require a corrugated metal pipe - arch at some location due to low head
clearance under the project road, or any type or size necessary due to some
special construction feature of the project.
All other pipes are listed in the bidding proposal as "Culvert Pipe". The contractor
may furnish any of the types of pipe listed in SSHC Subsection 718.02.
Quantities of pipe that are "required" by the plans or are "culvert pipe" shall be
separated in the notebook and computations. "Required" and "culvert pipe" prices
may be interchanged to some extent. For example, if the contract contains a bid
price for 600 mm (2 feet) culvert pipe and it develops that an existing 600 mm (2
feet) pipe must be extended, it will be permissible to include the extension for
payment under the contract item for 600 mm (2 feet) culvert pipe, provided the
extension is the same type of pipe the contractor has chosen to furnish. This
interchange of prices is not permissible between roadway and driveway pipe
items.
Flared end sections which are called for in the plans on either concrete or metal
pipe shall be furnished, installed, measured and paid for in accordance with
SSHC Section 723.
Sewers (SSHC Section 722)
A. Excavation - Sewer excavation is subsidiary to the sewer pipe pay item.
B. Pipe Computations - Sewer pipe is measured for payment as described in

121
Guardrail - The contractor shall be allowed payment for linear meters (linear feet) of
guardrail complete in place measured from center to center of end posts
(SSHC Section 902).
Seeding and Slope Protection - Example field book records for Cover Crop Seeding,
Seeding, and Slope Protection are in Appendix 3.
105.08 BORROW AND LOCAL PIT MATERIALS OBTAINED BY THE

CONTRACTOR
Under State Option - All amounts to be paid by the contractor for royalty and borrow
costs, to comply with the terms listed in the option block shown in the plans, will be
deducted from the payment due on the final estimate. Such amounts will also be
included in the retention in the additional estimate. This Department will make payment
directly to the owner. Before such payment can be made, it will be necessary to obtain
concurrence from the contractor as to the quantities and amounts in order to eliminate
the possibility of overpayment to the owner. For this purpose, the Project Manager shall
122
2002
Borrow and Local Pit Materials Obtained by the Contractor
prepare and forward a letter to the contractor, substantially in accordance with the
@ example included in Appendix 2.
The receipt of such letters from the Project Manager and contractor, plus the required
releases from the pit owners, will complete the records required by the Right of Way
Division to enable them to make payment to the owners of local pits. In the case of
borrow, taken on an acreage basis, sketches are to be prepared showing the dimensions
of the individual pits, the name of the owner, the description of the land subdivision, ties
with the project centerline and computations for the acreage included in the letter to the
contractor. Such sketches shall be forwarded to the Right of Way Division together with
their copy of the letter to the contractor.
When the option block in the plans for the local pit includes payment for incidental items
such as temporary fencing, reseeding, crop damage, payment for haul road, etc., the
consideration for such incidental items will normally be on a lump sum basis and the
lump sum payment for such items shall be included in the letter to the contractor. If
payment is stipulated in the option block, for such incidental items, on other than a lump
sum basis, the Project Manager shall request the Right of Way Division to advise the
proper method of handling the item.
When work is to be suspended for the winter season, or for any other reason, for a
considerable length of time and it is desirable to make partial payment to the landowners,
the necessary information to authorize partial payment shall be forwarded to the Right of
Way Division and, in such cases, it is not necessary to advise the contractor. In the
event that a section of the project, involving optional borrow pits, is completed or the work
is completed on some of the local pits, the normal letter to the contractor should be
prepared in which it shall be noted that information will be forwarded at a later date for the
remaining borrow or material pits.
In order to complete the records and eliminate any questions, the Project Manager's letter
to the contractor must cover all optional borrow and local pits shown in the plans,
regardless of whether they are actually used.
There have been some cases where a pit under state option does not appear on the
plans for a particular project but does on an adjacent project. The contractor, if he/she
uses this pit, must still be responsible for royalty payments.
Royalty payments for local pit material will normally be made on a cubic meter (cubic
yard) basis and such quantities may be determined by preconstruction and final cross
sections. In cases where payment to the contractor is based on truck measurement the
royalty payment may be based on the same measurement, or by using weight
conversion factors where payment to the contractor is based on units of mass.
Borrow and Local Pit Materials Furnished by the State or County and Not
Involving the Contractor - When borrow or local pit materials are purchased from the
owner directly by the Department or County, and no option requirements involving the
contractor are included in the plans, substantially the same information must be
forwarded to the Right of Way Division. However, no letter need be written to the
contractor. The PM must obtain a site release from the landowner on these Department
@ obtained borrow sites.
123
2002
Summary of Final Quantities
105.09 SUMMARY OF FINAL QUANTITIES
Project Managers are required to use only black lead pencils in the original preparation
and checking of all field records and final computations in the field offices. The District
Office review should be indicated by red check marks, initials and dates. Corrections
shall be made with red pencil. If any further changes or corrections are found necessary
in the Lincoln Office, they will be made in blue or green pencil. This method will eliminate
any question at some future date as to where changes or corrections in the records
originated.
@ Each pay item in the contract must be summarized in SiteManager or other

approved documentation.
105.10 MOBILIZATION (SSHC Section 112)
Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment
The percent of payment for mobilization under a group of work is based on the percent of
work completed on the original contract group amount. Accordingly, when two or more
projects are included in the contract and work has been performed on only one project
the quantity for mobilization should be paid to all projects based on the percent of work
completed on the original contract group amount. In this case mobilization may be paid
on a project when no work has been performed on the project.
105.11 SALVAGED PROJECT MATERIALS REPORTING
Many project plans indicate that some removal items shall be stockpiled or salvaged to a
nearby maintenance facility. To accomplish documentation of these times, a DR 147a,
"Stock Returned for Credit" form has been developed.
The form shall be completely filled out any time project materials are salvaged to a
maintenance facility. The form needs the signature and initials of the project inspector
and the maintenance employee who received the material.
Distribute a copy of the completed form to the Project Manager, District Maintenance
@ Superintendent, Logistics Division, project file, and the contractor. Purchasing & Supply
will add the salvaged items to the appropriate stock inventory for the maintenance facility
that received these materials. Include a copy of the completed form in the final payment
packet for the project.
124
2002
Project Finalization – Final Payment to Contractor
106.00 -- PROJECT FINALIZATION
106.01 FINAL PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR
NDR policy is to retain one percent. This retainage is specifically withheld to cover:
• The amount of any possible overpayments or adjustments to contract items and

change orders discovered during an audit (State and/or FHWA).
• Any assessed liquidated damages.
Nebraska Code also requires payment of interest on retained contract funds. The interest
shall begin to accrue on retained funds on the 61st day after the project is complete provided
all of the contractor's documents are on file with the Department.
On projects involving different fundings such as Federal, Interstate, County, State and City,
the Project manager must review the project funding agreement and make sure costs are
properly recorded on the DR Form 44, "Summary and Distribution of Cost".
106.02 PRICE ADJUSTMENT CHANGE ORDERS
Price adjustment deductions are processed by change orders. If additional price

adjustments come up later, a second change order must be prepared; but such increases or
decreases are processed as separate change numbers.
106.03 EQUIPMENT PURCHASED BY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Occasionally, items of equipment are shown as contract items and then taken into the
Department's inventory when their use on the project is no longer required (variable
message boards, for example). It is required that the contractor be given written
confirmation when such equipment is ultimately received and title transferred to the
Department.
In order to provide an adequate audit trail, it is required that the letter of confirmation should
include detailed information regarding brand, model, serial number, date of transfer, current
location and a statement indicating the condition of the equipment when title was transferred.
A copy of the letter of confirmation should be forwarded to the Logistics Division (in addition
@ to your normal distribution of project correspondence) so that it may initiate the appropriate
paperwork reflecting addition of the equipment to the Department's inventory.
106.04 PROJECT ACCEPTANCE AND AUTHORIZATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
The Final Estimate when signed by the Construction Engineer is authorization to the
Controller's Office to release the final payment to the contractor.
125
2002
Project Finalization
Notification of Project Completion (DR Form 91) - All Projects

The Project Manager will prepare an acceptance letter and forward it to the DCE to notify the
contractor of tentative acceptance.
The DR Form 91 (Notification of Project Completion) should not be prepared and distributed
until the work is really done --- such as when a 180-day observation period is required on
paint. Wait until the 180 days have past, then determine if all work is acceptable, and then
complete the form.
The Controller Division uses the form to trigger final payments, so they want work which the
county or city promised to do included in the definition of “complete.” They explain that
although the local government may have performed the work, the value of that work is
included in their bookwork and subsequent notification to the FHWA.
Immediately after completion and acceptance of a contract, the DCE/DE will prepare and
sign a DR Form 91.
The DR Form 91 shall be completed promptly and forwarded to the District Engineer. In
essence, this means construction work is complete and the contractor does not need to
come back. However, processing DR Form 91 should NOT be held up waiting for
finalization of paperwork, including material certifications and/or "Change Orders."
• Preparing a "Notification of Project Completion" (DR Form 91) is self-explanatory. All
applicable blanks are to be completed.
• The DCE/DE, after signing DR Form 91, shall forward it to the FHWA, as applicable.
Distribution within NDR is shown on the form.
106.05 FINAL PACKAGE
Refer to the Final Review Process Manual to finalize a project and determine documents to
forward to the Construction Division.
106.06 FINAL COMPUTATIONS
When submitting final computations for any project, there shall be a statement by the District
Engineer to the effect that any and all trucks which hauled materials, incorporated into the
work on a volume basis, have been measured, computed and checked for volume specified.
106.07 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
Final Inspection and Acceptance - The District Engineer shall make the final inspection of
the project. Generally, the contractor will be required to complete all items of work included
in the contract before the final inspection and total acceptance of all contract work is made.
However, it is the Department's policy to make a tentative acceptance of completed groups
of a contract which have a separate time allowance. This tentative acceptance relieves the
contractor of maintenance responsibilities for such groups. It does not relieve the contractor
of the liability for any damage to the completed work caused by his/her operations in
completing the remaining groups of work, or the liability for any defective work discovered in
any item of groups of work prior to final acceptance and payment.
Before advising the District Engineer that final inspection of the project is desired, the Project
Manager shall make a careful inspection of the work with the contractor's superintendent.
He/she shall direct the superintendent's attention to any additional work which he/she
considers necessary before the final inspection is made. He/she shall also
126
make certain that the contractor has complied with SSHC Subsection 105.12 regarding the
contractor's use of land obtained by the Department.
After the work has been completed, the District Engineer shall within one week advise the
contractor in writing that the work is tentatively accepted by the Department. The Project
Manager shall include in the acceptance letter a list of documents that are missing.
In the event the Federal Government is participating in the work, the District Engineer shall
notify the Division Administrator of the Federal Highway Administration immediately upon
completion of the total contract or direct labor project agreement items on any project. This
report shall give the actual date that all contract work was completed. If any direct labor
work, such as a reflectorized railroad crossing signs, etc., which are a part of the detail
estimate, are constructed later, the date of their completion becomes the completion date for
the project.
The PM must notify the Construction Division when a project is complete. In SiteManager,
the PM must send a Lotus note to “DOR-CONST-COMPLETION NOTIFICATION.” The
Finaling Manual explains what must be included in the “note.”
Interest Payments on Delayed Estimates - State law provides that, "if the contractor has
furnished the Department all required records and reports, the Department shall pay the
contractor interest on the amount retained and on final payment due the contractor beginning
the sixty first day after the work under the contract has been completed, as evidenced by the
completion date established in the department's letter of tentative acceptance, and running
until the date when payment is tendered to the contractor.
The contractor is allowed fourteen calendar days from the date of notice as evidenced by the
date of the letter of notification to:
(1) Reply to the project manager’s written notification of optioned pit material quantities
and costs involved in a project (such reply shall be directed to the Department’s
Right-of-Way Division).
(2) Provide signed records or documents, such as Change Order – Supplemental
Agreements, requested in writing by the Department.
(3) Provide all required records and reports, such as payrolls, material certifications, etc.,
requested in writing by the Department.
In the event the time interval stated above is exceeded, deductions to the interest time period
will be made for the actual number of days to complete the action which occur beyond the
original sixty calendar days.
It is essential that the acceptance letter include the correct completion date which shall be in
agreement with the completion date as shown in the Project Manager's weekly working day
and progress reports. This date will be the last day on which any work is performed on the
project, and may be several days after the last working day charged. This condition will
occur when minor finishing or cleanup work is required prior to tentative acceptance.
In order to eliminate or minimize interest payments and provide adequate time for processing
through the various NDR Headquarters, it is essential that the final records be completed and
reviewed in the District Office as soon as possible after the actual completion date. This will
require that the final measurements and computations be completed to the greatest extent
possible during the time that construction is in progress and will require the taking of final
cross sections for grading work (only when plan quantities are disputed) as early as
possible. In some Districts, the volume of grading work will undoubtedly require the
organization of "floating" parties to take final cross sections, which will require adequate
District planning in advance of the need for such parties.
127
106.08 FINAL RECORDS

Introduction - The Project Manager shall prepare and submit, at the earliest possible date,
all necessary records to expedite payment to the landowners along the project for right-of-
way, channel changes, borrow and local pit materials, as provided in the various contracts
and options as applicable to the project. Prompt payment to landowners will create good will
and help in future right-of-way negotiations. DR Form 232, "Final Status Material and Site
Releases" is to be prepared and submitted with the final records for each contract.
Right-of-Way - No measurements or computations need to be submitted for right-of-way as
payment will normally be made for right-of-way prior to the actual construction, in
accordance with the terms of the right-of-way contract. Any requirement for additional right-
of-way shall be submitted to the Right of Way Division, through the District Office, for their
further handling.
Crop Damage - The acquisition of right-of-way and subsequent construction often results in
crop damage claims being made by the landowner. In order that information is available to
settle these claims, the following should be recorded for all growing crops within the right-of-
way, borrow, local pit and channel change areas.
1. A sketch showing the boundaries of each tract within station locations, angles, and
distances as necessary to locate the tract accurately with reference to project
centerline and to compute the area. The tract should be identified by the owner's
name and tenant (if any).
2. If the tract is subdivided with more than one type of crop, show the subdivision of tract
into fields as necessary to locate the limits of each crop. Information shown should
be similar to that required for the tract. Indicate the type of crop growing in each tract
or subdivision.
3. Show date of measurement and the name of the person making the measurement.
4. As construction progresses, record for each tract whether the crops are harvested by
their owners or are destroyed by the contractor's operations. If harvested, the date of
harvest should be recorded or if this date is not known, the date that the contractor
began work in the area and a notation indicating that harvesting was complete should
be recorded. If the crop in an area is only partially destroyed, the damage should be
noted or sketched in a manner such that the area of damage can be determined.
5. The right-of-way contracts and condemnation descriptions should be reviewed
carefully with respect to the provisions pertaining to crop damage. Crops planted
after contract has been signed will not be eligible for reimbursement.
6. Crop damage for each tract is to be reported by letter to the Right of Way Division
with a copy to the District Engineer as soon as the disposition of the growing crops
on that tract is complete. The report should contain the information listed above
along with computation of the area in acres, and the legal description of the property
(section or part, township and range).
7. A DR Form 44 must be submitted with the final records for each project included in a
contract. See Appendix 1 for examples of this form.
8. On projects in which the Federal government participates in the cost of the work,
each project is subdivided to conform with accounting practices established by the
Federal Highway Administration. These subdivisions are shown in the "detail
estimate", copies which are forwarded to the Project Manager by the Contracts
128
Section. The costs of each group of work performed in each subdivision shall also
be shown on the summary and distribution sheet, DR Form 44, Summary and
Distribution of Cost, prepared for the project. If DR Form 44 has insufficient columns
to accommodate all the Municipal and Rural Sections required by the Federal
Highway Administration, it shall be extended to the right by securely attaching
sufficient columns from another DR Form 44.
9. Accounting records require that construction costs be prorated to individual counties.

Therefore, county splits must be shown on DR Form 44.
10. Many times, the District Office files do not contain copies of the Certified Analysis of
Asphalt Material received on the projects and it is requested the Project Managers
include their copies with final computation when transmitted to the District Review
Section. When they have served their purpose they will be returned.
Alternate Crop Damage Procedure
The Right-of-Way Division is leaving the way to present the crop damage payment up to the
Project Manager. If the acreage is between 1/4-acre increments, go to the higher increment.
1/4 acre will be the minimum.
If the farmers accept the affidavit price, payment will be made within a few weeks. If they do
not accept the affidavit price, payment will not be made until the crop is harvested and sold.
If the Project Manager runs into a crop that is not covered or the amount is not agreeable,
make the measurements of the field and forward them to the Right-of-Way Division. They
will in turn send them an affidavit asking for the average yield for the rest of the field, and the
price they were paid when the crop was sold, minus harvesting and marketing costs.
The sources of information used in determining the average yield, average price, and the
average cost were obtained from the Cooperative Extension, Institute of Agricultural and
Natural Resources, and the Farm Custom Rates, University of Nebraska.
CROP 1/4 Acre 1/2 Acre 3/4 Acre 1 Acre
Irrigated corn $75.00 $150.00 $225.00 $300.00

Dry corn $40.00 $ 80.00 $120.00 $160.00
Irrigated soybeans $62.00 $124.00 $186.00 $248.00
Dry soybeans $48.00 $ 96.00 $144.00 $192.00
Wheat $31.00 $ 62.00 $ 93.00 $124.00
Oats $21.00 $ 42.00 $ 63.00 $ 84.00
Milo $32.00 $ 64.00 $ 96.00 $128.00
Alfalfa was not included because the variables of age and cuttings affect the averages
greatly. Other crops (beets, edible beans, potatoes, etc.) were not included because of
insufficient information.
129
Final Records
The schedule will be revised periodically. Any questions or comments should be referred to
the Property Management Section, (402) 479-4770.
Conversion of Existing Direct Measurement Earthwork Pay Items to Established Quantity

Pay Items
Certain earthwork items may be converted from being direct-measured for final payment to
being paid as established quantities. This policy is to expedite the release of final payment to
the contractor, reduce possible interest payments to the contractor, and relieve a portion of
the workload performed by field personnel.
The following items of work will be eligible for conversion:
1. Excavation
2. Excavation, Borrow
3. Other earthwork-related items when approved by the Construction Engineer
Direct-measurement items may be converted to established quantities when the following

requirements are met:
1. The project has been staked and built according to plan, or the plan quantity
has been adjusted to account for field changes.
2. The plan quantity has been adjusted for any obvious errors, and the contractor
has been notified of the adjustment.
3. The Project Manager has made written notification to the contractor of the
proposed change in the method of measurement, and the contractor has
agreed to the proposal in writing.
4. If the contractor has agreed in writing to accept plan quantity including field
@ adjustments and revisions, it is not necessary to create a new “established
quantity” pay item. Payment will be made under the original contract item.
130
2002
Sample Letter
1997
CROP DAMAGE PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT
Project:
Tract:
This is to certify that I, the undersigned, agree on the amount of $_______________ which is being
paid for ______________ (acres) of __________________ damaged during construction, based on
the schedule prepared by the State of Nebraska, Department of Roads.
_______________________________ ________________________________
Owner/Tenant Social Security #
Federal Identification #
THE CROP PRICES HAVE BEEN COMPILED USING DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE AND
UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA STATISTICS. THE PRICE REFLECTS AVERAGE YIELDS AND
MARKET PRICES LESS THE COST OF HARVESTING AND MARKETING.
CROP 1/4 Acre 1/2 Acre 3/4 Acre 1 Acre
Irrigated corn $75.00 $150.00 $225.00 $300.00

Dry corn $40.00 $ 80.00 $120.00 $160.00
Irrigated soybeans $62.00 $124.00 $186.00 $248.00
Dry soybeans $48.00 $ 96.00 $144.00 $192.00
Wheat $31.00 $ 62.00 $ 93.00 $124.00
Oats $21.00 $ 42.00 $ 63.00 $ 84.00
Milo $32.00 $ 64.00 $ 96.00 $128.00
___________________________ ___________________
Project Manager Date
131
2002
106.09 STATEMENT OF MATERIALS AND LABOR
A "Statement of Materials and Labor" (Form FHWA-47) is required for federal-aid projects
that have contract cost (including change order adjustments) of $1,000,000 or more.
Detailed instructions for completing Form FHWA-47 are on the back of the form. Blank
forms are available from the Construction Division. A blank copy is provided in Appendix 2.
Upon contract completion, each subcontractor must submit a completed Form FHWA-47
(Part "B") to the prime contractor. Subcontractors shall include their name and the word
"sub" in the blank space at the top of the form.
The prime contractor shall combine the data from each subcontractor with their own data on
one form. Prime contractors shall include their name in the top margin of the "combined"
form, note the form is "combined", and attach a listing of all subcontractors involved.
When completing Part "B," contractors shall:
• Report only use of material items that are listed on the form.
• Pay attention to the "units" being requested. "Quantity" entries must correspond to
the form's "units."
• Enter required information in the correct column(s).
Prime contractors are responsible to furnish the Construction Division Headquarters

(Lincoln) three completed FHWA-47 "packets" before a final pay voucher can be processed.
(One packet shall be the original and two packets may be photocopies of the original.) Each
FHWA-47 "packet" shall include:
• The prime contractor's combined contract information
• All FHWA-47 forms and any relevant supporting documents furnished by

subcontractors.
• Composite of all subcontractors listed on subcontractor request form(s)
Upon receipt of FHWA-47 forms, the Construction Division shall complete Part "A" and verify
that:
• An item of material used by a contractor has not been omitted.
• All "starred" line items have received a response or entry.
• Costs reported are reasonable and do not have obvious errors.
• The prime contractor has included required information from all subcontractors on
the "combined" form.
132
2002
As Built Plans
106.10 AS BUILT PLANS

An extra set of full size plans will be furnished the Project Manager for use as as-built plans.
The Project Manager may request an additional set of plans from the Construction Division
for as-builts if needed. The as-built plans shall be an exact representation of the completed
work. Any revised plan sheets must be included and the sheets they replace should be
discarded. All special plan sheets must be included. The S1 sheets need to be corrected to
@ show the Final Quantities including additional items of work.
In preparation of these plans, only black pen shall be used. Lines, dimensions and notations
shown in the original plans which have been eliminated or corrected shall be "X ed" (crossed
out) and boxed with solid lines. Dashed lines shall be used to indicate any as-built lines,
dimensions, or tie points which do not conform to the original plans. For example, a 2’ x 65’
8” (600 mm x 20.0 m) pipe culvert is constructed at Station 103+50, whereas the plans
called for a 2’ x 63’ 3 “ (600 mm x 19.25 m ) pipe culvert at Station 101+50. The outline of the
culvert at Station 101+50 shall be boxed and the notations describing the work "X ed" within
the box with solid lines. The outline of the as-built culvert, in dashed lines, and corrected
description notation should be shown at Station 103+50. In striking out figures and notations,
care should be used to avoid obliterating the original figures.
133
2002
g:\conman2.dgn Feb. 03, 1998 11:43:10
In the event appreciable errors are noted in the locations of side roads, section lines, property
fences, buildings, roadway structures, or other important landmarks, the corrected locations
shall be shown.
1
The front sheet shall bear the following label in some convenient blank space:
AS BUILT PLANS
Work performed by..................(Name of Contractor)
(If more than one contract has been let to complete the work, list all prime contractors)
Prepared by........(Name)......(Title)......(Date)
Approved by......(Project Manager).....(Title)......(Date)
The following information shall be shown for the various types of work:
Grading:
1. All changes in alignment.
2. All equations in stationing used during construction.
134
3. All permanent references for control points. Also, all control points required to
establish centerline shall be perpetuated. Brass caps and pipe are available
for this.
4. All changes in grade lines and elevations.
5. Locations and elevations of all benchmarks used during construction or

permanently established in taking final cross sections. Permanent
benchmarks should be identified by the word "Permanent". Benchmarks shall
be established at box culverts, bridges and other locations where they may be
considered permanent.
6. Location and number stamped on brass disc of all Government Survey

benchmarks. The elevation based on the project level datum, if available.
7. Location of all right-of-way markers installed.
8. Location of all land corner witnesses, existing, or installed by the Project

Manager.
9. Location of all farm entrances constructed showing lengths, diameters and

type of culverts laid or relaid.
10. Locations of limits of construction of all borrow pits, channel changes, dikes,
intercepting ditches, etc., outside the right-of-way not covered by extended
roadway cross sections. The stationing and location of the base line with
respect to the project centerline shall also be shown.
Culverts:
1. All changes in location.
2. All changes in lengths or dimensions.
3. The type of pipe installed (CMP, RCP, etc.).
Bridges and Special Culverts:
1. All changes in stationing.

2. All changes in design.
3. All revised dimensions.
4. Floor and bridge seat elevation of bridges.
5. Maximum and minimum length of piling in each footing.
6. The description, location and elevation of all permanent benchmarks.
135
Surfacing:
1. Beginning and ending stationing of each type and width of surfacing

constructed.
2. Location of all option pits used in connection with the construction of the
project. If any plan pits are not used," designate by the words "Not Used".
Processing As Built Plans
1. Project personnel will prepare one (1) full-size set of As Builts.
2. Cities, counties, etc. that have money involved or a special interest in the project will
be asked by the Project Manager if they need/want a complete copy of the As Builts
or only specified sheets.
3. The As Builts will be submitted to the Construction Division with the final records for
finaling with notification of the number of complete copies or specified sheets desired.
4. The final review will be performed.
5. After the final review is completed, the specified sheets or complete copies, as
requested by the District, will be copied in half-size sets. The copies will be returned
to the District within three (3) to four (4) weeks after submittal to the Construction
Division.
6. The full-size set of As Builts will be submitted to the Communication Division for
microfilming after the final review is complete and the half-size copies of the As Builts
are made.
7. After the As Builts have been microfilmed, the Communication Division will submit the
As Builts to the Transportation Planning Division for their use.
8. Upon completion of their work, the Transportation Planning Division will periodically
return the full-size As Builts to the District, via truck.
Lighting and Signals - On all roadway lighting and signal projects, a set of "as-builts" will be
prepared, pertinent to the wiring alignment, showing the exact location of conduit or cable
runs, pull boxes, and any other information which would be beneficial in case of maintenance
problems or construction activities in the area. When "as-builts" are submitted to the agency
at the time the agency is notified by letter of the acceptance of the installation and to assume
the maintenance.
136
2002
Overruns and Underruns Letter
Clearance Letter
The Project Manager shall submit a letter to the Construction Division (with copies to Motor
Carrier Permits & Facilities Maintenance) indicating clearance on bridges, sign trusses, and
other structures that create a clearance limit.
106.11 OVERRUNS AND UNDERRUNS LETTER
The summary of overruns and underruns letter, which used to be submitted when a contract
is finalled, is no longer required. However, a DR Form 74, Cost Overun/Underrun Notification
is required whenever contract quantities overrun/underrun by $50,000.00 or more. This letter
must go to the Construction Division and the Controller Division so that appropriate
redistribution of funds is made as soon as possible. This letter is sent as soon as the
change in contract quantities is known. The Controller Division will obtain appropriate
approvals.
@ 106.12 CONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS
The intent of the Contractor Evaluation is to report strengths and/or weaknesses of a

contractor’s project-related activities, including paperwork, material documentation, attitude,
cooperation, and the actual contracted work. It is suggested that remarks be included to
substantiate or help explain significantly high or low ratings or other unusual circumstances
on the project. The Construction Division maintains a file of the completed forms, reacts to
low evaluations, and seeks to improve the performance and project administration of
contractors doing work for us.
The project manager should make note of significant events occurring throughout the life of
the project to assist in the preparation of the evaluation when the work is complete. In so
doing, perhaps problems can be discussed and resolved as they occur. At a minimum,
significant problems reported on a contractor’s evaluation should be discussed with him or
her when the evaluation is presented.
Evaluations are used as a factor in determining the amount of work on which a contractor
may bid. Therefore, it is extremely important that contractors are evaluated realistically,
factually, and without bias. In this regard, it is equally important that evaluations are
completed promptly. To be at all meaningful, data from the EOC’s must be current - - and
ALL of it must be in the system.
The EOC should be completed and submitted to the Construction Division within 30 days of
completion of work. For subcontractors, the EOC should be submitted within 30 days of the
time you are relatively certain that the subcontractor’s work is complete. For a prime
contractor, the EOC should be submitted within 30 days of the project completion date
established in the District Engineer’s letter of tentative acceptance to the contractor. (In
other words, the prime contractor’s EOC will always be the last EOC to be completed. The
performance of all subcontractors reflects on the prime contractor’s overall rating, so it is
only proper that the prime contractor’s overall rating, so it is only proper that the prime’s EOC
not be competed until the project is entirely complete.)
The Contractor Evaluation is to be completed on every contractor and subcontractor - -

except “trucking” subcontracts. (Trucking subcontractors may receive an optional evaluation
at the PM’s discretion.) SiteManager identifies whether or not a subcontract is
137
2002
Overruns and Underruns Letter
@ for trucking. An evaluation should also be completed on all bridge painting jobs regardless of
size.
Contractor evaluations are required for subcontractors at any level - - 2nd tier subcontract, for
example.
Project Managers shall prepare and sign the evaluation and forward the original to the
Construction Office in Lincoln. For projects inspected and managed by consultants, it is
appropriate to have the evaluation signed by the local entity’s project manager. (The
document itself, however, must be prepared on the RUG so the results are posted to the
database.)
A copy of the complete evaluation must also be furnished to the contractor or subcontractor
being rated. Prime contractors deserve to see their ratings as well as those of their
subcontractors, so make sure that both get a copy.
All contractor evaluations shall be prepared using the checklist system provided in RUG.
The use of this system automatically enters the required data into the database.
137
2002
Letter of Transmittal – Finaled Projects
For evaluations of subcontractors, report type of work done by that subcontractor.
Contractor evaluations are required for subcontractors at any level, including 2nd tier
subcontractors.
The intent of an evaluation is to report strength and/or weakness of a contractor's project

related activities including paperwork, material documentation, attitude, and cooperation.
Special attention should be given to contractor ratings of "poor" and "unsatisfactory."
Remarks should be included for any individual item(s) that is rated less than fair. Also good
remarks should be included when a contractor is given a high rating or deserving recognition.
The Construction Division maintains a file of the completed form, reacts to low evaluations,
and seeks to improve contractor project administration. Evaluations are also used as a
factor to establish bidder qualifications. Therefore, it is very important that contractors are
evaluated realistically, factually, and without bias. The rating system developed is intended to
produce a rating of "good" when the minimum acceptable performance requirements are
met.
A series of less than satisfactory evaluations may be grounds for disqualifying bidders from
further contracts or reducing their bidding qualifications.
It is anticipated that lower than average ratings would have been discussed at a meeting
between the Project Manager and contractor representatives prior to form submittal. A
contractor should have an opportunity to discuss and understand why a low rating was given.
Further, a contractor should be given (if requested) a critique of corrective actions which
would prevent reoccurrence of low rating(s).
The RDP Form 344, Evaluation of Contractor, is available on the computer or you can use
paper copies.
To provide a broader evaluation of the contractor's performance of his/her work with

reference to his/her equipment, personnel and prosecution of work, RDP Form 344
"Evaluation of Contractor" has been devised. This report is to be completed by the Project
Manager for the prime contractor and subcontractor(s) for each separate time allowance
under a contract and submitted with the final computations.
The contract value for the prime contractor shall be the original contract value (not final
value). The subcontract value used shall be that authorized by the subcontract approval
letter. All subcontract approval letters will show the value of the work being subcontracted.
The working days allowed shall reflect all time extensions approved either by letter from the
Construction Division during the progress of the work or by supplemental agreements. If a
time extension is forthcoming due to "extra work" a correction in the field entry will be made
by the Construction Division. However, extra work should be a consideration taken into
account in evaluating the prosecution of the work. When this is the case, an explanation to
this effect should be made on the reverse side of the form.
138
2002
Intentionally left blank.

@
139
2002
@ This page intentionally left blank.
140
2002
106.13 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL – FINALED PROJECTS

The Project Manager shall complete a letter of transmittal with project documents when they
@ are forwarded to the District Reviewer. The District Reviewer will also create a letter of
transmittal when he/she forwards the records to the Construction Division. The transmittal
letter shall include an itemized list of all field notebooks, cross sections, computation sheets,
forms, letters, statements, temperature charts, etc., which are being transmitted, so that the
shipment can be checked to determine whether it is complete when received. When
overhaul or additional haul computations were made in the Lincoln Office, attention should be
directed to that fact. If there is any question regarding the accuracy of any of the
computations, or there is any item which should be given special attention in the District
Office, the items in question should be explained in the letter of transmittal. If the project was
completed within the working day time allowance, a working day resume is not required. The
transmittal letter should contain a statement indicating whether or not the work was
completed within the contract time allowance and/or any internal time limits. A copy of the
Project Manager's transmittal letter shall accompany the project records and final estimate
when they are forwarded to the Lincoln Office.
When submitting final records, please label all computation and summary sheets with the
item numbers for which documentation is being provided.
106.14 FINALING PROCEDURES
See Construction Division's Final Review Process Manual for detailed steps to finalize a
project.
141
2002
106.15 UNAUTHORIZED WORK
The contractor should not be permitted to perform work without line and grades established
by the Project Manager.
The contractor should not be permitted to perform any work prior to the execution of the
contract by the Construction Engineer. The Project Manager can request to be advised by
telephone when the contract has been executed, if the contractor is "standing by" awaiting
such execution to begin work.
106.16 USE OF ADJACENT LAND UNDER CONTRACT OR LEASE
We no longer require the contractor to provide a release letter. The contractor is responsible
to the landowner and the Department will stay out of the agreement unless the Department
acquires the access rights.
Option pits obtained by the Department will require a site release. The Project Manager shall
contact the landowner and obtain the site release. The release should be obtained as soon
as possible while the contractor is still on site with equipment to make corrections.
106.17 FINAL CLEANING UP
The importance of timely cleanup of cast-in-place concrete structures should be discussed

at the pre-construction conference. It is the Department's policy to request the contractors
to perform the necessary cleanup in flood plains at the earliest possible time to prevent scrap
lumber, nails, form ties, etc., from being flushed out on adjacent landowners.
If this material is deposited on adjacent landowners, the contractor must satisfactorily gather
and dispose of it before final acceptance of the work involved. It is in the contractor's and the
Department's best interests to keep this cleanup work "current".
The District Engineer should be advised if the contractor refuses to perform this work in
accordance with this policy and a field book entry made each time the contractor was
contacted. Progress payments can be withheld until the area is cleaned.
The contractor shall make a final cleanup of the highway, borrow pits and all ground (off or on
the project) occupied by him/her in connection with the work, leaving it in a neat and
presentable condition.
142
2002
106.18 CONSULTANT INSPECTION
In regard to projects utilizing consultant inspection services, some misunderstandings have

arisen when our acceptance date preceded a date when the county board “accepted” the
project.
Project Development has asked that consultants utilized for engineering and inspection
services be given written notice regarding project completion dates. The consultant
agreements usually specify the time allowed for the preparation and submittal of As -Built
Plans and other final records, and the consultants need to be told when the clock has
started. It is my understanding that the consultant agreements state “The State will provide
written notification of construction acceptance to the Consultant.” At least one consultant has
reported he does not received the required notice.
Feel free to be somewhat flexible in “starting the clock”, but do put it in writing --- and send a
copy of the letter to Lee Pavel in Project Development so he may begin his end-of-
project paperwork too. The consultant services agreements and payments are audited by
the Department, and it is important to have the notification documented.
Protest of Final Quantities of Earthwork Items
If the contractor wants to protest any earthwork item, the contractor must notify the NDOR, in
writing, of the disputed quantity, including the approximate quantity that the contractor feels is
in error and the basis for the dispute.
The NDOR will review the appropriate data and determine if an error exists and notify the
contractor of the decision.
Should the contractor dispute the NDOR decision, the contractor will be allowed to disprove
the disputed final earthwork quantity provided the following requirements are met:
1. The work is done under the supervision of and the report is certified and stamped by
a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Nebraska.
2. The contractor furnishes the NDOR Construction Engineer with a cost estimate from
the consultant for approval prior to commencement of the work.
3. The contractor furnishes the NDOR Construction Engineer with a copy of the
contract with the consultant engaged to perform the work with a detailed description
of the procedures and technology to be used in calculating the quantities prior to
commencement of the work. The procedures and technology must be compatible
with NDOR procedures and technology.
4. The report provided by the contractor to the NDOR Construction Engineer must show
all calculations used to determine the quantity, list all data used in the review and its
origin, identify the technology used and identify any differences between the
contractor calculations and NDOR calculations.
143
2002
5. If, after reviewing the report, the NDOR agrees that the final pay quantity or the
aggregate correction of all items directly related (i.e.: Excavation and Excavation,
Borrow) are in error by more than five percent (5%), the NDOR will compensate the
contractor for the quantity in excess of the final pay quantity shown in the final records
and for the contractor-incurred expenses to perform the post-construction
calculations previously approved by the NDOR Construction Engineer.
Payment will not be made for contractor-incurred expenses to perform the post-
construction calculations if the contractor fails to prove that the NDOR final pay
quantity is in error by more than five percent (5%).
If the contractor’s report indicates that an overpayment of more than five percent (5%)
has occurred, the NDOR will pay for the contractor-incurred expenses to perform the
post-construction calculations previously approved by the NDOR Construction
Engineer and will make payment on the reduced quantity.
6. The issues of waste, shrinkage, compaction and settlement are not eligible for
additional payment under this policy, and no allowance will be made for them.
Upon request and at no cost, the NDOR will furnish the contractor with the following
information:
1. Preliminary Cross-Sections
2. Slope Stake Data
3. Blue Top Data
4. Design Cross-Sections
5. Current Revisions
6. Standard Plans
7. Design Calculations
8. Current Field Changes
9. Final Cross-Sections
The contractor’s failure to fulfill any or all of the requirements stated above will be cause to
deny the contractor’s claim for additional compensation.
143a
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
144
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
144a
DIVISION 200
EARTHWORK
Earthwork Inspection Checklist
SECTION 201.00 -- EARTHWORK INSPECTION CHECKLIST
EMBANKMENTS/EXCAVATION
SSHC References: Section 205 Excavation & Embankment

Section 1033 Aggregates
Other References: NDR, Materials & Tests, Earthwork Engineering Guide

NDR Materials and Sampling Guide
NDR Standard Test Methods
Inspection Crew: Grade Inspector
Inspection Equipment: Nuclear Density Gauge (With Manual)

(AASHTO T 238) Nuclear Density Gauge probe puller or auger.
Thermometer (Surface)
Scale (Dept. of Ag. Certified)
Metal Thickness Ruler
3 m (10 foot) straightedge
Gravel Sampling Bags
Equipment Spade.
(NDR T 205) Rubber Balloon (flexible membrane)
Sand.
Calibrated container with an air valve and a volume
indicator.
Base plate.
Embankment/Excavation
Procedures:
General Comments:
1. The operations of excavating the roadway and borrow
material (Roadway Excavation) and the placing,
compacting and finishing of the excavation material in
the embankments or fills (Embankment) are inspected
and controlled as a single "Grading operation".
2. The value of grading may be considerable.
3. “No building is better than its foundation" and good
quality embankments and subgrade are essential to the
good performance and quality of the base course and
pavement structure.
4. The grade inspector's work is of the utmost importance
in producing a quality riding surface for the motorist.
145
5. The large and fast grading equipment employed by

grading contractors means inspector should be on site
to sample each lift.
6. The inspector should be thoroughly familiar with SSHC
Section 205 Excavation and Embankment.
7. Check all contract documents for grading
requirements.
8. The type of embankment compaction will be specified
in the plans (generally on Sheet No. 3).
9. Construction notes in the plans should be noted and
checked against physical features on the project. The
right of way should be checked for physical features
and obstructions which may not be shown in the plans.
Typical items to be checked:
a. Check the construction widths needed, and
fences which must be moved, and compare
them with the available right of way and
contracts for additional right of way, borrow and
construction easements.
b. Utility pole lines - check against construction
limits and utility agreement provisions.
See Subsection 1300.03 c. Survey or other type monuments or markers -
mark or relocate.
d. Selective placement notes.
e. Trees or shrubs which are indicated in the plans
to be preserved -mark as necessary.
f. The Design file contains all of the preliminary
and design information of the soils, pit sketches
and contracts, preliminary soil compaction
curves and soil tests.
10. Rights of adjacent property owners will be protected.
a. Tile lines and intakes should be located,
replaced, and repaired to maintain the integrity
of the subsurface drainage. (Preventing
unintended drainage from reaching adjacent
property.)
b. Right-of-way contracts should be checked for
possible special negotiated items which should
be included in the work being done.
11. Any contractor operation that causes damage to
partially completed or completed work shall be reported
to the Project Manager and noted in the Daily Diary.
12. Make sure the contractor installs silt fences prior to
commencing soil disturbing work.
146
Preconstruction Conf: 13. Preconstruction Conference (See Subsection 102.01)

a. The Project Manager should go over the
unusual, difficult, or special items with the
grading inspector, and with the contractor.
1-800-331-5666 b. Remind the Contractor to call "1 CALL - Diggers
Hotline of Nebraska", for buried utilities, pipe
lines, sewers, communication cables, etc. -
check for possibility of such not being shown
and be sure provisions are made to mark or
protect as necessary to prevent damage.
c. Inspection and Control of Grading Operations
d. The contractor's Pre-Watering Plan should be
presented and discussed.
e. Discuss selective placement requirements.
f. Determine what contractor will do to keep
stockpiles free from contamination.
g. Removal and storage of topsoil materials, shall
be discussed.
h. Project schedule. (SSHC Subsection 108.07)
i. Partnering procedures.
j. Traffic control.
k. Archeological & palentological discoveries.
l. Environmental issues(Erosion Control, Wet
Lands, Migratory Bird Nesting)
m. Detours and Shooflies.
n. Railroad Special Provisions.
o. Safety issues (Guardrail removal, etc.)
p. Material submittals.
14. Site preparation such as clearing and grubbing,
wetlands preparation, removals, and vegetation
disposal on cuts, fills, and borrows are accomplished
according to contract documents.
Stockpiling: 15. If stockpiling of selective placement material is

necessary, no payment is made for re-excavation.
(Topsoil, sand, or any soil identified as select
materials.)
Clearing & Grubbing: 16. If contract has "Large Tree Removal" count
A large tree has 1 m (3 foot) and record trees before work starts.
circumference at 1 m (3 foot) 17. SSHC Subsection 204.02 limits the
above ground line or surface area that the contractor may disturb to
if only the stump 75,000 m² (90,000 square yards) plus an equal amount
remains, a stump of 1 m of clearing and grubbing area.
(3 foot) circumference 18. The Project Manager may increase these
at ground level. limits but only by written notice to the contractor.
19. The written notice should include justification
147
for the increase and special procedures the contractor

must use to safeguard the environment.
20. Copies of this notice must be forwarded to the
Construction Engineer and the District Engineer.
21. 75,000 m² (90,000 square yards) is equal to
approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) on an average project.
Soil Moisture: 22. Check the moisture content of the excavation and
borrow material 1-5 days before the contractor starts
work.
23. Discuss the drying or moistening of the excavated
material.
24. Check to see if contractor knows the condition of the
soil.
25. Verify how the contractor will control moisture in
Class "III" embankments
26. Contractor should mix clay/non-granular material to
uniformly distribute the moisture and various soil types
before compaction.
27. Pre-Watering can be wasteful. Ponding or sprinkling
may require more water and more work than wetting
the soil as it is placed.
a. But the moisture content will be more uniform
and dust will be eliminated.
b. The contractor is responsible to obtain the soil
samples both before and during the water
application.
c. The Project Manager will run moisture tests to
determine water application rates and to check
the progress of the penetration. Use nuclear
density gauge to determine the moisture content
at different elevations below the surface up to
depth of cut. Compare the amount of prewater
to the expected amount that would be required if
added at time soil is placed.
d. The following example does not allow for water
lost by evaporation, run off, etc., and will need to
be supplemented by information derived from
subsequent testing.
e. As a precautionary measure against
overwatering, leave some dry material for
mixing with soil which was over watered.
(Required water per cubic meter) (cubic yard) -
(Natural in place water in the soil per cubic
meter) (cubic yard) = Amount of water to add or
if negative result, the amount of water to remove
per cubic meter (cubic yard).
f. Preserve the natural vegetation on the area until
the watering is complete.
148
g. If the vegetation is removed before watering, or

the soil type, slope, or condition warrants, the
ground should be ripped 650 mm (2 feet) deep
on its contours approximately 1.2 m (4 feet)
centers to allow penetration of water and
minimize runoff.
h. Adjust the application rate to control runoff and
erosion.
i. Construct dikes to control runoff and erosion.
j. Document any wasted water in field book.
28. Excavation areas should be disced immediately after
pre-watering to reduce evaporation.
a. A two to three week curing period is necessary
to permit the water to move downward and
become uniformly distributed in the soil.
b. The importance and length of this curing period
will vary with the soil type and conditions of the
soil. (Clay very important--sand not important.)
Compaction: 29. Compacting equipment which produces a glossy

(See SSHC Subsection surface shall not be allowed. This may cause
206.03 para 9) lamination.
30. PM should approve all haul routes over structures.
31. Know the moisture/density requirements for each
section of the project.
a. Review SSHC Subsection 205.03 for
construction methods and procedures which
give moisture, density, and lift thickness
requirements.
32. a. A good practice is for the contractor to spread
the soil as thinly and smoothly as practicable, to
distribute the hauling equipment over the embankment
to minimize the rolling.
b. Discing is required to get uniform density.
c. Layers must be compacted before the next
layer is placed.
33. Require rolling over entire area--completely to the
outside edges.
34. Require that hauling and leveling equipment is routed
over the full width of the embankment.
35. Visually check the subgrade and the embankment
under compacting equipment.
a. When a sheepsfoot walks out of soil you have
good compaction.
b. Peorian clays may show movement/instability
and yet be at specified density. (When this
occurs, additional work is necessary to stabilize
the fill.)
36. a. Compare earthwork to the stakes--tell the
Project Manager and the contractor if something
does not look right.
149
b. Make sure stakes are uniform and easily read.

37. Run one-point curves for soils that do not have
corresponding compaction curves.
Subsurface Concerns: 38. Insist that all objectionable material such as logs,
vegetation, trash, or unsuitable soils are removed
before fill is started.
39. a. Require old pavements to be removed if
embankment will not be greater than 1 m
(3 feet). If more than 1 m (3 feet) of
embankment the pavement must be broken-up.
b. SSHC Subsection 104.06 defines "minor
obstruction" and lists examples of when the
contractor should be paid extra for removal of
unforeseen obstructions.
Drainage: 40. The roadbed will be adequately drained and protected

at all times. (Poor drainage during construction often
results in an inferior construction.)
a. The roadbed should be tight (shaped, bladed
smooth, and rolled, so as to shed water) at the
end of each day.
b. Flowable fill, granular fill, drain pipes, or other
requirements may be necessary to permanently
correct the problem.
Settlement: 41. Things to check:

a. Settlement or side slip may result in slopes or
sidehills if not properly stepped or plowed.
42. Settlement may result at Grade points (0-0 sections)
due to fill taper, improper or insufficient compaction and
different soil type (Subsoil - topsoil - parent soil)
meeting. Particular attention should be given to the
compaction of the new embankment at 0-0 points.
Usually blending to 1 m (3 feet) depth is required.
43. Settlement of areas adjacent to or over structures
frequently occurs. Take additional density readings in
these areas.
a. Proper placement and compaction of material in
the areas inaccessible to rollers and the earth
moving equipment will eliminate this problem.
b. This involves close contact inspection of
compaction performed by small mechanical
tampers, which is tiresome, manual work.
c. The inspectors' must confirm that this work is
properly performed.
150
d. When the slope is greater than 1-vertical to

4-horizontal, step the ground to prevent wedging
action against the structure.
e. Use selected soil which will compact readily, if
available.
f. Silty soil should not be used.
g. During backfill operations, displacement of wing
or abutment walls may be checked by erecting
a "telltale" before backfilling is started and
checking the wall for movement as the backfill
progresses. If movement is detected, backfill
operations should be suspended and the
Project Manager advised of the problem.
44. Watch for and report unstable and unanticipated
settlement to the Project Manager and Materials &
Tests Engineer.
a. Bulging at the toe of the slope.
b. Cracks running parallel to centerline are
indicators of unstable embankment conditions.
c. Subsidence at bridge ends, excessive cracking
inside box culverts or unanticipated swales are
signs of excessive settlement.
d. Pumping action.
Foundation Engineer 45. Where surcharges are included in the plans as

(479-4678) work to be accomplished during construction, the Soil
Mechanics Section of the Materials and Research
Division wishes to be informed before the beginning of
the construction of the surcharge.
a. Construction progress and anticipated paving
date may allow a change in the height of the
surcharge necessary to complete the
anticipated settlement.
Backfill: 46a. Confirm culvert backfill material meets specification

requirements.
46b. Backfills on box and pipe culverts should be brought up
evenly on both sides at the same time to avoid
displacement of the structure.
47. When tamping under the lowest 90° of a culvert place
elevation check stakes at the ends of the pipe to detect
any rise.
48. The grade inspector should be alert to possible damage
to any drainage structures which the contractor's heavy
equipment may cause by crossing or working over
such structures, and particularly to possible damage to
pipe culverts covered with minimum fill.
151
a. The contractor shall be informed immediately of any

observed damage and the information recorded in the
field book.
Grades, Lines & Profile: 49. Large shortages or overages of excavation material
may be encountered.
a. Revising the grade lines, rebalancing, or
obtaining additional material outside
construction limits or balance points require
prior District approval.
b. The Project Manager should be contacted on all
overage or shortage conditions.
50. The grade inspector should inspect and advise the
Contractor of deviations from the lines and grades as
staked by the Project Manager.
51. The inspector should note any actual construction
balance points in the grading notebook.
See Survey Blue Tops 52. Finish grading

a. The roadbed surface should be finished within
15 mm (5/8 inch) of the finish grade stakes.
b. The shoulder lines and slopes should be
reasonably true.
c. Side ditches and borrow areas should be
finished reasonably true to grade and should
drain.
d. Finish grade stakes should be set for finishing
flow line grades in borrow pits if the width and
grade are such that stakes are essential to
finishing the pit to provide proper drainage
without ponding.
e. Finish grading must be completed on a timely
basis so that erosion control measures may
progress satisfactorily.
Covercrop Seeding: 53. All finished work and any other areas that need
(Agronomist Dick Gray erosion control should be kept current with
479-4537) covercrop seeding performed as the work progresses.
54. Any repair required on a section that has been
tentatively accepted will be paid as extra work (unless
considered to be the fault of the contractor). (SSHC
Subsections 105.13, 107.14 and 109.08 define tentative
acceptance.)
152
Soil Tests: 55. The inspector should require the contractor to

(Form DR 86) move the field lab as necessary to facilitate the field
testing.
56. The grade inspector will test soil samples for two
primary purposes.
a. To monitor the effectiveness of the contractor's
operations and use of forces and equipment in
controlling the moisture and the compaction of
the soil. These are called "job control tests".
b. To verify that the completed work (compacted
embankment) meets the requirements for
moisture (if specified) and density. These are
called "acceptance tests".
The minimum number of tests necessary to
verify that the compacted embankment meets
the specified requirements for moisture and
density will be shown in the Materials Sampling
Guide.
57. The number of moisture-density tests will vary but the
minimum is spelled out in the Materials Sampling
Guide. However, the inspector is encouraged to take
additional tests as are necessary because with the
nuclear density gauge, moisture and density are easily
monitored. "Job control tests" which indicate the need
for additional work to meet moisture-density
requirements shall not be counted in the "acceptance
tests" since a check test would be required in the area
represented by the original sample.
Grading Diary: 58. Grading diary, shall include:

a. Date, weather, soil conditions.
b. Information on contractor's forces -include
numbers of personnel, numbers, types, and
sizes of equipment, hours worked each day.
c. Data on work in progress -section of the project,
balance limit, channels, dikes, rough grading or
finish grading, etc. This should include a record
of known construction balance points,
particularly balance points between "off-site"
borrow pits.
d. Weather conditions or other conditions affecting
the progress of or delaying prosecution of the
work, equipment break downs, etc.
e. Sufficient records of the progress of the work, to
enable the Project Manager to prepare progress
reports, working day reports and progress
estimates accurately.
f. Estimates of wasted water, and cause.
g. Disputes.
153
h. Contractor's progress should be monitored to

check that the work is being completed
according to the construction schedule. Report
major deviations.
Field Book 59. Field Book Entries
a. Any supporting information or records
necessary to facilitate the preparation of the
required reports on sampling and testing (see
Materials and Research "Earthwork Engineering
Guide").
b. Calibration of distributor water tanks and of
meter accuracy if the water is metered.
c. Daily record of water hauled (on large projects
the water applied may be kept in a separate
"water application notebook"). Include location
(i.e., station of the excavation, borrow pit,
embankment or surface) where water was
applied and obtained.
d. Select placement, confirming information, etc.
e. Identify all work performed on the project by the
contractor and subcontractor actually
completing each pay item.
f. Make entries supporting extra work quantities.
g. Get the contractor representative signature
agreeing to pay quantities in the entry.
Measurement: 60. Method of Measurement

a. See CM Subsection 1300.04 for instructions to
take cross sections. (Use Geopak when
possible.)
b. Measure and pay authorized excavation of
material below grade and overbreakage or
slides.
c. Unsuitable material which is removed below
grade in excavation areas, or below existing
ground in embankment areas, is considered to
be "authorized excavation of material below
grade".
d. If the existing ground in an embankment area
must be dried to such a depth as to be
impractical to dry in place, the contractor may
be ordered to undercut (excavate below grade)
and haul this material to higher areas, drying
and using it in the construction of embankment.
e. The volume of the undercut would also be
considered to be authorized excavation below
grade, and the volume measured and paid.
f. Larger quantity under cuts should be authorized
by the District Construction Engineer and the
volume should be measured by cross sections.
154
Tell the Contractor what is "larger" at the

61. Water, Applied
a. Distributor truck tanks may be calibrated by
determining the mass of both the empty and
filled truck. The net mass (kg) (lb) is the tank
capacity, in liters (gallons).
b. Each truck tank should be numbered and the
numbers and capacities recorded in the water
haul notebook.
c. Calibration of meters for the pre-watering
methods may be accomplished by pumping
through the meter into a water truck and
checking the mass of water against the liters on
the meter.
d. Meters may be calibrated by registered pump
and meter service companies and their
calibrations may be used if they are current.
Calibrations are good for one year.
e. Inspector must convert meter readings in
English units to S.I. units (metric).
f. Trucks that are too large to measure their mass
on available commercial scales may be
calibrated from capacity if model numbers,
serial numbers, etc., are the same as shown on
the specifications literature.
g. If the water is measured by tank count, the
grade inspector will record each day, the
number and size of loads delivered to the
project by each truck.
h. If the quantity of water is measured by a meter,
the grade inspector will record the meter
readings at the beginning or ending of each day
or shift.
62. Calibration
a. Water meter calibration sheets usually show a
correction factor to be used to convert meter
volume to actual volume for differing rates of
delivery.
b. The rate of delivery for the application can be
determined by timing the meter and computing
the liters (gallons) per minute being delivered.
c. The liters (gallons) per minute delivered will vary
with the length of pipe and number of sprinkler
heads being used.
d. Therefore, the delivery rate should be
determined and documented for each pipe
setup so the correction factor can be
determined and used.
155
63. Wasted Water

a. The quantities of water wasted or not eligible for
payment should be entered in the records each
day with substantiating or estimating information
to support the quantity deducted or ineligible for
payment.
b. The contractor should be furnished the
documented quantities of water wasted each
day, to facilitate resolving of any discrepancies
in quantities.
c. The grade inspector is responsible for the
proper determination of the quantities of water
measured for payment, and each day's entry in
the notebook should be validated by his/her
signature and agreed to by the contractor and
signed.
64. Metering is more practical and economical than a tank
measurement.
a. Encourage the contractor to provide an
acceptable meter at the point of loading the
trucks to measure the water for payment.
b. If the water is being applied by the truck
sprinkler method, the "Water Applied Haul
Sheet" (DR Form 8) may be prepared by the
truck driver, and used by the grade inspector to
determine the distribution of water applied on
various sections of the project, finishing, etc.,
and for cross-checking quantities.
c. These sheets are to be used for this purpose
only and not for payment, and should not be
submitted with the final records.
Critical Construction
Requirements: 1. Preconstruction Conference
Class III" embankments.
3. Visually check subgrade and embankment under
compacting equipment.
4. Stability and Settlement Indications. Watch for and
report to the Project Manager and Materials & Tests
Engineer indications of instability.
d. Pumping action.
5. The roadbed will be adequately drained and protected
at all times. Roadbed should be bladed smooth and
rolled tight at the end of each day.
156
6. All contract pay items will be properly documented.
Safety Areas: 1. Maintained Traffic

a. Contractor's cars and trucks must adhere to
project traffic control procedures.
b. Flaggers must be certified and use proper
procedures.
2. The contractor should be told to stop all unsafe
activities such as:
a. Speeding trucks and other equipment.
b. Inoperable back-up alarms.
c. Inoperable or nonfunctional strobe lights.
3. Contractor vehicles shall be parked beyond the lateral
obstacle clearance.
4. Worker protection barriers should be placed as shown
in the plans.
5. Traffic markings should clearly indicate traffic flow.
NDR Tests: 1. Nuclear Density NDR T 238

2. NDR T 99 Soil Density (See Earthwork)
3. Soil Type NDR T 87
4. NDR T 2 Sampling Aggregate from Stockpiles
5. Moisture: NDR T 217, T 205, or Nuclear Density Gauge
AASHTO T 238/ASTM D 2922.
Sampling Requirement/
Freq.: 1. See Materials Sampling Guide
Inspector's Records &

Forms 1. Grading diary
2. Water application notebook
3. Field book
4. DR Form 8, Water Applied Haul Sheet
5. DR Form 86, Weekly Report of Moisture-Density
Tests or Nuclear Density Machine Output
NDR Point of Contact 1. Materials & Tests Soil Mechanics Engineer

479-4678
157
2002
General Grading Instructions
202.00 GENERAL GRADING INSTRUCTIONS
Grading Inspection
A grading inspector should devote the majority of his/her time to observing and checking the
contractor's excavating, drying, moistening, spreading and compacting operations, and
securing samples, vary the balance of his/her time in testing samples and making neat and
accurate records. The grade inspector will need to check moisture (if control is required)
and density at the rate shown in the Materials Sampling Guide (usually check moisture and
@ density once for each 2,500 cubic yards (2000 m³) placed and once for each 1000 feet
(300 m) of shoulder or subgrade).
Blue Tops
After the roadway excavation and roadway embankment has been constructed substantially
to grade elevations, the construction survey party will set finish grade stakes for finishing the
grade or subgrade to the lines and grades shown in the plans. The blue top book elevations
must be checked to insure they conform to the information shown on the plan cross-
sections.
Rounding of Hinge Points
The Department has determined that the rounding of “hinge points” in the cross-sectional
elements can significantly reduce their potential as hazards. Rounded slopes reduce the
chances of an errant vehicle becoming airborne, reduce the hazards of encroachment, and
afford drivers more control over their vehicles.
The Construction Division suggests that finish grading and ground preparation activities that
result in the rounding of hinge points be permitted, if not encouraged. For example, an 8’
disc that “hangs over” a 6’ shoulder will provide the desired effect and should not be ruled
unacceptable. However, this suggestion is not meant to imply that the cuts and
embankments may be built to other than the cross-sections shown in the plans.
Erosion Control
@
The contractor must have as a minimum silt fence or other erosion control measures as
shown in the plans installed to keep silt on our ROW before any grading is allowed.
158
2002
c:\users\default\bolts.dgn Jan. 28, 1998 15:41:31
159
2002
Clearing and Grubbing
203.00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING (SSHC Section 202)
203.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
There may be considerable elapsed time between an estimate of clearing and grubbing and
the actual work. If actual site conditions are different than those shown in the contract
documents, the following suggested resolutions are provided:
• If the pay item is "General Clearing and Grubbing" then no action is necessary
@ because tree removal is subsidiary for trees with circumference of 80 inches or less
at 40 inches above ground level.
• If the pay item is "Large Tree Removal" then a new tree count should be taken and
recorded before the contractor starts work.
@ • If a tree has been cut, leaving branches and the stump, payment is covered under
"Clearing and Grubbing" or "Large Tree Removal." If the stumps is the only item
remaining and payment method is large tree removal, you would count just the stump
as a tree.
• If a fence is partially removed or in poor condition but requires an identifiable removal

operation, full price for fence removal may be made.
• Where brush and/or junk has recently (After the letting was announced) been
@
deposited within the right-of-way, a price agreeable to both the contractor and the
Project Manager may be negotiated or a force account extra work order may be used.
Disposal of Waste
Disposal of the clearing and grubbing waste is restricted according to applicable federal, state,
and local laws. Disposal options include:
• Open Burning
@ Contractor must obtain necessary permits. In locations where burning is allowed, the
burning of the waste must be located at least 1/4 mile (400 m) from any inhabited
building.
• Chipping
Chipping of the down timber for mulching material.
• Firewood
Salvage of the logs for firewood.
• Landfill
Disposal at a "yard waste" landfill.
160
2002
Excavation
204.00 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
Removal and Disposal of Old Pavement
Pavement is removed from all cuts and fills with less than 3 feet (1 m) of cover. The
@ removed concrete is to be broken into pieces with an area of 2 square feet (0.2 m²) or less if
placed in fills. (SSHC Section 203)
Where existing PCC pavement would be located more than 3 feet (1 m) under the proposed
profile grade, the PCC pavement will be required to be broken into surface areas that will not
@ exceed 4 square feet (0.4 m²) when left in place. If the existing pavement has been
resurfaced, the asphalt resurfacing will be removed if the PCC pavement is to be used as
slope protection or in a waterway. (SSHC Subsection 205.03)
Disposal of Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
The contractor shall manage the material in accordance with all current federal and state
rules and regulations. (SSHC Subsection 107.01)
Salvaged asphaltic cement concrete pavement may be used as special backfill material.
@ When intended for special backfill material, the ACC pavement is normally removed by
scarification. Removed bituminous materials may be placed in the outer slopes of
embankments, 12 inches (300 mm) below the finished shoulders and foreslopes. (See
SSHC Subsection 205.03)

Storage Tanks, Archeological Remains)
Appropriate federal, state and local regulations must be followed. (See Construction Manual
Division 1100 for further guidance).
161
2002
Excavation
205.00 EXCAVATION (SSHC Section 205)
205.01 DESCRIPTION
The importance of being able to identify soil types cannot be overemphasized. Some soil
types have to be placed in the proper location. The inspector must be sure that the work is
performed according to the plans.
The balance factor is the change in quantity from cut to fill and includes subsidence, change
from borrow density to the final compacted density, incidental loss, and all other factors
changing density.
205.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Embankment and Excavation Soils Criteria (SSHC Section 206)
There are four basic categories of earthwork.
• Excavation
t Usually final cross sections determine pay quantity.
t No off-site borrow is required.
• Excavation (Established Quantity)
t Payment is based on the plan quantities.

• Excavation Borrow
t Usually final cross sections determine pay quantities.
t Borrow will be needed from off-site source(s).
• Earthwork-Measured-in-Embankment (SSHC Subsections 205.04/205.05)
t Plan quantities of the proposed embankment are used to determine the
payment quantity.
t Contractor must forecast shrinkage. (A change from borrow density to
compacted density.)
t Borrow from off-site sources.
"Excavation" and "Excavation Borrow" are paid based on final cross sections. The Project
Manager may forego the final cross sections when the contractor agrees, in writing, that the
@ plan quantities, including field adjustments and revisions, accurately reflect the work done.
Payment will be made under the original contract items. It is not necessary to eliminate the
original contract item and establish a new “E. Q.” item. Refer to Page 129.
162
2002
Excavation
The Project Manager and the contractor may elect to measure areas in question and accept
the remaining areas as "Established Quantities."
Unsuitably Wet Material
In low-lying areas and in wet soil contact zones, it may be necessary to declare most of the
material as unsuitably wet at the direction of the Project Manager. A granular material that
will drain can be used to replace the wet soil. An effort should be made to provide an outlet
for water which may occur in the embankment or subgrade. Most wet soils that are removed
can be dried and reused in some other area.
Soft shale, in some cases, can be moved in a manner similar to soil excavation. Shale cuts
are usually benched and covered with topsoil in accordance with the plans. If unexpected
shale is found, contact the Materials and Research Soil Mechanics Engineer. Slides can
occur in backslopes of shale cuts, and flatter slopes may be required.
Rock Material (See SSHC Subsection 107.08 and Section 206)
If material to be excavated is too tough to be ripped, the Project Manager, contractor and a
geotechnical specialist experienced in blasting should discuss the aspects of the work to be
done.
Contractor Furnished Borrow Areas (SSHC Subsection 205.03)
On some projects, the contract documents will require a "contractor borrow." In these
cases, the contractor is responsible for submitting a site approval request to the
Construction Division (allow 60 calendar days for the Construction Division to obtain site
approval from Nebraska agencies).
1500 Highway 2
P.O. Box 94759
Fax No. (402) 479-4854
The approval request shall include:
• A Borrow Pit/Materials Pit Identification and Evaluation Form for each site.
• An aerial photo or topographical map showing the location of the pit site (one photo or
map for each site).
No material will be removed from the site prior to the Project Manager's written approval of
the sites.
The contractor shall also obtain a Corps of Engineers approval letter for the site and submit
this to the Project Manager. The contractor shall submit a topographical map or a photocopy
of an ASCS aerial photograph showing the exact location of the proposed pit sites to the
Corps of Engineers. A legal description of the location should also be included.
163
2002
Excavation
Corps of Engineers
Regulatory Branch
P.O. Box 5
Omaha, NE 68101-0005
ASCS aerial photos are available at county ASCS offices at a nominal cost. ASCS aerial
photos cover agricultural ground only. In some instances, aerial photos or urban areas are
not available from the ASCS.
Topographic maps may be obtained from the following source:
University of Nebraska
Conservation & Survey Division
113 Nebraska Hall
Lincoln, NE 68588-0517
Attn: Judy Otteman
(402) 472-7523
Approval For Soil Type (Contractor furnished borrow)
• The Contractor will obtain soil samples to verify material is acceptable. The Project
Manager will forward the samples to the Materials & Tests Office for evaluation. (See
SSHC Subsection 205.02.)
Preservation of Cultural Resources (SSHC Subsections 205.03 and 107.10)
Cultural resources are the composite of archaeological and historic/architectural resources

in an area. A common cultural resource site is a burial ground or remains of a Native
American village.
Nebraska law requires action be taken to insure that cultural resources are not damaged or
destroyed.
If a cultural site is discovered during construction, the contractor is required to temporarily

discontinue work at the site. Upon discovering such a site, the Project Manager shall notify
the Construction Office of the finding.
Nebraska Game and Parks Commission Approval of Borrow Sites
• All Contractor borrow sites must be submitted to the Nebraska Game and Parks
Commission (NGPC) for approval. The NGPC will examine the proposed site for
endangered plant and wildlife species and for potential Platte River drainage system
depletion. This process can take 60 days or more.
164
2002
Excavation
Figure 204.01
165
2002
Excavation
205.03 EQUIPMENT (SSHC Subsection 206.03, Paragraph 9.a.)
• Equipment should be sufficient to meet compaction requirements and the type of

equipment used should be recorded in the field book.
Overweight Axle Loads (SSHC Subsection 105.11)
All oversize hauling units delivering equipment or materials to the project shall be legal loads
and/or have appropriate hauling permits issued by the Motor Carrier Permit Office. The State
Patrol Carrier Enforcement Division has enforcement authority outside of the project limits
and on those portions of the construction project maintained to through traffic.
Hauling On or Over Surfaced Roads
The contractor must protect from damage all public roads that will be used by the contractor.
Usually berms (greater than 300 mm (12 inches) thick) are constructed over the road
surface for the earth moving equipment to use.
Certified flaggers are required when the berm is on an active road.
The berm must be removed from the road and shoulders at the end of each day when the
road is active and the surface area cleaned.
The berm must be maintained constantly by the contractor. This will allow safe traffic flow
over the berm.
Embankment Construction (SSHC Section 205)
The construction of embankments is covered in SSHC Section 205. This Subsection

provides a more detailed picture of certain procedures mentioned in the Specifications.
These comments should be regarded as explanatory but in no way supersede or invalidate
Specification requirements.
Site Preparation
All trees, shrubs, cornstalks, sod, and other vegetation are to be removed and disposed of
according to SSHC Section 202. After cornstalks and tall grass are cut and removed, the
area within the limits of construction is to be thoroughly disced and scarified.
Deposition of Embankment Material (SSHC Subsection 205.03)
On projects where a slope is being widened, "benching" will be required.
Hauling units should be directed over a fill so that uniform compaction will result.
The self-propelled tamping type roller may be used on the embankment area for leveling as
long as the unit follows the prescribed rolling pattern, does not spin the power drums, and
accomplishes both rolling and leveling to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Decisions and unusual situations should be recorded in the field book.
166
2002
Excavation
Compaction
Embankments shall be compacted as prescribed in SSHC Subsection 206.03.
Class I embankments are to be rolled when specified by special provisions or plans; no

moisture-density tests required.
Class II embankments require rolling; no moisture-density tests required.
Class III embankments require moisture-density control. The moisture content of soils being
handled for these embankments is very important because the objective is to stabilize soils
and improve their engineering behavior by compaction. Maintaining a soil to near "optimum
moisture" during grading operations will reduce the time and compaction effort necessary to
obtain the required density.
Note: • Class I and II embankments require only enough moisture in the soil to attain a
compaction acceptable to the Project Manager.
• Class I - no moisture requirement by Specifications.
• Class II - drying only required if necessary to obtain compaction.

Moisture control; water acts as a lubricant and helps the soil particles move relative to each
other into a denser condition when compaction effort is applied. Dry soils must have water
added and be thoroughly mixed before compacting. A general guide would be to add water
to silt-clay soils when lab or field tests indicate moisture content is five percent or more
below the optimum.
When wet and dry soils are placed in the same lift, they should be disc blended to a uniform
condition prior to compaction.
Soft Ground; embankments that cross low wet areas may require an initial stabilization layer
which is granular material. Usually the Project Manager will permit a working platform, up to
1.0 m (3 feet) thick, to be placed in one lift when bridging a soft area. Sand, gravel, or well
graded crushed rock may be used for this initial lift. Compaction should proceed with
caution. In general, the use of vibratory rollers should be discouraged since the vibrations
may cause underlying soil to pump into the granular fill. In some areas, capillary action will
move moisture into the upper grade by equipment moving on it. Contact Materials & Tests
when you encounter this situation and it is not covered in the Plans.
u HELPFUL HINTS
Sand embankment directly deposited by dredge pipe will obtain about 95% of NDR
T 99 proctor density by the transporting water flowing through the fill. For this method
of placing sand, other methods of compaction may be required. Testing should be
done at regular intervals and recorded in the field book. The time for this test is just
after the free water leaves the top 200 mm (8 inches) of fill and can be done very
quickly with a nuclear density gauge.
Sand lifts should be placed the full width of the embankment. If this cannot be done,
a sand trench drain should be placed to eliminate ponding water.
167
2002
Excavation
If soils are too wet, compactive effort increases the pore water pressure and holds
the particles apart. The upper limits on moisture has been set above optimum and
recommendations are based on the type of surfacing or embankment designed.
(Requirements are shown on the plans and/or in design files).
Wet soils can become elastic and result in heaving or pumping of the embankment
when loads are applied. This is caused by water pore pressure and the strength of
the soil is substantially reduced. If the embankment has not been damaged,
equipment should stay off of the area long enough to allow excess pore pressures to
dissipate naturally. If loading were to continue on wet soil, it may have shear failure or
rutting. The Project Manager should explain to the contractor that continued
operations can only worsen the situation and require removal. Take a moisture
measurement to show the contractor that the soils moisture content is rising and to
document that the contractor is damaging the soil.
The contractor should be encouraged to route hauling equipment as evenly as

possible over the entire surface area of the embankment during soil placement. This
will reduce possible rutting or damage caused by heavy equipment following one
path.
The nuclear gauge for moisture and density determination may be used. Only
properly trained and qualified nuclear gauge operators can use a nuclear gauge.
Nuclear gauges are to be operated according to NDR T 238, AASHTO T 238 and
ASTM D 2922. Test results are distributed according to the instructions on the test
form. This form may be used without field book entries.
Use the nuclear gauges printout as the official project record.
Moisture Density Curves
When a grading inspector is not sure which moisture density curve to use, he/she should
review the available soils information at the location in question. If it is determined that there
is not a moisture density curve to represent the soil in question, then a 1-point moisture
density curve may be run in the field according to NDR T 505. Only use the 1-point curve
method until Materials & Tests can determine the complete curve data for the soil.
During compaction, the mold shall rest on a firm surface such as concrete box culverts,
bridges, and pavements.
Construction of Embankment Toe Berms
If the plans require a berm, it should be constructed at the same time as the embankment.
Toe berms are built in areas where the roadway is used as a dam for a pond. In these areas
the berm is used to protect the embankment from saturation by the standing water. Also to
help construct fills on unstable ground. Proper compaction and soil types are needed to
reduce permeability of the fill.
168
2002
Excavation
Construction of Bridge Approach Fills
Toe stakes should be set and the slopes and the centerline checked during the construction
of the embankment. The slopes should be finished to the lines and grade called for in the
plans.
In the construction of these berms, particular attention should be given to prevent the
incorporation of rocks over 100 mm (4 inches) in diameter as the lifts are placed. Rocks
cause extreme difficulty when driving piling or preboring for piling.
The removal of boulders greater than 1 m (3 feet) in diameter in bridge berms should be
covered as "extra work".
Bridge approach fills should be constructed to grade with adequate length along the
centerline for the bridge contractor to work. This length should be adequate for the bridge
contractor's storage of material. Usually 30 to 45 m (100 to 150 feet) are adequate. This
can be shortened by mutual agreement between the contractors.
On some projects settlement plates are required along with delay periods for abutment
construction. The settlement plate readings are sent to Materials & Tests for comparison
with the design settlement predictions. In cases where the settlement differential is minimal
(near the end of the delay period), the delay period may be reduced with Materials & Tests
approval.
Earthwork-Measured-in-Embankment
Payment for embankment in place will be based on the plan quantity.
Sections of deep fills may have the quantities adjusted, based on settlement plates. These
settlement plates should be well protected to insure that they are not damaged or destroyed.
A graph may be plotted with fill height vs. settlement to determine settlement at intermediate
heights of fill. Using this chart, the settlement below the original ground line can be
determined and plotted. The volume between the plotted settlement line and original ground
can then be calculated using the average end cross section method. This volume is added
to the plan quantity for final payment.
Prewatering Plan
The contractor shall present a prewatering plan at the pre-construction conference when
prewatering is required. The plan should be approved by the Project Manager.
Payment for Water for Embankment Construction
When water is required for compaction of embankments other than Class III, it should be
paid for as extra work if no contract item has been provided.
When water is required for moisture and density control, the cost of adding and incorporating
water is a part of the item.
169
2002
Excavation
Finishing
Finish grading must be completed on a timely basis so that erosion control measures may
progress satisfactorily. Special provisions on many projects limit the surface area that the
contractor may disturb. Generally, this area is 75,000 m² (90,000 square yards), excluding
areas to be paved, plus an equal amount of clearing and grubbing area may be opened up.
The Project Manager may increase these limits but only by written notice to the contractor. If
used, this written notice should include justification for the increase and special procedures
the contractor must use to safeguard the environment. Copies of this notice must be
forwarded to the Construction Engineer and the District Engineer. 75,000 m² (90,000 square
yards) is equal to approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) on an average two-lane, full grading project.
Any repair required on sections that have been tentatively accepted will be considered extra
work (unless considered to be the fault of the contractor) and if performed by the contractor
they are entitled to additional pay as provided for in SSHC Subsection 109.05. Therefore,
final cross sections may be taken on a section of grading after it is tentatively accepted per
If the finishing work is not performed on a timely schedule, the Project Manager is advised to
follow these progressive steps:
• Project Manager should notify the contractor of the concerns in writing.
• If this does not obtain results, suspend estimate payments.
Tentative Acceptance
Areas that have been final graded may be accepted by the Department. However, do not
accept an area until silt fence, cover crop, erosion checks, and other erosion control
measures are in-place. Do not tentatively accept areas where the contractor must operate
equipment to do other requirements. For example, shoulders and foreslopes should not be
accepted until pavement and shoulders are finished. Ditch bottoms are a questionable area
for tentative acceptance. Often, the Contractor plans to use material in the roadside ditch
bottom to build the shoulder. In these cases, do not tentatively accept the ditch bottom until
the shoulder work is also complete.
170
2002
Topsoil
206.00 TOPSOIL (SSHC Section 207)
Stripping, Salvaging, and Spreading
The areas of stripping, salvaging, and spreading of topsoil should be identified on the plans or
Special Provisions.
Topsoil on Roadway Cuts and Embankments
Where sand pockets are encountered on backslopes and where sand is used for
embankment, every effort is made by Roadway Design to place topsoil on these areas.
Where these situations are missed, every effort should be made by the Project Manager to
obtain topsoil for use as cover for the sand areas. If no topsoil is available, see plans for
proper erosion control.
206.02 BASIS OF PAYMENT
• As topsoil is removed and stockpiled, the contractor may be paid at one half the item
unit price on the progress estimate. At the time the topsoil is spread and finish
graded, the remaining one half may be paid on a progress estimate.
• Topsoil quantity is based on the area where the topsoil is placed. The excavation
volume is not adjusted when the project has topsoil as a pay item.
171
2002
Overhaul
207.00 OVERHAUL
SSHC Section 209 outlines the method used to determine the quantity for overhaul.
172
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
173
DIVISION 200
EARTHWORK



Equipment Spade.
Sand.
indicator.
Base plate.
Procedures:
General Comments:
pavement structure.
145

requirements.
mark or relocate.
property.)
146

be discussed.
j. Traffic control.

materials.)
147

work.
material.
soil.
before compaction.
application.
subsequent testing.
148

minimize runoff.
erosion.

requirements.
layer is placed.
outside edges.
good compaction.
the fill.)
149


end of each day.

these areas.
properly performed.
150

available.
Tests Engineer.
d. Pumping action.


requirements.
any rise.
151

field book.
may be encountered.

reasonably true.
drain.
without ponding.
acceptance.)
152

testing.
primary purposes.
Guide.

borrow pits.
g. Disputes.
153

major deviations.
Guide").

possible.)
slides.
grade".
154

61. Water, Applied
haul notebook.
the meter.
or shift.
62. Calibration
delivery.
heads being used.
155
63. Wasted Water

payment.
in quantities.
signed.
measurement.
d. Pumping action.
156

procedures.
activities such as:
obstacle clearance.
in the plans.


3. Field book

479-4678
157
2002
Grading Inspection
Blue Tops
sections.
Erosion Control
@
158
2002
159
2002
as a tree.

@
Disposal of Waste
• Open Burning
building.
• Chipping
• Firewood
• Landfill
160
2002
Excavation

161
2002
Excavation
205.01 DESCRIPTION
changing density.
• Excavation

payment quantity.
compacted density.)
162
2002
Excavation
done.
1500 Highway 2
P.O. Box 94759
Fax No. (402) 479-4854
map for each site).
the sites.
163
2002
Excavation
Corps of Engineers
Regulatory Branch
P.O. Box 5
Omaha, NE 68101-0005
113 Nebraska Hall
Attn: Judy Otteman
(402) 472-7523

American village.
destroyed.

164
2002
Excavation
Figure 204.01
165
2002
Excavation

over the berm.

Site Preparation
166
2002
Excavation
Compaction


below the optimum.
u HELPFUL HINTS
167
2002
Excavation

path.
168
2002
Excavation
plans.
approval.
Prewatering Plan
169
2002
Excavation
Finishing
170
2002
Topsoil
Special Provisions.
171
2002
Overhaul
207.00 OVERHAUL
172
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
173
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
174
DIVISION 200
EARTHWORK



Equipment Spade.
Sand.
indicator.
Base plate.
Procedures:
General Comments:
pavement structure.
145

requirements.
mark or relocate.
property.)
146

be discussed.
j. Traffic control.

materials.)
147

work.
material.
soil.
before compaction.
application.
subsequent testing.
148

minimize runoff.
erosion.

requirements.
layer is placed.
outside edges.
good compaction.
the fill.)
149


end of each day.

these areas.
properly performed.
150

available.
Tests Engineer.
d. Pumping action.


requirements.
any rise.
151

field book.
may be encountered.

reasonably true.
drain.
without ponding.
acceptance.)
152

testing.
primary purposes.
Guide.

borrow pits.
g. Disputes.
153

major deviations.
Guide").

possible.)
slides.
grade".
154

61. Water, Applied
haul notebook.
the meter.
or shift.
62. Calibration
delivery.
heads being used.
155
63. Wasted Water

payment.
in quantities.
signed.
measurement.
d. Pumping action.
156

procedures.
activities such as:
obstacle clearance.
in the plans.


3. Field book

479-4678
157
2002
Grading Inspection
Blue Tops
sections.
Erosion Control
@
158
2002
159
2002
as a tree.

@
Disposal of Waste
• Open Burning
building.
• Chipping
• Firewood
• Landfill
160
2002
Excavation

161
2002
Excavation
205.01 DESCRIPTION
changing density.
• Excavation

payment quantity.
compacted density.)
162
2002
Excavation
done.
1500 Highway 2
P.O. Box 94759
Fax No. (402) 479-4854
map for each site).
the sites.
163
2002
Excavation
Corps of Engineers
Regulatory Branch
P.O. Box 5
Omaha, NE 68101-0005
113 Nebraska Hall
Attn: Judy Otteman
(402) 472-7523

American village.
destroyed.

164
2002
Excavation
Figure 204.01
165
2002
Excavation

over the berm.

Site Preparation
166
2002
Excavation
Compaction


below the optimum.
u HELPFUL HINTS
167
2002
Excavation

path.
168
2002
Excavation
plans.
approval.
Prewatering Plan
169
2002
Excavation
Finishing
170
2002
Topsoil
Special Provisions.
171
2002
Overhaul
207.00 OVERHAUL
172
2002



Equipment Spade.
Sand.
indicator.
Base plate.
Procedures:
General Comments:
pavement structure.
145

requirements.
mark or relocate.
property.)
146

be discussed.
j. Traffic control.

materials.)
147

work.
material.
soil.
before compaction.
application.
subsequent testing.
148

minimize runoff.
erosion.

requirements.
layer is placed.
outside edges.
good compaction.
the fill.)
149


end of each day.

these areas.
properly performed.
150

available.
Tests Engineer.
d. Pumping action.


requirements.
any rise.
151

field book.
may be encountered.

reasonably true.
drain.
without ponding.
acceptance.)
152

testing.
primary purposes.
Guide.

borrow pits.
g. Disputes.
153

major deviations.
Guide").

possible.)
slides.
grade".
154

61. Water, Applied
haul notebook.
the meter.
or shift.
62. Calibration
delivery.
heads being used.
155
63. Wasted Water

payment.
in quantities.
signed.
measurement.
d. Pumping action.
156

procedures.
activities such as:
obstacle clearance.
in the plans.


3. Field book

479-4678
157
2002
Grading Inspection
Blue Tops
sections.
Erosion Control
@
158
2002
159
2002
as a tree.

@
Disposal of Waste
• Open Burning
building.
• Chipping
• Firewood
• Landfill
160
2002
Excavation

161
2002
Excavation
205.01 DESCRIPTION
changing density.
• Excavation

payment quantity.
compacted density.)
162
2002
Excavation
done.
1500 Highway 2
P.O. Box 94759
Fax No. (402) 479-4854
map for each site).
the sites.
163
2002
Excavation
Corps of Engineers
Regulatory Branch
P.O. Box 5
Omaha, NE 68101-0005
113 Nebraska Hall
Attn: Judy Otteman
(402) 472-7523

American village.
destroyed.

164
2002
Excavation
Figure 204.01
165
2002
Excavation

over the berm.

Site Preparation
166
2002
Excavation
Compaction


below the optimum.
u HELPFUL HINTS
167
2002
Excavation

path.
168
2002
Excavation
plans.
approval.
Prewatering Plan
169
2002
Excavation
Finishing
170
2002
Topsoil
Special Provisions.
171
2002
Overhaul
207.00 OVERHAUL
172
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
173
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
174
DIVISION 300
SUBGRADE
PREPARATION
Subgrade Preparation Checklists
DIVISION 300 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION

301.00 CHECKLISTS (See Division 200)
175
Base Course and Subgrade Inspection
302.00 BASE COURSE AND SUBGRADE INSPECTION
The Construction Technician will inspect and control fine grading and subgrade preparation as
required by the plans and contract provisions. Grade stakes for trimming, if required, will
usually be set by a construction survey party. The Project Manager and/or the construction
technician will check the design gradation and proportions. The construction technician will
stake and inspect the quality, quantity, and placement of aggregates and binder materials. If
gravel aggregates are produced at a screening plant, inspection may be required at the plant
and a scale inspection may be required.
The Construction Technician should be able to determine all project transitions and the
complete roadway layout. He/she should anticipate that the prime contractor will need “paving
hubs” once the grading contractor has the grade within 75-90 mm (3 – 3 ½ inches) of the final
grade. The “paving hubs” once placed should clearly define the roadway. If any points do not
fit as anticipated, the Construction Technician should check the point(s) with the survey crew
and, if necessary, the Project Manager.
Fly Ash
Liberal use of fly ash is recommended to dry and stabilize unsuitable soil on critical projects.
When purchasing fly ash, the price to be paid for the fly ash should be from the invoice the
contractor receives from the source of the fly ash. It is not our intent that the contractor
purchases and stockpiles fly ash, marks up the price, and then invoices it to us.
176
Subgrade Preparation and Shoulder Subgrade Preparation
303.00 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND SHOULDER SUBGRADE PREPARATION

(See SSHC Section 302)
Since the performance of these items is accomplished to prepare the subgrade to support
rigid or flexible pavement, and since the performance of either type of pavement is strongly
affected by the moisture and density conditions of the subgrade at the time of placement of
the pavement, the inspection of work under this subsection is of the highest importance.
While staying within the Specification moisture and density limits, the following points should
be kept in mind:
• In order to achieve high subgrade strength for flexible pavements, soils should have
high densities and low moisture contents.
• In order to avoid differential swell in subgrade below rigid pavements, soils should
have lower densities and higher moisture contents.
• In order to avoid roughness due to differential heave, subgrade soils should have
uniform moisture and densities.
Studies have shown that a wide range of moistures and densities may be found in
subgrades thought to be uniformly compacted to the satisfaction of the construction
inspectors. It is believed that this lack of uniformity may to some extent be due to the
tendency to take samples in locations thought to be representative (thus actually being a
median condition) rather than taking samples at random locations. See Materials Sampling
Guide for directions on how to sample the subgrade.
Another problem which may result in improper moisture and density control is the erroneous
@ identification of the soil type. A review of the Materials and Research "Earthwork Engineering
Guide" is recommended.
Settlement of shoulder pavement relative to the driving lanes and a resulting maintenance
operation to eliminate a drop-off condition is quite common. Extra care in compaction of
subgrade adjacent to the pavement edge is necessary to alleviate this problem area.
The item of work "Subgrade Preparation" is designated as the procedure to be followed in
preparing the grade on projects where the surfacing will be constructed.
It is particularly important to test the portion of the roadbed which will underlie the outer edges
of the surfacing. Frequently, this portion of the roadbed will be found to be high in moisture
content and have less than satisfactory density due to freezing and thawing or lack of traffic
compaction. If the moisture or density of this outer portion is less than satisfactory, difficulty
may be experienced in properly constructing and compacting the overlying pavement.
This work provides for adjusting grade lines, scarifying, drying, shaping and compacting of
the upper 150 mm (6 inches) of the roadbed ahead of surface or base construction. The
moisture and density requirements will be shown in the plans.
The Specifications require that the correction of failures below the upper 150 mm (6 inches)
of the subgrade will be performed on an "Extra Work" basis.
177
After the operations of Subgrade Preparation, Shoulder Subgrade Preparation and Subgrade
Trimming are completed, the Project Manager should arrange to measure the cross sections
of the trimmed subgrade surfaces. The measurements should be taken at 600 mm (2 feet)
intervals across the subgrade from side to side and the results recorded in the inspector's
notebook. The sections should be taken with a tight string line stretched across the top of
the forms or across the reference lines and measurements made to the nearest 3 mm (1/8
inch) from the cord to the subgrade. In some cases it may be advantageous to perform this
checking by instrument which is an acceptable method.
At the beginning of the operation checks should be made to assure that the equipment is in
proper adjustment and the operating ability is such as to produce the desired template. As a
minimum, after having checked the beginning operation, the template should be checked
each 300 m (1000 feet) and the results recorded in a field book. In the case of urban work,
or when the performance of the work is such that it is questionable, the frequency of checks
should be substantially increased to assure the correctness of the grade. The contractor
should be informed of any areas that will need correction before subsequent operations
proceed.
The Specifications provide a maximum trimming tolerance from the staked elevation when
preparing the subgrade for placement of asphaltic concrete or a combination of base and
asphaltic concrete or armor coat. There are no specified trimming tolerances when
preparing the subgrade for placement of foundation courses or concrete pavement.
However, there are "contractor self-imposed tolerances" due to thickness tolerances of the
subsequent surface structure. Thus, due to the nature of the specifications, the tolerances
imposed by the contractor should in reality be even more rigid than those specified for flexible
pavement.
Subgrade preparation is not accepted until the overlying pavement has been placed. Any
damage to the subgrade prior to placement of the overlying pavement shall be corrected by
the contractor at no additional cost to the Department.
Prime Coat (SSHC Section 517)
The special provisions or plans may require the application of a prime coat after the trimming
operation has been completed. The Project Manager may desire a prime coat due to actual
job conditions when one has not been provided for. The District Engineer may be consulted
for advice and for procedure when a prime coat is needed and has not been provided for in
the project documents.
Subgrade Preparation After Removal of Existing Approach Slabs
SSHC Subsection 603.05, Paragraph 8 states that "the work of preparation of the subgrade
under the pavement approaches shall not be measured and paid for directly but shall be
considered subsidiary to the concrete pavement." This is intended to apply to approach
slabs placed on new subgrade and not to the existing subgrade found after the removal of
existing approach slabs.
When existing approach slabs are removed and the existing subgrade must be corrected,
corrective work at depths greater than 150 mm (6 inches) shall be paid for as "extra work"
(as per SSHC Subsection 302.05, Paragraph 5).
178
303.02 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Note in the SSHC Subsection 302.04 that when measured by the square meter, the area is
the plan quantity for the overlying paved surface. When measured by the station, each
shoulder is measured separately without regard to width (100 m or 100 foot stations).
179
Subgrade Stabilization
304.00 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION (SSHC Section 303)
304.01 DESCRIPTION
The principal function of subgrade stabilization is to provide a stable grade for subsequent
construction.
@ See the Materials and Research Sampling Guide for sampling and testing requirements.
Obtaining Materials From Local Pits
In general, the contractor must obtain all off site pits and close them with the landowner. The
Department no longer tracks site releases for contractor provided pits.
304.03 EQUIPMENT
The inspector should carefully check the contractor's equipment and calibrations. Pay
quantities and other important measurements may be based on some of the equipment and
we need to make certain that they conform to the requirements of the Specifications and the
special provisions.
This item consists of the stabilization of non-cohesive sand by the addition of a natural soil
binder material. In order to insure satisfactory performance of the overlying pavement,
especially if it is of the flexible type, the following points should be kept in mind:
1. Silt clay soils exhibit poorer support for pavement if they exist as thin layers over
pervious sands than if they comprise the full depth of the subgrade. For this reason,
the placement of a thin soil binder layer over the sand should be prohibited.
2. The minimum amount of soil binder required to support construction operations

should be used. An excessive amount of binder causes the mixture layer to act as a
silt-clay layer as in 1 above.
3. Thorough mixing of sand and soil binder is conducive to good performance.
4. A stabilized subgrade will allow paving equipment to travel over sandy areas.
180
Earth Shoulder Construction
305.00 EARTH SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION (SSHC Section 304)

305.01 DESCRIPTION
Shoulder construction when included in the plans and contract shall be constructed in
accordance with SSHC Section 304. Very often there are also special provisions included in
the contract that pertain to specific problems anticipated in the shoulder construction of the
project. The inspector and Project Manager should be certain that the special provision
requirements are followed.
I. Signs, delineators, mailboxes and guardrail will usually need to be removed from the
areas where the contractor is required to perform this item of work. Department
maintenance forces may be required to move the signs, delineators, and guardrail.
There generally will be instructions in the contract stating the disposition of the
delineators and guardrail and who is responsible for the relocation. The mailboxes
should be moved by the owner. It is a good policy to discuss the anticipated conflicts
affecting mail deliveries with the postmaster for the area before actual construction
begins. The Project Manager or inspector will have to contact the mailbox owners
and coordinate the relocation of these mailboxes so that inconveniences will be held
to a minimum for all parties involved. The Department's or contractor's employees
should not move these mailboxes except with the permission of the owners. If the
owners will not cooperate, the postmaster for the area should be contacted.
II. Safety and protection of the highway user is a prime concern. The Standard Plans
require plastic barrels if the drop-off at the edge of the traveled way is more than
50 mm (2 inches).
Certified flaggers are required when the normal flow of traffic must be interrupted. All
slow equipment as defined in the Nebraska Rules of the Road shall display the slow
moving vehicle emblem and have strobe or flashing yellow beacons. The contractor
must erect and maintain all the required signs and barricades in the correct positions
to protect and warn the motorists. The Project Manager should take photographs and
video tape the construction zone to document conditions.
III. The inspector shall take sufficient measurements and make sufficient observations to
confirm that the shoulders have been constructed in reasonably close conformity with
the typical section and the material requirements specified. These conforming
checks shall be recorded in a bound field notebook. One check per 1.0 km (1/2 mile)
highway centerline distance shall be the minimum number of checks required.
IV. The time limitations imposed by the Specifications in Table 304 and
@ Subsection 304.03 on placing the shoulders should be enforced. The tally of days
(internal) charged against the shouldering must be shown on the weekly working day
report.
Plan stationing may be used for computing shoulder construction except in cases where
apparent errors in stationing are discovered and the correct stationing is to be used.
Calibration of water measuring equipment is discussed in the SSHC Section 205.
Note in the SSHC Subsection 304.04 that shoulders are measured by the station and each
shoulder is measured separately without regard to width and depth.
181
Foundation Course
306.00 FOUNDATION COURSE
306.01 DESCRIPTION
The principal functions of a foundation course are:
1. To provide a means of distributing water, which leaks through cracks and joints, in a
uniform manner throughout the subgrade, thus avoiding differential swell and frost
heave.
2. To prevent pumping at joints, cracks, and edges.
3. To strengthen support under joints, thus avoiding faulting.
4. To provide uniform support for the entire slab, thus reducing cracking.
For these reasons, the construction of foundation course deserves close inspection.
SSHC Section 307 describes foundation courses. All types require the use of mineral
aggregate for foundation course, fine sand and water and all must be mixed in a twin pugmill
mixer.
Generally all borrow pits are the contractor's responsibility to obtain and close.
Preparation of Subgrade
See plans and specifications for material requirements. Sampling procedures in the
Materials Sampling Guide shall be followed.
Subgrade preparation will normally be accomplished under a contract item in SSHC Section
302. However, it is important that the moisture and density conditions specified under the
subgrade preparation item be maintained until the foundation course is laid. Obtaining the
moisture and density conditions is required by SSHC Subsection 302.01.
Mixing, Laying and Compacting
SSHC Subsection 307.03 require that the mineral aggregates and the pulverized soil binder
be mixed in an approved pugmill. The purpose of this requirement is to produce a uniform
and intimate mixture of the binder, water and aggregates and to make it possible to place this
mixture, spread it and compact it to a firm foundation, without incorporating additional
material from the subgrade. Accordingly, hauling should not be permitted when moisture
conditions in the subgrade are such as to cause ruts and the resulting contamination of the
base course material.
Uniformity of thickness of the compacted layer is very important. Since the Specifications
require trimming of the subgrade and the base course by the use of automated electronically
controlled equipment, accurate thickness control must be demanded.
182
Foundation Course
Proper control of moisture content is significant for two reasons:
1. Uniformity of moisture content at the proper level aids in obtaining uniform density,
meeting requirements.
2. Uniform moisture content, thoroughly distributed throughout the binder and aggregate
mass, aids in the development of the necessary cohesion.
In the laydown of foundation course, it is best to lay the full thickness in one layer, when
feasible. If there is only one layer, slippage between layers, a common problem in granular
base courses, will be avoided.
After completion of the trimming operation, cross sections should be taken on the surface of
the soil aggregate base course at 600 mm (2 feet) transverse intervals and at 300 m (1000
ft) longitudinal intervals matching the locations of the cross sections taken on the subgrade
and recorded in the field book.
The Materials and Tests "Materials Sampling Guide" requires that density tests be made a
300 m (1000 foot) intervals or closer. At the time the density tests are made, following the
trimming operation, the thickness of the soil aggregate base shall be carefully measured and
recorded as documentation that the thickness requirements have been met. The thickness
measurements shall be considered to represent only that width constructed and trimmed in
a single operation. If any of these measurements show a deficiency from planned thickness
of 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) or more and if payment is to be made by the square meter, additional
measurements shall be made to define the extent of the soil aggregate base course
shortage.
If a measurement shows a deficiency in thickness, a check measurement shall be taken 3 m
(10 foot) either side of this location parallel to the centerline of roadway. If both check
measurements fall within the 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) tolerance permitted, no deficiency is to be
considered. If one or both are deficient in thickness, further checking shall be made at 15 m
(50 foot) intervals from the original measurement and parallel to the centerline of roadway
until a thickness within the tolerance is found in one or both directions as the case may be.
Between this point and the location 15 m (50 foot) back, determine the point within 3 m
(10 foot) at which the soil aggregate base course is within the tolerance permitted. If both
categories of deficiency occur, the same procedure shall be used to determine the beginning
and ending points of the two categories. The width of the deficiency shall be considered to
be the full width constructed and trimmed in that particular operation.
Measurements for determining the thickness should be made at a maximum spacing of
150 m (500 feet) directly behind the trimming operation. This will prevent the priming of any
deficient section that the contractor has the option to remove or that must be removed and
replaced in accordance with the specifications.
The Project Manager shall enter all measurements and locations where made in a field
notebook. In some cases a sketch may be necessary to clarify a nonpay area. Deductions
in the pay quantity of the soil aggregate base course are to be computed and made by the
field Project Manager.
The following examples shows measurements taken in a 150 m (500 foot) section where a
thickness deficiency has occurred.
183
Foundation Course
THICKNESS CORES
¢ ¢
¢ ¢ ¢
¢ ¢ ¢
9.15 m
Actual Specified
Measurement No. Location Thickness Thickness
1 1 m Lt. cl Sta. 1001+50 81 mm 100 mm

2 1001+40 93 mm 100 mm
3 1001+60 79 mm 100 mm
4 1002+00 75 mm 100 mm
5 1002+50 79 mm 100 mm
6 1003+00 100 mm 100 mm
7 1002+90 91 mm 100 mm
8 1002+80 84 mm 100 mm
Limits of deficient area in the category of 12 mm to 25 mm deficient equal Station 1001+40 to

Station 1002+90.
Non Pay Square Meters Soil Aggregate Base Course (Contractor's Option)
150 m × 9.15 m = 1350 m²
184
Foundation Course
Portland Cement Treated Foundation Course Requirements:
The time schedules given in the specifications should be strictly enforced. Once hydration of
the cement is started, the process continues and cementing characteristics of the cement
will be lost if aggregate and cement are not quickly compacted to their final orientation within
the foundation course.
Compaction operations should be completed as quickly as possible. If rolling continues for

too long a period, the bonds which the portland cement is trying to establish are broken in the
upper part of the layer.
Prime coat application, which serves to some extent as protection against the infiltration of
moisture, should not be delayed. If moisture penetrates the portland cement treated
foundation course and enters the subgrade, a very serious problem can result.
Maintenance of the Compacted Base Course and Prime Coat
Prime coats should be applied as soon as possible after laydown and compaction
procedures are completed, to protect against soaking of the base course by rainfall. The
second laydown of a base course almost always is inferior to the first, especially if drying
operations on the subgrade have been made necessary as a result of rainfall percolating
through an unprotected base course.
The specifications provide that after the base course has been compacted to the required
density and shaped to the typical cross section, the base course and prime coat shall be
maintained by the contractor until subsequent construction has been completed.
If the foundation course is to be paid for by the megagram (ton), deductions should be made
for excess water.
Foundation course measured by the m 2 (square yard) is not directly measured but is the
quantity of overlying pavement. (See SSHC Subsection 307.04)
185
Rock or Aggregate Surfacing
307.00 ROCK OR AGGREGATE SURFACING (SSHC Section 310)
307.01 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of placing aggregate for a wearing course on an approved roadbed or
on a newly built earth grade or on detours temporarily in use during construction. The
aggregate surfacing shall be spread to meet the requirements shown in the plans or as
directed by the Project Manager.
I. Setting Up the Field Testing Laboratory - Usually aggregate tests on construction

projects are carried on in conjunction with other phases of the contract work and
in that case the inspector may use the testing facilities provided for that work.
The following equipment should be available to the aggregate inspector:
1 - 15 m (50 foot) tape
1 - Handaxe
1 - Grain Scale and pan or equivalent
1 - Set of sieves, 4.75 mm (No. 4) and 2.00 mm (No. 10) (including pan and lid)
1 - Shaker
1 - Splitter
2 - Aggregate drying pans
1 - Gasoline stove or hotplate
1 - Shovel or aggregate probe
II. Sampling and Testing - Aggregates shall be sampled, tested or submitted for
testing in accordance with the Materials and Tests "Materials Sampling Guide".
The inspector should read and become familiar with SSHC Sections 310 and
1033, and the special provisions of the contract.
The inspector will be responsible for sampling and testing of aggregate on the
project. In some cases, when aggregate is supplied by a large producer, the
District Engineer will have an inspector available at the pit site to test the material
before it is shipped. However, even though some testing is done at the source,
testing will be required on the project in order to calculate the payment to the
contractor (SSHC Subsection 310.05).
307.03 EQUIPMENT
The inspector should inspect the contractor's equipment before starting. Each truck
should be carefully measured and the capacity computed by the inspector. These
capacities, truck numbers, etc., should be recorded in a field notebook. The
measurement and capacities are reported to the District Engineer on a DR Form 101. (A
sample of DR Form 101 is included on Appendix 1). For additional information in regard
to the measurement of trucks, (see Subsection 103.04 in this manual.)
The specifications provide that the contractor shall secure all permits and licenses, pay
all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful
186
prosecution of the work. District Offices have current copies of the laws and load limits
and questions concerning legal loads should be directed to the District Offices.
The Project Manager and inspector shall also be familiar with and see that the contractor
adheres to the provisions of SSHC Subsection 105.11, Restrictions on Moving and Use
of Heavy Equipment.
The load capacity for which the truck is licensed is indicated on a sticker pasted on the
license plate and should be checked against the license certificate carried in the cab.
Mass capacity will vary according to the number of single or tandem axles and will be
specified for the truck's gross mass.
All trucks used on the project in connection with the performance of the work are required
to be licensed in Nebraska regardless of the fact that they may be properly licensed in
some other state. Trucks used only in hauling equipment or materials from outside the
state to the project are covered by reciprocity and may not be required to be licensed in
Nebraska.
Violations should be called to the contractor's attention. In the event that the contractor
does not take steps to comply, the Project Manager shall immediately advise the District
Engineer by letter with a copy to the contractor. Letters reporting violations shall include
the name and address of the owner, make, type and license numbers of the vehicles and
an explanation of the violation involved. This information will be referred to the proper
authorities for investigation.
Hauling and Distributing Materials
I. Hauling Materials. No more than two different truck box capacities will be
permitted unless approved by the Project Manager. No hauling shall be permitted
when weather or roads are such that hauling causes excessive rutting. When
aggregate for detours is required, it is advisable to go over the detour road with
the District Construction Engineer to see what road defects need correction
before the aggregate is placed.
II. Staking for the Distribution of Materials - In order that the contractor may know
where on the road to place aggregate, stakes should be set along the shoulder
which is to receive the aggregate at the load distance spacing. If it should occur
that it is not desirable to place aggregate continuously, two stakes driven vertical
should be set at the beginning and ending of each series of loads, two stakes
driven to form a "X" may be used to mark each tenth load. One load should be
spread between each pair of stakes, and instructions should be issued to the
contractor to leave a small gap between loads so that you may be sure that all
loads are placed as staked. When trucks of more than one capacity are used,
stakes shall be set for each size in sections rather than intermingling the different
sizes. One size usually takes the long haul and the other the short. Consult the
plan for the width and depth of the aggregate to be placed.
187
When placing aggregate on a newly graded project, the number of loads staked in
any given distance shall be checked against the project station reference stakes.
When placing aggregate on an unreferenced detour, the number of loads per
kilometer (mile) staked should be checked against the number of cubic meters
(cubic yards) required per kilometer (mile).
III. Inspection Costs - In order to avoid excessive inspection costs, particularly on

other than high production operations, it may be necessary to control the
placement and inspection operations as follows:
1. When a single aggregate, or separate aggregate materials are being

deposited on both long and short haul sections, or on separate sections of
the project, one inspector located at the short haul placement point may
observe and inspect the loads destined for the other, or longer haul
sections.
2. The inspector staking and inspecting the delivery of the aggregates may
also take necessary material samples and check the gradation of the
aggregate.
3. If the material placement rate is so low as to create uneconomical and

wasteful inspection costs, the headquarters or District Office should be
contacted for special instructions.
Rock or aggregate for surfacing will be measured by the cubic meter (cubic yard) in
trucks with "struck loads". This measurement will be made at the point of delivery. Refer
to Section 105 of this manual for a more complete discussion.
307.06 BASIS OF PAYMENT (SSHC Subsection 310.05)
This material is now paid for according to SSHC Table 310.01. If there is a deduction it
will be computed and deducted from the contract unit price and that lot must be shown as
a contingency item on the estimate with the computed unit price.
Maintenance of temporary surfacing is paid for with equipment rental pay items.
188
CONVERSION FACTORS
To Convert Tons of Material to Cubic Yards Divide By
Crushed Sand Gravel 1.20 Tn/CY
Fine Aggregate for Concrete 1.30 Tn/CY
Coarse Aggregate (Limestone) for Concrete 1.25 Tn/CY
Sand-Gravel for Concrete; Surfacing Gravel or Crushed Rock 1.35 Tn/CY
Crushed Rock for Base Course 1.25 Tn/CY
Crushed Rock for Base Course Screenings 1.25 Tn/CY
Mineral Filler and Soil Binder 0.85 Tn/CY
To Convert Megagrams of Material to Cubic Meters Divide By
Crushed Sand Gravel 1.30 Mg/m 3
Fine Aggregate for Concrete 1.54 Mg/m 3
Coarse Aggregate (Limestone) for Concrete 1.48 Mg/m 3
Sand-Gravel for Concrete; Surfacing Gravel or Crushed Rock 1.60 Mg/m 3
Crushed Rock for Base Course 1.48 Mg/m 3
Crushed Rock for Base Course Screenings 1.48 Mg/m 3
Mineral Filler and Soil Binder 1.06 Mg/m 3
189
Road Gravel Requirements

English Version
Width Sq, 1/2" Depth 3/4" Depth 1" Depth 1 1/2" Depth 2" Depth 2 1/2" Depth 3" Depth
of Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds. 1 cu.yd. Cu. Yds.
Road- Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per Covers Per Per
way Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile Lin. Ft. Sta. Mile
9' 5280.0 72.00 1.39 73.33 48.00 2.08 110.00 36.00 2.78 146.67 24.00 4.17 220.00 18.00 5.56 293.33 14.40 6.94 366.67 12.00 8.33 440.00
10' 5866.7 64.80 1.54 81.48 43.20 2.31 122.22 32.40 3.09 162.96 21.60 4.63 244.44 16.20 6.17 325.93 12.96 7.72 407.41 10.80 9.26 488.89
11' 6453.3 58.91 1.70 89.63 39.27 2.55 134.44 29.45 3.40 179.26 19.64 5.09 268.89 14.73 6.79 358.52 11.78 8.49 448.15 9.82 10.19 537.78
12' 7040.0 54.00 1.85 97.78 36.00 2.78 146.67 27.00 3.70 195.56 18.00 5.56 293.33 13.50 7.41 391.11 10.80 9.26 488.89 9.00 11.11 586.67
13' 7626.7 49.85 2.01 105.93 33.23 3.01 158.89 24.92 4.01 211.85 16.62 6.02 317.78 12.46 8.02 423.70 9.97 10.03 529.63 8.31 12.04 635.56
14' 8213.3 46.29 2.16 114.07 30.86 3.24 171.11 23.14 4.32 228.15 15.43 6.48 342.22 11.57 8.64 456.30 9.26 10.80 570.37 7.72 12.96 684.44
15' 8800.0 43.20 2.31 122.22 28.80 3.47 183.33 21.60 4.63 244.44 14.40 6.94 366.67 10.80 9.26 488.89 8.64 11.57 611.11 7.20 13.89 733.33
16' 9386.7 40.50 2.47 130.37 27.00 3.70 195.56 20.25 4.94 260.74 13.50 7.41 391.11 10.13 9.88 521.48 8.10 12.35 651.85 6.75 14.81 782.22
17' 9973.3 38.12 2.62 138.52 25.41 3.94 207.78 19.06 5.25 277.04 12.71 7.87 415.56 9.53 10.49 554.07 7.62 13.12 692.59 6.35 15.74 831.11
18' 10560.0 36.00 2.78 146.67 24.00 4.17 220.00 18.00 5.56 293.33 12.00 8.33 440.00 9.00 11.11 586.67 7.20 13.89 733.33 6.00 16.67 880.00
19' 11146.7 34.11 2.93 154.81 22.74 4.40 232.22 17.05 5.86 309.63 11.37 8.80 464.44 8.53 11.73 619.26 6.82 14.66 774.07 5.69 17.59 928.89
20' 11733.3 32.40 3.09 162.96 21.60 4.63 244.44 16.20 6.17 325.93 10.80 9.26 488.89 8.10 12.35 651.85 6.48 15.43 814.81 5.40 18.52 977.78
21' 12320.0 30.86 3.24 171.11 20.57 4.86 256.67 15.43 6.48 342.22 10.29 9.72 513.33 7.72 12.96 684.44 6.17 16.20 855.56 5.14 19.44 1026.67
22' 12906.7 29.45 3.40 179.26 19.63 5.09 268.89 14.73 6.79 358.52 9.82 10.19 537.78 7.36 13.58 717.04 5.89 16.98 896.30 4.91 20.37 1075.56
23' 13493.3 28.17 3.55 187.41 18.78 5.32 281.11 14.09 7.10 374.81 9.39 10.65 562.22 7.04 14.20 749.63 5.63 17.75 937.04 4.70 21.30 1124.44
24' 14080.0 27.00 3.70 195.56 18.00 5.56 293.33 13.50 7.41 391.11 9.00 11.11 586.67 6.75 14.81 782.22 5.40 18.52 977.78 4.50 22.22 1173.33
25' 14666.7 25.92 3.86 203.70 17.28 5.79 305.56 12.96 7.72 407.41 8.64 11.57 611.11 6.48 15.43 814.81 5.18 19.29 1018.52 4.32 23.15 1222.22
26' 15253.3 24.92 4.01 211.85 16.61 6.02 317.78 12.46 8.02 423.70 8.31 12.04 635.56 6.23 16.05 847.41 4.98 20.06 1059.26 4.15 24.07 1271.11
27' 15840.0 24.00 4.17 220.00 16.00 6.25 330.00 12.00 8.33 440.00 8.00 12.50 660.00 6.00 16.67 880.00 4.80 20.83 1100.00 4.00 25.00 1320.00
28' 16426.7 23.14 4.32 228.15 15.43 6.48 342.22 11.57 8.64 456.30 7.71 12.96 684.44 5.79 17.28 912.59 4.63 21.60 1140.74 3.86 25.93 1368.89
29' 17013.3 22.34 4.48 236.30 14.89 6.71 354.44 11.17 8.95 472.59 7.45 13.43 708.89 5.59 17.90 945.19 4.47 22.38 1181.48 3.73 26.85 1417.78
30' 17600.0 21.60 4.63 244.44 14.40 6.94 366.67 10.80 9.26 488.89 7.20 13.89 733.33 5.40 18.52 977.78 4.32 23.15 1222.22 3.60 27.78 1466.67
190
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
191
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
192
DIVISION 400
LIGHTING, SIGNS,
TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND
TRAFFIC CONTROL
Lighting Checklist
DIVISION 400
LIGHTING, SIGNS, TRAFFIC SIGNALS & TRAFFIC CONTROL

401.00 LIGHTING CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 400 - Lighting, Signs, Traffic Signals &

Traffic Control
Section 203 - Removal of Structures and
Obstructions
Other References: NDR Materials Sampling Guide

National Electric Code
National Electric Safety Code
Inspection Equipment: Volt Meter

Light Meter (Photometer)
Flashlight
Hex Wrenches
Adjustable Wrenches
Construction Requirements:
CONDUITS: 1. Conduit sizes and types installed must

agree with those detailed in the plans.
2. All conduit ends must have bell ends or

bushings.
3. Conduit must be minimum of 750 mm

(30 inches) below grade.
4. Spare conduit bend must be capped or

plugged with standard fittings.
CONDUCTORS: 1. Conductors must be of the size, type, and

number as detailed in the Plans.
Conductors which have properties
exceeding the minimum requirements, may
be furnished at the contractor's option with
the Project Manager's approval. No
adjustment in contract price will be allowed.
2. Conductors shall be individually tagged

when the conduit in which they are housed
is inaccessible and cannot itself be tagged.
193
Lighting Checklist
3. Conductors shall be color coded for safety

and to facilitate maintenance of the lighting
system. (SSHC Subsection 402.02)
PULL BOXES: 1. All pull boxes with a cast iron ring and cover
must be grounded with all grounding
connections securely made.
2. Check all wire sizes in pull box.
3. All conduit entrance bends must be tagged

with a permanent tag indicating direction of
the conduit run.
4. All cable connections in pull boxes must be

made using approved URD submersible
connectors. Check for proper cable
insertion into connector; that all connections
are tight and that all openings are covered or
plugged.
POLES: 1. New light poles should not be placed directly

under other overhead distribution systems.
2. All poles must have handhole covers

securely fastened.
3. Power foundations are to be flush with

grade. Concrete foundations are allowed a
25 mm (1 inch) chamfer.
4. All settlement of soil around pole base and
along conduit runs must be backfilled and
compacted to 95 percent of maximum
density as determined by NDR T 99
(SSHC Subsection 407.03).
5. Check for minimum of 300 mm (1 foot)
cover over the grounding rod and for proper
connection to the grounding rod. Contractor
must use connectors detailed in the plans.
6. Check for proper grounding to pole (anchor
type) or to transformer base (breakaway
type). Contractor must use connectors
detailed in the plans.
194
Lighting Checklist
7. Check for spare bend on last pole of each

run.
8. Check for proper mechanical cable

connections in base of each pole. (Taps
and taping not allowed).
9. Check for heavy flat washer between top of

pole base and anchor bolt nut.
10. Check for correct "hold-down" and

"connecting-washers" on pole installations
using breakaway transformer bases. It is
very important that the washers supplied
with the base be used as instructed by the
manufacturer.
11. On installations where three or more conduit

bends enter the pole or transformer base,
each conduit bend should be tagged. Tags
to be embossed or stamped with the
direction of the conduit run. On anchor base
installations where the conduit entrance
bends are inaccessible, each run of feeder
cable should be tagged.
LIGHTING CONTROL CENTER: 1. Installation of conduit, controls, and

grounding to be as detailed in plans. Verify
that disconnect or relay installed is of the
size and type that has been approved for
use on the project.
2. Conduit or conductors should be properly

tagged indicating direction of run.
Conductors should be color coded.
JUNCTION BOX IN BRIDGE CURB: 1. Bushings are required on all conduits

entering the junction box.
2. Junction box should be grounded.
3. Lid of junction box should be gasketed.
4. Junction boxes with more than two conduits

entering the box shall have the conduits
tagged to indicate the direction of the conduit
run.
5. Conductors should be color coded.
195
Lighting Checklist
TESTS ON THE COMPLETED SYSTEM: Circuit Continuity

Voltage Drop
Ground Resistance
INSPECTOR’S RECORDS & FORMS: Field Book

Material Certifications
POINT OF CONTACT: Lighting Engineer, 479-4695
196
Lighting
402.00 LIGHTING
402.01 GENERAL INFORMATION
SSHC References: Section 203 - Removal of Structures and Obstructions

Section 401 - Lighting and Traffic Signal Requirements
Section 402 - Cable Installation
Section 403 - Direct Burial Cable
Section 404 - Aerial Cable
Section 405 - Conduit
Section 406 - Pull Boxes
Section 407 - Pole and Tower Foundations
Section 408 - Poles and Towers
Section 412 - Luminaires
Section 413 - Lighting Control Center
Section 414 - High Mast Lowering System
Section 415 - Lighting System Maintenance
Section 416 - Temporary Lighting System
Section 1073 - Material Requirements
Other References: NDR Materials Sampling Guide

National Electric Code
National Electric Safety Code
General Comment
Because roadway lighting usually makes up only a small portion of a projects total cost, it is
many times thought of as insignificant and not requiring much attention. Many benefits in the
form of public safety, security, convenience and drivers comfort, however, are derived from a
quality lighting job. This makes the lighting inspector's job of checking out and inspecting all
aspects of the lighting construction, one of utmost importance.
Special Construction Items
Unusual, difficult or special items of work are usually discussed at the preconstruction
conference. The inspector should confer with the Project Manager regarding all items of
work he/she does not understand. Further clarification may be had by contacting the Lighting
Engineer.
402.02 PRECONSTRUCTON CONFERENCE
In addition to discussing special items of work, the preconstruction conference is also an

excellent time to remind the contractor that many problems and delays can be avoided by the
early submittal of his/her material list, shop drawings, and samples of all materials that
require testing. No materials can be incorporated into the work before first being approved.
If utility support is necessary, confirm the date that any utility work will be started and, if
possible, the date completed.
197
Lighting
402.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIALS LIST
SSHC Subsection 401.02 provides information on shop drawings and a materials list that is
required of the contractor before he/she may incorporate any items into the project.
To assure uniform and effective operation of this requirement, the following procedures will
be followed:
After receiving the required seven copies of the materials list and shop drawings from the
contractor, the Construction Division will send the submittals to the Lighting Section for their
review and comments.
All items will be checked for compliance with the plans and specifications. Two copies of the
reviewed list and shop drawings, showing approval or disapproval of each item, will be
returned to the contractor with a copy to the Project Manager. If the contractor desires
additional copies, they must be submitted with the seven required copies.
All equipment and materials to be used on a project must be approved before installation.
Once approved, there shall be no substitutions for any of the items without prior written
request to, and written approval from, the Lighting Engineer. The inspector must make sure
that only materials that have been approved are used on the project.
The contractor shall inform his/her supplier that all items supplied to the project must be
suitably stamped, stenciled, tagged or otherwise marked to allow for easy identification with
the descriptive markings, brand names and catalog numbers shown on the materials list and
shop drawings.
402.04 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Staking of Light Pole and Tower Foundations
SSHC Subsection 407.03 states that the contractor is responsible for field verifying the
foundation location and elevation of each lighting unit to determine that no conflicting or
hazardous situation will exist when the pole or tower is erected. Any location or elevation that
appears unreasonable or out of specifications as to projection above grade, will be brought to
the Project Manager's attention. The Project Manager will decide any changes in location
and/or elevation.
Wood Poles Used on Lighting Projects
Specifications covering wood poles used on lighting projects will be shown on the project
plans.
Testing of Lighting Systems
SSHC Subsection 401.03 requires the contractor to perform operating circuit and resistance
test on the lighting system. The Project Manager will send written results of these tests to
the Lighting Engineer.
198
Lighting
Poles and Towers (SSHC Section 408)
Conventional light poles are usually furnished by the Contractor complete with pole shaft,
mast arm, luminaire, anchor bolts, foundation, and breakaway device (if required).
High mast towers are usually furnished by the Contractor complete with tower shaft, base
plate, anchor bolts, lowering system with motor and foundation.
All poles and towers shall be plumb. Poles will be shimmed to stand plumb. Only regular
“U” shaped shim stock is allowed. Towers will be supported solely by anchor bolts and nuts.
The nuts will be adjusted to plumb the tower.
All poles and towers will be grounded to a grounding rod(s) as shown in the plans.
All poles must have a handhole with cover attached.
Unless indicated otherwise, all poles required to breakaway on impact will have a frangible
transformer base ("T base") as its breakaway device.
Poles and towers shall conform to the requirements of Section 1073.
Poles and Tower Foundations (SSHC Section 407)
Pole foundation details will be shown in the plans. Tower foundations will usually be
designed by the contractor.
Towers are installed using concrete foundations only. Poles are installed using either
concrete or power foundations. Power foundations are allowed only when so indicated in the
plans.
All excavations for concrete foundations shall be dry and free of loose dirt before the
concrete is placed.
Foundations shall be installed before trenching for conduit and cable.
Backfill around foundations shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density as

determined by NDR T 99.
Luminaires (SSHC Section 412)
All luminaires must be on the NDR Approved Products List or have been specifically
approved for use on the project in question by the contractor's submittal of shop drawings or
catalog cuts.
Most luminaires are factory set to meet photometric requirements. Occasionally, in order to
meet specifications, the position of the lamp socket in each luminaire must be adjusted by
following a set of manufacturer's instructions accompanying each luminaire.
Unless indicated otherwise, all luminaires will be installed level in both horizontal axes.
Luminaires shall be installed to proper alignment and orientation with respect to the roadway.
199
Lighting
Night inspection by the Project Manager may determine the need for adjustments to the
luminaires.
Lighting Control Centers (SSHC Section 413)
The location of the lighting control center as shown on the plans is approximate. Actual
location will be as determined by the electric utility and the Project Manager.
Components comprising the various types of lighting control centers will be listed on the
NDR Approved Products List or will be specifically approved for use on the project in
question by the contractor's submittal of shop drawings or catalog cuts.
High Mast Lowering System (SSHC Section 414)
Unless indicated otherwise, all new lowering systems will be furnished with an internal power
unit (each tower will have its own motor to raise or lower the light ring).
High mast lowering systems will be on the NDR Approved Products List or specifically
approved for the project in question by the contractor's submittal of shop drawings or catalog
cuts.
A new lowering system will accompany each new tower.
Installation of a new high mast lowering system on an existing tower may require some
modification to the tower. Modifications shall be made as detailed in the plans.
Temporary Lighting System (SSHC Section 416)
There are a number of different types of temporary lighting systems.
All temporary lighting systems require the contractor to properly operate and maintain the
lights daily from dusk to dawn through the construction period.
Materials for a temporary lighting system may be state or contractor furnished as indicated in
the plans.
Usually, the contractor will be responsible for providing the electrical energy required to
energize the crossover type temporary lighting system.
An equipment grounding conductor is usually not required in a temporary lighting system. In

some service areas, however, the utility may require that an equipment ground be used.
When the temporary lighting units are no longer required, the contractor will, in strict
conformance with the project requirements, remove, prepare and deliver the units to the
designated storage area. Any deviation from the project requirements must be cleared with
the Lighting Engineer.
200
Lighting
402.05 PAYMENT FOR ELECTRIC POWER USED BY THE LIGHTING SYSTEM
SSHC Subsection 401.05 states that the contractor will not be required to pay for any
electrical energy consumed by a permanent lighting system.
The plans should indicate whether the Contractor or the Department arranges and pays for
the electrical power for a temporary lighting system.
402.06 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT
Upon completion and acceptance of a lighting project, the Project Manager shall furnish the
District Maintenance Superintendent with an accurate set of half-size "as built" plans together
with a complete set of shop drawings to facilitate maintenance of the lighting system.
201
Traffic Signals
403.00 TRAFFIC SIGNALS (SSHC Sections 409, 410, 411 and 1073)
403.01 GENERAL
The following items should be emphasized during the construction of a typical traffic signal.
Although most of these items are covered in the Plans, Special Plans, Special Provisions,
and in Division 400 and Section 1073 of the Standard Specifications, they are sometimes
overlooked, causing problems for the contractor and the Project Manager.
403.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Remind Contractors
Preformed loops MUST be under the pavement, sawed loops are not an alternative (per
Detector Plan).
Submit wire samples to Materials & Tests early, get approval before installation.
Order the poles early, lead time is 11-15 weeks.
403.03 PRELIMINARY STAKING
Stake poles according to plan but avoid utilities. If poles are relocated, make sure mast arms
are long enough to center signal heads in their appropriate lanes.
In urban areas there should be a minimum of 1.0 m (3 foot) clearance between the curb and
the pole. In rural areas there should be a minimum of 2.0 m (6 foot) clearance between the
edge of pavement and the pole.
Call Traffic Engineering (402-479-4594) if the poles must be moved more than 600 mm
(2 feet).
403.04 SAW CUT LOOP LOCATION
Avoid crossing cracks and joints when locating loops. The exact size and shape of the loop
is not critical. Keep the loops in the vehicle path and keep the spacing between the loops in
a lane under 3.0 m (10 feet).
Call Traffic Engineering (402-479-4594) for locating the loops if there are any questions.
403.05 TEMPORARY SIGNAL
It is the contractor's duty to construct, maintain, and remove the signal.
If the project involves construction phasing which requires shifting traffic and moving heads
and poles etc., the contractor shall do this at no additional cost. (per Special Provisions).
202
Traffic Signals
403.06 ELECTRICAL POWER
Arrange for electrical service early in the project, especially in larger cities like Lincoln and
Omaha.
403.07 STATE SUPPLIED MATERIAL
Project Manager should check to make sure state supplied material has been shipped to the
designated yard 4 weeks before construction. Check stock requisition for back ordered
items. Call Traffic Engineering if anything is missing.
403.08 SAFETY
Make sure the contractor's vehicles and equipment are not blocking the view of motorists
using the intersection during construction.
403.09 ITEMS TO CHECK WHEN INSTALLING
POLE FOUNDATIONS
The foundation must include a ground rod, a spare conduit and a conduit for lighting. (per
Standard Plan 910)
PULL BOXES (per Standard Plan 914)
Conduit ends must have bell ends.
Gravel must be 300 mm (1 foot) deep in the bottom of the pull box.
Specified pull box lids must be grounded.
Splices in the pull box must be raised off the bottom of the pull box. (per Wiring Diagram)
LOOPS, PREFORMED
Remind the contractor to install preformed loops BEFORE paving. Sawing in the loops after
paving will not be accepted. We will require the contractor to remove the pavement to a joint,
place the loops in the subgrade and replace the pavement if they forget, NO EXCEPTIONS.
(per Detector Plan)
Remind the contractor to protect and mark the leads to the preformed loops so they are not
damaged during adjacent paving.
LOOPS, SAWED
The saw slot must be 9 mm (3/8 inch) wide, 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide at cracks and joints to
allow for the joint tube. (per Detector Plan)
203
Traffic Signals
MAGNETIC DETECTORS
Handle magnetic detector leads gently where they join the detector.
If the magnetic detector serves one lane, place the detector under the right wheel track. If
the detector serves 2 lanes, center the detector between the two lanes.
The conduit housing the detector should slope to drain into the pull box. (per Detector Plan)
POLES (per Standard Plan 912)
The pole bases must be double nutted so the pole can be plumbed.
The pole bases for towers should not be grouted. The pole bases for galvanized steel poles
may be grouted at the Project Manager’s discretion to prevent rodent damage to wires.
The ground wire must be attached to the nut in the pole behind the handhole and to the
ground rod in the pole foundation.
MAST ARMS (per Standard Plan 912)
Wait until the signal is turned on to install the set screw in the clamp of the mast arm, to
allow for adjustment of the arm at the time of turn on. The minimum clear height under the
signal head must be 5.33 m (17’ 6”) to the crown of the roadway.
WIRING
Span wire signal installations shall be wired with stranded wire.
All splices must be made with the specified splice kit. (per Wiring Diagram)
Be sure wires are not damaged when they are stripped for splicing. Check several of the
splices by bending the entire splice back and forth to see if the wire breaks, especially where
the stripping of the wire starts. Check to make sure the wire insulation has not been cut
where the cable sheathing has been removed. This can also be done by bending the wires.
Splices are not allowed in a cable from the controller to the cables final destination. Wire the
loop detectors for an approach in series, not in parallel.
Holes in poles and mast arms must be protected with rubber grommets prior to pulling wire.
Be sure wires are not skinned or damaged while being pulled. (per Standard Plan 912)
Do not use spade lugs on solid wire, use spade lugs on stranded wire.
CONTROLLER
Wires must be labeled as shown on the wiring diagram using the specified method.
Examples: Loop 20, NE Pole. (per Wiring Diagram)
All conductors pulled into the cabinet must extend 1.5 m (5 feet) beyond the end of the
conduit housing them. (per Wiring Diagram)
204
Traffic Signals
Pole mounted cabinets should be mounted 1.83 m (6 feet) to 2.0 m (6.5 feet) to the top of the
cabinet. (per Standard Plan 912)
The conduit LB fitting under a pole mounted cabinet must be 62 mm (2.5 inches) or larger.
A ground rod must be installed in the concrete pad of all pad mounted controllers.
Pad mounted controllers must contain one spare conduit.
Make sure the cabinet doors swing as shown on the installation plans.
TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS
The minimum spacing between heads (center to center) must be at least 3.0 m (10 feet).
(per Installation Details)
The backplates and heads must be mounted PLUMB, not aiming downward. Be sure the
lenses are installed right side up.
The backplates must be one piece and vacuum formed.
Cover the signal heads with an opaque material prior to turn on so motorists are not
confused.
The minimum clear height under the signal head must be 5.33 m (17’ 6”) to the crown of the
roadway.
The bulbs must be of the specified wattage and type. The contractor should have spare
bulbs on the job.
PEDESTRIAN HEADS
Mount the pedestrian heads as shown on the plans, not on the street side of the pole.
The bulbs must be of the specified wattage and type. The contractor should have spare
bulbs on the job.
Pedestrian heads must be mounted 3.0 m (10 feet) to the bottom of the head.
PED PUSHBUTTONS
Pushbuttons must be mounted on the correct side of the pole as shown on the plans.
The pushbutton signs must be worded as shown on the shop drawings with the arrow
pointing in the proper direction.
205
Traffic Signals
403.10 FINAL SIGNAL TURN ON
Call Traffic Engineering (402-479-4594) at least 2 days before turn on, try to avoid turning the
signal on Fridays, signal failures usually occur in the first few days.
Prior to requesting a turn on:
The power service must be installed and energized.
Each signal head and ped head must be "flashed out" by the contractor to check for short
circuits and to assure that each wire really does service the assigned signal head.
Check each loop wire in the cabinet for continuity.
Arrange with the District or local jurisdiction for STOP sign removal when the signal is turned
on.
"Signal Ahead" signs must be installed.
Arrange for flagging by the police/State Patrol at turn on, if required.
206
Construction Work Zone Traffic Control
404.00 CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
404.01 TRAFFIC CONTROL SPECIFICATION REFERENCES
The Project Manager shall prepare Traffic Control Plan and present it at the Preconstruction
Conference. The Traffic Control Plan must be approved by the Traffic Engineering Division.
Contract documents include references to traffic control requirements in many locations.

Project plans contain references to traffic control requirements in the traffic control plan
tabulation usually found on estimate of quantities sheet. Plans may also contain project
specific traffic control and/or staging details.
Traffic control specification references are found in:
• SSHC Section 422 - Temporary Traffic Control Devices
• SSHC Section 1069 - Temporary Centerline Stripe for Pavements
• SSHC Section 423 - Traffic Provisions
Traffic control requirements may also be found in the Specification Sections for specific
construction activities.
DR Form 502, "Construction Signs and Posts", or a similar computer file shall be used to
record transfer of signs to a contractor.
404.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNING CHANGES
Plan notes indicate signing changes cannot be made without concurrence of the
District Construction Engineer and Traffic Engineering [(402) 479-4594]. Field flexibility is
required by situations that will not fit standard traffic control layouts such as hilly terrain,
permanent signs, guardrail location, or side roads and entrances impacting the location of
temporary traffic control signs. Presence of unusual traffic generators that affect volume or
high turning movements might also require sign location adjustments.
Evaluate construction work zones prior to installation of traffic control signing, and again
when operational, to look for any problem areas that may affect operational quality. Traffic
control evaluations shall be held during work hours, on weekends, and during nighttime
hours. Presence of skid marks are a good indication of a problem area. Early review of
proposed traffic control signing situations prior to the preconstruction conference will allow
traffic control detail changes to be made prior to impacting public traffic.
Make immediate changes when obvious operational problems exist, then call the District
Construction Engineer and Traffic Engineering Division as soon as possible to discuss
needed changes. For other than obvious operational problems that could be dangerous to
motorists or workers, contact the District Construction Engineer and Traffic Engineering
Division first for concurrence of any proposed changes.
The following modifications to traffic control details shall not be made:
• Do not change taper lengths
• Do not change the sign word message or symbol
207
• Do not change the sign color combination

• Do not reduce sign size or alter sign shape
Field adjustments can be made, if necessary, in the following areas without Traffic
Engineering Division notification and concurrence:
• Individual sign locations may be adjusted up to a maximum of 60 m (200 feet) as long
as no two signs, either permanent or temporary, become closer than 60 m (200 feet)
apart. Removal, covering, or adjusting of permanent signs in the vicinity of
construction work zones should be coordinated with maintenance. Adjustment
greater than 60 m (200 feet) must be approved by the District Construction Engineer.
• Paired signs may be adjusted a maximum of 60 m (200 feet).
• Taper location, sequencing arrow location, and corresponding lane merge signs may
be adjusted up to 150 m (500 feet) away from construction work area. This is
appropriate with poor advance sight distance due to hills or curves, or when earlier
detection of a sequencing arrow is needed.
404.03 CONSTRUCTION ZONE ACCIDENT REPORTING
Prior to the start of construction, the District Construction Engineer (DCE) will notify in writing
the appropriate Nebraska State Patrol office of the project location and scope. This
correspondence should identify location, construction dates, and other pertinent construction
project data including names and phone numbers of responsible contact persons from
contractor and District Office in case of accident or other construction work zone problems.
If the Nebraska State Patrol determines the NDR needs to make immediate repairs at a
construction work zone accident site, the investigating officer will contact the appropriate
District office. The DCE will evaluate the request and advise the PM as to what action to
take. The Project Manager will then inform the contractor’s representative of needed
corrective action. When construction work zone accident site does not require immediate
corrective action by NDR or contractor representatives, the investigating officer is to report
accident to the Project Manager within 12 hours.
Investigation Procedure
When an accident occurs within a construction work zone, the Project Manager will
complete DR Form 100 "Construction Zone Accident Report". The report should include
pictures, diagrams, traffic control, weather conditions, and other pertinent information as
appropriate. Attach a copy of any accident report by other agencies (highway patrol, county
sheriff, or city police). Also, attach photographs and a video tape (whenever possible) of the
accident site showing location of traffic control devices and other pertinent items.
For accidents resulting in property damage to NDR facilities, the Project Manager shall
identify repair costs on DR Form 11, State Property Damage Report. This form is initiated
by the Traffic Engineering Division. An example is damage to new guardrail on a staged
bridge construction. The District should identify work status when completing the report.
Repair costs and supporting documentation should be submitted on the form. An
208
approved extra work order can be attached to the form to document costs in lieu of
completing that part of the form.
The ORM form, Vehicle Accident Report, and the DR form 41, Driver’s Motor Vehicle
Accident Report shall be completed within 10 days and should be forwarded to the Traffic
Engineering Division, State Property Damage Coordinator, 479-4645.
Accident Notification Procedure
The NDOR or contractor staff should report construction work zone accidents to appropriate
enforcement authorities (usually Nebraska State Patrol for NDR administered projects) and
notify appropriate medical responders if needed. Both the inspection supervisory staff and
contractor supervisory staff should be notified promptly. Note additional reporting procedures
for severe personal injury or fatality accidents.
Reporting of Severe Personal Injury and Fatal Accidents
If an accident results in a severe personal injury or fatality within a NDR administered
construction work zone, immediately notify the Construction Division, District Construction
Engineer, and Traffic Engineering Division.
Additional information to be gathered and forwarded by FAX within one working day to the
Construction Office, and Traffic Engineering Division includes:
Project Number
County
Route Number
Direction
Milepost
Date of Accident
Time of Accident
Contractor
Traffic Control Required in the Contract Documents
Approved Traffic Control Modifications
Brief Description of Facts Surrounding Accident
(Do not include hearsay, assumptions, or unsubstantiated facts.)
404.04 STOP SIGNS ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
Particularly during grading activities, the need arises to frequently move stop signs as
intersections are staged to allow access into project corridor. Instructions regarding the
placement of stop signs during grading activity are as follows:
• Existing stop signs should be left in place until work in that area necessitates
removal. If an intersection does not have an existing stop sign, the appropriate
maintenance area supervisor should be notified to install a stop sign immediately. All
side roads to primary highways must have a stop sign unless the side road is
physically closed.
• At the time work progresses to the point that existing stop sign is no longer in the
proper location or in the way of construction activities, the stop sign should be
removed by NDR Maintenance. A temporary stop sign with a minimum size of
209
750 mm x 750 mm (30 inches x 30 inches) should be furnished by NDR Maintenance

and placed by the contractor. Temporary stop sign should be mounted approximately
1.5 m (5 feet) high on a 1.5 m (5 feet) Type III barricade or other suitable support
furnished by the contractor. See Standard Plan 920. This sign may be moved as
needed to allow construction to proceed, but must be maintained in an effective
position at all times traffic is staged through the intersection.
• When work at the intersection is completed to the point where the permanent stop
sign can be installed, Maintenance should be notified to install the permanent stop
sign. This notification should be given on an intersection by intersection basis and
not delayed until entire project is completed.
404.05 "ROAD WORK AHEAD" AND "END ROAD WORK" SIGNS
When Traffic Control plans require contractors to place "Road Construction Ahead" (W20-1)
and "End Construction" (G20-2) signs at appropriate ends of highway construction projects.
On any mainline roadway where a "Road Work Ahead" sign is placed, the opposite end of
the work zone shall have an "End Road Work" sign placed.
These signs are required to be in place during and after the milling operation until existing
pavement has had a lift of resurfacing placed due to the roughened pavement surface.
404.06 NO PASSING ZONES ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
Often it is necessary to place temporary no-passing zones through a traffic control zone.
Guidelines to aid in proper use of no-passing zones follow:
• Never shorten an existing no-passing zone for temporary traffic control.

• If existing no-passing zone is lengthened, a black on orange "No Passing Zone"
(W14-3) (pennant) sign should be erected at beginning of no-passing zone and
existing black on yellow "No Passing Zone" (W14-3) sign should be removed or
covered.
• If temporary no-passing zone falls within existing no-passing zone, no additional
signs should be added. Either existing black on yellow "No Passing Zone" sign can
remain or be replaced with black on orange "No Passing Zone" sign.
• If no-passing zone ends within 90 m (300 feet) of beginning of existing no-passing
zone, then both no-passing zones should be connected to make one continuous no-
passing zone. Only one "No Passing Zone" sign should be placed at the beginning of
continuous no-passing zone.
404.07 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL STORAGE
When maintaining through traffic on construction projects, equipment and materials stored
within the right-of-way during nonworking hours should normally be stockpiled as far as
possible from the traveled way. Avoid storage areas in the following locations unless
protected by temporary concrete barrier, rail or metal beam guardrail:
• Within 9 m (30 feet) of traveled way on primary highways
210
• Within 15 m (50 feet) of traveled way on interstate highways
• On foreslopes
• On outside of sharp horizontal curves
Other storage locations may be approved by Project Manager when it is not practical to
satisfy the above criteria.
Storage behind guardrail must provide for partial collapse of rail upon impact. For beam
@ guardrail this is normally a minimum of 12 feet (3.6 m) on bull noses and a minimum of
5 feet (1.4 m) on parallel sections of rail. A minimum of 3.6 m (12 feet) should be allowed
behind cable guardrail.
404.08 CONSTRUCTION WORK ZONE SIGNING DURING WINTER SHUTDOWN
Responsibilities of the District Construction Engineer (DCE), District Maintenance

Superintendent, and the contractor for highway projects not fully completed by winter
shutdown are reviewed below.
Unless contract documents identify signing responsibilities different than stated herein, the
following guidelines will apply. Unusual circumstances will be handled on a project specific
basis with approval of the Construction Division.
Uncompleted Projects
This category of projects includes contracts having some carry-over work into the next year
or intended by plan to be multi-year contracts.
• Prior to winter shutdown, the DCE, PM and Maintenance should field review the
project to identify access, signing, and safety features needed to be completed before
the contractor suspends work. The DCE and Maintenance will decide which items
are contractors responsibilities and what is best accomplished by NDR Maintenance
forces. Cost of traffic control devices furnished by NDR Maintenance can be charged
against the project.
• During the winter shutdown period, traffic operation services become the
responsibility of the NDR Maintenance. This includes routine surveillance and sign
maintenance.
• Snow removal for through traffic and local accesses, if needed, is the responsibility of
Maintenance.
Multi-Contract Projects
Some projects are phased so a series of contracts are awarded over several years. The
most common examples are separate grading and paving projects. Unless contract
documents identify responsibility for traffic signing between completion of one project and
start of the next project, the Project Manager should evaluate and resolve each specific
situation.
211
2002
Flaggers & Pilot Cars
Special Concerns
When temporary traffic signals are involved, the contractor shall arrange for emergency
maintenance services. No payment will be made to contractor.
On urban projects, DCE will need to coordinate with the city to determine who is responsible
for access, signing, and safety features.
404.09 FLAGGERS & PILOT CARS (SSHC Section 422)
The Department, in conjunction with the AGC, has made the Flagger Certificate quiz, the
Flagger Training video, and a Flagger Training audio cassette available in Spanish.
The availability of this material in Spanish in no way is meant to void the specification that
requires that flaggers read and speak English clearly. However, in recent years the number
of Hispanic workers on our construction projects has increased. The intent is to provide
better education to those whose native language is Spanish, realizing that while they may be
able to speak English clearly they may have difficulty learning and taking a test in English.
You could relate it to learning metrics. While we know and talk metric, few of us really think
in metric.
The flagger on a construction project is the first line player in communicating with the driving
public. It is imperative that the flagger be able to speak English clearly with the drivers in a
work zone. The contractor is responsible for insuring that anyone performing flagging can
meet these requirements.
Flaggers may wear the company’s hard hat no matter what color it is.
Flagger Bid Item
@ If the contractor’s flagging crew works four hours or less, then ½ flagger day is charged. If
the crew works more than four hours, then one flagger day is charged.
Slow/Slow Paddles
The Flagger Handbook indicates that when a flagger is used near the lane-line to warn public
traffic of workers and equipment close to the open lane, then these flaggers are only allowed
@
to use a “slow/slow” paddle. This paddle shall be 24 inches (0.6 m) diamond shaped with
the word "slow" in black letters on orange background on both sign faces. The standard
stop/slow paddle shall never be used on a multi-lane highway, since through traffic should
never be forced to stop on these roadways.
Permanent & Temporary Pavement Marking
Pavement moisture can be measured by placing and holding a two square foot piece of clear
plastic on the existing pavement for a period of 15 to 20 minutes. Remove and hold the
plastic in a vertical position. If water drips from the underside of the plastic sheet, the
pavement has excess moisture.
212
2002
The slow/slow paddle shall not be used on two-lane primary highways, since the purpose of
the stop/slow paddle on these roadways is to actually stop traffic and then allow them to
proceed through the traffic control zone under pilot car or flagger control.
Method of Measurement
If an item for flaggers and pilot cars is included in the bid proposal, days are estimated to
determine the low bidder. These bid items often overrun due to contractors using multiple
work crews at different locations within the same project.
The inspector will count the number of days each flagger (or pilot car) was used. Every
flagger and pilot car used and approved by the PM as part of a preplanned work operation
is to be paid if their usage is required as a part of required traffic control. Flaggers used
solely as a benefit to contractor to help control their own equipment are not to be counted for
payment.
404.10 INTERSTATE TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
Median Crossings
The contractor is prohibited from using any established or other type median crossover on
most four-lane divided highway projects unless a crossover is required and drawn in the
Plans.
Traffic Control Removal for Head-to-Head Projects
The procedure to remove traffic control devices from head-to-head sections of interstate
repair projects has been accomplished differently across the state. To achieve uniform
removal practices across the state, the following steps will be used to remove traffic control
devices from head-to-head projects:
• Move diverted traffic stream back to its normal side of median.
• Place plastic drums in closed (passing) lane at intervals as prescribed in Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
• Remove all "Two Way Traffic" (W6-3) signs, leaving "Do Not Pass" (R4-1) signs in
place.
• Remove double yellow lines with simultaneous removal of tubular markers, "Do Not
Pass" signs, and plastic drums. At the same time yellow lines are removed, new
white lane lines shall be placed. If lane line painting cannot be accomplished the
same day as the double yellow lines are removed, plastic drums shall remain in place
effectively closing the passing lane.
• Remove impact attenuator and all temporary barrier rail at upstream end.
• Remove any advance construction work zone signing in the direction towards
oncoming traffic.
The entire removal operation shall proceed upstream towards traffic. This will ensure that
motorists will have two clear open lanes once they pass traffic control removal operations.
Tubular markers shall not be removed in any area until the double yellow lines are removed,
unless they are replaced with vertical panels or Type II barricades.
213
Raised Pavement Markers (SSHC Section 422)
Many interstate or other complex project traffic control plans include the use of raised
pavement markers to supplement the temporary pavement markings for the project. Raised
pavement markers are used in lane shifts or at crossover location to enhance visibility of
correct travel path through these areas. Raised pavement markers are very effective if they
stay in the correct location on pavement surface.
Off-tracking rear wheels on semi-trailers often dislodge raised pavement markers from the
pavement surface. It is permissible to offset the location of the raised pavement markers up
to 300 mm (1 foot) laterally away from the temporary pavement marking line to avoid the off-
tracking rear trailer wheels.
404.11 CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN GUIDELINES (SSHC Section 422)
The Department owns changeable message signs (CMS) stored at various locations
statewide. These CMS units are intended to be used for incident management traffic control
for major interstate reconstruction, emergency response, temporary road closures for bridge
beam replacement, temporary utility crossing requiring road closure, and for other
emergency related road closings.
CMS units used for incident management traffic control for major interstate reconstruction
projects should have the word message approved by the Traffic Engineering Division, since
the appropriate message will vary from project to project. CMS units used for all other
situations should also have the word messages approved by the state traffic engineer.
Proposed word messages should be limited to a maximum of 2 panels and usually eight
words or less per panel.
CMS units used for project purposes will be under control of the appropriate maintenance
office. Repair costs for CMS units used for project related incident management can be
charged against project funds using the appropriate documentation.
404.12 FLASHING ARROW PANELS
A listing of currently approved flashing arrow panels is found in the NDR Approved Products
List. Manufacturers of flashing arrow panels not currently approved for project use may
contact the Materials and Research and Traffic Engineering Divisions to schedule a field
review for inclusion in the NDR Approved Products List.
Any flashing arrow panels approved prior to January 1, 1996 must be resubmitted for
approval under the new MUTCD requirements.
If any solar arrow panel fails to perform adequately in a field situation, it shall immediately be
removed and replaced with a diesel powered arrow panel. The Materials and Research
Division and Traffic Engineering Division should be informed if any approved solar arrow
panel fails to perform adequately so that the deficient arrow panel model can be dropped
from the NDR Approved Products List.
214
404.13 SIGN MOUNTING DEVICES
SSHC Section 422 states that signs for traffic control zones that are used 24 hours a day
are permanent signs that shall be post mounted. Temporary signs may either be post
mounted or temporarily mounted.
In urban areas, signs that require post mounting may be skid mounted at the post mounting
heights required in the MUTCD provided that skid mounting devices are either a breakaway
design or a design that would not become a hazard if hit by vehicles.
404.14 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS (SSHC Section 422)
Temporary pavement markings are necessary for most construction projects. Typical
locations include shooflys, shifts, stage construction, etc. When temporary pavement
markings are placed, they will eventually be removed as part of the project.
Removal depends on the type of pavement marking material placed and type of surface to
which it is attached (new, old, ACC, or PCC).
Each temporary pavement marking material has its own removal characteristics.
All residue and/or debris shall be removed from the pavement surface when removing
temporary pavement marking materials. Any removal process shall not cause damage to
the final pavement surface.
It has been brought to our attention that some of the contractors have been using raised
pavement markers in place of temporary pavement marking Type I or Type II.
When the project includes the pay item(s) "Temporary Pavement Marking, Type I,"
"Temporary pavement Marking, Type II," or "Temporary Pavement Marking, Type RPM," only
that specific tape or raised pavement marker may be used and paid for at that contract unit
price. The contractor is not allowed to use RPMs when the contract bid item is Temporary
Pavement Marking, Type II. Only temporary removable preformed tape may be used for
Temporary Pavement Marking, Type II.
When the project bid item is "Temporary Pavement Marking" without any type specified, the
contractor is allowed to choose between the three different types of markings, provided that
the type of material used complies with the plans and specifications. Therefore, if the plans
call for TPM Type II at a crossover, for instances, and the other locations do not specify the
type of marking, the contractor is required to use Type II markings at the crossover, and may
choose to use another material for the rest of the project, providing it complies with the
specifications.
Upon completion of the project, any temporary pavement marking which is not intended to
remain in place must be removed. This includes stop bars, lane shifts, and any temporary
markings left on travel lanes or shoulders.
215
404.15 WORK AREA SPEED ZONE
Speed Limits in Maintenance Work Areas
For the purpose of establishing speed limits through a maintenance work area, an urban
area is defined as the portion of the State Highway System within the corporate limits of a
city or village, and a rural area is defined as the portion of the State Highway System outside
the corporate limits of a city or village.
Never drop speed more than 20 mph at one point. If 20 mph or greater reduction is
needed, phase the drop so that no phase exceeds 20 mph.
When it is deemed necessary to implement a speed limit through a maintenance work area,
the following guidelines should be used in determining the value of the speed limit:
Rural Areas
Work activity is being performed in the driving lanes.
Freeways - Normally 50 40 mph

Other State Highways - 35 mph
Work activity is being performed on the shoulder and the work does not encroach onto the
driving lane.
Freeways - Normally 50 45 mph

Other State Highways - 40 mph
Work activity is being performed off the shoulder.

No change from statutory limit.
Urban Areas
Freeways
The guideline for determining the value of the speed limit in a rural area for freeways
should be used.
Other State Highways
35 mph if the posted speed limit is 50 mph or higher.
25 mph if the posted speed limit is 45 mph or lower.
Special conditions or work activities may occur where speed limits higher or lower than
those described above may be appropriate; however, in no situation can a speed limit of less
than 35 mph in a rural area, or 25 mph in an urban area, be implemented.
Many maintenance work activities are of short duration (approximately 1/2 day) take place off
the roadway or shoulder, or are fast-moving operations. In many cases, the additional
exposure to traffic while setting up signing to mark the work area creates a greater hazard
than the actual work activity. Work activities of this type may not require work area speed
216
limit signing and are exempted from the provisions of the guideline regarding speed limits
and double fines. In all instances, however, the safety of the worker and the traveling public
must be the determining factor. If, in the opinion of the supervisor, a work area speed zone
is appropriate, the provisions of the guideline should be followed.
The following activities may not require speed zone signing:
• Survey crew (See existing policy)

• Litter pickup (Adopt-a-Highway)
• Bridge deck inspection (non-snooper) if under 1 hour (snooper)
• Pavement condition and inspection survey
• Deflection testing
• Coring operations
• Traffic counting
• Minor milling (Activity Code 2003)
• Hauling and mixing materials for cold mix (Activity Code 2020)
• Spot patching (Activity Code 2026)
• Grade shoulders (Activity Code 2031)
• Blading unpaved roads (Activity Code 2035)
• Major restoration unpaved roads (Activity Code 2036)
• Maintenance of access and frontage roads (Activity Code 2040)
• Unspecified roadway and shoulder maintenance (Activity Code 2050)
• Drainage structure maintenance (Activity Code 2101)
• Maintaining miscellaneous structures (Activity Code 2102)
• Reshaping ditches and filling washouts (Activity Code 2111)
• Channel cleaning and reshaping (Activity Code 2114)
• Machine mowing (Activity Code 2301)
• Hand mowing (Activity Code 2302)
• Chemical control of insects and roadside trees and shrubs (Activity Code 2303)
• Care and replacement of desirable roadside trees and shrubs (Activity Code 2304)
• Litter pickup (Activity Code 2311)
• Rest area and wayside area operations (Activity Code 2313)
• Seeding and sodding (Activity Code 2315)
• Survey and investigation of junkyard sites (Activity Code 2321)
• Outdoor Advertising Control (Activity Code 2323)
• Fence repair (Activity Code 2332)
• Other roadside maintenance (Activity Code 2350)
• Sign repair or replacement (Activity Code 2401)
• Centerline and edgeline striping (Activity Code 2408)
• Contract striping (Activity Code 2409)
• Signal Repair (Activity Code 2415)
• Highway lighting maintenance (Activity Code 2416)
• Erecting and removing snow fence (Activity Code 2501)
• Brush cutting (Activity Code 2505)
• Snow plowing and spreading of winter chemicals and sand (Activity Code 2511)
• Loading and hauling of snow (Activity Code 2514)
• Stockpiling chemical and sand (Activity Code 2521)
• Correct vandalism or roadside features (Activity Code 2603)
217
Speed Limits in Construction Work Areas
The maximum speed limit through any construction and maintenance work area shall be
35 mph in rural areas and 25 mph in urban areas, provided signs are in place to give notice
of the speed limit.
The Director may raise the 35-mph speed limit in rural areas and the 25-mph speed limit in
urban areas, or may delegate the authority to raise the speed limits to Department of Roads’
employees in a supervisory capacity. The speed limits shall be raised in 5-mph increments,
and cannot exceed the statutory speed limits.
Speed limits above 35 mph in a rural area and 25 mph in an urban area will be effective when
the Director, or any officer to whom authority has been delegated, gives a written order for
the increase and signs identifying the speed limit are displayed.
Speed limit signs may be mounted on a fixed or movable stand. For a moving-type
operation, speed limit signs may be mounted upon moving Department of Roads’ vehicles.
Authorization
In order to raise the work area speed limit from 35 mph in rural areas and 25 mph in urban
areas, the authorized supervisory employee shall complete a Speed Zone Authorization form
identifying the speed limit, highway number, location, and starting and ending times that the
speed limit will be in effect. The original Speed Zone Authorization form should be kept in the
file of the individual signing the authorization. A copy of the Speed Zone Authorization should
be forwarded to the individual in charge of the work crew.
The establishment of speed limits through construction work areas will be determined in the
Lincoln office, and will be included in the contract provisions so that a contractor will be
aware of a construction speed limit while preparing his/her bid.
If a situation arises where a construction speed limit is needed during the course of a
construction project and no provision was made for the speed limit in the contract provisions,
or if a speed zone established through the contract provisions needs to be raised or lowered,
individuals designated by the Director may establish or alter speed limits in accordance with
these guidelines.
Signing (SSHC Section 422)
All signing shall conform to the requirements of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices.
Speed limit signs are intended to supplement normal work area signing. They are not
intended to replace any of the signs that are now being used, except under certain situations
where advisory speed plates are used.
In order to make the “Double Fines” enforceable, the “FINES FOR SPEEDING DOUBLED IN
WORK ZONES” sign must be posted at the beginning of each work zone. On all speed limit
signs, the “FINES DOUBLED” sign needs to be installed, except for 35 mph in rural areas
and 25 mph in urban areas, must be set by utilizing the authorization form. If, for example,
within the limits of an interstate construction project, there are two sections under
218
work which require a reduced speed of 55 mph and the balance of the project maintains a 75
mph speed limit, an authorization form must be completed raising the speed limit on the two
sections from 35 mph to 55 mph and the balance to 75 mph.
All existing speed limit signs that conflict with the work area speed limit should be removed or
covered during the period of time that the work area speed limit is in effect, except that
advisory speed limits that are lower than the work area speed limit being implemented should
be left in place. The minimum length of a work area speed zone should be 1/2 mile.
A "Work Area - Speed Zone Ahead" sign should be placed approximately 250 m (800 feet) in
advance of the first work area speed limit sign. If the work area is on a steep downhill grade,
the 250 m (800 foot) distance should be extended to allow a motorist sufficient distance to
decelerate from the statutory speed limit to the work area speed limit. In urban areas where
lower speed limits exist, the 250 m (800 foot) distance should be decreased to from 100 m
(300 foot) to 200 m (450 foot), depending on the reduction in speed limit that is being
implemented through a work area.
The first speed limit sign should be placed approximately 200 m (450 m) in advance of the
start of the work area. In urban areas where lower speed limits exist, the 200 m (450 m)
distance should be decreased to from 30 m (100 feet) to 100 m (300 feet), depending on the
reduction in the speed limit that is being implemented.
The maximum length of a work area speed zone should be one-half mile, with the exception
of work operations that are being performed simultaneously at the beginning, through, and at
the end of a work area that is longer than one-half mile in length.
A “FINES FOR SPEEDING DOUBLED IN WORK ZONES” signs should be placed 500 to
1000 feet following the first work zone signs with the appropriate speed limit sign with the
“FINES DOUBLE” plate 500 to 1000 feet beyond that.
For reduced speed areas, a “REDUCED SPEED AHEAD” sign should be placed
approximately 800 feet in advance of the first work area speed limit signs. If the work area is
on a steep downhill grade, the 800-foot distance should be extended to allow a motorist
sufficient distance to decelerate from the statutory speed limit to the work area speed limit.
In urban areas where lower speed limits exist, the 800-foot distance should be decreased to
from 200 to 500 feet, depending on the reduction in speed limit that is being implemented
through a work area.
The first speed limit sign with the “FINES DOUBLE” plate should be placed in advance of the
start of the actual work area.
In reduced speed areas, a speed limit sign with the R2-1wz “FINES DOUBLE” plate shall be
repeated at no greater than one mile intervals.
219
The appropriate standard R2-1 speed limit sign shall be installed immediately following the
End Road Work, Thank You Drive Safety sign.
Recordkeeping
It is necessary to keep a daily log of work area speed limits, in the event a court case results
from a driver being given a citation for exceeding the speed limit.
The daily log should identify the date, hours the speed limit is in effect, value of the speed
limit being implemented, highway number, starting and ending reference posts of the work
area speed zone, and in the event a speed limit is implemented on one side of a divided
highway, the direction of travel.
404.16 BRIDGE APPROACH GUARD RAILS
On construction projects that require the removal of guardrail at the approaches to bridges,
or if the rail has not yet been installed, the following minimum traffic controls should be in
place at all unprotected bridge ends whenever traffic is permitted to use the highway:
Two-lane, two-way condition
Three Type III barricades should be in place to the right of the lane approaching the
bridge. The barricades should be placed at 15 m (50 foot) centers, with the last
barricade placed at the unprotected bridge end.
One Type III barricade should be in place to the right of the lane leaving the bridge
(facing traffic approaching from the opposite direction). The barricade should be
placed at the unprotected bridge end.
Divided highway condition
Three Type III barricades should be in place both to the right and to the left of the
lanes approaching the bridge. The barricades should be placed at 15 m (50 foot)
intervals, with the last barricade placed at the unprotected bridge end.
Barricades are not required on the lanes leaving the bridge.
In addition to the barricades at bridge ends, normal signing warning traffic that they are
approaching a construction area should be in place.
These traffic controls are applicable to both active construction projects and projects that are
held over the winter for completion in the next construction season.
The above traffic controls are intended for use only during the period of time when
construction activities require that a bridge end remain unprotected. The replacement of
guardrail should be accomplished at the earliest possible date, to eliminate the unprotected
bridge end condition.
220
404.17 INERTIAL BARRIER SYSTEMS
There seems to be some misunderstanding among the contractors about the proper
installation of the Type I object marker on the inertial barrier systems. The object marker
@ must be placed directly on the front of the first 440 lb (200 kg) module, either by adhesive or
rivet, etc. The marker is not to be placed on a separate post in front of the module. The
presence of a post in front of the system could effect the crash characteristics of the inertial
barrier system.
404.18 BARRICADES/PLASTIC DRUMS
Due to increased usage of plastic drums and Type II barricades on resurfacing projects, and
the considerable amount of time involved in testing one of every five devices, we are making
the following changes in the minimum tests required:
• When less than 50 are furnished, test one of every five furnished, or a minimum of
two each, whichever is greater.
• When 50 or more of any one device are furnished, test one of every ten furnished of
that device.
221
2002
Signs
@ 405.00 SIGNS
405.01 DEDUCTION FOR SIGNS
Use DR Form 502 "Construction Signs and Posts" to document signs supplied and returned
by the contractor.
Itemize those signs not returned or damaged by the contractor in the Sign Deduction
@
Computation Letter to the Construction Division, Finals Section. The itemized list, as
prescribed in the Finaling Manual should show the number of signs, sign number, message,
sign size, cost per sign and total deduction. The list should also indicate which signs were
damaged and which were not returned.
The Project Manager shall determine if the value of damaged or missing signs are to be
deducted from the Contractor’s payments. Assessment for broken, damaged or unreturned
signing materials is to be made for losses or damages which is due to the contractor’s
actions. The contractor will be assessed the total value of a sign and a salvage value will no
longer be allowed for damaged signs.
The Project Manager will compute the assessment and enter it on a project estimate.
405.02 SIGN MAINTENANCE
When a permanent sign has been destroyed or damaged due to the actions of the public,
either by accident or by vandalism, the work of repairing or replacing the sign shall be
considered to be part of the item, "Maintenance of Permanent Signs". The Department will
furnish a new sign and post, if required, at the permanent maintenance headquarters from
which the signs were originally obtained.
222
2002
Log of Work Area Speed Zones
Reference Post Time Divided Highways
Highway Speed Direction of
Date From To Location Start End
No. Limit Travel
Notes: If special remarks or comments are necessary for a particular speed zone, use an extra line.
The direction of travel is needed only if work is being performed on one side of a divided highway.
_________________________________
Signature
223
Speed Zone Authorization
Pursuant to the authority contained in Section 60-6,188 Reissue Revised Statutes of Nebraska, and in
accordance with Authorization No. ____ issued on July 19, 1996 by the Director, the maximum speed limit
of 35 miles per hour in rural area, or 25 miles per hour in an urban area through highway maintenance, repair
or construction zones on the portion of the state highway system, has been increased as set forth below.
Highway No.: ................................................ Location: ......................................................
Ref. Post: ...................................................

To Ref. Post: ......................................................
Project No. (if applicable) ......................................................................................................
The prima facie speed limit shall be increased from ____ miles per hour to _____ miles per hour, this
increase maintains the same posted speed limit as the speed limit prior to work for the entire length of the
work zone, and will be in effect 24 hours a day, except as changed below.
The following prima facie speed limit for sections of the work zone shall be increased from _____ miles per
hour to the speed shown below, and shall be in effect only when standard signs giving notice thereof are
installed as provided by law, for the lengths and time periods as set forth below.
Work Zone Section One: _____ Miles Per Hour Activity: __________________________________
Transition Speed Zone Required (y/n) __________ if Yes, Transition Zone - __________ Miles Per Hour
Stationary __________ Sta. or To: ___________________________

(Longer than 3 Days) Ref. Post: ___________________ Ending Date: ___________________
Starting Date: ___________________Ending Date: ___________________
24 Hours (y/n)_______ or Daily, Start Time: ___________________

End Time: ___________________
Non-Stationary ______ Actual Starting and Ending Locations, Dates, and Times will be documented
(Less than 3 Days) in a daily log.
Work Zone Section Two: _____ Miles Per Hour Activity: __________________________________
Transition Speed Zone Required (y/n) __________ if Yes, Transition Zone - __________ Miles Per Hour
Stationary __________ Sta. or To: ___________________________

(Longer than 3 Days) Ref. Post: ___________________ Ending Date: ___________________
Starting Date: ___________________Ending Date: ___________________
24 Hours (y/n)_______ or Daily, Start Time: ___________________

End Time: ___________________
Non-Stationary ______ Actual Starting and Ending Locations, Dates, and Times will be documented
(Less than 3 Days) in a daily log.
Authorizing Authority (Signature) Title Date

cc: District Office
Nebraska State Patrol
County Sheriff
224
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
225
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
226
DIVISION 500
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
Asphalt Pavement
DIVISION 500
BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT
501.00 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 503 Asphalt Concrete Pavement

1028 Asphalt Concrete
1033 Aggregates
Inspection Crew: Plant Inspector
Laydown Inspector
Lab Inspector
Inspection Equipment: Nuclear Density Gauge
Thickness Ruler
3 m (10 foot) Straightedge
Cleaning Solvent
Insulated Container
Paper Sacks
1.3 m (4 ft.) Carpenter Level
Performance Graded Binder Sample Cans
Inspection Procedures: 1. Review all Plans, Specifications, Road

Standards, Materials & Research
Manuals/guidance and the Construction
Manual. Prepare field books.
2. Check traffic control, work zone length,
flaggers, signing, pilot car operations.
3. Check project quantities to insure accuracy.
4. Are asphalt concrete mix designs approved?
5. Obtain necessary inspection equipment and
review sampling and testing procedures and
frequencies.
6. Locate and reference fixtures to be adjusted
prior to placing final layer.
7. Does equipment meet requirement of
SSHC:
Trucks
Tampers
Rollers
Material Bins
Weighing Equipment
Distributors
227
Asphalt Pavement
Spreaders
Brooms
Trenchers
Pavers
8. Check paver screed for proper crown and
excessive wear. Are automatic grade and
slope controls operational (SSHC
Subsection 503.03)?
9. Check frequency of vibratory rollers to
assure 30-40 impacts/m (100-130
impacts/ft.) with a tachometer.
10. Where a rubber-tired roller is used, verify the
manufacturer’s recommended contact
pressure.
11. Are there enough rollers to obtain required
density (SSHC Subsection 503.04) and
smooth out bumps, ridges, and marks in
surface? (SSHC Subsection 503.03)
12. Are tarps or insulated truck boxes required?
Check for improper use of cleaning
solvents. (SSHC Subsections 501.02 and
503.03)
13. Check hand equipment. Lutes, rakes, and
shovels should be heavy enough to do the
job. (SSHC Subsection 501.02)
14. Check distributor spray bar height and
nozzle angle against manufacturer’s
recommendations to achieve uniform tack
coat. Is the distributor tank calibrated?
15. Were all vertical faces tack coated?
16. Determine if correct type and rate of tack
coat material is being applied. (SSHC
Section 504)
17. Check each truck load of mix for proper
scale ticket. (SSHC Section 503)
18. Are trucks properly loaded and within legal
weight limits?
19. Is mix being placed at proper temperature
range? (SSHC Subsection 503.04) Check
surface temperature. (SSHC
Subsection 501.01)
20. Don't expose conveyor. Make sure material
is on the hopper conveyor at all times.
21. Is paver hopper near full at all times?
(SSHC Subsection 503.04) Check flow
gates and augers. Paver wings should not
be dumped as large aggregate accumulates
in the wings. Waste it at the end of each
day.
228
Asphalt Pavement
22. Are proper number of trucks available for

continuous paving?
23. Compare paver speed to plant output to
reduce amount of stopping. (SSHC
Subsection 503.04)
Consistent speed results in more consistent
pavement properties.
24. Check width, depth, and cross-slope, and
compare to spread width typical and typical
section as per plan.
25. Check and record yield based on
megagrams (tons) of mix required
compared to megagrams (tons) of mix
used. (Recommend 2-hour intervals)
26. Is gradeline string accurately set and
maintained? (SSHC Subsection 503.04)
27. Are transverse and longitudinal joints
constructed properly? (SSHC
Subsection 503.04 and Construction Manual
502.40.3)
28. Is surface texture uniform, dense, and free
from irregularities, tearing, steel roller
marks, check cracks, solvent spots, and
segregation? (SSHC Subsection 503.04)
29. Check smoothness (SSHC Section 502)
with 3 m (10 foot) straightedge when
profilometer smoothness (SSHC
Section 502) is not required.
30. Are temporary runouts and fillets in
compliance with applicable standards?
31. Obtain required performance graded binder
samples. Obtain tack samples if required.
32. Mark original and any recut core locations
and observe core sampling. Be sure core
holes are properly filled. May use nuclear
density gauge to check density.
33. Think safety! Use proper equipment, wear
protective clothing, and be aware of
contractor's operations.
34. Is the established rolling pattern being
maintained and documented? (SSHC
Subsection 503.04) Are asphalt concrete
properties in the test strip determined to be
acceptable prior to proceeding?
35. Do shoulder rumble strips conform to the
Plan details? Check indentation depth and
alignment of strip.
36.Do drop-offs comply with plan details?
229
Asphalt Pavement
37.Has grade and alignment staking been completed

and checked?
38. Is subgrade according to plan, stable, and
corrected tolerance (SSHC Section 302)?
Check subgrade according to Construction
Manual 540.1.
39. Are any string line offsets referenced to
permanent stakes?
40. Review "Manufacturer's Operations Manual"
41. Make sure loader operator does not
contaminate aggregates.
Laydown Procedures: 1. Keep records on temperature at plant and at

laydown site.
2. Asphalt spilled while loading finishing
machine must be picked-up.
3. Have Contractor demonstrate how they will
maintain level & smooth finishing operation.
4. Keep scale records.
a. Know what is on the records.
b. Save records in project files.
5. Note: "Daily Report of Asphaltic Concrete
Mass".
6. Do not allow any longitudinal joints in the
driving lanes wheel path. Paver must be
able to cover the entire lane in one pass.
7. Continuously monitor thickness & notify the
Contractor as soon as he/she is out of
limits.
8. Take all densities including recuts by
random schedule.
9. Traffic will not be allowed over bumps
greater than 50 mm (2 inches). Wedges
must not exceed 25 mm (1 inch) in 1 m
(3 feet) (40 to 1).
10. Before laydown, the surface shall be clean.
11. Verify breakdown rolling has been
accomplished before minimum temperature
is reached.
12. If thickness is 12.5 mm (½ inch) less than
required, then investigate to determine the
extent and why.
13. If thickness is 12.5 mm (½ inch) greater
than required, investigate to determine the
extent and why.
230
Asphalt Pavement
Construction Critical
Areas: 1. Asphalt should not be heated to more than
175°C (350°F) in the plant.
2. Asphalt at laydown should be 115 to 160°C
(240 to 320°F).
3. Watch joints to make sure they close tightly
and attain proper density. Tack vertical face
of joints.
Safety Areas: 1. Maintained Traffic:

a. Keep Contractor vehicles behind
pilot car.
b. Flaggers should use proper
procedures.
2. Watch for trucks and loaders traveling at an
unsafe speed.
3. Electrical cords near plant must be safely
used.
4. All work must comply with OSHA and other
applicable safety requirements.
NDR Tests: 1. Nuclear Density Gauge Procedures

NDR T 238 & T 587
2. NDR T 99 Soil Density
Sampling Requirement/Freq.: 1. Performance Graded Binder

SSHC Subsection 1028.02 a. 1 L/Day and 1 L/3400 Mg of mix
(1 qt/day & 1 qt/3750 tons).
2. Asphalt Concrete
a. Density Cores: 1/680 Mg;
5 cores/3400 Mg Lot (1/750 tons;
5 cores/2750 ton lot)
b. Thickness Cores: (See contract
Special Provisions.)
c. Mix Properties: 1/1000 Mg
(1/1100 tons)
Inspector's Records & Forms: 1. Profilogram

2. DR Form 143 - Pavement Marking Report
3. DR Form 261 - Daily Report of Cores
Drilled
4. DR Form 295 - Summary of Quantities and
Location of Surfaced Intersections and
Driveways
5. Density Pay Factor Summary
(DR Form 173 or equal)
231
Asphalt Pavement
502.00 ASPHALT PAVEMENT
502.10 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESCRIPTION
This Subsection explains how to inspect and monitor quality controlled asphalt paving
operations. It includes monitoring plant preparation of the asphalt mix and laydown
procedures.
502.20 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
502.20.1 ASPHALT ACCEPTANCE AND TESTING
Field Tests and Certification of Materials
Sampling and testing are required to determine whether the quality of materials and
construction are in reasonably close conformance with the plans and Specifications.
Project inspectors shall monitor all materials received on a project before they are
incorporated into work. Inspectors shall determine that proper inspection reports or
certifications are on hand, and that no unusual alterations in characteristics of materials
due to handling or other causes occurred.
Schedules in the Materials Sampling Guide contain various field tests and sampling
frequencies for asphalt materials and mixtures.
The QA/QC program was started in 1993 with the goal of improving the overall quality of
asphalt produced and giving the contractor the responsibility for mix design, sampling,
testing, and making mix adjustments. In other words, contractors were given
responsibility for the product they produce. If needed, most administrative questions
involving QA/QC projects can be answered by referring to the Flexible Pavement
Engineer [(402) 479-4675].
Asphalt Materials
Acceptance of asphalt materials will be on the basis of test results or certification from an
approved source. Formal approval of a source is to be issued by the Materials and
Research Engineer.
Each shipment invoice covering asphalt materials delivered to a project shall have a
signed certification statement as to type and grade, specific gravity or mass per liter, load
quantity, batch number or other identification, and project number. A copy of this invoice
shall be furnished to Project Manager or project inspector for review and filing.
232
Asphalt Pavement
The Project Manager must have documentation of the following:
1. Performance Graded Binder

2. Aggregates
3. Asphaltic mix taken behind the paving machine but in front of the rolling
operation.
4. Asphalt in-place density.
Performance graded binder suppliers are grouped into two categories (levels).
1. Level-1 suppliers are certified suppliers who have submitted

documentation to the Department and as part of the certification process,
the Department has inspected the supplier’s plant.
2. Level-2 suppliers are approved suppliers that are not certified.
The difference between being level-1 and 2 is that level-1 suppliers are only verified every
other day while level-2 suppliers must be verified each day. This verification is between
the lab and the supplier and the PM is not involved.
Hot-In-Place asphalt work may require support from the lab. Make sure you notify the lab
at least 2-3 days in advance so they can plan to be on-site when the work begins.
Density of the in-place mix can be tested with the nuclear density gauge or by taking
cores and measuring the density of the cores. Do not use the contractor’s random
sampling tables. Use the Department’s tables and keep location secret.
232a
2002
Asphalt Pavement
232b
Asphalt Pavement
Aggregates
Aggregate gradation and characteristics are covered in detail by SSHC Section 1033.
Acceptance for quality will be based on source monitoring and test results on assurance
or project samples.
502.20.2 RESPONSIBILITY AND DOCUMENTING ASPHALT MIXTURE
PROPORTIONING CHANGES
SSHC Section 1028 explains how asphalt mixtures will be controlled. It establishes job
mix criteria and corrective procedures to be followed when mixture characteristics are
changed from the job mix formula during mix production.
On QA/QC projects, the contractor has sole responsibility for making mix changes;
however, the Materials & Research Engineer and Project Manager must be kept informed
and involved in these changes. Mix change decisions must be an interactive process
between the contractor and the Department.
The Project Manager must also insure that required changes are implemented by the
contractor as soon as possible when mixture characteristics fall outside SSHC
Section 1028 limits. On each working day, the Project Manager shall determine if
work for previous working day was within SSHC guidelines. If not, immediately
consult with the contractor and ask what corrective actions have been or will be made.
Contact Flexible Pavement Engineer if additional guidance is needed.
Adjusting Performance Graded Binder Contents
On QA/QC projects, job mix control is the contractor's responsibility. The contractor is
responsible for sampling, testing, reporting results, and making appropriate mix changes.
Also, testing is done up to four times per day at each asphalt plant site so immediate
results are available.
When test results for air voids of plant produced mix are outside the limits given in SSHC
Section 1028, the contractor needs to contact the Project Manager and initiate changes
in the asphalt mixture. The contractor’s first efforts at corrective action should be to
adjust the aggregate percentages as needed. The adjusting of the performance graded
binder content should not be the first step because when performance graded binder
content changes are considered to adjust air voids, caution must be used to assure that
adequate film thickness is maintained. Reductions in performance graded binder content
must not go below the minimum allowable performance graded binder content as
calculated in SSHC Section 1028. Documentation of changes should be on the
contractor's "Daily Plant Report."
Documenting Corrective Action for Noncomplying Air Voids Test on Specimens
Taken from Constructed Pavement
Materials Sampling Guide also requires the contractor to report tests for field air voids on
mix samples from behind the paver on the contractor's "Daily Plant Report."
If conflicts develop between the contractor's and the NDR'S field voids, then together the
contractor and the Department should concentrate on achieving proper voids and resolve
the conflicts.
233
Asphalt Pavement
When noncomplying tests for air voids in specimens taken from constructed pavement
occur, the Project Manager will notify the Materials and Research Asphalt Lab
[(402) 479-4757] if it cannot be corrected. The contractor and the NDR plant inspector
will document noncompliance on the contractor's "Daily Plant Report" containing the
noncomplying test results.
In response, the contractor will inform the Project Manager as to what changes in mix
proportions, if any, should be made. The contractor will furnish project personnel written
documentation for the decision or action taken.
Adjusting Aggregate Proportions
Contractor must occasionally adjust aggregate proportions to consistently comply with

the contract provisions and to correct calibration errors.
Contractors shall initiate and make changes necessary to insure compliance to SSHC
Sections 1028 and 1033. The contractor shall document all changes being made.
Proportion changes which exceed provisions of the contract may require a new mix
design unless waived by Project Manager.
Project Managers and inspectors need to be familiar with the contractor's QC program
because it should provide many of the guidelines needed for making mix change
decisions. Project Managers are expected to reference SSHC Section 1028 and
communicate with Materials & Research if needed prior to, during, and after the
contractor makes decisions concerning mix proportion changes.
Proportion changes shall be documented by the contractor on their "Daily Plant Report."
Filler-Bitumen Ratio
SSHC Section 1028 defines the filler-bitumen ratio. Filler-bitumen is the ratio of material
passing the 75 µm (#200) sieve divided by percent of performance graded binder in the
mix (i.e., tank sticks, etc.).
The Plant inspector should determine if and by how much a contractor proportion change
will affect the filler-bitumen ratio. If it is necessary, contact Materials & Research Asphalt
Lab [(402) 479-4757] for guidance.
502.20.3 ASPHALT REPORT FORMS
Construction inspection personnel are responsible for monitoring/assisting in field
sampling and testing in accordance with requirements of SSHC and those outlined in the
Materials Sampling Guide. Forms are supplied for reporting test results, submitting
samples, and as inspector work sheets.
Under the certified plant inspector program and Quality Assurance/Quality Control
(QA/QC) program, specific sampling and testing will be done by the contractor's
representative per SSHC Section 1028 and the Materials Sampling Guide. Plant
234
Asphalt Pavement
inspectors and the contractor's QC technicians must also be familiar with all applicable
specification requirements including the sampling and testing procedures.
Form Identification and Use
• Daily plant operation, job control testing, and material placement for asphalt
production are recorded in the field book or project records. Copies of the
contractor's reports shall be sent to Materials & Research Engineer and the
Project Manager.
• DR Form 12, "Sample Identification Form" must accompany all samples

submitted to central materials laboratory and District materials laboratories.
• A mix design letter from the contractor and approved by the Flexible Pavement
Engineer is used to define aggregate components of asphalt, to identify material
sources, gradation, production limits, and proportions for the asphalt mix designs.
• “Summary Form of Tests of Asphalt Mixtures” is to be used by District materials

laboratories to report extraction, sieve analysis, density, voids, maximum specific
gravity, etc.
The contractor will use NDR forms for plotting all moving average data, various
temperatures and other graphed data.
Although submission of a daily report is not required, it is necessary that each day's
production information be recorded in the field notebook. It is very important that the daily
placement be identified by station location, side, lift, lift thickness, and material
characteristics. This type of information becomes necessary in case of deductions or
answering inquiries regarding any traffic accident occurring on the project.
235
Asphalt Pavement Equipment
502.30 ASPHALT PAVEMENT EQUIPMENT
502.30.1 INSPECTION AT ASPHALT PLANTS
Project Managers are responsible for verification, inspection and/or monitoring at asphalt
plants. They should assure themselves that the contractor's QC inspectors are qualified
and have been informed about their specific duties. This should include, but not be
limited to, frequency of tests, information to be recorded, and samples to be obtained and
held for use by Materials & Research and District laboratories.
The contractor is responsible for all plant inspections. Their duties include constant
checks of stockpile handling, equipment settings, mixture appearance, and supervision of
scale inspectors and assistant plant inspectors. Plant inspectors should spend part of
their time in the laboratory trailer, and assist as needed.
The contractor shall furnish and be responsible for certified plant inspection in accord
with SSHC Section 1028. All asphalt production, including patching, will be covered by
certified plant inspection unless otherwise excluded by contract documents or when
450 Mg (500 tons) or less of asphalt are used on project. Plant monitor requirements are
identified in SSHC Section 1028.
On QA/QC projects, the contractor's QC lab technician is responsible for meeting all
sampling, testing, and documentation requirements as set forth by the current contract.
For some contractors, this person may also be responsible for certified plant QC
inspector duties as well. It should be possible for two people to handle both QC and
Plant Inspection responsibilities on a typical asphalt resurfacing or paving project. The
QC technician should maintain good communication with the NDR inspector and
Materials & Research personnel especially on test results and mix changes.
502.30.2 INSPECTING THE MIXING TIME OF ASPHAL T PLANTS
Project Managers should insure that mixing time is inspected on continuous plants and
on batch plants.
Necessary action shall be taken to insure compliance with the mixing time in SSHC
Subsection 503.03. Inspectors shall check mixing time when work begins on the project
and thereafter as they consider necessary to insure compliance. The QC inspector's
diary must show when it is done and calculations used.
If mixing time is found to be deficient, the contractor shall increase it to a specified

amount. For continuous plants, this is done by decreasing the megagrams of output or
by increasing pugmill contents.
Materials & Research personnel will give assistance in determining the mixing time as a
component of the plant calibration process.
236
502.30.3 USE OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
Material Transfer Vehicle
The Material Transfer Vehicle provides mix surge capacity to allow more constant paver
speed and efficient paving operations. It operates in front of or beside the paver and
accepts loads of hot asphalt from delivery trucks. It provides a large surge storage bin
that can continually feed the paver hopper.
This vehicles mass is 34,500 kg (75,000 lb.) empty with a maximum additional 31,500 kg
(70,000 lb.) mix storage capacity. It has four axles with large flotation tires. Front two
axles have 17.5R x 25 flotation tires and rear two axles have 20.5R x 25 flotation tires.
Tire pressure is 345 - 450 kPa (50 – 65 psi).
The Bridge Division will verify each bridge capability on a case-by-case basis with the
following limitations.
An empty MTV-3500 usually can safety cross all bridges that are not load-restricted,
subject to the following conditions:
• Vehicle must be centered on bridge with no other vehicles on bridge.
• Gross mass cannot exceed listed empty mass of 34,500 kg (75,000 lb.).
• Speed of vehicle on bridge cannot exceed 8 km/h (5 mph).

A partially loaded MTV-3500 usually can safely cross all bridges that are not load-
restricted, subject to the following conditions:
• Vehicle must be centered on bridge with no other vehicles on bridge.
• Gross weight cannot exceed 45,000 kg (50 ton) (approximately one-third hopper).
Note: This situation should be avoided. We prefer the contractor anticipate the
need to cross a bridge and have the MTV empty by the time they reach bridge.
• Speed of vehicle on bridge cannot exceed 8 km/h (5 mph).
An MTV-3500 shall not cross any load-restricted bridge without prior approval of the
Bridge Division.
Pavement on which MTV-3500 operates must be at least 200 mm (8 inches) in
thickness. It shall not be operated on shoulders, subbases, or lower lifts of asphalt
pavement. Any damage caused to existing surfacing shall be repaired at the contractor's
expense.
These limitations apply for use of vehicle in a construction work zone. Contractors must
obtain any necessary permits for moving this vehicle to and from project on an open
highway. Do not allow contractor to operate this equipment unless the lane in which the
MTV operates is closed to traffic or is controlled by flaggers.
237
Mat Smoothness Machine
This is an asphalt material receiving hopper and elevator that deposits hot asphalt into
paver hopper. Use of this equipment allows for a more consistent paver operation by
providing some surge capacity for paver, only on a much smaller scale than the MTV.
Its mass is approximately 8,500 kg (10 tons) empty and has a hopper capacity of 1.7 m³
(60 ft3). Mass restrictions are not a concern with this piece of equipment.
Advantages for use of MTV and CR MS-3 include:
• Smoother pavements due to elimination of trucks backing into paver and ability to
provide a more uniform operation speed.
• Reduction in potential for truckload interval segregation due to amount of mixing

the material receives going through this equipment.
Even with the MTV or CR MS-3, paver hopper should be kept relatively full at all times. If
hopper is allowed to drawn down too far, coarse aggregate collected in sides of paver
hopper might be drawn down and create streaks of segregation in mat surface.
Windrow Pick-up Equipment
With this process, hot asphalt is deposited in a windrow onto pavement surface using
bottom dump trailers. A windrow pick-up elevator deposits the material into paver
hopper. Again, primary advantages are contractor efficiency and uniform speed of
operation.
Segregation has occurred on several projects on which this equipment was used.
Truckload and longitudinal strip type segregation are potential problems with this
equipment.
All material deposited onto roadway must be picked up and put through the paver.
Material left on roadway will cause surface problems following completion of project.
238
Asphalt Pavement Method of Measurement and Payment
502.40 ASPHALT PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION METHODS
502.40.1 UNSTABLE SUBGRADES AND SUBBASES
See SSHC Sections 302, 303, and 305 for subgrade requirements.
Whenever trucks or other paving equipment cause rutting of the subbase or subgrade in
asphalt placement areas, inspectors shall immediately stop construction. Construction
shall not be allowed to resume until distorted subgrade or subbase is repaired (SSHC
Subsections 105.03 and 105.10).
Locating Unstable Areas
Contractors and inspectors should locate by proof rolling, any questionable unstable
areas in advance to avoid distortion under equipment. Wet, unstable areas must be
dried out or replaced before starting placement of asphalt to avoid unanticipated and
costly work shutdowns.
Locating wet or soft areas in advance can be accomplished by testing finished subgrade
or subbase with a loaded truck. When the proof truck causes subgrade distortions, the
subbase and subgrade must be dried out and reworked.
Construction of asphalt pavement should not proceed unless testing gives a reasonable
indication that distortions will not occur during construction of overlying pavement.
Determining Cause
During spring and early summer, unstable subgrades caused by high moisture contents
are encountered statewide. This condition is usually seasonal and tends to improve as
warmer, dryer summer weather stabilizes subgrade. Additional pavement thickness is
not justified to bridge over these particular soft subgrades because of their seasonal
nature.
When evaluating individual cases of instability, experienced judgment is advisable
because of the similarity in outward appearances between moisture in subgrade due to
seasonal conditions and more serious causes such as frost boil, unsuitable material, etc.
If excess moisture is encountered, dry subgrade and recompact.
Drying and Recompaction
This treatment may be paid for as extra work provided the Project Manager authorizes it,
and the work is closely monitored by the inspector and the contractor did not cause the
wet condition.
SSHC Subsection 205.03 or special provisions require the contractor to disc or take
other action to remove moisture and then recompact the soil at their expense. For a
natural subgrade, contractors are required, if necessary, to repair distorted areas by
scarifying to a depth up to 150 mm (6 inches), aerating, and recompacting at their
239
expense. Overdepth aeration and recompaction below the top 150 mm (6 inches) shall
be paid for as extra work (SSHC Subsections 302.03 and 503.04).
When repair, drying, and recompaction are required to correct damage from contractor's
operation, all necessary repair will normally be done at the contractor's expense.
However, if the Project Manager determines that additional depth of aeration and
recompaction are needed, that should be paid as extra work (SSHC Subsection 302.03).
Special Treatments
When unusual problems are encountered with unstable subgrades or subbases, the
District Engineer should contact Materials & Research for assistance.
502.40.2 GRADELINE STRINGS AND EDGE ALIGNMENT
New Construction
The inspector should make frequent measurements to insure the guideline string has
been correctly set and maintained. Support arms used to secure the guideline string
shall be at intervals close enough to minimize chords on curves and other irregularities.
Make the curve look like a curve.
Guideline strings placed on two-lane asphalt pavement should be located by measuring
from redhead nails placed on centerline. Placement of a lower asphalt layer will cover
redheads. For succeeding lifts, guideline string should be located by measuring from
exposed nails used to hold string for each previous lift.
Resurfacing
When resurfacing two-lane PCC pavement, contractors may locate guideline strings on
shoulders along outer edges. To insure that parallel alignment is used for an adjacent
lane, the gradeline string for that lane shall be located by measuring across pavement
from the first string.
True edge alignment controls the correct lap at each longitudinal joint. If insufficient lap,
the joint will lack density resulting in raveling and joint deterioration. Excessive lap
produces an objectionable wide scab of mixture on the surface next to the centerline
joint, resulting in an unacceptable appearance.
An intended lap of 25 mm (1 inch) with a variance of 12.5 mm (½ inch) will normally be
the optimum overlap for longitudinal joint construction. To maintain these close
variances, adjacent lane must be constructed with true edge alignment.
The finishing machine operator shall follow the guideline string exactly. If the machine
goes off line for any reason, it shall be adjusted back onto the line immediately. It is
incorrect to smooth out the edge alignment by coming back onto the line gradually. This
results in long stretches where incorrect lap at longitudinal joint will occur. When batch
trucks bump finishing machines off line on curves, movement is usually down the slope
of the curve. If the machine is brought back on line gradually, an objectionable, long,
straight chord will result in what is supposed to be curved edge alignment.
Irregular edge alignment due to any cause, including adjustments of finishing machine,
shall be corrected at once by hand tools. When corrections in edge alignment are
240
Asphalt Pavement Construction Methods
unable to be made promptly after they occur, the inspector shall require the finishing
machine to be stopped until workers catch up with making corrections.
When constructing handworked areas such as driveway returns and bridge approach
tapers, edge alignment may become irregular during rolling because small, high, and low
spots in handworked surface tend to extend in width unevenly. Edge alignment of
handworked areas can be made true by first rolling the surface with a steel roller, then
immediately trimming the edge with hand tools while the mixture is still hot and workable.
502.40.3 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
To obtain adequate compaction at longitudinal joints, the contractor shall place sufficient
thickness of mix to compensate for 20 to 25 percent reduction in thickness that normally
occurs from rolling. If thickness is insufficient prior to rolling, joint will usually be smooth
in appearance but lack density because of inadequate compaction. Make sure density
is checked along the joints.
The vertical face of exposed, longitudinal joints must be tacked before the adjacent lane
is placed. This treatment is very important to insure a seal at the joint. No tack coat shall
be sprayed on the surface of lane being matched. Shields on distributor spray bar will
help protect adjacent lanes (SSHC Subsection 503.04).
If overlap is maintained at approximately 1 inch (25 mm) and thickness of joint is correct,
@
brooming or raking may not be necessary to obtain a good joint. However, occasional
corrections with hand tools may be necessary. When hand work is completed, excess
material should be wasted as opposed to scattered on lane being constructed.
241
2002
502.40.5 DENSITY CONTROLS FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE

CONSTRUCTION (SSHC Subsection 503.06)
Specifications for asphaltic construction require each layer to be compacted to a density
not less than a given percentage of the Rice voidless density.
Density of pavement is determined from cores cut by the contractor or by nuclear density
gauges, normally on the working day following construction. The method of mix density
determinations will be determined by the contractor, and any disputes will be resolved
with cores.
One hot box sample per sublot [750 tons (680 Mg)] will be obtained from the roadway
@
surface by the contractor and transported to the field lab for testing. The lab will
determine the voidless density. The location of the sample shall be a secret and it must
be random.
An average of the voidless densities for a day's production will be used to determine the
degree of field density.
@ Five samples shall be cut from each 3750 tons (3400 Mg) or use Nuclear Density Gauge
to determine density.
The 1,000 ton test strip (and smaller test strips in earlier contracts) is independent of the
@ tonnage listed in the random sampling schedule provided to the PM. The random
sampling schedule becomes active following the placement of the 1,000th ton of an
approved test strip.
242
2002
The Specifications also describe a procedure for field density evaluation together with a
schedule for payment adjustments when noncompliance occurs. Project inspection
personnel shall observe the following:
• The contractor is required to take a prescribed number of samples at locations
selected and marked out by the project inspector. The project inspector will
@ witness the core sampling. A circle approximately 16 inches (400 mm) in
diameter is adequate for identification of sampling location. The core should be
taken from within the area identified. It is not appropriate for the contractor to use
a nuclear device to "hunt" for a particular spot to sample; coring locations are no
longer random when a nuclear device is used in this fashion.
• Sample locations are identified in the random sampling schedule which will be
provided by Materials & Research. Keep the location a secret. A core will not be
taken less than 12 inches (300 mm) from the edge of a given pass of the finishing
@ machine. Procedure for identifying random locations should provide for the
potential to obtain a core sample at any distance 12 inches (300 mm) or greater
from the edge.
• If the layer being sampled adheres to a lower layer, it may be necessary to
sample through two or more layers or full depth. The contractor will need to
remove the extra depth by sawing the sample with a masonry saw. It may be
necessary to cool the sample by refrigeration or ice to prevent damage during
sawing. It is important that core drill bits be kept sharp.
• Each sample shall be inspected carefully by the contractor and inspector prior to
testing. Be sure each core sample is representative of the density of the mixture
placed and not damaged. If damage is noticeable, discard without testing and
take another to replace it.
• If tests indicate that density is less than the specified percentage, the sample
shall be retested to insure accuracy. The contractor can request another random
sample be taken. (See SSHC Subsection 1024.02.)
• Tests on density samples give lower results if samples are damaged during
handling. Contractors and project inspectors are advised to use extreme care
when taking, transporting, and preparing cores for testing.
• Samples should be transported on hard flat surfaces to avoid loss of density by
distortion. If necessary, samples should be stored in a cool place and on a hard
flat surface.
• Specifications also require the contractor to take density samples as promptly as
practical as prescribed by NDR T 168. Samples should be taken no later than the
working day following placement. If the contractor is unable to comply with this
timing, the project inspector shall stop construction until the contractor is able to
do so.
• NDR personnel shall be responsible for performing density tests as prescribed by

NDR T 166 using the contractor provided samples.
243
2002
• Any failures should be reported to the Project Manager and to the contractor on
the day tests are performed.
• When rerolling is performed, insure the area that is rerolled is the complete area
of low density, not just the area of the sample.
Asphalt Compaction
Many Superpave mixes exhibit what is called a “Tender Zone” during compaction. You
will have to confirm the contractor has determined the “Tender Zone” for the mix.
@ Normally the “Tender Zone” is between 230° and 160°F. When the asphalt is between
230° and 160°F stop compaction rolling. Do the finish rolling below 160°F and make
sure heavy and intense compaction rolling is done above 230°F.
Procedures for Construction of Test Strips (SSHC Subsection 503.04)
SSHC Subsection 503.04 requires the contractor to construct a control (test) strip for all
mixture types except S.P.S. Test strips are used to evaluate properties of asphalt
mixture and identify an effective roller pattern.
Proper construction and documentation of the test strip is the responsibility of the
contractor and shall be provided by the contractor to the NDR inspector.
Document the procedure that was followed to construct the test strip.
Resolving Density - Void Conflicts
The project inspector should be aware that the field laboratory and compacted voids are
to be tightly controlled. This may require more compactive effort for compliance.
Become familiar with other controls by reading the Materials Sampling Guide and asking
questions of Materials & Research personnel.
For the case where specified density is met, but field laboratory voids are outside
designated limits for two moving average points, the production will cease. The Project
Manager may allow production to start following agreement on corrective action to be
taken. The contractor will select the combination of rollers to be used and preliminary
rolling pattern. Nuclear gauge readings would normally be taken after each pass or
series of passes.
The inspector shall only observe and document this process. Documentation of type and
amount of compactive effort shall be recorded. Inspector will then select and mark out
five random core sites within the test site. Density cores taken by contractor will be
tested and results reported as soon as possible.
Cooperation between the project inspector, Materials & Research, and the contractor is
essential to reach a timely solution. If all anticipated results are not met, further
experimenting with a different combination of rollers and operation should be performed.
Changes in gradation may be one of the first items looked at by Materials & Research.
Changes in performance graded binder content would be one of the last items. Relief
from minimum laboratory voids specified may only be approved by Materials & Research.
244
2002
502.40.6 LAYING WIDTHS FOR ASPHALT
Plans for asphalt projects will show the overall dimensions of finished pavement.
When spreading layers of asphalt 1 ½ inches to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) in thickness, a

typical 24 foot (7.2 m) pavement may broaden 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) in width
@ during rolling. Therefore, laydown width before rolling might require) 3 inches (75 mm)
less than final design width. An intended lap of 1 inch (25 mm) at the longitudinal joint is
best for proper joint construction but seldom seen these days because the contractor
has to have someone “set up” the inch overlap. Use of a cutoff shoe when matching a
longitudinal joint is not acceptable.
When using finishing machines that spread the pavement full width, the inspectors shall
insure that contractors adjust the spreading width so the final dimensions conform to the
dimensions specified in the project documents.
The finishing machine screed extensions are usually available in 6 inches (150 mm)
@ increments. Where standard screed extensions are utilized to increase the paver width
by more than 12 inches (300 mm), the paver auger must also be extended. Many new
pavers are equipped with automatic screed extensions which can be adjusted to conform
to the required width for most resurfacing situations. Some paver models have
automatic auger extensions as well.
502.40.6a POLICY FOR PLACEMENT OF TEMPLATE CORRECTION ON OVERLAY

PROJECTS
Effective immediately, the following shall be Department of Roads policy for placement
@ of asphaltic concrete template correction quantities. This policy shall be applicable to
all new and existing contracts.
(1) When constructed under traffic maintained conditions and the design
thickness is greater than 2 inches (50 mm) for the asphaltic concrete
type and nominal aggregate size to be used on the surface layer, the
asphaltic concrete shall be placed in more than one layer. The
proposed compacted placement thickness of the top layer shall not
exceed 2 inches (50 mm). Asphaltic concrete provided for template
correction shall be placed with the lower layer or with the leveling course,
if shown in the plans.
(2) When constructed under traffic maintained conditions and the plans
indicate that template correction is provided with a designed asphaltic
concrete thickness if 2 inches (50 mm) or less, the total asphaltic
concrete thickness, including template correction, shall be placed as a
single layer.
245
2002
502.40.7 PLACEMENT RATES FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT BASES, BINDER, AND
SURFACE COURSES
The inspector shall check contract quantities for accuracy.
In general, placement rates for hot mix asphalt shall be determined using the contract
asphalt mass. The estimated unit mass from design standards used to calculate
contract quantities will provide sufficient material for construction of design thickness for
most mixtures used.
If the contract quantity is not sufficient to construct the required thickness, notify the
For lower layers on resurfacing projects, automatic controls should not be adjusted
repeatedly based on megagram yields taken at short intervals. Automatic controls
should be allowed to correct for irregularities in underlying base without frequent
adjustments. Accordingly, the placement rate for individual truckloads will sometimes
vary substantially from contract rate because of irregularities in old base. However, over
@ longer distances, 1650 feet (500 m) or more, taking both sides of the pavement into
account, inspectors should select a general spread rate that compares as closely as
possible with contract quantities.
For paved shoulders or other construction where dimensions are controlled by specified
elevations, existing structures, or other unusual requirements, spread rates shall be
adjusted as necessary.
245a
2002
245b
2002
Asphalt Pavement Method of Measurement
502.40.8 COLD WEATHER ASPHALT CONSTRUCTION (SSHC Section 501)
SSHC Subsection 501.01 contains limitations for placement of asphalt and liquid bitumen
under cold weather conditions. These restrictions apply to pavement surface
temperature and time of year, and vary according to whether layer is surface course,
lower binder, or base course, and nominal lift thickness.
Cold weather construction problems may show up in the form of increased roughness on
profilograph, mat raveling, low density, high voids, segregation, slippage, or failure of tack
coat to break. The Project Manager and inspector should be aware of other weather
related conditions which may further limit placement.
After September 15, it is appropriate to require tarping and insulation of truck bodies,
especially if hauls exceed 3 miles (5 km) (SSHC Subsection 503.04). However, if the
contractor can demonstrate that the asphalt temperature is not adversely affected by
hauling, the tarp and insulation requirements should be waived.
Base temperature is the single greatest factor in the rate of cool down for freshly placed
asphalt mat. Consequently, base temperature has direct affect on recommended
minimum laydown temperature and rolling time available to obtain specified density.
Wind velocity, air temperature, and cloud cover are additional factors that affect the
cooling rate of hot mix asphalt.
For fall work, a cutback asphalt may be used at the Project Manager’s option. Cold
surface temperatures cause emulsions to lose tackiness and increase breakage time
resulting in higher risk of mat slippage.
502.40.9 RUMBLE STRIPS IN ASPHALT SHOULDERS

(The paragraph below moved from Page 247)
Rumble strips will be milled into shoulder on future projects. Department will no longer
accept rolled-in rumble strips.
246
2002
Asphalt Pavement Method of Measurement
502.40.10 QUALITY CONTROL MONITORING
Requirements for monitoring a contractor's quality controlled plant operation are shown in
Table 502.40.1.
246
2002
Table 502.40.1
NDR Monitoring Program for Asphalt Paving Plants -- Quality Control Methods
Before production begins, the contractor’s plant inspector and the NDR plant monitor should
discuss these duties, documentation, sampling and testing plans to ensure compliance with the
contract. Any noncompliance or work quality deficiency shall be immediately reported to the
contractor’s superintendent and the Project Manager. The contractor shall be required to take
corrective action. The monitoring requirements are minimum and should be increased if
deficiencies occur until the problems are resolved.
Contractor’s NDR
Plant Inspection/QC Minimum Monitoring Requirement
Stockpiles
Observe construction of stockpiles to prevent Inspect before construction begins and once a
segregation, contamination, and intermingling. week thereafter.
Plant Erection
Inspect material bin foundations. Assure Inspect for evidence of settlement. Inspect
sampling locations are safe and convenient. prior to calibration and after heavy rain.
Plant Equipment
Check interlocks on aggregate feeders and Inspect all plant and testing equipment prior to
performance graded binder delivery systems, calibration (including lab trailer).
screens for removal of oversize material,
performance graded binder storage tank, tank
stick, and general condition of all plant
equipment.
Check scales for sensitivity and accuracy Check first day and once a week thereafter.
daily.
Plant Sampling & Testing

The contract allows the contractor to test for Witness at least 1 of 4 process samples of
gradations by either “cold feed” or “ignition each mix type.
burn-off of field sample.” Determine moisture
content of all aggregates including RAP.
(When daily plant output is less than 750 tons);
only one sample is required for every 750 tons
of asphalt produced.)
Observe performance graded binder sampling. Using proper sampling techniques, obtain 1
sample per 7500 tons for Level 1 suppliers and
per 3750 tons for Level 2 suppliers and submit
sample to Materials and Research Lab.
Obtain density cores and core thickness. Identify random core locations, observe core
cutting, transport to field lab, determine and
record core densities, and core thickness.
1 of 4
247
2002
Contractor’s NDR
Documentation
Prepare daily plant report. Audit entries daily.
Document all checks, tests, and quantities in Audit entries daily.

field books.
Complete tank stick sheet. Audit daily.
Check for approved sources and certifications Audit once per week.
for all materials (including material transferred
from other projects) and document deliveries.
Assure total certified quantities are sufficient Audit once per week.
for tons produced.
Maintain file of all certified material tickets, Obtain file at end of project.
worksheets, and forms submitted.
QC
Maintain control charts and data sheets. Monitor daily.
Document all mix control changes. Document
correlation results.
2 of 4
248
2002
Contractor’s NDR
Plant Calibration Observe calibration and review calibration
Observe calibration and obtain copy of all data.
calibration data.
Obtain copy of job mix formula.
Check cold feed bins for method of Participate in check.

adjustment.
Discuss mix designs and plant controls with Participate in discussion.

Project Manager.
Mix Control Observe each day of production.

Monitor coating of aggregates and mixing time.
Monitor and record air, performance graded Check once each day of production.
binder, and mix temperatures on 2-hour
intervals.
Monitor truck loading procedures, amount of Observe each day.

mix maintained in silo, and operation of
hopper/silo gates to avoid segregation.
Check aggregate proportions, interlocks, and Check first day and weekly thereafter.
cold feed bin gate settings daily.
Inspect trucks for proper/improper use of Monitor daily.

cleaning fluids.
Prepare containers and send to road for hot

samples.
3 of 4
249
2002
Contractor’s NDR
Asphalt Delivery Monitor once per day.
Determine quantities on hand and calculate
performance graded binder added by tank stick
or weighing. Compare with brodie meter daily.
Responsible for proper and random sampling Monitor daily.

of hot asphalt mixture behind paver. Sampling
frequency is one sample for each sublot 680
Mg (750 tons) produced.
4 of 4
250
2002
502.50 ASPHALT PAVEMENT METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
502.50.1 TESTING FOR SMOOTHNESS (SSHC Section 502)
Equipment for smoothness testing includes the 7.6 m (25 foot) California profilograph and
a 3 m (10 foot) straightedge. Pavement surfaces to be tested for smoothness with the
7.6 m (25 foot) profilograph are identified in Plans or Special Provisions. The Contractor is
responsible for providing the profilograph. The Department should provide the rolling
straight edge. For all projects, the 10-foot straightedge method may be used to identify 1/8”
and greater bumps.
Make sure that the tire pressure on the profilograph is maintained at the proper level
(210 kPa) (30 psi).
The contractor is not permitted to tight-blade the surface with a grader blade in hopes of
minimizing any bumps, and no bonus will be allowed for any section -- regardless of the
trace obtained -- if there is any evidence of such scrape marks in that section.
Contractor should be encouraged to test directly behind the finish roller to allow correction
of an identified 10 mm (3/8 inch) bump by re-rolling while the mixture is still hot enough to
be affected.
Make sure that the profilograph operator maintains a true course while advancing the
machine down the road. Weaving, even if not done in an attempt to avoid a rough area,
should not be permitted.
Since so much money can be involved, it is very important that you make an effort to have
an inspector present while the smoothness testing is being performed. Make it very clear
to the contractors that they are to provide adequate notice of any smoothness testing so
that inspection can be arranged. DO NOT accept a profilogram if you were not notified
about a test and did not have an opportunity to provide inspection.
Incentive/Disincentive Payments for Asphaltic Concrete Smoothness
The following standard items and standard item numbers have been established to provide
payment for bumps and smoothness incentives/disincentives:
9300.70 Deduction for Asphalt Concrete Bumps Each
9300.60 Smoothness Incentive - Asphaltic Concrete Mg
9300.62 Smoothness Disincentive - Asphaltic Concrete Mg
9300.64 Smoothness Incentive – Performance Graded Binder Mg
9300.66 Smoothness Disincentive – Performance Graded Binder Mg
The mass of asphaltic concrete to which the incentive/disincentive payment is to be
applied shall be determined by calculating the asphalt placed in the top layer within those
areas defined by the width of the driving lane (or lanes) shown on the plans and the length
(or lengths) of the project subject to profiling, except that:
1. When a narrow shoulder is required to be laid with the adjacent lane (inside
shoulder on Interstate, for example), the full lane and shoulder width shall be
used.
251
2002
2. When it is impractical to lay additional width except while laying the top lift
through the laydown machine (8.5 m (28 foot) roadway, for example), the full
width shall be used.
The thickness of the top layer used to determine the mass shall be either:
1. The nominal thickness shown on the plans (if shown), or
2. The lesser of the actual, average thickness laid or the maximum thickness
allowed by the Specifications.
The mass per unit volume used to determine the total mass shall be as follows:
Mass Per Unit Volume Mix Type

3 3
143 lb/ft (2291 kg/m ) SP3, SP4, SP5
144 lb/ft3 (2307 kg/m 3) SP0, SP1, SP2
145 lb/ft3 (2323 kg/m 3) SPL
146 lb/ft3 (2339 kg/m 3) SPS
The mass of performance graded binder to which the incentive/disincentive payment is to

be applied shall be determined by the formula:
[Concrete mix (mass)] (Percent of Performance Graded Binder) = Mass
Performance Graded Binder
Unless revised by the Materials and Research Division, the percentage of performance
graded binder to be added as shown on the EBM shall be used to compute the
smoothness incentive/disincentive for performance graded binder.
When calculating the pay factor for smoothness (PF), round to the nearest hundredth.
The unit price for the incentives shall be calculated by the formula:
(Pay Factor - 100.00) x Contract Unit Price
100
and entered as a "positive" dollar amount.
The unit price for the disincentives shall be calculated by the formula:
(100.00 - Pay Factor) x Contract Unit Price
100
and entered as a "negative" dollar amount.
252
2002
Be reminded that the incentive/disincentives calculations are based on the bid price for the
asphaltic concrete. Penalties or deductions determined on the Density Pay Factor
summary do not enter into these calculations.
When making the contract modifications to place these items into the system, show
"Spec. Prov." as the authority for the modification. It is also requested that you show pay
factor on the same line; e.g., "Spec. Prov. 101.26%".
Use of Straightedge
Pavement smoothness specification does not relieve contractor of responsibility for proper
rolling and workmanship. Each pavement layer is to be inspected visually to insure that
surface is free of roller marks and distortion. Transverse joints are to be checked with a
3 m (10 foot) straightedge. The tolerance is 3 mm (1/8 inch).
Corrections for surface irregularities shall be made, if possible, before mixture has cooled
to 65.6°C (150°F). A large percentage of irregularities can be corrected by finish rollers
above this temperature.
The inspector operating the surface checking straightedge should also observe the surface
to insure that all roller marks or roller wheel depressions are smoothed out during the finish
rolling. The inspector should observe the longitudinal joints carefully to insure that they
have been smoothly rolled as the Specifications require. If surface is not being finished as
Specifications require, the inspector shall stop construction until contractor takes
corrective action.
STOPPING A BAD OPERATION IS A VALUABLE INSPECTION PROCEDURE.
502.50.2 CHECKING TRANSVERSE JOINTS FOR SMOOTHNESS

SSHC Subsection 503.04 requires the use of a 3 m (10 foot) straightedge for checking
transverse joints for smoothness. The contractor should use a straightedge according to
the following procedure:
1. The first check with the straightedge shall be made before any saw cuts. The
straightedge is used to determine where full thickness of each layer ends and
tapered portion begins. The inspector shall require that saw cut be located in full
thickness of layer. All of the layer extending beyond the saw cut, including tapered
portion, is then removed.
While the joint is being constructed and checked, the contractor should require the
finishing machine to be stopped approximately 10 to 15 m (30 to 50 feet) from the
joint. Construction shall not be permitted to continue until the checking has been
completed. This permits repaving of the joint, with the finishing machine, if the
straightedge indicates a poor riding surface was constructed.
2. The second check with the straightedge is made after the finishing machine has
constructed the new layer, but before rolling. The straightedge is used to locate
irregularities in the newly constructed layer and any irregularities found that must
253
2002
be corrected by hand tools. When the straightedge indicates no high or low spots,
compaction should be permitted with the initial roller.
3. The third check with the straightedge is across the joint between cold pavement
and hot mixture after compacted with initial roller. This third check indicates
whether the correct amount of material has been placed. For instance, if freshly
rolled layer is too high, it indicates too much material has been placed. If freshly
rolled layer is too low, it indicates not enough hot mixture has been placed.
For that reason, high or low transverse joints are not usually corrected by additional
rolling. Instead, corrections should be made by cutting or filling the rolled surface
while the mixture is still warm and can be manipulated. If there are unusually high
or low areas after rolling, paths must be shoveled through the pavement for
finishing machine tracks. Finishing machine is then backed up to the joint and
paving operation is started again.
The above procedure shall be repeated as necessary until the straightedge

indicates that a good riding joint has been constructed. If repeated repaving
operations cause the mixture to cool to the extent that reuse becomes impractical,
it should be removed and wasted.
4. The final procedure for insuring proper construction at transverse joints is checking
for true edge alignment. Edge of the freshly rolled layer should be carefully trimmed
by hand tools until it matches the alignment of adjoining cold pavement.
502.50.3 PERFORMANCE GRADED BINDER
When payment for an asphaltic concrete mixture is based on megagrams, payment will
also be made for performance graded binder as a separate item. Compensation will be
made for all megagrams of asphalt binder incorporated into the construction within
Specification tolerances. (SSHC Subsection 503.05)
Megagrams of performance graded binder paid is not deducted from megagrams of
asphaltic concrete mixture measured for payment.
When small quantities of asphalt binder are involved, the design plan may state that
performance graded binder is considered subsidiary to asphaltic concrete. Check the
special provisions for this reference.
For specific mixes used as patching materials, or in an alternate bid situation, payment
may not be made for performance graded binder.
Tank Measurement and Performance Graded Binder Content Determination
At batch plants, automatic or semi-automatic printouts record the actual mass of
performance graded binder in each separate batch. This quantity may be used for
payment.
Volume measurements will be converted to mass by computation. The amount in storage
at beginning of project will be measured or estimated by inspector and added to
254
2002
amount measured for payment. Asphalt binder remaining in storage at end of project and
amount otherwise not used in the work will be measured or estimated by inspector and
deducted from amount measured for payment.
Measuring Asphalt Binder for Small Quantities
SSHC Section 109 provides that by mutual agreement, the method of measuring asphalt
binder for payment may be modified when small quantities or intermittent operations are
involved.
If a recorded mass is not available, quantity may be calculated from intended asphalt
binder percent with asphalt plant meter results providing further verification. For small
quantities on a given day, the previous day's tank stick may be used as a check.
The project inspector should document procedure selected and reasons for doing so.
Asphalt Binder Quantities and Pay Adjustments
Asphalt binder contract quantities for a project are estimated based on a basic asphalt
binder content identified in the contractor's mix design.
When noncomplying viscosity or penetration tests occur, payment for asphalt binder
incorporated into affected asphalt mixture is subject to price adjustment as prescribed in
the SSHC Subsection 503.06.
PG Binder/RAP – Pay Adjustments
The contractor’s initiative to substitute RAP and correspondingly reduce the amount of
performance graded binder should not be reason to negotiate a higher price for the binder
because it is a major item of work. The Specifications will be modified to add this
safeguard.
Binders from different suppliers should not be mixed.
502.50.4 TARGET VALUES FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PRODUCED
The tolerances specified for asphaltic concrete are provided for reasonable variances only.
Whenever regular and repeated variances from target values occur, the Project Manager
shall insist on quick and corrective action by contractor to secure target values, not simply
within tolerance.
The above comments are addressed to asphalt binder content, aggregate tolerance and
specifically to air voids and VMA values.
502.50.5 MEASURING ASPHALT MATERIALS
SSHC Subsection 503.03 covers equipment and procedures for measuring the mass of
the asphalt materials. When automatic or semi-automatic measurement is used,
continuous direct observation of the measuring process by a scale inspector is not
required. For manual measuring of loaded trucks, Project Manager may assign a scale
inspector. This normally occurs only when accuracy in the measuring procedures is in
question.
When witnessing is required, scale inspector should be positioned near contractor's scale
operator so measuring can be closely observed. Contractor's representative shall write
255
2002
the scale tickets and present them individually to scale inspectors for their signatures or
initials before each truck leaves the plant.
256
2002
Asphalt Curbs
503.00 ASPHALT CURBS
The Roadway Design Engineer has indicated that asphaltic concrete curb with a steeper
than 45-degree face seemed to be a major consideration in a court's ruling. Since a
45-degree face is the design used on present plans, we should not be granting
exceptions for any of our present or future contracts.
A number of contractors have requested permission to construct asphaltic concrete

curbs to a template and/or dimensions which did not conform to that shown in the plans.
You do not have authority to grant such permission on projects.
257
2002
State Maintenance Patching
504.00 STATE MAINTENANCE PATCHING
Asphaltic Concrete for State Maintenance Patching and Performance Graded Binder for
State Maintenance Patching are always nonparticipating items and should be paid for
with State funds only.
The Construction Division, Final Reviewers Office, has seen estimates that were
incorrectly prepared. The estimates do not split these items out from the participating
items. Thus, they are not split out on the progress estimates, either.
Please check your projects to assure that these items are in a "State Funds Only"
Section. If they are not, create a new section and move them using CICS3, Function 21,
Subfunction 4.
Contact Highway Coordinator Finals Supervisor Bill Hitzeman, (402) 479-4456, if you
have any questions.
258
2002
P.E.P. Guidelines
505.00 P.E.P. GUIDELINES
1. NSI must be between 60 and 70 and surfacing doesn't require extensive patching
or base work.
2. Existing pavement must be asphalt, not composite or concrete, because of

reflective cracking.
3. Current truck ADT must be less than 500.
4. P.E.P. candidate location can't already be in the five-year program.
5. P.E.P. is for 7.3 m (24 feet) width only. Any shoulder work, other than fog seal or
armor coat will be charged to the district's regular budget. Existing 7.3 m
(24 feet) top will remain 7.3 m (24 feet) even if standard calls for 8.5 m (28 feet).
6. P.E.P. projects are allowed on segments that have no deficiencies other than
surfacing. If highway segment has other deficiencies, a future project will also be
programmed to correct the deficiencies.
7. A 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) grade raise is acceptable with no shoulder work or guardrail
adjustment.
8. P.E.P. projects with a grade raise of more than 12.5 mm (½ inch) will be the
exception and will require approval of the Deputy Director-Engineering. The cost
of any shoulder work or guardrail adjustment will be charged to the district's
regular budget, if the work is done by the contractor. The district's construction
budget won't be charged if the work is done by maintenance forces.
9. If grade is raised and contractor does the shoulder work, the District Engineer will
determine if dirt is available within the right-of-way.
10. Anything out of the ordinary for a P.E.P. project will be charged to the district's
regular budget and may require more than one year to develop the project.
11. Other considerations for P.E.P. projects:
A. No new mailbox turnouts.
B. No superelevaton corrections.
C. Surfacing will be feathered out at intersections and driveways.
D. P.E.P. projects are considered to be maintenance projects and as such

no ADA work will be done.
259
2002
Millings
506.00 MILLINGS
Millings that are to be used as a base or foundation course shall pass a 38 mm

(1 ½ inch) screen opening.
Each District remains responsible for specifying the disposition of millings.
Specifications and special provisions need to be crystal-clear as to exactly which millings

are available and at what cost.
Pre-letting information should only be released through Frank Brill’s (479-4568) office so
that no relevant bidding information is withheld from any possible bidder.
260
2002
Tack Coats Using Emulsions
507.00 TACK COATS USING EMULSIONS

@
For Dilution
SS-1, SS-1H, CSS-1, and CSS-1H grades are specified. Dilution of emulsion is required
if nonuniform tack applications are experienced. Dilute at 1:1 ratio, i.e.,
1 gallon emulsion to 1 gallon water.
Application Rate for Diluted Emulsion
For diluted material, double the rates of undiluted material application. Example: .03 to
.06 gal/yd2 (0.14 to 0.28 L/m²) undiluted increased to .06 to .12 gal/yd2
(.28 to .56 L/m²) dilute emulsion.
Sample for Compliance

Sample emulsion at spray bar of distributor with bar valve in a circulating position, prior to
dilution.
Measurement for Pay
Net liters of diluted emulsion.
Keep in mind, diluted emulsion as supplied normally contains 60% asphalt residue,
therefore, a 1:1 field diluted emulsion will contain the minimum of 30% residue
(SSHC Subsection 504.03).
Settlement of Diluted Emulsions
Varying residue rates of diluted emulsion may be related to blending of original emulsion
or settlement while in storage. To minimize this problem, the following steps are
recommended:
• Contractor emulsion delivered to storage should be gently circulated prior to
pumping into distributor truck.
• If contractor obtains emulsion directly from terminal, the emulsion should be
gently circulated prior to use each day.
Material in a storage tank can be circulated with a large diameter, slow turning propeller,
or by pumping from top to bottom. Only a small amount of agitation is necessary.
Forced air should not be used for agitation since it may cause the emulsion to
break.
260a
2002
Tack Coats Using Emulsions
260b
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
261
DIVISION 600
PORTLAND CEMENT
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Concrete Pavement Checklists
DIVISION 600
601.00 CONCRETE PAVEMENT CHECKLISTS
601.01 CONCRETE PAVEMENT CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 600 Portland Cement Concrete Pavements

Section 603 Concrete Pavement
Section 1002 Portland Cement Concrete
Section 1010 White Opaque Polyethylene Film and
White Burlap--Polyethylene Sheeting For
Curing Concrete
Section 1011 Burlap For Curing Concrete
Section 1012 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
For Curing Concrete
Section 1014 Joint Sealing Filler
Section 1015 Preformed Joint Filler
Inspection Crew: Placement Inspector

Certified Plant Inspector
Inspection Equipment: Slump Cone

Air Meter (pressure)
Cylinder Molds and Lids
Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
Subgrade Templet
Placement Procedures: 1. Preplacement check of equipment. Verify vibratory,

paver and all other equipment are operational.
2. Check subgrade. Use nuclear density gauge to check
density.
3. Check base or foundation course. Use nuclear density
gauge to check density.
4. Check placement of steel if present.
5. Check Form setting and alignment, if used.
6. Slab thickness and crown should be checked 3 times a
day.
7. Have contractor wet grade before concrete placement.
8. Keep track of time from placement on grade to
machine finishing.
9. Test concrete for air content and make cylinders when
the consistency of the concrete appears different and
as a minimum according to the Sampling Guide.
263
Concrete Pavement Checklists
10. Watch concrete placement for compliance with

specifications.
11. Check machine installation of steel.
12. Should not use water as a finishing aid; approved
chemical finishing aid/evaporation retardants are also
authorized.
13. Check surface with straightedge. Remove depressions
and irregularities.
14. Check tining for conformance to specification.
15. Stamp station numbers in the plastic concrete.
16. Check application of spray curing compound.
17. Inspect prepared joints prior to sealing.
18. Inspect sealed joints.
19. Observe contractor's performance of pavement
smoothness testing.
20. Notify coring crew of placement.
21. Each day prepare DR Form 85, Pavement Laid Report.
22. Reset section corner markers. (See
Subsection 104.03)
Construction Critical Area:

1. Maintain a uniform roll, of about 100 mm, of concrete
ahead of the front screed and a minimum of a 50 mm
roll ahead of the rear screed.
2. Placement of tie bars and key ways.
3. Verify string line is tight and in correct position.
4. Verify layout will place longitudinal joints at correct
locations. (Usually should coincide with lane lines.)
5. Use 3 m (10 foot) straightedge behind paver to check
smoothness.
6. The time the concrete is in the truck and the time it sits
on the grade should not exceed the specifications
limits.
7. Trucks that segregate concrete or have cement balls
must not be used.
8. The timing of cure application and even coverage.
9. Timing of joint sawing.
Safety Areas:
NDR Tests: 1. NDR T 23 Making and Curing concrete test specimens.

2. NDR T 119 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
3. NDR T 141 Sampling of Fresh Concrete.
4. NDR T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
264
Concrete Plant Checklist
601.02 CONCRETE PLANT CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 603 Concrete Pavement

Section 1004 Portland Cement
Section 1005 Water for Concrete
Section 1006 Calcium Chloride
Section 1007 Concrete Admixtures
Section 1008 Fly Ash
Section 1009 Silica Fume
Inspection Crew: Certified Plant Inspector
Inspection Equipment: Large balance or Dunagan buoyancy apparatus (5 kg)
Small balance (2 kg)
Set of gram weights, 2 kilogram weights
Set of coarse aggregate sieves and a set of fine
aggregate sieves
Mechanical shaker
2 burner gas or electric stove
Sampling bags and containers
Slump Cone
Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
Water Bottle
Plant Procedures: 1. Check Plant Certification Checklist before production
begins. This may be accompanied with a check of the
equipment.
2. Check cement, fly ash, and admixture certifications and
if approved; before production begins and when new
materials arrive.
3. Check aggregate piles for segregation and
contamination. (SSHC Subsection 1033.03)
4. Take materials samples as required by the Sampling
Guide and specifications.
5. Test materials as required by the Sampling Guide and
specifications.
6. Each day check the batching operation as needed.
7. Collect Proportioning Reports daily.
8. Check truck ticket for correct volume as necessary.
9. Send copies of Proportioning Report to Concrete
Materials Section of the Materials and Research
Division daily. Keep truck tickets in project file.
265
Concrete Plant Checklist
Construction Critical Areas: 1. Cementitious material bins must be watertight and

prevent contamination.
2. Coarse aggregate stockpiles must be watered.
3. Admixtures need to be protected from freezing.
4. Delivery trucks need to be checked for wash water
before batching each load of concrete.
Safety Areas:

5. NDR T 27 sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
6. NDR T 248 Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to
Testing Size
7. NDR T 506 Determination of the Free Moisture Content
of Aggregates
8. NDR T 504 Determination of Clay Lumps, Shale, and
Soft Particles in Coarse Aggregate and of Clay Lumps
in Fine Aggregate and Sand and Gravel Aggregates
9. NDR T 255 Total Moisture Content of Aggregates by
Drying
266
Concrete Pavement Repair Checklist
601.03 CONCRETE PAVEMENT REPAIR CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 600 Portland Cement Concrete Pavements

Section 605 Concrete Pavement Repair
Section 1012 Liquid Membrane-forming Compound
For Curing Concrete
Section 1013 Bituminous Liquid Compound For
Curing Concrete
Inspection Crew: Pavement inspector

Certified Plant Inspector

Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
Subgrade Templet
Water Bottle
Patching Procedures: 1. Mark areas of pavement removal.

2. Preplacement check of the equipment.
3. Check subgrade.
4. Check base or foundation course.
5. Check placement of steel.
6. Check Form setting and alignment, if used.
7. Have contractor wet grade before concrete placement.
8. Test concrete for air content and make cylinders when
the consistency of the concrete appears different and
as a minimum according to the Sampling Guide.
specifications.
10. Should not use water as a finishing aid; an approved
chemical finishing aid/evaporation retardants are also
authorized.
12. Watch curing operation for conformance to
specifications.
13. Keep track of ambient temperature during curing
period.
Construction Critical Area: 1. Specified mixing is required to insure uniform

dispersion of admixtures.
267
Concrete Pavement Repair Checklist
2. Proper cure procedures are critical to insure the early

strength is achieved.
Safety Areas:

268
Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Pavement
602.00 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT (SSHC Section 603)
602.10 DESCRIPTION
Concrete pavement is a surface course composed of portland cement concrete. It may be

constructed on a prepared subgrade, a stabilized fill or a granular foundation course.
The production of high quality concrete pavement requires a very close control of all phases
of the work. The Project Manager and inspectors assigned to concrete pavement projects
should become thoroughly familiar with the construction details outlined in
SSHC Subsection 105.13, Division 600, and the material details given in Sections 1002 to
1027.
The essentials to observe in this type of pavement construction are:
1. Accurate proportioning of aggregate and cement.
2. Absolute control of the water and admixture content of the mix.
3. Prevention of segregation in the concrete.
4. Adequate amount and proper spacing of finishing equipment to handle the production
of the mixer or mixers.
5. Properly trained equipment operators and finishers.
6. Proper curing.
7. Timely sawing of joints.
269
2002
602.20 PCC PAVEMENT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

602.201 Composition of Concrete (SSHC Section 1002)
The plans or special provisions may offer the contractor a choice of various classes of
concrete. SSHC Section 1002 lists the classes of concrete used in Nebraska road
construction. If a choice is allowed, the contractor is required to advise the Project Manager of
the class of concrete to be used. This notification must be given prior to construction. The
Materials and Research Division should be consulted in regard to problems of concrete
composition. Table 1002.02 shows authorized mix proportions for the classes of concrete.
Material Inspection - The production of a high quality concrete requires careful control over
concrete materials at the batch plant. The inspector must be prompt and accurate to insure
quality concrete.
SSHC Sections 601, 602, and 603 contains requirements for concrete pavement
construction. The Project Manager and inspectors must familiarize themselves with these
requirements and insist that materials be tested and approved before being incorporated in the
work. The frequency of sampling, testing or submitting of material samples to the Central
Laboratory and the procedures to be followed are covered by the Materials & Research
Materials Sampling Guide.
Field Testing Laboratory - SSHC Subsection 105.03 requires the contractor to furnish a field
laboratory building meeting certain specific requirements for the type required in the contract.
The project manager should document compliance for the laboratory's condition in the Field
Book and notify contractor of any problems.
Admixtures - SSHC Section 1002 states that "only admixtures authorized by the contract
documents will be permitted for use in portland cement concrete". Since the various
materials constituting admixtures can have a profound effect on the characteristics of the
hardened concrete, extreme caution is justified. (See SSHC Section 1007 for more
information on admixtures.)
602.202 Concrete Strength
Currently, four test cylinders are to be fabricated for each placement (generally four cylinders
are required for each lot of concrete). These test cylinders are then tested at ages of 7, 10,
14, and 28 days.
If the 7-day cylinder tests 3500 psi (25 MPa) or above, the 10 and 14-day cylinders need not
@ be tested and can be discarded. If the 7-day cylinder should test less than 3500 psi (25 Mpa),
the 10 and 14-day cylinders must be retained and the above policy applied to the 10-day
cylinder. In any case, the 28-day cylinder must be retained and tested.
@ A 5th cylinder is required if the contractor wants an early break.
602.203 Concrete Sampling Locations
Concrete samples shall be collected from at least three different portions of a batch after it is
discharged, whether mixed on site or central mixed. Sample location point shall be after
plastic concrete has been placed on the grade, either by direct depositing from a batch truck
or by use of a placer/spreader machine. On slipform paving projects, optimum sample
location is between placer/spreader and slipform paver machines. Care should be taken to
avoid sampling concrete that has been vibrated manually or mechanically. Samples should
be taken at locations within the batch that appear to be representative.
270
2002
602.204 Testing Procedures
When making test specimens, sample should consist of about 0.03 cubic meters (1 ft3) and
should be remixed a minimum amount by use of a shovel to ensure uniformity. For routine air
and slump tests, smaller samples may be used.
602.205 Air Entrainment in Plastic Concrete
SSHC Table 1002.02 shows the required percent of entrained air needed in concrete paving
mixes.
Newer, heavier slipform paving equipment can sometimes cause an entrained air loss greater
than 1.5% due to their higher consolidation capabilities. If a contractor is consistently running
near the usual minimum specified 5% entrained air content, the contractor should be advised
to increase amount of air entraining agent that is supplied to the mix at the paving plant. The
increased amount of entrained air added at plant should provide 6% air in the finished,
consolidated concrete.
602.206 Ready Mix Concrete (See National Ready Mixed Concrete, Quality Control Manual)
Each truck load of concrete for a paving project must be identified by plant ticket.
Required Information:
• The ticket must show plant name, contractor, project number, date, quantity, class,
and time batched. Complete information regarding water in materials, water added,
and total allowable water need only be shown at beginning of each run, and each time
thereafter when moisture content changes or plant adjustments in mixing water are
made.
Any water added to the mix must be documented. Moisture tests must be made frequently to
insure uniformity in concrete consistency.
602.207 Concrete Discharge Times
To insure that quality concrete is incorporated into pavement maximum discharge times have
been included in SSHC Subsection 1002.03 for both continuous agitation (agitator trucks) and
non-agitated trucks (dump trucks).
These discharge times should be verified at least once during each day of normal paving.
These verifications should be recorded in project field books. During hot, dry, windy weather,
maximum time limitations listed in specifications are critical limits set to insure that quality
concrete is being placed and incorporated into project.
The nomograph in SSHC Figure 710.01 can be used as a guide to determine what is the
current evaporation rate.
271
602.208 Miscellaneous Material Requirements
Concrete with a low air content shall not be incorporated into work. Only one addition of air
entraining admixture is allowed at the site. (See SSHC Subsection 1007.03)
Concrete with a high air content should not be incorporated into work except under extreme
circumstances. If low compressive strengths result, the concrete may be required to be
removed and replaced.
The Materials Sampling Guide requires that the pink copy of the DR Form 22, Certificate of
Compliance, or a copy of the mills own certification form be mailed to the Materials &
Research Division. These are required in order for us to determine the quantity of cement
which was used when additional estimates are processed.
The certificate of compliance is needed both for mills that require sampling and those that do
not. When a sample is required, normal procedure has been to submit the pink copy with the
sample. This is acceptable. For those mills which do not require sampling, please collect
and submit the certifications on a routine basis but at a minimum of once each week.
272
PCC Pavement Equipment
602.30 PCC PAVEMENT EQUIPMENT (SSHC Subsection 601.02)
602.031 General
All equipment to be used on the project should be thoroughly inspected and measuring
equipment should be carefully calibrated before the start of production. All calibration data
should be recorded in plant notebooks. These notes should include a description of each
piece of equipment such as make, model number, etc.
Repeated breakdown of a piece of paving equipment is sufficient reason to suspend paving

operations until the machine is repaired and brought into proper operating condition or
replaced. (SSHC Subsection 105.01)
602.032 Batching Equipment
Batching equipment should be in compliance with the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association (NRMCA) Quality Control Manual - Section 3 - Plant Certification. (See
602.303 Cement Bulk Handling Equipment
The principal concern with regard to handling cement is moisture. Contact between cement
and water prior to entering the mixer must be positively prevented.
602.304 Scales
Scales shall be in compliance with National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, Quality
Control Manual, Section 3, Plant Certification.
602.305 Concrete Mixers
General - Equipment for handling and mixing concrete shall conform to the requirements of
SSHC Sections 601, 603, and 1002.
The inspector should be familiar with the mixing drum, water meter, timing device, and AEA
dispenser. Check the inside of the drums for worn pick-up or throw-over blades. The
contractor is required to provide information making it possible to check the wear accurately.
The blades should not be worn more than 10 percent of the original height. Check the
capacity plate for size of batch and manufacturer's recommendation for speed of rotation of
the mixing drum.
The mixer must be equipped with a timing device which locks the discharge lever in the
closed position until the end of the full mixing time. Set the timing device for the specified
mixing time after all materials are in the drum. After paving operations begin, the mixing time
should be checked with the mixer operating under load. The door of the timing box shall be
kept closed and locked except during repair or adjustment.
Water Measuring Devices - The water tank should be inspected and the accuracy of the
gauge checked. Using a 200 L (50 gallon) drum and a platform scale furnished by the
contractor, the tank should be calibrated for each gauge setting through the operating range.
The measuring device shall have an accuracy of 1.0 percent of the metered volume.
273
Make at least two trials for each setting of the dial to insure consistency in the measuring
device. Record the calibration in the inspector's notebook. Check the valves to see that no
water dribbles into the mixer drum when the tank is shut off.
Admixture Dispensers - When an admixture is to be added to the mix it should be arranged to

enter the drum with the mixing water. The volume graduations on the AEA dispenser should
be checked by measuring the amount released at each setting and the results recorded. The
amount dispensed should be accurate within 3 percent of the quantity specified for each
batch.
Mixer Performance Tests - A decrease in mixing time can be made under certain conditions,
including the use of interlocked automatic batching. The basis for permissible reduction of
mixing time is the contractor's mixer performance test.
Specific sampling and testing procedures, equipment list and method of reporting are included
under the Materials & Research Materials Sampling Guide.
602.306 Hauling Equipment (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
May be one of two different types, depending on the setup at the plant:
1. Trucks which have drums or containers (dump trucks) in which central mixed
concrete is delivered to the project. (30 minute limit till discharged.)
2. Trucks which have a concrete mixer mounted on the truck bed to provide
complete mixing of concrete ingredients after they have been batched or
blended at the central mixing plant. (90-minute limit till discharged.)
Trucks and Mixers - Each vehicle shall have a metal plate attached and listing:
1. Designed use.
2. Concrete capacity
3. Rotation (RPMs) of the mixing drum or blades.
Mixers and agitators shall be operated within the limits of capacity and speed of rotation
designed by the manufacturer of the equipment. When used as a mixer, it is important for the
inspector to make sure that the equipment is not loaded beyond its capacity. Blade wear
should be checked against the manufacturer’s design. Blade height should be at least 90
percent of original height. There should be no appreciable accumulation of hardened
concrete. Control and measurement of water added should be clearly inspected. Revolution
counters should be checked.
274
602.307 Subgrade Trimmer (SSHC Subsection 302.03)
Check the setting of the cutting blades to secure the exact subgrade crown and elevation.
The subgrade trimmer, if used, should operate at least 90 m to 150 m (300 to 500 feet) ahead
of the concrete placement operation. Usually, the segment that is to be paved will be trimmed
at least one day prior to concrete being placed on the job.
602.308 Concrete Spreader (SSHC Subsection 601.02)
The spreader or mechanical strike-off must be self-propelled and equipped with:
1. A power-driven spreading device.
2. An adjustable strike-off blade capable of striking off the concrete at any required
elevation within the forms. This requirement anticipates the construction of
reinforced concrete pavement in two courses. The strike-off should be
adjusted so that some concrete will be carried in front of the blade.
3. Vibrators, either internal or surface type, capable of consolidating the pavement
to its full width and depth. These should be checked for frequency of vibration
with a contractor supplied tachometer.
602.309 Finishing Equipment
SSHC Subsection 601.02 provides for use of various types of concrete pavement finishing
machines. Mainline paving is intended to be placed with a finishing machine designed for
concrete paving. Approval may be given for alternate types of finishing equipment based on
satisfactory field performance. Should a new machine be brought on the job and contractor's
staff are not experienced with its operation, a qualified manufacturer's representative should
be present until equipment is in proper adjustment and functioning as intended.
Equipment normally associated and approved for hand methods shall not be substituted for a
finishing machine on mainline paving. Bridge deck finishing machines are not approved for
placement of standard paving when a finishing machine is required, due to their lack of
adequate consolidation equipment.
The finishing machine must be self-propelled and equipped with:
1. Two independently operating screeds constructed with end wings to prevent
concrete spillage over the forms.
2. A pan-type finisher-float for each paving train.
If the screeds are the conventional reciprocating type which ride on the forms, check the end
shoes for a worn surface. A poor slab surface with a valley along the form will result from
worn end shoes.
A crown check of the screeds and pan-type finisher-float should be made by the contractor
and in the presence of the inspector or project manager before the start of paving operation.
To check the crown, raise the screed or float and stretch a 20-gauge piano wire or strong fish
line across the bottom about 25 mm (1 inch) from the front face. Place a similar wire about
25 mm (1 inch) from the back face. Lower the screed or float down to the forms or to
275
hardwood blocks and check the distance from the wire to the screed or float surface at every
300 mm (12 inches) across the roadway. The crown elevation at centerline on the back
screed and float should be set about 3 mm (1/8 inch) high to allow for subsidence and
shrinkage during setting of the concrete. This 3 mm (1/8 inch) may then be worked out to a
normal crown in the 1.5 m (5 feet) each side of centerline. The front screed should be set
slightly higher than the back so that concrete will be available for manipulation by the back
screed.
SSHC Subsection 601.02 provides that all spreading and finishing equipment in the paving
train shall be equipped with scrapers or be constructed in such a manner as to keep the top of
the paving form free of concrete.
602.3010 Slip Form Paving Equipment
Requirements are given in SSHC Subsections 601.02 and 603.03. The principal
requirements is that the equipment be "capable of spreading, consolidating, striking off,
shaping and float finishing the freshly placed concrete to the desired line, grade, and thickness
in one continuous passage in such a manner that a minimum of finishing by hand methods
will be required". This is a performance specification and the approval of the equipment
depends on the end result on the current project or an earlier project. Appropriate equipment
to provide internal vibration is very important. Automated electronically controlled subgrade
machines are also required. The subgrade equipment must perform "in conjunction" with a
taut reference line erected and maintained by the contractor.
602.3011 Saws Used on New Pavement & Unbonded PCC Overlays
SSHC Subsection 603.03, Paragraph 7 says sawing may begin when the contractor can
accomplish the sawing without causing the concrete to ravel.
Sawing equipment heavier than 905 kg (2000 lb) will not be allowed on pavement with less
than 18 hours age regardless of pavement thickness. Span saws with a mass of 3620 kg
(8000 lb) or greater are not to be used on pavements of 175 mm or less design thickness
without approval of the Project Manager and Construction Division. Span saws can be utilized
on pavements greater than 175 mm (7 inches) design thickness after pavement has a
minimum age of 18 hours.
The contractor shall provide sufficient sawing equipment to produce the sawing schedule
required in the specifications or special provisions. Standby saws should be provided. If the
sawing schedule is not maintained, uncontrolled cracking of the slab will occur.
602.3012 Miscellaneous Equipment
Master Straightedge - The contractor is required to furnish and keep in a convenient
place a master straightedge, made of 150 mm (6 inches) steel channel at least 3 m
(10 feet) in length for the purpose of checking the straightedges at any time during
the progress of the work. A sufficient number of straightedges shall be kept in readiness so
as not to delay the paving operations.
Water Supply Equipment - Check over the water supply equipment with the contractor's
superintendent. Be sure that it is adequate. After the pavement is placed curing takes
precedence over all other uses of water.
276
Forms - Forms shall be of metal and of a depth equal to the edge thickness of the pavement.
Visually inspect the forms. Forms which are bent enough to produce uneven alignment or a
poor riding surface should not be used until straightened. Flexible metal or wood forms should
be used on curves having a radii of less than 30.0 m (100 feet). See SSHC Subsection
603.03.
602.3013 Accumulation of Materials in Transporting Vehicles
The contractor should periodically clean and flush all transporting equipment such as transit
mixers, agitators, and wet batch trucks, to prevent accumulation of hardened concrete in
compartment. This also includes central plant mixing equipment. Frequent inspection of
transporting vehicles and hoppers should help assure prevention of accumulation and build-up
of hardened concrete.
277
PCC Pavement Preconcreting Conference
602.40 PCC PAVEMENT PRECONCRETING CONFERENCE (SSHC

Subsection 1002.03)
On all projects involving PCC pavement, the Project Manager and inspectors should meet
with appropriate contractor and supplier personnel to discuss concrete production and
pavement placement quality issues before any materials are placed. When ready mix
concrete is used, the ready mix producer should also attend.
For the various types of work, the following items should be covered:
• Approvals and required quantities of aggregate and cement, class of mix, time and
rate of delivery, percent of air, slump, batch weights, volume per truck, total quantity
required, preparation of delivery tickets, testing arrangements, procedures in case of
load rejection (air can be increased), responsibility for setting batch weights and
amount of admixtures, placing, finishing and curing arrangements, and personnel
work assignments.
• Adverse (cold or hot) weather plan of action.
• Settings and condition of paving equipment, dust control, subgrade treatment,

procedure for checking steel placement, utility and street return box outs, heading-up
equipment, joint sawing and cleaning, joint sealing, rain damage prevention, and cold
weather protection.
Only one preconcreting conference is considered necessary for thoroughly discussing the
work and responsibilities and duties of all involved in the project. On small projects it may be
possible to include a preconcreting conference with preconstruction conference.
602.401 PCC Daily Report of Pavement Laid (DR Form 85)
The daily inspection report on paving work is a record of the construction progress, working
conditions, weather, etc. during paving and plant operations which may affect pavement
quality. This report keeps the central offices advised on job status and serves as a detailed
permanent record of the paving project. At the end of each day on which any pavement was
placed, this report is to be completed by field inspection staff for appropriate distribution.
The Daily Pavement Laid Report must accurately reflect the type of cement used.
278
PCC Pavement Construction Methods
602.50 PCC PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION METHODS
602.501 Subgrade General
Make sure that the grade is always drained. There should be no areas where water can pool.
602.502 Preparation of Subgrade
Compaction Requirements - The subgrade compaction requirements will be shown in the

plans. When a granular foundation course is not to be constructed, the upper 150 mm
(6 inches) of subgrade shall be compacted to at least 900 mm (3 feet) beyond the edge of the
proposed pavement and this should be shown in the Plans. The crown and elevation of the
subgrade will be established by means of trimming, as described in
Subgrade Cross Sections - After completion of the Subgrade preparation items, cross-
sections should be taken and recorded on a data collector.
602.503 Foundation Course
Construction Requirements - Foundation course, when required in the plans, is to be

constructed according to SSHC Section 307.
Protection of Foundation Course - The contractor should be advised that the protection of the
foundation course from rainwater is one of the most important features connected with
concrete pavement. Ahead of the placing operation, holes should be opened beneath the
pavement forms to drain the water off the subgrade. Trenches should also be cut through any
shoulder dirt outside the form line to carry the water away. In case of rain, such precautions
will protect the foundation course and earth subgrade from standing water and may prevent
saturation of the material.
Behind the finisher, protection of the foundation course beneath the previously laid slab is even
more critical. During rains, water running off the pavement works under the bottom edge of
the slab and washes out the foundation course. Even on very slight grades the force of the
water soon becomes strong enough to wash out the entire depth of the foundation course
from beneath the edge of the pavement. This may be in a strip of variable width, and may
amount to as much as 1 m (3 feet).
To prevent this damage to the foundation course, the contractor may push an earth windrow
against the edge of the slab sometime after the curing compound has been applied. Washing
away of the foundation course is not usually a problem on slab which still have the side forms
in place. However, it will occur on steeper grades unless the water is diverted over the
shoulder by dikes at frequent intervals.
Immediately after any rain, inspect the foundation course along the slab edges.
Cross Sections and Thickness Measurements - Cross Sections should be taken on the
completed subgrade and later, on the completed foundation course.
Thickness measurements should be made at the time of testing for density.
279
602.504 Grades on Drives in Cities
An attempt is made to standardize grades for residential drives constructed in conjunction

with urban paving projects. Standardization reduces property owner complaints about their
cars dragging when using their drives. A special design will be shown on plans for
commercial drives such as filling station drives. The Design Office uses a standard design
detail for driveways as well as a typical automobile template to check driveway cross
sections.
If field conditions necessitate a change in driveway grades, vehicle clearances should be

checked using typical automobile template dimensions. This can be accomplished by using a
scale model template to check plotted grades for new driveways. Keep in mind that there are
exceptions to all rules and there may be cases when more clearance may be required than
indicated by template. In critical locations it may be necessary to contact the Roadway
Design Division for help in determining a revised driveway design.
602.505 Protection of Pavement (SSHC Subsection 601.02)
Wheels of finishing equipment operating on previously placed pavement shall be rubber faced.
Track propelled equipment should be equipped with rubber protective pads on crawler tracks
or tracks shall travel on cushions of wood or belting. The near edge of wheels or tracks shall
not be closer than 75 mm (3 inches) from edge of pavement. Provisions must also be made
to prevent the screed from damaging the edge of existing pavement surface.
602.506 Operating Finishing Equipment on Previously Placed Concrete in
Multiple-Lane Construction (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
Concrete pavement finishing equipment may be permitted to travel on an adjacent lane 7 days
after finishing when concrete has attained cylinder break compression strength of 25 MPa
(3500 psi) or after 14 days.
602.507 Surface Cleaning

When placing a lane adjacent to completed pavement any spillage or flow of concrete slurry
on the surface of existing pavement must be broomed off prior to hardening. This helps
prevent the transverse groove from being filled with concrete which would reduce the
effectiveness of the texture.
602.508 Material Inspections
SSHC Subsection 603.04 explains how materials for concrete pavement shall be measured.
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA), Quality Control Manual, explains how
batching shall be conducted so as to result in the mass of each material required within a
tolerance of one percent for cement and two percent for aggregates. The following is a
discussion of measuring and handling concrete materials as set forth in SSHC Section 1002
and the NRMCA Quality Control Manual.
Stockpiles - It is the contractor's responsibility to avoid harmful contamination, segregation or
excessive degradation in placing or removing aggregates from the stockpile. Although the
specifications do not specify the methods to be used by the contractor in stockpiling
aggregates, the Project Manager should be aware of the method to be used and should
280
alert the contractor when chosen methods may produce unsatisfactory results. All
aggregates are to be stockpiled separately. (SSHC Section 1033)
If a bulkhead is used in separating the individual aggregates it should be high enough to

prevent intermingling of the aggregates. Aggregates which become intermixed shall not be
used. Building a stockpile properly in horizontal layers tends to reduce the tendency to
segregate. If the material is being dropped form a considerable height, the stacker should be
equipped with a rock ladder or tremie to reduce the falling impact and prevent segregation. A
brisk wind blowing through the falling aggregates will deposit the fines on the lee side of the
pile while the larger particles remain on the opposite side. It is the contractor's responsibility
to provide the specified gradation of the aggregate entering the mix. When crawler tractors
are used on gravel stockpiles, the contractor must clean all caked dirt and mud from the track
ways and from beneath the machine before running it on the pile. Crawler equipped dozers or
end loaders must not be allowed to damage aggregates in the stockpiling areas.
If the aggregates are hauled to the project in railroad cars, burlap and boards used to chink
cracks in these cars become mixed with the material. A grizzly with a maximum of 150 mm
(6 inches) square openings should be placed on top of the aggregate bins to catch foreign
material previously missed. They should be cleaned at least twice daily to prevent forcing the
foreign material through the grizzly openings and into the batch.
602.509 Batching Inspections
General - The importance of proper batching inspection cannot be over-emphasized since

proper proportioning of materials is one of the major steps in obtaining a satisfactory
pavement. The plant inspector and his/her assistant carry out the inspection at the batching
plant. The following items should be closely inspected during the progress of the work:
1. Be familiar with the physical characteristics of aggregates, design mix proportions, the
method of determining batch quantities, scales operation, yield, effective water,
cement factor and the procedure for adjusting proportions and yield when using air
entrainment.
2. Calibration of scales and measuring devices, and the systematic and regular checking
of scale settings for batches to assure proper quantities are being dispensed. (Scale
settings are not to be made by the inspector since this is the contractor's
responsibility.) The NRMCA, Quality Control Manual, Section 3, Plant Certification,
outlines the steps required of the contractor in calibrating the scales and checking their
sensitivities.
3. Sampling and testing is as indicated by the Materials & Research Materials Sampling
Guide.
4. Water of doubtful quality must be tested and accepted prior to incorporating in the mix.
The intake end of the pipe or hose used in pumping mixing water from a stream or
standing body of water should be covered with wire mesh and located so that no
foreign matter will enter. Hauling of mixing water should be done in clean, covered
containers. Assurance of using acceptable water is the responsibility of the plant
inspector for central or ready mixing and the responsibility of the slab inspector for on-
the-job mixing.
281
5. Some scale bins do not always empty themselves after each batching cycle. The
inspector should check the cement and aggregate bins for cleaning frequently at the
beginning of the job. If the cement becomes packed in the corners of the scale bin, the
correct mass will be shown on the scale but something less than the full mass will
actually reach the batch. This condition can be corrected by rounding out such dead
areas in the bin design or by means of vibrators attached to the bin sides.
6. When changing scale weights for batch correction in the aggregates, be sure that the
set screws, holding the counterweights in position on the beam arms, are firmly
tightened with pliers by the operators. Constant vibration around the plant tends to
move these weights, causing an incorrect amount of aggregate to enter the batch.
7. If rain comes at any time while the aggregate bins are loaded, the water will collect in
the material at the bottom of the bins. Two or three truckloads of each size aggregate
should be taken from the bins and hauled back into the stockpiles before batching
begins. When this is not done, the moisture content of the first few batches will be
excessive and sloppy concrete will result at the mixer. Many contractors allow the bins
to empty at the end of the day for the above reason.
8. All working parts, particularly the knife edges, should be in good condition, free from
friction, readily accessible for inspection and cleaning, and protected from falling or
adhering material. Dash pots should be clean, regularly inspected and filled, and free
from friction. Elements of the lever system must not rub against other elements or
framework of the plant. All nuts that might work loose in operation should be protected
by locking devices. The scale container and closing devices should be tight against
leakage and the plant should be carefully leveled and on a firm foundation.
9. At least once each shift the scale should be checked by halting the measuring cycle
with a normally measured batch in the scale hopper and noting the precise scale
reading. The addition of four standard 25 kg (50 lb) weights to the hopper should result
in an exact indication of an additional 100 kg (200 lb) on the scale dial or beam
balance. Erratic measurement due to binding scales can be detected in this manner.
10. Require that central-mixed concrete be hauled in vehicles meeting specification

requirements and in a manner to avoid segregation and be delivered at the site with
proper consistency and workability before the concrete starts to take its initial set.
Require agitating type trucks if batch is to be held in trucks more than 30 minutes.
11. When the yield is found to vary considerably for no apparent reason, check accuracy
of the scale. In addition to the methods of checking described above a quick method is
to measure a loaded and tared batch truck on platform scales. Erratic measurement
due to binding scales can also be detected in this manner.
282
602.5010 Cement Hauling Inspections
The inspector will observe the measurement of all batches and see that the beams balance
after the discharge of each batch. If a springless, dial-type scale is used, the pointer must
return to zero.
The inspector must also keep a complete, accurate record of all cement received, used and
wasted. This record will be used to determine the cement factor being obtained and to verify
the correct proportions of cement to aggregates. The record is kept in the "cement notebook"
and should consist of:
A complete index
Scale calibration record
Daily cement record
Cement car record
The cement car record consists of statistical information concerning every car of cement
used on the project. The railroad net mass of each car may be obtained from the freight office
or from the contractor's freight bills. The remainder of the information is a record of the use of
the cement on the project.
The cement used at the plant shall be checked against the cement required by the total
number of batches or cubic meters mixed. These checks are to be made during the progress
of the work in accordance with the procedures outlined herein. The first or initial check of
cement used against the cement required should be made at or near the close of the first or
second full day's paving operation, and at least before unloading the 11th carload of cement.
The initial and successive cement checks should be made between carloads and with
cement silo and storage or service bins completely empty.
If the initial check shows that less than 99 percent of required cement was used, the
calibration and operation of all measurement and proportioning equipment, and the
proportioning of aggregates and cement should be immediately and thoroughly checked. A
second "empty bin" check of cement used should then be made at or near the close of the
first or second full day's paving operation following and before unloading the 11th carload of
cement used after the initial check.
If the initial check or succeeding checks of cement used show more than 99 percent but less
than 100 percent of required cement used, a succeeding "empty bin" check shall be made at
or near the close of a day's paving operations or not later than the 50th carload of cement
used after the previous check, whichever involves the greater quantity of cement. The
contractor can make "empty bin" cement checks at more frequent intervals if he/she so
desires and our Project Managers should lend their full cooperation in making such checks.
It is realized that in the case of paving projects obtaining concrete proportioned at commercial
ready-mixed plants, it is usually impossible to make accurate, "empty bin" checks of the
cement used. Accordingly, it is extremely important that the project manager and the paving
plant inspector make certain that the inspection of the measuring and proportioning is full time
and fully adequate; that the scales measuring the aggregates and cement are accurate; and
that the procedures are conducted in a careful and precise manner so as to insure the correct
proportioning of aggregates and cement.
283
In the inspection of the cement measuring operations at either commercial ready-mixed

concrete plants or proportioning plants, the Project Manager and the plant inspector should
make certain that air pressure in the cement delivery and storage system is not affecting the
cement scale and cement measuring operation. It has been found that in certain proportioning
plants, if the service bin and the scale hopper for cement are not adequately vented, air
pressure buildup in the scale hopper will cause some under measurement of the cement.
This can be positively checked by introducing cement into the hopper until the scale indicates
the correct amount for a batch and then hold up the operation with the scale fully loaded for a
short period of time -- sufficient to void any air pressure in the cement weighing hopper. If the
cement scale is functioning properly, the scale beam and dial indicator will remain stable. If
air pressure is affecting the measuring operation, the cement scale beam and dial indicator
will indicate a decreased mass of cement as the air pressure dissipates. It is important that
this item be checked periodically on all proportioning plants using air pressure to transfer or
move cement within the plant.
Checking the Interlocked Automatic Batching Controls
1. During regular batching operations, compare the dial reading at cut off with the cut off
settings.
2. During a measuring cycle with the plant in automatic operation ask the operator to
move the control lever from charge position to discharge position. If the discharge
gates open before the weighing cycle is complete, the system is not functioning in a
proper manner.
3. During the discharge cycle, before the discharge gate is closed, place or suspend
25 kg (50 lb) on the hopper. If the discharge gate can be closed and the bin gates
opened automatically at the end of the discharge cycle, with the 25 kg (50 lb) mass still
in place, the interlock system is not functioning properly.
4. During a normal batching cycle, ask the operator to set one bin gate for manual
control, closing it early so that less than normal mass is drawn from that bin. Then
ask the operator to return to operation by automatic control, with the light mass batch
in the hopper. If the discharge gate opens, the controls are not functioning properly.
Repeat this operation with the bin gates for each of the ingredients of the batch.
602.5011 Mixing and Hauling

Methods - Several combinations of methods for mixing and hauling of concrete for pavement
construction can be used:
Since the procedures to be used by the contractor may vary, the Project Manager on each
project should assign definite division of responsibility to the plant inspector and the slab
inspector before paving operations are started.
Inspection - The following paragraphs include important mixing and hauling inspections:
1. Check the time on the mixer at least twice daily.
2. Check for uniformity of batch consistency. Non-uniformity may be caused by any of
the following:
284
a. Leaky mixer valves. Indications of this condition are wet batches when mixed
for periods longer than the normal interval.
b. Double pulling of water valve. Watch the mixer man for correction of this
condition.
c. Moisture change in the aggregate. Loader operator may be dipping into

aggregate stockpile which has not drained sufficiently.
d. Empty AEA supply container or partially clogged supply tube to mixer drum.
Another indication of the failure of the AEA supply is free water on the finished
slab. The plant foreman should be made responsible for delegating a reliable
man to fill the AEA supply tank each day or as often as necessary. A leaking
valve on the AEA dispenser will also cause trouble, producing a batch with too
much slump and too high an air content.
3. Wash water in transit-mix trucks, if being used, should be completely discharged.
Quality concrete work is dependent on the uniform consistency of the concrete mixture
being used and will only result when good control of the water-cement ratio is
maintained. Our specifications do permit the use of wash water as a portion of the
mixing water when accurately measured and taken into account in determining the
quantity of water to be added. However, it is very difficult, if not impossible, to
accurately measure wash water remaining in the drum, and this procedure should
always be discouraged.
4. Mixing is controlled either by a specified time, or number of revolutions at a specified
revolutions per minute. Regardless of the method used for controlling proper mixing, it
shall begin after all ingredients are in the mixer, including water. Close cooperation is
required between plant and road inspectors to assure proper mixing time or number of
revolution is being observed and that concrete is placed within the designated time
limit.
5. Truck mixers should be checked to assure that there is no leakage from the water tank
into the mixer.
6. Concrete, when it leaves the chute of a truck mixer or truck agitator, tends to
segregate. Segregation can be corrected by providing a baffle at the end of the chute
to cause the concrete to drop vertically.
7. A satisfactory method of extending the actual haul in transit-mix operations is to add
the cement, not at the batching plant, but a point closer to the work. During the haul
between the batching plant and the point at which the cement is added the mixer
should not be revolving as otherwise the aggregate would be subjected to
unnecessary grinding action.
8. The specifications provide that the truck mixer or agitator shall be capable of delivering
and discharging the concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform condition. According
to ASTM, concrete that has not been thoroughly mixed will have a slump test value that
differs by more than 50 mm (2 inches) when taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4
discharge points.
285
9. SSHC Subsection 1002.03 requires the contractor to have a procedure to issue a

ticket to the driver of each load of concrete delivered to the project. In addition to the
requirements shown in the specifications, the concrete ticket handling procedure shall
include the following:
a. The concrete ticket for the first load of concrete each day will indicate the
number of liters of water that can be added without exceeding the maximum
specified. The maximum number of liters will be indicated on subsequent
tickets as changes occur.
b. Any additional water added to the mixer, at the site of work, will be recorded in
liters on the ticket by the driver. If additional mixing water is required, a
minimum of 20 revolutions of the truck mixer drum at mixing speed shall be
required before discharge of any concrete.
10. Truck mixers shall be randomly checked against ASTM C 94. The concrete shall be
mixed for not less than 50 nor more than 100 revolutions at mixing speed. It is further
required that additional mixing in excess of 100 revolutions be at agitating speed and
the change from mixing to agitating speed shall be done by the truck mixer operator at
an intermediate station established at a point along the route by the Project Manager.
Random checks are to be made often enough to assure compliance, and in general
should consist of from one to four checks daily based on the quantity of concrete
produced. These random checks shall include the following:
a. Plant inspection personnel shall check the zero setting of the revolution counter
after charging of batch and the proper drum mixing speed.
b. Placement inspection personnel shall check the number of revolutions
recorded on the counter for compliance with the specifications.
c. The random checks shall be recorded in the field notebooks.
11. The temperature controls in SSHC Section 1002 should be strictly enforced.
12. Regardless of whether concrete is mixed in site mixers, stationary mixers, or truck
mixers it is the responsibility of the slab inspector to assure that it is properly mixed
and meets the requirements in regard to slump, air content, uniformity, and desired
workability when delivered to the subgrade. Wet and dry batches should be avoided
and the slump held to within very narrow limits, normally not exceeding 12.5 mm
(1/2 inch) variation.
13. The schedule of delivery of ready-mixed concrete is sometimes a problem due to the
long haul and the interference of other commercial traffic. The Project Manager should
check this matter carefully with the contractor's superintendent. Sufficient hauling
units should be provided to assure a minimum time lag between the arrival of batches
at the site of the work. In no case should this be longer than 30 minutes.
14. The two main faults with truck mixers and agitators is their inability to discharge low
slump concrete and their tendency to hold back too much of the coarse aggregate until
the last few cubic feet of the batch are discharged. Nothing can be done about the first
of these faults, the second can be partially corrected by depositing the last increment
of the batch at a point where it can be mixed into other concrete.
286
15. Haul time and stand-by time frequently has an adverse effect on the consistency of
truck-mixed or truck-agitated concrete. The batch becomes progressively stiffer as
the time increases. The rate of stiffening is affected by the characteristics of the
cement and aggregates, and by temperature. The 1 1/2 hours maximum mixing and
agitating time allowed in SSHC Subsection 1002.04 shall be reduced if undue
stiffening is apparent. The stiffening process may be reversed by adding extra water
either at the start or at the point of delivery. In either case the end result is the same, a
higher water-cement ratio and lower quality concrete. Caution should be used in
employing this method of retarding stiffening, and in no case should the total amount of
the water per batch exceed the total allowed by the specifications.
16. In transit-mixed concrete, the inspector should examine the batch for cement balls.
These usually are the result of the method of charging the water. If sufficient water,
about 40 percent, enters the drum ahead of the aggregates and cement, cement balls
will not usually occur. Most of the remainder of the water should enter with the cement
and aggregates and the mixer should be rotating during the charging period.
17. When discharging transit mixers at the site of the work, the rate of discharge should be
regulated by the speed of rotation of the drum and not by the size of the discharge
opening.
18. Truck mixers shall be examined periodically for accumulation of hardened concrete.
Any truck mixers showing such accretions or excessively worn pickup and mixing
blade shall not be used.
602.5012 Forms (Usually small paved areas.) (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
Form Setting - After the foundation course has been properly compacted, the forms may be
set. If the foundation course is low along the form line, additional material shall be placed and
compacted before setting the forms in place. Forms shall be tamped mechanically. Form
pins shall be long enough to penetrate the earth grade below the foundation course a sufficient
depth to hold the form rigidly in place. If the project is in town, or in curb sections where
drainage is a factor, form elevations should be checked with an instrument after the forms are
set and tamped.
Form Alignment Ahead of Paver - All forms should be inspected for alignment, elevation and
adequacy of tamping immediately ahead of the paver. This should be done far enough in
advance to allow for correction of high and low joints or additional tamping if necessary. A
smooth form line is an important factor in the riding quality of the finished pavement and
should always be checked before placing concrete between the forms. Forms should be oiled
to prevent sticking to the concrete.
Check forms as necessary to verify they have not settled.
Form Removal - Forms should not be removed sooner than 12 hours after concrete has
been placed. Care is to be exercised in this operation to see that the edges of the slab are not
broken or otherwise damaged. The sides of the pavement slab should be covered with the
curing compound within 30 minutes after removal of the forms.
287
602.5013 Placing Reinforcing Steel (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
Steel reinforcing bars and dowel bars are required to be supported by metal chairs or units of
approved design. It is the contractor's responsibility to get approval prior to construction of
dowel baskets of a type not shown in the plans or described in the special provisions.
The specifications allow machine placement of the longitudinal deformed tie bars in lieu of
being supported by metal chairs. The machine must be self-loading with a reasonable tie bar
storage space and be capable of placing the tie bars at the spacing shown in the plans. It
must be located in the paving train so as to place tie bars prior to the placement of the wire
mesh on reinforced concrete pavement, or prior to the passage of the first finishing machine
on non-reinforced concrete pavement.
602.5014 Tie-Bar Steel Inspection (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
All paving contractors should place joint tie steel according to details in the plans. The
following tie-bar steel inspection procedures will be required on all portland cement concrete
paving projects where centerline or lane line tie-bar steel is either manually or mechanically
placed in plastic concrete:
• Manually check location and depth of tie-bar steel in the plastic concrete behind
slipform paver each day.
• Using a magnetic locator (pin finder), verify location of tie-bar steel in hardened
concrete every day.
To insure compliance with proper joint design parameters, use the following minimum
frequencies when checking rebar location:
• Once in morning and once in afternoon for tangent roadway sections check the
location.
• In at least three locations within all horizontal curve sections. These locations
generally would be at the beginning transition, in the middle of the curve, and at the
ending transition.
• For each inspection, at least two tie-bar steel locations within a panel should be
checked.
• Checks of any area with out-of-tolerance tie-bar steel should be expanded so that
extent of problem area is identified for retrofit correction. These areas should be
determined on hardened concrete.
The checked areas of hardened concrete should not overlap previously checked plastic
concrete areas.
Project inspector should document tie-bar steel inspection results in field book.
Minimum placement tolerances are as follows:
• Depth: D/2+25 mm, -37 mm (D/2 + 1 inch, - 1.5 inch).
288
• Angle: Minor variations to 1.6 radians not critical as long as at least an effective length
of 300 mm (12 inches) of tie-bar steel extends across joint.
• Lateral position, number of bars shall be as shown in the plans.
• Joint deficiencies in lateral position and number should be evaluated by the

If previously mentioned inspection procedures discover out-of-tolerance tie-bar steel, the

contractor has the following options to remedy the problem:
• Contractor may substitute a longer bar to better ensure an adequate length across
joint.
• Contractor may place additional uniformly spaced bars across joint.
• Contractor may move the bar inserter uphill on the paver.
602.5015 Inlet and Utility Accesses
Inlet standards show a portion of slab, or a portion of curb and gutter unit blocked out at the
time of construction which is to be filled in later when the inlets are built. Since the inlets are
usually sublet by paving contractor, the question of including this insert section as a part of the
inlet has been brought up frequently.
When computing the quantity of pavement, designers consider all concrete work between the
curb edges of pavement.
No deduction is made for insert sections which are blocked out and then formed when the
inlet is built. These insert sections are blocked out to facilitate construction of inlet. Other
areas of pavement or curb and gutter may be blocked out to prevent slowdowns of the paving
crew because of special shaping requirements. Insert sections and areas requiring special
shaping will be paid for as part of the pavement or curb and gutter quantities.
602.5016 Box-Outs for Utility Accesses

Standard Road Plans provide for boxing out utility accesses in pavement. Clearance of the
manhole ring below pavement grade shall generally be 6 mm (1/4 inch). Care must be taken
during paving process to avoid disturbance of the ring. The concrete roll in front of the screed
as it passes over the ring should be removed and used to pack around the ring. This should
prevent movement.
Box-out for utility accesses occurring in the form line should be three-sided with the end
sections at 60 degrees with form and center section parallel with form. All three sides should
be about 300 mm (12 inches) from the upper edge of the ring.
The ring should be set to the required grade and concreted-in when an adjacent slab is being
placed. Special procedures may be necessary when incorporating some old utility accesses
into new pavement as to whether a box-out is used or not. Particular attention should be paid
if bearing support of the old structure is questionable.
289
602.5017 Box-Outs on Slip-Form Paving
Contractors when slip-forming urban projects sometimes fill the inside area of box-outs for
utility accesses and intakes with soil. This is to help keep the forms from moving and reduce
the volume of concrete mix that is wasted during passage of paver over box-outs.
In some cases, the box-out is filled to a greater height than forms and soil becomes
intermixed with concrete as paver passes over these areas. This results in contaminated mix
being incorporated in pavement. To insure that the concrete mix will not be contaminated, the
height of the fill inside box-out area should be 75 mm (3 inches) or more below top of the
forms or a sheet of plywood may be placed over opening of box-out areas.
602.5018 Placing and Spreading (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
General - The slab inspector normally has the responsibility for inspecting the placement and
spreading of the plastic concrete in such a manner as to provide a structurally sound
pavement with smooth riding qualities and to see that this work and the finishing is
accomplished as required by the contract documents.
The paver, truck mixer or truck agitator should distribute the concrete evenly on the subgrade
without displacement of reinforcing steel or joint material. Concrete dumped in piles can
cause roughness. Do not overload one side of the spreader as the extra weight on one side
of the machine may cause it to displace the forms. Centerline tie bars shall be placed
carefully so that the centerline splits the bar. When expansion joints are encountered,
concrete should be banked around both sides of all joint material by hand prior to spreading
near the joint with the machine. The slab inspector shall see that none of the dowel
assemblies or joint material is displaced during the placing and vibrating of the concrete.
The quantity of concrete used should be checked by comparing the number of batches used
with the number of cubic meters required. These checks should be made at shutdown, mid-
shift breaks and at other points providing a distinct check on batches used and such checks
should be entered in the DR Form 85 "slab report". If measurements (such as subgrade,
form settlement, slab thickness, and crown measurements) indicate the possibility of thin
pavement, checks on the concrete quantities used should be made more often. When the
pavement is placed in two layers, concrete quantity checks are difficult to make. However,
using a little forethought and exercising good judgment, a fairly accurate check can be made
without "evening up".
Batch volume underruns may be due to any of the following reasons and should be
investigated immediately:
1. High subgrade
2. Form settlement
3. Low crown
4. Excess mass from aggregate scale operator
5. Wrong scale setting or slipping of counter weight at aggregate scale
290
Slab thickness and crown checks should be performed a minimum of three times each day.
The slab thickness check shall be made by placing a thin piece of plywood or other suitable
material of approximately 200 x 200 mm (8” x 8”) size at existing subgrade or foundation
course level at three points along the transverse section, such as at the two one-quarter
points and at centerline. After the finishing machine has passed over the selected location the
thickness of the slab shall be measured at the three predetermined points. Crown checks
shall be made directly back of finishing machine by the use of a taut line over blocks placed on
the edge of the slab. The blocks should be of the same thickness as the height of the crown.
The line should be drawn taut and lowered to the blocks and then moved back and forth in a
sawing action. If the crown is correct, the taut line will leave a mark of approximately 0.5 to
1 m (18 to 36 inches) in length at the center of the slab. Generally, the contractor makes
similar checks and these checks can be made in conjunction with his/her checking. All
checks are to be made a matter of record in a field notebook.
602.5019 Slip-Form Construction (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
The pavement may be constructed by means of slip-form equipment conforming to the

requirements of the Standard Specifications. Conventional methods of construction shall be
used on irregular or variable width sections which are not adaptable to slip-form construction.
Any provisions of the specifications requiring the use of equipment riding on forms will not be
applicable when slip-form construction is used.
The adequacy of the finished pavement constructed by the slip-form method is highly
dependent upon a sequence of correct methods, equipment and inspection procedures. In
order that the essential events occur in their proper order, the inspectors shall carry out their
assignments with diligence. The paver is equipped with side forms to support the concrete
laterally for a sufficient length of time during placement to produce pavement of the required
cross section.
Smooth pavement begins with a uniformly stable subgrade and foundation course which have
been constructed, trimmed and maintained at true line and grade during the time prior to the
passage of the slip-form paver. These courses shall be constructed to conform to the typical
cross sections shown on the plans and of sufficient width to include the trackways for the
subgrade machine or machines and the slip-form paver.
Vigilant inspection is required of all construction operations to insure that they are in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Various factors essential to
production of sound, smooth and durable slip-form pavement are listed below:
1. Use of aggregates meeting specified requirements for quality and gradation.
2. Accurate determination of batch proportions with adjustments for determined
moisture content of aggregate.
3. Use of minimum quantity of mixing water required to produce a plastic,
workable concrete mix of uniform consistency and specified slump.
4. Introduction of air into mix within the prescribed limits.
5. Thorough mixing for required length of time.
291
6. Proper placing and consolidation of the concrete.
7. Correct placement of steel reinforcement and dowel joint assemblies.
8. Strict compliance with required curing methods.
9. Timely sawing of transverse contraction joints.
10. Restriction of loads on pavement until it has gained the required strength.
Control of line and grade for both the subgrade and foundation course work is accomplished
by using a reference line set from the offset hub line. It is supported and tensioned to prevent
any measurable sag or transverse movement. The machines have sensors which use the
reference line for alignment and automatic grade control. The use of these automatic controls
is analogous to the form line in the conventional method. The maintenance of the cross-
section of the subgrade or foundation course to the plan elevation, controls the thickness of
the finished pavement. Once the subgrade or foundation course has been completed to plan
requirements of line, grade and density, it is extremely important that it be protected,
particularly the tracking path area, until the passage of the slip-form paver.
The concrete is delivered to the paver in any conventional manner. When possible, keep
concrete trucks off the subgrade. The fresh concrete is deposited on the subgrade, by
uniform distribution of batches, just ahead of the paver. The uniform distribution of the batches
is very important in slip-form paving. For the purpose of metering the correct amount of
concrete for the full paving width to the main screed, pavers of this type are normally equipped
with an initial strike-off blade provided with power travel fore and aft independent of the forward
travel of the paver. Some pavers are equipped with augers which effectively meter the fresh
concrete to the main screed. The forward speed of the paver shall be adjusted to the average
progress of the concrete production and delivery in order that operations shall be as
continuous and uninterrupted as possible.
Because of physical limitations as to the mass of the machine and of the relatively large
screed area, the importance of using concrete of proper consistency and uniform distribution
is extremely critical. Large piles of concrete or dry batches will cause the paver to "float" or lift
above the true grade and result in a high area or bump. Wet batches cause low spots and
edge slump and irregularity.
The concrete, for the full paving width, shall be effectively consolidated by internal vibration
with transverse vibrating units of a series of longitudinal vibrating units. The paver extrusion
plate or screed shall extrude the concrete under load, properly shaping and compacting the
concrete into a dense, stable mass to assure that the concrete remains stable, with a
minimum amount of slumping after the passage of the paver. Some pavers may have more
than one device for the screeding operation.
When the pavement is being constructed by slip-form method, all reinforcing steel shall be
placed in accordance with SSHC Subsection 603.03, Paragraph 4. In some instances two
slip-form pavers may be required in tandem in order to comply with the requirements.
292
The finishing and curing shall be in accordance with SSHC Subsection 603.03, Paragraphs 5
and 6. The requirements for surface texturing and curing may be accomplished by
accessories mounted on the self-propelled float finisher.
602.5020 Surface Finishing
General - The traveling public judges your pavement job by its riding qualities. Careful
inspection of the finishing operation will assure a surface which will receive public approval.
The intention of the specifications is that manipulation of the concrete during finishing should
be held to a minimum. Overworking tends to bring water to the top. This is detrimental to the
wearing surface and to the strength of the concrete. Hand finishing, unless allowed by the
special provisions, can be used only in cases of emergency on normal width pavement or on
narrow or variable width sections where mechanical methods are impractical.
Machine Finishing (SSHC Subsection 601.02) - The minimum requirement of mechanical
finishing equipment prescribed by the specifications is:
1. Self-propelled concrete spreader
2. Self-propelled finishing machine equipped with a pan-type finisher-float
On high production pavement projects [over 45 m (150 feet)] of pavement per hour or when
more than one concrete mixer is used), an additional finishing-machine without the pan-type
finisher-float is recommended. The goal of this paving train is to adjust the forward speed of
the final finishing machine (equipped with the pan-type finisher-float) to the concrete
production, so as to provide an uninterrupted strike-off operation. The combination float-
finisher is designed for a one-pass operation. Concrete should be accurately metered to this
machine. The spreader of the auxiliary finisher (if required) should leave enough concrete for
a uniform roll of approximately 100 mm (4 inches) for the front screed. This screed in-turn
should be tilted enough to allow 50 to 75 mm (2 to 3 inches) roll for the rear screed. The
pavement surface is then trimmed to the desired grade and crown by the rear screed. The
pan float will normally be set almost flat longitudinally with the roadway and should just make
contact with the pavement surface.
Transitions - Some pavements are designed with a tangent crown, which shall be removed
gradually for superelevated curves. The distance in which the crown is to be removed will be
shown on the standard or special plans. This will require adjustments on both the spreader
and the finish machine or machines. The operation of this equipment should be synchronized
so that the same amount of crown is being removed, or replaced, by each machine at any
given point in the transition.
The transverse finishers in use usually have a single adjustment point at one end of the
screeds and pan float which permits running the crown in and out on superelevated curve
transitions.
The distance in which the crown is removed is not critical and may be increased or decreased
over the distance given on the standard plan, if the Project Manager determines a change is
beneficial. The crown is removed in the transition distance in equal increments. The number
of increments to be used should be divided into the transition distance to obtain the length
between each crown change. Set a stake in the shoulder along the form line at
293
each of these points, where it will be visible to the machine operators. The pavement foreman
should delegate experienced personnel to "crank out" the crown on the screeds and float.
Straightedging (SSHC Subsection 603.03) - After completion of the mechanical finishing and
while the concrete is still plastic, laitance and surplus water shall be removed and the surface
shall be made true and smooth with approved 3 m (10 foot) straightedges supplemented by
such floating as is necessary to eliminate all depressions and irregularities. Straightedges
shall be set parallel to centerline and shall be lapped 1/2 their length in each successive
position. High areas shall be removed and depressions shall be filled with fresh concrete and
consolidated by floating with approved hand floats. Straightedge testing shall be continued as
necessary until all irregularities have been found to be satisfactorily corrected. Straightedges
should be checked against the master straightedge at least twice daily. When using slip form
construction, straightedging will generally only be required at the beginning and ending of the
daily placement. (Also see SSHC Section 602.)
At longitudinal contraction joints along old pavement or companion lanes, care must be taken
to prevent the newly finished surface overhanging the top of the adjacent slab. This can be
accomplished by the flat finishers "dragging off" the excess concrete with a straightedge
pulled longitudinally along the joint after the initial subsidence of the fresh concrete. This
"pushing up" of the fresh concrete against the previously laid slab is especially noticeable
when the crown elevation of the fresh concrete is higher than that of the lane already in place.
(This also channels water into the joint and shall be avoided.) If this is not corrected, it will be
very annoying to traffic when changing lanes and may even become a traffic hazard. Edgers
must not depress this joint. Competent workmen shall be detailed to the finishing and edging
of this part of the work.
Drag Finish - The surface of the pavement shall be given a final finish by means of a wet
burlap, carpet or canvas drawn in the longitudinal direction. The drag should be of sufficient
width so that the entire slab can be textured in one operation. It is required to be supported
from a mandrel which is often attached to the rear of the belting machine or the self-propelled
float finisher when slip forming.
Expansion joints, if any, should be edged at this time taking care to remove all concrete from
the top of the joint leaving a full 25 mm (1 inch) wide opening. Workmen should be cautioned
not to bear down on edgers as this will depress the concrete and leave a rough joint. Edger
marks at the joints and the edge of the slab should be removed with a small piece of wet
burlap, leaving the surface with a uniform texture and appearance. Straightedge all joints after
edging.
602.5021 Use of Water in Finishing Concrete
SSHC Subsection 603.03 does not allow concrete finishers to apply water to surface of
pavement to aid in finishing of concrete except limited amounts with an orchard sprayer. Any
additional water added to surface of fresh concrete increases water/cement ratio of mortar
and adversely affects air content. This results in a less durable matrix and concrete surface
is more prone to early scaling and general surface deterioration.
Chemical finishing aids and evaporation retarders may be approved by the Project Manager.
294
Should a voided surface occur during finishing and finishers experience difficulty in closing an
open pavement surface, fresh mix or mortar should be obtained from in front of paving train
and added to surface to facilitate finishing and produce a tight, closed pavement surface.
602.5022 Tining (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
The plans indicate those pavements that shall receive tining.
Tining impressions are made in plastic concrete while grooves are made once concrete has
hardened.
The Department has changed tining requirements. Mainline pavement will now be
@
longitudinally tined instead of transversely tined. Transverse tining shall be done with a rake,
not a bull float. Ramps and other irregular areas that cannot be properly tined longitudinally
shall be transverse tined.
Mainline pavement tined surface longitudinally is the primary goal to reduce noise levels.
@
Proper timing is critical. Longitudinal or transverse tining of the surface too early may result in
@ grooves filling up with mortar or surface tearing. Tining too late results in a reduced groove
depth.
To obtain a uniform transversely grooved pavement inspector should check the following
items:
• Texture machine operating properly and all control devices functioning correctly.
• Pad line maintained in smooth and stable condition.
@ • Tining rake carrier rails set to pavement crown, so uniform down pressure on tines
maintained as comb sweeps down across the slab.
• Four springs attached to carrier frame and to broom channel with a tension adjusting
chain are identical and adjusted to obtain proper groove depth.
• Tines of comb parallel. A bent tine, which narrows spacing at tips, undercuts adjoining
groove.
• No build up of dry mortar near tips of tines. A build up of mortar widens groove at
surface and may cause tearing or displacement of larger aggregate particles.
• Steel tines not worn and comb in good condition, to ensure sufficient groove depth.
@ Should an unsatisfactory tined surface result for any reason, stop the paving operation and do
not allow resumption until the problem is corrected.
295
2002
Tine Determination
Depth of the grooves may be determined by using a standard commercial tire tread depth
gauge, but normally a visual inspection without measurements is adequate.
Guidelines for Tining Concrete Pavement
@ 1. Tine mainline pavement longitudinally.
2. Ramps and small irregular areas can be transverse tined with a tining rake.
3. Tine all concrete pavements where posted speed limit will be 40 mph or greater.
When a mainline is tined, include tining in intersections, acceleration lanes,
deceleration lanes, left-turn lanes and ramps.
4. Do not tine concrete shoulders.
5. On pavement built without curb, stop tining 6 inches (150 mm) from edge of pavement
(for edge of pavement painted line.)
6. On pavement built with curb, stop tining 2 feet (600 mm) from back of curb.
602.5023 Pavement Depression
A pavement depression prevents proper drainage of slab during periods of rain and may
cause maintenance problems during the winter. This may be due to one or more of the
following reasons:
• Screed not set correctly
• Poor workmanship by finishers in manipulating straightedge
• Improper tension between ends of trailing forms
• Improper adjustment of edges attached to trailing forms
Check this deficiency by placing a 10 ft (3 m) straightedge or 4 ft (1.2 m) carpenters level
@ transversely on pavement surface and noting trueness of surface with bottom of straightedge.
602.5024 Pavement Station Stamping
Station location of all PCC pavement shall be stamped in plastic concrete at every station
@
(100 ft/100 m) by the NDR inspector.
Permanent Station Numbers - Each station number shall be marked permanently in the
surface of the concrete slab by the use of metal dies furnished by the department. The
numbers should be stamped neatly in the concrete just before it takes its initial set. They
@ should be placed about 6 inches (150 mm) in from the right-hand edge of the slab so that they
can be read from the right roadway shoulder.
296
2002
On interstate concrete pavement, station numbers should be stamped on the outside edge of
both roadways (sides: away from the median). These numbers will also be 150 mm
(6 inches) in from the slab edge and facing so that they can be read from the outside asphalt
shoulder. Placement of station numbers on all ramps, loops, "S" roads, etc., should be made
in conformity with the first paragraph of this section.
On concrete slabs having integral curbs, the location of station numbers will vary between
projects according to desires of parties most likely to use them in the future. The city engineer
and/or District Engineer should be consulted on this matter prior to construction.
602.5025 Integral Curb Placement
Integral curb may be placed simultaneously with the pavement placement, directly behind the
pavement finishing operation, or at some later date. When placed directly behind the finishing
operation, the specifications require placement within 30 minutes from the time of placement
of the pavement and that the curb be placed on a roughened surface. Both of these
requirements are important to insure an adequate bond to the slab. If the integral curb is to be
placed at a later date, reinforcing steel, as indicated in the plans, shall be placed during the
construction of the slab.
Two important items to note during the inspection of constructing curb is proper consolidation
of the concrete and configuration of the finished curb. Proper consolidation will eliminate voids
on the backside. Should voids be present they are to be filled with a mortar, immediately if
slip-form methods are being used or in the case of forms immediately upon removal of the
forms. Configuration should be checked for conformance with dimensions shown in the
plans. If hand methods are being used a "mule" type float of the proper configuration should
be used in the construction of the curb.
602.5026 Protection and Curing
The slab inspector in charge of curing should study the requirements for the method proposed
for use by the contractor. If the method of cure involves the use of "blanket-type" coverings,
these should be inspected and sampled, if necessary, prior to pavement production.
Impervious coating material proposed for use must be tested before use. Although its
application rate will not be less than 0.3 L/m² (1.5 gal/22 yd2) for tine/surfaces and 0.2 L/m²
(1.0 gal/22 yd2) for all other finishes, the rate of application may be increased depending on
the moisture retention qualities of the impervious coating.
One method of curing is the use of "wet burlap and impervious coatings". When this method
is used, the initial curing with wet burlap is very important as it prevents evaporation of the
mixing water at the time when hydration is most rapid. The wet burlap should be applied as
soon as the fingertips can be gently touched to the concrete without becoming sticky. If hair
checking develops during hot weather, the wet burlap should be applied immediately behind
the finishing operations. Hair checks are much more objectionable than burlap marks. If the
burlap is applied with care, and with the seams up, burlap marks will be held to a minimum.
Water for curing takes priority over all other pavement operations. Impervious coatings are
then applied after the first 20 hours of initial curing. The testing laboratory will test each lot of
impervious materials received and will designate the quantity per square yard to be applied. A
daily record of the liters used and the amount applied per square meter shall be kept in the
slab inspector's notebook. It will be the inspector's duty to see that the coating materials are
applied uniformly and in an amount at least equal to the
297
amount designated by the laboratory. The vertical edges of the slab shall be coated with the
same quantity per square meter as the surface. Keep the material from coating any joint
areas to which joint-sealing filler is to be applied.
When curing with burlap, at times keeping the burlap in place and continuously in a dampened
condition is an endless task. However, since proper curing is essential to good quality in the
concrete, the curing requirements for the particular work should be reviewed and discussed
with the contractor. It is the responsibility of the Project Manager to ensure that the contractor
carries out the curing requirements as specified.
Prior to start of paving operations the inspector should be assured that the contractor has
sufficient material on hand, such as burlap, polyethylene sheeting or other approved material,
to properly protect the pavement surface in case of rain. Sudden showers which might occur
during paving operations or immediately after finishing operations require the exposed surface
of the fresh concrete to be covered to prevent washing cement from the surface. Mixing and
placing of concrete should cease immediately in the event of rain.
When hot dry and windy conditions prevail, the application or placement of curing material
becomes extremely important.
602.5027 Joints (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
Joints are sawed in PCC pavements to eliminate random cracking and to provide areas for
pavement to expand and contract. These control joints are then cleaned and sealed with
various types of sealants to keep out water and incompressibles such as soil, sand, and
gravel.
Transverse Construction Joints - The header board used to form the construction joint at the
end of the day's run should be cut from 50 mm (2 inch) material and approximately 37.5 mm
(1 ½ inch) shorter than the width of the pavement. Holes bored in the board to receive the
load transfer dowels should be at least 6 mm (1/4 inch) larger in diameter than the dowel bars.
When due to breakdowns, construction joints are necessary during the day, and work is
resumed after a short delay, great care must be used in removing the header board from the
green concrete. Any pressure or lift on the dowel bars will break the bond with concrete and
cause the joint to spall at some future date.
Generally, header boards should be set 3 mm (1/8 inch) below normal crown at centerline.
Observe the straightedging of the header joint the next morning and adjust the setting of the
next header board, accordingly. When paving down steep grades (4 to 6 percent), set the
header board 6 mm (1/4 inch) below crown elevation. When paving up steep grades, set the
board exactly to crown elevation. Boards should be set at right angles to the pavement grade
with dowel bars parallel to the subgrade.
Concrete pavement failures on the "morning" side of transverse construction joints have
sometimes been noted. This is normally caused by unconsolidated concrete. Machine
vibration should be observed at this point and if not considered adequate, hand vibrations for a
few feet out from the header should be required.
Dowel bars on all joints shall be greased as shown in the plans.
Transverse Expansion Joints - The joint materials should be set at right angles to the
pavement grade with dowel bars parallel to the subgrade and to the centerline of the
298
pavement. Tilted or skewed dowels will "blow up" the joint at some future date when the
pavement expands. The joint material must touch the subgrade throughout its entire length
and there should be no gaps between the mastic sections. Concrete plugs form in such gaps
and defeat the purpose of the joint. Make certain that the expansion tubes are not driven on
past the stop lugs or the joint will fail to function. The 25 mm (1 inch) temporary filler between
the ends of the expansion material and the side form should be removed before placing the
hot-poured joint material. If the temporary filler is composed of unyielding material, it should
be removed the day after the pavement is poured to prevent spalling the corners of the
concrete slab when the pavement expands.
The strike bar on the spreader and the screeds of the finishing machine should be raised
slightly when making their trip over the joint. Machines pushing a heavy roll of concrete tend to
tilt the mastic, and shovelers should be employed to transfer such rolls across the joint. The
inspector shall check all joints for position behind the finishing machine by inserting a thin
wood stake about 0.8 m (30 inches) long in the concrete alongside and in contact with the joint
material. If the stake contacts the joint material all the way to the subgrade and appears to be
plumb, the joint will function properly. Tilted joints should be dug out and reset.
Contraction Joints - The specifications provide that plane of weakness joints shall be sawed.
Great care and attention should be given to the planning of sawing joints. Sawing at the wrong
time or sawing along side of a crack already formed can be the cause of extensive
maintenance work. The cutting of transverse-control joints to relieve early shrinkage stresses
may be necessary depending on the type of slab, the atmosphere conditions and the amount
of shrinkage inherent in the concrete. No exact time can be given as to when sawing of
transverse-control joints should start, and it will be necessary to prepare a sawing sequence
for each project.
The plans should be carefully checked to determine the location and depth of sawing required.
Usually the specified depth of cut is different for transverse and longitudinal joints. The depth
of cut should be checked as soon as possible so that the contractor may seal the joints.
On Reinforced Concrete Pavement, with transverse contraction joints at 14.17 m (46.5 ft), it
probably won't be necessary to cut control joints except in very hot weather periods. It is
recommended that on the first day of concrete paving, sawing of the transverse joints begin
as soon as possible without excessive raveling or tearing. The time at which this sawing
should start may vary from 6 hours on warm days to 20 hours in cold, cloudy weather.
Sawing of these joints should continue progressively at the plan spacing until concrete is
encountered that is so green that it cannot be sawed without tearing. Some slight raveling of
the concrete must be expected. If a sharp edge joint is being obtained, it is quite likely that the
concrete may have hardened sufficiently to result in uncontrolled cracking. This would
indicate that sawing should be earlier or control joints should be made.
The first joint following the previous day's construction joint should always be sawed as a
control joint. The older concrete will place sufficient stress on the newly placed concrete to
produce an uncontrolled crack near the header if a plane of weakness is not provided at this
point.
SSHC Subsection 603.03, Paragraph 7 should be thoroughly reviewed and understood by
both the inspector and contractor. Transverse joints near cracks developing before sawing
should be skipped, the crack routed and filled with joint material. Sawing shall be
299
discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the saw. If a joint is sawed where a crack
exists or develops during sawing, the sawed joint or portion considered to not be the working
joint shall be cleaned and epoxied.
In the multilane pavement, for the companion lanes, those joints that are open and working
should be sawed as control joints. Volume change stresses from the initial lane are
transmitted through the tie bars and edge friction to the second lane. A matching plane of
weakness must be sawed in the second lane to prevent formation of an uncontrolled crack.
Uncontrolled cracks in the initial lane must be matched with a control joint in the companion
lane. In laying out joints, blocks of concrete should always be 3 m (10 feet) or more in length.
Instances have been noted where the depth of the sawed joint through the curb section was
insufficient on concrete pavement construction requiring integral curb. The depth through the
curb section is variable and is to be sawed as shown on the plans. This should be brought to
the attention of the contractor and your assigned inspector.
Longitudinal Joints - The time for sawing the longitudinal center joint is not critical. The
concrete shall have hardened sufficiently to permit the sawing of a sharp-edged, clean cut
joint.
Sealing Joints
As concrete cures, moisture moves to the surface. Therefore, concrete should be cured
seven days or more before sealants are applied. Insure that sealant manufacturer’s
procedures are followed. Check for moisture in the joint before the sealant is applied.
Hot Poured Sealants
All joints required to be sealed shall be filled immediately after they have been cleaned and
dried, and checked for proper depth. A hot poured joint sealer must be applied with the use of
a pressure-type applicator equipped with a nozzle which will fit into the sawed groove. How
full the joint is to be filled should be discussed with the District Construction Engineer.
However, placement of joint sealer should be done in a neat, workmanlike manner striving to
eliminate any smearing of sealer on the pavement.
The Project Manager should obtain the manufacturers recommendations for temperature
control of the joint sealer, and frequent measurements of the actual temperatures should be
made to insure compliance with those recommendations.
If curing compound is applied on a slab with open joints the contractor should lay a rope or belt
along the length of the joint to exclude the cure from the opening. If curing compound has
been permitted to enter a joint, the contractor should be required to resaw the joint.
All joints to be sealed shall be cleaned with a jet of compressed air, flushed out with water
under high pressure and diked before pouring the joint sealing filler.
We have experienced some problems in the past regarding hot pour joint sealer and white
pigmented curing compound. The problem stems from the fact that the manufacturer is
supplying his/her distributor, or the contractor, with a certificate of compliance staring that the
material meets Nebraska Department of Roads' specifications as well as the applicable
300
ASTM and AASHTO specifications. In one instance, the certification also stated the material
to be pretested. However, this has since been corrected by the manufacturer.
We want to emphasize that if hot pour joint sealer is from tested and approved stock, this
material can then be used upon delivery to the project. The lot number will appear on the NDR
Approved Products List for approved stock. The Materials and Research Division should be
notified as to the lot numbers and quantity delivered. If the lot number is not on the NDR
Approved Products List, then the joint sealer must be tested and approved before it is used.
We do not accept joint sealer by certificate of compliance or by a Project Manager's
certification, unless this is the rubber modified asphalt compound consisting of an asphalt
cement containing a minimum of 22 percent of new or reclaimed, synthetic or natural rubber.
This material is accepted by a certificate of compliance furnished by the supplier per the
Special Provisions.
The foregoing instructions concerning tested and approved stock also applies to cold poured
joint sealer, preformed joint filler, and pressure relief joint filler.
White Pigmented Curing Compound
White pigmented curing compound that is approved for use is shown on the Approved
Products List. The Materials and Research Division should be advised as to the quantity and
lot numbers involved. Reports will then be issued to the project. Curing compound not from
tested stock must be sampled and tested prior to being used. We do not accept curing
compounds by certificate of compliance or Project Manager's certification.
Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type (SSHC Section 1016)
The construction procedures in SSHC Subsection 603.03, Paragraph 7 are quite detailed and
close adherence to these instructions is important to insure the proper performance of the
seals. Important points to emphasize in this type of construction follow:
1. Installation should result in less than 5 percent elongation of the performed
seal.
2. Sawed joint dimensions should be of correct size - neither too large nor too
small.
3. Sawed joints should be inspected closely for cleanliness at the time of
installation.
4. Spalls should be repaired as indicated in the specifications.
5. Certification as indicated in Specification Subsection 1016 should be in the
Project Manager's files before installation.
6. Excessive adhesive has been known to accumulate on the top of the seal,
preventing proper expansion of the seal.
7. Hot dry weather can produce a condition of premature set to the adhesive and
this can be the cause of seal popping.
8. The seals be placed at the specified depth. If placed too high, attrition will take
its toll.
301
Silicone Sealants (SSHC Section 1014)
Silicone sealants shall meet requirements in SSHC Section 1014 and shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.
Mastic Sealants (SSHC Section 1014)
Mastic sealants are considered as temporary sealants and their composition is not tested.
The contractor must submit a letter from the manufacturer certifying materials comply with
AASHTO M 213 requirements for nonextruding and resilient bituminous, filter type, preformed
joint filler or AASHTO M 33 for bituminous type (asphalt type) preformed joint filler.
Cleaning Joints
The Project Manager must ensure adequate inspection of joint cleaning operations prior to
sealing. SSHC Subsection 603.03 discusses proper method of cleaning joints.
In order for the joint sealant materials to adhere properly to joint edge, joint edges need to be
properly cleaned. All recemented sawing residue from the initial saw cut operation must be
removed immediately after cut is made. If these joint faces are not properly cleaned, sealer
will prematurely fail. This will start deterioration of pavement and will eventually result in
spalled or faulted pavement due to water intrusion into joint.
The sandblast wand should have a means to positively guide the nozzle along actual joint line.
This is to insure that sandblast passage does not miss any of the joint face. This can be seen
when sandblast nozzle passage shows as a wavy line on the pavement surface.
Air compressors shall have suitable traps to remove moisture and oil.
Sealing Sawed Joints
The plans identify the joint sealant material to be used. All joints are to be sealed before any
traffic, including construction traffic, is permitted on the pavement.
Joint Filling (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
Due to pavement crown, hot poured asphaltic or any flowable joint material may flow out of the
joint leaving an opening below the pavement surface which allows entrance of sand and dirt
into the joint opening. This will cause spalling of joint edges when pavement expands. To
insure a properly filled joint across the entire pavement width, the contractor is required to tape
the joint opening at pavement edge. This helps to prevent sealant from flowing out of the joint
opening. A ball of mud plastered on the pavement edge is not to be allowed in lieu of required
tape.
All joint sealant materials should be placed so that the top edge is approximately 6 mm below
pavement's surface. See paving details or manufacturer's instructions for exact elevation.
Excessive filling of transverse and longitudinal joints can result in excessive sealant material
being forced out of the joint and soiling the pavement surface. Excess sealant material should
be removed from pavement surface prior to project acceptance.
302
Sealing Equipment
Hot poured asphaltic joint material may be overheated in hot pour kettles. An overheated
sealant has lost its elasticity and will prematurely fail. Thermometers on hot pour kettles need
to be checked and replaced if necessary. Calibrated thermometers are available from Quality
Assurance Manager to use in checking contractor's thermometers.
Backer Rod
Backer rod is approved on a brand name basis. Approved backer rods are shown in the NDR
Approved Products List.
Doweled Support Assemblies (SSHC Subsection 603.03)
To insure that a doweled contraction joint will function as designed, it is critical that assembly
be properly installed. Dowel bars provide load transfer across the joint without prohibiting the
opening and closing of the joint during pavement temperature changes.
Dowel Tolerances
To permit pavement slabs to move longitudinally on the subgrade during expansion and
contraction, dowels must be parallel to both centerline and surface of pavement. The plans
show the dowel placement tolerances. Dowel assemblies should not be permitted to remain
in place if wire supports cannot hold dowels in correct alignment. Position of outside dowel
bar to edge of pavement slab shall be within plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch).
Dowel Assembly Placement
When placing assemblies on subgrade, contractors use bottom support wires of assembly as
a guide for bar alignment. This is not objectionable provided bars are fabricated at proper
angle to wire supports. Assemblies should be inspected for proper fabrication when delivered
to project.
Contractors shall not be permitted to block up or support the assemblies on bricks to obtain
proper height of dowel bars. When paving project has two different slab thicknesses requiring
load transfer devices, the contractor shall furnish correct height basket dowel assemblies
specifically fabricated to position bars at mid-depth in slab for each slab thickness.
Temporary wire fasteners, which hold some assemblies together for shipping, are to be cut if
they extend across a joint. Check for movement of assemblies during passage of slipform
paver. If properly set, the side forms of the paver should not come in contact with the ends of
wire bar supports. Check to insure vibrators on paver or finishing equipment are set to proper
height so vibrators do not touch steel during passage over assemblies.
Workers who position steel and vibrate concrete must not step on joint assemblies.
Assemblies must be firmly anchored to subgrade or subbase with a minimum of eight stakes
per 3.6 m (12 feet) width to resist horizontal and vertical movement during concrete
placement and subsequent finishing operations.
303
Marking Joint Locations

Prior to paving, dowel midpoint must be marked on the subgrade or granular foundation
course so an accurate saw cut location can be made on cured pavement. A narrow band of
paint can be applied to the subgrade at midpoint of dowels in same direction as proposed saw
cut. This band of paint must be kept as narrow as possible to minimize chance of error in
correctly locating saw cut. An alternate method would be to place a dowel basket staking pin
on either side of pad line.
Dowel midpoint markings should then be transferred to PCC concrete surface. This may be
accomplished with a string line marking plastic concrete or by use of a chalk line after
concrete has hardened. This should insure that the transverse joint will be sawn over the
center of the dowel bar basket assembly. Do not permit the saw operator to eyeball joint
sawing from one edge of the slab to the other.
Blanking Bands
The plans may indicate a blanking band be used to blank out the transverse texture over the
center of the dowel assemblies. Care needs to be taken to ensure that the blanking band is
correctly located over the center of the dowel assemblies. Using a blanking band will ensure a
smooth, nontextured pavement surface at the midpoint on the dowel assembly.
Longitudinal Joint Design
The standard plans show joint layout details. The joint layout designs for paving plans have
specific requirements for certain type joints which consider traffic movements during and after
construction and the effect of the joint type on these traffic movements.
Joints should be constructed as shown in the plans, unless the Standard Road Plans allow for
alternates. Any requests by the contractor for joint substitution shall be submitted to the
Construction Division for review.
Curing of Keyed and Doweled Joints
The vertical sides of pavement in areas where joints are constructed, can be cured with the
use of a liquid curing compound is an acceptable method of curing this portion of the slab.
Generally, little or no bond is obtained or expected between vertical faces of adjacent
concrete. Deformation on tie bars provide adequate lateral support.
Tie bars should not be sprayed with curing compound. They must be protected from the
spray. If a curing compound is sprayed on steel, this film should be removed before placing
adjacent concrete.
602.5028 Prevention of Rain Damage to Plastic Concrete
SSHC Sections 603 and 1002 require contractors to produce a quality product and have
materials for proper protection of edges and surface of concrete available near work site.
Contractor must protect pavement from damage due to rain. Failure to properly protect
concrete may constitute cause for removal and replacement of defective pavement.
304
At the preconstruction conference, it is important to emphasize that protective coverings and

temporary forms must be available and that protection of fresh pavement from rain damage is
the contractor's responsibility. The contractor should be advised to follow the weather
forecasts closely to prevent being caught unprepared in case of rain. Plastic film is preferred
for surface and edge protection, since burlap alone in a heavy rain is insufficient to prevent
access of water and subsequent pavement surface erosion.
The District Engineer and the Construction Division should be notified when pavements are
damaged by rain so an evaluation of the damage can be made. Acceptance or rejection of
damaged portions of pavement will be based on the extent of damage incurred as determined
by the Project Manager. Repair of damaged edges and surface may be considered, but
extensively damaged pavement may require removal and replacement.
602.5029 Repair of Deficient Pavement
Pavements damaged by rain and deficiencies caused by poor workmanship may be repaired
or restored to an acceptable condition without complete removal and replacement of damaged
areas.
Rain damage varies considerably depending on rainfall intensity, duration, and protective
measures taken by contractor. Covering and side forms placed by the contractor afford
sufficient protection to unhardened concrete in some cases. In other cases, surface and
edges may erode to such a degree that removal and replacement of slab is the only solution.
Guidelines follow for corrective measures that may be taken or used to restore damaged
pavement to an acceptable condition. This instruction is not intended to cover the whole
spectrum of correcting deficiencies that may occur on a paving project during construction.
Other proposed procedures or methods suggested by the contractor may be considered.
Recommended Repair Method (SSHC Subsection 108.05)
A. Rain Damage and Excessive Edge Slump
1. On plastic concrete:
• Pavement surfaces which have slight surface damage due to

placement of protective covering or sandy appearance may be
retextured provided concrete is still plastic and in workable condition.
• Pavement surface which has texture removed and coarse aggregate

exposed may be reworked by adding fresh concrete (same mix as
pavement) to surface, rescreeding, texturing, and curing. Areas
reworked must also meet specified smoothness requirements.
• Eroded edges may be repaired by setting side forms and replacing

eroded concrete with fresh mix.
• Excessive edge slump may be corrected by setting side forms of

proper height along slumped edge and refinishing to the correct
elevation.
305
2. After concrete has cured and hardened:
• Pavement surfaces that have lost transverse groove texture without

affecting surface profile shall have transverse or longitudinal grooves
reestablished.
• Pavement surfaces which have been severely eroded require reprofiling

by diamond grinding equipment and subsequent reestablishment of
transverse grooving.
• Minor edge erosion and edge slump with a key and doweled joint and
adjacent slab need to be butted to existing pavement. Establish a new
edge, not to exceed 75 mm (3 inch) in from previous edge, by sawing to
the top of the tie bar, remove concrete and replace when new adjacent
pavement is poured. If necessary to go more than 75 mm (3 inch)
from edge of pavement to correct eroded or slumped edge, the edge
shall be repaired by using pavement patching methods prior to pouring
adjacent slab.
• Excessive edge slump may be repaired by using pavement patching

methods.
• Edges or panels that have been severely eroded may require all or a
section of lane to be removed or replaced. If determined that a section
of lane more than 600 mm (2 ft) in width should be removed, then entire
lane or panel shall be removed and replaced with new concrete. Areas
less than 600 mm (2 ft) in width shall require full depth repair with holes
drilled and tie bars installed to anchor new concrete to remaining
concrete.
• For areas with extreme severely eroded surface and edges, contractor
should be required to place a bonded PCC overlay.
B. Vehicle Traffic on Plastic Concrete

Remove and replace sections where rutting is severe.
Minor wheel track rutting may be repaired by using pavement patching methods.
C. Shrinkage Cracks
Remove and replace affected areas with new pavement in severe cases.
Minor cracks may be filled with pressure injected epoxy or repaired using pavement
patching methods.
D. Rough Pavement Sections
Surface variations which exceed specification smoothness requirements require
correction by the contractor. Surface correction shall be accomplished with approved
diamond grinding equipment. Use of milling machines, Roto Mill, Galion Scarifier, or
other impact devices shall not be permitted.
306
Reestablishing transverse grooving of corrected areas is not required but longitudinal

grooves must be established. Equipment for regrooving shall be specifically designed
for grooving concrete with a cutting head fitted with diamond blades. Use of hand held
equipment is not permitted.
E. Limitations
Necessary corrective measures on hardened concrete shall only be made after

concrete attains age and strength requirements in SSHC Section 603.
All required corrective measures shall be completed prior to coring for pavement
thickness measurements.
Approval of the Construction Division is required before placing a bonded PCC overlay.
602.5030 Mud Ball Repair
Occasionally mud balls appear in the surface on new concrete pavements. These usually are
due to clay balls from a quarry or mud thrown into dump trucks from portable batch plant
located at a wet site.
Correction of any discovered mud balls in pavement surface shall be as follows:
• Any thin concrete skin around perimeter of mud ball should be removed so that nearly
vertical void walls remain.
• Each void shall be cleaned by a high pressure washer, followed by air blasting to dry
void.
• Voids shall be filled with an approved grout. This material shall be used according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
• Surface of filled voids shall be given the same texture as surrounding pavement.
• Void shall be given proper cure time recommended by manufacturer prior to opening
roadway to normal traffic.
If a severe problem with mud balls is suspected and the suspicions have been document,
then formal acceptance by Project Manager should be delayed until the following spring. This
will allow the winter freeze-thaw cycles and snowplowing activities to expose additional mud
balls located adjacent to pavement surface. These newly discovered mud ball areas will then
also require corrective measures as stated above. The Project Manager may also elect to
have the contractor use a high pressure sprayer (1200 psi) to locate mud balls and allow the
project to be finalized immediately after any repairs are made.
307
602.5031 Cold Weather Paving and Plant Operations
Cold Weather Pavement Protection
During cold weather, SSHC Subsections 601.01, 603.03 and 1002.02 requires that newly
placed paving be protected against freezing temperatures. This protection is necessary to
allow the hydration process of the curing concrete to continue in cold weather. Adequate
protection of concrete allows for paving to be placed later in the cold seasons.
Materials that may produce acceptable insulation include:
• 3 layers of Burlene.
• 1 layer of Fast Track Blankets.
• 1 layer of 12 mm (1/2 inch) extruded polystyrene, must be weighted down.
• 2 layers of 6 mm (1/4 inch) air celled polyethylene.
• 1 layer of 12 mm (1/2 inch) air celled polyethylene.
Do not advise contractor regarding cold weather protection.
When cold weather protection is required, the contractor will not be reimbursed for whatever
protection is used.
Cold Weather Plant Operation
SSHC Subsection 603.03 states that concrete mixing and placement may be started when air
temperature is at least 5°C (40° F) and rising. In the late fall season before the subgrade
begins to freeze and soil temperatures are still relatively warm, it is permissible to allow paving
plant operations to begin below 5°C (40° F) providing a warming weather forecast is predicted.
Paving plant operations basically self regulate during these conditions.
The intent is to maximize the remaining good paving weather still available in the fall. This
provision is not intended to make a paving day out of one that is not but to allow for as much
concrete pavement placement as possible during good weather.
After the subgrade begins to freeze, the above provisions should be halted and the
Specifications strictly enforced.
308
PCC Pavement Method of Measurement
602.60 PCC PAVEMENT METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
602.601 Smoothness Tests (Profilograph)
1. See SSHC Section 602 for profilograph procedures.
2. When the contract Special Provisions require the smoothness of the concrete
pavement to be tested by measurement with the profilograph, it is necessary and a
requirement of the Provision that the thickness cores be taken after to any surface
correction (grinding) by the contractor.
3. Since the thickness cores are taken by personnel from the Materials and Research
Division (Lincoln), it is necessary they be kept posted as far in advance as possible
when the coring must be done. It is generally preferable to do the coring prior to
opening the pavement (segments in some cases) to traffic. Accordingly, prior
planning is necessary and shall be accomplished by the Project Manager. Contact
Rhonda DeButts at 479-4760 or Dave Hall at 479-4837 in the Materials &
Research Quality Assurance Section.
602.602 Requirements for Thickness
SSHC Subsection 603.05 indicates the thickness requirements and includes a table of
payments to be made for concrete of less than plan thickness. The table is based on the
premise that a pay deduction should be proportioned to the reductions in service resulting
from thin pavement. Thus the reductions in payment are quite severe.
602.603 Material Quantities
Concrete pavement is measured for payment in square meters in place and accepted,
minus deductions. The reinforcing steel and dowel bars required by the Plans and Special
Provisions will be considered subsidiary to the other pay items in concrete pavement
construction.
SSHC Subsection 603.04 states that the quantity of concrete pavement will be measured by
the square meter. This is interpreted by the Construction Division to mean that when the
plans, stakes, etc., order a nominal width of pavement and the Project Manager determines
that this nominal width requirement is met or exceeded, the nominal width will be used to
compute the quantity for the concrete pavement item, i.e., the contractor should not be
permitted to increase his/her compensation by purposely or inadvertently constructing the
pavement to a width greater than the nominal width.
Base course, foundation course, and subgrade preparation are not measured quantities.
They are established quantities that are based on the paved area.
602.604 Concrete Driveways
SSHC Subsection 609.04 states that concrete driveways will be measured by the square
meter. This is interpreted by the Construction Division to mean that when the Project Survey
Crew stakes the driveway for certain dimensions these are the dimensions that will be used
to compute the area for payments.
309
PCC Pavement Method of Measurement
602.605 Records and Reports
Daily Report of Concrete Pavement Laid (DR Form 85) should be prepared daily. The
cylinder data for the day covered by the report should be written at the bottom of the form.
Reports should be delivered to the plant inspector as early as possible so he/she may
complete his/her records for the day reported.
When reporting multilane pavement, or when paving one lane on 2-lane pavement always
report the lane being paved. Identification of the lane on multilane pavement should be
positive - such as: 12' lane, 12'-24' Rt. of centerline. Lack of this information may result in
confusion and delay in preparing the pattern of cores for the core drill. Sketches of irregular
areas should be shown on the reverse side of the slab report DR Form 85, or prints of
intersections and other unusual layouts may be ordered from the Lincoln Office for the
purpose of logging daily pour information and should be turned in with the slab report which
substantially completes the area involved. Sketches need not be elaborate but should clearly
identify the area placed with any necessary dimensions. A diary record is also required.
Section corners falling within the area of the concrete pavement may be perpetuated by a
registered land surveyor who will take a core as described in CM Section 1300.03,
"Perpetuating Section Corner Markers". In many instances it may be possible to set the
section corner while the concrete is plastic and cores need not be taken. If cores are
needed to set the section corners, a list of the corners to be so perpetuated should be
submitted to the Materials and Research Division as early as possible prior to the time that
the pavement is to be cored. This list should include the station location and distance right or
left of centerline of each section corner to be cored.
310
PCC Pavement Patching
603.00 PCC PAVEMENT PATCHING
603.10 Full Depth PCC Patches
The plans show the details for full depth patches for PCC pavement or resurfaced PCC
pavement. Each of these details identify the required depth of concrete for the patch. There
are six pages of details that describe pavement repairs that will not receive an overlay and
four pages of details that describe pavement repairs that will receive an overlay. However,
only those details that are applicable are included in any set of plans. In general, if the length
of the repair is 4’ to 9’, then it is considered “Joint Repair.” If the repair is over 9’, then it is
called “Pavement (Panel) Repair.”
The transverse and longitudinal faces of the pavement around the repair receive different
treatments. The surface in the transverse (width of pavement) direction will either receive
dowel bars or have the surface beveled to wedge the patch so it will not settle below the
existing roadway surface. The longitudinal surface will be vertical and may have tie bars
(see plans for details).
The details also show how to remove the pavement. The detail for beveling the transverse
ledge includes both a full depth saw cut and a 2-inch + ¼ inch deep saw cut. The full depth
saw cut is usually performed with a wheel saw. These saw cuts are intended to sever the
pavement totally so the existing pavement can be completely removed. The breakout area
between the full depth cut and the 2-inch depth cut should create a beveled ledge that will
wedge the patch in place and prevent it from slipping below the roadway surface.
603.20 SAW CUTS IN FULL DEPTH PCC PATCHES
Some contractors have delayed saw cuts for joints in full depth PCC patches until after
minimum 5-hour cure period (on two-lane roadways). Due to rapid setting concrete used for
these patches, random cracks often appear when joints are not sawn quick enough. Any
joints in full-depth patches shall be sawn as soon as possible as long as ravelling of saw cut
edges does not happen. This early sawing will require temporary removal and replacement
of required insulation boards in cold weather.
Any random cracks that appear due to a delay of the saw cut operation shall be repaired by
the contractor. Repair will consist of routing random cracks with a crack saw and sealing
with hot pour sealant. These repairs will be at the expense of the contractor.
Low Strength Deductions

Materials and Research will make deductions for concrete pavement because they establish
the strength --- from cores which they have taken --- used to determine the basis of
payment.
Payment for PR concrete, unlike pavement, is based upon cylinder strengths rather than
from core strengths. Accordingly, the Project Manager should make the deduction when PR
concrete for patching does not make the required strength. The deduction should be based
on the 24-hour break strength of a cylinder using the deduction factors shown in
Table 603.02.
Materials and Research will not make a deduction for PR concrete even if you submit a
cylinder strength report indicating the low strength.
311
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
312
DIVISION 700
BRIDGES, CULVERTS,
AND RELATED
CONSTRUCTION
2002
Checklists
@ DIVISION 700
701.00 CHECKLISTS
701.01 PILES AND PILE DRIVING CHECKLIST
SSHC References Section 703 -- Piles and Pile Driving

705 -- Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Structural Units
1002 -- Portland Cement Concrete
1004 -- Portland Cement
1025 -- Steel Wire for Prestressed
Concrete Units
Inspection Crew Project Manager (PM)

Construction Technician
Equipment Saximeter
Material Procedures Check that all piling is acceptable for driving.
Material certifications and/or reports should be given to

Project Manager and evaluated before use.
Steel Piling Steel bearing and sheet piling must be stored on

suitable skids [6 inch (150 mm)] ground clearance
recommended) and should be kept clean. Don't allow
weeds and foreign material in storage sites.
Concrete Piling Piling must be adequately supported when stored and

handled to prevent excess deflection. The surface
finish of concrete piling that will be exposed at the
completion of driving (bent piles in concrete slab
bridges) shall not be damaged or discolored.
Cast-in-Place Concrete Check shells immediately before placing any

Piles Procedures concrete (shape and accumulation of water). Use a
drop cord.
Treated Timber Notify Materials & Research if timber piling appears

damaged. The Project Manager or inspector must
obtain approval to reject timber piling.
Piling certification procedures are found in the Materials

Sampling Guide.
Pile Driving Procedures The contractor should build a frame (sometimes called
a checkerboard) to hold each pile in the exact position
for driving.
315
2002
Checklists
Before driving any piles, the inspector should perform

the following duties:
1. Verify that piles will be driven exactly as shown

in the plan pile layout.
2. Check pile spacing, and record heat numbers

(steel pile), code identification (concrete pile)
and other pertinent information. Document
points and splices.
3. Verify cut-off elevations against a permanent

reference.
Confirm that the Project Manager, inspector and

contractor understand:
1. How to check penetration depth at any point.
2. How to take and record bearing tests data with

saximeter.
3. How to determine the cut-off elevation for

individual piles.
SSHC Subsection 703.03, Paragraph 2. allows bearing

piling to be driven with a gravity hammer for the first half
of the penetration when bearing does not exceed one-
third of the design bearing.
Concrete sheet piling shall be driven with a

preapproved hammer.
Do not allow pilot holes or preliminary jetting to be

greater than 10 ft (3 m).
Gravity hammers used to drive piling to final cut-off

elevation shall be preapproved. The fall of gravity
hammers shall be regulated so as to avoid damage to
the piles. Hammer fall shall not exceed 15 ft (5 m) for
wood and steel bearing piles, or 8 ft (2.4 m) for precast
concrete piles and shells for cast-in-place piles.
Do not allow hammer fall to damage piles.
Leads are required on all driven piles. Leads shall be

held in proper alignment.
Swinging leads are permitted with steam, air or diesel

hammers.
316
2002
Checklists
Guyed, braced, or fixed leads are required with gravity

hammers.
Bearing and Sheet Piles 1. Frequently check the pile for plumbness or for
Procedures required batter. Do not allow a variation of more
than 1-inch/50 inches (1 mm/50 mm) of pile during
driving.
2. Tops shall not be out of line more than 3 inches

(75 mm).
3. Adjacent sheets shall be in line within a ½ inch

(12 mm) tolerance.
4. The inspector should observe the pile carefully

while it is being driven. A sudden increase in the
penetration may indicate a broken or collapsed pile.
5. Remove and replace all broken, split, or misplaced

piles. If removal is impractical, contact the
Construction Division for instructions on the
procedure to be followed.
6. Lead with the tongue or ball end of sheet piles to

keep the groove or socket clean.
7. The options when a pile is at cut-off elevation, and

not at design bearing are:
a. If less than 10% of the piles in any group fail to

reach bearing, the average pile bearing may be
adequate to support the structure.
b. Additional piling may be added to the group.
c. Extend the piling and drive to obtain design

bearing.
d. Determine a soil set up factor and then drive to

cut-off elevation.
e. Use pile-driving analyzer to determine bearing.
f. Run a load test to check if bearing capacity is

obtained.
Notify the Construction Division when two or three

consecutive piling do not attain design bearing.
8. a. Record pile data on the M&R spreadsheet.

317
2002
Checklists
b. E-mail a copy of the spreadsheet to M&R (O.

Qudus) and to Construction Division
(B. Caples).
c. Do not use contractor provided charts for

determining bearing.
Soil Setup Factor 1. Two representative piles shall be driven to 2 ft

(600 mm) above cut-off elevation (see SSHC
703.07 para 4.f.).
2. The piling at cut-off+2 ft (600 mm), will be rested for

36 hours and then driven to cut-off elevation with a
"warm" hammer.
3. The Project Manager will record the penetration for

each ten blows of the hammer until cut-off is
reached.
4. Record data and call it in to the Construction

Division.
5. The factor and a decision on what action to take will

be sent back to the Project Manager.
6. Construction Division recommendations shall be

recorded under the Remarks Section of the pile
driving record.
Bearing Capacity 1. Determine bearing at or just prior to the pile

Procedure reaching final penetration.
2. When determining bearing, the inspector shall be

certain that all of the following conditions exist:
a. For single action, the hammer shall have a free

fall.
b. The head of the pile shall be free from crushed
or broomed fibers.
c. The penetration of the pile shall be at a

reasonably quick and uniform rate.
d. There is not excessive bounce of the hammer.

Deduct twice the height of the bounce from "H"
pile for gravity or stream hammers. No
deduction is made for diesel hammers.
318
2002
Checklists
e. If the driving is stopped for more than 2 hours,

the pile shall be driven at least 1 ft (300 mm)
before the bearing capacity is determined.
f. For batter piles driven with gravity hammers,

see SSHC Subsection 703.03, Paragraph 4 for
bearing determination.
3. The energy values for common diesel hammers

presently in use are listed in SSHC
Subsection 703.03, Paragraph 4. If the contractor
intends to use a hammer not listed, the
Construction Office should be contacted to obtain
the appropriate energy value.
4. For bearing capacity computations the mass of the

driving cap may be taken from the manufacturer's
freight bill or measured. The mass of the pile shall
be determined as follows:
Steel "H" a. Mass per foot (meter) times length at time

bearing is determined.
Timber b. Volume of pile times 44 lb/ft3 (703 kg/m³).
Concrete c. Volume times 150 lb/ft3 (2400 kg/m³).
Reference Points 5. The reference point should be an object with a fixed

elevation or horizontal distance from the pile. Mark
the point where the reference intersects the pile.
After the required number of blows, mark another
line at reference intersection and the distance
between the two lines is penetration. Average
penetrations can be computed from several
measurements.
Pile Driving Analyzer 1. Contact the Construction Division to schedule

Procedures personnel and equipment.
Static Pile Load Test Procedures 1. The Department will furnish the equipment and
personnel for conducting the test. The contractor
shall unload, erect, dismantle and reload the testing
equipment. Payment for this work shall be by the
each for each test.
2. If a temporary anchor pile is required. It will be paid

for as extra work.
319
2002
Checklists
Method of Measurement 1. If required bearing is obtained at minimum

Procedures penetration and this is shorter than the order length,
the contractor should be encouraged to continue
driving until the order length has been driven.
Usually he/she will want to drive this extra length to
avoid payment deduction. Discontinue driving
beyond minimum penetration when:
a. Practical refusal is reached.
b. Further driving may result in damage to the pile.
2. If practical refusal is reached before minimum

penetration, discontinue driving and notify the
District Construction Engineer or the Construction
Division and do not cut off the pile without their
approval.
3. No payment will be made for pile length driven

beyond the order length without PM approval.
4. When steel "H" pile and steel pile shells are driven
to the exact cut-off elevation without crimping or
damage to the top of the pile, they need not be cut
off. Length of pile cut-off (measured as provided in
SSHC Subsection 703.05) shall be paid at 60% of
the piles unit price.
5. It will be necessary to pay for pile cut-off only under

the following conditions:
a. When practical refusal is reached before

minimum penetration and the pile cannot be
driven or jetted further.
b. The contractor elects to stop driving after

reaching bearing and minimum penetration but
before the order length is driven.
320
2002
Checklists
6. MASS FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

BEARING PILE
For computing bearing capacity required on M&R

Pile Bearing spreadsheet.
Constant Section
Pile Type Mass Per Meter of Pile
(Kilogram) (lb)
I 220 (485)
II 298 (657)
IV 315 (694)
(See Appendix 1. DR97-Pile Driving Record)
Critical Construction 1. Proper placement and length.

Areas 2. Permanent reference point.
3. Removal of broken/collapsed piles.
4. Achieving design bearing capacity.
NDR Tests 1. Test pile.

2. Bearing capacity.
3. Pile Driving Analyzer.
Inspector's Records 1. Pile Record M&R spreadsheet

and Forms 2. Hammer Data Sheet
321
2002
Checklists
701.02 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST

SSHC References: Section 704 Concrete Construction
Burlap--Polyethylene Sheeting For Curing
Concrete
Section 1016 Preformed Polychloroprene
Elastomeric Joint Seals
Inspection Crew: Lead Inspector
Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
Placement Procedures: 1. Preplacement check of equipment.
2. Check condition and placement of steel.
3. Check Form setting and alignment. Verify location
coordinates and orientation.
4. Have contractor wet grade and forms before
concrete placement.
5. Test concrete for air content, slump, and make
cylinders when mix changes, as a minimum
according to Sampling Guide.
specifications. Do not allow free fall greater than
5 ft (1.5 m).
7. Do not use water as a finishing aid; use an
approved chemical finishing aid/evaporation
retardant.
8. Check curing operation.
Area: 1. Take pictures of any pavement under bridge before
work begins.
2. Achievement of concrete consolidation without
segregation.
3. The time between loads of concrete.
4. Trucks that segregate concrete or have cement
balls must not be used.
NDR Tests: 1. NDR T 23 Making and Curing concrete test
specimens.
4. NDR T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method.
322
2002
Checklists
701.03 CONCRETE BRIDGE FLOORS CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 706 Concrete Bridge Floors

Burlap--Polyethylene Sheeting For
Curing Concrete
Section 1016 Preformed Polychloroprene
Inspection Crew: Project Manager

Placement Inspector
Plant Inspector

Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
10 ft (3 m) straightedge
Anemometer
Thermometer
Hygrometer

2. Check condition and placement of steel. Enter in
SiteManager the date steel was verified.
3. Check Form setting and alignment.
4. Check slab thickness.
5. Check deck for cleanliness
6. Have contractor wet deck forms and grade under
approach slabs before concrete placement.
(Note: It’s best to place deck and
approach slabs at the same time.)
7. Test concrete for air content and make cylinders
when mix changes, as a minimum according to
Sampling Guide.
specifications.
retardant.
10. Check surface with straightedge. Remove
depressions and irregularities.
11. Check tining operation.
12. Check cure operation.
13. Make sure a water service and tanks are available
to soak burlap.
323
2002
Checklists
Area: 1. Take pictures of any pavement under the deck
before work begins.
2. Maintain a uniform roll, of about 4 inches (100 mm),
of concrete ahead of the front screed and a
minimum of a 2 inch (50 mm) roll ahead of the rear
screed.
5. Avoiding placement when temperatures and wind
velocities may cause plastic shrinkage cracking.
(SSHC Table 706.01)
6. Vibrate concrete uniformly. Establish good pattern
and adjust as necessary.
7. The timing of cure application.
Safety Areas:

specimens.
324
2002
Checklists
701.04 STEEL STRUCTURES CHECKLIST

SSHC References: See SSHC Table 708.01
Other References: AWS Standard Specifications. (ANSI/AASHTO/AWS
D1.5 Bridge Welding Code)
Inspection Crew: Fabrication Inspector
Project Manager (PM)
Lab Inspector
Inspection Equipment: Skidmore-Wilhem Calibrator
Shop Procedures: 1. Check Fabricators QC Plan.
2. Make sure QC Plan is followed.
3. The mill order list or the Certified Mill Test Reports
must be furnished before fabrication begins.
4. Document all actions not in compliance with the QC
Plan or Standard AWS procedures.
5. Welding symbols are shown in Section 708.
Field Construction
Procedures: 1. Confirm steel was inspected on site and in shop.
Enter date in SiteManager.
2. Sample bolts and send to M&R.
3. Heavy hexhead bolts require heavy hexhead nuts
and a hardened washer under the element that is
turned.
4. Check all bolts, washers, and nuts to make sure
there is proper and correct marking on each. (See
CM Subsection 704.03)
5. M&R personnel will calibrate the contractor's
wrenches but they need at least 7-days advance
notice.
6. Before the contractor begins steel erection, the
Project Manager will make a final check of span
lengths, skew angles, and bearing point elevations.
7. Also, take pictures of pavement under any structure
where equipment will be lifting members.
8. Lead sheets [? inch (3 mm) thick] shall be placed
between steel and concrete at all bearing points.
9. Rockers, rollers, expansion devices, etc., shall be
set according to the temperature at time of
installation. (See Plans.)
10. Check matchmarks on all girders, separators, angle
braces, etc.
11. Verify that drift pins do not enlarge holes or distort
the metal.
12. Stop the contractor from hammering if it appears
the metal will be damaged or injured.
13. The Construction Division will be notified of all major
misfits and determine what procedures will be
allowed.
325
2002
Checklists
701.05 CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK REPAIR WITH SILICA FUME CONCRETE
SSHC References: Section 710 -- Concrete Bridge Deck With Silica

Fume Concrete
Section 1002 -- Portland Cement Concrete
Section 1010 -- White Opaque Polyethylene Film
and White Burlap—Polyethylene
Sheeting For Curing Concrete
Section 1011 -- Burlap For Curing Concrete
Section 1014 -- Joint Sealing Filler
Section 1015 -- Preformed Joint Filler
Section 1016 -- Preformed Polychloroprene
Section 1033 -- Aggregates
Inspection Crew: Placement Inspector

Plant Inspector

Rod
Mallet
Strike Off Bar
Ruler
10 ft (3 m) straightedge
Anemometer
Thermometer
Hygrometer

2. Check condition and placement of steel.
3. Check Form setting and alignment.
4. Check slab thickness.
5. Check deck for cleanliness.
6. Have contractor wet deck and forms before
concrete placement.
7. Test concrete for air content and make cylinders
when mix changes, as a minimum according to
Sampling Guide.
8.Watch concrete placement for compliance with
specifications.
retardant.
10. Check surface with straightedge. Remove
depressions and irregularities.
12. Check cure operation.
326
2002
Checklists
Area: 1. Check finish machine (template & rails).
2. Check repair areas.
3. Deck shall be uniformly wet, without puddles prior to
placement.
4. Bonding grout shall not be allowed to dry out.
5. Maintain a uniform roll, of about 4 inches (100 mm),
of concrete ahead of the front screed and a
minimum of a 2 inch (50 mm) roll ahead of the rear
screed.
8. Avoiding placement when temperatures and wind
velocities may cause plastic shrinkage cracking
(see SSHC Figure 710.01).
9. Fogging system should be operating from time
concrete is finished until wet burlap is in place.
10. Check tining operation.
11. The timing of wet burlap application.
Safety Areas:

specimens.
327
2002
702.00 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES (SSHC Section 702)
702.01 DESCRIPTION
A. All excavation should be done as shown in the plans. Excavation is very dangerous work
and appropriate OSHA regulations must always be observed (see SSHC Figure 701.01).
B. Inspector should be present when an area is being backfilled. The inspector should check to
see that the backfill materials are as specified. The materials shall be placed as prescribed
in the SSHC Subsection 205.03 or 702.03 as appropriate.
C. Structure excavation includes all excavation, removal of obstruction, bailing, draining,

pumping, sheathing, construction and removal of cofferdams, backfilling, compacting and
disposal of any excess material necessary to construct the structure in question.
A. Unsuitable Material Excavation (SSHC Subsection 702.05)
1. When unstable material is encountered it shall be removed and backfilled with

approved material. The material shall be measured in cubic yds (meters) before it is
placed. Payment for the extra work material and all work involved will be made at
10% of the contact unit price for box culvert concrete (when gravel or rock is used).
The inspector should make an inspection of all structure footings as they are being
excavated by the contractor.
2. Pier footings should not be constructed on unsuitable material. It is true that if the
footing is supported by piles, the rock placed at the bottom of the footing serves a
limited structural purpose. We should provide for a solid base to hold the concrete in
the forms. However, the contractor is not entitled to a rock surface on which to work
at the Department’s expense.
A. Culvert Excavation (SSHC Subsection 702.03)
1. All culverts should be constructed with a minimum of approximately 12 inches

(300 mm) of cover exclusive of surfacing. An accepted method for obtaining
specified bedding for these culverts is to require the contractor to furnish a template
conforming to the dimensions of the culvert pipe. This template is then used for
shaping the trench to the specified depth.
2. The inspector must be knowledgeable of the Occupational Safety and Health Act
(OSHA) requirements concerning excavation and trenching. Pipe culvert excavation
by OSHA definition would normally be considered a trench.
3. Never allow any part of a pipe culvert to rest on rock or other unyielding materials.
When rock is encountered in the bottom of the trench, it shall be removed to a depth
of at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the subgrade and back filled with suitable earth
or sand.
328
2002
4. The Specifications provide that where unstable subgrades are encountered under
pipes or pipe-arch culverts, the unsuitable material shall be removed and the excavated
area refilled with gravel, crushed rock, or other suitable material. When crushed rock is
used, care should be taken to place the fine rock immediately beneath all metal pipe to
prevent abrasion of the spelter coating. When gravel or crushed rock is used in place
of unsuitable material, it will be measured in cubic meters before it is placed. Payment
for furnishing, hauling and placing this material will be made at 10% of the contract unit
price for concrete for box culverts. When box culverts are not included in the contract,
the average unit price for box culvert concrete shall be used. (SSHC Subsection
702.05)
B. General Structure Backfilling (SSHC Subsection 702.03)
1. This operation may involve SSHC Sections 205, 702, and Table 702.01. The
inspector should insure that all applicable sections are followed. The compaction of
backfill material close to structures must given special attention. Mechanical tampers
should be operated carefully in such a manner as to obtain the required density
without damaging the structure.
2. Before any material is placed, the area to be backfilled should be inspected for trash
or perishable matter. The materials to be used for backfill should be given careful
consideration. Only those that will produce a dense, well-compacted backfill should
be used. Granular materials are desirable as much less effort is needed to compact
them than clay.
3. When abutments are tied to an anchor or deadman by means of tie rods, care should
be taken in the back filling operation. The backfill should be placed in layers, starting
at the anchor or deadman and working toward the abutment. Hand tamping may be
required around the tie rods, abutment and anchors.
4. Backfilling must not be started without the permission of the Project Manager and in
the case of concrete structures not until test cylinders show a minimum strength of at
least 80% of the design strength.
5. Backfill should be brought up evenly to the elevation shown in the plans. Granular
material must be placed in not more than 8 inches (200 mm) layers (lifts) and should
have sufficient moisture to facilitate compaction. Do not allow dumping of granular
material directly from the truck into the excavation if this will result in lifts/layers
greater than 8 inches.
6. Special attention should be given to culvert wingwalls and flumes to insure proper
compaction to prevent erosion and possible washout. The soil should be brought up
even with these walls so the surface water will flow over these walls and not along
them. Heavy equipment should be kept 3 feet (1 m) or more away from these
wingwalls. Compaction within 3 ft (1 m) of the wingwall shall be with pneumatic hand
tampers or small hand operated vibratory plate compactors.
7. Backfill for Bridges - Moisture and density requirements for backfill which is to provide
support for subsequent construction will be shown in the plans. Backfill which is not
to support later construction shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density without
definite moisture limits.
329
2002
8. Backfill for Culverts - When backfilling pipe culverts, the lifts shall be deposited and
compacted alternately on opposite sides of the pipe to avoid lateral displacement.
The inspector should also watch for vertical displacement. This may occur when
tamping adjacent to the lowest 90 degrees of the pipe and should be checked from
the grade stakes as backfilling progresses. The pipe should be tied down if any uplift
is noted.
9. Necessary precautions should be taken against washing under the pipe in case of
rain. Compacted dikes or temporary earth headwalls at the inlet end will often save
removing and relaying the pipe after a heavy rain. All drainage structures in the
process of construction should be carefully inspected for washouts at the sides and
beneath the structures after rains.
10. Flowable fill is sometimes included in the plans for backfilling culverts. The plans will
identify the locations and show the details for using the flowable fill. SSHC Section
1003 defines Flowable Fill requirements.
C. Concrete Seal Course (SSHC Subsection 702.03)
1. When it is impossible to dewater the foundation bed or box culvert footing or if live
springs develop within the area, a seal course should be constructed below the
elevation of the bottom of the footing. Concrete for seals constructed underwater
shall contain 10% excess cement and be placed in accordance with SSHC
Subsection 704.03. The concrete shall be allowed to harden a minimum of 72 hours
after completing the final pour before dewatering and continuing work on the
structure. Seepage through inadequate or poorly constructed cofferdams shall not
be justification for placing a seal course.
D. Foundations
1. Staking and Checking Locations of Structures - -Check and Double Check
a. All measurements and skew angles must be independently checked. From

past practice, "independently checked" meant having a second survey party
come in, setup, and completely resurvey (verify) original staking. This method
is still the most desirable; however, with our upgrading to total station
equipment it is acceptable to either setup off to the side and recheck or "back
into" the bridge starting up station after clearing the total station.
b. Stakes used should be substantial and protected from disturbance. Offset

stakes for each pier and abutment must be placed outside the area of
contemplated work.
c. Any checks suggested by the contractor should be considered, since the site
superintendent usually has a good idea of the structure layout in relation to
existing features such as trees, old structures, etc. Each stake must be
clearly marked to denote its function. Pier numbers must correspond with
plan designations.
330
2002
2. Documentation
a. A staking diagram for each structure must be recorded in a permanent survey

field book. This sketch must show the exact location of each hub and the
markings made on each guard stake. IT IS NOT COMPLETE UNLESS IT
SHOWS THE MEASUREMENTS MADE AS CHECKS ON THE ACCURACY
OF THE STAKING LAYOUT. Names of those in the staking party should be
entered as well as the date, design and project numbers, location, type of
structure, and any other pertinent information.
E. Common Survey Errors to Avoid
1. Turning the wrong skew angle.
2. Errors in measuring from piers to abutments (This should be detected by an overall

check from abutment to abutment.)
3. The centerline of the bridge is not always on centerline of the road (This is quite
common on interstate bridges.) A bridge with a sidewalk may not be centered on its
pier(s).
F. Encountering Old Substructures (SSHC Subsection 104.06)
1. SSHC Section 203 describes the removal requirements when structures interfere
with the new work. Existing substructures are usually shown on the plans. If the
designer intended to miss some of these old substructures and the contractor later
encounters them, payment will be made to the contractor by change order to remove
that portion in conflict. Payment will "NOT" be made if plans indicate the new
substructure would hit the old structure. See SSHC Subsection 104.06 for a list of
approved unforeseen obstructions.
G. Bridge Deck Removal
1. Contractors generally can be expected to be able to remove the deck without

damaging the girders. However, the contractor must use some caution. The
contractor cannot use the same force directly over a girder as would be applied over
the “free/open” space between girders.
2. Sometimes a contractor will start the removal work properly with heavy blows only in
the “free” space. However, either from impatience, changes to the equipment
operator or for some other reason, we have seen the contractor at some point begin
to apply too much force directly over the girders. This is very bad because the
girders are damaged.
3. Forewarn the contractor and monitor their operation to make sure girders are not
damaged. This is covered in the contract but is still important to monitor in the field.
331
2002
Piling and Pile Driving
703.00 PILING AND PILE DRIVING (SSHC Section 703)
A. The Department’s Geotechnical Section in the Materials and Research Division provides
guidance and geotechnical designs for our projects. Some county bridge projects are
completely designed by consultants including pile foundations. When a consultant design
fails, i.e., bearing cannot be achieved, the consultant that designed the bridge should be the
first point of contact to determine how to correct a failed design.
703.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Diesel Hammers
1. Generally, single acting diesel hammers are the mainstay of contractors for pile
driving. Occasionally however, a contractor will request the use of an "air" or
"hydraulic" operated hammer. In addition there are a few "double acting" hammers in
use. A wave equation analysis will be required for approval of these hammers.
2. One manufacturer of hammers uses one size hammer barrel and places different
sized rams inside. Therefore, the MKT "DE" series hammers need to be field verified
for ram mass (weight). A check is accomplished by having the contractor stand the
hammer upright (in the driving position) and measuring down from top of the barrel to
top of the ram. Verify the ram mass (weight) shown on the Hammer Data sheet as
follows:
Ram Mass Ram Distance Ram Mass Ram Distance

(kg) (meter) (tons) (ft)
907 1.9 1 6.25
1270 1.2 1.4 4.0
1497 0.7 1.65 2.3
1814 180 mm 2.0 0.6
B. Bearing and Penetration
1. Penetration Requirements
a. Design pile length is a calculated value based on design bearing and soil
conditions. One factor which enters into the calculation is the potential for
scour. Obviously, any soil which is eroded during a flood event represents a
loss in bearing capacity and foundation stability. For this reason "minimum
penetration" is extremely important.
b. A depth of expected scour is typically shown on the Bridge Geology sheet in

the plans. In general, streams with large drainage areas and sand or gravel
stream beds are quite susceptible to scour while streams with small drainage
areas and heavy clay stream beds are less susceptible to scour.
c. When doubt exists concerning the amount of probable scour or minimum pile
penetration required, the Construction Division should be consulted. If greater
penetration is required, it will be achieved either by boring holes to receive the
piles or by jetting. If penetration achieved is satisfactory, piles will be cut off.
332
2002
C. Dynamic Pile Analyzer
1. The Materials & Research Division has a pile analyzer available for driving
evaluations. The pile analyzer will evaluate the bearing, based on energy delivered to
a pile as it is being driven.
2. There are two situations where the analyzer should be used:
Case 1. Contract documents require pile to be driven with the analyzer.
Case 2. Pile do not achieve bearing and there are unresolvable questions or
conditions observed during driving.
A. Pile Driving Constraints
1. Piles shall not be driven within 50 ft (15 m) of freshly placed concrete. Normally piles
may not be driven near new concrete until three days after the concrete was placed.
B. Splicing Pile--Welding Steel Pile
1. SSHC Section 708 requires that all welds conform to the Structural Welding Code
ANSI/AASHTO/AWS DI.5 of the American Welding Society.
2. Only Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) will be permitted for welding steel piles.
3. The welding electrode must be on the NDR Approved Products List.
C. Steel Pile Cutoffs
1. If the contractor feels the cutoff is long enough that they may use it on some future
project, the Heat number should be placed on the cutoff and a number to indicate the
project it came from.
D. Pile Groups/Categories
1. Selecting the type of pile to be used and estimating its necessary length are fairly
difficult tasks that require good judgment.
2. Piles can be divided into two major groups, depending on their length and the
mechanisms of load transfer to the soil:
a. Point Bearing Piles
(1) If bedrock is within a reasonable depth, then piles can be extended to

the rock and achieve the ultimate bearing capacity.
b. Friction Piles
333
2002
(1) The ultimate bearing capacity is achieved through the skin friction.
The length of friction piles depends on the shear strength of the soil,
the applied load and pile size. In clayey soils, the resistance to applied
load is caused by adhesion.
(2) Piles are also divided into two different categories depending on their
interaction with the soil:
c. Displacement Pile:
(1) The effect of displacement pile on the soil is, it increases the lateral
ground stress. It displaces cohesion-less soils, remolds and weakens
cohesive soils temporarily. If displacement piles are used for cohesive
soil, setup time in sensitive clays may be up to six months.
(2) Typical types of displacement piles are closed end steel pipe pile and
concrete pile.
d. Non-displacement Pile:
(1) Opposite of the displacement pile, it minimizes disturbance to the soil.
(2) Typical types of non-displacement piles are open-end steel pile and
steel H pile. It should be mentioned open steel pipe is not suited for
friction piles in coarse granular soils.
(3) It has low driving resistance and this makes field capacity verification
difficult, which result in excessive pile length.
Weights of Prestressed Concrete Bearing Piling

For computing bearing capacity required on M&R Pile Record spreadsheet
Constant Section Tapered Section
Wt. per Lin. Ft. Total Weight
Pile Type (Pounds) (Pounds)
I 148 None
II 200 None
III 173 None
IV 212 None
V 124 1740
VI 169 2500
VII 221 2950
This table is based on and is for use only with Standard Plan 1720-C-R2.
334
2002
Steel Pipe Pile Data

ARMCO Union Metal
Size O.D. (ins) 12 12¾ 12 (Nominal)
Wall T. (ins.) .188 .188 7 Ga.
Wt. per Lin. Ft. (lbs.) 23.72 25.16 25.3
Conc. per Lin. Ft. (C.Y.) .0273 .0309 .0255
Union Metal 30’ tapered Sec. Type F Total Wt. 589 Lbs. Conc. 0.55 Cu. Yd.
Size O.D. (ins) 14 14 (Nominal)
Wall T. (ins.) .188 7 Ga.
Wt. per Lin. Ft. (lbs.) 27.66 29.5
Conc. per Lin. Ft. (C.Y.) .0375 .0350
Union Metal 40’ tapered Sec. Type F Total Wt. 895 Lbs. Conc. 0.95 Cu. Yd.
For Raymond step tapered pile, contact Geotechnical Section, Materials & Research.
Driving Sequence of Piles

The driving sequence of piles in a pier or bent can be important. The driving sequence can affect
the way piles drive as well as the influence the new construction has on adjacent structures. This is
especially true for displacement piles. For non-displacement piles, the driving sequence is generally
not as critical.
The driving sequence of displacement pile groups should be from the center of the group outward or
from one side to the other side. The preferred driving sequence of the displacement pile group
shown in Figure 24.16 would be (a) by the pile number shown, (sequence 1), (b) by driving each row
starting in the center and working outward (sequence 2), or (c) by driving each row starting on one
side of the group and working to the other side (sequence 3).
Figure 703.01 Driving Sequence of Displacement Pile Groups (after Passe, 1994)
Sequence 3
Sequence 2
17 16 15 14 13
18 5 4 3 12
19 6 1 2 11
20 7 8 9 10
21 22 23 24 25
Figure 703.01
335
2002
The following guidelines for Single Acting Diesel Hammer are provided to assist you.
If there is a need for a different type of hammer inspection guideline, please contact
the Geotechnical Section.
It is very important to field check the hammer systems provided by the contractor to
the hammer data sheets after they are approved by the Geotechnical Section. Prior
to pile driving, please verify cap weight and size and condition of the hammer cushion
material as shown on the hammer data sheets.
E. Inspection of Piles Prior to and During Installation
1. The inspection will be different for each type of pile. Shop plans are required for
sheet piles, but usually are not required for H-piles, concrete-piles or pipe-piles.
2. When MSE walls are being constructed, at times the soil conditions may require
additional considerations. A note is sometimes included on our plans that states the
MSE Wall Must Be Built Before Piles Are Driven. This note is usually applicable when
the embankment behind the MSE wall is constructed as a fill. The note also usually
specifies that the MSE wall cannot be constructed until the embankment has reached
95+% of its anticipated settlement. The concern here is that the granular backfill
material will settle further and the embankment is also able to settle some additional
amount due to the granular backfill load. The combined effect on the piling is to
cause a downward load on the piling that will reduce the piling’s capacity to resist the
live and dead loads from the roadway.
3. Battered piles are driven at 1 ft. offset per 12 ft. of length or 3.33 ft. offset in 40 ft.
F. Precast Concrete Piles
1. The following is a list of items for prestressed concrete piles to be inspected at the
construction site:
a. The piles should be of the specified length and section. The inspector must
be assured that a minimum concrete strength has been obtained. If the piles
are to be spliced on the site, the splices should meet the specified
requirements (type, alignment, etc.).
b. Piles should be inspected for cracks or spalling. There should be no evidence

that any pile has been damaged during shipping to the site, or during
unloading of piles at the site. Lifting hooks are generally cast into the piling at
pick-up points. Piles should be unloaded by properly sized and tensioned
slings attached to each lifting hook.
c. The piles should be stored properly. When piles are being placed in storage,
they should be stored above ground on adequate blocking in a manner which
keeps them straight and prevents undue bending stresses.
d. The contractor should lift the piles into the leads properly and safely. Cables
looped around the pile are satisfactory for lifting. Chain slings should never be
permitted. Cables should be of sufficient strength and be in good condition.
Frayed cables are unacceptable and should be replaced. For shorter piles, a
336
2002
single pick-up point may be acceptable. The pick-up point locations should be
as specified by the casting yard. For longer piles, two or more pick-up points
at designated locations may be required.
e. The pile should be free to twist and move laterally in the helmet.
f. Piles should have no noticeable cracks when placed in leads or during

installation. Spalling of the concrete at the top or near splices should not be
evident.
g. Steel H-Piles
1. The following should be inspected at the construction site:
a. The piles being driven must be oriented with flanges in the correct direction as
shown on the plans. Because the lateral resistance to bending of H-piles is
considerably more in the direction perpendicular to flanges, the correct
orientation of H-piles is very important.
b. The piles should be of the specified steel grade, length, or section/weight.
c. Pile points, if required for pile toe protection, should be as specified.
d. Splices should be either proprietary splices or full penetration groove welds as

specified. The top and bottom pile sections should be in good alignment
before splicing.
e. Pile point attachments and splices must be welded properly.
f. There should be no observable pile damage, including deformations at the pile

head.
G. Steel Pipe Piles
1. The following should be inspected at the construction site:
a. The piles should be of specified steel grade, length, or minimum

section/weight (wall thickness) and either seamless or spiral welded as
specified.
b. Piles should be driven either open-ended or closed-ended. Closed-ended

pipe piles should have bottom closure plates or conical points of the correct
size (diameter and thickness) and be welded on properly, as specified.
Open-end pipe piles should have cutting shoes that are welded on properly.
c. The top and bottom pile sections should be in good alignment before splicing.
Splices or full penetration groove welds should be installed as specified.
d. There should be no observable pile damage, including deformations at the pile

head. After installation, closed-end pipes should be visually inspected for
damage or water prior to filling with concrete.
337
2002
H. Steel Sheet Piles
1. The sheet piles must meet thickness, section models, steel grade, length and width
requirements as shown in our plans.
2. Sheet pile length should be measured so that analysis of obstructions to driving can
be properly accomplished.
3. Sheet piles should be driven plumb or at the angle shown in the plans.
I. Inspection of Driving Equipment
A typical driving system consists of crane, leads, hammer, hammer cushion, helmet, and in
the case of concrete piles, a pile cushion. Each component of the drive system has a
specific function and plays an important role in the pile installation. The project plans and
specifications may specify or restrict certain items of driving equipment. The Geotechnical
Section will approve the contractor’s driving equipment and determine conformity with the
plans and specifications. The inspector must be sure the equipment used is what was
approved.
1. The following checklist will be useful in the inspection of driving equipment before
driving:
a. The pile driving hammer should be the specified type/size.
(1) The inspector should make sure for single acting air/steam or
hydraulic hammers that the contractor uses the proper size external
power source and that, for adjustable stroke hammers, the stroke
necessary for the required energy be obtained. For double acting or
differential air/steam or hydraulic hammers, the contractor must again
obtain the proper size external power source and the operating
pressure and volume must meet the hammer manufacturer’s
specification.
b. The hammer cushion being used should be checked to confirm it is of the

approved material type, size and thickness.
(1) The main function of the hammer cushion is to protect the hammer
itself from fatigue and high frequency accelerations which would result
from steel to steel impact with the helmet and/or pile. The hammer
cushion should have the proper material and same shape/area to
snugly fit inside the helmet (drive cap). If the cushion diameter is too
small, the cushion will break or badly deform during hammer blows
and become ineffective. The hammer cushion must not be
excessively deformed or compressed. Some air/steam hammers rely
upon a certain total thickness (of cushion plus striker plate) for proper
valve timing. Hammers with incorrect hammer cushion thickness may
not operate, or will have improper kinetic energy at impact. Since it is
difficult to inspect this item once the driving operation begins, it should
be checked before the contractor starts pile driving on a project as well
as periodically during production driving on larger projects.
338
2002
c. The helmet (drive cap) should properly fit the pile.
(1) The purpose of the helmet is to hold the pile head in alignment and
transfer the impact concentrically from the hammer to the pile. The
helmet also houses the hammer cushion, and must accommodate the
pile cushion thickness for concrete piles. The helmet should fit loosely
to avoid transmission of torsion or bending forces, but not so loosely
as to prevent the proper alignment of hammer and pile. Helmets
should ideally be of roughly similar size to the pile diameter. Although
generally discouraged, spacers may be used to adapt an oversize
helmet, provided the pile will still be held concentrically wit the
hammer. A properly fitting helmet is important for all pile types, but is
particularly critical for precast concrete piles. A poorly fitting helmet
often results in pile head damage. Check and record the helmet
weight for conformance to wave equation analysis or for future wave
equation analysis. Larger weights will reduce the energy transfer to
the pile.
d. The pile cushion should be of correct type material and thickness for concrete
piles.
(1) The purpose of the pile cushion is to reduce high compression

stresses, to evenly distribute the applied forces to protect the concrete
pile head from damage, and to reduce the tension stresses in easy
driving. Pile cushions for concrete piles should have the required
thickness determined from a wave equation analysis but not less than
4 inches (100 mm). A new plywood, hardwood, or composite wood
pile cushion, which is not water soaked, should be used for every pile.
The cushion material should be checked periodically for damage and
replaced before excessive compression (more than half the original
thickness), burning or charring occurs. Wood cushions may take only
about 1,000 to 2,000 blows before they deteriorate. During hard
driving, more than one cushion may be necessary for a single pile.
Longer piles or piles driven with larger hammers may require thicker
pile cushions.
e. Predrilling, jetting or spudding equipment, if specified or permitted, should be

available for use and meet the requirements. The depth of predrilling, jetting
or spudding should be very carefully controlled so that it does not exceed the
allowable limits, usually 10 feet (1 m). Predrilling, jetting, or spudding below
the allowed depths will generally result in a reduced pile capacity, and the pile
acceptance may become questionable.
f. A lead system must be used.
(1) The leads perform the very important function of holding the hammer
and pile in good alignment with each other. Poor alignment reduces
energy transfer as some energy is then imparted into horizontal
motion. Poor alignment also generally results in higher bending
stresses and higher local contact stresses which can cause pile
damage. This is particularly important at end of driving when driving
resistance is highest and driving stresses are generally increased.
339
2002
J. Inspection of Driving Equipment During Installation
1. The main purpose of inspection is to assure that piles are installed so that they meet
the driving criteria and the pile remains undamaged. The driving criteria is often
defined as a minimum driving resistance as measured by the blow count in blows per
inch. The driving criteria is to assure that piles have the desired capacity. However,
the driving resistance is also dependent upon the performance of the pile driving
hammer. The driving resistance will generally be lower when the hammer imparts
higher energy and force to the pile, and the driving resistance will be higher if the
hammer imparts lower energy and force to the pile. High driving resistances can be
due either to soil resistance or to a poorly performing hammer. Thus, for the
inspector to assure that the minimum driving criteria has been met and, therefore, the
capacity is adequate, the inspector must evaluate if the hammer is performing
properly.
2. Each hammer has its own operating characteristics; the inspector should not blindly
assume that the hammer on the project is in good working condition. In fact, two
different types of hammers with identical energy rating will not drive the same pile in
the same soil with the same driving resistance. In fact, two supposedly identical
hammers (same make and model) may not have similar driving capability due to
several factors including differing friction losses, valve timing, air supply hose type-
length-condition, duel type and intake amount, and other maintenance status items.
The inspector should become familiar with the proper operation of the hammer(s)
used on site. The inspector may wish to contact the hammer manufacturer or
supplier who generally will welcome the opportunity to supply further information.
K. Single Acting Diesel Hammers
1. Determine/confirm that the hammer is the correct make and model. Check for and
record any identifying labels as to hammer make, model and serial number.
2. Make sure all exhaust ports are open with all plugs removed.
3. Inspect the recoil dampener for condition and thickness. If excessively worn or
improper thickness (consult manufacturer) it should be replaced. If the recoil
dampener is too thin, the stroke will be reduced. If it is too thick, or if cylinder does
not rest on dampener between blows, the ram could blow out the hammer top and
become a safety hazard.
4. Check that lubrication of all grease nipples is regularly made. Most manufacturers
recommend the impact block be greased every half-hour of operation.
5. As the ram is visible between blows, check the ram for signs of uniform lubrication
and ram rotation. Poor lubrication will increase friction and reduce energy to the pile.
340
2002
6. Determine the hammer stroke, especially at end of driving or beginning of restrike. A

“jump stick” attached to the cylinder is a safety hazard and should not be used. The
stroke can be determined by a saximeter which measures the time between blows
and then calculates the stroke. The hammer stroke can also be calculated from this
formula if the number of blows per minute (bpm) is manually recorded.
h [meters] = (4400/[bpm 2]) – 0.90
a. The calculated stroke may require correction for batter or inclined piles. The
inspector should always observe the ram rings and visually estimate the
stroke using the manufacturer’s chart.
7. As the driving resistance increases, the stroke should also increase. At the end of
driving, if the ram fails to achieve the correct stroke (part of the driving criteria from a
wave equation analysis), the cause could be lack of fuel. Most hammers have
adjustable fuel pumps. Some have distinct fuel settings, others are continuously
variable, and some use a pressure pump. Make sure the pump is on the correct fuel
setting or pressure necessary to develop the required stroke. The fuel and fuel line
should be free of dirt or other contaminants. A clogged or defective fuel injector will
also reduce the stroke and should be replaced if needed.
8. Low strokes could be due to poor compression caused by worn or defective piston or
anvil rings. Check compression by raising the ram, and with the fuel turned off,
allowing the ram to fall. The ram should bounce several times if the piston and anvil
rings are satisfactory.
9. Watch for signs of preignition. When a hammer preignites, the fuel burns before
impact, requiring extra energy to compress gas and leaving less energy to transfer to
the pile. In long sustained periods of driving, or if the wrong fuel with a low flash point
is used, the hammer could overheat and preignite. When preignition occurs, less
energy is transferred and the driving resistance rises, giving a false indication of high
pile capacity. If piles driven with a cold hammer drive deeper or with less hammer
blows, or if the driving resistances decrease after short breaks, preignition could be
the cause and should be investigated. Dynamic testing is the preferable method to
check for preignition.
10. For some diesel hammers, the total thickness of hammer cushion and striker plate
must match the hammer manufacturer’s recommendation and the hammer cushion
cavity in the helmet for proper fuel injection and hammer operation. This total
thickness must be maintained.
11. Make sure the helmet stays properly seated on the pile and that the hammer and pile
maintain alignment during operation.
12. The hammer hoist line should always be slack, with the hammer’s weight fully carried
by the pile. Excessive tension in the hammer hoist line is a safety hazard and will
reduce energy to the pile. Leads should always be used.
341
2002
13. Some manufacturers void their warranty if the hammer is consistently operated
above 100 blows per 250 mm of penetration beyond short periods, such as those
required when toe bearing piles are driven to rock. Therefore, in prolonged hard
driving situations, it may be more desirable to use a larger hammer or stiffer pile
section.
14. Common problems and problem indicators for single acting diesel hammers are
presented in the following table.
COMMON PROBLEMS AND PROBLEM INDICATORS FOR SINGLE ACTING DIESEL

HAMMERS (from Williams Earth Sciences, 1995)
Common Problems Indicators
Water in fuel. Hollow sound, white smoke.
Fuel lines clogged. No smoke or little gray smoke.
Fuel pump malfunctioning. Inconsistent ram strokes, little gray smoke or black smoke.
Fuel injectors malfunctioning. Inconsistent ram strokes, little gray smoke or black smoke.
Oil low. Blows per minute rate is lower than specified.
Oil pump malfunctioning. Blows per minute rate is lower than specified.
Water in combustion chamber. Hollow sound, white smoke.
Piston rings worn. Low strokes.
Tripping device broken. Pawl or pin used to lift piston does not engage piston. Pawl
engages but does not lift piston.
Overheating. Paint and oil on cooling fins start to burn/sound changes.
342
2002
L. Field Driving Problem
In the following table, there is a list of common field problems and possible solutions.
COMMON PILE INSTALLATION PROBLEMS & POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS

Problem Possible Solutions
Piles encountering refusal Have wave equation analysis performed and check the pile has sufficient drivability
driving resistance (blow and that the driving system is matched to the pile. If the pile and driving system are
count) above minimum suitably matched, check driving system operation for compliance with
pile penetration manufacturer’s guidelines. If no obvious problems are found, dynamic
requirements. measurements should be made to determine if the problem is driving system or soil
behavior related. Driving system problems could include preignition, preadmission,
low hammer efficiency, or soft cushion. Soil problems could include greater soil
strength than anticipated, temporarily increased soil resistance with later relaxation
(required restrike to check), large soil quakes, or high soil damping.
Piles driving significantly Soil resistance at the time of driving probably is lower than anticipated or driving
deeper than estimated system performance is better than anticipated. Have wave equation analysis
pile penetration depths. performed to assess ultimate pile capacity based on the blow count at the time of
driving. Perform restrike tests after an appropriate waiting period to evaluate soil
strength changes with time. If the ultimate capacity based on restrike blow count is
still low, check drive system performance and restrike capacity with dynamic
measurements. If drive system performance is as assumed and restrike capacity
low, the soil conditions are weaker than anticipated. Foundation piles will probably
need to be driven deeper than originally estimated or additional piles will be required
to support the load. Contact the structural engineer/designer for recommended
change.
Abrupt change or If borings do not indicate weathered profile above bedrock/bearing layer, then pile
decrease in driving toe damage is likely. Have wave equation analysis performed and evaluate pile toe
resistance (blow count) stress. If calculated toe stress is high and blow counts are low, a reduced hammer
for bearing piles. energy (stroke) and higher blow count could be used to achieve capacity with a
lower toe stress. If calculated toe stress is high at high blow counts, a different
hammer or pile section may be required. For piles that allow internal inspection,
reflect light to the pile toe and tape the length inside the pile for indications of toe
damage. For piles that cannot be internally inspected, dynamic measurements
could be made to evaluate problem or pile extraction could be considered for
confirmation of a damage problem.
Driving resistance (blow Review soil borings. If soil borings do not indicate soft layers, pile may be damaged
count) significantly lower below grade. Have wave equation analysis performed and investigate both tensile
than expected during stresses along pile and compressive stresses at tie. If calculated stresses are
driving. within allowable limits, investigate possibility of obstructions/uneven toe contact on
hard layer or other reasons for pile toe damage. If pile was spliced, re-evaluate
splice detail and field splicing procedures for possible splice failure.
Vertical (heave) or lateral Pile movements likely due to soil displacement from adjacent pile driving. Contact
movement of previously geotechnical engineer for recommended action. Possible solutions include redriving
installed piles when of installed piles, change in sequence of pile installation, or predrilling of pile
driving new piles. locations to reduce ground movements. Lateral pile movements could also result
from adjacent slope failure in applicable conditions.
343
2002

Piles driving out of Piles may be moving out of alignment tolerance due to hammer-pile alignment control
alignment tolerance. or due to soil conditions. If due to poor hammer-pile alignment control, a pile gate,
template or fixed lead system may improve the ability to maintain alignment tolerance.
Soil conditions such as near surface obstructions (see subsequent section) or steeply
sloping bedrock having minimal overburden material (pile point detail is important) may
prevent tolerance from being met even with good alignment control. In these cases,
survey the as-built condition and contact the Geotechnical engineer for recommended
action.
Piles driving out of Piles may be moving out of location tolerance due to hammer-pile alignment control or
location tolerance. due to soil conditions. If due to poor hammer-pile alignment control, a pile gate,
template or fixed lead system may improve the ability to maintain location tolerance.
Soil conditions such as near surface obstructions (see subsequent section) or steeply
sloping bedrock having minimal overburden material (pile point detail is important) may
prevent tolerances from being met even with good alignment control. In these cases,
survey the as-built condition and contact the Geotechnical engineer for recommended
action.
Piles encountering If obstructions are within 3 feet of working grade, obstruction excavation and removal is
shallow obstructions. probably feasible. If obstructions are at deeper depth, are below the water table, or the
soil is contaminated, excavation may not be feasible. Spudding or predrilling of pile
locations may provide a solution with method selection based on the type of
obstructions and soil conditions.
Pile encountering If deep obstructions are encountered that prevent reaching the desired pile penetration
obstructions at depth. depth, contact the structural engineer/designer for remedial design. Ultimate capacity
of piles hitting obstructions should be reduced based upon pile damage potential and
soil matrix support characteristics. Additional foundation piles may be necessary.
Concrete piles develop Check hammer-pile alignment since bending may be causing the problem. If the
partial horizontal cracks alignment appears to be normal, tension and bending combined may be too high. The
in easy driving. possible solution is as above with complete cracks.
Concrete pile spalling or Have Geotechnical Section determine pile head stress for observed blow count and
slabbing near pile head. compare with allowable stresses. If high calculated stress, add pile cushioning. If low
calculated stress, investigate pile quality, hammer performance, hammer-pile
alignment.
Concrete piles develop Have Geotechnical Section determine tension stresses along pile for observed blow
complete horizontal counts. If high calculated tension stresses, add cushioning or reduce stroke. If low
cracks in easy driving. calculated tension stresses, check hammer performance and/or perform
measurements.
Concrete piles develop Have Geotechnical Section determine tension stresses along pile. If high calculated
complete horizontal tension stresses, consider heavier ram. If low calculated tension stresses, take
cracks in hard driving. measurements and determine quakes which are probably higher than anticipated.
Concrete piles develop Check hammer-pile alignment since bending may be the problem. If alignment
partial horizontal cracks appears to be normal, tension and bending combined may be too high; solution will
in easy driving. then be the same as for complete cracks above.
Steel pile head deforms, Check helmet size/shape; check steel strength; check evenness of pile head, banding
timber pile top of timber pile head. If okay, have Geotechnical Section determine pile head stress. If
mushrooms. calculated stress is high, reduce hammer energy (stroke) for low blow counts; for high
blow counts, different hammer or pile type may be required.
Unexpectedly low blow Investigate soil borings; if soil borings do not indicate soft layers, pile may be damaged
counts during pile driving. below grade. Have Geotechnical Section investigate both tensile stresses along pile
and compressive stresses at toe. If calculated stresses are acceptable, investigate
possibility of obstructions/uneven toe contact on hard layer or other reasons for pile toe
damage.
344
2002

Higher blow count than Have the Geotechnical Section review the wave equation analysis and check that all
expected. parameters were reasonably considered. Check hammer and driving system. If no
obvious defects are found in driving system, field measurements should be taken.
Problem could be preignition, preadmission, low hammer efficiency, soft cushion,
large quakes, high damping, greater soil strengths, or temporarily increased soil
resistance with later relaxation.
Lower blow count than Probably soil resistance is lower than anticipated. Have the Geotechnical Section
expected. assess soil resistance. Perform restrike testing (soil resistance may have been lot
during driving), establish setup factor and drive to lower capacity. Hammer
performance may also be better than anticipated, check, by measurement.
Diesel hammer stroke The field observed stroke exceeds the calculated stroke by more than 10%.
(bounce chamber Compare calculated and observed blow counts. If observed are higher, soil
pressure) higher than resistance is probably higher than anticipated. If blow counts are comparable, have
calculated. the Geotechnical Section reanalyze with higher combustion pressure to match
observed stroke and assure that preignition is not a problem, e.g., by
measurements.
Diesel hammer stroke The field observed stroke is less than 90% of the calculated stroke. Check that ram
(bounce chamber friction is not a problem (ram surface should have well lubricated appearance).
pressure) lower than Compare calculated and observed blow count. If observed one is lower, soil
calculated. resistance is probably lower than anticipated. If blow counts are comparable,
reanalyze with lower combustion pressure to match observed hammer stroke.
Cannot find hammer in See if there is a hammer of same type, similar ram weight and energy rating and
data file. modify its data.
Cannot find an Both calculated stresses and blow counts are too high. Increase pile impedance or
acceptable hammer to material strength or redesign for lower capacities.
drive pile within driving
stress and driving Alternatively, check whether soil has potential for setup. If soil is fine grained or
resistance limits. known to exhibit setup gains after driving, then end of driving capacity may be
chosen lower than required. Capacity should be confirmed by restrike testing or
static load testing.
345
2002
346
2002
Bridges (Steel Structures)
704.00 BRIDGES (STEEL STRUCTURES) (SSHC Section 708)
704.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work includes the furnishing, preparing and erecting of all riveted, bolted or welded
structures in which the main members spanning the supports are composed of steel.
A. Members of steel structures that are fabricated in the shop are inspected by NDR
personnel before they are shipped to the job site. In some cases, when the fabrication is
done outside of the state, the inspection will take place after delivery to the site of work.
The Project Manager should have a copy of the shop inspection report and the mill test
report before allowing the erection of any portion of the structure. Miscellaneous parts of
the superstructure such as high tensile steel bolts will require field inspection and
sampling according to the "Materials Sampling Guide".
B. Field welding may require the use of special welding electrodes as designated in the
plans, specifications, or special provisions. Some of these welding electrodes may
require special care and handling before their use will be permitted. (See SSHC Section
708.) Enter date steel is verified in SiteManager. Occasionally wrong size is delivered.
C. Concrete Industries rebar shipments will be documented to show bending details, heat
numbers, quantity and project location by stationing.
A. Falsework (SSHC Subsection 704.03)
1. Girders should be blocked so that the weight of any deck overhang does not bend
the girder, which will ripple the deck.
B. Temporary Fastenings
1. Contractors often request permission to use anchor supports for face forms,
concrete curbs, Jersey barriers, raised medians on bridges. Any contractor
desiring to use a temporary floor fastening may be allowed to use only some form
of weakened section bolt or tie, cast in the floor. The weakened section must be
so positioned that when broken off the break will be recessed below the surface.
The resulting void must be patched with mortar.
2. NOTE:
a. No bolt without a weakened section may be used.
b. No holddown device shot into the floor will be allowed.
(1) Concrete arch bridges.
(2) Support of girders or other large structural elements when

required.
347
2002
(3) Unusual or complicated work indicated in the plans.
(4) Support of girders over or under active railroad tracks.
(5) Support of girders carrying traffic or extending over highways or

streets carrying traffic.
C. Submitting Plans
NOTE: Submission of falsework plans does not imply that OSHA regulations are
satisfied, that the NDR, or the Project Manager assumes any liability for the falsework.
Inspectors should not give the contractors advice on how to construct the falsework.
D. Bridges-Steel Beam
1. On bridges using weathering steel (A 588) for steel structures, the contractor
shall:
a. Use "high strength," A325M Type III bolts, A563 Grade DH3 nuts, and F463
Type III washers.
b. Limit shop painting to only areas under expansion joints and all bearings.
Shop painting will be with a Zinc-rich primer and a colored topcoat. Field
touch-up will be required for paint that is damaged and to fasteners in
these areas and it will be done with same color and type of paint as the
original painting.
c. Require special care to assure concrete slobbers are eliminated (or at

least removed) from steel surfaces before the concrete hardens.
Washing with water is the preferred method of removing concrete
slobbers.
348
2002
E. Structural Joints Using High Tensile Steel
g:\bolts.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 10:50:29
Bolts
349
2002
g:\bolts.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 10:53:40
350
2002
1. SSHC Section 1058 requires high tensile steel bolt, nut and washer material for
structural steel joints to meet the requirements of ASTM Designation A 325/A 325M.
2. When heavy hexhead structural bolts and heavy hexagon nuts are used, a hardened
washer is required only under the bolt head, or nut, whichever is the element being
turned. Bolts and nuts may be washer faced, but these faces do not take the place of
a hardened washer.
3. Heavy hexhead structural bolts manufactured to ASTM A 325/A 325M, Types 1, 2 and
3, the dimensions for which are shown in the ASTM tables, are identified on the top of
the head by the legend "A 325", and the manufacturer's symbol.
4. Type 1 bolts, at the option of the manufacturer, may be marked with three radial lines
120 degrees apart.
5. Type 2 bolts shall be marked with three radial lines 60 degrees apart. Type3 bolts
shall have the "A 325" underlined and the manufacturer may add other distinguishing
marks indicating that the bolt is of a weathering type.
6. Heavy hex nuts for A 325 bolts are identified or at least one face by the
manufacturer's mark and the number "2" or "2H", by three equally spaced
circumferential lines, or by the legend "D" or "DH". Heavy hex nuts for A 325 Type 3
bolts shall be marked on one face with three circumferential marks and the numeral
"3", in addition to any other distinguishing marks the manufacturer may elect to use.
7. Washers for A 325 Type 3 bolts shall be marked on one face near the outer edge with
the numeral "3", or other distinguishing marks indicating that the washer is of a
weathering type.
8. The marking on bearing surfaces of nuts and washers shall be depressed.
9. According to the specifications, high strength steel bolts may be installed by the turn
of the nut method. It should be noted that the equivalent torque values given in SSHC
Table 708.03 are experimental approximations and that the footnote to this table
required that the torque-tension ratio be determined under actual conditions of the
application. Wrenches will be calibrated and the torque-tension ratio will be
determined at the site by Materials and Research Division personnel. The
Construction Engineer should be notified as early as possible as to the time when the
wrench and representative bolts will be present at the site in order that arrangements
may be made to have appropriate personnel travel to the site and calibrate the
wrench and establish the torque-tension ratio.
10. When Materials and Research Division personnel have calibrated the wrench and
determined the torque-tension ratio, the bolt tension calibrator will be left with the
project personnel so that the wrench calibration may be checked as the work goes
on. Impact wrenches should be checked on a daily basis and manual torque
wrenches at any time that, in the opinion of the Project Manager, conditions have
varied form those present during the initial calibration.
11. Impact wrenches should be calibrated under the same conditions, such as length of
hose and power supply, that were present during actual installation of the bolts.
351
2002
12. SSHC Subsection 708.03 requires that the structure shall be adjusted to the
requirements of blocking diagram before placing permanent bolts in field connections.
This should be checked by the contractor and verified by the inspector prior to
completing final phase of bolt tightening.
13. All splice plates and contact surfaces shall be clean.
F. High Strength Fasteners (SSHC Section 1058)
METRIC HEAVY HEX BOLTS
g:\bolts.dgn Feb. 04, 1998 09:32:09
D Ds S E H Da R B (Ref.)
Thread Length (Basic)
Bolt
Nomin Lengths
al Bolt Width Width Fillet Bolt >125 Bolt
Size & Body Across Across Head Transiti Radius Length and Lengths
Thread Diamete r Flats Corners Height on Dia. of Fillet s <125 <200 >200
Pitch
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min.
M12x1. 12.70 11.30 21.00 20.16 24.25 22.78 7.95 13.7 0.67 30 36 49
75 7.24
M14x2 14.70 13.30 24.00 23.16 27.71 26.17 9.25 15.7 0.6 34 40 53
8.51
M16x2 16.70 15.30 27.00 26.16 31.18 29.56 10.75 17.7 0.6 38 44 57
9.68
M20x2. 20.84 19.16 34.00 33.00 39.26 37.29 13.40 22.4 0.8 46 52 65
5 12.12
M24x3 24.84 23.16 41.00 40.00 47.34 45.20 15.90 26.4 0.8 54 60 73
14.56
M30x3. 30.84 29.16 50.00 49.00 57.74 55.37 19.75 33.4 1.0 66 72 85
5 17.92
M36x4 37.00 35.00 60.00 58.80 69.28 66.44 23.55 39.4 1.0 78 84 97
21.72
352
2002
1. SSHC Subsection 708.03, Paragraph 10.h. Turn-of-Nut method shall be followed for
tightening all high strength fasteners.
2. High Strength bolts and nuts, which have been torqued as outlined below, shall not be
reused. This includes both black and galvanized bolts and nuts.
a. Bolting
(1) Receiving Shipments
(a) Prior to installation, check shipping certifications and compare

these to bolting kegs on site. Check for size, length, heat
numbers, and general fastener condition i.e., rusted black bolts
or non-lubricated galvanized nuts. Rotational-Capacity (RC)
lots will need to checked.
b. Installation Checklist
(1) A pre-bolting meeting is strongly recommended/encouraged. Bolting

procedures, Turn-of-Nut process described below, and the inspection
process need to be discussed.
(2) Site storage of fasteners is important. Storage should be in a sealed

container within a sheltered storage shed.
(3) Black bolts and nuts shall be oily to the touch when delivered and
installed.
(4) Galvanized nuts shall be checked to verify lubrication. A uniform dye

color indicates lubricant has not been damaged. If there is no color, or
color is not uniform, bolts and nuts shall be field lubricated with bees
wax, stick wax, or other approved dry wax prior to installation.
(5) Rusted or dirty bolts or nuts shall be cleaned and relubricated prior to
installation.
(6) Faying surfaces shall be free of burrs and foreign material; and bolted
faying surfaces are to be painted with zinc rich paint.
(7) All fasteners shall be free of dirt, moisture, rust, and be "well"
lubricated.
(8) Washers (when required) are to be placed under the "turned

element."
(9) Often contract documents will specify which way a bolt is to be

installed. If there is no specific guidance, threaded ends of bolts will
be turned inside and away from normal exposure to pedestrian and/or
vehicular traffic for aesthetic reasons.
353
2002
(10) During installation, particular care should be exercised so a snug-tight

condition is achieved.
c. Rotational-Capacity
(1) The plans and specifications may eventually require a Rotational-

Capacity (RC) test for all "high strength" fasteners. This test confirms
component compatibility and the presence of adequate lubrication.
Currently, it is only required when the Project Manager determines it is
necessary.
(2) There are two separate Rotational-Capacity requirements:
(a). Fasteners (bolts, nuts, and washers) received at the project

shall have been RC tested by the supplier or manufacturer
prior to shipment. Therefore, each combination of production
lots must have an unique RC lot number. This number must
be readily identifiable on each container of fasteners.
(b). Prior to installation, the contractor shall field test all RC lots as
supplied. Field tests are not intended to match the values
provided by the supplier, but as a separate and added
acceptance test.
(c) Field testing procedures are given in SSHC Subsection

708.03, paragraph 10.h.
d. Turn-of-Nut Method
(1) "Turn-of-Nut" method involves the following simple steps. Adherence

to this procedure will assure a properly fitted and clamped connection.
(Refer to SSHC Subsection 708.03.)
(a) Adequate number of bolts and pins shall be installed to bring a

joint in tight contact and alignment. These bolts shall be
brought to a snug-tight condition to insure that the joint is
maintained in good contact during installation of remaining
bolts. A washer shall be placed under the element to be
turned.
(b) Remaining bolts in a connection shall be installed and brought

to a snug-tight condition.
(c) Check initially installed bolts to assure they remained in a

snug-tight condition.
(d) Tighten all bolts by the applicable Turn-of-Nut amount specified

in SSHC Subsection 708.03. Additional rotation depends on
the bolt length to diameter ratio and shape of connected
pieces. For MOST installations (both faces normal to bolt Axis)
the following table can be used to determine additional rotation
for Turn-of-Nut.
354
2002
NOTE: The following table is currently printed in English units only. When Standard
diameter, lengths, and additional rotation values are developed for metric fasteners,
another table will be prepared.
Turn of the Nut

3/4” Dia. Bolts 7/8” Dia. Bolts
Bolt Additional Bolt Additional
Length Rotation Length Rotation
0-3" 1/3 turn 0-3.5" 1/3 turn
>3”-6" 1/2 turn >3.5-7" 1/2 turn
>6" -9" 2/3 turn >7" - 10.5" 2/3 turn
NOTE: All additional rotations have a ± tolerance. Refer to
SSHC Section 708.
1” Dia. Bolts 1 1/8” Dia. Bolts

Bolt Additional Bolt Additional
Length Rotation Length Rotation
0-4" 1/3 turn 0-4.5" 1/3 turn
>4”-8" 1/2 turn >4.5”-9" 1/2 turn
>8" -12" 2/3 turn >9" - 13.5" 2/3 turn
NOTE: All additional rotations have a ± tolerance. Refer to
e. Snug Tight
(1) Snug tight is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies of a
joint are in "firm" contact with each other. There shall not be air gaps
between metal to metal or metal to bolt surfaces. For properly fitting
surfaces, snug tight can usually be accomplished by:
(a) The full effort of a person using an ordinary spud wrench.
(b) A "few impacts" of an impact wrench. To quantify "few

impacts," tighten a few bolts using the full effort method on a
spud wrench. Then apply the job impact wrench, and roughly
check how many impacts it takes to develop at least the same
effort.
(2) After ALL bolts in the connection are snug tight:
(a) ALL nuts shall be match-marked with bolt point nut and base
steel using paint crayon, or other means to provide a straight
reference line for determining final relative rotation of parts
during tightening.
355
2002
(b) All bolts in a connection shall then be tightened additionally by

an applicable amount of nut rotation specified above.
Tightening should progress from the most rigid part of the joint
to its free edges. On our normal web and flange splices, this
would mean beginning at the centerline of a splice and
progressing away (in each direction) from the centerline of
splice.
(3) Inspectors should observe this operation at intervals to make certain

the match-marking is done correctly, and that the opposite bolt head or
nut does not turn during the tightening process. Inspectors also
should check to see if proper rotation has been made considering
tolerances given at the bottom of the nut rotation chart.
f. Inspection Wrench Calibration
(1) Tension Measuring Calibrated Devices
(a) Tension measuring calibrated devices (typically Skidmore-

Wilhelm Calibrator) are calibrated to a high degree of
accuracy, but can lose some of this accuracy after an
extended period of time. Contractors can have the devices
calibrated by the Materials & Research Laboratory.
(b) When each device is calibrated, a calibration sheet will be

issued indicating the date the test was performed. Contractors
must keep the calibration sheet with the tension-measuring
device.
(c) Attentiveness needs to be exercised when using this

Calibration Sheet. The inspector needs to check the sheet and
compare the "Indicated Load on Gauge" column to those
values listed in the "AVG" column under "Actual Load on
Testing Machine." These are usually NOT the same.
NOTE: Be sure to take any difference (INDICATED versus ACTUAL) into account when
calibrating the Job Torque Wrench!
(2) Torque Wrench Calibration
(a) At least once a day, three bolts of the same grade, size, and
condition as those used in the structure shall be placed
individually in a calibration device capable of indicating bolt
tension. A washer shall be used under the part to be turned.
NOTE: There must be 3-5 threads exposed behind the nut. Check and
add washers if required. For longer bolts, steel shim plates should be used.
356
2002
(i) Tension bolt to 100 percent of "Minimum Bolt Tension"

listed for a particular bolt diameter. Tension is read
directly from the tension measuring calibrated device
as corrected by accounting for differences between
INDICATED versus ACTUAL. (Refer to SSHC
Subsection 708.03 for "Minimum Bolt Tension.")
(ii) Apply inspection torque wrench, rotate nut or bolt and

increase tension by an additional 5%. Remember, a
dial type wrench must be set to zero before checking
torque. Record the inspection wrench's "TORQUE"
when 105% of the tension is achieved.
NOTE: The turned element must be moving to indicate the correct torque.
(iii) EXAMPLE: (English units)

Assume:
1. 7/8” Diameter bolt
2. Skidmore Calibration
Minimum Bolt Tension

39,250 lbs-force
Skidmore Calibration
Gauge Reading 40,000 lbs-force
Actual Ave. at 40,000 = 38,800 lbs-force
Calculations
• For 100% tension, corrected Skidmore gauge

should
read:
39,250 + (40,000-38,800) = 40,450 lbs-force
• For 105% tension, corrected Skidmore gauge

should
read:
40,450 x 1.05 = 42,473 lbs-force
(vi) torque reading on Inspection Wrench at 42,47O± lbs-

force is recorded.
(a) Repeat this process for a total of three fasteners.
(b) The inspector notes the torque for three fasteners, averages
this torque, and that becomes the Job Inspection Torque Value
until the wrench is recalibrated the next day, or another size or
length of bolt is to be inspected.
357
2002
The Inspector shall record:
• The job inspection torque.
• The Tension Measuring device's calibration "date reported,"

serial and model number, and calibration lab number.
g. Turn-of-Nut Inspection (SSHC Subsection 708.03)
(1) After all fasteners in a joint are properly tightened by the Turn-of-Nut
method, they shall be inspected as indicated:
(a) Installed fasteners shall be inspected the same day as installed

by the contractor with the inspector present.
(b) The contractor shall use a calibrated torque wrench for the
inspection operation.
(c) Ten percent of the bolts which have been tightened in the
structure shall be tested with the inspection wrench the same
day as installed. At least two bolts, selected at random, in
each connection shall be tested. If no rotation (nut or bolt
head) is noted by job inspecting torque wrench and the faying
surfaces are in tight contact the connection shall be accepted
as properly tightened. If any nut or bolt head is turned, all bolts
in the connection shall be checked, and all bolts whose nut or
head is turned shall be tightened and reinspected.
(d) Bolts tightened by the Turn-of-Nut method may reach tensions

substantially above minimum torque values specified, but this
shall not be cause for rejection.
(e) Care should be taken, however, to not overstress the bolts. If

most of the bolts exceed 20% of minimum bolt tension, the
contractor's procedures should be reviewed to determine:
(i) Is the snug-tight procedure correct?
(ii) Are there nicks or burrs on the threads?
(iii) Are the nuts or bolts rusty or dirty?
(iv) Check for residual lubrication. All threaded fasteners

(black and galvanized) are required to be lubricated.
Black bolts and nuts need to have a water soluble oil,
and galvanized nuts are to be lubricated as per ASTM A
563. Prelubricated galvanized nuts will be dyed
typically to a blue color. If there is no indication of color
OR if the color is faded, the bolts shall be field
lubricated with bees wax, stick wax, or some other dry
lubricant.
358
2002
(v) Is calibrating device correct?
(4) Bolts and nuts must always be inspected prior to installation. Items of
major concern are:
(a) Nicks or burrs in the threads
(b) Rust
(c) Presence of dirt or other foreign material
(d) Fastener lubrication
(e) All dirt, foreign material, and rust must be removed prior to use.
Black bolts may require reoiling to remove rust etc. If reoiling is
required, excess oil must be removed prior to installation.
When rust cannot be removed by oiling, the bolt or nut must be
rejected. Bolts or nuts with nicks or burrs on threads must be
rejected. Relubrication will necessitate rechecking fasteners in
the lot for Rotational-Capacity.
(5) Plan ahead before girder splices have been fully tightened. Make
necessary adjustments prior to tightening the bolts in a connection.
The best way to assure that beam lines are straight and true is to:
(a) Scribe a line at the center of each bearing on all masonry

plates or concrete.
(b) Set beams and make snug tight connections proceeding to the
forward pier. Then go back and straighten the beam line,
checking to be sure bearings remain centered on their seats.
Once the previous span is aligned and tightened, proceed to
the next forward span.
(c) Check to be sure beam ends are aligned prior to tightening the
splice.
(d) This will require coordination between survey and inspection

crews and the contractor.
h. Galvanized Bolts
(1) When using galvanized hardware, a lubricant approved by ASTM A

563 shall be applied to the nuts. Galvanized nuts "typically" are
delivered to the project pre-lubricated. Usually, pre-lubricated nuts are
stained and have a distinguishing color. If a lubricant has been applied
at the fabrication shop, a field reapplication is not necessary provided
original lubrication has not been removed in some manner. For
situations where fabrication shop lubricant is in question, field
application of bees wax, stick wax, or some other dry lubrication shall
be required. Rotational-Capacity requires the test to be conducted
with fasteners in the same condition as they will be during installation.
359
2002
(2) A WORD OF CAUTION:
(a) Lubrication is required to minimize galling during installation.

Since nuts are lubricated (both threads and faces), it is
important that nuts be rotated during tightening.
(b) Fasteners (bolts and nuts of any type) shall not be tightened,
then removed, reinstalled, and retightened.
G. Welding (SSHC Subsection 708.03)
1. Contractors may be allowed to tack weld form hardware to the shear connectors on
steel girders. (The intent is to eliminate the request procedure.)
2. This policy does not apply to the rebar stirrups which extend out of the top of
prestressed girders.
H. Shear Connectors
1. OSHA has made a determination that shear connectors on steel girders are a tripping
hazard. However, OSHA, after receiving petitions from FHWA, AASHTO, and other
organizations, issued relief from the field welding requirements. The Department and
other transportation agencies were concerned that field welded shear connectors
created a bridge that would not be as safe as a bridge with shop welded shear
connectors.
2. Girders may arrive on-site with all the shear connectors shop welded and this will not
be a citable violation of the OSHA shear connector requirements. It will be
considered a “de minimis” violation, or in other words, a minor concern that has a
very low probability of occurrence and where expenditure of resources is not
warranted to ensure compliance.
3. 100 percent conventional fall protection is required for all workers working overhead
(6 feet or higher).
4. Shear connectors may either be shop welded or field welded.
• If they are field welded then the inspector needs to realize that welding shear
connectors is a critical operation. The bridge may fail if the shear connectors
are not welded properly.
• Use a “big” hammer to check field welded shear connectors.
360
2002
Table 708.01
Shear Connector Checklist
1. An arc shield (ferrule) of heat-resistant ceramic or other suitable shall be furnished with each
stud. The material shall not be detrimental to the welds or cause excessive slag and shall
have sufficient strength so as not to crumble or break due to thermal or structural shock before
the weld is completed.
2. Only approved studs shall be used. The arc shield used in production shall be the same as
used in qualification tests.
3. Before installation of the studs, the contractor shall submit to the inspector for approval
information on the studs to be furnished as follows:
a. The name of the manufacturer.
b. A detailed description of the stud and arc shield.
c. A certification from the manufacturer that the stud is qualified as specified in the contract.
d. A copy of the qualification test report as certified by the testing laboratory.
4. The studs, after welding, shall be free from any defect or substance which would interfere with
their function.
5. Studs shall be end welded to steel with automatically timed stud welding equipment connected
to a suitable power source.
6. If two or more stud welding guns are to be operated from the same power source, they shall be
interlocked so that only one gun can operate at a time and so the power source has fully
recovered from making one weld before another weld is started.
7. At the time of welding studs shall be free from any rust, rust pits, scale, oil or other deleterious
matter which would effect the welding operation.
8. Welding shall not be done when the base metal temperature is below 0 degrees or when the
surface is wet or exposed to rain or snow.
9. When necessary to obtain satisfactory welds, the areas on the beam or girder to which the
studs are to be welded shall be brushed or ground free of mill scale or rust.
10. The arc shields or ferrules shall be kept dry. Any arc shield which shows signs of surface
moisture from dew or rain shall be oven-dried at 250 degrees for two hours before use.
11. The first two studs welded on each beam or girder, after being allowed to cool to a temperature
of 150 degrees or less, shall be bent 30 degrees by either striking the studs on the head with a
hammer or placing a pipe or other suitable hollow device over the stud and manually or
mechanically bending the stud.
12. When the temperature of the base metal is below 32 degrees, tow studs in each 100 studs
welded, shall be bent in addition to the first two bent as specified in paragraph 11 above.
13. Studs on which a full 360 degree weld is not obtained shall be repaired by adding a 3/16 inch
fillet weld in place of the lack of weld as ling as the repair weld extends 3/8 of an inch beyond
the area on each end of where the lack of weld was. The shielded metal-arc process with
7018 or 8018 low hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
14. Longitudinal and lateral spacing of studs with respect to each other and to edges of the beam
or girder flanges may vary a maximum of one inch from the location shown on the drawings.
The clear distance between the studs shall not be less than one inch unless approved by the
engineer. The minimum distance from the edge of the stud base to the edge of the flange shall
be the diameter of the stud plus 1/8 inch, but preferably not less than 1-1/2 inch.
15. Prequalification. Studs which are field applied in the flat (down hand) position to a planar and
horizontal surface are deemed prequalified by virtue of the manufacturer’s stud-base
qualification tests and no further application testing is required. The limit of flat position is
defined as 0-15 degree slope on the surface to which the stud is applied.
361
2002
Table 708.02
Shear Connector Welder Qualifications
1. Before any production studs are welded by an operator, they must first shoot tow studs on a
piece of material similar to the production member in thickness and properties. If the actual
thickness is not available, the thickness may vary plus or minus 25%. All test studs shall be
welded in the same general position as required on the production member.
2. The test studs shall be visually examined. They shall exhibit a full 360-degree flash.
3. In addition to the visual examination, the test shall consist of bending the studs after they are
allowed to cool, to an angle of approximately 30 degrees from their original axes by either
striking the studs on the head with a hammer or placing a pipe or other suitable hollow device
over the stud and manually or mechanically bending the stud.
4. If on visual examination the test studs do not exhibit 360 degree flash, or if on testing, failure
occurs in the weld zone of either stud, the procedure shall be corrected, and two more studs
shall be welded to separate material and tested again.
5. If either of the second two studs fails, additional welding shall be continued on separate plates
until two consecutive studs are tested and found to be satisfactory before any production
welding begins.
362
2002
g:\weld1.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 10:11:15
363
2002
g:\weld1.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 10:19:58
I. Trouble Shooting
1. Many operating variables can affect the quality and appearance of the weld. Methods
for correcting undesirable characteristics are discussed in the following paragraphs.
364
2002
J. Weld Spatter
1. Spatter does not affect weld strength but does produce a poor appearance and
increases cleaning costs.
(a) Be sure to control excessive splatter. Try lowering the current. Be sure the
current is within the recommended range for the and size electrode (see
attached Table).
(b) Be sure the polarity is correct for the electrode type.
(c) Try a shorter arc length.
(d) If the molten metal is running in front of the arc, change the electrode angle.
(e) Watch for arc blow.
(f) The electrode is not too wet.
K. Undercut
1. Generally, the only harm from undercutting is impaired appearance. However,

undercutting may also impair weld strength, particularly when the weld is loaded in
tension or subjected to fatigue. To minimize undercut:
(a) Reduce current, travel speed, or electrode size until the puddle is
manageable.
(b) Change electrode angle so the arc force holds the metal in the corners. Use
a uniform travel speed and avoid excessive weaving.
L. Rough Welding
1. If polarity and current are within the electrode manufacturer's recommendations but
the arc action is rough and erratic, the electrodes may be wet. Try electrodes from a
fresh container. If the problem occurs frequently, store open containers of electrodes
in a heated cabinet.
M. Porosity and Surface Holes
1. Most porosity is not visible. But severe porosity can weaken the weld. The following
practices minimize porosity:
(a) Remove scale, rust, paint, moisture, or dirt from the joint. Generally use an
E6010 or E6011 electrode for dirty steel.
(b) Keep the puddle molten for a long time, so that gases may boil out before the
metal freezes.
365
2002
(c) Steels very low in carbon or manganese or those high in sulfur or phosphorus
should be welded with a low-hydrogen electrode. Minimize admixture of base
metal with weld metal by using low currents and fast travel speeds for less
penetration.
(d) Try using a short arc length; short arcs are required for low-hydrogen
electrodes.
2. Surface holes can be avoided by many of the practices used to minimize porosity.
N. Poor Fusion
1. Proper fusion exists when the weld bonds to both walls of the joint and forms a solid
bead across the joint. Lack of fusion is often visible and must be avoided for a sound
weld. To correct poor fusion:
(a) Try a higher current and a stringer-bead technique.
(b) Be sure the edges of the joint are clean, or use an E6010 or E6011 electrode.
(c) If gap is excessive, provide better fitup or use a weave technique to fill the
gap.
O. Shallow Penetration
1. Penetration refers to the depth the weld enters into the base metal. For full-strength
welds, penetration to the bottom of the joint is required. To overcome shallow
penetration:
(a) Try higher currents or slower travel.
(b) Use small electrodes to reach into deep, narrow grooves.
(c) Allow some gap (free space) at the bottom of the joint.
P. Cracking
1. Many different types of cracks may occur throughout a weld. Some are visible and
some are not. However, all cracks are potentially serious, because they can lead to
complete failure of the weld. The following suggestions may help control potential
cracking.
2. Most cracking is attributed to high-carbon or alloy content or high-sulfur content in the

base metal. To control this type of cracking:
(a) Use low-hydrogen electrodes.
(b) Preheat. Use high preheat for heavier plate and rigid joints.
(c) Reduce penetration by using low currents and small electrodes. This
reduces the amount of alloy added to the weld from melted base metal.
366
2002
(d) To control crater cracking, fill each crater before breaking the arc. Use a
back-stepping technique so as to end each weld on the crater of the previous
weld.
3. On multiple-pass or fillet welds, be sure the first bead is of sufficient size and of flat or
convex shape to resist cracking until the later beads can be added for support. To
increase bead size, use slower travel speed, a short arc, or weld 5° uphill. Always
continue welding while the plate is hot.
4. Rigid parts are more prone to cracking. If possible, weld toward the unrestrained
ends. Leave a 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) gap between plates for free shrinkage movement
as the weld cools. Peen each bead while is still hot to relieve stresses.
Q. How to Reduce Arc Blow
1. All arc blow is not detrimental. In fact, a small amount of arc blow can sometimes be
used beneficially to help form the bead shape, control molten slag, and control
penetration.
2. When arc blow is causing or contributing to such defects as undercut, inconsistent

penetration, crooked beads, beads of irregular width, porosity, wavy beads, and
excessive spatter, it must be controlled. Possible corrective measures have already
been suggested in the preceding text. In general, here are some methods that might
be considered:
a. If DC current is being used with the shielded metal-arc process - especially at

rates above 250 amperes - a change to AC current may eliminate problems.
b. Hold as short an arc as possible to help the arc force counteract the arc blow.
c. Reduce the welding current - which may require a reduction in arc speed.
d. Angle the electrode with the work opposite the direction of arc blow.
e. Make a heavy tack weld on both ends of the seam; apply frequent tack welds
along the seam, especially if the fitup is not tight.
f. Weld toward a heavy tack or toward a weld already made.
g. Use a back-step welding technique.
h. Weld away from the ground to reduce back blow; weld toward the ground to
reduce forward blow.
i. With processes where a heavy slag is involved, a small amount of back blow
may be desirable; to get this, weld toward the ground.
j. Wrap ground cable around the work piece and pass ground current through it
in such a direction that the magnetic field set up will tend to neutralize the
magnetic field causing the arc blow.
367
2002
3. The direction of the arc blow can be observed with an open-arc process, but with the
submerged arc process must be determined by the type of weld defect.
4. Back blow is indicated by the following:
a. Spatter.
b. Undercut, either continuous or intermittent.
c. Narrow, high bead, usually with undercut.
d. An increase in penetration.
e. Surface porosity at the finish end of weld on sheet metal.
5. Forward blow is indicated by:
a. A wide bead, irregular in width.
b. Wavy bead.
c. Undercut, usually intermittent.
d. A decrease in penetration.
R. The Effects of Fixturing on Arc Blow
1. Steel fixtures for holding the work pieces may have an effect on the magnetic field
around the arc and, thus, on arc blow. Usually, the fixturing causes no problem with
stick-electrode welding when the current does not exceed 250 amperes. Fixtures for
use with higher currents and with mechanized welding should be designed with
precautions taken so that an arc-blow-promoting situation is not built into the fixture.
2. Each fixturing device may require special study to ascertain the best way to prevent
the fixture from interfering deleteriously with the magnetic fields. The following are
some points to note:
a. Fabricate the fixture from low-carbon steel. This is to prevent the buildup of
permanent magnetism in the fixture.
b. Welding toward the closed end of "horn type" fixtures reduces back blow.
c. Design the fixture long enough so that end tabs can be used if necessary.
d. Do not use a copper strip inserted in a steel bar for a backing. The steel part
of the backup bar will increase arc blow.
e. Provide for continuous or close clamping of parts to be seam-welded. Wide,

intermittent clamping may cause seams to gap between clamping points,
resulting in arc blow over the gaps.
368
2002
f. Do not build into the fixture large masses of steel on one side of the seam
only. Counterbalance with a similar mass on the other side.
A. Structural steel is usually measured by the pound (kg). Structural steel for handrail is also
measured by the pound. Ornamental handrails are measured by the lineal feet of rail
between end posts. These values are listed on the plans and may be used in the final
computation for payment.
A. PMs are authorized to pay for steel plates and shapes as soon as the material arrives at the
fabricator.
B. The Nebraska Department of Roads had determined that it may be possible to improve
inspection procedures and to lower construction costs on bridges and other structures
where significant quantities of steel are required if stockpiled materials are paid for upon
receipt by the fabricator. Therefore, the Department will allow partial payments for stockpiled
steel plates and shapes prior to fabrication. The procedure that must be followed before
partial payment will be made is as follows:
1. The prime contractor must request partial payment from the Department’s Project
Manager for the specific project where payment is requested.
2. The Bridge Divisions, Fabrication Inspector [(402)-479-4763] will be responsible for

verifying fabricators’ invoices and forwarding them to the project managers; for
verifying manufacturer’s Certified Mill Test Report and forwarding copies to the PM
and M&R Division; and for inspection of the steel.
3. The fabricator must provide the Department’s Fabrication Inspector the steel
manufacturer’s paid invoice for the material. The Project Manager will make the
payment for the amount shown on the invoice, which directly is attributed to the
project for which payment is being considered. The invoice should be annotated to
show:
(a) the project number
(b) steel quantity in pounds applicable to the project
(c) material grade
(d) material heat number
4. There must be identifying marks placed on each piece for which payment will be
made.
369
2002
5. Steel must be stored in orderly fashion to readily facilitate identification of specific

materials to specific projects. Project materials cannot be commingled with other
projects – each project’s materials must have a separate location.
6. The Manufacturer’s Certified Mill Test Reports must be provided to and approved by
the Bridge Division before payment will be authorized. The Bridge Division will notify
the Project Manager when payment is authorized.
7. The Department will verify that the material is properly stored before payment will be
made.
8. The Prime Contractor will make payment to the fabricator within 20 days after the
Department has paid for the material.
9. Payment is only authorized for materials that are stored within Nebraska as specified
in Subsection 109.07 of the Nebraska Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction.
370
2002
Bridge Decks and Overlays
705.00 REINFORCEMENT (SSHC Section 707)
705.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The reinforcement of concrete for structures consists of furnishing and placing deformed
metal reinforcing bars or welded-wire fabric in the concrete as required by the plans and
specifications.
705.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS (SSHC Subsection 707.02)
A. Samples of reinforcing steel and welded-wire fabric are required by the Central Laboratory
unless these materials are shipped from tested stock. Generally reinforcing steel has been
sampled and tested before shipment to the project, and will arrive with acceptance tags
attached. At the time this steel is placed in the work, the structure inspector should collect,
record in field book, and submit the tags to the Project Manager. Steel arriving untagged
should not be incorporated in the work until approved by the Materials Engineer. See the
"Materials Sampling Guide".
B. The Materials and Research Division requires that two 6 ft (2.0 m) sample lengths of epoxy-
coated reinforcing steel be submitted for testing purposes, and a special provision to that
effect will be included in future contracts.
C. Similarly, the Materials Sampling Guide requires two 6 ft (2.0 m) sample lengths for
uncoated reinforcement bars be provided (unless shipped from tested and approved stock).
Enter the date resteel is verified on-site in SiteManager.
705.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (SSHC Subsection 707.03)
A. Placement and Checking (Bridge Deck)
1. Bridge plans specify nominal slab thickness and nominal clearance of reinforcing
bars from face of the concrete. This section will establish acceptable deviations from
nominal plan dimensions.
2. Four dimensions must be given special attention when checking placement of bridge
slab reinforcing:
(a) Slab thickness.
(b) Clearance of bottom reinforcement from bottom of slab.
(c) Distance from bottom of slab to top of top mat of reinforcement.
(d) Cover over top mat of reinforcement
B. Slab Thickness
1. This shall be the nominal slab thickness shown on the plans with a tolerance of
minus zero and plus ½ inch (13 mm).
371
2002
C. Clearance of Slab Reinforcement
1. The reinforcing steel shall be placed to monitor the nominal clearances shown in the
plans ± ¼ inch (5 mm). Contractors must provide an adequate number of bolsters
and/or bar chairs of suitable height and strength to maintain clearance within this
range.
2. Contractors must provide an adequate (sag shall be minimal, see SSHC Figure
707.01) number of bar chairs of suitable height and strength to maintain the distance
within this range of tolerance.
D. Protection of Material (SSHC Subsection 707.03)
1. The Specifications provide that steel reinforcement shall be protected at all times
from damage. When placed in the work, it shall be free of dirt, loose scale,
detrimental rust, paint, oil or any foreign material. Detrimental rust is defined as
heavy reddish coating formed on iron or steel when chemically attached by moist air.
This must be removed by wire brushing. However, a light layer of rust or mill scale
that is not readily removed with a wire brush is acceptable.
E. Placing and Fastening (SSHC Subsection 707.03)
1. Positioning - It is essential that inspectors give special attention to the placement of

reinforcing steel in all structures. Reinforcement shall be placed in the exact position
shown in the plans and held securely in that position to preclude movement or shifting
during placement of the concrete. On a 7 inch (175 mm) thick bridge floor, designed
with the top steel 1 ¾ inch (45 mm) below the surface, a sag or displacement in the
top steel of only ½ inch (13 mm) will reduce the strength of the floor 19 percent. The
reduction in strength of thinner sections such as culvert slabs and walls is even more
critical.
2. Present policy is to tie all bar intersections except when the bar spacing is less than
12 inches (300 mm) in both directions in which case alternate intersections may be
tied. This requirement is enforceable through SSHC Subsection 707.03 in that it
specifically defines the frequency of tieing. The Project Manager should thoroughly
study the project documents in order to be aware of this requirement as well as any
change which might occur in this revision.
3. Horizontal reinforcement in slabs shall be spaced vertically by means of approved

metal chairs. The type and adequacy of bar support systems which includes the
spacing of bar supports shall be in accordance with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute's "Manual of Standard Practice", unless other stipulations are provided in the
contract provisions. A copy of this manual may be obtained from the District
Construction Engineer. Bar supports which are located at exposed concrete
surfaces shall be galvanized, plastic coated or stainless steel to a depth of ½ inch
(13 mm) minimum from the concrete surface. Chairs may also be used to keep
vertical columns and wall steel from contacting the form.
372
2002
4. Field welding will be permitted only when shown on the plans or with written
permission of the Construction Engineer. Reinforcement can best be checked as the
work progresses rather than waiting until the contractor has enclosed the
reinforcement with forms. In the case of walls and columns it is virtually impossible
to do the checking after the forms are in place. When bent bars are used, a check
should be made that there are no cracks or splits at the bends. Stirrup hooks should
be rotated to different positions in order that the hooks do not fall in the same location
when a series of stirrups are used in beams or columns.
5. No welding will be allowed on the main vertical steel of high mast lighting tower
foundations except at the very top and bottom where the end loops may be tack
welded. If a more rigid cage is desired, additional vertical steel will be required to act
as the frame and lifting points for the cage. The required loops may be tack welded
to this additional vertical steel. The required vertical steel will then need to be wire
tied to the tack welded loops.
6. Welding of all loops, other than the top and bottom loop, to the required vertical steel
will not be allowed. Additional bracing may be tack welded to the added vertical bars,
if required. The added vertical bars should be sized to support the required load.
7. SSHC Subsection 704.03 requires the contractor to give the Project Manager
sufficient advance notice before starting concrete operations in any unit of a
structure, to permit the inspection of forms and reinforcing bars. The Project
Manager shall require all reinforcing steel to be accurately placed and firmly held in
position.
F. Special Attention Areas
1. Tie-Downs and Supports
a. SSHC Subsection 707.03 require that the top mat of reinforcing steel is to be
tied down at not greater than 4 feet (1.2 m) spacing measured in each
direction. This requirement can partially be met by wiring the top mat down to
shear lugs at 4 feet (1.2 m) spacing along the beam. Regardless of beam
spacing, the top mat must be tied to the forms or the bottom reinforcing mat
at 4 feet (1.2 m) spacing. Likewise, the top reinforcing mat is to be tied to the
bottom reinforcing mat on a 4 feet (1.2 m) grid in floors of concrete slab
bridges. Tying should include bars near the ends of the bridge and bars near
the curbs. At least 50 percent of the bar contacts must be tied unless
the spacing is more than 1 ft (300 mm) and then every bar contact must
be tied.
2. Epoxy Coated Bar
a. Epoxy coated reinforcing steel requires the use of epoxy or plastic coated bar
supports and tie wires (SSHC Subsection 707.03). Epoxy coated tie wires
may tend to slide or break. If this occurs, they should be double tied or
stronger ties used.
373
2002
3. Clearance Check
b. The specified clear distance from surface to reinforcing steel must be

maintained. To check this, a clearance guide ¼ inch (5 mm) less in
thickness than the specified clearance to top steel should be temporarily
fastened to the bottom of the finishing machine screed. The finishing
machine should then be operated along the bridge to insure that proper
clearance is obtained. It will be necessary to bend all tie wire loops down to
permit the clearance gauge to pass. Any steel not properly placed must be
corrected.
4. Checks During Placement
a. Checks of slab thickness and cover over top reinforcement must be made in
the finished concrete directly behind the finish machine. A thickness and
cover check should be made at the same location of an approximate grid of
10 ft (3 m) transverse and 20 ft (6 m) longitudinal. These checks must be
documented in the field book. When the slab is of deficient thickness or cover
checks indicate incorrect rebar placement corrections must be made
immediately.
5. Cleaning Forms and Steel
a. Mud and other foreign material must be removed from the steel and forms
prior to placement. Remove any trapped/ponded water before placing the
concrete.
G. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement (SSHC Section 1021)
1. Epoxy coatings are applied to reinforcing bars by a fusion-bonded process. This

means the coating achieves adhesion to the bar as a result of a heat-catalyzed
reaction. Besides chemical adhesion, there is also physical adhesion of the coating
to the bar.
H. Care and Handling
1. Epoxy coated bars are subjected to many quality control tests and inspections prior
to leaving the supplier's facility. However, from that point forward, careless handling
and construction practices can cause excessive coating damage. Contractors
should be strongly encouraged to exercise care in handling, storage, and placing of
epoxy coated bars. If problems are noted after delivery, the inspector is to contact
the Materials and Research Division.
2. Handling
a. During unloading epoxy coated bars from the truck, care must be exercised to
minimize scraping of the bundles or bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in the
bundles. Skidding bundles from the truck onto the ground should not be
allowed. Use of power hoisting equipment for unloading and handling is
strongly encouraged. Further, equipment for handling the bars should have
374
2002
protective contact areas. Specifically, nylon slings or padded wire rope slings
should be used and bundles should be lifted at multiple pick-points.
3. Storage
a. Epoxy coated bars should be stored on timbers or other suitable protective

cribbing. All types of reinforcing bars should be stored off the ground as close
as possible to the area where they will be used. The following storage
practices are suggested to prevent damage:
b. Store bars above the ground on timbers, cribbing, or dunnage placed close
enough together to prevent sags in the bundles.
c. If a large quantity of bars has to be stored in a small area, bundles can be

stacked if adequate blocking is placed between the layers.
d. While fading of the coating's color is not specifically detrimental, it should be

avoided to the fullest extent possible. One recommended method is to cover
exposed bundles with burlap or dark plastic.
NOTE: If plastic or other nonporous material is used for covering, the ends must be left
open to allow air movement. Without this, condensation under the cover could cause
damage.
e. Long-term site storage (from one year to the next) of epoxy coated bars is not
recommended.
4. Placing
a. Placing of epoxy coated bars is done similar to uncoated bars. The KEY
exception is that coated bars require more careful handling and placing.
Once bundles have been opened, dragging one bar over another or over any
abrasive surface MUST be avoided.
b. After epoxy coated bars are placed, walking on the bars by construction
personnel should be held to a minimum. Bars in high traffic areas or runways
for concrete placement should be protected with plywood or other suitable
material. Concrete placement equipment shall not be placed on, or supported
by, any reinforcing steel.
c. Bar supports and tie wires for epoxy coated reinforcement shall be coated
with epoxy, nylon, or plastic.
I. Field Inspection
1. Epoxy coated bars should be inspected for damaged coating:
a. when received at the job site, and
b. after they are placed in the structure.
375
2002
2. Damage Evaluation and Repair
a. Damaged coating shall be evaluated as outlined below. The "holiday detector"

should be used to determine coating flaws.
b. Bent Bars
(1) Examination of physical coating condition on the outside radii of hooks

and other bends might reveal cracks in the coating. When cracking of
the coating is evident, the contractor must remove loose coating,
clean the area, and repair.
c. Fading of Color
(1) When epoxy coated bars are exposed to sunlight over a period of time,
fading of the color may occur. Since discoloration does not harm the
coating nor affect its corrosion protection properties, such fading will
not be cause for rejection.
d. Damaged Ends
(1) Damage to ends because of field shearing, dragging or whatever must

be repaired in the field.
J. Repair of Damaged Coating
1. When a damaged coating must be repaired, the patching or touch-up material should
be applied in strict accordance with the instructions furnished by the manufacturer.
Generally, surface preparation consists of a THOROUGH manual cleaning of
damaged areas, including complete removal of: (1) unbonded epoxy and (2) all rust.
Cleaning is usually accomplished with a power driven wire brush, hand steel brush,
and/or emery paper. Care should be exercised during preparation so that excessive
sound epoxy is not damaged. Acceptance criteria for epoxy repair and touchup
materials is in accordance with the original epoxy resin manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Epoxy coated reinforcing steel is used in concrete bridge decks to prevent spalling of
the concrete which is, in turn, caused by the corrosion of the reinforcing steel. The
epoxy coating prevents the corrosion of the reinforcing steel. Two factors influence
the capability of the coating to prevent corrosion. One of these factors is the
thickness of the coating. The other factor is the integrity of the coating, i.e., the
absence or presence of defects in the coating which would allow moisture and de-
icing chemicals to reach the metal itself.
3. The epoxy coating on the rebars may have three types of defects when the bars
arrive at the site. One of these is defined in the Specifications as a "holiday." A
holiday is a small hole in the coating which is not visible to the naked eye. This type
of defect is the result of some inadequacy in the application process. Holidays can
be detected only with an electronic detector and the Specifications permit two
holidays per 1 foot (300 mm).
376
2002
4. The second type of defect, which may be present in the epoxy coating when the bar
arrives at the site, is defined as handling damage. Handling damage may take the
form of scuffs, scars, scratches or any other wound to the coating caused by rough
handling. The Specifications permit a "reasonable" amount of handling damage.
Handling damage is generally visible to the naked eye since rust will form over the
damaged spot after a sufficient amount of time passes. A fresh cut or scar in the
coating would probably be difficult to locate visually, but would be readily picked up
with an electronic detector.
5. The third type of defect, which may be present in the epoxy coating when the bar
arrives at the site, is due to what may be considered as an "uncoatable" bar. During
the rolling process, some bars are formed with very sharp edges on the deformations
and ribs.
6. These edges are very difficult to coat adequately, and coating applicators usually
avoid coating bars so formed. The defect in coating on these edges may or may not
be visible to the naked eye. This particular defect can be detected with an electronic
detector. When this defect is present, the detector will indicate this flaw by a
constant 'beeping' when run along a rib. In most instances, the thickness of the
epoxy coating will be very low in these areas or there may be no coating at all where
the sharp edges are present.
7. Materials and Research Division personnel will inspect epoxy coated rebars at the
coating applicator's plant in some, but not, all cases. In cases where inspection is
made at the applicator's plant, the bars will have a maximum of two holidays per
meter, plus handling damage, is allowed, when they arrive at the site. In addition, the
coating thickness, on bars inspected at the applicator's plant, must meet the
specification requirements for thickness of coating. Bars not so inspected at the
applicator's plant will have an unknown number of holidays and possibly uncoated
sharp edges plus handling damage when they arrive at the site and, in addition, the
coating thickness will not have been checked. Bars that contain rolling defects or
have uncoated sharp edges that are found during the inspection shall be rejected.
8. The basis for acceptance will be the total of defects per 1 foot (300 mm) of bar, i.e.,
holidays plus handling defects as located with the electronic detector.
9. A total of six defects in any 1 foot (300 mm) of the bar will be permitted. As an
example, in a bar of given length, if any 1 foot (300 mm) section of that bar has no
more than the two allowable holidays and four handling defects, the bar is acceptable,
providing none of the four handling defects has an area greater than 0.0025 ft.2
(225 mm²). [A square measuring 0.05 ft x 0.05 ft (15 mm x 15 mm) has an area of
0.0025 ft.2 (225 mm²)]. All handling defects having an area greater than 225 mm²
must be repaired.
10. The following points may be helpful in the inspection and repair of epoxy coated
rebars in the field.
a. Inspect bars for coating defects, using the electronic detector, as they come
out of the bundle.
377
2002
b. It may not be necessary to check all bars in each bundle, but enough bars out
of each bundle should be checked in order to determine the quality of coating
on all bars in the bundle.
c. When the number of defects per 1 foot (300 mm) section exceeds six, only
the number of defects necessary to bring the bar into compliance need be
repaired. Only exception is that all defects greater than .00005 in2 (.035 mm²)
must be repaired.
d. Repair of defects is accomplished with an approved two component epoxy

compound supplied by the coating manufacturer.
e. Epoxy compounds used for repair have a minimum temperature at which they
may be used and a limited pot life, as recommended by the manufacturer.
f. Any rust showing through the defect must be removed before applying the
epoxy compound. A file or grinding wheel may be used provided no
substantial reduction in the area of the bar occurs.
g. Coating thickness of the painted repair area must be as specified for the
factory applied coating.
h. Coating on bars may be damaged during placement at the site. Such

damage to the bars must be repaired when the bars are in place, if the six
defects per 1 foot (300 mm) section limitation is exceeded.
i. Check coating thickness if bars were not inspected at the coating applicator's
plant. This should be done as they come out of the bundle. Coating
thickness is checked with a magnetic thickness gage.
j. To obtain a holiday detector, contact the nearest branch laboratory or the

Construction Division. "Electometer" magnetic thickness gages may be
obtained by requisition from the Engineering Equipment Section, "Inspector"
or "Microtest" thickness gages which are used for checking paint film
thickness cannot be used for checking epoxy coating thickness on reinforcing
steel.
11. For situations where there is no information available as to what type of touch-up
material should be used, 3M Corporation has two products available:
a. SCOTCHKOTE 213 is often used to repair minor nicks and gouges.
b. SCOTCHKOTE 312 is a two component epoxy that has been used to repair
both small and large areas of damage.
NOTE: Repaired areas do not have as much corrosion or abrasion resistance as factory-
applied coatings.
378
2002
K. Bar Designation System
1. You must be very careful when you review a bar list. Currently, steel bar in the USA
is usually measured in English units. Do not assume anything; measure to be sure
you are getting the correct size. In general, the mark number for reinforcing bars as
shown in the plans generally uses the following designation system. The first letter or
letters identify the general location of the bar such as abutment, pier, or slab bar.
Location Code
Abutment A
Pier P
Slab S
2. The first number or numbers indicate the size of the bar and the last two numbers
indicate whether the bar is bent or straight. (Even numbers are straight bars and odd
numbers are bent bars.)
3. For example, P1002 would be a straight No. 10 bar located in the pier; A415 would be
a bent No. 4 bar located in the abutment. The last two numbers also indicate the
approximate length of the bar. The lower the number the longer the bar; for example,
a S602 bar would indicate the longest, straight, No. 6 bar used in the slab, whereas a
S612 bar would indicate that there are five groups of straight, No. 6 bars that are
longer than the S612 in the slab. The reinforcing steel table in Appendix 4 lists
pertinent information concerning the standard bar designation system.
L. Splicing
1. All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated in the plans. Splices,
not shown in the plan, shall not be allowed without approval of the Project Manager.
Welding shall be allowed only if shown in the plans or authorized by the Construction
Engineer in writing.
2. When splices are required, they should be staggered as far as possible in order that
a plane of weakness is not caused in the member. The laps should be at least as
long as is shown in the plans and if no lap is shown, the bars should be lapped as
required in SSHC Subsection 707.03. Splices should preferably be made in areas of
low stress concentration. The bars in the top of a slab or beam should be spliced in
a positive moment section (bottom of slab or beam in tension) and the bars in the
bottom of a slab or beam should be spliced in a negative moment section (top of slab
or beam in tension). For example, the longitudinal bars in the top of a slab should be
spliced near the center of the span rather than over a pier and the longitudinal bars in
the bottom of the slab should be spliced near the pier rather than in the middle of a
span. Following is a tabulation of 24 and 36 diameter lap requirements for the various
sizes of rebars.
379
2002
ASTM Standard Reinforcing Bars

Nominal Dimensions - Round Sections
Bar Size Weight Diameter Cross-Sectional Perimeter
Designation Pounds per Foot Inches Area - Sq. Inches Inches
#3 .376 .375 .11 1.178
#4 .668 .500 .20 1.571
#5 1.043 .625 .31 1.963
#6 1.502 .750 .44 2.356
#7 2.044 .875 .60 2.749
#8 2.670 1.000 .79 3.142
#9 3.400 1.128 1.00 3.544
#10 4.303 1.270 1.27 3.990
#11 5.313 1.410 1.56 4.430
#14 7.650 1.693 2.25 5.320
#18 13.600 2.257 4.00 7.090
LAP REQUIREMENTS
Metric English 24 Diameter Lap 36 Diameter Lap
Bar Size Bar Size Grade 40 Steel Grade 60 Steel
10 2 6 in (150 mm) 9 in (225 mm)
10 3 9 in (225 mm) 14 in (350 mm)
10 4 12 in (300 mm) 18 in (450 mm)
15 5 15 in (375 mm) 23 in (575 mm)
15 6 18 in (450 mm) 27 in (675 mm)
25 7 21 in (525 mm) 32 in (800 mm)
25 8 24 in (600 mm) 36 in (900 mm)
30 9 27 in (675 mm) 41 in (1025 mm)
30 10 30 in (750 mm) 44 in (1100 mm)
35 11 33 in (825 mm) 49 in (1225 mm)
3. There are times when splicing of rebar in a manner other than lapping is necessary.
Examples include:
a. Complicated placement where the cage could be tied off site, in sections, and
set in place.
b. Reinforcement cages for drilled shafts.
c. Situations where an existing rebar is not long enough to develop strengths by

lapping.
4. Example: During removal of an existing curb on a bridge deck widening project

existing rebar is either cut with the saw or broken during concrete demolition. In this
case additional demolition is needed to provide a lap development length.
380
2002
5. Mechanical splices are only authorized where shown in the plans and materials must
be in the NDR Approved Products List. Currently, several couplers are manufactured
which can be used to mechanically splice rebar. Mechanical splices, for field
approval, shall develop 125% of the rebar's yield strength. Consideration for splice
usage must be initiated by the contractor. The Project Manager is to forward that
request to the Construction Division for review.
705.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT (SSHC Subsection 707.04)
A. Reinforcing steel for concrete structures is measured by the pound. Quantities to be paid for
are computed from the theoretical mass of bars and wire mesh. The mass of steel
reinforcement required for structures of varying sizes is usually given in tables on standard
and special plans. The quantities contained therein may be used for computing final
payment for structures except bridges. Plan quantity may be used for final quantity
reinforcing steel for bridges.
381
2002
706.00 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (SSHC Section 704)
706.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the Specifications deals with the construction of structures composed of
portland cement concrete. This work includes constructing, setting and supporting the
forms, and handling, placing, finishing and curing the concrete for bridges, box culverts, arch
culverts, headwalls, retaining walls and steps, and the miscellaneous structures listed in the
incidental construction portion of the Specifications.
A. Composition of Concrete
1. The class of concrete to be used in the work is specified in the plans or special
provisions and shall be one of those described in SSHC Subsection 1002.02. In the
event that the contractor has a choice of several classes, he/she is required to advise
the Project Manager by letter of the one to be used. This information should be
obtained prior to any concrete construction to allow engineering personnel to make
provisions for necessary inspection and testing. The contractor may not change
classes of concrete during construction without the written permission of the Project
Manager.
2. SSHC Subsection 1002.03 prescribes requirements for concrete materials. The

Contractor’s responsibility for material requirements may be summarized as follows:
a. Check with Materials & Research as to the approval of cement, coarse

aggregate, fine aggregate, air-entraining agent and curing compound.
b. Submit samples of non-approved materials to the Central Testing Laboratory

in sufficient time before use to allow time to receive results. The size and
frequency of samples are provided in the "Materials Sampling Guide".
c. Materials for which approval has not been received must not be used in the
work.
3. The inspector is concerned not only with the approval of materials but also with the
storage of materials. Bag cement shall be stored in a dry location. If stacked more
than 8 bags high for a period of time the lower layers take on a "warehouse set" and
should not be used. Cement stored over 90 days must be retested before use.
B. Admixtures
1. Admixtures are those ingredients in concrete other than portland cement, water, and
aggregates, that are added to the mixture immediately before or during mixing.
Admixtures typically encountered on our jobs can be classified by function as follows:
a. Air entraining admixtures (optional)
b. Water reducing admixtures (optional)
382
2002
c. Set retarding admixtures (required)
d. Set accelerating admixtures (optional)
e. Finely divided and permeability mineral admixtures (Fly Ash & Silica Fume)
(optional)
f. Coloring agents (normally not used for NDR work) (optional)
2. The amount of any admixture used in a mix should be as recommended by the

manufacturer. Effectiveness of an admixture depends upon such factors as type,
brand, and amount of cement; water content; aggregate shape; gradation and
proportions; mixing time; slump; and temperatures of concrete and air.
3. Concrete with a low air content shall not be incorporated into work. One addition of
air entraining admixture is allowed at the site according to specification.
4. Concrete with a high air content should not be incorporated into work except under
extreme circumstances. If low compressive strengths result, the concrete may be
required to be removed and replaced. (SSHC Subsection 106.05)
C. Air Entraining Admixtures
1. Air entraining admixtures are used to purposely entrain microscopic air bubbles in
concrete. Air entrainment will dramatically improve the durability of concrete exposed
to moisture during cycles of freezing and thawing. Entrained air greatly improves
concrete's resistance to surface scaling caused by chemical deicers.
2. Rules-of-Thumb
a. As cement content increases, air agent must increase to maintain equal

entrained air.
b. As cement fineness increases, the amount of air agent must increase to

maintain equal entrained air.
c. As coarse aggregate size decreases, the air content increases for a given
amount of air agent.
d. As fine aggregate volume increases, the air content increases for a given
amount of air agent.
e. As mixing water increases, the air content increases for a given amount of air
agent.
f. Air entraining admixtures should be introduced into mix at the plant, but
additional may be added at the site to adjust mix for correct air content.
g. Air entraining admixtures should (usually) be added to the front of the truck at
the plant. If corrosion inhibiting admixture is used, air entraining agents should
be added to the back of the truck.
383
2002
D. Water Reducing Admixtures (Type A) (optional)
1. Water reducing admixtures are used to reduce the quantity of mixing water required
to produce concrete of a certain slump or reduce the water/cement ratio. Regular
water reducers reduce water content by about 5% to 10%.
2. Adding a water reducing admixture to a mix without reducing water content can
produce a mixture with a much higher slump.
a. Rules-of-Thumb
(1) Typically, water reducing admixtures do not reduce the rate of slump
loss; in most cases, it is increased. Rapid slump loss results in
reduced workability and less time to place concrete at the higher
slump.
(2) Typically, water reducing admixtures decrease on bleed water

because less water is available.
(3) Certain types of sulfate starved portland cements may cause false set
with certain brands of water reducers. Typically, water reducers
contain lignosulfonates and these sulfates are easily attracted by
sulfate starved cements. This action may cause early false set.
(4) Despite reduction in water content, water reducing admixtures can

cause a significant increase in drying shrinkage.
E. High Range Water Reducing Admixtures (Type F) (optional)
1. They are added to concrete with low-to-normal slump and water content to make high
slump "flowable" concrete. Flowable concrete is a highly fluid, but workable concrete
that can be placed with little or no vibration and can still be free of excessive bleeding
or segregation. Flowable concrete has applications:
a. In areas of closely spaced and congested reinforcing steel.
b. In tremied concrete where "self consolidation" is desirable.
c. In pumped concrete to reduce pump pressure.
d. To produce low water/cement ratio - high strength concrete. High-range

"super plasticizers" can reduce water content by about 12% to 30%.
2. Rules-of-Thumb
a. The effect of most super plasticizers in increasing workability or flowable

concrete is short lived. Typically, maximum is 30 to 60 minutes followed by a
very rapid loss in workability.
384
2002
b. Typically, super plasticizers are added as split treatments (part at the plant
part at the site). Sometimes the addition is totally at the site.
c. Setting time may be affected depending on the brand used, dosage rate, and
interaction with other admixtures.
d. Excessively high slumps of 10 inches (250 mm) or more may cause

segregation.
e. High-slump, low water/cement super plasticized concrete has less dry-

shrinkage than does high-slump high water/cement conventional concrete.
f. Effectiveness of super plasticizer is increased with an increased amount of

cement and/or increased fineness of cement.
g. Effectiveness of water reducers on concrete is a function of their chemical

composition, cement composition and fineness, cement content concrete
temperature, and other admixtures being used.
h. Some water reducing admixtures, such as lignosulfonates, may also entrain

some air in the mix.
F. Retarding Admixtures (required)
1. Retarding admixtures (retarders) are used to delay the initial set of concrete. High
temperatures of fresh concrete 85°F (30°C) and up often cause an increased rate of
hardening. Since retarders do not decrease the initial temperature of concrete, other
methods of counteracting the effect of temperature must be used.
2. Rules-of-Thumb
a. Retarders are sometimes used to delay initial set of concrete when difficult,
long placement times, or unusual placement conditions exist.
b. Retarders offset the set acceleration effect of hot weather.
c. Retarders can be added at the site.
d. In general, some reduction in strength at early ages (one to two days)

accompanies the use of retarders.
e. Use of retarders must be closely monitored, because there is probably no

single admixture which has caused more field problems.
f. If too much retarder has been used in a mix:
(1) Time will usually counter the effects.
(2) Be sure to maintain the cure during the added time.

G. Accelerating Admixtures (optional)
385
2002
1. Accelerating admixtures (accelerators) are used to accelerate the setting time and
strength development of concrete at an early age. Strength development can also be
accelerated by using:
a. Type III "high-early" cement
b. Lowering water/cement ratio
c. Curing at controlled higher temperatures
2. Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) is the material most commonly used in accelerating
admixtures. Besides accelerating strength gain, calcium chloride also causes an
increase in drying shrinkage, potential reinforcement corrosion, discoloration, and
potential scaling.
a. Rules-of-Thumb
(1) Always add calcium chloride in solution form as part of the mixing
water.
(2) Calcium chloride is not an antifreeze agent. When used in allowable
amounts, it will only reduce the freezing point of concrete by a few
degrees (may cause deck cracks).
H. Finely Divided Mineral Admixtures
1. These admixtures are powdered or pulverized materials added to concrete to
improve or change the properties (plastic or hardened) of concrete. Based on the
mineral's chemical or physical properties, they are classified as: (1) Cementitious,
(2) Pozzolans, (3) Pozzolanic and Cementitious, and (4) Nominally inert. Typical
PCC mix designs use pozzolanic and cementitious minerals.
2. Pozzolanic Materials
a. A pozzolan is a siliceous or aluminosiliceous material that in itself possesses
little or no cementitious value but will, in finely divided form and in the
presence of water, chemically react with the calcium hydroxide released by
the hydration of portland cement to form compounds possessing
cementitious properties. Pozzolans include fly ash and silica fume.
3. Fly Ash (Class C & F)
a. Fly ash is a finely divided residue that results from the combustion of
pulverized coal in electric power plants.
4. Silica Fume
a. Silica fume, also referred to as micro-silica or condensed silica fume, is

another material that is used as a pozzolanic admixture. This light to dark
gray powdery product is a result of the reduction of high-purity quartz with coal
in an electric arc furnace.
386
2002
b. Fly ash and silica fume have a spherical shape. Silica fume has an extremely
small particle size (about 100 times smaller than the average cement
particle). Although silica fume is normally in powder form, because of its
small size and increased ease of handling the product is commonly available
in liquid form.
c. Rules-of-Thumb
(1) Mixes containing fly ash will generally require less water (about 1% to
10%) for a given slump. Silica fume concrete requires more water for
a given slump.
(2) The amount of air-entraining admixture required to obtain a specified

air content is normally greater when fly ash or silica fume is used. The
amount of air-entraining admixture for a certain air content is a function
of the fineness, carbon content and alkali content.
(3) Fly ash will generally improve the workability of concretes of equal
slump. However, fly ash in low slump concrete will tend to tear and
have reduced workability. Silica fume tends to reduce workability, thus
high-range water reducers are usually added to maintain workability.
(4) Concrete using fly ash or silica fume generally shows less segregation
and bleeding than plain concrete.
(5) Use of fly ash will reduce the amount of heat buildup in concrete.
Silica fume most likely will not reduce the heat of hydration, because
typically high-range water reducers are used and they increase mass
temperatures.
(6) Use of fly ash will tend to generally retard the setting time of concrete.
Silica fume alone will accelerate the setting time, however, high-range
water reducers tend to offset this.
(7) Use of fly ash generally aids the pumpability of concrete. With
adequate and correct curing, fly ash generally reduces the
permeability. Silica fume is especially effective in this regard.
(8) With adequate and correct curing, fly ash generally reduces for
permeability. Silica fume is especially effective in this regard.
387
2002
I. Concrete Temperatures
1. Recommended Concrete Temperatures
a. Concrete should be between 45°F and 80°F (7°C and 27°C) when placed. To
ensure a concrete temperature of at least 50°F (10°C) for 72 hours after
placement the concrete for thin sections such as culvert walls, end posts,
piling encasements, etc. should be 65°F (18°C) or higher, since the only
additional heat source is the heat of hydration. Concrete for massive sections
such as abutments, heavy piers, and footings should be in the 55° to 65°F
(13° to 18°C) range.
b. Since only dry insulation is effective, any insulation that has a propensity to
absorb water or become saturated must be protected with a waterproof
membrane. The insulation system must provide complete coverage and be
secured to provide maximum protection during the full curing period.
c. For typical protection applications, insulated forms must be left undisturbed

for 96 hours before being removed.
2. Checking Temperature of Concrete
a. For checking compliance with minimum temperature requirements during the

48-hour period after placement thermometer wells should be cast in the
concrete during the pour. The following procedure for checking temperature
is suggested:
(1) Drill a 5/16 inch (8 mm) hole through the form at one or more locations
where temperature checks will be made.
(2) Grease the thermometer probe and insert it through the hole about
4 inches (100 mm) into the plastic concrete.
(3) Remove probe after the concrete is set and cover hole with insulating
material.
(4) Further checks can be made by inserting the thermometer through the
insulation into the well developed in step 2. Leave thermometer in
place if desired, but protect from damage or theft.
NOTE: The thermometer stem should be inserted about 3 inches (75 mm) into the
concrete because the sensitive portion of the stem is about 1¾ inch (44 mm) below the
groove.
b. Record the temperature daily for 5 days following the pour. Temperature
readings below 50ºF (10°C) during the first 48 hours should be entered in the
Field Book and reported to the District Construction Engineer for evaluation of
possible damage or price adjustment.
c. A thermocouple - - with recorder can also be used to document temperatures

during curing.
388
2002
3. Deck Concrete Temperature and Curing
a. Subsection 706.03 identifies requirements for placing and curing concrete

bridge floors. Of importance for this section are:
(1) Plastic concrete, when placed, shall not exceed 86°F (30°C).
(2) The curing method requires "wet" burlap cure for four (4) days.
(3) If the forecast high outside air temperature for the day is predicted to
be above 80°F (26°C) the contractor should cast the deck starting at
5:00pm.
b. The placing of concrete will require close monitoring to comply with the
specifications. Obtain a weather report to determine predicted air
temperature, wind velocity, and relative humidity for the pour day.
c. The above information should be discussed by the inspector, contractor, and

ready mix plant operator before a deck pour. The pour should not be
attempted if concrete temperature is predicted at 86°F (30°C) or higher and
predicted air temperature is above 86°F (30°C).
4. Temperature Field Documentation
a. The temperature of concrete should be taken as soon as concrete is placed.

It should be taken when the first load is placed. Additional checking is
warranted if the temperature is running at or near maximum. Air temperature
should also be taken about the same time as the concrete temperature.
5. Maximum Air Temperature--No continuous placement is to be attempted when

temperature forecast is above 86°F (30°C).
a. Working time of concrete varies with the temperature of concrete, and

concrete temperature varies with the temperature of different materials used
in the mix. In order to determine the dosage rate of retarder, an estimate of
the mix temperature must be made. The following are suggested estimating
methods:
(1) The temperature of concrete from previous placements could be

taken.
(2) If a ready mix producer is placing concrete the day before a deck
placement, this concrete could be checked for concrete temperature.
b. Regardless of the method used, make the best estimate of what the concrete
temperature will be during the warmest part of the day. Remember, concrete
shall not be placed in new decks if the concrete temperature is above 85°F
(30°C).
389
2002
A. Prepour Meeting
1. It is very important to use the prepour meeting to discuss the specifics of placement,
establish communication, and resolve potential "sticky" issues prior to placement.
Generally it is recommended to discuss:
a. Chain-of-command. Who is in charge for the contractor? Who needs to be

notified if material tests do not comply with specifications? Establish prior to
placement how test results are reported (i.e., does the Contractor want to be
notified verbally, or in writing each time?).
b. More cement paste will cause more cracks and less paste means fewer
cracks.
c. Material requirements and admixtures needed for the placement (Examples:

Single cement source, concrete temperature and methods used to cool the
mix, source and amount of any admixtures, specific mixes required for bridge
decks, etc.)
d. Vibration can make a stiff mix workable with better results than adding water.
e. Procedures for introducing admixtures during mixing operations need to be

discussed and formalized. For example: How and where will the air
entraining agent be introduced? There is a growing concern that placement
location of admixtures is causing significant variability in mixes. The plant
monitor must watch and document how admixtures are introduced during
mixing.
f. Method and frequency of acceptance testing during any placement. Inform

the Contractor what is expected if non-acceptable material is found during
placement.
g. Scheduling, truck availability, placement method, and required placement

rates.
h. Establish an acceptable source of preplacement weather forecasting. Agree

on weather parameters which will be used for "go" or "no-go" decisions both
"prior to" and during the placement activity.
i. Larger limestone aggregate will reduce deck cracks. The gradation tables all
have tolerances. Make sure we get as large of limestone aggregate as is
available.
2. Adequate Labor Force
a. At preplacement meetings talk about and, before starting a placement be sure

the contractor has:
(1) Proper and adequate materials to protect the placement.

390
2002
(2) Adequate numbers of sufficiently skilled laborers available.
(3) Proper tools on the job.
(4) Arranged for the rate of delivery of concrete to make the placement
operation efficient.
b. 25 cy (20 cubic meters) per hour should be a minimum placement rate. Any
method of delivery to the deck should be checked to see that rate of
placement can be such that finishing operations can proceed at a steady
pace, with final finishing completed before the concrete starts its initial set.
B. Concrete Plant Inspector’s Checklist
1. Specifications regarding plant inspection, equipment approval, and batching

operations should be reviewed for familiarity. In addition to proper plant
calibration, the inspector should verify that each truck mixer used on the job
has a current certification as required by SSHC Section 1002. It is good practice
to inspect a random sample of ready mix trucks that will be used on the job, verifying
that the certification accurately reflects the truck’s condition. Truck certification
numbers should be recorded in the inspector’s diary and will need to be reverified at
least every 30 days.
2. Batching and mixing should be limited to the lead truck until slump and air content
have been tested for conformance with specifications. Contractors may make
preliminary tests at the plant but project acceptance is based on job site tests.
It is intended that the ready mix plant supply concrete to the construction site that
conforms to all applicable specifications at the point where the acceptance sample is
taken.
a. SSHC Table 1002.02, Concrete Proportions, lists slump and air content
requirements.
b. If concrete is being delivered which deviates much from these target values,
the contractor is responsible for taking corrective action to bring the mix to
within target values. Even if the current mix is within specified limits. The
intent of the tolerance is to provide latitude during placement for unforeseen
changes in materials, mixes, and placement methods. Placing concrete
“consistently” near a tolerance limit is not desirable and warrants additional
sampling.
c. What is important, is the contractor’s response to test results approaching

tolerance limits. Continually having to add water and/or air agent to each load
at the site will not be permitted. If such practice is occurring, the inspector
shall notify the contractor (or whomever was designated as “the” responsible
individual in charge of the concrete at the site.) Ultimately, it is the
contractor’s responsibility to initiate immediate corrective action.
3. Non-responsiveness on the contractor’s part is reason to initiate sampling and testing

of each truck or halt placement. The purpose for additional testing is to ensure that
no noncomplying materials are incorporated into the project.
391
2002
4. In some cases admixtures, such as water reducers, are required to be added in split
doses or sometimes totally at the site.
5. All Structural Concrete
a. At the start of each day’s placement, no concrete is to be placed in the forms

or on the deck until the first truck has been sampled, tested, and approved.
Incorporation of materials from this truck will not be permitted unless desired
slump and air content are within specified limits. Continuous placement shall
not begin until after test results indicate the material meets specified
requirements.
b. If the first load is close to a limit value, it is recommended to sample and test
the second load unless site experience indicates it is not necessary.
c. Initial start up test results (if taken from the truck chute) must account for
method of placement. For example: If placement will be through a pump, air
values should be on the high side of target to account for loss during pumping.
Again, site/project experience should be factored in this decision.
d. Routine acceptance testing will be at a minimum frequency of one sample per

100 yd3 (100 m³). This frequency may be changed for large, continuous
placement where placement rates warrant a lesser frequency. Minimum
quantity placed between routine acceptance tests is 100 yd3 (100 m³). This
rate of testing may be increased (made more frequent) if the inspector has a
concern that target values are not being met.
NOTE: Only the Materials and Research Division has authority to approve decreasing
(less frequent) testing frequencies from those listed in Materials Sampling Guide. PLAN
AHEAD and obtain approval for those cases where a variance would be reasonable.
(1) For routine acceptance testing, obtain a representative sample at the

last practical point before incorporation, but prior to consolidation.
NOTE: When concrete is placed by means other than directly from the back of the truck
the sample shall be taken after the concrete has passed through the conveyance method
being used. (This includes placement by bucket, belt, pumps, power buggies, etc.)
(2) Routine acceptance sampling and testing does not require holding a
truck until results are available. However, if there are obvious
deficiencies, the inspector has the authority to hold that truck until test
results are available.
(3) Inspectors should be alert to obvious visual changes in consistency,

with routine acceptance air and slump tests being made as noted
above. Any load having questionable consistency should be checked
for slump, and air content.
(4) If noncomplying test results are found during routine acceptance

sampling, no more material (from that truck or others) shall be
incorporated until complying test results are obtained. When test
results indicate noncomplying material:
392
2002
(a) The rest of that load shall be rejected and not incorporated,
unless adjustments can be made to bring it back into
compliance.
(i) In an attempt to bring noncomplying concrete into

compliance, the supplier may make field adjustments
(i.e.. add air entraining agent, or rotate the drum). Such
"field" adjustments shall be an EXCEPTION and not the
general rule and the 90 minute time restriction shall not
be waived for any situation.
(b) For all noncomplying test results the inspector shall

immediately notify the contractor or their representative in
charge of the concrete. This notification shall also inform the
Contractor if noncomplying materials have been incorporated
into the structure.
(c) If test results indicated noncomplying materials have been

incorporated, the inspector shall make a note in the diary
indicating the test results, approximate volume incorporated,
location the material was placed, and to whom the notification
was given. The inspector should also note a noncomplying
event on that particular truck's delivery ticket.
(d) When noncomplying materials are found, the inspector will:

a) hold each truck, and b) initiate sampling and testing of each
truck until two consecutive loads meet specifications. At this
point sampling and testing may return to normal project
acceptance frequency.
6. Specifications spell out requirements that materials must meet to be

acceptable. Further, the Materials Sampling Guide identifies a frequency for
sampling/testing and whether the test is an acceptance or assurance test.
a. Authority for initially rejecting noncomplying materials and poor quality

work performance is given to the inspector in SSHC Subsection
106.05. This rejection authority is only superseded by the Project
Manager. There is an old saying to the effect "We shall not knowingly
incorporate noncomplying material into a project." This means exactly
what it says and there is ample support in the specifications for this
position.
7. During placements, the inspector should alternate sampling among the

various trucks involved in the operation.
8. If there is a specific truck which is identified as causing a problem with

consistency, that truck shall be rejected from further use.
393
2002
9. Transit mixers shall be completely emptied of wash water before reloading. If

the truck's top fill hopper is washed after loading, no wash water shall be
allowed to enter the mixer.
10. The inspectors will need to satisfy themselves regarding compliance with the
specifications for the number of drum revolutions at mixing speed.
11. If water, air entrainment or other admixtures are added at the project site,
acceptance testing will not be performed until all additions have been made
AND required mixing has been completed following the change.
C. Falsework
1. General: SSHC Subsection 704.03, paragraph 7.f. requires the contractor to submit
6 copies of falsework plans when required or when certain conditions apply. These
plans shall be prepared by an Engineer registered in the State of Nebraska. The
contractor shall prepare falsework plans, as called for in plans or in the special
provisions, and for:
• Support of plastic concrete for concrete slab bridges with spans greater than
50 ft (15.25 m) in length.
• Cast-in-place concrete girders
• Slab bridge false work should allow for ? inch (3 mm) of deflection for each
10 feet (3 m) of span. This means that on an 80 foot simple span bridge the
falsework should be I inch high at midpoint.
2. Falsework Inspection
a. Contract requirements governing falsework construction are contained in

SSHC Subsection 704.03, paragraph 7.
b. The Project Manager should observe the falsework as it is erected to ensure

that:
(1) Only sound materials are used.
(2) Quality work is used.
(3) During concrete pour, the falsework will carry the load. (More than ½”
movement is bad.)
NOTE: Any inspection and/or acceptance by the Project Manager is not intended to
relieve a contractor of responsibility under the contract for falsework design and
construction.
c. By specification, a contractor is responsible for proper evaluation of the quality

of their falsework materials. However, the Project Manager should not permit
use of any material, when there is doubt as to the materials ability to safely
394
2002
carry the load. If there is any question, the contractor should be required to
perform a load test or furnish other evidence of structural adequacy.
d. Timely inspection is essential. Falsework deficiencies should be brought to

the contractor's attention at once. Deficiencies include:
(1) Poor quality work.
(2) Use of unsound or poor quality materials.
(3) Construction which does not conform to the contractor's falsework

drawings.
e. If the contractor fails to take corrective action, a noncompliance letter shall be

issued. Corrective action will be required prior to placement of any additional
dead or live load to the support structure.
3. Falsework Foundations
a. Falsework piling should be driven to adequate bearing unless mudsills or

spread footings can be founded on rock, shale, compact gravel, coarse sand,
firm clays in natural beds, or well compacted fill.
(1) Falsework Piles
(a) If requested, pile bearing values will be determined by the wave

equation. Otherwise, the contractor is responsible for
adequate foundation support.
(b) The pile bearing value required to support the design load must
be shown on falsework drawings, and the pile driving operation
must be inspected sufficiently to ensure that falsework piles
attain required bearing.
b. Mudsills and Spread Footings
(1) Foundation material should be inspected before the footings are

placed.
(2) To ensure uniform soil bearing, falsework pads must be set on

material that provides a firm even surface, free of bumps or
depressions within the pad bearing area. If necessary to obtain
uniform bearing, a thin layer of sand may be used to fill in surface
irregularities.
(3) Continuous pads must be analyzed differently than individual pads,

and the two should not be considered equivalent. A change from one
to the other requires resubmittal in the Construction Division for review
by the Bridge Division.
395
2002
(4) Falsework pads should be level. Benches in fill slopes should be cut
into firm material, with the pad set well back from the edge of the
bench.
(5) Many soils lose their supporting capacity when saturated. Adequate
falsework construction must provide for drainage and protect pads
from being undermined or ponded in water.
c. Soil Load Test
(1) Project Managers should require the contractor to perform a soil

bearing test if there is any doubt as to the ability of foundation material
to support the falsework load without appreciable settlement. One
method to evaluate in-situ bearing capacity is to perform a plate
bearing test as per ASTM D-1 194. (The above referenced method is
not the only such test procedure, but is included to provide one
method of determining in-situ capacity.)
4. Falsework Materials
a. One aspect of a falsework design and review is based on the use of

undamaged, high-quality materials. Material strength values must be reduced
if lower quality materials are to be used. Obviously, evaluation of the quality of
materials actually furnished is an important, and essential, part of the
falsework inspection procedure.
(1) Timber
(a) Inspecting falsework materials is necessary to prevent the use

of materials which obviously do not meet the "undamaged
high-quality" design criteria.
(b) Falsework materials delivered to the job site, should be equal

to or greater than the grade, or type of material, assumed in the
design review. Timber having large shakes, checks or knots,
or which are warped or split should not be used at critical
locations. Abused timber, although stress graded, may no
longer be capable of withstanding the original allowable stress.
(c) Rough sawn timbers should be measured to determine their

actual dimensions. Unlike surfaced/finished material, the
dimensions of roughcut timber are not uniform from piece to
piece. The variation may be appreciable, particularly in the
larger sizes commonly used for falsework posts and stringers.
If actual dimensions are smaller than the dimension assumed
in design, the member may not be capable of carrying the
imposed load without overstress. Therefore, undersized
material should not be incorporated into the falsework, unless
the design is reevaluated using smaller dimensions.
(2) Structural Steel
396
2002
(a) Used beams, particularly beams salvaged from a previous

commercial use, should be examined carefully for loss of
section due to welding, rivet or bolt holes, or web openings
which may adversely affect the ability of the beam to safely
carry the load imposed by the falsework design.
(b) Welded splices should be inspected visually for obvious
defects. Radiographic inspection or other methods of
nondestructive testing will not be required as a means of
determining the quality of the splices unless the Project
Manager has reason to believe the welds are defective.
(3) Manufactured Products
(a) Manufacturer's ratings are based on the use of new material or

used material in good condition. The determination as to
whether a manufactured product is in good condition is highly
subjective and requires experience and judgment.
(b) When manufactured assemblies are used in falsework, they

shall be shown on the falsework plans along with their
identification number. The actual assembly shall be clearly
and permanently marked with the identification number.
b. Identification numbers will allow field inspectors to verify the capacity and
proper application of various devices.
c. Identification by the contractor applies not only to jacks, beam hangers,

overhang brackets, and similar devices, but to all vertical steel shoring systems
as well.
d. Manufactured products such as tubular steel shoring and steel overhang

brackets are particularly vulnerable to damage by continual reuse. Fabricated
units in which individual members are bent, twisted, or broken will have a
substantial reduction in load carrying capacity. Steel shoring materials should
be examined carefully prior to use. Shoring components should not be used if
they are heavily rusted, bent, dented, or have broken/damaged welds or other
defects. Connections, in particular, should be examined for evidence of
cracked or broken welds. Miscellaneous components such as screw jack
extensions, clamps, and adjusting pins should be inspected as well.
e. Proprietary scaffolding must be used as intended and not subjected to

additional stresses or conditions for which it was not originally designed and
tested.
(1) Cable Bracing
(a) Cable bracing systems must be carefully inspected to ensure

that field installation conforms to details shown on the
falsework drawings. This is particularly important with respect
to the location and method of cable attachment to any
falsework.
397
2002
(b) Prior to installation, each cable should be inspected to verify

that the type, size, and condition (new or used) are consistent
with design assumptions. Used cable should be inspected for
strength-reducing flaws. Use of obviously worn, frayed, kinked,
or corroded cable should not be permitted.
(c) Particular attention should be paid to cable clamp fasteners.

Improperly installed clamps will reduce the safe working load
by as much as 90 percent. Also, the omission of the thimble in
a loop connection will reduce the safe working load by
approximately 50 percent. After installation, clamps should be
inspected periodically and tightened as necessary to ensure
their effectiveness.
(d) A cable clamp has two parts - the "U-Bolt" and the "Saddle."
Also a cable has two parts, the wrapped non-continuous end
(dead end) and the continuous portion which supports the load
(live side). Always put the cable clamp's "saddle" on the live
side and the "U-bolt" over the "dead end."
5. Falsework Quality
a. High quality work, particularly in such details as wedges, fasteners, bracing,

friction collars, jack extensions, etc., is critical to the proper performance of
falsework. Accordingly, construction details should receive close attention
from the project inspector.
(1) Timber Construction
(a) The following checklist is included as a guide to points which

require special consideration:
(i) Diagonal bracing, including connections, must conform

to details shown on the falsework drawings.
(ii) Diagonal bracing should be inspected after any

falsework has been adjusted to grade. Connections
must be securely fastened to ensure their effectiveness
in resisting horizontal forces. Bolted connections may
need retightening.
(iii) Timber posts may be wedged at either the top or

bottom for grade adjustments, but not at both locations.
Large posts may require two or more sets of wedges
(side by side) to reduce compression stresses
perpendicular to the grain.
(iv) Blocking and wedging should be kept to a minimum. It

is poor workmanship to extend a short post by piling up
blocks and wedges. This practice should not be
permitted.
398
2002
(v) Particular attention should be given to falsework bents

where grade adjustment is provided at the bottom of the
posts. Differential grade adjustment of posts within a
particular bent may induce undesirable stresses in the
diagonal bracing.
(vi) Splicing of wood posts will not be allowed unless

shown on approved falsework plans.
(vii) The ends of spliced posts must be cut square. The

need for a post splice should have been anticipated by
the contractor and the splice detail shown on falsework
drawings. If this is not the case, the contractor must
submit a detail for approval.
(viii) Posts must be plumb and centered over the falsework

pad or corbel.
(ix) Abutting edges of soffit plywood should be set parallel

to the joists and continuously supported on a common
joist.
(x) A sufficient number of telltales must be installed to

accurately determine the amount of joint take-up and
settlement. Telltales should be attached to the joists as
close as possible to the supporting post or bent.
(xi) Full bearing must be obtained between all members in

contact. Deficiencies in this respect may be improved
by feather wedging. If the joint requires more than a
single shim or wedge, extra care should be taken to
ensure that full bearing is obtained.
399
2002
FULL BEARING WEDGE
Wedge
Post
When using wedges, it is a good practice to use wedges inserted from both sides
rather than deeply setting a single wedge. Using only one wedge increases the
twisting effect on the member.
o When using wedges, it is good practice to install them parallel to and with the flat
(nontapered) side against the main member. This improves contact with the
main member and decreases the chance of a wedge "backing out" from vibration.
o Nail or clamp the wedge in place after installation.
(2) Steel Shoring (Scaffolding)
a. This checklist may be used as a guide by inspectors when inspecting

falsework constructed of steel shoring.
(1) Shoring components should be inspected prior to erection. Any

component that is heavily rusted, bent dented or rewelded, or which is
otherwise defective, should be rejected. Fabricated units having
individual members that are bent twisted, broken, or where welded
connections are cracked or show evidence of rewelding should be
rejected.
(2) A base plate, shore head, or screw jack extension device should be
used at the top and bottom of all vertical components.
400
2002
(3) All base plates, shore heads, and extension devices must be in firm
contact with the footing at the bottom and the cap or stringer at the top.
(4) Shoring components should fit together evenly, without any gap
between the upper end of one unit and the lower end of the other unit.
Any component which cannot be brought into proper contact with the
component it is intended to fit, should not be used.
(5) Shore heads, extension devices, and similar components must be

axially loaded. Eccentric loads are not permitted on any shoring
component.
(6) All locking devices on frames and braces must be in good working
order, coupling pins must align the frame or panel legs, and pivoted
cross-braces must have the center pivot in place.
(7) Shoring should be plumb in both directions. Maximum deviation from

true vertical should not exceed 3 inches per 1000 inches (3 mm per
meter).
6. Miscellaneous Falsework Items
a. This checklist covers items that may be used in either type of support system.
(1) New high strength bolts shall be used on any item that requires bolts
to be torqued.
(2) Friction collar bolts and concrete anchors should be torqued initially
and checked again just prior to concrete placement.
(3) Permanently deflected stringers should be placed with the crown

turned upward.
(4) Jacks should be plumb and not overextended.
7. Falsework Adjacent to Traffic
a. This will be an unusual situation in Nebraska. If it occurs, the Construction

Division should be notified.
8. Falsework Field Changes
a. If supplemental calculations are necessary to verify compliance with contract

requirements, he change will be considered substantial. In this case, the
proposed change must be submitted for review and approval in the same
manner as the original drawings.
b. The following are examples of changes considered substantial and must be

shown on revised falsework drawings, regardless of other considerations:
(1) A change in size or spacing of any primary load-carrying member.

401
2002
(2) A change in method of providing lateral or longitudinal stability.
(3) Any change, however minor, which affects the falsework to be

constructed over or adjacent to a traffic opening.
(4) A revised concrete placing sequence, if it significantly affects the

stresses in load-carrying members.
(5) When revised drawings are required, they must be submitted for
review in the same manner as the original falsework drawings. The
Department does not approve falsework! Time shall be allowed for
review of revised falsework drawings. Typically this is the same as
required for the original submittal.
(6) The PM should be alert to and document any field changes to

falsework plans.
9. Falsework Inspection During Concrete Placement
a. As concrete is being placed, the falsework should be inspected at frequent

intervals. In particular, look for the following indications of potential failure:
(1) Excessive compression at the tops and bottoms of posts and under
the ends of stringers.
(2) Pulling of nails in lateral bracing.
(3) Movement or deflection of braces.
(4) Excessive deflection of stringers.
(5) Tilting or rotating of joists or stringers.
(6) Excessive settlement of tell-tales.
(7) Posts or towers that are moving out of plumb.
(8) Sounds of falling concrete or breaking timbers.
(9) If any member deflects unduly or shows evidence of distress, such as

splintering on the bottom of stringers, crushing of joints or wedges,
etc., placement work in the affected area should be stopped
immediately and the falsework strengthened by addition of members,
installation of supplementary supports, or some other means.
402
2002
(10) Settlement of the falsework should be limited to a maximum of ? inch

(10 mm) deviation from the anticipated settlement. Should actual
settlement exceed the anticipated settlement by more than the ? inch
(10 mm) allowable, and if it appears that a serious problem is
developing, concrete placing should be temporarily discontinued in
affected areas until the contractor provides satisfactory corrective
measures. Concrete placing should not be resumed until the Project
Manager is satisfied that further settlement will not occur.
(11) If it is apparent that satisfactory corrective measures cannot be

provided prior to initial setting of the concrete, the Project Manager
shall stop placing of concrete and contact the Construction Division.
(12) One important and often overlooked point is the danger of curing water
softening the falsework foundation. Some means should be provided
to prevent curing water from reaching and soaking the foundation
material beneath the falsework bearing pads.
(13) The contractor should provide the drainage for any water that
accumulates in box-girder cells. Such accumulated water could easily
overstress the falsework.
b. Falsework and Centering
(1) It is the contractor's responsibility to provide form work adequate to

support the dead load of the fresh concrete. However, the inspector
shall consult with the contractor and the Project Manager concerning
any form work which he/she has reason to believe is inadequate to
support the load capacity. In calculating the strength of centering, a
mass of 150 lb/ft3 (2400 kg/m³) shall be assumed for fresh concrete.
(2) All falsework shall be rigidly braced and cross braced. Timber piling
shall be free from defects with at least a 7 inch (175 mm) butt and a
5 inch (125 mm) tip, measured under the bark. The contractor shall
provide jacks or suitable wedges to take up any settlement in the form
work during the placing of the concrete. When setting grades for
falsework or structure forms, allow 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) settlement or
"take-up" for each lap in the falsework timbers.
(3) Build falsework for slab bridges with ? inch camber for each 10’ of
span. Deflection after forms are removed should bring deck back to
the proper elevation.
(4) Settlement caused by the concrete loads may be checked as placing

of the concrete progresses by means of vertical “telltales” fastened to
the bottom of the floor form. When this settlement has reached the
amount allowed for “take-up” in the falsework timbers, any further
settlement should be prevented by means of the wedges or jacks
previously noted. Any adjustments that have to be made must be
completed before the concrete has taken its initial set. If adjustments
are made after the concrete has set, the concrete may be damaged
403
2002
irreparably. (In general, if falsework settles more than ½ inch, the PM

must investigate and determine the damage.)
10. Removal of Falsework (SSHC Table 704.02)
a. Specifications and applicable special provisions, contain specific criteria
which must be met before falsework may be removed. Project Managers and
inspectors should review these sections prior to falsework removal
operations.
b. The Project Manager should discuss falsework removal methods and
procedures at the preconstruction and/or prepour meeting. The need to
provide for employee and public safety is of particular concern.
c. In general, all elements of the falsework bracing system must remain in place
for the specified time period or until concrete attains the specific strength. In
the case of cast-in-place, post tensioned construction, falsework elements
must not be removed until stressing is completed.
D. Forms
a. The inspector shall check the lines, grades and dimensions on all structural
form work before allowing the contractor to place concrete. On walls and
columns this is best done as the form work progresses.
b. Forms shall be made of wood, metal or other approved materials. The forms
shall be substantial, unyielding and mortar tight. All forms for exterior exposed
surfaces, except those locations requiring a specific texture finish as listed in
SSHC Subsection 704.03 shall be lined with pressed wood, plywood or other
approved materials used in the largest practicable panels. Forms shall be
coated with a colorless oil to prevent sticking to the concrete. The forms
should be oiled before placing the reinforcing steel to avoid splattering of oil on
the steel. Forms for walls and columns, or wherever else required, may be
constructed with the bottom board removable for cleaning out wood chips,
dirt, etc., before placing the concrete. Metal tie rods or anchors within the
forms shall be constructed so as to permit their removal to a depth of one
inch below the surface of the finished concrete. All tie rod and tie-wire holes
shall be filled with cement mortar as soon as possible to insure proper bond
with the structure concrete.
c. Pier columns may be constructed using a laminated fiber form which is
moisture resistant and seamless. These forms must be capable of
withstanding the hydraulic pressure of fresh concrete. Any questions
concerning the acceptability of a proposed fiber form should be referred to the
Construction Engineer through the District Construction Engineer.
d. Removal of Forms and Falsework
(1) Specific requirements concerning the time limitations for form removal
are listed in SSHC Subsection 704.03. Proper inspection includes
both the monitoring of this time and the method of removing forms.
Stresses in concrete due to its own weight must be introduced slowly
and carefully during form removal operations to prevent concrete
failures. For instance, the removing of falsework from under a
cantilevered element, must begin at the point furthest from the support
and proceed toward the support. In removing the falsework from
under a structure that is continuous over its supports, removal should
begin near the areas of maximum dead load positive moment and
proceed in both directions towards the supports. In general, all
404
2002
falsework should be removed before placing any surcharge, such as

sidewalks and railings, on the superstructures.
(2) The requirements listed in the Specifications are based on sound

engineering principals and the structures inspector should be
thoroughly familiar with and rigidly enforce these requirements.
12. Use of Insulated Forms for Protection
a. Commercial insulation may be used for protecting concrete during cold

weather, or when the contract documents require controlling the heat of
hydration. This technique is the contractor's option and could be used in lieu
of housing and heating. The contractor must furnish housing and heating
and/or insulation of sufficient quality and thickness to maintain concrete at a
temperature of not less than 50°F (10°C) for the first 72 hours after placing,
and above 41°F (5ºC) for the next 48 hours.
E. Placing Concrete
1. Concrete shall be proportioned, mixed and handled in accordance with the

requirements of SSHC Section 1002. The inspector should also refer to the Materials
and Research Manual which outlines the method of proportioning, sampling and field
testing the materials necessary for the production of concrete. The contractor shall
organize his/her work so that the maximum interval between batches shall not
exceed 30 minutes.
2. Concrete should not be placed in footings, columns, etc, until all pile driving within a
radius of 50 feet has been completed. If concrete pours must be made within this
area prior to the completion of pile driving, such concrete shall set at least three days
before further driving is permitted within this radius. Concrete shall not be placed
without special permission in steel pile shells for cast-in-place concrete piles for each
bent, pier, or abutment until all the shells for that bent pier or abutment have been
driven (SSHC Section 703).
3. When depositing concrete in the forms, segregation must be avoided. The mass of
concrete should be generally free of surface cavities resulting from the trapping of air
and water along the forms. Careful spading of concrete along vertical forms and
tapping of the forms will usually release the air and water bubbles. Forms which are
not mortar tight will leak cement paste and result in "sand streaking." Forms should
be mortar tight to the maximum extent possible. Chutes shall be of metal or metal
lined and of sufficient number to preclude the necessity of shifting the chutes. If
necessary, the contractor shall leave holes in the forms for the entry of the chutes or
pipes. Concrete must be deposited within 8 ft (2.5 m) horizontally of the place of its
final location. Concrete shall not be dropped vertically more than 5 feet (1.5 m).
Concrete in walls, footings, columns, etc, shall be placed in continuous horizontal
layers not more than 18 inches (450 mm) thick and vibrated to a monolithic mass.
Do not allow dried concrete to collect on forms or reinforcing bars where it will fall into
the work.
4. See Section 1003.06 Concrete Cylinder Policy for cylinder requirement.
405
2002
F. Placement Considerations
1. If there is any doubt about the concrete temperature exceeding 86°F (30°C), the
contractor needs to identify measures which will be implemented to keep mix
temperatures within specifications. If the contractor is not prepared to maintain a mix
temperature below specifications, the pour should be postponed.
2. There are several ways concrete temperatures may be kept within specifications.
They are:
a. Scheduling placements during cooler times of the day.
b. Wetting the aggregate stockpiles.
c. Covering/shading the aggregate stockpiles.
d. Maintaining a supply of portland cement on hand to preclude getting hot

material from the supplier.
e. Chilling the mixing water is one of the most effective ways to lower mix
temperatures.
f. Shaved ice can be used, however, the ready mix operator must submit a
proposal for this to the Project Manager for review by the Construction
Division.
NOTE:
§ No payment will be made for methods taken to keep concrete temperatures

within specifications.
§ If pour has to be delayed because of temperature, and pouring is the

controlling operation, no working days will be charged.
§ Location of permissible headers should be discussed with the contractor

during the pour, it appears the temperature may exceed 86°F (30°C).
• When casting deck on Phased Construction under traffic make sure potholes
in the driving lanes are filled.
3. General - The wind velocity temperature relationships stated in the specifications

should be enforced to avoid loss of water from the concrete surface faster than it can
be replaced by normal bleeding and to avoid the resultant formation of plastic
shrinkage cracks. Anemometers and thermometers must be available on site to
measure wind velocity and temperature.
4. Concrete in bridge floors shall be placed uniformly on both sides of the centerline and
shall be placed continuously between specified joints. The sequence of placing shall
be in accordance with the pouring diagram shown in the plans. If no pouring diagram
is shown in the plans, concrete shall be placed as directed by the Project Manager.
406
2002
5. Wet the deck forms and approach slab grade before placing the concrete. Concrete
shall be adequately vibrated to encase the lower bars of the reinforcing mat where
these are near the deck form.
6. Special attention shall be given to finishing the riding surface on the bride floors.
SSHC Subsections 706.03, 710.03, and 711.03 explain concrete bridge floor finish.
7. It has been the policy to permit the contractor to use mechanical finishing machines
of an approved type whether or not they are required by the plans or special
provisions.
8. Method of Finish - When the hand method is employed, the concrete surface shall be
struck off with a strike board which conforms to the cross section shown in the plans.
If this is pulled by hand, care shall be taken not to displace the reinforcing steel by the
workmen doing the pulling. A small air winch anchored to a girder outside of the
day's pour will pull the strike off at a slow, uniform rate, giving a truer surface with no
displacement of the reinforcing steel. The strike board shall be operated with a
combined longitudinal and transverse motion, always carrying a small roll of concrete
in front of the cutting edge. The strike off shall be pulled a sufficient number of times
to properly distribute the concrete. A longitudinal float generally is required and is
described in SSHC Section 704. The longitudinal float shall be lapped 1/2 its length
when moved to a new position and shall be operated across the surface a sufficient
number of times to produce a uniform, smooth riding surface. Occasionally during
the finishing operation, conditions may require the use of the long-handled transverse
float, which require extreme care in its use to preserve the desired cross-section and
a smooth riding surface.
9. Regardless of whether hand or machine finishing methods are used, the floor surface
shall be tested for trueness with a straightedge 10 foot (3 m). The bridge contractor
is required to furnish a 3 m master straightedge for use in trueing and checking the
working straightedges.
10. A burlap drag is required and this operation should be performed as soon as the
surface will support the drag. A tined surface is also required by the specifications.
11. Templates used to support the strike off should be in short sections
[(10 to 14 ft) (3 m to 4 m)] so they may be removed as the finishing operation
advances, allowing the final floating and surface testing to take place, and the wet
burlap to be applied immediately. Decks should be cast after the afternoon high
temperature is reached. (In summer, this can be as late as 7:00 p.m.) Protection of
the aggregates from the sun is also helpful.
12. When mechanical self-propelled finishing machines are used, they shall be capable
of obtaining a finish equal to or better than that obtained by the hand method. The
screeds of the finishing machine should be set to the exact cross section shown in
the plans. Elevation shots will be required for the setting of the riding rails. The usual
procedure is to give a fill to grade at the locations where girder shots were taken. The
contractor will then set the rail to the correct height to accommodate the machine.
An "eyeball" check of the rail for smoothness should always be made. On girder
bridges the rail will follow a line that should be smooth after the girders have deflected
from the dead load. Correct elevations of the rail can be checked by measuring the
distance from the screed to the formwork which should give the correct thickness of
slab.
407
2002
13. Careful attention should be given to the depth of cover over the top steel. With the
extensive use of salt, the service life of the steel is reduced if the concrete cover is
less than that shown in the plan. (The finishing machine must be dry run to check the
minimum clearance of the reinforcing steel and to check the grade of the expansion
devices.)
14. If the finishing machine is used when there is a transition between regular crown and
full superelevation, a system should be worked out well in advance of pouring to
insure that the screed can be changed rapidly and correctly at intermediate points of
the transition. This is important in order that there are no long delays caused by
screed adjustments while pouring the transition.
15. Retarders – Retarders shall be used to delay the setting time of the bridge floor
concrete. If the temperature is 60°F (15°C) and rising, retarders must be used. A
good goal is to be finishing at the next pier before the concrete is setting-up at the
previous pier. Acceptable retarders are Pozzolith 300R and Doratard-17. Water
reducing admixtures like WRDA-82, Procrete-N, and Masterpave-N are not
acceptable retarders.
16. When a retarder is required the rate of placing concrete for any positive moment
section will be within two-thirds of the initial setting up time of the retarded concrete
after the previous negative moment section has been poured. For example, if the
initial set takes place in 6 hours, the pouring of a positive moment section must be
completed within 4 hours after the completion of the previous negative moment
section. This same procedure should be required regardless of whether or not
retarders are used.
17. Calibration of Concrete Proportioning Equipment - Calibration of this equipment

should be as described in the National Ready Mixed Concrete Associations' Quality
Control Manual.
G. Placement Methods (Pumping, Belting, And Crane Bucket) (SSHC Subsection 704.03)
1. Much concern has been expressed about the method of concrete placement
because of lost entrained air. Rough handling of plastic concrete during placement
has, at times, reduced entrained air to less than 2% not to mention potential
segregation problems. While testing at the point of placement "should" identify such
problems, varying placement conditions during the pour can affect concrete
conditions significantly.
2. General conditions which must be avoided (Points to watch for), or at least severely
minimized, are explained for each delivery system that follows: If one of the following
cannot be avoided, at least be aware of the condition, and be sure to conduct
additional testing should any of the conditions present themselves.
3. Crane and Bucket
a. In the past it was felt the crane and bucket placement method did not
adversely affect concrete. This is now in question when viewed from loss of
air and potential segregation. Therefore, this method will now also require
testing at the placement location, if practical.
408
2002
b. Points-to-Watch For
(1) Free fall of unrestrained concrete shall not exceed 5 ft (1.5 m.) Avoid
exceeding a 5-ft. free fall by removing a section of form work for
intermediate placement or by use of a tremie.
(2) Discharge from the bucket must be controllable.
(3) Cross section of the drop chute should allow it to be inserted into the
form work without interfering with reinforcing steel.
4. Belt Placement
a. Belt equipment is typically used to convey concrete to a: (1) lower,

(2) horizontal, or (3) somewhat higher level.
b. Points-to-Watch For
(1) Keep the number and distance of drops between belts to an absolute
minimum. Drops tend to encourage segregation and reduce entrained
air.
(2) As belt conveyors are removed from the line (i.e., as on deck pours),
recheck the "as placed" air content.
(3) Be sure all mortar is being removed at the discharge. (No mortar
should be on the return belt.)
(4) Check discharge for potential segregation problems.
(5) In adverse weather (hot and/or windy conditions), long belt runs need
to be covered.
H. Pump Placement
1. The modern mobile pump with hydraulic placing boom is economical to use in
placing both large and small quantities of concrete. These units are used to convey
concrete directly from a truck unloading point to the concrete placement area.
2. Points-to-Watch For
a. Typically, pumps are initially flushed with a thin water/cement paste mixture to
coat the lines. This slurry must be wasted and the lines charged with the
project mix before beginning. Observe, and be sure initial pump charge is
thoroughly removed from the pipelines.
b. Always pump at a constant rate and keep pipelines full of concrete. High air
loss can occur when concrete is allowed to free-fall inside pump lines.
409
2002
c. Avoid, if at all possible, having steep angles in the pump pipelines. Steep
angles and slow placement rates are probably the worst conditions for
minimizing air loss and segregation. If this condition occurs:
(1) Attempt to relocate the pumper, thereby minimizing lift angle.
(2) If discharge is not maintaining a constant flow with the partial concrete
head in the pipe, request the pump operator to place a reducer and
short section of hose at the discharge end. The purpose is to avoid
free falling concrete from impacting the deck or forms at high velocity.
(3) If the above condition is unavoidable, watch and test the discharge
frequently for loss in air and potential segregation.
3. Rule-of-Thumb for Pumping
a. Pump concrete with pipelines as flat as possible (or at least with minimal
down angle).
b. Minimize (or eliminate) free falling concrete in the pipelines. To do this,

maintain some amount of concrete head in the pipelines.
c. Pump concrete through as few elbows and restrictions as possible.
d. Pump concrete at "some" constant rate.
e. Watch and test the air content frequently, when drop may exceed 5 feet.
I. Consolidation of Concrete
1. The contractor must establish a pattern for vibrating the concrete and ensure the
pattern is followed across the entire deck.
2. Consolidation of concrete should be accomplished by the use of a sufficient number

of vibrators of a type approved by the Project Manager. The vibrators must be of
such an intensity as to visibly affect one-inch slump concrete over a radius of
18 inches (450 mm). The contractor is required to furnish a tachometer for the
purpose of checking the speed of the vibrator elements.
3. Lateral movement of the concrete by means of a vibrators shall be avoided. Over

vibration is harmful and is evidenced by grout appearing in the concrete around the
vibrator head. Insert and withdraw the vibrator slowly. It should not come in contact
with reinforcing steel which extends into previously placed concrete nor should the
vibrator head be placed in concrete which is taking its initial set.
J. Reinforcement Bar Cover
1. Reinforcement bar cover has contributed to shadow effect. This occurs when
reinforcing cage is not rigid or has only a minimum of cover and too much vibration
was used. The remedy:
410
2002
a. Increase bar cover to 2 ½ inches (65 mm) from minimum of 2 inches

(50 mm).
b. Maintain uniformity of bar cover.
c. Build in rigidity to the reinforcing bar cage by placing diagonal braces as

described above.
d. Reduce slump and do not over vibrate the concrete.
e. Require a dry run to check alignment and uniform spacing between the edge
of the mule and rebar cage.
2. Shadowing occurs when slip forming a radius because of nonuniform form pressures
inside the mule. The problem manifests as repetitious surface bumps, not
depressions as one might think. This problem is inherent with slipforming a radius
and is especially noticeable as the radius becomes smaller. In order to minimize
shadowing effects, the contractor needs to have finishers work out the bumps by
hand.
K. Use of Finishing Machine (SSHC Subsections 710.03 and 711.03)
1. The finishing machine shall be approved before use. Care must be taken to adjust
the screeds to proper crown. Support rails must extend beyond the bridge at both
ends at proper grade and sufficient distance to accommodate the machine. This
permits finishing to begin promptly at the start of the run and also permits the required
straightening to proceed on schedule at the end of the run.
L. Straightedging
1. Following the finishing machine, straightedging should be completed to check for

longitudinal smoothness. Straightedges, 10 ft (3 m) in length, need to be operated
parallel to centerline of roadway. Each pass should overlap the previous one by a
half length. If bull-floating (mopping) is needed to close up the surface, it should
always be followed by straightedging.
M. Tining (Transverse Grooving)
1. Tine bridge decks with a rake. No longer use a bull-float.
2. After straightedging, and as soon as practical following finishing, the entire traffic
surface, except areas within approximately 2 ft (600 mm) from the curbs, shall be
given a suitable tining with corrugated tining rake.
3. Tine all bridge decks where posted speed limit will be 40 mph or greater, except for
county road bridges 100 feet (30 m) or less in length that have gravel approaches and
no plans exist for future hard surfacing.
4. On bridge decks, stop the tining 2 ft (600 mm) from the face of the bridge curb.
5. Do not overlap the grooving.

411
2002
N. Curing
1. The Bridge Deck Curing Special Provision defines how to cure the deck.
2. The surface must be covered with wet burlap as soon as possible. (Slight surface
marring and removal of tining is acceptable.) Burlap must be wet before placing. In
hot dry weather, it is better to be a little early than late with burlap cover.
3. Since shrinkage cracks are due to rapid loss of mix water before the concrete has
attained adequate strength, it is imperative that curing protection be initiated before
much evaporation can occur.
O. Ways to Avoid Deck Cracks
1. Verify falsework is stable.
(a) Temporary piles need to have significant bearing – practical refusal is best.
(b) Wood crush needs to be minimized. Avoid gaps between layers of timbers –
be careful to shim the entire length of support timbers.
2. Avoid unnecessary vibrations.
(a) Use shooflys where possible to keep traffic away from the bridge.
(b) Do not rest falsework on active bridge during phased construction unless
there is no other alternative.
(c) However, when it comes to intentional consolidation – the contractor should

be very careful to establish a fix pattern for vibration and make sure it is
achieved along the entire length of the deck and approaches.
3. Check the temperature of the concrete as it arrives on site. It should not be greater
than 86°F.
4. Check the slump and if the slump is less than 3.5 inches, confirm that the mix is not
too dry – especially if retarders or water reducers are used. Low slump
measurements are a good indicator that mix is too dry especially on hot days. Also,
with a low slump, it will be hard to get the mix around and in between rebars and
tining with the tining rake is much more difficult.
5. Verify camber on girders is correct.
6. Avoid skewed construction of approach sections. If there must be a skew, limit it to

20 degrees. If skew is above 20 degrees, then reinforce the area near the obtuse
angles because the stress is significantly increased in this region.
7. Cover the concrete with saturated wet burlap 1 ½ hours after the concrete leaves the
truck or pump chute.
412
2002
8. If the outside air temperature is predicted to be above 80°F (26°C) then start casting
the deck at 5:00 pm and finish before dawn.
9. Check the outside air temperature during casting. It should be less than 86°F.
10. If the evaporation rate during casting exceeds .15 lbs/sf/hr, then fogging as
prescribed in the Nebraska Fogging Special Provision will replace the evaporating
water, keep the deck cool, and slow the setting time.
P. Seal Bridge Deck Cracks
1. Bridge deck cracks should be sealed before de-icing salt is ever applied on or near
the deck.
2. High molecular weight methacrylate is the best sealant and is squeegeed into cracks.
Q. Cold Weather Placement
1. On account of the high incidence of shrinkage cracks due to artificial heat during the
protection period, no bridge floors will be constructed during cold weather except with
the special written permission of the Construction Division.
R. Floor Drains
1. Check floor drain locations against floor grades to be sure deck surface will drain.
Adjustments of drain height may be advantageous on every flat grade surface. Also,
at this time, study the discharge area from the floor drain for potential damage to
features under the structure such as shoulders, railroads, or berm slopes. Major
problems foreseen should be brought to the attention of the Construction Division.
S. Flowable Fill (SSHC Section 1003)
1. The inspector shall make daily entries in the field book on all concrete placed for each
project. Record concrete placement location, all results of sieve analysis tests, all
data on test beams made and tested and all quantities placed.
2. Flowable fill can be used for the following purposes:
a. Backfilling culverts.
b. Backfilling culverts constructed under bridges.
c. Filling void between culvert and culvert liner.
d. Plugging culverts.
e. Slope stabilization.
3. Free water in the sand pile must be considered as mix water because a mix design
uses oven dried sand.
413
2002
4. The plans may call for a sewer pipe to receive a gasket, otherwise, see SSHC
Section 722.
5. If the contractor uses crushed limestone for granular backfill, it shall meet the
requirements for Granular Backfill. (Refer to SSHC Section 1033.)
6. Remember flowable fill is a liquid until the water has dissipated. Bulkheads should be
strong enough to withstand the hydraulic pressures.
7. Under normal conditions, flowable mortar should be set-up sufficiently within 24 to 48

hours for placement of the final lift of either earthfill or special backfill. If "set-up" does
not occur or if it seems slow, typically the problem relates directly to drainage of the
granular backfill. Often contamination or "dirty" granular backfill is the culprit. Check
to be sure it is draining. If not, additional time will help.
8. Placement of 2 ft (0.6 m) of flowable mortar.
T. Installation of Joints (SSHC Subsection 704.03)
1. Reinforcement
a. Reinforcement must be accurately placed and rigidly fastened. If cages are

not rigid and braced diagonally in both transverse and longitudinal directions,
problems can occur. The remedy:
(1) Recommended Procedure:
(a) Epoxy coated smooth bar, about ¼ inch (6 mm) in diameter

can be placed diagonally from the top of a leading cage to the
bottom of the second trailing cage. (Description is referenced
to direction of paver's travel.)
(2) Alternate Procedure:
(a) Welding of diagonal braces to provide longitudinal rigidity is

possible, but material would need to be epoxy coated and
repair of weld location is necessary.
2. Preformed Neoprene Joints
a. Preformed neoprene expansion joints are used on a large number of bridges.
(1) Inspection Checklist
414
2002
(a) Neoprene cellular joints, if properly installed, provide a leak-

proof joint capable of functioning within expansion limits of the
bridge. To insure that a joint will function properly, there are a
number of precautions that should be noted regarding the
installation of this type of joint. Precautions:
(i) A neoprene seal can be placed in two positions, one

correct and one incorrect. Make sure that the seal is
not installed upside down or sideways.
(ii) Position of the ½ x ¼ inch (13 x 6 mm) keeper bars on

vertical face of the expansion plate angles has to be
consistent with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the neoprene seal. The depth that a
seal is set varies greatly with the different
manufacturers.
(iii) The neoprene seal has to be installed so bottom of the

seal touches top of the ½ x ¼ inch (13 x 6 mm) keeper
bars, but should not be forced past the keeper bars.
(iv) Make sure expansion opening between angles of the

expansion device are consistent with the expansion
setting shown on design plans and that the same
expansion opening is maintained from gutter to gutter.
(v) The neoprene seal must project beyond the outside

edge of slab as shown on the plans.
b. Summary
(1) When uncertain as to which side of the seal is top, or when the
position of keeper bars is in question, the contractor must be required
to submit drawings prepared by the manufacturer which indicate
correct position of installation.
415
2002
U. Curing Concrete
1. The structure inspector should give careful attention to the curing, since proper curing
is essential to good quality concrete.
2. When the evaporation rate exceeds 0.15 lb/sf/hr, the contractor must either fog the
entire deck while placing the concrete; cover the concrete with wet burlap 1 ½ hours
after the concrete leaves the truck; or take some action which will lower the
evaporation rate on the entire deck below the 0.15 lb/sf/hr limit.
3. Applying wet burlap as soon as possible is essential – limited removal of tining is

acceptable. The wet burlap should always be on the deck by 1½ hours after that
portion is finished.
V. Concreting in Cold Weather (SSHC Subsections 704.03 and 1002.02)
1. As colder weather approaches each fall, the Department experiences a series of

problems connected with concrete construction in cold weather. The first indication
of the problem usually shows up as a low test result on a 7 day cylinder. At that
stage, it is not known if the problem is an improperly fabricated cylinder.
416
2002
2. A cylinder which has been exposed to colder conditions than the structure, or if the
low strength actually represents the concrete in the structure. Sometimes the later
cylinder tests show satisfactory results, but in other cases, low strengths are found in
these tests also.
3. In some cases, definite information regarding the true condition of the concrete in the
structure can only be obtained by coring the material and carrying out a series of
special tests.
4. The best fogging system may be the simplest. Hand held fogging nozzles that mix
compressed air and water to form a fog are some of the best fogging systems
observed. (One nozzle that works very effectively is called a Hydro-Air Washer made
by Power Systems Inc. of Lancaster, TX.)
W. Simultaneous Casting of Deck and Approach Slabs
1. Casting the approach slabs and the deck simultaneously creates a smoother
transition and ride. However, to avoid maintenance and to preserve the integrity of
the deck and the approach slabs, a metal bond breaker should be placed over the
abutment across the entire width and depth of the deck. This will ensure that a
random crack does not occur before the joint can be cut. At the grade beam, the joint
is usually blocked out with styrofoam.
2. The rail that the finishing machine rides on must be uniformly rigid. Unfortunately,
where the rail passes over the grade beam and abutment, the rail is frequently more
rigid than either side of these substructures. This can cause a dip either side of the
abutment and the grade beam, which can result in a “bump” over the abutment, and
grade beam.
3. Another problem can result when the deck overhangs the outside girder. Typically,
the deck forms are supported by outrigger jacks braced against the outside girder.
The weight of the concrete and the finishing machine can momentarily bend the
outside girder as the placing operation progresses. Temporary construction braces
(usually wood blocks) between all girders can prevent girder movement.
X. Surface Checking (Not in Spec)
1. A 10 ft (3 m) straightedge surface check shall be conducted on all bridges and deck

overlays not covered by the Smoothness Specification. Surface areas inaccessible
to profilometer shall also be checked.
2. On some projects only one wheel path may be included in the placement width. For
price adjustment or incentive pay, only the portion within the traveled lane shall apply.
Variable width sections for on and off ramps, which are outside the through traveled
lane, will be checked with the surface checker.
417
2002
Y. Test Procedure for Smoothness
1. A Special Provision entitled “Bridge Deck and Approach Slab Smoothness” will
usually be included in the contract proposal. This Provision deals with the method of
testing for smoothness and the method for correcting surfaces outside of the
smoothness limits. The contractor is responsible for scheduling the testing, which
will be performed by Materials and Research Division personnel. The contractor
must give the Project Manager seven days notice prior to the date he requests that
testing be done. The Project Manager shall contact the Materials and Research
Division and arrange for testing on the requested date. Evaluation
2. Materials and Research Division will furnish a profile index to the contractor within 72
hours of the completion of the tests.
Z. Smoothness of Bridge Decks
1. Checklist - The following items should be checked and procedures followed prior to,
during, and after the overlay is placed to insure a smooth riding deck surface:
a. Guide rails are used to support and guide the finishing machine. Check for
rail deflection during passage of finish machine. Any vertical or horizontal
movement could compromise smoothness and rideability. Request that the
contractor readjust anchor legs and/or tie-downs.
b. Check that all propulsion and control equipment are fully operational prior to
placing concrete. The contractor shall traverse the finishing machine over the
entire length of section to be placed. This not only serves to verify that
equipment and control systems are functioning properly, but also provides a
check to assure that screeds are adjusted for proper crown and height above
existing surface.
c. Sufficient materials (water, cement aggregate, and admixtures) are available

on site to complete the intended placement in a continuous operation.
d. The contractor may have to limit size of placement or provide additional

mixers (HD-LS only).
(1) If a mobile mixer is not large enough to provide adequate volume for
the placement, or
(2) If there is no provision for recharging.
e. Ensure that adequate number of vehicles are available at the work site to
transport mix from mixer to the placement area at a volume necessary to
provide a uniform rate of forward progress. Any equipment working on the
deck should be checked for oil and hydraulic fluid leaks.
f. Contractor must provide sufficient, trained personnel to carry out the various
phases of deck placement. Timeliness is of utmost importance during
placement operations. Be sure specialized crafts, such as finishers, are
418
2002
adequately represented and preferably have only one task during the
placement.
g. Check concrete for smoothness with the 10 ft (3 m) straightedge. The

straightedge should be placed on the surface from a vertical position, not
pushed over the surface. Irregularities can be detected by comparing deck
surface with a straightedge. Irregularities noted at this time should be
corrected.
2. Surface Correction
a. Corrective work shall be done in the presence of the Engineer with a diamond
bladed grinder at least one meter wide. Grinding residue must be controlled.
After the deck is ground, a second test will be made to determine if the deck
now meets the smoothness requirements. This second test will also be
performed by Materials and Research personnel and it is anticipated they will
be on-site at the time of grinding, in order that they may perform the retest
while the grinding equipment is on-site.
3. Acceptance
a. Materials and Research personnel will notify the Project Manager whether or
not the corrective work has resulted in an acceptable deck surface. If grinding
cannot correct the surface profile, the Specification requires removal and an
overlay with high-density low slump concrete.
b. Troubles and expense of this sort could virtually be eliminated by careful and
detailed inspection by project personnel during construction and proper
handling of test cylinders.
4. Missed Texturing
a. There will be times, due to various reasons, when texturing will have to be
omitted from a pour. One such event could be when inclement weather
catches a pour and covering prevents texturing. Obviously this condition is
NOT desirable.
b. After full cure time has expired, grind in the required texture.
AA. Approach Sections--Bridge Approach Tapers
1. On deck overlay construction, normally some treatment of the approach is necessary

and will be indicated on the plans. Watch the contract documents for bid items for
ACC material. For projects where asphalt tapers are proposed and no quantity for
ACC is given, an extra work order will be required.
a. Shoulder Maintenance - When temporary concrete barrier rails are used on

deck repair and overlay jobs, traffic is constricted into a narrower lane. This in
turn could cause a rapid deterioration of shoulders at bridge approaches and
require the following corrective measures:
419
2002
(1) Ruts developing in earth and granular shoulders should be repaired as

necessary with a granular surfacing material. This is extra work order
and a change order will be issued for this work.
(2) Ruts and loss of asphaltic cement concrete surfacing on Interstate

shoulders should be repaired using an asphalt cement concrete pre-
mix, hot mix, or some similar treatment to minimize the development
of holes or ruts. A change order may be needed for this work unless
there is an ACC contract item for shoulder maintenance and even then
it may have to be extended.
(3) When shoulder strengthening was not included as a bid item, but is
needed for the project, the change order must consider:
(a) Present shoulder construction and experience with shoulder

stability in the immediate area.
(b) Traffic volumes, percent of trucks, and duration of potential

problem.
BB. Setting Beams
1. The following should be used as a guide in conjunction with SSHC Section 704:
a. On diaphragm piers, beams may be set as soon as doing so will not mar or
chip the concrete. It is recommended that 24 hours be considered a
minimum cure time. (In cooler weather, ambient temperatures below 40°F
(5°C), the minimum time indicated should be increased to 48 hours.)
b. No beams may be set on piers until the cap concrete is at least 7 days old
and has its design compressive strength.
c. On stub abutments, steel beams and girders may be set as under A above.
Concrete beams on stub abutments, same as A above. On full abutments
(solid and continuous from spread footing), same as A above.
A. The cubic yards of concrete for structures of varying sizes are computed from dimensions
shown in the plans and placed in tables in the plans. All structures using the same type of
concrete are lumped together.
420
2002
707.00 BRIDGE DECKS AND OVERLAYS (SSHC Sections 710 and 711)
707.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The concrete bridge floor is the wearing surface of the bridge superstructure and is
commonly referred to as the bridge "deck". This work consists of forming, reinforcing, and
placing concrete to the lines, grades, and typical cross sections shown in the plans.
A. See Subsection 706.02
B. Density Testing
1. Durable, low maintenance bridge decks require impermeable (very dense) concrete.
Therefore, checking density during placement is an essential part of deck surfacing
and overlay inspection. Test frequencies for determining the density of bridge deck
surfacing and overlays are listed in SSHC Subsection 711.04. A test should be taken
at 5 ft (1.5 m), 10 ft (3 m), 15 ft (4.5 m), and every 50 ft (15 m) thereafter per
placement width per bridge. Density tests will not be required for overlaying approach
paving areas.
2. It is always desirable to take more than the minimum nuclear density tests per length
of overlay placed. If densities are at or near the lower specification limits, additional
testing will need to be performed.
3. Vibrating Mix at Test Well Location
a. On some projects, contractors have been vibrating the concrete mix in the
test well with a hand-held vibrator prior to passage of the finishing machine.
This practice will not be permitted.
b If the oscillating screed vibrators are functioning properly, complying density of

the concrete mix in the test well will be obtained without any difficulty.
Obtaining required density at test well locations, without supplemental
vibration, assures us that the contractors' equipment and placement
procedures are capable of producing the desired results throughout the
overlay being placed.
4. Density Test Wells on Bridge Deck Repair Projects
a. Follow guidelines in SSHC Subsection 710.04, para. 7.b.
A. General – The wind velocity-temperature relationships stated in the specifications should be

enforced to avoid loss of water from the concrete surface faster than it can be replaced by
normal bleeding and to avoid the resultant formation of plastic shrinkage cracks.
Anemometers and thermometers must be available on site to measure wind velocity and
temperature.
421
2002
1. Concrete in bridge floors shall be placed uniformly on both sides of the centerline and
shall be placed continuously between specified joints. The sequence of placing shall
be in accordance with the pouring diagram shown in the plans. If no pouring diagram
is shown in the plans, concrete shall be placed as directed by the Project Manager.
2. The deck forms shall be dry when using HD-LS but must be wet when using silica
fume concrete before placing the concrete. Concrete shall be adequately vibrated to
encase the lower bars of the reinforcing mat where these are near the deck form.
3. Special attention shall be given to finishing the riding surface on the bridge floors.
SSHC Subsections 706.03, 710.03, and 711.03 explain concrete bridge floor finish.
4. It has been the policy to permit the contractor to use mechanical finishing machines
of an approved type whether or not they are required by the plans or special
provisions.
5. Method of Finish - When the hand method described in Section 704 is employed, the
concrete surface shall be struck off with a strike board which conforms to the cross
section shown in the plans. If this is pulled by hand, care shall be taken not to
displace the reinforcing steel by the workmen doing the pulling. A small air winch
anchored to a girder outside of the day’s pour will pull the strike off at a slow, uniform
rate, giving a truer surface with no displacement of the reinforcing steel. The strike
board shall be operated with a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, always
carrying a small roll of concrete in front of the cutting edge. The strike off shall be
pulled a sufficient number of times to properly distribute the concrete. A longitudinal
float generally is required and is described in
6. SSHC Section 704. The longitudinal float shall be lapped 1/2 its length when moved
to a new position and shall be operated across the surface a sufficient number of
times to produce a uniform, smooth riding surface. Occasionally during the finishing
operation, conditions may require the use of the long-handled transverse float, which
require extreme care in its use to preserve the desired cross-section and a smooth
riding surface.
7. Regardless of whether hand or machine finishing methods are used, the floor surface
shall be tested for trueness with a 10 ft (3 m) straightedge. The bridge contractor is
required to furnish a 10 ft (3 m) master straightedge for use in trueing and checking
the working straightedges.
8. Phased construction of a bridge deck usually requires a form longitudinally down the
bridge deck near the center of the bridge. The location of the form is shown in the
plans. Sometimes it is more efficient to move the location of the longitudinal phasing
joint. On bridges with concrete girders it is nice if the joint can be lined up to use the
notched lip in the girder flange. However, the resulting lane widths must be checked
to confirm there is adequate clearance for vehicles.
422
2002
B. Bridge Deck Curing
1. When the high temperature for the day that the deck will be cast is expected to
exceed 80°F the deck should be cast at night. The Contractor should contact the
concrete plant and schedule the concrete deliveries to the bridge deck to begin at
5:00 pm. The Contractor must also confirm that the concrete will have a 1-hour set
delay when it arrives on the deck.
C. Bridge Deck Joints
1. If a joint compound is not specified the Contractor may use hot tar to seal bridge deck
joints.
E. Deck Overlay Preparation
1. Securing an adequate bond at the interface of the existing prepared deck surface and
proposed overlay course is essential in obtaining a durable and maintenance free
bridge deck system. General surface preparation requires milling, shotblasting,
and/or sandblasting depending on the surface condition or amount of existing surface
material to be removed. Any reinforcing bar which is exposed must be sandblasted
to remove all rust contaminants, and unsound concrete. Also, prior to placing the
grout the surface must receive an air blast to remove dust and other foreign particles
from the prepared surface.
2. The surface, once cleaned, must remain clean until the grout and concrete is placed.
There have been cases where the prepared deck surface has become contaminated
during the decking operations by concentrated traffic of vehicles transporting the
concrete. This is especially true when the skid-steer type loaders are used to
transport mix. The deck surface is contaminated by the abrasive action between the
concrete surface and the rubber tires, and also from oil and other foreign material
tracked in from off the bridge. Contamination can be recognized by discoloration or
oil on the deck surface. Contamination is especially noticeable in the wheel paths
used by the vehicles.
3. Core specimens taken and tested for bond strength from areas as mentioned above
showed a marked decrease in bond strength between the interfaces.
4. To prevent the cleaned deck surface from being contaminated by traffic, the
contractor shall cover any prepared surface with sheets of plywood, multiple layers of
plastic, or other suitable material. To ensure a clean surface prior to placement of
the overlay system, areas which become contaminated shall be resandblasted
followed by an air blast.
F. Class I Floor Repair (SSHC Sections 710 and 711)
1. Follow guidance in SSHC Subsections 710.04, para. 1 and 711.04, para. 1.
G. Work on Adjacent Lanes
1. SSHC Section 423 prescribes traffic provisions when traffic is present.
423
2002
Bridge Diaphragms
708.00 Bridge Diaphragms
A. Steel diaphragms, if allowed, are shown in the plans for prestressed beam structures. Shop
drawings are required for steel diaphragms showing details of beam layouts, location of the
diaphragms, and location of mounting holes.
1. High strength bolts for steel diaphragms shall be tightened by Turn-of-Nut method.
(Refer to SSHC Subsection 708.03 for information on proper bolt inspection and
installation.) Inspection and field installation acceptance will be based on observing
proper Turn-of-Nut procedures. (A tensioning device and inspection torque wrench is
recommended, but will not be required.)
2. Concrete diaphragms at piers of prestressed concrete girder bridges should be cast

to 2/3 of their intended depth. The final 1/3 and the deck are then placed at the same
time. However, there are instances where allowance has been given for specific
diaphragms to be placed prior to slab placement. If there is a construction option
shown in the plans, the diaphragm can be poured separate from the deck. Note the
construction joint detail will show how to strike-off the surface. Consult with the
Construction Division in situations where the contractor requests to place concrete
diaphragms other than as shown in the plans.
3. Phased bridge decks which have inverted “T” girders should not have the portion of
the diaphragms cast between the two girders on each side of the longitudinal phasing
construction joint until the second phase deck is cast. If the girder diaphragms for the
gap between the two girders which are on each side of the phasing joint are cast
before the second phase deck is cast, the diaphragms will lock the girders under the
second phase deck at a position higher than the phase 1 girders. Cast the
diaphragms between the two girders that are on each side of the phasing
construction joint at the time the second phase deck is cast. The remaining girder
diaphragms in the second phase should be cast before the deck is cast.
a. Casting the intermediate (midspan) diaphragms before the deck is cast

removes some of the girder camber and will make the structure more stable
for the deck casting.
424
2002
Girder Shims
709.00 Girder Shims
A. Definition
1. A girder shim is defined as the distance measured from top of girder to top of finished
slab. There are three different types of bridges which we build that have girder
shims. The first type is a steel girder bridge, either a rolled beam section or a plate
girder section. The second type is a prestressed girder (NU Girder Section). The
third type is a prestressed twin tee girder. When taking shim shots on a prestressed
twin tee girder, they should be taken at the edges of the twin tee. Take shim shot on
steel girders or NU girders along the girder centerline.
2. For each type, the definition of the girder shim is the same; girder shim is the
distance measured from the top of girder to top of finished slab.
3. Stages of the Girder Shim Process The Bridge Division, upon completion of the
design, will prepare the shim input forms. After the project has been let, we send
these forms to the Project Manager. After the girders are erected and prior to forming
the deck for the slab, shim shots are required to be taken. These shim shots should
be taken at the bearings, field splices, and at 3 m intervals along the length of the
girder. The shim shots can be recorded on the input forms.
4. The H.I. Elevation needs to be recorded by the inspector at the time the shim shots
are taken.
5. The rod readings at each location are recorded on RDP Form 50a. This information
is normally sent by computer to the Bridge Division. The Bridge Division will run a
computer program which uses the grade of the roadway, crown of roadway, the dead
load deflection of the girder, and your rod readings to determine the amount of shim
at each location.
6. The Bridge Division will look at the shims to see if they are too large or too small. The
final shim information will be sent to the Project Manager along with solutions to any
problems which may have occurred.
7. The proper girder shims are critical to ensure that construction of the bridge is in
accordance with the intended design.
8. Composite Girders
a. There are two methods of designing girders. One method is a non-composite

design and the other method is a composite design. The non-composite
design is basically the slab sitting on top of the girders. By providing shear
connectors on the top of the top flange, we can tie the slab to the girders into
what we call a composite section. On prestressed girders, the stirrups
extending out of the girder into the slab provide the composite action. The
composite section produces a more economical design. The Bridge Division
designs the girders as a composite section.
b. AASHTO Specifications
425
2002
Girder Shims
(1) In order for this composite action to actually take place, it is critical that
these shear connectors extend into the slab the proper amount. For
steel girders, AASHTO specifications require that the shear
connectors penetrate at least 2 inches (50 mm) above the bottom of
the slab.
(2) The AASHTO specifications also state that the clear depth of concrete
over the tops of the shear connectors for steel girders shall not be less
than 2 inches (50 mm). So this gives the Bridge Division a range for
the location for the top of the shear connectors.
(3) Proper vs. Improper Shims
(4) When you are inspecting a job, a visual inspection of the relationship
of the shear connectors to the slab reinforcement will help you
determine if something is wrong. Based on the slab thicknesses that
we normally use [7.5 inches (190 mm) or 8 inches (205 mm)] thick,
the length of stud that we normally use [5 inches (125 mm long)] and if
the slab is reinforced, the end of the sheer connector should be
located somewhere between the top and bottom transverse slab
reinforcing steel.
(5) We specify 1 inch (25 mm) of clearance between the bottom of the
slab and the bottom transverse reinforcing steel. A ¾ inch (20 mm)
bar is the largest bar specified. Therefore, knowing that we need
2 inches (50 mm) of penetration for the shear connectors, the top of
the shear connector should always be above the transverse bar in the
bottom of the slab.
3. Problems and Solutions
a. When we have the problem of too large of a shim, there are a couple of things
we can do to solve this problem. One solution is to provide some reinforcing
bars at each shear connector location that properly extend into the slab.
Another solution is to weld a plate onto the top of the shear connectors to gain
the proper penetration length.
b. Where we have the problem of too small of a shim (top flange extending into
the slab) there is only basically one thing you can do. That is to raise the
grade of the roadway.
4. Critical Item - Proper Girder Seat Elevations
a. The most important thing that our inspectors can do to insure proper shims is
to make sure that the girder seats are poured to the proper elevations. If the
girder seat elevations are wrong, you can almost be sure that you will have
problems with your shims. If your girder seats are correct, more than likely
your shims will also be correct.
426
2002
Girder Shims
5. Critical Item - To Ensure Proper Shim
a. Steel girders must be set on substructure by following the blocking diagram

shown on the plans.
Example Computer Print
IDENT PROB. GIRD. NO. DIST. CL PROJ. TO E FROM BASELINE H.I. ELEV.
NO. CL ROADWAY
7018 1 1 O.C. 10.0000 LT. 1719.24
Girder Centerline Crown Girder Dead Load Rod

No. Station Grade Correction Elevation Deflection Reading X Distance Shim
1 22+10.77 1715.662 -0.150 1714.920 0.0 4.32 0.0 0.592
1 22+20.77 1715.753 -0.150 1715.020 0.015 4.22 10.00 0.598
1 22+30.77 1715.840 -0.150 1715.100 0.023 4.14 20.00 0.613
1 22+40.77 1715.925 -0.150 1715.180 0.021 4.06 30.00 0.616

1 22+50.77 1716.006 -0.150 1715.260 0.011 3.98 40.00 0.607
1 22+60.77 1716.084 -0.150 1715.320 0.001 3.92 50.00 0.616
1 22+65.77 1716.122 -0.150 1715.350 0.0 3.89 55.00 0.622

1 22+70.77 1716.189 -0.150 1715.370 0.004 3.87 60.00 0.644
1 22+80.77 1716.281 -0.150 1715.470 0.019 3.77 70.00 0.630
1 22+90.77 1716.300 -0.150 1715.490 0.033 3.75 80.00 0.693

1 23+ 0.77 1716.365 -0.150 1715.550 0.040 8.69 90.00 0.705
1 23+10.77 1716.427 -0.150 1715.610 0.033 3.63 100.00 0.701
1 23+20.77 1716.486 -0.150 1715.700 0.019 3.54 110.00 0.655

1 23+30.77 1716.342 -0.150 1715.730 0.004 3.51 120.00 0.666
1 23+35.77 1716.588 -0.150 1715.770 0.0 3.47 125.00 0.648
1 23+40.77 1716.594 -0.150 1715.810 0.001 3.43 130.00 0.636

1 23+50.77 1716.644 -0.150 1715.860 0.011 3.38 140.00 0.645
1 23+60.77 1716.690 -0.150 1715.900 0.021 3.34 150.00 0.661
1 23+70.77 1716.733 -0.150 1715.950 0.023 3.29 160.00 0.656

1 23+80.77 1716.773 -0.150 1715.980 0.015 3.26 170.00 0.658
1 23+90.77 1716.809 -0.150 1716.010 0.0 3.23 180.00 0.649
427
2002
Pot Bearings
710.00 Pot Bearings
A. The Materials and Research Division inspects pot bearings at the site. In order to facilitate
the work, we request that the Materials and Research Division be notified immediately when
the pot bearings arrive at the site. This will permit Materials and Research personnel to
inspect the bearings in a timely manner.
B. The person to notify is Mr. Mark Burham at Materials and Research. His phone number is
(402) 479-4746.
428
2002
Barrier Rails
711.00 Barrier Rails
711.01 Description
A. Fixed Form Jersey & Retrofit Rail
1. Before cast-in-place barrier rail is constructed on the existing bridge curb section,
SSHC Subsection 704.03. requires that old concrete which is to be in contact with
the new concrete be cleaned of all laitance (loose particles of concrete, dirt, or other
foreign materials).
2. Structurally, the existing curb surface need not be roughened, but must be clean. To
assure a clean surface and to obtain maximum bond at the interface, sandblasting
the old curb surface shall be required. Other methods of cleaning may be approved
by the Project Manager.
3. Surface preparation, such as sandblasting, should be completed prior to setting the

epoxy coated dowels.
4. When retrofit is part of a deck overlay, the contractor may request permission to
place the finish machine on the retrofit rail. Construction's policy will be:
(a) A minimum cure time of at least 48 hours prior to placing the mass of a finish
machine on the rail, AND
(b) Finish machine rail support feet must be spaced less than 1’-9” (550 mm)
apart.
(1) If these conditions are unacceptable to the contractor, a minimum

cure time of 72 hours will be required. After 72 hours there are no
special conditions for placing a finishing machine on the barrier rail.
B. Cast-In-Place (Retrofit) Barrier Rail
1. This work is routinely combined with a deck repair project and includes an overlay.
Often contractors will place the new rail prior to placing overlay. In these situations,
the contractor intends to place the finish machine's rail on top of the new barrier rail.
Question: How long must the new rail cure before allowing the deck finishing
machine to be placed on it?
a. 48 hours must expire prior to placing the weight of a finishing machine on the
rail.
b. Rail supports (legs) must be placed at a spacing of no greater than 18 inches

(500 mm).
c. Rail supports and rail cannot be placed until the surface has sufficiently cured
to prevent scuffing and/or marring.
d. Care must be taken to prevent damage to the face or back of the barrier rail.
429
2002
Barrier Rails
C. Slip Form Barrier Rail
1. Slip form rails have at times displayed transverse cracks, longitudinal cracks,
reinforcing steel shadows, and nonuniformity of top elevations. Consideration of the
following construction problems and solutions will help to eliminate problems:
2 Longitudinal Cracks
(a) Longitudinal cracks and vertical cracks near posts can be prevented with
proper construction techniques. (Consolidate uniformly, obtain proper rebar
clearance and wet cure.)
711.02 Material Requirements (See Section 706)
711.03 Construction Methods
A. Concrete Surface Finish (Rail and Beams)
1. Ordinary surface finish is required for rails. Beams need only have "popcorns" filed.
B. Surface Finish
1. The type of surface finish required for concrete structures is governed by the special
provisions, the plans and SSHC Subsection 704.03. A pre-construction study of
these sources will bring to light any possible differences of opinion concerning
requirements and allow time for their solution.
2. For either ordinary surface finish, rubbed finish, grout cleaned finish, or floated
surface finishes, the contractor should be required to perform the work as promptly
as practical after the removal of the forms. If this work is started promptly, and the
surface finishing work performed before the concrete becomes excessively
hardened, a much better surface finish will be obtained. Also, this better finish will be
obtained with less work and consequently at lower cost.
3. If the required finish is a rubbed finish, then SSHC Subsection 704.03 does not
authorize plastering an excess of mortar on the surface of the concrete. The mortar
is to be applied, as stated in the Specifications.
4. Note that proper rubbing is a sequence of three steps:
a. The surface is thoroughly saturated and then rubbed with the medium coarse
stone faced with mortar. The paste (rubbed up from the surface of the
concrete, and not applied as a plaster) is left on.
b. The surface is wetted and rubbed with a fine carborundum stone. The paste
is left to dry on the surface.
430
2002
Barrier Rails
c. The dried paste is rubbed off completely with burlap. Some laborers will not
distinguish between coarse and fine stones, or the contractor may originally
furnish only one grade. Check with the Project Manager as to the proper
degree of fineness of the stones being used, on the basis of the finished
results. Request the Project Manager's inspection of the first finishing work
done in order that he/she can set standards for methods and results in
subsequent work. Ordinary surface finish, rubbed finish, grout cleaned finish,
and floated surface finishes include leaving all chamfer lines and all plane
surfaces intersection lines cut clean and straight.
5. Special provisions currently allow the use of a special surface coating as an alternate
to a rubbed surface finish.
6. Special attention and inspection should be given to the close tolerance required in
finishing of the concrete at the bearing plate areas on abutment and pier caps.
Promptly after the concrete has hardened sufficiently, remove the anchor-bolt
templates and finish the bearing area to a true surface. A small carpenter's level is
very helpful to level the area. Prompt and efficient performance of this work will save
much grinding of the hardened concrete at the time the bearing plates are set, and
will yield better, more uniform bearing areas.
NOTE: To enhance the ability to hand finish slipped rail, CONFlLM is recommended.
CONFlLM is a Master Builders product and should be used per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
431
2002
Hand Rails
712.00 HAND RAILS (SSHC Section 716)
712.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and erecting all steel or ornamental handrail and all
miscellaneous hardware such as anchor bolts, capacity plates, and splices.
A. Handrails shall conform to the horizontal and vertical curves specified in the plans. Posts
shall be set normal to the top of the curb, except when otherwise noted in the plans or
special provisions.
A. Ornamental Handrail
1. Care must be taken in storing, handling, and erecting ornamental handrail so as not
to permanently mar or injure the finish on the post and rail elements. Aluminum
ornamental handrail which is to be stored in the open should be removed from the
cardboard cartons since cartons may stain the handrail when they become wet and
considerable effort is required to remove these stains.
2. Ornamental handrail inspection is not generally waived at the fabrication plant even if
small quantities are involved. If the Project Manager does not have a copy of a shop
inspection report on file indicating inspected material, the material should be
inspected by Materials and Research Division. If there is a question of whether the
material has been inspected or not, the Materials and Research Division should be
contacted for clarification.
3. The Project Manager should make a visual check of the handrail before placing it in
the structure. In the case of aluminum tubing, "carbon streaks" that develop in the
manufacturing process are not cause for rejection. However, the carbon streaks
should be limited to one 90-degree segment of the surface of any rail. Particular
attention is necessary at the time of erection. Tubing should be placed in the bridge
railing in such a manner that the carbon streaks are not visible to traffic.
432
2002
Painting
713.00 PAINTING (SSHC Section 709)
713.01 DESCRIPTION - The painting of metal structures has a dual purpose. The primary
function of paint application is to preserve the life of the metal. A second function,
especially important in highway grade separations, is to produce and maintain an
improved appearance. Painting includes the preparation of the surface and the
application of the paint coatings.
A. Painting (SSHC Section 709)
1. New Non-Weathering Structural Steel
a. Shop applied paint system shall be used for non-weathering steel bridges.
b. A field applied "top coat" is usually required. A top coat will also be required
when it is deemed necessary due to aesthetics.
c. The contractor will be required to touch-up any damaged areas after erection.
Touch-up with top coat paint system shall be the same paint as the shop
coat.
2. New Weathering (ASTM A 588) Structural Steel
a. The plans require shop applied prime paint to selected areas on the structure.
They also require:
b. The approved paint system.
c. Only paint where shown in the plans with approved paint system.
d. The contractor to touch-up any damage to primed areas after erection prior to
top coating. This includes bolts in those areas. Touch-up paint shall be the
same paint as the shop coat.
3. Field Painting
a. Field painting of structural steel shall be done as shown in the plans and
special provisions.
713.02 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS - Paint sampling should be done according to the

"Materials Sampling Guide" unless the paint to be used is from tested stock in which
case it will be tagged to show acceptance.
A. Mixing Paint
1. Follow the manufacturers recommended mixing and thinning procedures.
433
2002
Painting

A. Painting Structural Steel
1. Paint which has been applied on rust, or dirty surfaces will peel and crack. If rust
blisters form under the paint film, they can, in time, seriously reduce the effective
cross section of structural shapes. The specifications require that all erection work
be completed before the cleaning process is started. The cleaning should be done in
a systematic manner, with the painters cleaning a given area or member before
painting it.
2. Paint shall be applied as prescribed by contract specifications or the manufacturer's
recommendations, whichever is most demanding. The Project Manager shall
determine the correct procedure if the contract specifications differ from the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. The Project Manager or inspector should insist that the painting be done
systematically, with painters working in groups on a given coat. The practice of
having cleaners and painters spread out all over a bridge, with the inspector not
knowing what men are working on each operation, nor which members have been
cleaned and painted, should not be permitted. Painting should, in general, be started
with the highest bridge members and progress downward, in order to cover areas
where paint has dripped from the work above. Painting operations below deck level,
should be permitted only after the deck slab concrete has been placed. Girders
painted prior to the concrete placement are likely to be spattered by form leakage and
may be badly scarred by form removal, necessitating considerable recleaning and
repainting of all coats.
4. The plans and specifications require different paint film thickness depending on the
type of paint specified. The Project Manager should check the plans and
specifications to determine the types of paint required to verify that the correct
system has been certified and should check for the required dry film thickness.
a. County bridges usually only get one coat.
b. New state structures usually get two coats.
c. Repainting an existing structure usually means adding a third coat.
5. The Project Manager or inspector should check the dry film thickness of the shop and
field coats of paint applied on structural steel in accordance with the following
instructions:
6. Shop Coat - The shop coat of paint may or may not have been checked in the
fabricator's shop; nevertheless the shop coat should always be checked in the field,
and any deficiency in paint film thickness corrected, before the second coat is
started. When the dry film thickness of the shop coat is found to be inadequate, the
Materials and Research Engineer should be notified in order that the particular
fabricator involved may be made aware of the situation.
7. Second and Third Coats - Checking the thickness of the second and third coat with
the magnetic gauge is accomplished by measuring the cumulative thickness of the
first (or shop coat) and the additional coats. The dry film thickness of the second
coat should always be checked and any deficiency in paint film thickness corrected
before the third coat is started. Any deficiency in paint film thickness must be
corrected before the work can be considered complete and consideration of
acceptance given.
434
2002
Painting
8. The equipment used to check the dry film paint thickness is called a magnetic dry film
thickness gauge. One or two of these gauges are being furnished to each District
Office for use in the District in checking the painting of steel structures. These
gauges are expensive, delicate instruments and must be carefully handled and
always kept in the carrying case when not in use. The procedure for using the gauge
is as follows:
a. Turn dial to maximum reading.
b. Place pole on the surface to be measured.
c. Be sure the magnetic contact is touching the painted surface.
d. Slowly and as continuously as possible, rotate the dial clockwise until

magnetic contact breaks. A click will be heard when the pin breaks contact.
At this point the coating thickness can be read on the dial indicator. The
reading will remain on the dial when the gauge is removed from the surface
being checked. The gauge can also be held in any position to take a reading.
The magnetic gauge reads directly in mils. A reading of 2 on the dial indicates
that the thickness of the paint film is 2 mils or .002 inch.
9. The frequency of testing for paint thickness should be as follows:
a. Girders - Each line of girders should be checked at a maximum interval of

50 ft (15 m) and at each check point, 3 or 4 tests should be made. For
example, on a 200 ft (60 m) bridge each line of girders should be checked at
the abutments and at 3 intermediate points. At each one of these points three
or four places should be checked such as a point on the web, a point on each
flange, and a point on a stiffener.
b. Separators, Cross-frames and Floor Beams - Alternate lines of separators,

cross-frames and floor beams should be checked two times at one location.
For example, the top and bottom angle should both be checked for every other
line of cross-frames.
c. Lateral Bracing - Lateral bracing should be checked at about 50 foot intervals.
d. Miscellaneous Material - Material such as expansion devices, tie rods, bearing

plates and drainage systems should be spot checked for required paint film
thickness.
10. Additional tests should be made, as required, to determine the extent and location of
any areas deficient in paint film thickness.
11. The bridge notebook or diary should verify that the paint film thickness on each
structure meets the thickness requirement specified, and the entry should include the
signature of the inspector and date of inspection.
434a
2002
Culverts
714.00 CULVERTS (SSHC Sections 717 to 726)
714.01 GENERAL
A. The backfill near a pipe or box culvert is more expensive than excavation in the surrounding
area. Therefore, in the SSHC Subsection 702.03, limits are placed on the quantities
“Excavation for Box Culvert” and “Excavation for Pipe, Pipe-Arch Culverts, and Headwalls.”
434b
2002
Concrete Box Culverts
715.00 CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS (SSHC Section 717)
715.01 DESCRIPTION
A. A culvert may be defined as a structure to convey water under a roadway. Concrete box or
arch culverts are used when drainage areas are too large for the conventional culvert pipe or
when cattle passes under the roadway are desired. These structures are cast-in-place
according to standard or special plans under SSHC Sections 702, 704, 705 and 717.
B. The contractor may request that culverts be built to the nearest whole English units. Any
material savings will be deducted from the payments due the contractor.
A. See Section 706.02. Note in SiteManager the date the reinforcing steel is verified on-site.
A. General - The concrete placement for box and arch culverts is discussed in Section 706 of
this manual. SSHC Subsection 717.04 further provides that foundation excavations shall be
"as dry as practicable before concrete is poured". This requirement recognizes the
necessity of an adequate foundation for roadway structures. When the excavation for a
footing is completed, the project manager or his/her representative should be contacted for
his/her approval of the footing subgrade before any concrete is placed. In the event that
unsuitable foundation subgrades are encountered, suitable ones composed of sand, gravel,
concrete aggregates or a concrete seal course must be constructed (see
SSHC Subsections 702 of this manual).
1. Construction of curtain walls on culvert footings usually is quite a problem because of

the difficulty in maintaining the excavation in proper condition while placing concrete.
2. If material to be excavated is of such nature that neat lines for the curtain wall cannot
be maintained, the Project Manager may allow forming and placing the curtain wall to
the bottom of the footing. Mud must be prevented from working up into the concrete.
3. Currently, the plans for box culverts show the backside of the wing battered 3/8” in
12”, which results in a varying wall thickness. Contractors may be permitted to
construct walls using the wall’s base thickness, thus eliminating the batter. A plan
revision or change order will not be required to effect this change.
B. Placing Concrete and Form Removal
C. Placing Concrete
1. Placing Concrete in Walls and Top Slab. SSHC Subsection 704.03 states that
culvert, sidewalls, and top of slab may be constructed as:
a. A monolith unit or,
b. Concrete in sidewalls may be placed and allowed to harden before the top
slab is placed.
434c
2002
2. If the contractor chooses to use the hardened concrete method, keyways will have to
be installed to anchor the cover slab.
D. Sheet Pile Turndown. Option to Use Steel Sheet Piling in Lieu of the Planned Turndowns at
Box Culvert Ends.
434d
2002
434e
2002
434f
2002
E. Removal of Wall Forms
1. On large culvert jobs, it is a distinct advantage for the contractor to remove wall forms
before the top slab has attained sufficient age to remove supporting forms. This will
be permitted under the following conditions:
a. Vertical forms may be removed as provided in SSHC Subsection 704.03.
b. Slab forms must be supported independently of the wall forms.
c. Vertical supports for the slab forms must be capped with timbers.
Longitudinal spacing of supports with 4x6 inch (100 x 150 mm) caps on edge
should not exceed 4.5 ft (1.4 m). With 4x8 inch (100 x 200 mm) caps,
spacing should not exceed 6 ft (1.8 m). Rows of supports must not be over
4 ft (1.2 m) apart. There must be at least two rows of support, with the
outside rows not more than 2 ft (0.6 m) from walls. Variance from the above
suggested spacing should be reviewed by the Project Manager.
d. Vertical posts shall not be smaller than 4x4 inches (100 x 100 mm), but may
be built up of two 2x4 inches (50 x 100 mm) pieces of lumber. Lateral bracing
will be required. A vertical clearance of ¼ inch (6 mm) must be provided
between the wall form studs and the slab form joists.
NOTE: Lumber may be sized in metrics using actual, not the conventional nominal sizes.
e. The slab form must remain in place as provided in SSHC Subsection 704.03.
f. The interior walls of the culvert must be coated with white pigmented curing
compound as provided in SSHC Subsection 704.03.
F. Flume Reinforcement
1. Regarding Type I, II, IV, and V Flumes, welded wire fabric reinforcing is now required
on the Special Plan C (4341, 4342, 4344, 4345 – both E & M) for the flume and
spillway areas. This wire can be awkward to place and keep in position. Contractors
may place intersecting No. 3 rebar at 12” centers as an alternative to the welded
wire fabric.
G. Backfilling Culverts – Typical Grading
1. The plans define the area used to calculate plan quantities for flowable mortar and
granular backfill. (Flowable mortar plan quantities should include 30% additional for
anticipated consolidation of the granular backfill and shrink due to loss of water.) If the
Contractor opts to excavate a larger area than assumed for plan quantity, additional
excavation, backfill, and flowable mortar will not be considered for pay. We will
however, require additional excavation to be backfilled in a manner as identified by the
plans or typicals.
2. Placement of flowable mortar shall always be computed from "top down." This
means allow for:
434g
2002
a. Pavement thickness.
b. 1 foot (0.3 m) of special backfill, if required.
c. Variable thickness of earth fill where cover heights are over 8 ft (2.5 m).
H. Joints (SSHC Subsection 704.03)
1. The location and dimensions for construction joints will generally be shown on the
plans.
2. In cases where the pour is larger than can be accomplished at one time, or for some
other reason it is necessary to make a construction joint not shown on the plans,
approval should come from the Construction Engineer.
3. When an emergency arises, construction joints shall be placed as directed by the
Project Manager. If there is some doubt as to the proper location of the joint, the
District Construction Engineer should be contacted.
4. Construction joints shall be paid for as outlined in SSHC 704.04.
5. Where it is necessary to transfer shear, shear keys or inclined reinforcement shall be

used. It should be pointed out that in practically all cases, shear transfer is essential
and therefore shear keys or inclined reinforcement will usually be required. When
inclined reinforcement is used as a means of shear transfer No. 5 bars at 1 foot
(300 mm) centers should be considered a minimum. The angle of inclination should
be approximately 15 degrees from the direction of shear and the length of bar should
be at least 2’-3” (685 mm) in order that 20 bar diameters can be placed in both
sections of the pour.
6. Shear keys should be formed with beveled strips or boards at right angles to the
direction of shear. Typical dimensions for a shear key are shown in the following
sketch.
7. If the volume of concrete culvert pour is greater than can be placed in a normal day’s
operation, or in case of emergency, construction joints located in accordance with the
details shown in the drawing “Construction Joints for Box Culverts” may be
constructed. Construction joints between roadway shoulder lines are not shown in
this drawing since they are not to be so constructed unless authorized by the
Construction Engineer.
8. Construction joints in box culverts should be located as follows: Vertical floor joints,
wall joints and top slab joints should be constructed in accordance with the sketches
in this article and should be staggered by approximately 3 ft (1.0 m). When the walls
and top slab are placed simultaneously, the top slab should be stopped and jointed
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) before ending the wall. (Refer to sketch "Construction Joint
for Box Culverts".)
434h
2002
g:\buddy.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 11:42:36
[The side slopes of the key will be less than one to one until the widest dimension of the key
reaches 4 inches (100 mm).]
434i
2002
Culvert Pipe
716.00 CULVERT PIPE (SSHC Section 718)
716.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing culvert pipe. The contractor has the option
to furnish any of the types of culvert pipe listed in the specifications.
A. Culvert List. The contractor is not permitted to order or deliver culvert pipe until a "culvert list"
listing the correct sizes and lengths of pipe is furnished to him/her by the Project Manager.
g:\conman.dgn Feb. 03, 1998 11:00:15
B. Pipe Bedding
1. Pipe bedding is explained in the special plan for “Pipe Policy”.
2. The following soil classifications are necessary to use the pipe special plans to
determine correct bedding materials.
ASTM D 2487 Description and Identification of Soils
SIEVE RANGE
GRAVEL COURSE Passes 3-inch Retained on ¾-inch
FINE passes ¾-inch Retained on No. 4
SAND COURSE Passes No. 4 Retained on No. 10

MEDIUM Passes No. 10 Retained on No. 40
FINE Passes No. 40 Retained on No. 200
C. Temporary Culvert Pipe
434j
2002
Culvert Pipe
1. The Districts will be responsible for making a determination (presumably during the
plan-in-hand inspection) regarding whether or not to ask for new pipe.
2. Logistics Division maintains a list of pipe values which can be used to determine
damages to the Department when pipe is not returned to us in usable condition.
D. Salvaged Culvert Pipe. The following listed examples and rules are given to help clarify
removal and salvage of culvert pipe.
1. Rules
a. The decision to salvage or not to salvage the culvert pipe at each location
must be made by the Inspector or Project Manager prior to beginning removal
work on the culvert pipe, and the contractor must be advised of your decision
prior to his/her commencing work on the removal.
b. Culvert pipe ordered salvaged and carefully removed by the contractor will be
paid for as per the specifications even though after removal it is apparent that
the removed pipe has no salvage value.
c. The contractor must carefully remove the culvert pipe to prevent damage to
the culvert pipe.
2. Examples
a. The contractor is ordered to salvage the culvert pipe. The contractor carefully
removes the culvert pipe. The culvert pipe has almost rusted through from
the outside and really has no salvage value. The length of pipe removed will
be included for payment.
b. The contractor is ordered to salvage the culvert pipe. After the pipe has been
uncovered, it is apparent that it has very little salvage value. If the contractor
is agreeable, the Inspector or Project Manager can rescind their salvage order
and the contractor can complete the removal any way possible. The length of
pipe removed under these conditions will not be included for payment.
c. The contractor is ordered to salvage the culvert pipe. The contractor is

careless in removing the culvert pipe and damages it. The length of pipe
removed less the damage length may be included for payment, or the
Inspector or Project Manager may determine that there is no salvage value left
in the culvert pipe and no payment will be made for salvaging the culvert pipe
at this location.
d. The contractor is ordered to not salvage the culvert pipe. The contractor
removes the culvert pipe and disposes of part of it. The contractor advises
that the remaining removed pipe may be picked up by the Department. The
Department may refuse to pick it up, inasmuch as all such material is the
property of the contractor and it is his/her responsibility to properly dispose of
such material. If the Department picks it up the lengths may be included for
payment as salvaging culvert pipe or they may be picked up without payment
434k
2002
Culvert Pipe
being made. The Inspector or Project Manager shall determine what is fair
and just.
3. Decisions and Documentation
a. There will undoubtedly be conditions arising which are not entirely covered by
these rules or examples but the Inspector or Project Manager should be able
to make the proper decision within the spirit of these guidelines.
4. The project records must include pertinent notes explaining and detailing decisions
made on salvaging culvert pipe.
g:\conman3.dgn Jan. 30, 1998 12:12:45
ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION FOR EMBANKMENT OR BACKFILL

(Left in English Units for Your Convenience)
The following charts may be used for computing Additional Excavation for Embankment or Backfill
for circular culvert pipe, arch culvert pipe or elliptical culvert pipe (pages 450C, D, E, F). “Y” is the
distance from natural ground to the center of the pipe or in the case of arch pipe to the widest part of
the pipe. The numbers in the columns under the different size pipe diameters are the end area in
square feet of the backfill required by the specification.
Example: A 24" circular culvert pipe is laid at Station 17+30 with Flowline Lt. 2416.60 at 47' and
Flowline Rt. 2415.00 at 51': The field design cross-section is 16.6 at 50' Lt., 16.3 at 35' Lt., 16.2 at
434l
2002
Culvert Pipe
18' Lt., 16.2 at CL, 16.0 at 5' Rt., 16.0 at 10' Rt., 15.3 at 15' Rt., 15.0 at 27' Rt., 15.7 at 42' Rt. and
15.5 at 55' Rt.
16.6 at 50'
16.5 at 47' FL = 16.6 at 47' Y = 1.1
16.3 at 35' FL = 16.4 at 35' Y = 1.1
16.2 at 18' FL = 16.1 at 18' Y = 0.9
16.2 at CL FL = 15.8 at CL Y = 0.6

16.0 at 5' FL = 15.8 at 5' Y = 0.8
16.0 at 10' FL = 15.7 at 10' Y = 0.7
15.3 at 15' FL = 15.6 at 15' Y = 1.3
15.0 at 27' FL = 15.4 at 27' Y = 1.4
15.7 at 42' FL = 15.1 at 42' Y = 0.4
15.6 at 51'
15.5 at 55' FL = 15.0 at 51' Y = 0.4
24"×98' Culvert Pipe
434m
2002
Culvert Pipe
Circular Culvert Pipe Embankment Areas

(Y=Height, TC = Center of Pipe)
Pipe Diagram
Y 12” 15” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 72”
0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
0.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
0.4 2.0 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
0.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
0.6 3.3 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.1
0.7 4.1 4.0 4.0 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
0.8 4.9 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.5 4.5
0.9 5.7 5.7 5.7 5.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3
1.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.4 6.3 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.1 6.1
1.1 7.5 7.6 7.6 7.4 7.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.0 7.0 7.0
1.2 8.5 8.6 8.6 8.5 8.2 8.1 8.0 8.0 7.9 7.9 7.9
1.3 9.5 9.6 9.6 9.4 9.4 9.1 9.0 9.0 8.9 8.9 8.8
1.4 10.5 10.7 10.7 10.7 10.6 10.3 10.1 10.0 10.0 9.9 9.8
1.5 11.6 11.8 11.9 11.9 11.8 11.5 11.2 11.1 11.0 11.0 10.9
1.6 12.7 12.9 13.0 13.1 13.1 12.8 12.5 12.3 12.2 12.1 12.0
1.7 13.9 14.1 14.2 14.4 14.4 14.1 13.7 13.5 13.4 13.3 13.2
1.8 15.1 15.3 15.5 15.7 15.7 15.5 15.2 14.8 14.7 14.5 14.4
1.9 16.3 16.6 16.8 17.0 17.1 17.0 16.7 16.2 16.0 15.8 15.6
2.0 17.6 17.9 18.1 18.4 18.5 18.5 18.2 17.7 17.4 17.2 17.0
2.1 18.9 19.2 19.5 19.8 20.0 20.0 19.8 19.3 18.9 18.6 18.3
2.2 20.3 20.6 20.9 21.3 21.5 21.5 21.4 21.0 20.5 20.1 19.8
2.3 21.7 22.0 22.3 22.8 23.1 23.1 23.0 22.7 22.2 21.7 21.3
2.4 23.1 23.5 23.8 24.3 24.7 24.8 24.7 24.4 24.0 23.4 22.9
2.5 24.6 25.0 25.4 25.9 26.3 26.5 26.4 26.2 25.8 25.2 24.5
2.6 26.1 26.6 26.9 27.5 28.0 28.2 28.2 28.0 27.7 27.1 26.2
2.7 27.7 28.1 28.5 29.2 29.7 29.9 30.0 29.9 29.6 29.1 28.0
2.8 29.3 29.8 30.2 30.9 31.4 31.7 31.9 31.8 31.5 31.1 29.8
2.9 30.9 31.4 31.9 32.6 33.2 33.6 33.8 33.7 33.5 33.1 31.8
3.0 32.6 33.1 33.6 34.4 35.0 35.5 35.7 35.7 35.5 35.2 33.9
3.1 34.3 34.9 35.4 36.2 36.9 37.4 37.7 37.7 37.6 37.3 36.1
3.2 36.1 36.7 37.2 38.1 38.8 39.3 39.7 39.8 39.7 39.5 38.3
3.3 37.9 38.5 39.0 40.0 40.8 41.3 41.7 41.9 41.9 41.7 40.6
3.4 39.7 40.4 40.9 41.9 42.8 43.4 43.8 44.0 44.1 43.9 43.0
3.5 41.6 42.3 42.9 43.9 44.8 45.5 45.9 46.2 46.3 46.2 45.4
3.6 43.5 44.2 44.8 45.9 46.9 47.6 48.1 48.4 48.6 48.5 47.8
3.7 45.5 46.2 46.8 48.0 49.0 49.7 50.3 50.7 50.9 50.9 50.2
3.8 47.5 48.2 48.9 50.1 51.1 51.9 52.6 53.0 53.2 53.3 52.7
3.9 49.5 50.3 51.0 52.2 53.3 54.2 54.9 55.3 55.6 55.7 55.3
4.0 51.6 52.4 53.1 54.4 55.5 56.5 57.2 57.7 58.0 58.2 57.9
4.1 53.7 54.5 55.3 56.6 57.8 58.8 59.6 60.1 60.5 60.7 60.5
4.2 55.9 56.7 57.5 58.9 60.1 61.1 62.0 62.6 63.0 63.3 63.1
4.3 58.1 58.9 59.7 61.2 62.5 63.5 64.4 65.1 65.6 65.9 65.8
4.4 60.3 61.2 62.0 63.5 64.9 66.0 66.9 67.6 68.2 68.5 68.6
4.5 62.6 63.5 64.4 65.9 67.3 68.5 69.4 70.2 70.8 71.2 71.4
4.6 64.9 65.9 66.7 68.3 69.8 71.0 72.0 72.8 73. 73.9 74.2
4.7 67.3 68.2 69.1 70.8 72.3 73.5 74.6 75.5 76.2 76.7 77.0
4.8 69.7 70.7 71.6 73.3 74.8 76.1 77.3 78.2 78.9 79.5 79.9
4.9 72.1 73.1 74.1 75.8 77.4 778.8 80.0 80.9 81.7 82.3 82.9
5.0 74.6 75.6 76.6 78.4 80.0 81.5 82.7 83.7 84.5 85.2 85.9
434n
2002
Culvert Pipe
Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas

(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe)
Equivalent Round Size
Y 12” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”
0.1 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3
0.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.8
0.3 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.4
0.4 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.24 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9
0.5 2.8 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.5
0.6 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.2
0.7 4.6 4.6 4.5 4.4 4.2 4.1 4.5 4.7 4.9
0.8 5.5 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.3 5.0 4.9 5.4 5.6
0.9 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.7 6.5 6.2 5.9 5.8 5.7
1.0 7.5 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.8 7.5 7.1 6.8 6.7
1.1 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.1 9.1 8.9 8.6 8.1 7.8
1.2 9.7 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.4 10.3 10.0 9.6 9.2
1.3 10.8 11.2 11.5 11.7 11.8 11.7 11.5 11.2 10.8
1.4 12.0 12.4 12.8 13.1 13.2 13.2` 13.1 12.8 12.4
1.5 13.2 13.7 14.1 14.5 14.7 14.7 14.6 14.4 14.1
1.6 14.5 15.0 15.5 15.9 16.2 16.3 16.3 16.1 15.8
1.7 15.8 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.7 17.9 17.9 17.8 17.6
1.8 17.1 17.8 18.4 18.9 19.3 19.5 19.6 19.6 19.4
1.9 18.5 19.2 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.2 21.4 21.4 21.3
2.0 19.9 20.7 21.4 22.0 22.6 22.9 23.1 23.2 23.2
2.1 21.4 22.2 23.0 23.7 24.3 24.7 25.0 25.1 25.1
2.2 22.9 23.8 24.6 25.4 26.0 26.5 26.8 27.0 27.0
2.3 24.4 25.4 26.3 27.1 27.8 28.3 28.7 29.0 29.1
2.4 26.0 27.0 28.0 28.8 29.6 30.2 30.7 31.0 31.1
2.5 27.6 28.7 239.7 30.6 31.5 32.1 32.6 33.0 33.2
2.6 29.3 30.4 31.5 32.5 33.4 34.1 34.7 35.1 35.3
2.7 31.0 32.2 33.3 34.3 35.3 36.1 36.7 37.2 37.5
2.8 32.7 34.0 35.2 36.3 37.3 38.1 38.8 39.3 39.7
2.9 34.5 35.8 37.1 38.2 39.4 40.2 41.0 41.5 41.9
3.0 36.3 37.7 39.0 40.2 41.4 42.3 43.1 43.8 44.2
3.1 38.2 39.6 41.0 42.2 43.5 44.5 45.4 46.1 46.6
3.2 40.1 41.6 43.0 44.3 45.7 46.7 47.6 48.4 48.9
434o
2002
Culvert Pipe
Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas

(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe)
Y 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”
3.3 42.0 43.6 45.1 46.4 47.8 48.9 49.9 50.7 51.3
3.4 44.0 45.6 47.2 48.6 50.1 51.2 52.3 53.1 53.8
3.5 46.0 47.7 49.3 50.8 52.3 53.5 54.6 55.6 56.3
3.6 48.1 49.8 51.5 53.0 54.6 55.9 57.1 58.1 58.8
3.7 50.2 52.0 53.7 55.3 57.0 58.3 59.5 60.6 61.4
3.8 52.3 54.2 56.0 57.6 59.4 60.7 62.0 63.1 64.0
3.9 54.5 56.4 58.3 60.0 61.8 63.2 64.6 65.7 66.6
4.0 56.8 58.7 60.6 62.4 64.3 65.7 67.1 68.4 69.3
4.1 59.0 61.0 63.0 64.8 66.8 68.3 69.8 71.0 72.0
4.2 61.3 63.4 65.4 67.3 69.3 70.9 72.4 73.8 74.8
4.3 63.7 65.8 67.8 69.8 71.9 73.6 75.1 76.5 77.6
4.4 66.0 68.2 70.3 72.4 74.5 76.2 77.9 79.3 80.5
4.5 68.5 70.7 72.9 75.0 77.2 79.0 80.6 82.2 83.4
4.6 70.9 73.2 75.5 77.6 79.9 81.7 83.5 85.0 86.3
4.7 73.4 75.8 78.1 80.3 82.6 84.5 86.3 88.0 89.3
4.8 76.0 78.4 80.7 83.0 85.4 87.4 89.2 90.9 92.3
4.9 78.5 81.0 83.4 95.1 88.2 90.2 92.2 93.9 95.3
5.0 81.2 83.7 86.2 88.5 91.1 93.2 95.1 97.0 98.4
434p
2002
Culvert Pipe
Elliptical Culvert Pipe Embankment Areas

(Y = Height to Center of Pipe)
0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.0 0.9
0.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
0.4 2.0 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
0.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
0.6 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
0.7 4.0 4.0 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
0.8 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
0.9 5.9 5.7 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4
1.0 6.9 8.7 6.5 6.4 6.4 6.3 6.3 6.2 6.2
1.1 8.0 7.8 7.5 7.4 7.3 7.2 7.2 7.1 7.1
1.2 9.1 9.0 8.6 8.4 8.3 8.2 8.2 8.1 8.1
1.3 10.3 10.2 5.9 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.2 9.1 9.1
1.4 11.5 11.5 11.2 10.8 10.6 10.4 10.3 10.2 10.1
1.5 12.7 12.8 12.6 12.2 11.9 11.6 11.5 11.4 11.3
1.6 14.0 14.1 14.0 13.7 13.3 12.9 12.7 12.6 12.5
1.7 15.3 15.5 15.4 15.2 14.9 14.3 14.1 13.9 13.7
1.8 16.6 16.9 16.9 16.7 16.3 15.9 15.5 15.2 15.1
1.9 18.0 18.3 18.4 18.3 18.1 17.6 17.0 18.7 16.5
2.0 19.4 19.8 19.9 19.9 19.8 19.4 18.7 18.2 18.0
2.1 20.9 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.5 21.1 20.6 19.9 19.6
2.2 22.4 23.0 23.2 23.3 23.3 23.0 22.5 21.7 21.2
2.3 24.0 24.6 24.8 25.0 25.1 24.8 24.4 23.7 23.0
2.4 25.6 26.2 26.0 26.8 26.9 26.7 26.4 25.7 24.9
2.5 27.2 27.9 28.3 28.6 28.8 28.7 28.4 27.9 27.1
2.6 28.9 29.7 30.1 30.5 30.7 30.7 30.4 29.9 29.2
2.7 30.6 31.4 31.9 32.4 32.7 32.7 32.5 32.1 31.5
2.8 32.3 33.3 33.8 34.3 34.7 34.8 34.7 34.3 33.7
2.9 34.1 35.1 35.7 36.3 36.7 36.9 36.8 36.5 36.0
3.0 35.9 37.0 37.7 38.3 38.8 39.0 39.1 38.8 38.4
3.1 37.8 38.9 39.7 40.4 40.9 41.2 41.3 41.1 40.7
3.2 39.7 40.9 41.7 42.5 43.1 43.6 43.6 43.4 43.2
3.3 41.7 42.9 43.8 44.6 45.3 45.7 45.9 45.8 45.6
3.4 43.7 45.0 45.9 46.8 47.5 38.0 48.3 48.2 48.1
3.5 45.7 47.1 48.1 49.0 49.8 50.4 50.7 50.7 50.6
3.6 47.8 49.2 50.3 51.3 52.1 52.7 53.2 53.2 53.2
3.7 49.9 51.4 52.5 53.6 54.5 55.2 55.7 55.8 55.8
3.8 52.0 53.6 54.8 55.9 56.9 57.6 58.2 58.4 58.5
3.9 54.2 55.9 57.1 58.3 59.3 60.1 60.8 61.0 61.2
4.0 56.4 58.2 59.4 60.8 61.8 62.7 63.4 63.7 63.9
4.1 58.7 60.5 61.8 63.2 64.3 65.3 66.0 66.4 66.7
4.2 61.0 62.9 64.3 65.7 66.9 67.9 68.7 69.1 69.5
4.3 63.4 65.3 66.7 68.3 69.5 70.6 71.8 71.9 72.4
4.4 65.8 67.8 69.3 70.8 72.1 73.3 74.2 74.8 75.3
4.5 68.2 70.3 71.8 73.5 74.8 76.0 77.1 77.6 76.2
4.6 70.7 72.8 74.4 76.1 77.5 78.8 79.9 80.5 81.2
4.7 73.2 75.4 77.0 78.8 80.3 81.6 82.8 83.5 84.2
4.8 75.7 78.0 79.7 81.6 83.1 84.5 85.7 86.5 87.3
4.9 78.3 80.6 82.4 86.3 85.9 87.4 89.7 89.5 90.4
5.0 80.9 83.3 85.2 87.2 88.8 90.4 91.7 92.6 93.5
434q
2002
Culvert Pipe
Cu. Yds. of Concrete to be deducted from one Headwall because of skew.
Corrugated Pipe 8” Headwalls
Size/Skew 5” 10” 15” 20” 25” 30” 35” 40” 45” 50” 55” 60”
18” Pipe .000 .001 .002 .003 .005 .007 .010 .013 .018 .024 .032 .044
24” Pipe .000 .001 .003 .005 .008 .012 .017 .024 .032 .043 .058 .078
30” Pipe .000 .002 .004 .008 .013 .019 .027 .037 .050 .067 .090 .121
30” Pipe .001 .003 .006 .011 .018 .027 .039 .053 .072 .097 .130 .174
42” Pipe .001 .004 .008 .015 .025 .037 .052 .073 .098 .132 .177 .238
48” Pipe .001 .005 .011 .020 .032 `.048 .068 .095 .128 .172 .231 .310
54” Pipe .001 .006 .014 .025 .041 .061 .087 .120 .163 .218 .292 .393
60” Pipe .002 .007 .017 .031 .050 .075 .107 .148 .201 .269 .360 .485
72” Pipe .003 .011 .025 .045 .072 .108 .154 .213 .289 .388 .519 .698
84” Pipe .004 .015 .034 .061 ..098 .147 .210 .290 .394 .528 .706 .950
Corrugated Pipe 6” Headwalls
Size/Skew 5” 10” 15” 20” 25” 30” 35” 40” 45” 50” 55” 60”
18” Pipe .000 .001 .001 .002 .003 .005 .007 .010 .014 .018 .024 .033
24” Pipe .000 .001 .002 .004 .006 .009 .013 .018 .024 .052 .043 .058
30” Pipe .000 .001 .003 .006 .009 .014 .020 .028 .038 .051 .068 .091
36” Pipe .001 .002 .005 .008 .014 .020 .029 .040 .054 .073 .097 .131
42” Pipe .001 .003 .006 .011 .018 .028 .039 .054 .074 .99 .132 .178
48” Pipe .001 .004 .008 .015 .024 .036 .051 .071 .096 .129 .173 .233
54” Pipe .001 .005 .010 .019 .030 .046 .065 .090 .122 `.164 .219 .294
60” Pipe .001 .006 .013 .023 .038 .056 .080 .111 .151 .202 .270 .364
72” Pipe .002 .008 .018 .034 .054 .081 .116 .160 .217 .291 .389 .523
84” Pipe .003 .011 .025 .046 .074 .110 .157 .218 .295 .398 .530 .713
Concrete Pipe 8” Headwalls
Size T 5” 10” 15” 20” 25” 30” 35” 40” 45” 50” 55” 60”
18” Pipe 2½ .000 .001 .003 .005 .007 .011 .016 .022 .030 .040 .053 .071
24” Pipe 2¾ .000 .002 .004 .008 .012 .018 .026 .036 .049 .065 .087 .117
30” Pipe 3 .001 .003 .006 .011 .018 .027 .039 .053 .072 .097 .130 .174
36” Pipe 3½ .001 .004 .009 .016 .026 .039 .055 .076 .103 .138 .185 .249
42” Pipe 4¼ .001 .005 .012 .022 .035 .053 .076 .105 .142 .191 .255 .343
48” Pipe 5 .002 .007 .016 .029 .047 .070 .100 .138 .188 .252 .337 .453
54” Pipe 5” .002 .009 .019 .035 .057 .085 .122 .168 .228 .306 .410 .551
54” Pipe 5½ .002 .009 .020 .037 .059 .088 .126 .14 .236 .316 .423 .569
60” Pipe 5½ .003 .010 .024 .044 .070 .105 .150 .207 .281 .377 .505 .579
60” Pipe 6” .003 .011 .025 .045 .072 .108 .154 .213 .289 .388 .519 .698
72” Pipe 7” .004 .015 .035 .064 .130 .154 .220 .304 .412 .553 .740 .996
84” Pipe 8” .005 .021 .048 .086 .139 .208 .297 .411 .558 .748 1001 1346
434r
2002
Culvert Pipe
Concrete Pipe 6” Headwalls
Size T 5” 10” 15” 20” 25” 30” 35” 40” 45” 50” 55” 60”
18” Pipe 2½ .000 .001 .002 .003 .005 .008 .012 .016 .022 .030 .040 .053
24” Pipe 2¼ .000 .001 .003 .006 .009 .014 .019 .027 .036 .049 .065 .088
30” Pipe 3” .001 .002 .005 .008 .014 .020 .029 .040 .054 .073 .097 .131
36” Pipe 3½ .001 .003 .007 .012 .019 .029 .041 .057 .077 .104 .139 .187
42” Pipe 4¼ .001 .004 .009 .017 .027 .040 .057 .079 .107 .143 .191 .258
48” Pipe 5” .001 .005 .012 .022 .035 .053 .075 .104 .141 .189 .253 .340
54” Pipe 5” .002 .006 .015 .027 .043 .064 .091 .126 .171 .230 .307 .414
54” Pipe 5½ .002 .007 .015 .027 .044 .055 .094 .130 .177 .237 .317 .427
60” Pipe 5½ .002 .008 .018 .033 .053 .079 .112 .155 .211 .283 .378 .509
60” Pipe 6” .002 .008 .018 .034 .054 .081 .116 .160 .217 .291 .389 .523
72” Pipe 7” .003 .012 .026 .048 .077 .116 .165 .228 .309 .415 .555 .747
84” Pipe 8” .004 .016 .036 .065 .104 .156 .223 .308 .418 .561 .751 1.010
434s
2002
Concrete Pipe Culverts
717.00 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERTS (SSHC Section 720)
717.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing new reinforced concrete culvert pipe
(round, pipe-arch and elliptical), reinforced concrete slotted pipe and the relaying of existing
reinforced concrete pipe.
A. Pipe Marking. Each section of pipe used should be marked with the fabrication inspector's
initial and the class of pipe, when it arrives at the site. The culvert inspector should not
permit the laying of any section that does not have these markings. The project manager will
receive a copy of the "Report of Shipment of Reinforced Concrete Pipe" (Form DR-420),
listing the size, class, length, number of sections of pipe, the inspector's identification mark
and stock report number. The inspector will use the information contained in this report to
verify approval of reinforced concrete pipe received on the project. The diameter, class,
length, number of sections and the pipe identification number shall be recorded in the culvert
notebook. Each section of pipe should be examined for damaged ends, cracks and
evidence of poor manufacture. All irregularities should be referred to the Project Manager
before using of the pipe.
B. Ordering Material
1. The contractor is not permitted to order or deliver culvert pipe until a “culvert list”
listing the correct sizes and lengths of pipe is furnished by the Project Manager.
2. The Project Manager shall funish a pipe list for driveway and sewer requirements.
3. The District Construction Engineer, and the Project Manager should go over the
drainage situation and features in the field to confirm that the structures shown in the
plans are adequate to handle the drainage. The cross sections taken at each culvert
site should be plotted, the roadway cross section template and the structure plotted
thereon at the proper flow line elevations, and the length of the structure thus
determined. If the Project Manager includes either a larger drainage structure, or an
additional drainage structure in the culvert list, he/she should, if possible, specify the
same type of structure, or the same kind of pipe (culvert pipe, concrete pipe or
corrugated metal pipe) as is shown in the approved plans for the project for the other
structures.
4. In detailing and ordering the pipe culverts, the following rules should be followed for all
kinds of culvert pipe (concrete pipe, corrugated metal pipe or culvert pipe):
a. The overall length of culvert pipe should be given to the closest 2 ft (600 mm).
b. The minimum distance from either end of the pipe to the break point of a
broken back pipe culvert shall be 10 ft (3 m).
434t
2002
c. The dimensions from ends of the pipe to break points, or between break
points of a broken-back pipe culvert should be given to the closest 2 ft
(600 mm) along the centerline of the pipe. The fabricator will be permitted to
locate the elbows 1 foot (300 mm) in either direction from the locations shown
in the culvert sketch.
d. Generally, pipe culverts should not be designed or constructed with elbows of

less than 5 degrees.
e. Prepare a sketch for each broken-back pipe culvert, designing and detailing
the structure using the chart “Slope Data for Pipe Culvert” as a guide, and
including dimensions, details and elevations as shown in the sample culvert
sketch shown in this Subsection.
f. Pipe arch culverts are to be detailed and dimensioned the same as round pipe
culverts. Broken-back pipe arch culverts should be avoided.
g. If flared end sections are to be installed, the pay length shall be the order
length shown in the culvert list and sketch. A note should be made as part of
the list indicating that order lengths do not indicate the “Y” distances shown in
the applicable Standard Plan in the case of metal pipe.
h. The condition, kind of pipe, diameter and lengths right and left of centerline
should be carefully checked before ordering extensions for an existing pipe
culvert. Careful checking will eliminate ordering extensions which are
improper as to length, diameter, kind of pipe, etc.
i. The maximum discharge of the average pipe culvert without head on the inlet
will be provided when such pipe are given a slope of between one percent and
two percent. Slopes steeper than this will not increase the water carrying
capacity of the culvert. The Project Manager should make every effort to use
such slopes when they are compatible with other drainage requirements at
the individual culvert site. In choosing between a straight and a broken-back
culvert pipe, the Project Manager should realize that little, if any, value is
gained by installing elbows of less than 5 degrees.
j. If settlement or subsidence is anticipated under higher fills, pipe culverts and

box culverts should be cambered. The plans will usually include a
“Camber Note” which will state that the pipe culverts should be laid and box
culverts constructed on parabolic camber grade as shown in the applicable
standard plan, and will state the proportion of fill height which the foundation
soil is expected to settle. Settlement of subsidence is generally zero at the
toe of the slope, and at a maximum at the shoulder line.
A. Excavation and Backfilling
1. See Section 702 of this manual.
434u
2002
B. Installation
1. Begin laying concrete pipe at the downstream end of the culvert with the groove or
bell portion of each section upstream.
2. Irrigation culverts shall be constructed of concrete pipe and must have approved
gaskets at the joints. These gaskets shall be installed as per the manufacturer's
recommendations and standards. Here is example of how to calculate payment for
excavation.
EXAMPLE CALCULATION
Area for 1.25 m depth:

1a Area for 5.75 m depth:
Area for 2.75 m depth:
1d + 2d +3d
1b + 2b + 3b
Area for 4.25 m depth: Area for greater than 5.75 m depth:
1c + 2c + 3c 1e + 2e + 3e
434v
2002
Corrugated Metal Pipe Culverts
718.00 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE CULVERTS (SSHC Section 719)

718.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing new corrugated galvanized metal pipes
and pipe arches and the relaying of existing corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches.
A. Pipe Marking. SSHC Tables 1035.01 & 1036.01 contain the required minimum gage or
sheet thickness for the various pipe diameters. The "Materials and Sampling Guide"
provides that the necessary tests for acceptance will be handled by the Materials and
Research Division. Material samples need not be taken by project personnel unless a
special request is made for samples. The diameter of the pipe and number of sections
of pipe covered by each heat number and delivered to each culvert location should be
recorded in the culvert notebook. The pipe shipment should be checked against the
shipment report and any discrepancy should be reported to the Project Manager. The
pipe shipment should also be checked for shipping damage and any damage noted
should also be reported to the Project Manager.
B. Ordering Material
1. The contractor is not permitted to order or deliver corrugated metal pipe
or pipe arches until a "culvert list" listing the correct sizes and lengths of
pipe is furnished to him/her by the Project Manager.
A. Excavating and Backfilling
1. Refer to Section 702 of this manual.
B. Installation
1. The culvert inspector should insist on careful handling of the corrugated metal
pipes or pipe arches. Corrugated metal pipes or pipe arches should be lifted and
moved with a rope sling or similar device which will not damage the galvanized
surfaces of the pipes or pipe arches. The contractor should not be allowed to
drag the pipes or pipe arches over abrasive surfaces as this will also damage the
galvanized surfaces.
2. Corrugated metal pipes and pipe arches shall be laid with the inside
circumferential laps lapped downstream so that the water will flow over the lap.
The pipe shall be rotated so that the longitudinal laps are horizontal. When joining
sections of pipe, the connecting bands should be pulled up as tight as possible.
The band should be tapped with a wooden mallet as the bolts are tightened.
Excessive pressure on the bolts should be avoided to keep from pulling the steel
angle loose from the band. A gap of about 1 inch (25mm) should be allowed
between the pipe ends being joined,
434w
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
434x
2002
DIVISION 800
ROADSIDE
DEVELOPMENT AND
EROSION CONTROL
Roadside Development & Erosion Control
DIVISION 800
ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT & EROSION CONTROL

800.00 GENERAL COMMENTS
Introduction
The highway right-of-way is largely a disturbed environment, lacking a natural soil profile
and subject to unusual runoff, strong winds and abnormal air turbulence, pollutants, wide
temperature variations and other extremes. Seeding, sodding, erosion control and
landscaping are used to deal with this disturbed environment and help to permanently
stabilize it as soon as possible.
Plants and seeds are living things in contrast to concrete, steel, stone and asphalt which
are the inanimate materials used in the major part of road construction. Plants change in
shape, size, color and texture from season-to-season and year-to-year while the
inanimate materials remain virtually constant.
Seeding and landscaping involve living materials used to stabilize the right-of-way,
protect the concrete and steel construction and provide other functions to help safely
direct the motorist. It is understandable that survival of these living materials is important
to the entire roadway system.
These living materials need to be of the quality specified, properly installed and
maintained so they produce the desired results of stabilizing the right-of-way to protect
the construction and provide a complete roadway system.
General Inspection
Inspection personnel assigned to erosion control work should review project plans,
specifications, special provisions, and road standards pertaining to erosion control. The
right-of-way contracts should be reviewed for special treated areas not mentioned on the
plans. For seeding, fertilizing, and mulching, a pre-measurement using slope distances
of the project is needed before the contractor starts. Both the contractor and inspector
need to know the quantities of seed, fertilizer, and mulch required on the project.
Attention should be given to the erosion control plan and proposal notes for the special
items and conditions involved with each individual project.
Material delivered to the project and damaged due to improper storage or handling should
be rejected, even though it may have been previously accepted.
The testing requirements for seed and fertilizer are outlined in the Materials Sampling
Guide.
435
The inspector is to observe the following operations:
• Application of seed, fertilizer, and mulch.
Record the quantities of these materials used in the project records. Record the drill
settings for each type of seed mix.
All revisions made to the seed mixtures, fertilizer, or rate of fertilizer application should be
approved by the Construction Division or the Roadway Design Division (Roadside
Development Section).
SSHC Subsection 802.02, Paragraph 1.a. tells the contractor to submit the plant
purchase orders 90 days before the planting season. If a landscaping contract is
awarded with less than 100 calendar days before the planting season begins, a minimum
of 60 days will be allowed.
Equipment
Proper equipment in good working condition and operated at a reasonable speed must
be used to get the best results. Where possible, the equipment should be operated on
the contour or parallel to the slope.
Equipment for preparation of the seed bed includes a disc, field cultivator, spike tooth
harrow, spring tooth harrow, and a slope harrow. Other equipment may be approved for
use provided that it achieves the desired results.
A heavy disc, such as a Rome disc, may be required in areas of heavy vegetation. A
slope harrow may be required in areas of light soil, where equipment tracks damage the
seed bed.
Equipment for applying seed and fertilizer consists of a hydro-seeder, gravity seeder, end
gate cyclone seeder, cyclone seeder, and a native grass seed drill. The cyclone seeder
(hand seeder) is usually used to spread seed and fertilizer in small areas or areas
inaccessible to field equipment.
The mulch crimper needs to be looked at. The blades, when new, are serrated. Some
serration should be left. The serrations allow the mulch to be tucked into the soil rather
than cut. When in doubt, just have an area crimped and see how it does.
The mulch blower should not chop the hay or straw so badly that all we have is very short
pieces. Most machines are adjustable for the length of straw or hay.
Equipment should be checked for proper rate of application of seed and fertilizer by
measuring a representative area and weighing the required amount of seed to be applied.
All seeders must be cleaned when changing seed mixtures, particularly when changing
from Type A to Type B.
436
Both the Project Manager and the inspector should review the construction period shown
on the proposal form.
From March 1 to June 30 and from August 1 to freeze-up, working days should be
charged whenever it is possible to perform a seeding contract controlling operation.
Erosion Control
Normal grading operations require the following erosion control:
• Install “Silt Fence” before grading begins.
• “Temporary Silt Checks” must be installed as soon as rough grading establishes

ditches. The Contractor should also construct earth-berm dikes, dams, sediment
basins, temporary slope drains and other erosion control features as shown in the
plans or as necessary to control erosion and siltation.
• When final grading begins “Temporary Silt Checks” need to be removed.
• When final grading is complete, the area should be cover crop seeded and TSC’s
reinstalled.
• As soon as possible after final grading and pavement is complete, permanent

ersosion checks should be installed and the area should be permanently seeded.
** If permanent erosion checks are available and installed immediately after final
grading, the TSC do not need to be reinstalled.
437
Removing and Resetting Trees
801.00 REMOVING AND RESETTING TREES
801.01 REMOVING AND RESETTING TREES CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 801

Section 802
Other References: Equipment manufacturer recommendations

Special Provisions
Special Plan
Inspection Equipment: Tree Caliper
General Comments:
1. Make sure the location for resetting the trees is
accessible by the mechanical tree spade.
2. Obtain from the contractor the equipment
manufacturer's size rating for the tree spade and be
sure the trees to be moved are within the allowable
sizes for that machine. There may be size differences
between evergreen trees and deciduous trees.
3. The size is usually called out as a caliper dimension -
This should be the diameter of the tree trunk at 300 mm
(12 inches) above the ground for trees over 100 mm
(4 inches) in diameter.
4. After the trees have been properly set in their new
location, make sure they are well watered. This
watering and any required maintenance procedures in
the Special Provisions are the most important part of
keeping these plants alive.
438
Furnishing and Planting of Plant Materials
802.00 FURNISHING AND PLANTING OF PLANT MATERIALS
802.01 FURNISHING AND PLANTING OF PLANT MATERIALS CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 802

Special Provisions
Other References: American Standard for Nursery Stock (current edition)

Approved Products list
Inspection Equipment: Tree calipers

Tape measure
General Comments:
1. The "American Standard for Nursery Stock" tells the
characteristics each type of plant should have for its
size and is used in determining if the plants are
acceptable.
2. Preconstruction conference should be well in advance
of the project starting date. Roadside Development
Section personnel should be asked to attend.
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Contractor planting operation must occur within the
specified planting seasons.
2. Confirm that the plant material sources have been
approved by Roadside Development.
3. Be sure all plant material is healthy and in good growing
condition before allowing it to be planted.
a. no serious injuries
b. no dry roots
c. no broken root balls
d. no insect pests or diseases
4. If plants must be stored, inspect the storage area to
see if it meets the specifications.
5. Be sure products used meet the specifications.
a. Approved planting fertilizer is pressure-formed
pellets 20-10-5 @ 21 grams or 14-3-3 @
16 grams.
b. Establishment period fertilizer shall be liquid
urea with 28 to 32 percent nitrogen.
c. Wood mulch, approved by Roadside
Development Section.
d. Wood stakes or metal stakes are the
appropriate sizes.
e. Guying material - approved by Roadside
Development.
f. Absorbent polymer on approved product list.
439
g. Pre-emergent chemical is Dathal.

h. Post-emergent chemical is Roundup.
CONSTRUCTION METHODS:
1. Planting area tilled and drilled according to the plans,
details and specifications.
2. Bare roots plants are the most delicate to handle. Their
roots must be kept moist at all times, in storage; when
delivered to the project site, they should be coated with
the absorbent polymer slurry and protected from sun,
wind and cold so they do not get dry before planting. If
it is obvious the roots have been allowed to dry out
before getting planted, these plants should be rejected.
3. Planting procedures are called out in the specifications.
If you have specific questions, contact Roadside
Development.
a. B&B material-set ball into hole onto undisturbed
soil at same depth it was grown.
b. Plumb and partially backfill plants - no rocks or
clods in backfill.
c. Twine cut away from trunk and burlap pulled
back on B&B plants.
d. Properly placed fertilizer tablets in backfill,
correct number for size of plant.
e. Backfilling completed properly - check for
exposed roots on bare root plants after first
watering and initial soil settlement. Make sure
these are covered with soil immediately.
f. Plant material thoroughly watered at time of
planting.
g. Properly pruned branches.
h. Trees staked and properly guyed.
i. Water basin constructed to hold at least the
minimum amount of water called for in
Table 802.01.
j. Applied proper pre-emergent chemical.
k. Be sure mulch covers all tilled area to the
specified depth.
4. During the establishment period, check the project
regularly to see that all procedures are being
accomplished. This is the most critical time in the
project to keep plants from being stressed before going
into winter. Establishment procedure items are:
a. Pruning
b. Protect against pests and diseases
c. Regular watering
d. Replacing mulch
e. Adjust stakes and guys
f. Control weeds
g. Remove dead plant material
440
6. Make sure the contractor notifies you when he/she will

be watering or doing other establishment work so you
can check and document that it has been done
properly. Be sure the contractor realizes this
documentation is to his/her benefit also. If the project is
not properly maintained, the contractor can be required
to maintain the project for a second growing season.
BASIS OF PAYMENT:
1. Partial payment criteria and percentages are indicated
in Table 802.02. (Check Special Provisions for
possible changes.)
2. Inspection dates are approximately:
July 15 - to check establishment procedures
September 1 - count of plants in acceptable growing
condition
June 1 - to final out project
3. Check Special Provision for other inspections that may
be required.
441
Seeding
803.00 SEEDING
803.01 SEEDING CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 803 -- Seeding Special Provisions
Other References: Project seeding Record CDR-61, Section 804,

Section 805
Inspection Crew:
Seeding Procedures: 1. Give the seeding quantities to the contractor and

Roadside Development.
2. The seed will be mixed at the seed company and

tagged with department furnished tags.
3. Fertilizer is usually furnished bulk and must have the

bulk fertilizer form DR125 (Appendix 1). If it is
delivered mixed and bagged it still needs the form. If it
is delivered bagged in its separate components, the
label on the bag will be enough.
4. Native grass drill must have either press wheels or drag

chains (this is important -- the press wheels firm the
seed bed and drag chains make sure the seed is
covered)
4A. Other seeding equipment -- hydro-seeder - big squirt

gun -- must have agitation. Brillion -- seed box that
drops seed between two corrugated rollers
5. Mulching equipment like cultipacker, crimper, mulch
stabilizer, and mulch spreader should be inspected to
confirm proper operation.
6. Tillage equipment -- many shapes, sizes and
descriptions, (common -- disc and field cultivator
7. Soil preparation -- the PM must release the area to be
seeded -- no preparation is to begin until the finish
grade has been approved!
8. Does maintenance have to fix and regrade areas?
Notify the maintenance superintendent -- ahead of time!
9. Is there a heavy weed growth that needs to be mowed?
10. Mulch -- does the contractor have the proper mulch
(some projects are specified prairie hay only)
442
Seeding
11. Does the mulch have the noxious weed inspection

certificate (SSHC Subsection 805.02)
12. Has the mulch been weighed in? (SSHC

Subsection 805.04)
13. Seed bed preparation and seeding procedures:

for drilled seed:
a. Fertilize
b. Disc
c. Or disc and then fertilize
d. Harrow - several discings & harrowings may be
necessary to produce a firm seed bed
e. Seed
f. Mulch
g. Crimp mulch
for hydro-seeding and broadcast seeding
a. Fertilize
b. Disc
c. Or disc and then fertilize
d. Harrow - several discings & harrowings may be
necessary to produce a firm seed bed except if
too steep to operate equipment on
e. Seed
f. Harrow seed into the soil unless too steep
g. Mulch & crimp or hydro mulch
for Brillion seeding --
a. Same as for drilled seed (unless it is hydro-

mulched)
General
b. Some hydro-seeding is done on very steep

slopes that must be left in a roughened
condition by the grader, or there is no way to
make a seed bed.
c. "Rule of Thumb" --
Whatever is seeded in a day must also be

mulched and crimped in that same day."
Exceptions -- unexpected rain -- pay attention to
the weather reports and conditions
443
Seeding
d. Inspection tip for mulch
Establish a 1 hectare (2 ½ acre) or small

0.4 hectare (1 acre) plot for mulch. Mulch and
crimp this area and use it for a reference
e. Send in the project seeding record to Roadside

Development upon completion of seeding
f. Please remind the seeding contractors to do a

good job of cleaning out the seeding drills when
changing from Type “A” to Type “B”. Type ”A”
has taller grasses than we want on our shoulder
areas.
g. Changing from Type “B” to Type “A” does not

require a clean out.
803.02 PERMANENT SEEDING DATES
The normal periods for permanent seeding are from March 1 to June 30 and from August 1
to December 31 or freeze up. These dates may be modified by the Special Provisions.
803.03 PREPARATION OF SEED BED
Before seeding operations commence, care should be taken to properly prepare the area to
be seeded. Areas around culvert headwalls and wingwalls, shoulders, flumes, sign posts,
guardrail, and other structures require special attention. The seed bed shall be worked to a
depth of at least 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
803.04 SEED
The seed is mixed at the seed company and overseen by Roadside Development.
The following items should be noted when inspecting hydroseeding:
A fanning motion or horizontal motion of the seeding nozzle insures uniform application of the
seed. Do not use an up and down motion; it results in seed application too heavy near the
seeder and too thin at the far reach of the spray.
The seeder tank must be cleaned when changing seed mixtures.
@ The seed measurements should be discussed at the preconstruction conference and a date
established as to when they would be provided to the contractor. The Department normally
will buy any excess seed. Pay for what we want and get.
444
Fertilizer
804.00 FERTILIZER
DR Form 125 is required for all bulk fertilizer and bulk blended and then bagged material.
"Fertilizer Grade" refers to the percentages of nitrogen (N), phosphoric acid (P205) and
potassium (K2O) present. The contractor must furnish corresponding scale ticket from an
approved scale for fertilizer used in the work.
804.01 FERTILIZER CHECKLIST (See Seeding Checklist)
804.02 EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS
Our fertilizers are specified in amounts of actual ingredients. A typical specification might
read:
N2 = 32 or 40 kg/ha (26 to 35 lb/acre)

P2 = 103 or 108 kg/ha (90 to 95 lb/acre)
Typically, the contractors will furnish a 16-48-0 or an 18-46-0 material. These numbers are
expressed as a percentage of the total mass. The first number represents the percentage of
nitrogen relative to the total mass, the second number is the percent of phosphorous and the
third is potassium.
In order for the contractor to furnish the 36 kg/ha of N2 (nitrogen) he/she would apply 225 kg
(bulk) material - this would also give us the 108 kg/ha of P2 (phosphorus) when using
16-48-0 fertilizer.
Required: 36 kg/ha of N2
Required Fertilizer: 16-48-0 (16% N2)
36 kg/ha = (.16) x (Unknown Bulk Quantity)
225 kg/ha = Bulk Quantity
kg/ha of P2 = (.48) x 225
= 108
NDR specified sulpher coated urea fertilizer is typically a 36-0-0 or a 37-0-0 material and is
specified at 67 kg/ha (60 lb/acre):
Required: 67 kg/ha
Required Fertilizer: 36-0-0 36% N2
186 kg/ha Bulk with 36-0-0
181 = kg/ha Bulk with 37-0-0
445
Fertilizer
NDR specified urea formaldehyde fertilizer is a 38-0-0 material and is usually specified at
85 kg of N2/ha (35 lb of N2/Acre).
Required: 85 kg/ha of N2
38% N2 in the fertilizer
224 kg/ha = Bulk Quantity
Curve Ball
The contractor wants to use an 11-52-0 to satisfy the 36 or 40 kg N2 and the 103 or
108 kg/ha requirement for P2. How much 11-52-0 should be applied? (Our application rates
state minimum = 36 or 40 & 103 or 108).
Required: 36 kg/ha N2
103 kg/ha P2
Contractor’s fertilizer is 11% N2 or 52% P2.
36 kg/ha - (.11) x (Unknown Bulk Quantity)
327 kg/ha = Bulk Quantity to get N2 and
(.52) x (327 kg/ha) = 170 kg/ha P2
This would be an excess of P2 (327 x 52% = 170 kg of P2), but this is what must be applied
to satisfy the minimum N2 requirement.
Slider
The contractor wants to use the 11-52-0 to satisfy the P2 requirement. How much 33-0-0 will
have to be added to the mixture to satisfy the N2 requirement.
Required: P2 = 103 kg/ha

N2 = 36 kg/ha
Fertilizers: 11-52-0
33-0-0
P2: 103 kg/ha = (.52) x (Unknown Bulk Quantity)
198 kg/ha = Quantity of 11-52-0.
But now how much N2 are we short?
(.11) x (198) = 21.78 kg/ha of N2
Therefore,
(36 - 21.78) kg/ha N2 missing
14.22 kg/ha = .33 (Unknown Quantity of Bulk 33-0-0 fertilizer)

43 kg/ha = Bulk Quantity of 33-0-0 that must also be added.
Required 14.22 = 43.09 kg of 33-0-0 to satisfy the N2 when

furnished N2 = 33% of bulk.
446
Fertilizer
Now what is the applicable rate per ha?
198.07 kg of 11-52-0
+ 43.98 kg of 33-0-0
= 241.16 kg of the mixture per ha
Split-Ball
At 241.6 kg/ha - the bulk spreader has 3990 kg of mixture on the load. How many hectares
will this do?
SO 3990 kg = 16.51 hectares

241.6 kg/ha
Fast-Ball
The load (3990 kg total) is a blend of the 11-52-0 and 36-0-0 (Quick Release Nitrogen) and
37-0-0 (Slow Release Nitrogen) in the right proportions. Now how many hectares can the
load do?
Add the per unit weights of the two components.

241.6 kg (the contractor’s 11-52-0 plus the supplemental nitrogen in the 33-0-0) + 181
kg of sulpher coat quick release nitrogen requirement = 422.6 kg/ha
Then 3990 = 9.44 hectares of coverage

422.6
804.03 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER
The fertilized area shall be disced prior to seeding. Harrowing may also be required.
447
Mulch
805.00 MULCH
All permanent seeding with prepared seed beds are required to be mulched. The mulch
shall be “blown" and "crimped in" as soon after seeding as possible. Machine printed weight
tickets are required for all mulch used. The inspector should receive the weight ticket and
obtain a count of the bales at the time the material is delivered to the job site. The average
bale weight can then be calculated.
As soon as possible, the mulch should be applied to the specified areas at the required rate.
A straw mulching machine capable of spreading mulch uniformly is used for applying mulch.
Areas inaccessible to a straw mulching machine should be mulched by hand.
Immediately after mulch material has been applied, it should be anchored with a mulch
stabilizer operated on the contour.
All areas seeded in a day are to be mulched in the same day. All mulch applied in a day is to
be crimped in the same day.
805.01 MULCHING CHECKLIST (See Seeding Checklist)
805.02 EXAMPLE CALCULATION
Example of area to be mulched at the rate of 5 Mg/ha:
Measured area is 2.6 ha, the average mass per bale is 360 kg.
Compute as follows: 5 Mg/ha x 2.6 ha = 13 Mg of mulch required for the area.
Number of bales required: 13 Mg = 36.1 bales (say 36)

360 kg/bale
805.03 WEEDS
The mulch shall be free of noxious weeds and shall be certified as such by the County Weed
Control Authority.
There is no form for this certification. This certification is done by letter.
805.04 ACCEPTABLE MULCH
Mulch shall either be dry cured native (prairie) hay or threshed grain straw.
There is a lot of go-down wheat that may be offered for mulch. If it has not been threshed,
we do not want it. There are also many CRP acres that have been authorized for haying.
Many of these CRP acres were planted in brome grass. Brome grass is not native (prairie)
hay and cannot be used on our projects.
448
Sodding
806.00 SODDING
806.01 SODDING CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 806 Sodding
Other References: Your New Sod Door Hanger

- See Construction Engineer
Inspection Crew: Construction Technician
Inspection Equipment: NA
Sodding Procedures:
(General Comments) 1. Are the sodding dates in conformance with the
Roadside Development Specifications? (SSHC Subsection 806.01,
(402) 479-4537 Para. 2.)
2. Has Roadside Development been notified where the
sod is coming from?
3. Has the contractor obtained the proper fertilizer? (urea-
formaldehyde fertilizer is BLUE.)
4. What preemergent is the contractor going to use and at
what rate should it be applied? (SSHC
Subsection 806.02, Para. 6.)
5. Where is the contractor's water source and what is the
watering plan - (adequate watering is the key to sodding
success.)
6. Is the finish grade approved for sod to be laid on?
(Make sure the Project Manager has approved the finish
grade.)
7. Has the soil next to the adjoining surfaces been
properly lowered? (SSHC Subsection 806.03, Para. 5)
8. Distribute the "Your New Sod" door hanger.

9. Apply the pre-sodding fertilizer (SSHC
Subsection 806.02, Para. 5.) to the prepared seed bed.
10. Enforce the watering requirement (SSHC
(402) 479-4537 11. Sometimes rejected sod may be overseeded (contact
Roadside Development for the mixture).
449
Sodding
806.02 SOD PLACEMENT
The suggested sequence for placement of sod is:
SHAPE SOD BED
Ditch channels should be shaped in order to obtain a relatively level, flat-bottom ditch which
will drain without water ponding. The depth should be a minimum of 150 mm (6 inches)
below adjacent ground. Many ditch failures result because the ditch bottom is not level,
causing a concentration of flow on one side of the ditch.
APPLY FERTILIZER
Presodding - Two kinds - Inorganic which is typically a 16-48-0 or a 18-46-0 and is available
at most any fertilizer dealer and urea-formaldehyde - a 38-0-0 material that is blue in color.
These fertilizers are applied to the prepared sod bed prior to sodding.
Post Sodding - The 16-48-0 or the 18-46-0 applied at the completion of the watering period.
PLACE SOD
Note the quality of sod, making sure it is free of objectionable material (tree roots, brush,
stones, etc.) also that it is free of noxious weeds and relatively free of all other weeds and
grasses other than bluegrass.
Sod can be placed until the ground freezes at the construction site or at the sod farm.
FINISH SOD
Smooth disturbed areas along the edges of the sod. Be sure that no ridge of dirt remains
along side the sod ditch, and that the disturbed area is properly shaped and sloped to allow
water to run onto the sod.
WATER
Water the sod within one hour after laying, and sooner on hot days, and thereafter as
specified. The amount of water required for sodding varies depending upon soil type, soil
moisture, and local weather conditions at the time of sodding. Watering is to saturate the
soil. Sod should be watered with a spray, and not much pressure. Too much pressure
disturbs the sod and has a tendency to wash the dirt away from its edges.
TAMP
Tamp or roll sod as specified if necessary to secure bonding.
450
Erosion Control
807.00 EROSION CONTROL
807.01 EROSION CONTROL CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 807 -- Erosion Control & Special Provisions
Other References: Approved Products List
General Comments: 1. Has the finish grade been accepted for this area?
(SSHC Subsection 807.03, Para. 1)
2. Is the material on the approved products list? (SSHC

Subsection 807.02, Para. 1)
3. Does the contractor have the right pins? (SSHC

4. Does the contractor have the right fertilizer? (Special

Provisions)
5. Is the seed bed properly prepared? (SSHC

6. Does the seed have the department tags for this

project? (SSHC Subsection 803.02, Paragraphs 3 & 4)
7. Usual work sequence:

a. Soil preparation including the slots for the
erosion checks
b. Fertilize
c. Install filter fabric for check slots and soil fill
d. Seed and rake the seed into the soil
e. Install erosion control material
f. Some erosion control materials come with the
filter fabric attached. When this material is
used, direct seed into the erosion control
material and then soil is spread over the seed
8. Questions -- call 402-479-4537, Roadside
Development.
451
2002
Erosion Control
807.02 FILTER FABRIC
Cut the fabric so that the excess material lies under the outlet so that the water falls
@ on a double layer. this is shown on the plans.
The filter fabric detail should show the fabric covering the area above a box culvert
opening and the boxes wings.
The bale check includes the necessary filter fabric so do not include this quantity
when calculating the pay quantity for filter fabric. Pay limits will be added to the plan
detail.
451a
2002
Erosion Checks
451b
2002
Erosion Checks
808.00 EROSION CHECKS

808.01 EROSION CHECKS CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 808 -- Erosion Checks & Special Provisions
Other References: Approved Products List
General Comments: 1. Work generally performed in conjunction with erosion
control after an area is final graded.
2. Make sure that the center bale is lower than the outside
bales
3. The erosion control material for the erosion checks
must match the erosion control material used in the
ditch. Is the material on the approved products list?
4. Work performed similar to erosion control
5. Seed is never to be placed under the filter fabric - only
on top of the filter fabric
6. Some erosion control materials have the filter fabric
attached. When this occurs, the seed is directly
seeded onto the erosion control material and then soil
is spread over the seed
7. a. “Temporary Silt Checks” (TSC) are to be installed as
soon as rough grading begins. TSC should be placed
as shown in the plans or as directed by the engineer.
b. Temporary Silt Checks (TSC) have to be removed in
order for final grading to be completed. However, once
final grading is complete, the TSC’s need to be
reinstalled.
c. The contractor does not have to reinstall TSC if instead
the permanent erosion checks are available and will be
installed immediately after finish grading.
Roadside Development 8. Questions -- call 402-479-4537, Roadside
(402) 479-4537 Development
808.02 PLACEMENT
The suggested sequence of work for special ditch control is as follows:
Shape
Shape the ditch and prepare the seed bed approximately 3/4 inch (20 mm) deep. If ditches
are unstable and equipment leaves them in a rough condition, the seed bed must be
@ prepared by hand. The ditches should be shaped so that the ditch drains without water
ponding and has a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Minor irregularities in ditch
alignment must be corrected so the completed ditch will follow the ditch line constructed
during the grading operation. This may not be possible in cases of severe washing of the
ditch bottom. All rocks and clods more than 1½ inch (40 mm) in diameter, and all sticks and
other materials, which prevent contact of the special ditch control materials with the seed
bed, shall be removed.
452
2002
Erosion Checks
The vegetation on new slopes may take more than one construction season to be effectively
@ established and bale checks and silt fence should not be removed until they are no longer
needed. It would be unacceptable to hold the contract open until the vegetation was
established.
The only time that steel rebar should be used is when the stake must penetrate shale – then
the PM needs to let Maintenance know this was allowed.
452a
2002
Erosion Checks
452b
2002
Erosion Checks
Check Slots
Install check slots as required. Take care that all check slots are carefully and properly
installed. The success of the ditch may be dependent on proper installation of the check
slots.
Finish
Smooth disturbed areas adjacent to ditch control. Make sure that no ridge of dirt remains
along side the ditch, and that material excavated from the ditch channel is properly shaped
and sloped to allow water to run onto the special ditch control material. This area should be
raked.
Fertilize
Fertilizer should be applied at the proper rate with a mechanical spreader. A cyclone seeder
may be used to secure a uniform rate of application.
Seed
Seed mixture and rate of application are specified. Seed may be applied in the same
manner as fertilizer.
Special Ditch Control Material
Special ditch control materials must be applied without tension and in the direction of the flow
of water since there may be some settling of low or filled portions of the ditch and some
shrinkage of the material. Do not stretch the material. Install staples as specified.
453
2002
Silt Fencing
809.00 SILT FENCING
The purpose of silt fence is to filter the soil from the runoff from our projects. Most of the
time most of the silt will be left on our side of the fence. We may not catch all of the silt, but
we can catch a large portion of it.
1. Q. - When do I have the silt fence installed?
A. - Before any soil is disturbed on the project.
2. Q. - But the silt fence is in the way of construction.
A. - Adjust the installation to fit the situation or adjust the location.
3. Q. - When do I have the silt fence installed around an area inlet?
A. - As soon as there is something for the water to run into - even before the grate
is set.
4. Q. - The silt fence is to be placed where no water will ever reach it.
A. - Take the fence to the water.
5. Q. - I took the fence to the water, but have lots of it we cannot use.
A. - Take it off the contractor's hands in the usual method. (Material furnished but not
used on project -- CO/SA.)
6. Q. - There is no silt fence on this project and I can see the need for it.
A. - Change Order.
7. Q. - The high porosity silt fence is allowing too many fine's to pass.
A. - Install a low porosity fence on the downstream side of the high porosity silt
fence.
8. Q. - There is no room on the downstream side of the silt fence.
A. - Use a low profile, either low or high porosity silt fence, on the upstream side.
9. Q. - The contractor tore holes in the silt fence when he/she cleaned it out.
A. - Repair work is on the contractor and is to be done immediately. Silt fence clean
out is paid as equipment rental items. Make sure the equipment is capable of
doing the work. A backhoe works usually but may require a CO/SA to add to
the contract.
454
2002
Silt Fencing Checklist
10. Q. - We did everything like we should and we still had some silt get away.
A. - Hari-kari is not required. The erosion process is a natural one. We are just
trying to slow it down and keep our "dirt" at home. Take photographs of what
did and did not work and send them in. We will pass on the good and redesign
the bad.
809.01 SILT FENCING CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 809 -- Silt Fencing & Special Provisions
Other References: Silt Fence Guideline & Approved Products List
Inspection Equipment: None
Silt Fencing Procedures:
General Comments: 1. Silt fencing is a first item of business -- before any soil
is disturbed.
2. Does the contractor have the right material? (SSHC

3. Is the material on the approved products list?
4. Does the silt fence location need to be adjusted to

function better?
5. Silt fences only work when they are:
a. installed correctly
b. kept clean
c. kept repaired

(402) 479-4537: Development
809.02 SILT FENCE

@
At bridge approaches and on other steep slopes, the contractor should place extra rows of
silt fence if necessary. The Plan requirements are only a guide and should be adjusted by
the project manager to fit the actual field circumstances.
The bay portion of the silt fence is shown partially buried on some details and is not correct.
The silt fence should be shown on top of the slope.
455
2002
Silt Fencing Checklist
The objective is to place the silt fence so that silt will not leave our ROW. Design depends
@ on site visits and preliminary survey data. However, erosion control has not been the focus
in past surveys. Therefore placement of silt fence and other erosion control items may have
not been optimal. If there is a better place – site the fence there; if more is needed, get it
placed; the bottom line is do whatever is necessary to provide erosion control – in the long
run it is really cheaper.
The District should remove silt fences and bail checks when the ground cover is established.
If the silt fence is properly installed and some subsequent construction activity damages the
silt fence, is additional payment authorized?
It will depend on the circumstances. If the fence had to be installed at a location where
subsequent activity was necessary and caused the fence to be removed and replaced, then
additional payment is justified. However, if the contractor was negligent and did not use
reasonable caution and his neglect resulted in damage to the silt fence, then no additional
payment is authorized to replace the fence.
455a
2002
Slope Protection
455b
2002
Slope Protection
810.00 SLOPE PROTECTION
810.01 SLOPE PROTECTION CHECKLIST
SSHC Reference: Section 810 -- Slope Protection & the Special Provision
Other References: None
Inspection Equipment: Yard stick, meter stick and small balance scale
Procedures and General Comments:
1. The mulch must be prairie hay and certified as noxious

weed free (SSHC Subsection 810.02)
2. The seed will be mixed at the seed company and

tagged with department supplied tags
3. All areas possible are to have the seed drilled. The

drilled seed will establish much faster than broadcast
seed. The percentage of the area to be drilled is given
in the Special Provisions.
4. Hay buster machines have proven to be satisfactory for

the mechanical application of the mulch
@ 5. Sampling for the proper weight of mulch per yd² or m².

Use the meter stick or yard stick -- which ever applies -
- and gather all the hay in a square before crimping --
and weigh this on the scale -- the results are
approximate. Use them as a guide and not as an
absolute
6. Best hay information -- Establish a test plot with the

exact amount of hay per yd² or m² -- crimp -- and use
this plot for a visual comparison

(402) 479-4537 Development
456
2002
Slope Protection Netting
811.00 SLOPE PROTECTION NETTING
811.01 SLOPE PROTECTION NETTING CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 811 Slope Protection Netting
Other Reference: Approved Products List & Plans
Procedures & Comments: 1. The slope protection must be complete before the
netting is installed.
2. Is the netting on the approved products list? (SSHC

Subsection 811.02)
3. Are the pins the right length and wire size? (SSHC
Subsection 811.02)
4. Potential problem is inadequate pinning.
Roadside Development 5. Questions - call Roadside Development

(402) 479-4537 (402) 479-4537.
457
Covercrop Seeding
812.00 COVERCROP SEEDING
812.01 COVERCROP SEEDING CHECKLIST
SSHC References: Section 812 Covercrop Seeding
Other References: None
Inspection Equipment: None
Procedures & Comments: 1. Covercrop seeding is intended to reduce erosion and

siltation.
2. This cannot happen unless the covercrop seeding is

done in a timely manner.
3. This does not mean to wait and have the permanent

seeder put in the covercrop and then overseed with the
permanent seed.
4. The covercrop seed should be done at least 45 days in

advance of the permanent seeding to be of any use!
5. Covercrop will not be used as a matter of course on

"overlay" project, but could be added by change order if
the need ever arose.
6. Piper Sudan has been removed from the covercrop

lists.
7. Questions - call Roadside Development

(402) 479-4537.
812.02 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (SOIL EROSION)
While this section addresses soil erosion on all projects, Construction Manual
Subsection 1100.30 addresses the additional requirements of a storm water discharge
permit. Coverage under the Nebraska Department of Natural Resources permit is required
for all projects which disturb more than 2 hectares (5 acres) and are administered by the
NDR.
The primary objective is to control soil erosion during construction with reasonable and
economical construction practices.
While the contract documents indicate locations of erosion control devices (silt fence, ditch
checks, and silt basins), their actual location should be determined in the field in order to fit
existing conditions.
458
Covercrop Seeding
The erosion control devices should not be limited to those which are included in the contract
documents. The Project Manager should authorize adding any device that will be most
effective in controlling erosion.
The primary method for temporary erosion control is cover crop seeding.
Cover crop seeding requires seed bed preparation covering, and compacting as described in
SSHC Section 803.
The installation of the perimeter silt fence for ditch checks should be installed prior to any soil
disturbing activities occurring on the project or as soon as any ditches are created.
Also install silt fence to protect wetlands.
812.03 TEMPORARY WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (SOIL EROSION)
Limitation of exposed surface area - 75,000 m² (90,000 sy) plus an equal amount for clearing
and grubbing. These figures do include the roadbed until it is surfaced or the base course
has been placed. (SSHC Subsection 204.02, Para. 2)
APPROXIMATE LENGTH OF AUTHORIZED OPEN GRADING AREAS
ROW Width x Length to Equal 69,700 m² - 750,000 sq. ft.
Row Width Project Length Project Length Station Station

(Metric/English) (Metric) (English) (English) (Metric)
20m/66’ 3,485 m (3.5 km) 11,364’ 114 Stations 35

30m/100’ 2,323 m (2.33 km) 7,500’ 75 Stations 23.3
45 m/150’ 1,515 m (1.5 km) 5,000’ 50 Stations 15
60 m/200’ 1,143 m (1.2 km) 3,750’ 38 Stations 12
75 m/250’ 917 m (0.90 km) 3,000’ 30 Stations 9
90 m/300’ 758 m (0.8 km) 2,500’ 25 Stations 8
These figures are for level terrain. Large cuts and fills shorten the lengths given above.
These figures may be adjusted up or down to allow for soil conditions, season of the year,
contractors operating performance or other considerations.
812.04 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
The contractor's responsibility is to insure that soil erosion is minimized and to prevent
eroded soil from leaving the construction project onto adjacent property. Timely installation
of silt control devices, such as silt fence and ditch checks, will help to prevent this damage
from occurring. The most effective erosion control practice is cover crop seeding which
shall be done as the grading progresses. This may require the erosion control contractor to
mobilize and seed more than once.
The contractor's schedule (sequence of operation) and proposed method for accomplishing
the required erosion control must be submitted to the Project Manager at the
459
Covercrop Seeding
preconstruction conference and be approved before clearing and grubbing or excavation

begins.
The contractor's erosion control work plan should include the following:
• Materials to be used.
• Equipment to be used.
• Location and timing of silt fence and silt basins and other temporary erosion control
measures outlined in the Plans.
• Schedule for placement of cover crop seeding and fertilizing.
If the temporary erosion control is to be performed by a subcontractor, the subcontractor

should be involved in developing the work plan.
Damage due to siltation on private property shall be corrected by the contractor with no
expense to the contracting authority.
460
Peat Moss
813.00 PEAT MOSS
813.01 PEAT MOSS CHECKLIST
SSHC References: SSHC Section 813 -- PEAT MOSS
General Comments: Although peat moss is not used often, it is a very

important item when specified.
The peat moss adds trace elements that some plants

need and can help hold water in the planting soil and
help loosen heavy clay in some cases.
Make sure that the peat moss is well mixed with the
backfill before it is placed in the planting hole so it gets
distributed evenly throughout the planting hole.
461
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
462
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
463
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
464
DIVISION 900
INCIDENTAL
CONSTRUCTION
Guardrail Checklist
DIVISION 900
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
901.00 FIELD LABORATORIES AND SCALE HOUSES
901.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Project Manager shall determine if the field laboratories or scale houses furnished by
the contractor conform to the requirements of the specifications, supplemental
specifications and/or the special provisions. Inspection report forms for the laboratories
are available at the district offices.
The Project Manager shall require the contractor to furnish, relocate when necessary and
maintain the field laboratory or scale house as specified.
The personnel using the contractor furnished facility shall use due care in performing
their required duties to prevent unnecessary wear and tear on the facility.
Appendix 3 of this manual has an example of the field book records required for a field
laboratory.
Payment of 100 percent will be made for the field laboratory after it is inspected and
approved by the Project Manager. When two or more projects are included in the same
contract the cost for the field laboratories may be prorated to the projects on the
contractor's estimate forms furnished the Project Manager. When preparing the form for
submittal, the Project Manager will use the same decimal quantities, shown under
contract quantities on the form, for each project on the first estimate that payment is
made for this item even though work has started on only one of the projects involved.
Payment for the field laboratory will not be related to the percent of work performed by the
contractor.
465
2002
W-Beam/Thrie-Beam Guardrail
902.00 GUARDRAIL CHECKLIST
YES NO
@ 1. Before construction of the guardrail, is the slope from the shoulder line
2 ft. (600 mm) past the guardrail post 10:1 or flatter? _____ _____
2. Are offsets correct? [± 1” (25mm)]. _____ _____
3. Is rail height above ground, 27 to 27.5 inches (686 to 702 mm) is OK,
but 27¾” to 30” (702 to 762 mm) preferred for W-beam; 32? inches
(810 mm) for thrie-beam including the bull-nose; cable is at 30 inches. _____ _____
4. Is rail alignment good? _____ _____
5. Are laps to specified case in direction of traffic? _____ _____
@ 6. Is post spacing correct? _____ _____
7. Are plate washers on post bolts according to plans? _____ _____
8. Is 8x8 inches (200 mm x 200 mm) plate washer installed correctly (nails)?_____ _____
9. Are washers in correct location on all connections? _____ _____
10. Is surfacing/pavement around timber guardrail posts
removed and backfilled properly [7” (180 mm) behind post.]? _____ _____
@ 11. Are high strength bolts used in bridge end connection? (See 903.03) _____ _____
12. Are object markers and new hardware in correct location? _____ _____
13. Are delineators in correct locations? _____ _____
14. If 6x8 inch (150 mm x 200 mm) posts are used, are they
installed properly? _____ _____
15. Is end anchorage cable tightened? (Remove all slack) _____ _____
16. Are the vertical steel tubes at the correct elevation [less than 4”
(100 mm) above soil]? _____ _____
17. Are the horizontal steel struts between the end post and the 2nd posts
resting on the ground? _____ _____
18. Is the horizontal steel strut below the hole in the wood post? _____ _____
466
2002
903.00 W-BEAM/THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL

@
903.01 DESCRIPTION
The construction inspection for this work includes:
1. Checking the plan information with actual field conditions to assure plan
information is correct or to modify it as necessary to more closely fit field
conditions.
2. Preparing a field checked order list for the contractor's use in ordering the
necessary materials. This order list should be prepared in letter form to the
contractor and include the following listed items.
a. List stations of guardrail.
b. Side of project.
c. Build, remove, reset, etc.
d. Linear feet (meters) of rail.
@ e. Type of rail.
f. Type of end treatment.
g. Number, type and dimensions for special posts.
h. Special and/or standard plan numbers.
This field checked order list should be prepared and submitted to the district
office for their review. The district office will distribute the original and copies
of the order list after they have reviewed it.
3. This field checked order list should be prepared and submitted as soon as
possible to allow the contractor ample time to obtain the necessary materials
prior to the date established for beginning the work.
4. All build items will be staked by the field personnel. Stakes will be set at the
ends of guard rail locations. Nails (red heads with wire flags as guards)
should be set at each post location. The location of end treatments, bridge
@ approach sections, etc. should be marked with stakes.
5. The field book record for this work should include:
a. Plan data.
b. Construction data.
c. Staking information.
d. Inspection information.
467
2002
e. Quantities and summary of quantities.

@
f. End treatment.
6. Usually guardrail contract work cannot be started until other contract work on
the project is completed. Therefore, the Project Manager must keep the
district office, the contractor and the construction office informed as to the
date the work site will become available.
7. The Contractor must submit to the Construction Division shop plans on the
@ type of “end treatment” that will be installed. Approved shop plans will be
distributed to Maintenance so that future repair work has good reference
documents. The PM must indicate on the “As -Built” Plans the types of “end
treatments” that were installed.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Safety implications make it very important that the Project Manager, inspector, and
@
contractor know the plans and specifications that apply to this work.
A guardrail inspection checklist is provided at the beginning of this Division. This checklist
may be helpful in preparation and inspection for guardrail work. Inspection and material
acceptance requirements are identified in the Plans and Specifications.
Guardrail installations are dependent on correct location of shoulder or bridge approach

paving and 10:1 (or flatter) approach slope to guardrail. Prior to the start of guardrail
installations, these need to be reviewed and verified.
@
Slope on finished surface between shoulder and a point at least 2 feet (600 mm) behind back
of posts should be 10:1 or flatter. This provides a slope which will keep vehicle wheels in
contact with the ground and adequate soil support for the posts.
If the inspector or the Project Manager observe a variance from plans or specifications, then
the contractor should be advised immediately. When situations arise that are not covered by
specifications, plans, standard plans, or this instruction, contact the Construction Division.
The plans, special provisions and specifications will include the material requirements. The
Materials and Research Manual includes the inspection and test requirements for the
materials. The field personnel must insure that all materials used in the work conform to
these requirements.
Standard plan for Traffic Control Devices for Construction and Maintenance, is a part of all
@ guardrail project plans. Field personnel shall insure that project traffic (whether local only or
traffic maintained condition are in effect) is controlled and workmen protected so this work is
performed under safe conditions for all involved. Generally, guardrail work would be
considered to require traffic control procedures similar to the situation sketches for minor
maintenance of short duration or road repair.
468
2002
@
The specifications are very detailed on construction methods and the field personnel must
insure that these methods are used. All connections must be tightened, etc. Cables that are
anchored in concrete cannot be tightened until the concrete has attained 2000 psi (14 Mpa).
The work is not complete until the contractor has tightened all turnbuckles, cables, nuts, etc.
W-BEAM AND THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL INSTALLATION
Rail Alignment
Rail shall be installed with reasonably smooth vertical and horizontal lines. Kinks in both
straight and shop curved sections shall be avoided. Face of rail shall have no protrusions
that could catch a vehicle sliding along the rail. The project plans will show how to install the
guardrail. Minor adjustments may be made to meet plan requirements.
Guardrail Posts
@ Posts shall be installed at prepunched holes and at intervals shown on the correct plan.
Post details on the plans show required backfill materials and correct hole sizes.
Where longitudinal obstructions (electric cables, curbs, etc.) are encountered, 2 or 3 posts
may have a maximum of 2 blockouts to provide an offset. If this cannot be done, obstruction
@ shall be removed or relocated. We could also use a 25 ft (7.62 m) section of nested
guardrail over one or two posts and avoid using post in obstructed locations. Plans will show
these details.
Rail Section Location
@ All prepunched rail sections should be in proper location within each guardrail assembly.
This involves sections with 3 feet-1½ inch post spacing, sections with 6 feet- 3 inch
(1.905 m) post spacing, and appropriate end treatments section as shown in the plans.
Rail Height
Guardrail installations are constructed with W beam and thrie-beam rail. The Standard
@ Plans indicate the mounting height is measured from surface of ground at the face of rail to
the top of rail. Target height is 27 ¾ (705 mm) for W-beam and 32? inch (829 mm) for thrie-
beam.
On a project where all new guardrail is installed or existing guardrail is being removed and
reinstalled, tolerance will be.
469
2002
“W”-Beam/Thrie-Beam Guardrail – Construction Method
Lapping of Guardrail
Lapping of rail must be accomplished in a uniform manner. Details shown in the plans will
achieve uniformity statewide. However, clarification may be helpful in obtaining this
uniformity in specific instances.
Plans indicate guardrail shall normally be lapped in direction of traffic flow. Following this
@ general rule, most installations will be lapped correctly. Plans provide a lapping procedure
detail for each type of guardrail installation except:
• Where guardrail alignment is curved away from centerline (bridge ends or end
sections), lap should protect approach vehicles.
Keep in mind that the basic principle of lapping has to do with favoring the traffic for which the
guardrail is being installed.
@
All laps of rail shall take place at a post. The 5/8 inch (16 mm) x 1 ¼ inch (32 mm) splice
bolts at these laps should not have washers.
BRIDGE CONNECTIONS
All end treatments including bridge approach sections shall be installed so that the end post
@ sleeve is not more than 4 inches above ground level so that the undercarriage of a vehicle
cannot be snagged. Exception to this is on trailing end of a one-way bridge where Type "J"
terminal section shall be installed on outside of rail.
On guardrail attachments to concrete which require a bolt longer than 2 ft (600 mm), 7/8 inch
(22 mm) bolt anchors may be grouted into concrete using threaded insert anchors with
epoxy.
All bolts on bridge end connections shall be high strength, galvanized hex bolts. Surface of
bolt head should be marked A-325, A449 or have three radial marks at 120° intervals.
GUARDRAIL POST
W-beam and thrie beam guardrail posts – wood and steel – must be able to rotate if the
@ beam rail is to work properly. Care must be taken to insure compliance with the details
shown on the plans regarding “space” and density of material behind the posts.
END TREATMENTS
There are two general types of end treatments (Type I & II). Future plans will no longer
@
provide “end treatment” details. Contractors will be required to submit shop plans for the
“end treatment” they want to use. The plans will indicate where the end treatment is to be
installed and whether Type I or Type II end treatment is required and also the acceptable
styles for each “Type” (such as Best, ET-2000, etc).
End treatment Type I is dimensioned as 50 feet (15.2 m) so that ET-2000, Best and SKT-350
can be bid competitively. The ET-2000 is only 37 feet- 6 inches (11.4 m) and the extra
470
2002
“W”-Beam/Thrie-Beam Guardrail – Method of Measurement
12 feet-6 inches (3.8 m) split will be standard W-beam, either placed parallel or 2511 as
@ shown on the guardrail layout special plan.
End treatment Type I is generally used on expressways and interstates where the speed limit
will be at or above 65 mph. “Type I” will be on a guardrail which is set on a 25:1 taper.
End treatment and Type II is used at locations where the posted speed is under 65 mph.
Type II will be on guardrail which is on a 15:1 taper.
The PM must indicate the type of end treatment that was installed in the “As -Builts”.
END ANCHORAGE
To insure that concrete does not become attached to bottom and sides of breakaway end
@ anchorage post a small amount [1 or 2 inch (25 or 50 mm)] of soil may be tamped around
post bottom or bottom 6 inches (150 mm) of post may be wrapped with expanded
polystyrene foam sheets in place as shown on the plans. If steel tubes are used, grease the
bottom 12 inches (300 mm) of the wood post and the inside of the sleeve generously. This
is done so that it would be easy to remove the damaged ones.
Soil removed from all end anchorage holes should be disposed of away from the hole to
insure proper installation height.
To remove post a small quantity of diesel fuel can be poured on expanded polystyrene foam.
This will dissolve foam for easy removal.
Final field measurement will not be required when the guardrail is constructed as ordered.
471
2002
Subdrain Earthwork
904.00 SUBDRAIN EARTHWORK
904.01 SUBDRAINS
Subdrains are constructed on grading, paving, and structures contracts. Refer to

SSHC Sections 914 and 915.
Subdrains are used for tile relocations, backslope drains, longitudinal and cross drains under
the roadway area.
Subdrains are also used with granular blankets to develop a drainage layer in areas where
the soil has a high moisture content and poor stability.
904.02 BACKSLOPE DRAINS
Backslope drains are used in areas where seepage and/or a slide is possible. Where a
water table is perched on a very dense layer, a subdrain is installed at or below the surface
of the very dense layer. The flow line is very important in this case. A backslope drain may
also be used to drain a sand pocket, again plan flow line is important.
904.03 LONGITUDINAL DRAINS
Longitudinal drains are usually installed at the pavement edge to remove any water that
accumulates under the pavement.
Inspection considerations must include:
• Trench Excavation
The trenching equipment must be adjusted and maintained so the trench is

excavated to the specified depth. It is important that all of the loose excavated
material is removed from the bottom of the trench to minimize settlement of the
trench backfill. Trenchers have a metal device on the end of the trencher’s boom
called a “crumber.” The “crumber” is to be adjusted so the loose material is scraped
off of the bottom and removed.
• Outlets
All outlets should be inspected prior to backfilling. The pipe coupling should be
inspected to assure proper installation. The flow line of the outlet should be checked
for uniform downward grade toward the ditch. All outlets are to be marked with an
orange fence post.
Some projects require that existing subdrain outlets be extended, for example, on a
shoulder widening project. On these projects, the contractor must remove the
existing rodent guard before extending the pipe.
472
2002
Subdrain Earthwork
Porous Backfill
Porous backfill material must be in contact with the base of the pavement for the
subdrain system to operate correctly. This may require hand work by the contractor.
No soil shall remain between the pavement edge and the subdrain trench.
472
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
473
2002
DIVISION 1000
MATERIAL DETAILS
Material Details
DIVISION 1000
MATERIAL DETAILS
1001.00 GENERAL
Specification Division 1000 provides detailed descriptions of the materials specified for
highway construction. (Refer to the Standard Specification for Highway Construction
Manual Division 100 for further material information.)
1001.01 MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS
Construction materials may required certificates of compliance, certified tests, or reports

of inspection from an outside agency for their use and acceptance. These materials will
not be incorporated into the work until such information has been received by State
Personnel.
After the material information has been received, the following course of action will be
taken:
A. The information will be reviewed by State Personnel to insure that it

conforms with the material requirements.
B. The information will be dated when it is received from the contractor. This
can either be initialed and dated or date stamped.
C. The original copy of the information will be forwarded to the Materials &
Research Division immediately. A copy will be kept in the Project
Manager’s project file.
Material inadvertently incorporated in the work without the required material

documentation should not be included for payment on the progress estimate. If an item
is on the estimate, it should be removed until proper documentation is received.
1001.02 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION RECEIPT & INTEREST DATE

DETERMINATION
The interest beginning date is normally the sixty first day following tentative acceptance.
If the certifications are not received in a timely manner, then the interest date will be
adjusted to the date that the documentation is in NDR possession. This is why it is
extremely important to date the information when it is received from the contractor.
477
2002
Additions/Deletions to the Approved Products List
1002.00 APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST
1002.01 DESCRIPTION
Many material items are not described in detail in the plans and specifications but are
authorized for use as shown on the NDR Approved Products List. The NDR Approved
Products List is on file on the NDOR web page and is updated when a new product is
added to the list or when a product is dropped from the list.
1002.02 ACCESS COMMANDS
Moved following paragraph from page 479 and deleted text.
Contact Terry Masters in the NDR Materials and Research Division at (402) 479-4754 if
there are any questions concerning the viewing or printing of the Approved Products List.
478
2002
Additions/Deletions to the Approved Products List
1002.03 ADDITIONS/DELETIONS TO THE APPROVED PRODUCTS LIST
The Approved Products List is normally updated on Friday. Materials that meet NDR’s
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction may be added to the list at any time.
Materials may also be deleted from the list at any time.
Contact the Physical Testing Section in the NDR Materials and Research Division at
(402) 479-4746 to obtain information on required certification and documentation that is
necessary for a specific product.
SSHC Subsection 1001.03 identifies details relating to the use of the Approved Products
List and the procedure for using a material that is not included on the Approved Products
List.
479
2002
White Pigmented Curing Compound and Hot-Pour Joint Sealer
1003.00 WHITE PIGMENTED CURING COMPOUND AND HOT-POUR JOINT

SEALER
1003.01 DESCRIPTION
White pigmented curing compound and hot-pour joint sealer are sampled at the
manufacturer’s plant and tested in the Lincoln laboratory before being shipped to
Nebraska. Test results for curing compound and joint sealer are on file on the computer.
When either of these materials arrive at the construction site, it is necessary to identify
the manufacturer and lot number of the material, then check the Approved Products List
@ on the Department’s web-site to verify that the material has been tested and approved for
use on the project. The possibility always exists that untested material may be shipped
to the construction site.
1003.02 REPORTING MATERIAL USAGE
If you use white pigmented curing compound and/or hot-pour joint sealer,
@ Materials and Research needs to know. Send Terry Masters an e-mail note
with product name, manufacturer, lot number, approval date and the quantity
used.
480
2002
PCC Requirements – Cement Certifications
@ 1004.00 PCC REQUIREMENTS
1004.01 CEMENT CERTIFICATIONS
Note 7 in the Materials Sampling Guide, Volume II, requires that the pink copy of the
cement certificate of compliance, DR Form 228 or a copy of the mill’s own certification
form be mailed to the Materials & Research Division. However, Materials & Research
does not need the pink copy of the certification mailed to them anymore. The copy at the
concrete production facility is enough for Materials & Research records.
The certificate of compliance is needed both for mills that require sampling and those
that do not. When a sample is required, normal procedure has been to submit the pink
copy with the sample. This is acceptable. For those mills which do not require
sampling, please collect and submit the certifications on a routine basis but at a
minimum of once each week.
481
2002
Concrete Strength
1004.02 CONCRETE STRENGTH
The following English and Metric unit “Concrete Strength Variation” table is provided to
define the different strengths that may be specified. The specified strength has varied as
the Department has converted from English to Metric units and then back to English
units. In the following table, the standard strengths are given in pounds per square inch
(psi) and the various equivalent units that have been used in the past 5 years to specify
this strength are shown. However, the strength that a contractor is held-to can only
be what is contained in the contract. So if the contract calls for 2900-psi, we
cannot reject or deduct if he does not provide 3000-psi.
Concrete Strength Variation
Current Actual Actual

Standard Specified Specified
Strength Strength Strength
(psi) (psi) (Mpa)
3000 3000, 2900 20, 20.7, 21
3500 3500, 3625 25, 24.3, 24
4000 4000, 4350 30, 27.6, 27
@ 1004.03 CONCRETE CYLINDER POLICY
Cylinders
All concrete cylinders applicable to this policy will be 6 inches by 12 inches. All
cylinders shall be cast by currently certified technicians, or by new or temporary
employees trained and approved by qualified Materials and Research personnel
in accordance with the NDR technician training program.
Structures
A set of three cylinders will be made for the first 100 cubic yards placed and an
additional set of three cylinders will be made for the remainder of the concrete
placed for each day provided at least 50 cubic yards more is placed. A minimum
of three cylinders will be made for each day’s placement. One cylinder from
each set will be tested at 28 days. The other two cores from each set will be
tested at the intervals designated by the engineer. If no intervals are designated,
the cylinders will be tested at 7 days and 14 days respectively.
Pavements
A set of four cylinders will be made for each day’s placement. These cylinders
will be tested at the intervals designated by the engineer unless the pavement
does not need to be cored. If the pavement will not be cored, at least one
cylinder must be tested at 28 days. The other cylinders will be tested at the
intervals designated by the engineer.
481a
2002
Concrete Cylinder Policy
If the pavement must be cored and no intervals are designated, the cylinders will
be tested at 7, 10, and 14 days or until the specified strength is attained. If
needed, the fourth cylinder will also be tested at 14 days and the average strength
of the two cylinders reported. If the pavement will not be cored and no intervals
are designated, the cylinders will be tested at 7, 10, 14, and 28 days or until the
specified strength is attained.
Miscellaneous Concrete
Concrete placements requiring five cubic yards or less and which are noncritical,
may be accepted by the engineer without testing. Noncritical refers to
placements that will not sustain traffic loading and for which failure is not likely to
disrupt traffic or pose a threat of harm to the traveling public.
CONCRETE CYLINDER REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY

REQUIRED REQUIRED BREAK DATE
NUMBER
CONCRETE
OF
PRODUCT 7-DAYS 10-DAYS 14-DAYS 28-DAYS OTHER
CYLINDER
S
STRUCTURES* 3 2 2
PAVEMENTS** 4 1 1 1 1
MISCELLANEOUS Concrete placements requiring 5-cubic yards or less which are
CONCRETE noncritical, may be accepted without testing.
*3-cylinders are required for the first 100-yd³ each day and another set of 3-cylinders is required if a total of at least 150-yd³ is required
in one day. The Engineer may set the date of the third cylinder break as necessary.
**Four cylinders are required for each day’s placement. The Engineer may designate the date the cylinders are to be broken; if the
pavement will not be cored at least one cylinder will be broke at 28-days; if the pavement will be cored then cylinders are broke at dates
designated by the Engineer or as shown above.
481b
2002
Materials & Research Division’s Final Review Procedures
@ 1005.00 MATERIAL & RESEARCH DIVISION’S FINAL REVIEW PROCEDURES
The Materials and Research Division’s Final Review Section will perform the following steps:
Ø The Materials and Research Division will receive notification from the Project Manager
that the project is complete and ready for the material review.
Ø The Materials and Research Division’s Final Review Section will make a listing of all
materials that need to be reviewed.
Ø This listing will be routed through the various laboratories in the Materials and Research
Division. The individual laboratories will review their areas and note if the material is
satisfactory or a deficiency exists (i.e.: required samples or certifications not received,
materials not meeting specification requirements, deductions in compensation for failing
materials).
Ø When complete this listing will be returned to the Materials and Research Division’s Final
Review Section.
Ø The Materials and Research Division will determine which materials are deemed critical
and non-critical.
Ø Non-Critical Materials will be accepted by a blanket letter of acceptance. This letter will
be generated by the Materials and Research Division’s Final Review Section and sent to
the Project Manager by e-mail or fax. By signing this letter the Project Manager is stating
that all of the materials met specification requirements and that the necessary
documentation is in their files. The Project Manager can fax or mail the signed letter to
the Materials and Research Division (fax number 402-479-3975).
Ø Critical Materials will require that the necessary certifications and samples are on file in
the Materials and Research Division. The Materials and Research Division’s Final
Review Section will send an e-mail to the Project Manager listing these materials and
requesting that the required documentation be submitted.
Ø Once all of the necessary information is received in the Materials and Research Division
a letter will be sent to the Project Manager stating that the material review is complete.
(There is the possibility that another material shortage could occur if a subsequent
estimate adds an item or increases a quantity. If this happens the Project Manager will
be notified).
481c
2002
Materials & Research Division’s Final Review Procedures
Ø The Construction Division will contact the Materials and Research Division when a final
estimate is ready for our approval. When all necessary documentation has been
received we will release this estimate for final payment. A letter will be sent to the Project
Manager stating that the Materials and Research Division has released the final estimate.
Ø If you have any questions regarding this procedure please contact Rhonda DeButts @
@ 402-479-4760 or Dave Hall @ 402-479-4837.
481d
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
482
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
483
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
484
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
474
2002
DIVISION 1100
ENVIRONMENTAL
Environmental Introduction
DIVISION 1100 - ENVIRONMENTAL

1100.10 INTRODUCTION
This Division is provided for information only. It gives you an understanding of the
complex laws and regulations that affect environmental issues. You need to be aware of
these laws and regulations but you should not advise or direct the contractor regarding
"Environmental Issues." However, reporting and recording in the field book all contractor
activities is essential.
The phrase Environmental Issues can literally include almost anything from
anthropological bones to endangered species, from land use to land disposal, from
wetlands to storm water runoff, from wild flowers to underground tanks. For the
purposes of this chapter, inferences will be limited to only those issues identified in each
section. For this reason, much of the following information contains both general
background and specifics. Probably the most important aspects of any environmental
issue are:
• Environmental "issues" are to be taken very seriously. Inappropriate action can

result in personal fines "and/or" jail. This is not intended as idle gossip or scare
tactics. As a user of this chapter, it is important to know the facts of life.
• Contact the Construction Division or Project Development with questions,

concerns, and observations. If there is a question about whether or not to notify,
always make a notification.
"IT IS FAR BETTER TO BE SAFE THAN SORRY!"
Remember, individuals can be held personally liable for not reporting an

environmental incident. Through notifying the next higher level, your liability is
significantly reduced. While the Construction Division and Project Development
may need to refer questions to others, it is important to notify the Construction
Division and Project Development so issues can be responded to and tracked.
• ALL contacts with DEQ, OSHA, and/or EPA shall be made by, or through, the
Construction Division. The only exceptions will be when some other office is
better able to address the issues. For example: On legal issues, the Attorney
General is better suited for a response. The inspector's responsibility is to
contact the Project Manager and make a diary entry, the Project Manager is to
contact the Construction Division, and the Construction Division will in turn
contact the most appropriate office for response. Remember: Timeliness in
responses to a regulatory agency is of the utmost importance.
• When the contractor causes an environmental incident, then he/she is

responsible to take the appropriate notification and remediation actions. Our
inspectors and Project Managers should notify the appropriate people through our
chain of command and document the contractor's actions in the field book.
485
Environmental Introduction
Normal notification chain of command:
• The Inspector notifies the Project Manager.
• The Project Manager notifies the District Construction Engineer (DCE)
• The DCE notifies the District Engineer and the HQ Construction Division.
• The Construction Division notifies the EPA, DEQ, Attorney General and all other
affected agencies.
Emergency notification:
• First person to see/become aware of an environmental incident should take

actions to notify the agency that can contain and mitigate the hazard.
• Simultaneously as notification is occurring, actions need to be taken to keep

workers and public safe.
1100.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is a Federal agency with environmental protection

regulatory and enforcement authority. EPA administers such Acts as the Clean Air Act
(CAA), Clean Water Act (CWA), Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA),
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA), Toxic
Substance Control Act (TSCA), and other federal environmental laws. EPA was created by
Congress in 1970. In this landmark legislation the lawmakers established a preamble for the
EPA. The preamble states:
"Pollution prevention is based on the idea that it makes economic as well as
environmental sense to stop producing hazardous waste, rather than attempting to
clean-up hazardous substances after they have become released."
U.S. EPA has, for the most part, delegated authority to the states for management of ongoing
environmental functions. All actions and requests must be made to U.S. EPA, Region VII,
Kansas City, Kansas, however, Nebraska DEQ does have specific regulatory authorities in
Nebraska. Some instances are:
FIRST, DEQ has signoff responsibility for RCRA and CERCLA actions in Nebraska. This
means before those actions can become final, DEQ must approve certain aspects of most
actions.
SECOND, very often DEQ is asked to be the regulatory agency's on site coordinator. This
means that an action and resolution may be developed with U.S. EPA. Once a cleanup
action is initiated at a site, DEQ would provide site compliance inspection.
THIRD, and again very often, DEQ will choose to request U.S. EPA's permission to be the
lead agency in a particular action. In this case, all direction will be from DEQ, with EPA
assuming a secondary "review" role.
486
Underground Tanks
A large portion of "who's in charge" confusion can be attributed to the complex nature of
environmental laws. This confusion can be, and is, further compounded by the mixture of
regulating authorities in charge of enforcing these laws. The laws require action depending
on the chemical(s) present and have significantly different action levels depending on how
much of any one constituent is found. The final blow often comes when conversation is
composed mostly of acronyms.
1100.12 REGULATORY AUTHORITIES
EPA
In Nebraska, U.S. EPA is responsible for CERCLA and RCRA programs. These are
administrated by EPA's Region VII in Kansas City, Kansas.
OSHA
In Nebraska, OSHA is administrated by Nebraska Department of Labor. Enforcement of

OSHA is the responsibility of the federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration. All
complaints regarding maritime operations should be referred to the Federal Office in Kansas
City, MO, except those involving State or local governmental employees which continue to be
covered by the Nebraska Department of Labor.
Nebraska Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ)
DEQ is responsible for specific environmental regulatory functions. Most of DEQ's

environmental authority and powers are listed in its legislated guidance. "Generally" this
authority includes:
• Air Quality
Clean Air Act and Clean Air Act Amendments, plus additional regulations codified by
Nebraska legislature.
• Land Quality
Nonhazardous waste disposal.

All underground storage tanks.
• Water Quality
Storm water pollution

Water pollution
Wetlands
Public and private wells
• Waste Reduction
• Compliance and Enforcement
487
Underground Tanks
1100.13 ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS
Principle legislative acts which govern most of DEQ's work.
AHERA Asbestos Hazardous Emergency Response Act: Federal law codified in 1986.
This act promulgates regulations which require inspection of buildings for
materials which contain asbestos. If the material is found, it must be removed
prior to demolition for health and environmental protection reasons. NDR has
chosen to prepare and let a separate contract for removing asbestos.
However, asbestos could be removed in conjunction with demolition.
CAAA Clean Air Act Amendments: Federal law codified in 1990 and regulates air
quality issues.
CERCLA Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act:

Federal law codified in 1980, sometimes referred to as "Superfund."
CERCLA gives the federal government the power to respond to releases, or
threatened releases, of any hazardous substance into the environment as
well as a substantial danger to public health or welfare.
CERCLA is a remedial statute designed to deal with problems of past
mismanagement of hazardous waste. Under CERCLA, the government
created a process for identifying liable parties and ordering them to take
responsibility for cleanup operations.
CWA Clean Water Act: Federal law codified in 1977. The objective is to restore and
maintain the chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the Nations waters.
NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System: Federal law codified through
publication in 55 FR 47990 (November 16, 1990) and 57 FR 11394 (April 2,
1992). In a simple "nutshell", this is the Storm Water Pollution program.
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act: Federal law codified in 1968.
Established for the regulation of site safety procedures, worker training, and
worker safety and health standards.
Health related requirements of OSHA typically key on the presence of
"TOTAL" amounts of listed elemental constituents. Be careful when
considering constituents because OSHA often considers elements according
to valence charges. For example; Trivalent chromium Cr+3 has one action
level, while hexavalant chromium Cr+6 has another, and chromium (metal)
has still another. Most of OSHA's regulations are found in Title 29 Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) Sections 1910 and 1926. A specific listing of
chemicals is found in Table Z, 29 CFR 1910.1000.
RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act: Federal law codified in 1976
which provided for the development of federal and state programs for the
regulation of land disposal of waste materials and the recovery of materials
and energy resources. The act regulates not only the generation,
488
Underground Tanks
transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of hazardous wastes, but

also municipal solid waste disposal facilities. Several amendments to RCRA
have imposed a series of even more stringent requirements than the original
law.
RCRA is a federal statute enacted to ensure that wastes are managed in an

environmentally sound manner, and to protect human health and the
environment from the potential hazards of waste disposal. Whereas
CERCLA focuses on the cleanup of uncontrolled or abandoned sites, RCRA
seeks to better manage active hazardous waste treatment, storage, and
disposal facilities so new superfund sites will not be created in the future.
SARA Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act: A federal law codified in

1986. Amended CERCLA and introduced more stringent and detailed
guidelines for cleanups. Also established regulations for industries using
chemicals and releasing pollutants into the environment.
TITLE III of SARA requires that communities and the public be supplied with
information on chemical inventories, release reporting, accidents/spills.
TITLE III also provides for full public participation in planning and preparing for
chemical emergencies arising from local industries.
SDWA Safe Drinking Water Act: Federal law codified in 1974. This law is intended to
protect drinking water resources at the tap. Establishes control of
contaminants in public drinking water and sets baseline national drinking
water standards.
TSCA Toxic Substance Control Act: Federal law codified in 1976. Established for
the regulation of toxic substances.
1100.14 WETLANDS
Special Environmental Conditions
New procedures have been established to bring specific attention to those environmental
issues or documents directly (or indirectly) affecting our construction projects.
Reference is made to the attached Project Development Summary Sheets. These
summary sheets will normally be two pages or less in length and pertain to such things as
wetlands, waterway permits, historic bridges, and other environmental issues. These sheets
will be sent to the districts, and the information shown thereon must be carefully compared to
the provisions of the actual permits issued for the work involved.
Additional information will also be shown in the plans. Project Development will be preparing
one or more "2W" sheets for inclusion in the plans. The "2W" sheets will provide delineation
of wetland areas (on and off the project) and notes pertaining to special conditions or
environmental issues. These plan sheets, also, should be checked against the provisions of
actual permits issued for the work involved.
In order to insure that all parties involved are aware of the environmental issues affecting a
project, please see that the following procedures are followed:
• Thoroughly review the plans and special provisions for environmental issues.
489
Underground Tanks
• Discuss all environmental issues at the pre-construction conference.
• Provide the contractor a copy of the environmental conditions summary.
• Invite Project Development to the pre-construction conference (when appropriate).
Protection of the environment has become a very important issue of public concern, and we
must consider it to be a very important issue in the performance of our required duties.
Please make every effort to see that we and our contractors fully comply with all
environmental provisions of the plans and specifications.
490
Underground Tanks
Project No.:
Control No.:
Location:
PROJECT DEVELOPMENT SUMMARY SHEET
WATERWAY PERMITS
Type of Permit Location Permit Number
Special Plans (to be included in final plan package):
2WA Sheets Yes____ No____

Mitigation Plan Yes____ No____
Special Cross Sections Yes____ No____
Others Yes____ No____
Description:
Special notes on plans:
Special provisions (see attached):
Special conditions (see attached):
Additional comments:
______________________________________
Wetlands Engineer (Signature & Date)
491
Underground Tanks
HISTORIC SITES
Historic Bridges Yes____ No____
Special Provisions (see attached):
___________________________________________
Environmental Engineer (Signature and Date)
OTHER ENVIRONMENT ISSUES
Special conditions:
Special notes on plans:
___________________________________________
Environmental Engineer (Signature and Date)
492
Underground Tanks
Army Corps 404 Permits
Over the past year there has been some new developments relative to the Army Corps 404
Permit process.
The General Permit 77-2 requires notifying the District Engineer of the Corps of Engineers of
the date that work will commence, suspension of work if for more than one week, resumption
of work and its completion. This same requirement exists under the Individual 404 permit
which has been the responsibility of the Department's District Engineer and accordingly will
be his/her responsibility under the General Permit. Notification is not required under the
nationwide permit.
This Section lists the various permits required to construct roads and bridges across
streams, wetlands, and flood plains and outlines the procedures to be employed in obtaining
them.
Army Corps 404 Permits
The Army Corps 404 Permit process exists in three forms. They are:
1. Nationwide Permit
2. State General Permit (GP77-2)
3. Individual 404 Permit
PMS Activity 340 - Waterway Permits Review is scheduled at a point in time when the
designer (Bridge Division or Roadway Design Division whichever is responsible for the
project) should be sure that the project concept is firm. The activity requires the designer to
contact the Project Development Division for a determination if any of the above listed
permits are needed and if they have been acquired.
Permit Determination and Acquisition
On projects that the Nationwide Permit is applicable, no further notice to the Army Corps of
Engineers is required. The Project Development Division will prepare a letter to that effect
for the project files. If the State General Permit is in effect, or if an Individual 404 Permit is
required, the Project Development Division will prepare the necessary applications. When
these permits become available, they will be forwarded to the designer. These permits will
also become part of the project files and need to be part of the PS&E package. Spaces are
provided on the PS&E required sheet so that the designer can identify the type of permit
required and, also, if it is included in the package. A flow chart of the 404 Permit
Determination Process is attached.
Note on Title Sheet of Plans
The Contract Lettings and Communication Division will place a note on the title sheet of
plans for projects requiring a 404 Permit (The Local Liaison Division will place such note for
projects developed by that Division). The note will identify the kind of permit in use and the
identification number (if applicable). Each of the three types of 404 permits require different
special provisions. The Contracts Section is responsible for placing the correct set of
special provisions in the contract.
493
Underground Tanks
(DEQ) Water Quality Certifications
This is a permit acquired from the State Department of Environmental Quality and is part of
the 404 Permit process requirements. The Project Development Division will acquire the
certification in conjunction with 404 Permits and retain the original in the project files. No
copies will be forwarded to other Divisions unless requested to do so.
Dept. of Water Resources Flood Plain Permits
Flood Plain Permits are required by State Statute. As a general statement, they are required
whenever a 404 Permit is necessary. Copies are forwarded to the Roadway Design and
Bridge Divisions for the project files. No other copies are distributed unless requests are
received. The original is retained by the Project Development Division.
494
Underground Tanks
404 Determination Checklist
Any temporary or permanent fill involvement No No 404 involvement

in a stream
Yes
Is it in the Corps Regulatory Jurisdiction? No 404 involvement unless

(Check maps - 1/2” county maps available No someone(agency) is requesting
or letter stating limits) an individual 404 permit.
Note: all streams are in the Corps
Yes Limits regardless of flow.
Does the Nationwide Permit apply?

1. Minor road crossing (total temporary
and permanent fill less than
250 yd3 (200 m 3).
@ Some wetlands are allowed (100 ft (30 m) Yes No further work necessary.
from each bank)
2. Backfill for utility lines.
3. Bank stabilization 500 ft (150 m) averaging
(1.2 yd3/ft (3 m 3/m) )
No
@ Must make up an individual 404

permit application.
Send notice to Corps (by Project Development Division)

1. Vicinity map
2. Legal Description
3. Purpose
4. Typical temporary causeway section
@ 5. Individual 404 permit application
Receive Letter of Authorization under State General Permit

@ Individual 404 Application
1. Authorization to be forwarded to Construction Division
when contract is awarded.
2. Construction Division to forward authorization to NDOR
District Engineer
3. NDOR District Engineer to notify Army Corps of
Engineers before construction starts and when
construction is completed.
495
2002
Underground Tanks
I. Corps of Engineers (C.O.E.) Wetland Regulatory Authority
A. Rivers and Harbors Act - 1890 - Navigable Waters
B. Federal Water Pollution Control Act - 1972
1. Section 404 Permits - Regulate discharge of dredged or fill material

from or into waters of the United States.
2. Act amended in 1977 and given common name "Clean Water Act"
(C.W.A.).
3. Wetlands are under the jurisdiction of Clean Water Act through 1985
court case. Those wetlands covered by the Clean Water Act are
called jurisdictional wetlands.
II. C.O.E. Changes Jurisdictional Wetland Policy
A. Regulatory Guidance Letter - November, 1995 - in some cases, wetlands are

no longer under the jurisdiction of the C.W.A. - no Corps regulation.
1. Former Policy - Wetlands in roadside ditches were under the

jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, thus regulated by C.O.E. - possible
mitigation.
2. Current Policy
(a) Wetlands occurring in typical ditches, in upland areas are

nonjurisdictional. Therefore, not under the jurisdiction of
C.W.A. No Corps authority. No mitigation for impacts.
(b) If ditch was constructed in a wetland, then the ditch would be

under the jurisdiction of C.W.A. Corps has regulatory authority.
Possible mitigation for impacts.
(c) Borrow pits which exhibit wetland characteristics are under the
jurisdiction of the C.W.A. Corps has regulatory authority.
Possible mitigation for impacts.
B. Overall mitigation requirements will lessen which will result in lower costs.
III. C.O.E. Concerns
A. C.O.E. perceives there to be a problem with:
1. Disposal of road materials in waterways and wetlands.
(a) Section 404 of the Clean Water Act
(1) Dredge and fill activities require permit from C.O.E.
496
2002
Waste Generated
(b) Violation of Section 404 - Work done without a permit. Up to

$25,000 fine per day that the violation is in place. Examples -
filling wetland or dumping old bridge in waterway.
(c) Noncompliance with Section 404 - Not following permit

conditions. Up to $10,000 per violation plus remedial costs.
Examples - using asphalt or allowing concrete with exposed
rebar for bank stabilization.
2. Impacting wetlands not cross hatched on plans. Examples - storing

equipment in wetland areas or rock in ditched jurisdictional wetland to
prevent the accumulation of mud on the road.
3. Failure to utilize silt fences.
The wetlands point of contact is:
Wetlands Program Manager

Project Development Division
(402) 479-4418
1100.15 WASTED GENERATED
"Solid Waste" means garbage, refuse, rubbish, and other similar discarded solid or
semisolid materials, including but not limited to such materials resulting from industrial,
commercial, agricultural, and domestic activities. This shall not prohibit the use of dirt,
stone, brick, or similar inorganic material for fill, landscaping, excavation, or grading at places
other than a sanitary disposal site. It shall be unlawful for any private or public agency to
dump or dispose or permit the dumping or depositing of any solid waste at any place other
than an approved sanitary landfill.
"Open Dumping" means the depositing of solid wastes on the surface of the ground or into
a stream or body of water.
"Toxic and Hazardous Wastes" means waste materials including, but not limited to
poisons, pesticides, herbicides, acids, caustics, pathological wastes, flammable or explosive
materials, and similar harmful wastes which require special handling. These items must be
disposed of in such a manner as to conserve the environment and be protective of public
health and safety.
"Free Liquids" or wastes containing free liquids shall not be disposed of in a sanitary
landfill. This includes industrial sludge and toxic or hazardous wastes.
1100.16 WATER WELLS
Occasionally contractors request permission to drill water wells on state property in order to
secure water to use in the construction of a project. A written agreement should be executed
@ between the state (DEQ) and any contractor who wants to develop a well on state property in
order to assure that the contractor assumes responsibility and liability for use of the well.
497
2002
Archeological and Paleontological Discoveries
@
1100.17 ARCHEOLOGICAL AND PALENTOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES
If Indian relics, fossils, meteorites or other articles of historical or geological interest are
encountered in highway excavation operations, such operations shall be suspended in the
area involved "until such times as arrangements are made for their removal and
preservation".
Under present procedures, the department is cooperating with the Nebraska State Historical
Society and the University of Nebraska State Museum. Preliminary plans for highway
improvements are made available to these agencies as far in advance of construction as
practical. Their archeologists examine the plan locations and correlate any findings with their
records and information. If any known historical relics or Indian habitations or relics are
involved with the construction, arrangements are then made cooperatively with the
department to remove and preserve such items in advance of the construction of the project.
It is expected that only rarely will such items be encountered during construction. However, if
such articles are encountered, the Project Manager will have work suspended in the area
involved, and immediately notify the Construction Division. Arrangements will then be made
from that office for the removal and preservation of the articles.
Project Managers or their representatives should make a periodic inspection of the work site
or sites on all archeological or paleontological work. This inspection is to determine that the
work called for in the agreement is being performed. This periodic inspection should be
made at least once a week. The Project Manager should keep himself advised of the
progress so that no unnecessary delays to the contractor will occur. Confirmation that the
contractor can resume work at the site will come from the Construction Division.
498
2002
Underground Tanks
1100.20 UNDERGROUND TANKS
@ NDEQ has a website (www.deq.state.ne.us) which is an excellent environmental and

underground storage tank reference.
Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) represent one of the more common environmental
problems encountered. USTs may have been (or may currently be) used to store almost
any kind of viscous material including petroleum products, chemicals, and discarded wastes
(some of which could be classified as hazardous). Leaks from these tanks or their auxiliary
components (i.e., piping, couplings, pumps, and valves) are not uncommon.
An Underground Storage Tank (UST) is defined as a tank and associated piping with 10% or
more of its volume below the ground which has stored or is storing a regulated substance.
Regulated substances include petroleum based substances (motor fuels, motor oil, home
heating fuels, solvents, etc.) and any other substance which, if released into the environment
may present substantial danger to public health, welfare, or the environment.
1100.21 REGISTRATION
EPA established a program for regulating Leaking Underground Storage Tanks (LUSTs).
Under this program the design, installation, maintenance, monitoring, and failures of LUSTs
are regulated. In Nebraska, this federal program is administrated by DEQ. All underground
storage tanks are required to be registered with the State Fire Marshal Office. Tanks that
have been registered should have a metal tag affixed to the fill pipe. Owners (including NDR)
of underground storage tanks must:
A. Register existing tanks, previously removed tanks, and abandoned tanks.

(The "registration" of a tank includes "any" tank from a tank at a gas station to
one located in the middle of Timbuktu.)
In Nebraska, the registration includes attaching a numbered metal tag to the

fill pipe of any underground tank. The lack of a tag does not necessarily mean
the tank is not registered, but obviously the presence of a tag indicates it is
registered. If there is a question about registration, contact the Construction
Division. This office has access to the registration file at State Fire Marshal
Office via computer, and can look up any registered tank with minimal basic
information.
NOTE: Currently in Nebraska, there is a registration exclusion for tanks:

@
• Farm tanks holding 835 gal (3164 L) or less.
• Tanks on or above the floor of underground areas such as basements.
• Tanks storing home heating oils used on the premises where it is
stored.
@ • Tanks holding 110 gal (416 L) or less.

B. Meet tank performance standards for new installations.
C. Make tanks leak proof for their entire life.
D. Install leak detection systems.
499
2002
Underground Tanks
E. Keep operational records.
1100.22 REMOVAL OF USTs
The following procedure for removing underground tanks is based on State Fire Marshall
@ (SFM) regulations. For clarity, the following has been divided into known tank locations and
unknown tank locations. (The law considers both the same. But because of bid items,
contract administration requires them to be treated differently.) For all removals of
underground tanks, follow appropriate Supplemental Specification.
Removal of Known Tanks
These tanks are the ones identified on the project plans and will be noted for removal.
A. Removal Process
IMMEDIATELY upon starting any project requiring UST removal, check the tankfill
pipes for a metal Registration Tag.
• If tank has a registration tag, note its number in the inspectors daily diary.
• If the tank does not have a registration tag, the Project Manager must notify
the Construction Division immediately. This notification will allow the
Construction Division to check Fire Marshal records for a valid registration.
Also, it will allow time for registration should the tank not be listed with the Fire
Marshal.
Note: Nonregistered tanks cannot be removed until after they have been
registered, and that process can take a couple of weeks to complete. In
@ addition, the Construction Division must submit a closure notification to SFM
and Closure As sessment Report (CAR) as specified on the permit to close.
B. Closure Notification
• The Project Manager must initiate and submit a "Notification of Tank Closure
or Change-in-Service" to the Construction Division 35 days prior to removal.
@
• After the form has been submitted and processed, SFM will send removal
information and instructions directly to the Project Manager.
C. Tank Removal
Contractor's consultant is required to have certified Closure Individual with the SFM
on site during the entire removal process. The contractor shall provide the NDOR
@
Project Manager a photocopy of the individual’s card and also Contractor’s license to
close tanks.
• Tanks must have ALL liquids and any explosive vapors REMOVED prior to
extracting the tank.
1. All removed liquids must be disposed in accordance with DEQ
regulations.
500
2002
Underground Tanks
2. Vapors are typically evacuated by placing dry ice into the tank. As the
@
ice evaporates, carbon dioxide is released and the fuel vapors are
displaced.
• State Fire Marshal may be on site to inspect the removal.
• Removed tank must be stenciled according to SFM requirements.
• Any registration tags must be removed and retained by the project inspector.
These tags are to be submitted to (SFM) when the closure report is filed.
• Any extracted tanks should be removed from the site on the day of removal.
• A "Certificate of Destruction" must be completed for each tank at the time the
tank is disposed.
D. Sampling
@ • All removals require soil and/or water samples to be taken by the contractor's
consultant and analyzed for potential contamination.
• DEQ requires samples collected from tank sites to be analyzed using specific
laboratory methods.
• Soil sampling locations are identified in the removal information and

instructions furnished by DEQ. Soil samples may be required below the
@ Static groundwater table. The water shall be sampled if water is
encountered during excavation.
E. Contamination
• If contamination is found or suspected during the tank extraction, contact the

Construction Division immediately. If appropriate Construction Division
personnel are not available, the Project Manager shall notify DEQ directly.
@ The telephone number for DEQ's tank section is (402) 471-4230. (The
contractor's consultant will provide site information based on air monitoring if
there are any questions.)
• The NDR has 24 hours to report this contamination unless an immediate

threat exists. In that case, reporting times are reduced to 6 hours.
• Immediate threat means a potential exists for explosive conditions, immediate

danger to life or health, or an immediate threat to water supplies.
501
2002
Underground Tanks
• F. Site Safety
1. If, based on site conditions and situations, the inspector or contractor feels
there is an immediate threat for explosion, the contractor shall:
• Immediately shut-off all operating equipment, extinguish all sources of

ignition (i.e., cigarettes etc.), and evacuate the area. This includes all
personnel.
• After the site is evacuated, establish controls to prevent site access

@ and contact local and state authorities.
• No smoking signs must be in place. (No smoking within 50 feet).
The inspector shall contact the Construction Division.
there is an immediate danger to life or health other than by explosion, the
contractor shall:
• Immediately evacuate the area. This includes all personnel and could
include equipment.
• After the site is evacuated, establish controls to prevent site access.
there is an immediate danger to a water supply, the contractor shall:
• Using whatever means are available, immediately establish positive
@ restrictions to limit or prevent migration of contamination to a water
supply. (If threats to life or health from explosion are not
present).
• Watch for changing conditions which could present threats due to
explosion and/or danger to life or health. If site conditions change,
implement the appropriate response as noted above.
G. Removal of Contaminated Soil
If the site is determined to be contaminated, one method of remediation is to
@ overexcavate. Contaminated soil which has been over-excavated must be "properly"
disposed. (DEQ may provide approval to over-excavation--see pages 3-5 of
the DEQ “Petroleum Contaminated Soils Guidance for Leaking USTs”.)
H. Disposal Options
There are several approved methods for disposal, however, DEQ must preapprove
any disposal option. Some options which have been successfully used include:
1. Removal of soil and disposing in a licensed landfill. This not only requires
@
prior approval by DEQ, but also approval from the local receiving landfill.
502
2002
Underground Tanks
Typical costs for this option range from $15 to $40/yd3 ($15 to $40/m³) plus trucking.
@
2. Another option which is limited by physical location is that of "soil burning."
The process involves treating petroleum contaminated soil by passing it
through a rotating drum where there is high heat and flame. (It is a converted
asphalt drum dryer.) During "treatment," soil moisture is driven off,
combustible products in the soil are first volatilized and then flashed off. The
result is dry "petroleum" free soil.
While the remedial concept is reasonably sound, the cost for this remediation
@ is very expensive (costs range from $30 to $70 per Ton (Megagram) ) not to
mention trucking costs to the plant. However, if a project is in that area, "soil
burning" is one option available for remediation.
For completeness, a word of caution must be included about this process.

The process, if properly operated, removes petroleum contamination,
however, it does not remove other potential contaminants (i.e., heavy metals,
pesticides/herbicides, etc.) Often the plant requests anyone bringing soil to
the plant to back haul "processed" soil. Obviously, clean/remediated soil is a
by-product of this operation. DO NOT AGREE TO BACK HAUL ANY
"REMEDIATED" SOIL FROM THIS OPERATION WITHOUT FIRST
CONTACTING THE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION. This does not mean the
facility should not be used, or that the remediated soil is not clean. DEQ
needs to be sure there are adequate and quantifiable analytical results to
assure back-hauled soils are not contaminated with other substances.
3. Another option is to remove the soil (over-excavate) and spread it out on the
surface. This method is called Land Application and also requires
preapproved permit from DEQ. The land application of petroleum
contaminated soil provides an effective means of treatment through
volatilization and biodegradation. Land application has been used
successfully in situations where NDR owns (not by temporary easement) a
parcel of excess right-of-way.
In situations where contaminated soil must be remediated, the Project
Manager should look for and identify suitable locations to the Construction
Division. Criteria for land application are:
@ • Maximum application rate is 4 inches (100 mm) thick OR
500 tons/acre(1.12 Gg/hectare). Based on an estimated excavation
volume, the inspector can calculate approximate remediation area.
• Petroleum saturated soil cannot be land applied. (The KEY is
"petroleum saturated" not "moisture saturated." Soil excavated below
the water table may be land applied, as long as it does contain free
(decantable) petroleum products.
• Petroleum contaminated soil cannot be applied any closer than:
@ a. 525 ft (160 m) from a well.
503
2002
Underground Tanks
b. 200 ft (61 m) from an occupied residence.

@
c. 200 ft (61 m) from a stream, river, lake, pond, sinkhole, or
down gradient intake for a tile line or culvert.
• Slopes must be less than 5%.
• Potential land farming areas with sandy, sandy loamy, and high silty
@
soils are not acceptable. There also must be at least 6 ft (2 m) of
existing topsoil over bedrock.
• Obviously the site must be accessible to trucks or hauling equipment

and have no other planned traffic or activity during the remediation
time.
• Soil for remediation will have to be leveled and disced at least two
times during the course of remediation. One discing needs to be soon
after placement and leveling, the other about 2 months later. Once the
soil has been tested and analytical results indicate it is clean, the area
should be fertilized and seeded with a suitable stabilization crop.
I. Closure Report
• Contractor and/or the contractor's environmental consultant are responsible

to complete the closure report.
• The report shall locate all removed tank locations by station and offset.
• Closure reports are to be submitted to the Project Manager within 20 days of

completion of sample analysis. The Project Manager shall keep a copy of all
reports in the project files and forward original to the Construction Division
within 5 days of receipt. The State Fire Marshall’s Office must receive a copy
@ of the closure report before the deadline listed in the permit to close, usually
45 days from date of tank removal.
Closure reports are to contain:
1. Completed preprinted SFM closure forms. Check to be sure the following

information is included:
a. All lab reports.

b. Construction details.
@
c. Scale dimensional site drawing showing location and depth, location
and depth of all piping, location and depth of all sampling and
monitoring well locations. NOTE: All locations are to be referenced by
station and offset from mainline or side road survey.
2. Tank registration tags.
504
2002
Underground Tanks
Removal/Discovery of Unknown Tanks ("Orphan" Tanks)
For the purposes of this chapter, "unknown" tanks should be considered those tanks not
identified on the plans but encountered during a project. Most likely the discovery of an
unknown tank will come at the worst time. For example, machinery running, work time in a
crunch, and "any" appreciable delay will work a severe hardship on the contractor.
Therefore, timeliness and notification become critical in dealing with the issues.
Upon finding a previously unknown tank, follow these guidelines:
FIRST: Immediately stop all work in and around the tank.
SECOND: Determine the site conditions. For example:
A. Note tank condition and damage. Is liquid leaking from the tank? If so:
1. If fuel is released, call:
• NDEQ at (402) 471-4230 during office hours or (402) 471-4545 NSP

(State Patrol) afterhours. Leaking Underground Storage Tank/Release
Assessment Section (LUST/RA).
@
• State Fire Marshal's Office (SFM)
Flammable Liquid Storage Tank Division
(402) 471-9465 Clark Conklin
• Construction Division (402) 479-4532
there is an immediate threat for explosion, the contractor shall:
• Immediately shut-off all operating equipment extinguish all sources of

ignition (i.e., cigarettes etc.) and evacuate the area. This includes all
personnel.
• After the site is evacuated, establish controls to prevent site access

and contact local authorities.
there is an immediate danger to life or health other than by explosion, the
Contractor shall:
• Immediately evacuate the area. This includes all personnel and could
include equipment.
• After the site is evacuated, establish controls to prevent site access.
505
2002
Underground Tanks
4. If, based on site conditions and situations, the inspector feels there is an
immediate danger to a water supply, the contractor shall: (Threats to life or
health and explosion are not present.)
• Using whatever means are available, immediately establish positive

restrictions to limit or prevent migration of contamination to a water
supply.
• Watch for changing conditions which could present threats due to

explosion and/or danger to life or health. If site conditions change,
implement the appropriate response as noted above.
B. If leakage is not apparent determine if any liquid is in the tank.
C. Attempt to determine the size of the tank (volumetric and/or dimensional size
estimation).
@ D. Is there any indication of past leakage? (Stained (discolored) soil or smell of fuel are
indicators.)
E. Establish tank location by station, offset and approximate depth. Also indicate
approximate street address if available.
THIRD: Begin to establish some positive control to eliminate access to the immediate area.
(Silt fence, snow fence, or orange safety fencing set on fence posts are examples of
temporary restraints.)
FOURTH: Notify the Project Manager or supervisor of the discovery and provide site
conditions to them. If the Project Manager will not be available for some time (3 to 5 hours),
the inspector shall contact the Construction Division directly.
FIFTH: The Project Manager shall notify the Construction Division. (NDOR has a legal
responsibility, and time limit, to report finding previously unknown USTs.)
1. For Reference: Time expired since first discovering the tank shall not be
more than 5 hours before contacting the Construction Division.
2. Leave tank in place.
@ 3. Post "No Smoking Within 50 ft (15m)" signs near tank and secure from
general public. Use snow fence.
4. The Logistics Division will apply for a permit to remove tanks as soon as
possible. Permit required from Fire Marshal's Office.
5. Removal by licensed contractor (State or private company) will be scheduled
as soon as possible.
@ 6. The firm or person in charge of tank removal must notify the Fire Marshal's
Office 72 hours before taking out the tank and give the DEQ a minimum of 24
hours advance notice. If NDOR completes a Closure Assessment Report,
DEQ advance notice is not needed.
506
2002
Underground Tanks
7. Tanks removed from the ground shall be stored in a secure location

inaccessible to the general public.
8. A licensed certified closure individual must be present during excavation and

tank removal.
9. If contamination is present in the excavation, the State Fire Marshal and the
Department of Environmental Quality must be notified within 24 hours if they
are not present during the scheduled time of tank removal.
@ 10. Soils will be disposed of as directed by the NDEQ. Land farming may be
required. Contact Waste Management Section of NDEQ (402) 471-4210.
11. The excavated area should be backfilled with clean soil and compacted as
required by the Project Manager.
12. For more information, refer to Title 159, Rules and Regulations for
Underground Storage Tanks. A copy is available in the Lincoln Logistics
Division Office.
13. If fuel contaminated soils are encountered during normal construction

activities, notify the Lincoln Construction Office even if no tank is found. The
Lincoln Office will notify the NDEQ LUST/RA Section and Waste
Management Section.
Recap:
• All construction activity around the area of the tank shall be halted, and remain that
way, pending further investigation.
• Preliminary site assessment shall be completed. Included in this assessment shall

be an evaluation for imminent dangers.
• Site "SPILL CONTROL" measures should be implemented if needed.
• Positive constraints shall be in place to prevent free public access of the site.
• The Construction Division shall be notified of the discovery.

What Happens Next?
• Construction Division notifies NDEQ and SFM about finding an unknown UST.
•• DEQ does not need to be notified about an unknown UST unless there has
been a release or unless DOR will not be completing a Closure Assessment
Report.
• Construction Division will determine if the UST is registered. If not, a registration
process will be initiated. (An unregistered UST cannot be removed until after it is
registered.)
• The Construction Division will request SFM’s approval to remove the tank, once
registration status is resolved.
507
2002
Underground Tanks
• The Project Manager needs to use this time to negotiate an Change Order for tank
removals.
Once SFM authorizes removal, a notice will be provided to the Project Manager. Removal
from this point forward is outlined in SFM approval documents.
508
2002
Storm Water Discharge
1100.30 STORM WATER DISCHARGE (NOT YET FULLY IMPLEMENTED)
All NDR construction projects which disturb 2 ha (5 acres) or more are required to have a
STORM WATER PERMIT. (The rules also apply to cities and counties with populations of
100,000 or more.)
A Storm Water Permit requires specific actions intended to reduce and/or eliminate the
problems associated with runoff, soil erosion, and siltation. To comply with this
environmental regulation, the NDR has developed the following procedure:
• Projects which disturb 2 ha (5 acres) or more are identified by Project Development.
• When projects are turned in, Project Development tabulates projects with PPPs and
sends NOIs and newspaper notices to the Construction Division.
• The Construction Division forwards required notices to appropriate newspapers for

publication. Once publication verification is returned, the Construction Division
assembles all parts for NOIs and forwards copies to DEQ and the Project Manager.
• At this point, the Project Manager administering a particular project is notified that a
Storm Water Permit is in place. (The contractor may begin work any time after that
notification.)
Project Manager shall check to assure that projects requiring a Storm Water Permit have a
Pollution Prevention Plan (PPP). Along with a PPP there should be bid items for pollution
control items such as silt fence, stabilizing crops, ditch checks, etc. As always, it is
important to check preliminary plans whenever possible to be sure all needed contract items
have been included. Obviously, if a contract is let without erosion control items, the Project
Manager will have to change order those items.
1100.31 NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI)
NOIs are NDR’s official notification to DEQ that there is a project located at
“xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx,” and the project will be disturbing at least 2 ha (5 acres) or more are
required to have a STORM WATER PERMIT. (The rules also apply to cities and counties
with populations of 100,000 or more.)
1100.32 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION POLICIES

• Project Managers shall have a copy of all contractor NOIs (noncommercial sources)
on file in the project documents before allowing a contractor to produce or provide
material for the project.
• SSHC Subsection 204.02 restricts exposing erodible soil to less than 75000 ± m²
(90,000 sy) without prior approval of the Project Manager. Criteria for approving a
variance to the maximum exposure limit will be based on:
A. Having current exposed area protected with erosion control measures.
Minimum measures would include silt fence around the perimeter of the area,
ditch checks, and additional silt fence where sediments may leave the project.
This includes all disturbed areas (i.e., borrows, areas within temporary and
permanent easements.)
509
2002
Questions Often Asked
B. The contractor has demonstrated ability and willingness to keep erosion

control measures current and maintained within existing work areas.
C. Consideration must be given for the time of year before exposing additional
areas. For example: It would not be unreasonable to deny a request for
additional working area in a situation where it is late in the grading season and
the contractor is falling behind in finishing, applying mulch, or temporary
seeding.
Also, it would not be unreasonable to place a condition on approving an

additional spread. For example: "Contractor, you may open area "X" as soon
as you have finished and stabilized up to Station "Y.""
D. The contractor has successfully followed their erosion control work plan. The
Project Manager has not noted storm water violations, and has every reason
to believe additional open areas will not over-extend the contractor's ability to
comply with our Storm Water Pollution Permit.
It is strongly recommended that the Project Manager approve additional area on a

case-by-case basis and consider approval on the contractor's previous work
experience as well as site conditions.
• Contractors have been told it is their responsibility to maintain the project within storm
water compliance. They have also been told about the need to be prepared to
complete requirements of their Pollution Prevention Plan should a subcontractor not
@
be able to perform.
Pollution prevention is necessary even through most of the erosion control work is
subcontracted to DBEs. However, compliance is a must and project administrators
MUST be sure the project is maintained within storm water requirements and that the
Pollution Prevention Plan is followed.
1100.33 QUESTIONS OFTEN ASKED

The weather is not favorable to establish temporary seeding or silt fences. What do
we do?
A. Stabilization
Regulations say if an area will not have any activity for 21 days; by the 14th day,
some form of stabilization will be required. There is very little latitude in that
statement even if it is wet or freezing.
To be in compliance with storm water regulations, something needs to be done. For
example, incorporating mulch, using HydroMulch or Soil Binders which are
comprised of wood fiber and paper mulch. Both work, but tend to be expensive
knowing it is less than temporary and we will have to ultimately seed.
Best solution is to conduct temporary seeding in a timely manner and not let the
contractor get so much open that it cannot be stabilized by seeding. At the least keep
it to a minimum so if one of the other alternates is necessary, costs can be kept to a
minimum.
510
2002
B. Localized Soil Erosion (Ditch Check and Slit Fences)
Bale checks used as ditch checks are most likely not as effective as "properly"
installed silt fence. However, in situations where you are unable to properly install silt
fence, bale checks are far superior to nothing at all. For example:
• It is wet and muddy, a trencher cannot get in to place silt fence. Interim ditch
check should be bale checks.
• The ground is frozen to a point where a trencher will not work. Winter is
coming. Rather than do nothing, bale checks should be installed. At least
there is protection in place during the spring thaw. If an "Indian Summer"
comes along and silt fence can be installed, by all means replace the bale
check.
Bottom Line: Bale checks are very good interim erosion control measures when
used in emergency situations. (Check the Road Standards as Roadside
Development is resurrecting a standard for bale checks.)
How are borrows evaluated for Storm Water compliance?
All project specified borrows are included in the calculation for a Pollution Prevention Plan
(PPP).
A. Pond Borrows
• All pond borrows (wet or dry) during construction must have at least the
perimeter protected by erosion control measures. Plus, site specific
considerations must be included if there is any dredging involved during
construction.
• Temporary stabilization and mulching will not be required on concave slopes
within the borrow. However, channels (in-flow and/or out-flow) will require
stabilization or erosion control measures.
• Seeding for pond borrows will be required on any disturbed area above normal
design pool or ground water elevation.
B. Wetland Mitigation Areas
• Seeding for wet land areas typically does not require special attention.
Usually these areas are seeded with the same vegetation crop as any other
disturbed segment on a project. Check the contract documents for
non-standard situations where special aquatic plants such as cattails, wild
rice, etc. may be required.
• Refer to Pond Borrows (Section A, above) for guidance in areas of standing
water and selected sections in Normal Borrows (Section C, below) for those
areas which are dry during seeding. In either case, all "normal" erosion
control practices are required for wet land areas.
511
2002
C. Normal (Dry) Borrows
• All normal borrows must be protected by perimeter erosion control measures,

and are included for temporary erosion control measures if work is halted at
that site for more than 21 days.
• All normal borrows, purchased by fee title, shall be included in the area which
is permanently seeded.
• Normal borrows obtained by temporary easement:
1. That require replacement of topsoil AND are used for agricultural row
crops. The Project Manager needs to ask the property owner if they
want the area permanently seeded.
a. If the property owner requests permanent seeding, provide that

seeding.
b. If the property owner does not want permanent seeding, shape

and place temporary seeding on the area. In this case,
because the property will be returned to agricultural row crop
use, consider temporary seeding as complying with storm
water requirements. Note: Other temporary erosion control
measures in that area will have to be maintained until the
project is accepted.
2. For temporary easements NOT used for agricultural row crops,

permanent seeding will be required. (Examples of this situation would
be permanent pastures, timber land, non-farmed land, etc.)
Is snow considered temporary cover in the Storm Water regulations? YES.
Storm water regulations are written recognizing that snow is a "temporary" preventive
measure. However, just because it snows may or may not fulfill a winter long stabilization
and definitely will not comply as spring thaws begin. As soon as the snow is gone, some
other means of stabilization is required. ("Gone" could be by melting, wind, or snow plow.)
Best advice is to keep working on some form of soil stabilization until it absolutely freezes so
hard that work from then on will not be practical.
EXAMPLE: If snow comes in late October and is blown off the site by mid December, then
some other form of temporary stabilization is required from that point forward.
Plan notes have designated a plant site within NDR right-of-way. Further, the
contractor is told it is their responsibility to provide a permit for this activity. Who is
ultimately responsible?
The contractor is responsible for that portion of area designated as the "plant site." When
@
this situation occurs, the contractor should modify the project PPP by note to exclude the
plant site when the contractor's NOI becomes effective.
512
2002
Bridge Painting
1100.40 BRIDGE PAINTING
Few construction tasks have undergone as many significant changes in the last couple of
years as bridge painting. Much of this was necessary because of past bridge coatings and
changes in environmental regulations. Supplemental Specifications were developed for
projects which should not produce hazardous wastes. The word “should” is used very
carefully, because anything is possible. In an attempt to preclude surprises, pre-project tests
for lead (scratch tests) are required for any proposed painting and/or demolition work.
For bridges failing the scratch test (i.e., showing the potential for producing a hazardous
waste) a Special Provision (SP) will be written to deal with the added requirements of
removal, health & safety, and disposal. The following information about bridge painting is
written for the bulk of our work - those projects involving nonhazardous paint wastes.
Note:
A. Nonhazardous paint waste as used herein is referenced strictly from RCRA disposal
regulations and the waste's successful passing of the TCLP test.
B. No matter what information is available going into a project one must proceed
cautiously, always being protective of human health and the environment. It is
essential to sample and analyze wastes for proof.
Background
During the past several decades NDR has used:

• Lead based paints. Usage began about the time Lewis and Clark leisurely floated
"up" the Mississippi. Its usage in Nebraska continued until the mid 1970's. By and
large, lead paint systems functioned very well and were used in practically all painting
applications, from bridges to sign trusses, from light poles to fire hydrants.
Experience indicates this paint will produce hazardous waste.
• Solvent based Zinc paint
A. Zinc Chromate
In the early 1970's it became apparent there were worker health and safety problems
associated with lead based paints. During the time between mid 1970's to late
1970's, NDR began using zinc chromate paint as a primer along with a vinyl top coat.
Experience now indicates the Zinc Chromate pigment will produce worker health and
safety problems and hazardous wastes.
B. Zinc Silicate
Beginning in the late 1970's zinc silicate was specified as a primer for shop and field
applied paint. This system along with a vinyl top coat was used until early 1993.
Experience indicates this paint will not produce a hazardous waste, but there have
been cases where leachable levels of lead are present. Further, there is evidence
that low levels of lead are present in airborne dust generated during abrasive blasting.
513
Bridge Painting
1100.41 METHODS OF PAINT REMOVAL
Open Abrasive Blast Cleaning
Open blasting uses compressed air to propel abrasive particles against the surface to be
cleaned. The system creates high levels of dust which, if not contained, can become
airborne causing fugitive dust and respirable dust. All open abrasive blast systems must
therefore be contained both for waste collection and dust emissions.
A. Open Blasting using Expendable Abrasive
1. The abrasive used for this method is used once and becomes waste to be
disposed. Typically, one of several low cost readily available materials such as
sand, furnace slag, aluminum oxide, or garnet is the abrasive of choice.
Expendable abrasive - open blasting is usually the method of choice for

contractors because of familiarity, productivity, and ease of operation.
Contractors also consider it the most economical due to readily available
equipment and low abrasive costs. However, from an environmental and worker
health position, the system is more expensive because of the need to fully contain
the operation, increased worker risk to health problems, and significantly large
volumes of waste to be disposed.
2. There is a variation of expendable abrasive - open blasting which has been used
successfully for minimal touch up and removal of minor amounts of overspray.
This variation uses "corn cobs" for abrasive, controlled abrasive usage, and very
small diameter blast nozzles.
B. Open Blasting Using Recyclable Abrasive
In this system the abrasive is accumulated after usage, cleaned, and reused more than
one time. Recyclable abrasives must be hard and durable. Thus metallic material is
typically used.
When recycling abrasives, special equipment is required to collect, classify, separate,
and convey collected waste residue. Also, since the abrasive is harder, contractors
must pay close attention to abrasive gradation to keep a cleaned surface profile within
acceptable ranges. A contractor must also closely monitor the separation process. It is
very important to "completely" remove all fine material from abrasives. If the abrasive is
improperly or incompletely cleaned, dust concentrations within the containment can be
adversely affected.
Several methods are available in the industry to filter discharged air from the system.
The NDR will NOT approve a system that uses water for blasting or water filters to
remove particulates. This is because the water then becomes another different waste
for disposal.
As with all open blasting operations, the recycled abrasive method must also be fully
contained. Costs associated with recyclable abrasive include additional equipment and
increased initial abrasive costs. This is offset by increased cleaned surface area per
unit of abrasive (some times up to 100 cycles) and reduced volume of waste produced.
514
Bridge Painting
Closed Abrasive Blast - (Vacuum Blasting)
Compressed air is used to propel abrasive particles against the surface to be cleaned. The
blast nozzle is fitted into a localized containment assembly, which is attached to a vacuum.
Dust, abrasive, and paint debris are vacuumed simultaneously with the blasting operation.
Debris is separated for disposal and the abrasive is returned for reuse. Typically, hard
metallic abrasives are used for this system.
As with Open Abrasive blasting, NDR will NOT approve a system that uses water or water
filters.
The most limiting factors of vacuum blasting are its reduced production rate and operational
problems cleaning edges and irregular surfaces. NOTE: To be completely effective, the
whole nozzle assembly must be sealed against a surface. This is the only way to maintain
proper suction for the vacuum operation.
Vacuum blasting equipment is expensive, however, both worker exposure to dust and
environmental emissions are substantially reduced if the operations are conducted properly.
Thus the Special Provisions may allow vacuum blasting to be conducted without requiring full
containment.
Hand and Power Tool Cleaning
Supplemental Specifications may identify cleaning by methods other than abrasive blasting.
In these cases SSPC - SP 2, SP 3, or SP 11 will typically be noted as acceptable surface
preparation standards. (Steel Structures Painting Council "SSPC" is an organization whose
purpose is to develop industry standards for painting. The above noted standards, i.e., SP 2,
SP 3, etc. are visual standards used to evaluate cleanliness of steel surfaces.)
A. Hand Tool Cleaning
Hand tool cleaning involves manual operated impact, scraping, sanding, and brushing
tools. Typical equipment would be slag hammers, chipping hammers, putty knives,
paint scrapers, and wire brushes. Hand tool cleaning will produce little dust however,
only loose material is removed while intact rust, sound paint, and mill scale remain.
B. Power Tool Cleaning
Power tool cleaning uses electric and/or air operated impact grinding, or brushing
tools. Usually power chippers, needle guns, descalers, power wire brushes, and
grinding wheels comprise equipment for this. Power tool cleaning produces some
dust and can generate airborne debris.
Because airborne dust and debris are generated, workers must have respiratory and
dress protection. However, protection for power tool work is considerably less
stringent than required for abrasive blasting where the operator and helpers would be
required to wear air supplied blasting hoods and some type of encapsulating suits.
515
Bridge Painting
1100.42 CONTAINMENT
As currently specified, methods that do not involve open abrasive blasting (i.e., hand tool
cleaning and power tool cleaning) do not require total enclosure because minimal fugitive
dust is generated. However, because paint residue and other foreign material is generated
by the process, some form of debris containment is required.
This can be as simple as a tarp (or diaper) placed under the working area. All material falls
onto the tarp, is picked up at the end of each day, and is placed into a waste container for
"proper" disposal. Removed paint or other debris shall not be allowed to remain at the site
following a cleaning operation. It must be picked up, containerized, and disposed of in
accordance with the contract documents.
THERE ARE NO EXCEPTIONS!
Design Considerations
Designing containment and ventilation systems that protect the environment without unduly
endangering the health of workers pose a challenge to the painting contractor. A
containment system includes:
• Some type or form of structure (i.e., walls, ceiling, floor).
• A ventilation system consisting of forced (or natural flow) air input.
• A mechanical (or natural flow) exhaust passage and exhaust dust collection
equipment.
Unfortunately, the containment structure built to protect the environment can expose workers
inside to extremely high levels of airborne particulate. Thus various containment and
ventilation components must be uniquely combined with consideration to containment
design, structure location, method of surface preparation, worker protection requirements,
and constraints on emissions.
Containment for the purposes of our specification, is primarily to protect the environment
(i.e., keep fugitive dust below regulated levels, capture and accumulate waste, and facilitate
recovery and collection of waste material). To accomplish "containment" the structure must
be virtually air tight, unless some type of mechanical exhaust system is used.
With all of that said, one could realistically question:
• How can this be accomplished?
• If the containment is air tight, how does it remain so once pressurized during
blasting?
The answers to these questions identify the importance and need for some type of exhaust
system. As capacity and capability of the exhaust system's efficiency increases, the
importance of totally sealed containment decreases. For example: If the exhaust system is
capable of evacuating more air than is pumped in during blasting, the difference is allowed
for containment.
516
Bridge Painting
Often "negative air" is a term used to describe air exhausting systems. For our purposes,
this term will be used to signify that the exhaust system is withdrawing at least as much air
as:
• Is being supplied by the blasting nozzle(s) and
• The combined effects of all leakage in the containment.
Obviously in situations described above, "NO NOTICEABLE DUST" can escape the
containment.
While the exhaust system capacity is important it is only as effective as the system's filtering
ability. All exhausted air must be filtered to remove suspended dust and particulate.
Typically, a dust collection system (i.e., bag house) is attached to the discharge or exhaust
equipment.
Rules-of-Thumb:
Good field checks on the effectiveness of any containment are to:
• Watch for signs of dust escaping the containment and/or dust being discharged from
exhaust system.
• Containments with proper air handling systems should appear concave along the
walls during blast operations. They should NEVER appear to bulge during blasting.
• Containments with proper air handling systems should not be so dusty inside that
visibility is severely limited.
1100.43 PAINT WASTE DISPOSAL
Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure Testing
All waste generated during removal operations SHALL BE sampled and analyzed by the
contractor. The waste sample shall be submitted to a laboratory for a TCLP heavy metals
analysis. This analysis is for eight environmentally regulated metals typically found in paint
and abrasive wastes.
517
2002
Disposal of Construction Wastes
Hazardous Waste Designation
Paint debris is classified as hazardous due to the characteristic of toxicity, if after testing by
TCLP, the leachate contains any of the elements in the concentrations equal to or greater
than those listed below.
REGULATED LEVELS *
METAL mg/L
Arsenic 5.0
Barium 100.0
Cadmium 1.0
Chromium 5.0
Lead 5.0
Mercury 0.2
Selenium 1.0
Silver 5.0
* All regulated levels are "AS OF" spring 1994.
The Construction Division will attempt to issue a timely memo to all field Construction
Divisions when changes occur.
NOTE: Other elements, chemicals, and characteristics can cause a material to be

hazardous as defined in 40 CFR 261. It is for this reason the Supplemental Specifications
require that no other waste be mixed with paint waste generated during the cleaning process.
If any analysis indicates the presence of metals in levels close to (or above) those listed,
contact the Construction Division BEFORE issuing a notice for transporting the waste.
Notice for Transfer of Nonhazardous Paint Waste
For all projects involving the removal of paint wastes, some form of manifesting is required.
For "nonhazardous" paint wastes (waste with leachable levels below those listed above),
Supplemental Specifications states:
"Accumulated wastes shall not be removed from the temporary storage area without
@ proper documentation."
This notice of disposition has been standardized and is used as NDR's internal manifest of
material being shipped.
The contract documents will identify an NDR facility which has been designated as
the "RECEIVING FACILITY." Currently, for construction projects only (not
maintenance projects) this is the central complex at Lincoln, Nebraska. There
has been a fenced facility designated for storage of nonhazardous paint,
which is located at the NDR Maintenance Facility in Lincoln.
518
2002
Prior to shipping any waste:
1. Waste analysis results shall have been reviewed and determined that the
waste is NOT hazardous.
2. A "Notice for Transfer of Nonhazardous Paint Waste" form shall be completed

@ by the contractor. (Instructions for completing the form are printed on the
form.)
3. The Project Manager will arrange a delivery schedule with the contractor and
@ receiving facility. For those projects where the waste will be delivered to
Lincoln, contact the Project Development Division, (402) 479-4795.
519
2002
1100.50 DISPOSAL OF CONSTRUCTION WASTES
1100.51 ASBESTOS
Asbestos is the name for a group of natural minerals that separate into strong, fine fibers.
The fibers are heat-resistant and extremely durable. There are a number of different types of
asbestos including Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite, Anthophylite, Actinolite, and Tremolite.
The typical size of asbestos fibers is from 0.1 to 10 micrometers. This makes them usually
invisible to the human eye. Because of their fine size, they can remain suspended in air for
hours when disturbed. This increases the possibility of human exposure via inhalation.
Health Concerns
Medical studies have shown that the primary exposure route for asbestos is through
inhalation. The following diseases can result from inhalation of asbestos fibers:
• Asbestosis - A noncancerous respiratory disease that consists of scarring of lung

tissue
• Lung Cancer
• Mesothelioma - A rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of the chest and abdomen
• Other Cancers - Some studies have suggested that exposure to asbestos is

responsible for some cancers of internal organs such as esophagus, larynx,
stomach, colon, and kidney.
Asbestos Removal
U.S. EPA regulates the removal of asbestos containing material from facilities which are
being demolished or renovated. EPA regulations for removal, and subsequent disposal, are
set forth in 40 CFR 61. Generally speaking, the following procedures must be followed:
• For all facilities, U.S. EPA must be notified prior to renovation or demolition. This
notification must include an estimate of the approximate amount of regulated
asbestos containing material to be handled. For the NDR, this notification is handled
through the Project Development Office.
• Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material (RACM) must be removed prior to any
activities that would disturb the materials or prevent future access to them for
removal.
• When RACM has been removed, it must be contained in a leak-proof wrapping or bag
and properly labeled for disposal.
• All asbestos removal and handling operations must be performed under the
supervision of an individual trained and certified in asbestos handling.
• U.S. DOT regulates the transportation of asbestos and identifies it as a hazardous
material. Before accepting RACM for transportation, a transporter must ensure that
520
2002
wastes, some form of manifesting is required. For "nonhazardous" paint wastes (waste with
leachable levels below those listed above), Supplemental Specifications states:
@ "Accumulated wastes shall not be removed from the temporary storage area without
proper documentation."
This notice of disposition has been standardized and is used as NDR's internal manifest of
material being shipped.
The contract documents will identify an NDR facility which has been designated as the
"RECEIVING FACILITY." Currently, for construction projects only (not maintenance projects)
this is the central complex at Lincoln, Nebraska. There has been a fenced facility designated
for storage of nonhazardous paint, which is located at the NDR Maintenance Facility in
Lincoln.
521
2002
Wells and Water Pollution
1100.60 WELLS AND WATER POLLUTION
1100.61 SURFACE WATER
"ANY" construction projects involving activities and/or equipment on or near water need to
have contingency plans for containment of discharges into or onto the water. 40 CFR 116
defines a discharge as: "Including, but not limited to, any spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring,
emitting, emptying, or dumping a controlled material or substance into or onto the water."
Further, 40 CFR 117 states any person in charge of a vessel or an onshore or an offshore
facility shall, as soon as they have knowledge of any discharge of a controlled substance
from such vessel or facility in quantities equal to or exceeding the reportable quantity,
immediately notify the appropriate agency of the U.S. Government.
What Does This Mean?
Basically if you are working on, above, or around water (river, creek, lake, or pond) and
discharge (spill) a listed or regulated waste, you MUST report this discharge and
IMMEDIATELY take action to contain and clean it up.
Who Do We Report To?
Initial reporting shall be to the Project Manager. The Project Manager must relay this
information "as soon as possible" to the Construction Division. Be prepared to give the
Construction Division specifics like: who, what, where, when, how much, of what and what
is being done to contain and clean it up.
Reportable Quantities
A reportable quantity depends on what has been spilled. 40 CFR 117 lists Federal
requirements for Reportable Quantities (RQ's) and 567 IAC Chapter 41 contains others
regulated by DEQ. Since it is almost impossible to "after-the-fact" quantify anything spilled
into the water, the following will be field guidelines:
• ANY fuel or petroleum products which produce a noticeable sheen have to be

reported to the Construction Division. Obviously, some discretion will have to be
used since a single drop of oil will produce a sheen. One drop is probably not
significant but one 3 L "drop" is.
• ANY paint or paint waste will be reportable. Again some discretion is needed, but
there is very little latitude. That is why some type of emergency containment system
is recommended for bridge painting projects over water.
• ALL occurrences of herbicides and/or pesticides discharged into water have to be

reported.
• ANY foreign liquids such as curing compound discharged into water have to be
reported.
522
2002
Wells and Water Pollution
What is Meant by Contain and Clean-up?
SSHC Subsection 107.01 notifies the contractor that we expect them to conduct their
operations in a manner which minimizes potential water (and air) pollution. Further, for
operations which have potential for water pollution, it is recommended to ask contractors
how they plan to contain, mitigate, and remediate spills which may occur during the project.
It is strongly suggested that contractors develop a spill kit where individual "supplies" are
stored in a closed, open headed 55 gallon drum. This "kit" method will assure spill
containment supplies are dry, clean, and available when needed. The drum can be used to
contain collected wastes for disposal. "Supplies" could include, but are not necessarily
limited to:
• Containment boom. Boom (skimmer type or sorbent type) should be of sufficient

length to encircle a large surface slick. Typically 82 to 115 m should be adequate.
• Floating petroleum absorbent pads. Typically two unused cases of 450 x 450 mm
(10 x 10 inch) pads are adequate.
• Water skimmer (dippers) to remove floating solids.
• Emulsifying agent. Several different commercially available emulsifying agents are

on the market. This chemical is typically a derivative of detergent and, when sprayed
onto the surface, breaks down the surface tension and disperses an oil/petroleum
slick. (NOTE: Emulsifying agents shall be used as a "LAST" resort And then
only when a slick cannot be contained or absorbed by some other means.)
• Absorbent material such as floor dry. Typically a couple of bags are sufficient for
most spills on land.
• Waste containers to accumulate and temporarily store wastes.
1100.62 WELLS
The Department of Health (DH) has developed rules for plugging and abandoning wells. The
rules require that all sealed wells are to be reported by the owner to the DH within 30 days
after sealing. They also require a registered well contractor to do the work. This form shall
be completed by the contractor and submitted to the Construction Division for forwarding to
DH. A copy of the form should be placed in the project file after being completed and signed
by the contractor, and registered well contractor. A list of registered well contractors is
maintained by DH.
523
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
524
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
525
2002
DIVISION 1200
SITEMANAGER
Sitemanager - Introduction_______________________________________________________
DIVISION 1200 -- SITEMANAGER

1200.01 INTRODUCTION
SiteManager™ is one of the most powerful software support systems available to

transportation agencies. It seamlessly integrates field-based data collection,
administration of contract records, contractor payments, project-oriented civil rights
monitoring, and materials management. All this is combined with a state-of-the-art,
client/server environment and is available to field, project, district, laboratory and central
office personnel.
1200.02 INFORMATIONAL GUIDANCE
@
Each lap top that is used for Construction Inspection and management has the
SiteManager documentation installed on the hard drive. This is the official source for
guidance and use of SiteManager. In addition, supplemental help files are available on
DORSRV81/runtime/how_to.chm.
527
2002
Sitemanager Support List_______________________________________________________
1200.03 SITEMANAGER SUPPORT LIST
System Administration
Lee Burbach Information Systems (402) 479-3982
Shirley Daugherty Construction Division (402) 479-4559
Jim Ferguson Construction Division (402) 479-4454
Mitch Hendricks Information Systems (402) 479-3616
Bill Hitzeman Construction Division (402) 479-4456
@ Jill Danburg Construction Division (402) 479-4453
District Trainers
Jeff Kisicki District 1 (402) 471-0850, Ext. 1910
Jodie Domenge District 2 (402) 595-2534, Ext. 223
Bill Mainquist District 3 (402) 370-3470
Terry O’Neel District 4 (308) 385-6265
@ Scott Clinger District 5 (308) 262-1920
Russ Frickey District 5 (308) 262-1929, Ext. 201
Ronda Lewis District 6 (308) 535-8031
Kelly Doyle District 7 (308) 345-8490
Linda Jackson District 8 (402) 376-1126
Rhonda DeButts Materials & Research (402) 479-4760
Resident Trainers
Craig Washburn District 1 (402) 471-0850, Ext. 1138
Jeff Kisicki District 1 (402) 471-0850, Ext. 1910
Bill Jasa District 1 (402) 335-4131
Russ Eltiste District 1 (402) 335-4131
Mel Kuper District 1 (402) 729-3489
Bob McClure District 1 (402) 729-3489
Karl Burns District 2 (402) 595-2534, Ext. 269

Micky Jacobs District 2 (402) 727-3292
Gary Mangen District 2 (402) 595-2534, Ext. 268
@ Darin Brown District 2 (402) 727-3292
Lynette Norman District 3 (402) 370-3474

Lisa Sudbeck District 3 (402) 254-6552
Gary Schmid District 3 (402) 564-5751
Lyle Kohmetscher District 4 (402) 462-4996

W. T. Farber District 4 (308) 462-1996
Richard Kwiatkowski District 4 (308) 754-5411
Tom Anderson District 4 (402) 362-5934
Arlen Zaruba District 4 (308) 728-5655
Scott Griepenstroh District 4 (308) 385-6265
Calvin Splattstoesser District 4 (308) 385-6265
528
2002
Resident Trainers
Duane Katen District 5 (308) 432-6144
@
Sylvia Hilderbrand District 5 (308) 262-1920
Darryl Steinwart District 5 (308) 632-1429
Kerri Lewandowski District 6 (308) 535-8031

Bill Teahon District 6 (308) 872-6733
Duane Collins District 7 (308) 345-8490
Gene Colfack District 8 (402) 336-2051

Mike Freeman District 8 (402) 387-2471
Dean DeButts Materials & Research (402) 479-4809

Chris Dowding Materials & Research (402) 479-4753
528a
2002
528b
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
529
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
530
DIVISION 1300
PROJECT SURVEYS
2002
General Requirements
@ DIVISION 1300 -- PROJECT SURVEYS
1300.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General. Horizontal and Vertical Control. SSHC Section 114, Construction Surveying,
requires that certain vertical and horizontal control stakes be set for the various items of
work to be constructed. This is interpreted to mean the Department will provide the
contractor with sufficient intermediate grade and alignment points or stakes, so the
contractor can construct the work according to contract documents. Remember the
contract plans were created from the preliminary survey which may be several years old by
the time construction starts.
B. Grade And Alignment Stakes. When grade and alignment stakes, including intermediate
points, are set by an NDR survey crew, the Department will be responsible for correctness
of staking. The contractor shall be responsible for the correct transposing of data from the
construction stakes to the work.
C. Staking. Refer to NDR training book “Introductory Surveying” for instructions on

construction staking for the various types of work (Use the stock control number “70-79600”
to obtain the manual from Logistics.). District 4 has a written a “Preliminary Survey Manual”
that is available on the “Network Neighborhood”. There is also a GeoPak Course Guide
“NDOR Survey with GeoPak Survey 98” available from Roadway Design.
D. The Department’s ROW Line. The Department’s ROW line is not usually placed by
registered land surveyors. Therefore it is not usually a legal description of our boundary.
Use of rebar to mark the Department’s ROW can be misleading. Our NDOR caps should
be treated as “temporary” monuments.
E. Consultant Survey Data. Consultant survey data must be electronically compatible with
GeoPak.
F. Consultant Surveyors. Consultant Surveyors must provide reports of all on site survey
activity either in advance of the activity or immediately following the activity so the
Department can readily check all stake locations and other survey information provided.
G. Survey Accuracy
1. The required accuracy for construction survey staking are as shown in Table
1300.1a.
2. The required accuracy for construction survey closures are as shown in Table
1300.1b
3. Bench levels, control points, and any significant location should be checked against
two known locations.
4. All computations should be checked by someone on the survey crew, other than the
person who did the initial computation. The check should be done in the field while
still on site.
531
2002
Table 1300.1A
Survey Staking Accuracy Requirements*
Description Metric (m) English (ft.)

Alignment (Project)
0.003 0.01
PI’s, PT’s, etc. and CP’s/BM’s
Farmstead Drives 0.3 1
Field Entrances 0.3 1
County Roads 0.03 0.1
Intersecting Highways 0.003 0.01
Telephone Poles/Power Poles
0.3 1
(offset)
Drainage Pipes (Stationing) 0.3 1
Length of Pipe 0.3 1
Box Culverts (Stationing) 0.3 1
Length of Pipe 0.03 0.1
Bridges (Stationing) 0.003 0.01
Wells (Stationing/offset) 0.3 1
Cross-Section Slope Stakes;
Rough Grading Stakes; Hub .03 .1
Line
Final Grading (Blue Tops) .015 .05
Paving Hubs .0063 .01
POT, PI, PC, PT, ETC 0.003 0.01
*All locations are to be based on a known location and checked against another known
location.
532
2002
Table 1300.1B
Maximum Closure Allowance For Survey Tasks And Activities*.
(Checking In At A Known Bench Or Other Control Point)
Activity Conventional Survey Methods. Modern Survey Methods (Total
(Differential Leveling) Station Type, Trigonometric Level,
Survey)
Paving Hubs < or = 0.05’ vertically. (Always It’s not recommended that you set
adjust out any error encountered on paving hubs using this method. As
paving grades) vertical control is not as accurate using
Horizontally hubs should always be trigonometric methods.
set sighting thru to the next point,
eliminating any error.
Blue Tops < or = .07’ vertically. (Always adjust < or = .07’ for vertical closure. < or = to
out any error encountered on blue top .15’ for horizontal closure
grades)
Horizontally hubs should always be
set sighting thru to the next point
eliminating any error in the
alignment. Outside hubs should be
set pulling a tape perpendicular to
centerline.
Slope Staking < or = 0.10’ vertically. Horizontal < or = 0.10’ vertically. < or = .50’
alignment is established pulling a horizontally
tape perpendicular to centerline.
Bridges: < or = .01’ horizontally and vertically It’s not recommended that you stake
bridges using this method. . As vertical
control is not as accurate using
trigonometric methods.
Culverts < or = 0.10’ vertically. < Or = to 0.5’ < or = .10’ vertically. < or = 0.5‘
horizontally horizontally
Cross-Sections & Borrow < or = .15’ vertically. < or = 1.0’ < or = .15 vertically. < or = 1.0’
Pits horizontally horizontally
Bench Levels Use formula- .05’ multiplied by It’s not recommended that you
square root of miles. Any error established benches using this method.
should be adjusted out thru the entire . As vertical control is not as accurate
level run. Use .035’ for preliminary using trigonometric methods.
bench levels.
Alignment < or =. 05’ horizontally < or =. 05’ horizontally
Storm Sewer Systems < or = 0.05’ vertically. < or = to 0.1’ < or = 0.05’ vertically. < or = to 0.1’
horizontally. NOTE: Inlets need to horizontally.
be accurate within a couple of
hundreds from centerline to insure
proper placement of wall, back of
curb and inlet throat.
*All units are represented in feet.

*Note: Under no circumstance should accuracy be compromised. This chart is only to be used as a guide to
help you understand the closure tolerance that may be allowed before you need to take the time reviewing your
work. These numbers may not fit all situations. If you have any questions it’s best to consult with your project
manager.
533
2002
Construction Stakes
1300.02 CONSTRUCTION STAKES
A. General - Construction Staking
1. Construction surveying represents a large proportion of the construction engineering

cost and, therefore, requires study to eliminate all needless refinements. The goal to
be reached is a satisfactory project constructed according to the approved plans
with a minimum of cost. Centerlines, right-of-way monuments and benchmarks
should be established within recognized limits. Other stakes should be established
to standards commensurate with their use.
• Rt or Lt is relative to stationing – align yourself looking up to next higher

station number to determine left or right.
• The Department usually stakes the ROW as needed for the relocation and
location of utilities before the contract is awarded. Utility companies need
references to determine how to move their property before the project
begins.
• Utilities may damage stakes—communicate the Departments desire to

maintain stakes and require utilities to relocate damaged stakes where
possible.
• The project manager needs to communicate with the contractor to determine

where the contractor plans to start work. With good communication, the
Project Manager should be able to accommodate the contractor’s need for
stakes within time requirements specified in the contract.
• Today the centerline is generally defined by coordinates however, it is still

significant in the majority of the construction staking.
• The survey crew should set the construction stakes as far ahead of the
contractor as practicable. The Project Manager must have the area staked
sufficiently in advance to avoid construction delays.
• The stakes provide the contractor the construction lines and grades and also
serve as an inspection guide.
• Stakes must be accurate.
• Keep communication with the contractor open so if a change is necessary,

staking will not delay the project.
• The contractor shall be responsible for the protection and integrity of the
stakes after placement. The contractor shall take the necessary measures
to achieve this.
534
2002
Construction Stakes
• All preliminary survey results go to Ken Hartwig, Geodetic Survey Section.

Ken checks the data then passes the data onto both Kurt Svoboda, Right-of-
Way, and to the Roadway designer responsible for the project.
o ROW surveys are generally done as part of the Preliminary survey.

However, Gene Thomsen does many of the ROW surveys.
o Hydraulic surveys are also part of the Preliminary survey and the data
is provided to Don Jisa,
• The Geodetic Survey Section does Photogrammetric surveys. The

Photogrammetry Section plots/maps the survey data.
• GPS Pairs are permanent monuments.
o On each project the Geodetic Survey Section will provide a GPS pair
at the beginning, end and every 2-3 miles along the project.
o Usually the monuments are offset 500-1,000’ left and right of the
centerline.
• The GPS establishes the state coordinate system.
o HARN was created in 1995 with the help of a National Geodetic

Survey, which established a grid of accurate points across Nebraska
based on GPS sightings.
o Contact the Bridge or Roadway Design Division if you need the
coordinates of any point.
• Geodetic surveys are expensive.
o Preliminary surveys are estimated at 200 hours per mile in rural

areas ± correction factors.
o Preliminary surveys are estimated at 800 hours per mile in urban
areas ± correction factors.
o If a contract survey is estimated above in-house time allocations, try
to find a way to do the work in-house.
B. Minimum Survey Requirements
Each project is unique and has different survey requirements. Table 1300.2 describes the
common stakes. Table 1300.3 explains the minimum stakes necessary and their
appropriate location in normal conditions for the item listed. Table 1300.4 shows the
minimum placement intervals for stakes. Finally Table 1300.5 shows how to stake
structures (Bridges & culverts).
535
2002
Construction Stakes
Table 1300.2
STAKE DESCRIPTION*
STAKE DESCRIPTION
Hub (Right of Way) 1” x 2” x 18” (oak)
Hub (Blue Tops) 2” x 2” x 9” (oak) or 1” x 2” x 18”
Hub (Paving Hubs) 2” x 2” x 9” (oak)
Guard Stakes for Marking/Describing Hubs 1/2 “ x 2” X18”
Information Stakes For Use in Right of 1” x 2” x 18” (pine)
Way, Structures
Slope Stakes ½” x 2” x 18” (pine)
Lath (marks hub/guard sites) ½” x 2” x 48”
Pink Ribbon Delineates lath or other objects for visual
locating.
Wire Flags – Pink Marks Bluetops, Paving Hubs, ROW,
Structure Stakes, etc.
Rebar 5/8” x 36” Used in establishing control
points, ROW breaks.
Aluminum Caps Placed on rebar to accurately establish a
given survey point and stamp point
information.
*Ground conditions may require other sizes and or types of stakes, than those indicated.
536
2002
Construction Stakes
STAKE DEFINITIONS
Table 1300.3
DESCRIPTION PURPOSE
HUB LINE 1” x 2” x 18” oak/pine hub stake set usually at 100’ intervals Establishes the boundary of the Department
or at plan cross section locations between ROW breaks on property, shows the offset location of the
the ROW boundary. The hub is protected with a 1” x 2” x 18” centerline and shows stationing. Also may be used
guard stake with station/offset information, and a ½” x 2” x to define rough grading. May also be used to mark
48” pine lath. temporary and permanent easements.
ROW ½” x 2” x18’ hub or 5/8” or ?” x 36’ rebar rods set at points in Establishes the boundary breaks of the Department
the Hub Line where the ROW changes directions property. Right of Way markers are normally
(Deflections). Set on PC’s, PT’s of curves, in Hub Line where installed on these points by the contractor.
tangent sections are over 1,000 feet in length and on hills so (Confirm control points before staking ROW.) Or at
ROW may be viewed. ROW hub (See example at Subsection 1300.02 C.)
SLOPE STAKES ½” x 2” x18’ pine stake with lath (optional) and guard stake Defines rough grading requirements – cut/fill, slope,
(optional) with information describing the limits of rough offset from centerline, toe of backslope distance,
grading. Set on the extreme outside points of the designed hinge point/shoulder distance and ditch dimensions.
cross section where the grading work and natural ground A cut or fill to centerline may be written on the back
intersect. Usually set at 100-foot intervals and where of the stake.
changes in slopes, roadway width, sharp curves or ditch
dimension change. Slope stakes are protected by a wire flag
or lath for visibility.
BLUE TOPS (A 2” x 2” x 9” or 1” x 2” x 18” oak/pine Hub stake depending on Used to establish the final subgrade elevations and
Subgrade Lath is soil conditions with plain, blue or white colored top. Set the final grading slopes. These stakes are set
sometimes used stake at finished subgrade elevation and place another stake centerline; edge of mainline roadway (¼ points), &
instead of a Blue (short lath) or wire flag near it for protection. Sometimes edge of shoulder transversely across the
Top in cases of colored fiber tail (“chaser”) is placed atop the stake to aid roadway. (Additional stakes are needed on
extreme grader. Generally the Department will not color the top of the multilane highways.) Bluetops are usually set at
subgrade overfill hub or place a fiber tail chaser – that is the responsibility of 100’ intervals longitudinally. Additional blue tops
or deficiency with the contractor. may be set at 50’ intervals in cases such as vertical
the PM’s curves, sharp horizontal curves, or slope transition
approval) areas. Set Blue tops at the exact finish grade
elevation—the contractor must make any
adjustment.
PAVING HUBS 2” x 2” x 9” oak/pine hub with a tack set at a contractor Used to set the string line to guide the trimming and
specified offset distance form the pavement centerline/edge pavement-finishing machines. Grade (cut/fill) is
of pavement. A ½” x 2” x 18” pine stake is driven beside the indicated on the stake. Need to determine with the
paving hub which explains offset, grade (cut/fill) and station contractor whether the offset is level from the edge
of the paving hub. Usually set at 50’ intervals on both sides of pavement or is the projected slope.
of the mainline. In cases of sharp vertical curves, horizontal
curves over 1 degree, or transition areas, hubs are set at 25-
foot longitudinal increments.
DRAINAGE, PIPE, 1” x 2” x 18” oak/pine Hub set at a specified offset from the Shows the location of structures in terms of project
CULVERT, BRIDGE, structure being staked. A (1” x 2” x 18”) pine guard stake stationing and offset distances.
WALL, DRIVEWAY, which explains offset, grade (cut/fill) and station of the
CURB, SIDEWALK paving hub and a ½” x 2” x 48” lath stake is driven beside the
AND OTHER hub for visibility and protection. On long pipe runs usually for
STRUCTURE storm sewers, offset stakes are set at 50’ intervals.
STAKES.
SHIM SHOTS Points on a girder. At locations directed by the Bridge Used to determine the final grade of the bridge
Division. Use a paint mark to mark location.) deck. (Make sure all the Bridge Division knows
where on the girder the points were taken.) The
actual shim amount is shown with a black marker
on steel girders and with paint on concrete girders.
STATIONING ½” x 2” x 48” pine stake (lath). Usually only needed on Defines the project stationing. Usually placed
LATHS asphalt overlay projects. before the subgrade is set to help define/establish
pavement quantities. Offset near edge of shoulder.
PAVEMENT Imprinted station number on pavement. (3” brass number Defines the project stationing.
STAMP stamps imprints in plastic concrete). Place stamp every 100-
feet or 20-meters. Normally place on the right side,
progressing up stationing so the stamp can be read from the
shoulder. Avoid rumble strip location.
ALIGNMENT May be ? “ o r ½” x 36” rebar for permanent points; a 60d Defines the centerline alignment. Such as the
POINTS OR spike for a less permanent point; or frequently a 1” x 2” x 18” beginning or ending of a curve, or the point of
CONTROL POINTS oak/pine hub with a tack. ½” x 2” x 48” pine stake (lath) is deflection of two tangent segments. Control points
used to protect the hub. may also be offset from the centerline at various
locations and are tied to the highway with
coordinates.
537
2002
Construction Stakes
MINIMUM SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

Table 1300.4
MAJOR CONSTRUCTION
LEVEL HORIZ. HOR. SHARP OTHER REQUIREMENTS
GRADE CURVES CURVES VERT.
(feet) >2 degree <2 degree CURVES
TYPE OF (r<2865’) (r>2865’) (feet)
STAKE LOCATIONS (feet) (feet)
Hub Hub, guard and Lath HL(100’) HL(100’) HL(100’) HL(100’) Hubs may be “graded” to
Line set between ROW centerline for use by the grading
Breaks on the ROW contractor.
boundary
ROW Hubs or Rebar rods, Set a stake at each break point;
guard and lath set at on level ground every 1000-feet;
points in the hub at Control points; and at the top
line where the ROW of hills to provide Line of Sight
changes direction and at other locations described
(deflects). in Subsection 1300.02. .
Slope Slope stake and SS(100’) SS(100’) SS(100’) SS(100’) Changes in roadway width,
Stakes wire flag or lath to be slopes, ditch dimensions or
set at the extreme sharp curves may require
outside points of the additional slope stakes.
designed cross
section where the
grading work and
the natural ground
intersect.
Blue White or blue topped BT(100’) BT(50’) BT(100’) BT(50’) Blue Tops establish the final
Tops hubs with wire flag grading limits. These stakes are
or colored fiber tail set at centerline; ¼ points; &
(chaser) set to final subgrade/foreslope intersection
grade elevations (edge of shoulder). (Additional
across subgrade stakes may be necessary on
template. Bluetops multilane roads.)
may be replaced by
subgrade lath if
approved by the
Project Manager.
Only a short lath with
cut/fill marked on
them is placed on
subgrade template.
Paving Hubs with guard PH(50’) PH(25’) PH(50’) PH(25’) Offset needed for their
Hubs stakes are set at equipment. Graded to top of
specified offset proposed pavement surface.
distance from edge (Level or projected grades as
of pavement. required by the contractor.)
Radius Locate and verify As As As As Add construction benchmarks
Points control points and necessary necessary necessary necessary and roadway alignment as
and benchmarks from necessary.
Other preliminary survey.
Control
Points
PH=Paving Hubs
HL=Hub Line
BT=Blue Tops-Final
Grading
SS=Slope Stakes
538
2002
Construction Stakes
SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
Table 1300.5
STRUCTURES (BRIDGES AND CULVERTS)
STAKES LOCATION
ABUTMENT CENTERLINE BS (8 each) Normally two stakes are placed on each side
of the bridge at specified distances from
centerline of the bridge at each abutment.
WING ENDS BS (8 each) Two stakes are placed at specified distances
from the end of the wing. These stakes are on
the same azimuth as the wing.
PILE LOCATIONS AND Contractor measures from existing stakes to
ELEVATIONS pile locations. Elevations should be verified by
the inspector.
PIER CENTERLINE BS (4 each/pier) Two stakes are placed on each side of the pier
at specified distances from the center of the
bridge pier.
GRADE BEAM CENTERLINE BS (8 each) Two stakes are placed on each side of the
grade beam at specified distances from the
center of the bridge.
SHIM SHOTS ON EACH SSR – As Directed By Used to determine the final grade of the bridge
GIRDER The Bridge Division. deck. (Make sure all the Bridge Division
knows where on the girder the points were
taken.) The actual shim amount is shown with
a black marker on steel girders and with paint
on concrete girders.
PIPE CULVERTS CS (2 each) @ each Hub, guard and lath should be placed at a
end of pipe offset as specified offset from the end of the floor on
required. centerline of the pipe, at each end. Any
broken back or horizontal break should also
be referenced on the end stakes or staked
separately.
BOX CULVERTS CS (2 each) @ each Hub, guard and lath should be placed at a
end of pipe offset as specified offset from the end of the floor on
required centerline of the box, at each end. Some
contractors may require parapet stakes and
wing stakes (mostly on skewed boxes).
These should be set at a specified distance to
the centerline of the box or end of wing, on the
parapet line or wing line. Any broken back or
horizontal break should also be referenced on
the end stakes or staked separately.
CS=culvert stakes require a hub, guard and lath.
BS=bridge stakes may require a hub with nail, information guard and lathe.
SSR=shim shot reading
539
2002
Construction Stakes
C. Survey Stake Minimum Requirement Examples—Suggested Format
PAVING STAKES
Offset 5’ F = Fill -2-2% +2.5%
Distance C = Cut or
F 0.83
10+00
Station
Front Back Stakes set at transition points through

curves provide changing slope data.
Fill (cut) is to the top of the pavement at outside edge.
Pavement grades may be computed flat from edge of pavement to paving hub, or on projected
slope of pavement out to paving hub. Coordinate with contractor for method preferred.
SLOPE STAKES
Centerline
Fill Stake Cut Stake Hub Guard
C 3.5 @ 55.5
Slope 80 Distance
F 3.5 @ 52.53:1
to C 3.5 to Centerline
Centerline
Ditch Width
10+00
3:1
TBS @ 45
3:1 10’ FBD
HP@42
Front Back
Hinge Point (HP) at Toe of Backslope (TBS) Centerline reference hub normally
42’ from centerline 45’ from centerline set at ROW line. C or F to subgrade
elevation at centerline.
On 4-lane road, distance is to A or B
Line. Profile point is inside edge of
Driving lane.
540
2002
Construction Stakes
CULVERT STAKES
Distance from
60’ 15’
Project Centerline Offset to the end of culvert
Culvert Size 24”

Culv.
Station Cut or Fill Grade to
C1.5 FL
31+25 Flowline
ROW STAKES
ROW ROW Designation
80.5’ Distance to Centerline

123+00
Station
Front (Cut or fill grade to centerline marked on back)
Hub Flags: Green-Yellow flag for easements.

Orange flag for ROW.
541
2002
Construction Survey Basic Requirements
1300.03 CONSTRUCTION SURVEY BASIC REQUIREMENTS
A. GeoPak Guidance (Not All Projects Are Available In This Format)
1. GeoPak New Project Instructions:
a. Create a new folder on your C: drive under C:\geoprjs\11111; Name this

folder with the 5-digit control number for this project. In this example the
control number is 11111.
b. Open microstation. The microstation manager window will be on the

screen.
• Set the path on the right to C:\geoprjs\11111.

• Then click file – new. At the bottom of the window select a seed
file. Example – C:\users\data\seed3.dgn. Use seed3.dgn for an
English survey or mseed3.dgn for a metric survey.
• Then type the control number in the window on the left side and
click ok. The control number 11111.dgn will appear on the top left
side of the microstation manager window. Click ok.
c. The microstation design screen is now on your screen. The top bar on the
screen should read 11111.dgn (3D) – MICROSTATION/J. Click on
Applications – GeoPak survey – GeoPak survey tools. The toolbox has
four icons.
d. Click on the Project Manager icon. The Project Manager window opens.
• Set the path on the right side to C:\geoprjs\11111. The path

appears towards the top of the window.
• Then click project – new. The create new project window opens.
Project name: 11111, Working directory: leave blank, Job number:
111, for the job number use the last 3-digits of the control number.
Project description: Skyline Dr.- 204th and Dodge.
• Now click on preferences. GeoPak user preferences window
opens. Direction: Azimuth, Coordinate: XY, Unit: English or Metric.
Working directory: leave blank.
• Then click on feature preferences. Select .smd file, Example-
C:\GeoPak_Projects\Standards\ prelim.smd or mprelim.smd for a
metric prelim.
• Also toggle on the best match feature. Click ok.
• Then click ok in the GeoPak user preferences window, and click ok
in the Create new project window. An alert window appears asking
Create Job 111 in directory C:\geoprjs\11111\? Click Yes.
e. In the Project manager window 11111.prj should appear highlited on the

left side of the window. Click ok. The Project users window opens. Click
users – new. Name: your initials, Full name: your full name, Op code: your
initials, Description: your title or your titles initials, Click ok. Do you wish to
define a password for this user? Click No. Highlite (aa) Click ok.
542
2002
f. Click Survey, The Select Run window opens. Click run – new. The run
name should correspond with the letter you used for your Sdms project
segment. In this example the run is named tra for the traverse segment.
The description can be left blank. Highlite tra. Click ok.
g. The Survey project window opens. The title bar should read,
Survey….Project (11111) .. User (aa)..Run (tra).
h. Highlite Data Source, click Single file. The Select sdms window opens.
• Set the path on the right side of the window to C:\sdms\prj\11111.

On the left side of the window the sdms project segments should
appear.
• Select 11111tra.prj and click ok. Toggle on Remove Sdms tag
names from point descriptions.
• Now click sdms to obs. Click on mapping option.
• Toggle on draw mapping. The Dgn file should read C:\
geoprjs\11111\11111.dgn. The seed file is grayed out.
• Now click control code. Click open. Click 11111tra.ctl. Click ok.
The control file should read C:\geoprjs\11111\11111tra.ctl. Coord
fields should now have coordinates.
i. Now click process survey. The standard unit weight should be 3 or less. A
larger number indicates a problem with the process of the observations in
the obs file and the control file. The Least squares adjustment takes place
when processing the survey and creates the reports for review. These are
very useful for checking errors and adjustments. Now press any key to
continue. Then click import to gpk. This imports the points and chains to a
GeoPak database.
j. Clicking on the Bently B and selecting sink can hide the survey project
window. You can restore the window by clicking on window – survey
project.
k. To view the project on your screen click fit view. In this example you would
see the CP’s for this projects traverse.
l. Continue by opening the survey project window. Click copy run. Select tra.
Click ok. Type in the next segment letter and click ok. Proceed with data
source as previously explained.
m. Roadway Design is developing a program to make setup easier and

when this is available it will be easier to use GeoPak.
543
2002
2. Computer Listings Available – For projects developed on the computer, listings

will be sent to the Project Manager with the plans or as soon thereafter as they
can be printed. If, due to loss or damage, additional listings are needed by the
field personnel, they will be supplied upon request. The listings available are
discussed under the subsequent paragraphs. GeoPak can reproduce or reformat
any of the previous listings/books.
3. Preliminary Cross Section Listings – This is a tabulation of the preliminary

survey elevations and distance. GeoPak has the capability of projecting cross
sections at any location.
4. Plotted Cross Sections – Plotted cross sections are available to the Project
Manager for all computer designed projects.
q GeoPak plots both the preliminary and design cross sections. The scale
used for both may be modified to any desirable scale. The scale used is
printed in the upper left hand corner of each sheet.
5. Earthwork Computation Listing – This is a tabulation by stations of areas and

volumes.
6. The RDS form is titled “Earthwork Quantities List for Roadways.”
7. Grades and Surfacing Elevations Listing – This is a tabulation of the finish

grades at centerline and at the edge of the surfacing. On horizontal curves all
grades have been corrected for transitions and superelevations. GeoPak can
furnish grades for any point between the two shoulders.
8. R.O.W. Limit Listings – This machine listing is discussed later in this

subsection.
9. Blue Top Book – This listing is discussed later in this subsection.
10. Slope Stake Book – This listing is discussed later in this subsection.
11. Alignment Book – This listing gives alignment information and is for use when
referencing and relocating centerline.
• Preliminary alignments are available through Ken Hartwig In Roadway Design

[(402)-479-4682].
• Construction Alignments are available through the Roadway Design, Project
Designer [(402)-479-4601].
544
2002
12. Locations of “No Passing Zones” – Vertical curve no passing zones can be
obtained from Roadway Design. However, the District can run the two vehicle
test method to determine the zones. (Two vehicles follow 1200’ apart and when
sight is obstructed that starts the no passing zone one direction and ends the no
passing zone the other direction. When sight distance is returned that ends the
zone the first direction and begins the zone the other direction. Logistics Division
has the equipment for this operation.
B. Checking Bench Levels
1. Good bench levels are one of the important reference features of any construction
project.
2. All benchmarks should be thoroughly checked before any other level work is
started. If the preliminary survey party has not established benchmarks at proper
intervals, intermediate ones should be set. Permanent benchmarks should be
established approximately 1000 ft (300 m) apart and also near all major structure
locations.
3. In choosing objects for benchmarks, the Project Manager must keep in mind that
such objects must be permanent and easily accessible. Nails in fence posts and
pole lines should be avoided. A 3 foot “T” post is normally required for a
benchmark however, the PM may authorize the use of steel reinforcing rod, at
least ? inch (15.8 mm) round and 3 ft (1.0 m) long driven 2 inches (50 mm)
below ground level in a location that will not be disturbed. The location should be
marked with a guide stake or lath and red cloth, and the “plus” and “distance right
or left of centerline” recorded in the levels book.
4. In running levels, the following rules should be followed:
a. Equalize sights. In order to eliminate instrumental errors as much as

possible, backsight and foresight distances should be of equal length at all
turning points.
b. Reading the rod. Rod readings at turning points shall be taken to the
nearest .005 foot (.00152 meter). The rodperson shall use a rod plumb or
if plumb is not available may wave the rod away from and toward the
instrument parallel to the plane of collimation.
c. Never take down the instrument without checking on a benchmark other

than the one used on the setup or turn.
d. In establishing benchmarks, it is important to turn on each benchmark.
545
2002
5. Benchmarks notes may be kept in the alignment notebook. Recorded rod

readings shall never be erased. If an error is made, a line should be drawn
through the erroneous figure and the correct figure written above. In checking
elevations, the plan elevations shall be used unless an error in elevation of 0.05 ft
(15 mm) or more is found. If errors are found they should be corrected and
documented—some errors will have to be prorated over the intermediate points
by the data collector. The final cross section levels may then be corrected to the
preliminary datum at preliminary benchmarks or at established benchmarks.
6. If difficulty is encountered in checking preliminary bench levels or the Project

Manager has reason to believe that an error was made in transferring preliminary
elevations onto the plans, he/she may obtain the original preliminary notes by
writing the Roadway Design Division at Lincoln.
C. Reproducing And Referencing Centerline
1. The construction centerline shall be reestablished using the plan information. It is

a good policy to establish the centerline and set the reference stakes for the entire
project as early as possible, so that property owners may have ample time to
lower pipe lines, remove fences, power and telephone poles, buildings, etc.,
before the construction crew arrives.
2. In reestablishing the centerline, the work should proceed as follows:
a. Locate and “tie out” all plan transit points.
b. Establish and “tie out” any additional required control points.
c. Reestablish the centerline.
d. Set the centerline reference stakes.
3. Transit points that should be located or established and “tied out” are:
a. P.O.T. (Point on tangent)
b. P.I. (Point of intersection)
c. P.C. (Point of curvature)
d. P.T. (Point of tangency)
e. T.S. (Tangent to spiral)
f. S.C. (Spiral to curve)
g. C.S. (Curve to spiral)
h. S.T. (Spiral to tangent)
546
2002
i. P.O.C. (Point on curve)
(Reference these points to at least four permanent objects which will not be
disturbed during construction or shall have coordinates accurate to ≠ 0.01 feet.
However, in the absence of available “permanent objects”, tacked stakes set at
right angles to and at known distances from the project centerline will be
satisfactory. Reference ties should be measured horizontally to the nearest ? ”
(3.0 mm) with a steel tape.)
4. After the transit points have been established, proceed to reestablish the
centerline markers. The Project Manager should set the centerline markers with
an instrument at 100 ft (25 m) intervals, measured horizontally on tangents and
horizontal curves up to 9400 ft (2864.789 m) radius. Curves that are less than
radius of 9400 ft (2864.789 m) should use 50 ft (15 m) chords. The distance
“plumbed up” by the chaining crew should be checked occasionally with a hand
level or from the difference in old ground elevations shown on the plans.
Intermediate centerline markers on tangents may be set later with a chain
stretched between the station markers. Intermediate centerline markers on
curves should always be set with the instrument.
5. When obstructions such as fences, etc. are present on the right-of-way and when
the removal of such items are not included in the contract items, the appropriate
adjacent property owners shall be notified that they must remove such
obstructions. Such notification shall be made well in advance of construction
operations so that the owners will have sufficient time to make arrangements for
performing the work. They should also be advised of the date on which stakes
will be set for their information in removing or relocating their property.
6. Provision for the removal of advertisement signs is handled independently by our

Right of Way Division. Should any problems arise relative to the removal of
advertisement signs, the Construction Division should be contacted.
D. Checking Plan Grade And Calculating Grade Revisions
1. As soon as possible after assignment to the project, all grade elevations shown
on the plan-profile sheets of the plans should be thoroughly checked. This
includes percent of grade and vertical curve corrections. On structures, it is
recommended that all grades be recomputed including pile cutoff, footing, pier
cap, abutment seat, and top of girder elevations.
2. It is particularly important to check the profile of the roadway surfacing which

connects with the project being constructed. If this elevation is found to differ
from that shown on the plans, it is evident that the project grade line will need to
be adjusted. This adjustment will cause changes in grade stake elevations and
may even affect lengths of proposed culverts in the area.
547
2002
3. If any appreciable error is found between the preliminary and preconstruction

chaining or bench levels, and an equation is introduced, it will be necessary to
recalculate the centerline grade from the equation point to the next point of
intersection of tangent grades, or if too distant, to some nearer convenient point of
the next grade break. This is particularly important on concrete pavement as any
equation or correction in levels or distance will be reflected in the pavement form
elevation.
E. Staking Right-Of-Way Fence and Right-Of-Way Limit Listing
1. ROW stakes are needed usually before the contract is awarded to provide
references for utility relocations.
2. On some projects, right-of-way fence is a contract item and staked and

constructed in accordance with the plans or the right-of-way listing. On other
projects, fence stakes must be set on the right-of-way line for the guidance of
adjacent property owners. The Project Manager should also check the fence
setting as it progresses to see that it is set in correct relation to the fence stakes.
3. Right-of-way fence stakes should not be set in borrow pits or channel changes
until the contractor has these finished to the landowner’s and the District
Engineer’s satisfaction.
4. Right-of-way limit listings are available for most projects except interstate.
Separate listings will be furnished for the left and right sides of centerline of the
project. They will give the right-of-way distances at all breaks in the line and at all
intermediate full stations. All distances given on the listings are from centerline of
the project to the right-of-way line.
5. Right-of-way limit information will not be given for segregated parcels near section
corners. The listing will give the station and distance to the point where the
normal right-of-way enters the segregated parcel and also at the exit, with a break
in the stationing between the two. The section corner will not be given. If right-of-
way markers are to be set for segregated parcels, consult the plans or the right-
of-way contract for the necessary information.
F. Setting Slope Stakes
1. The “Slope Stake Book” provides the data for locating the slope stakes and this
“book”/file is available from the Roadway Design Division, CADD Applications
Section, (402) 479-3986.
2. Construction stakes are placed on the project before work begins to outline for the
contractor the location and extent of the work. Slope stakes may be set with an
instrument on projects having the excavation quantity computed from plotted
cross sections. The notes shall be kept in a separate book.
548
2002
3. For fill sections, slope stakes are set at the toe of the slope and marked to show
the vertical distance and slope from the ground at the stake location to the grade
elevation at the hinge point and the subgrade shoulder of the fill.
4. For cut sections, slope stakes are set at the top of the backslope and marked to
show the vertical distance and slope from the point on the ground where the stake
is set to the grade elevation for the bottom of the ditch.
5 Slope stakes are normally set on both sides of the road at every station
(100-feet); and every 50 ft (15 m) on horizontal curves having a radius of
2865 feet (873.25 m) or less. Use Type “D” ½” x 2” x 18” (12.5 x 50 x 458 mm)
pine stakes.
6. Some intermediate points at which slope stakes should also be set are:
a. P.C. and P.T. of horizontal curves.
b. Beginning and ending of superelevation.
c. Points where shoulder and backslope change.
d. Change in width of roadbed.
e. Change in width of side ditch or borrow.
f. Any other points helpful to the contractor.
7. Balance points shall be well marked on the ground with a lath and red flag. Call
the contractor’s attention to these points and see that he/she works to them.
8. The plan data pertinent to each station shall be placed in the slope stake
notebook. This data gives the trial distance for the first rod reading and also a
check between the plan and the stake as actually set in the field. The information
from the plans and the staking data should be similar to the example shown in
Appendix 3-12. This example also shows the method for setting stakes for high
fills when the instrument height (H.I.) is below the new plan grade.
9. The staking party should watch drainage along the toe of fill slopes, intercepting
ditches, dikes, etc., as the machine does not now provide for drainage in all
cases. Where necessary, special ditch grades must be computed in the field.
They should also watch for vertical banks just beyond the limits of construction
and correct slope stake locations accordingly.
549
2002
G. Setting Finishing Stakes
1. The use of a separate notebook is suggested for the finishing stake (blue top)
notes. Several satisfactory methods of keeping notes are presently in use.
Following is a description of one acceptable method. The left-hand page of the
notebook may be used for the plan data; that is, the station number, the centerline
grade elevation, the drop to intermediate points and shoulders, the amount of
superelevation on curves, etc. The right-hand page of the book can then be used
for recording the staking data. The grade rod, for each point on the grading
roadway template to be staked, is computed and placed on this page. The actual
level rod reading (Read Rod) can be recorded below the corresponding grade rod
and the cut or fill from the existing ground to the grade rod computed. Finishing
stakes are then driven at these points and “blue-topped”. Only in extreme cases
should a cut or fill be marked on the finishing stake. If the grade has been built too
high, a hole should be dug deep enough to drive the blue top to grade. The
contractor can be expected to protect these stakes so that they will not have to be
reset at some future date. If many stake holes are necessary or many stakes are
appreciably high [0.3 ft (90 mm) and over], additional work should be done by the
contractor before stakes are set.
2. Blue top books are available on all projects designed with the computer. The
design information is given for each preliminary cross section on one page with a
blank page following for construction information. The elevations included in this
information may include an allowance for “trimming”. The Project Manager or
party chief must determine exactly what elevations are given. When a trimming
allowance is not included, up to 0.1 ft (30 mm) may be added to the elevation of
the finished grade stakes.
H. Setting Trimming Or Paving Form Stakes
1. When the roadway is in condition for the surface structure, trimming or paving
stakes may be set. They should be aligned and graded by instrument.
2. The riding quality of the surface structure depends to a large extent on the vertical
accuracy of the stakes and the accuracy with which the trimming is performed or
the forms are set. The approved method is to set accurate grades to millimeters
for each side of the surfacing at a uniform offset (consult the contractor). Grades
may be indicated by stakes either driven to grade or driven flush with the ground
and marked with a cut or fill. Stakes driven flush are least likely to be disturbed.
The alignment shall be given on one side only and indicated by tacks in the top of
the stakes. The appearance of the grade may be checked visually from both
directions by sighting along the contractor’s string line before the trimming or form
setting operation begins.
3. On curves, the tack line may be run on the offset line after computing a chord
length for the offset radius, or the centerline of the curve may be run and the tack
line set by double chaining the offset line, again using the proper chord length for
the offset radius.
550
2002
4. Stakes are normally set at 50 ft (15 m) intervals on tangent alignments and on

horizontal curves up to 2o radius which have straight or long vertical curve
grades. On horizontal curves over 2o radius and vertical curves having a grade
algebraic difference that is more than 1.75 ft (0.532 m) from the tangent grade in
50 ft (15 m), a 25 ft (7.5 m) interval should be used. The ST, CS, SC and TS or
PC and PT of all horizontal and the PVC and PVT of all vertical curves should be
clearly marked for the contractor. Stake the transitions in and out through the
super’s of the curves as per the Standard Plan.
I. Contractor’s Forms on Large Structures
1. On viaducts and bridges, the staking crew shall give the contractor line and grade
on all bents, piers, abutments, walls, etc. This duty will be continuous throughout
the duration of the construction. Using the stakes previously set, the Project
Manager shall stake or check all pile layouts, centerline, and grade on all footings,
columns, caps and anchor bolts before and after the pouring of concrete.
Columns, pier caps and anchor bolts should be checked while the concrete is still
fresh enough to allow for adjusting the forms or anchor bolts to line and grade. In
addition to checking the line from the survey stakes, anchor bolts may also be
checked by steel taping form pier to pier. Temperature, force on the tape, and
plumbing for elevation must all be considered when this method is used. On
steel girder bridges, a final check shall be made on span lengths, pier and
abutment angles, and bearing plate seat elevations before attempting to set the
girders in place. This should be done as soon as possible to allow time for minor
adjustments in the girders should they be necessary. The following step are used
in making this check:
a. From a transit setup, mark the centerline of the structure on the pier caps.
b From a setup, turn the pier angles and mark the centerline of the pier at
the center of each set of anchor bolts.
c. Check the anchor bolts for proper relation to the pier centerlines you have
marked.
d. Steel tape the distance along each line of girders between the abutments
and piers as a check on the span lengths. Temperature, pull force, and
plumbing for elevation must be accurately used in the measurement.
(See the “Introduction to Surveying” page 51 & 52 for the chaining
requirements and temperature corrections.)
e. Take elevations on all bearing plate seats. Across any one pier cap the
variation from plan elevation between any two bearing seats should not be
more than ¼ inch (6 mm). For example, of all bearing seats across the
pier are ¼ inch (6 mm) too high (or low), the floor grade can be adjusted
to compensate. However, if one bearing seat is ¼ inch (6 mm) high and
the adjacent seat is ? inch (3 mm) low, the variation is more than ¼ inch
(6 mm) and the bearing seat elevations should be adjusted by grinding.
This will assure the proper fit of the separator angle against the girder
web.
551
2002
J. Checking Culvert Lengths, Culvert Lists, Slope Stakes, Blue Top Stakes, Paving Hubs,
etc.
1. General – Another duty of the survey crew is to take cross sections along the
centerline of all culvert sites. This includes existing structures which are to be
extended as well as proposed structures. The cross section should follow the
centerline of the new structure and be taken along the skew line if the structure is
not at right angles to centerline. If the inlet or outlet of the proposed structure
does not coincide with the flow line of the existing channel or ditch, sufficient rod
readings should be taken off-angle [usually extending [200 to 300 ft (60 to 90 m)]
in the existing channel to establish the proper flow line design for the new
structure. (The pipes off-line distance, change of skew, and length changes
should be noted on the cross section sheets.) The elevation of the intersection of
the right-of-way line and existing channel should also be determined.
2. The specifications provide that “the contractor shall not order and deliver the
(culvert) pipe until a correct list of sizes and lengths is furnished by the Project
Manager.” Also, the contractor should not order and deliver material for box
culverts, inlets, junction boxes, manholes and similar appurtenances, until a
correct list of sizes and lengths of such structures is furnished by the Project
Manager.
3. The Project Manager should promptly field-check the culvert and drainage
structure locations, and prepare the field-checked culvert list. The instructions
included herein provide for designing and detailing culvert pipe, reinforced
concrete pipe, or corrugated metal pipe in exactly the same manner. This
procedure will enable the Project Manager to field check and prepare the “field
checked order list” without delaying to determine identity of the contractor and the
kind (concrete or metal) of culvert pipe to be furnished. Accordingly, the Project
Manager will be able to and should expedite the preparation of the field-checked
culvert list to facilitate and provide time for fabrication and delivery of the culvert
materials.
4. Culvert List – Pipe Culverts – The “field-checked list” of pipe culverts and
appurtenances should include the following information for each pipe culvert:
a. Station locations.
b. Diameter and length.
c. Kind of pipe culvert (concrete pipe, corrugated metal pipe or culvert pipe).
d. Type of headwalls, inlet, manhole, junction box, or other appurtenance,

and applicable standard plan number or numbers, if such items are to be
constructed.
e. Degree of skew if culvert is to be skewed, if skewed on one end only,

show direction of flow by sketch.
552
2002
f. Sketch for each broken back pipe culvert.

g. Direction of flow for all pipe extensions.
5. Do not make any field changes to pipe culverts without approval from the designer.
K. Culvert List – Box Culverts
1. The “field-checked list” of culverts should include all of the following information
for each box culvert:
a. Station location.
b. Span, rise and barrel length.
c. Plan number or numbers.
d. Height of fill over the box culvert.
e. The “field-checked list” should include additional information for each box
culvert which is to be constructed on skew, as a broken-back structure,
with control joints, or an extension of an existing box culvert, as follows:
(1) Skew angle if the box culvert is to be constructed on skew, include

a sketch if the ends or parapet walls are not to be constructed as
shown in the standard plans.
(2) A sketch for each broken-back culvert, showing dimensions

between the ends of barrel and break points and between break
points measured on the axis of the culvert, and showing flow line
elevations at ends and at break points.
(3) A sketch for each box culvert which is to be constructed with

control joints. The sketch should show the dimensions from the
ends of the barrel to the first control joint and the spacing between
control joints.
(4) When the plans provide for the extension of an existing box culvert,
the removal of the endwalls and/or the preparation of the existing
structure will usually be performed in accordance with details
shown in a standard plan.
(5) Special plans may be provided for large or complicated structure

remodeling. The standard plan includes details for connecting to
old structures having angle or straight wings, structures with or
without floors between wings, etc. The standard plans also give
the contractor the option of doweling into the wings of the existing
structure, or breaking back and exposing 2 feet (600 mm) of
reinforcing steel to connect the extended structure, when the
individual structure plan note does not specify the method of
extension.
553
2002
(6) In detailing the extensions or remodeling of existing box culvert

structures, the Project Manager must include with the
field-checked culvert list (1) an adequate description of the existing
structure, and (2) an adequate description of the preparation work
and extension. This information is essential to the contractor and
the fabricator of the necessary reinforcing steel.
f. The description of the existing structure should include:
(1) Station location, dimensions (span, rise, barrel length) and type of
structure.
(2) Plan number if known or available.
(3) Type of wing, angle or straight; for straight wings include wing
dimensions “L”, “C” and “H”.
(4) Whether or not concrete floors are between the wings.
(5) Whether the existing box is suitable for doweling.
g. The description of the new work should clearly describe the preparation
work and the extension, and should include:
(1) Span, rise and extension length, right and left.
(2) The standard plan numbers both for the removal and preparation
and for the extension.
(3) An adequate description of the removal of endwalls and/or

preparation work on the existing structure. Typical examples of the
preparation work:
(a) “Remove end walls and prepare structure as shown on the

Special Plans (in case of special plans for preparation of
old structure).”
(b) It will be seen that, depending on the type, suitability for

doweling and condition of the old structure, the description
of the preparation work may include one or more of the
typical examples listed. Include a good sketch, with
dimensions, for the contractor’s (and fabricator’s) use
when the plan and condition of the existing structure and
the new work are difficult to describe in words.
2. Do not make any field changes to box culverts without approval from the
designer.
554
2002
L. Staking Culverts And Structures
1. The centerline of culverts shall be indicted by hubs driven on the centerline and
offset at such distance from the end of the structure as to protect them from
disturbance. The elevation of tops of the hubs above or below the flow line grade
at the ends of the culvert should be given, as well as the offset distance [usually 5
to 10 ft (1.5 or 3 m)] from the hub to the end of the new culvert. Guide stakes
shall be set in all cases, giving the necessary information relative to the hubs.
2. Hubs for the alignment of headwalls may be placed on each side of the culvert on
the line of the headwall face with the guide stakes clearly indicating the face
staked. If the culvert has angling wingwalls, it is suggested that stakes be set
marking such angle.
3. The centerline of bridges and viaducts may be indicated by hubs driven on the
centerline at pier or bent locations and also on centerline of the structure, offset
each way from the pier or bent locations. Pier angles shall be turned with a
transit and hubs driven on their centerline at such distances as to protect them
from disturbance. If possible, three hubs shall be driven on each side of each pier
line. Type “E” or specially prepared 2 to 4 inch (50 to 100 mm) stakes, depending
on the soil conditions, should be used as hubs to provide stable reference points.
All hubs shall be tacked for line and at least two hubs on each side for distance.
Since the centerline hubs will usually be destroyed during construction, a based
line should be staked both right and left of centerline.
4. Permanent benchmarks should be established at each end of the structure and

intermediate points as required. All elevations and chaining should be checked
and rechecked.
5. The purpose of this letter is to provide the District Construction Engineer and the
Construction Division with information with which to cross check culvert lists. It is
felt that the letter may also be of value to the Project Manager for future reference.
M. Land Survey Monuments
The Department is required by law to notify the county board before undertaking any work
that may disturb or destroy any corners of land surveys. It is essential that notification be
given the county surveyor so that he/she will have sufficient time to properly witness all
corners before work is begun. In the event that there is no county surveyor, or the county
surveyor is not willing to perform the work, the Project Manager is responsible to schedule
a registered land surveyor to perpetuate a monument.
555
2002
N. U.S. Survey Monuments
1. Occasionally, benchmarks, triangulation stations, or other monuments of the U.S.

Geological Survey or the National Geodetic Survey are located within the limits of
construction and must be relocated. Such monuments must not be disturbed until
specific permission is received from the director of the survey involved.
2. As soon as it becomes apparent that a monument of this type must be relocated,

a letter shall be sent to the director of the appropriate survey, stating the necessity
for moving the monument giving its designation and requesting instructions
regarding the procedure to be followed in moving it. The condition of the
monument and its location with respect to section, range, township, county and
nearest town should also be included in the letter. The designation consists of
letters and numbers stamped with dies on the disk. It is desirable that a rubbing
of the disk be submitted also. The address to use for benches and landmarks is:
Director, National Geodetic Survey
601 East 12th Street, Room 1436
Kansas City, Missouri 64106
or
Central Region Engineer

U.S. Geological Survey
Rolla, Missouri 65401
3. A rubbing may be made by placing a piece of light or medium weight paper over
the disk and then rubbing over the paper with a pencil, preferably a hard one, to
bring out the legend case in the disk and any letters or numbers stamped on the
disk with dies.
4. Upon receipt of this information, the director will provide for relocation by their
forces or will authorize you to move the monument and furnish a new disk to be
used in the relocated monument and instruction to be followed in its relocation.
5. The new monument shall be established strictly in accordance with the director’s
instructions. The old disk and all notes and information requested shall be
transmitted to the director immediately after the monument has been relocated.
Extreme care and accuracy shall be exercised in all measurements and work
performed and reported so that the accuracy of the original monument may be
preserved.
6. It is important that the necessity for moving such monuments be reported

promptly when it becomes apparent that they must be disturbed so that delays in
construction work due to waiting for permission and instructions from the
directory may be avoided. The work of relocating such monuments should be
performed promptly upon receipt of the necessary authorization so that the
survey office may have definite information regarding the status of the monument
at the earliest possible date.
556
2002
O. Preserving, Perpetuating And Witnessing Land Survey Monuments
1. Preserving Land Survey Monuments – In the course of construction operations, it

frequently becomes necessary to remove, or cover with embankments or
surfacing, section corners or other land subdivision corners. Due to the fact that
so few counties maintain county surveyors, considerable expense is incurred by
the department each year in locating corners necessary in acquiring right-of-way.
In order to preserve all corners and avoid additional expense in relocating the
corners when additional improvements are contemplated, Project Managers are
requested to take precautionary steps to preserve all existing corners during
construction and to establish permanent markers and witnesses after the work is
completed.
2. The county board is required by law to “cause to be perpetuated the existing

corners of land surveys along he public roads and highways where such corners
are liable to destruction, either by public travel or construction or maintenance.”
3. In order to comply with the law and cooperate with the county surveyor or Project
Manager, the District Engineer will notify the county board in writing at least
120 days prior to construction, listing locations of land survey monuments which
are within the construction limits. This notification shall be given on all
construction projects including pavement resurfacing (except gravel). Copies of
the notification shall be sent to the Deputy State Surveyor in the Roadway Design
Division and the Construction Division.
4. Where corners have been located by the county surveyor or deputy state
surveyor and properly witnessed, it shall be the responsibility of the Project
Manager to protect the witnesses during the construction of the project. The
Project Manager shall cooperate with the county surveyor by furnishing
information regarding the proposed limits of construction so that witnesses may
be placed in locations that will not be disturbed. The county surveyor should be
notified promptly if it becomes necessary to disturb any witnesses or if witnesses
are discovered during construction. Prompt notification in such instances may
avoid inconvenience to the county surveyor. The land surveyor who witnessed
the land corners prior to construction should be notified. Do not notify deputy
state surveyors since they will be unable to return to the project.
5. The contractor is required by SSHC Subsection 107.09 in the specifications to

“protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land monuments and property
markers until the Project Manager has witnessed or otherwise referenced their
location and shall not remove them until directed.” The Project Manager shall
cooperate with the contractor and advise of the location of all monuments which
have been located and properly witnessed, marking the location of all witnesses
by lath or in some other satisfactory manner and advise regarding any other
location where monuments have not been located and where particular care
should be exercised in excavating to avoid disturbing the monument if it is
uncovered.
557
2002
6. On resurfacing projects, the written notification directed to the county board shall
be considered to have fulfilled the Department’s obligation unless the county is
not willing or cannot perform necessary work and time and personnel are
available to perpetuate known monuments.
7. In the event that the county does not have a county surveyor or the county
surveyor is not willing to perform the work, the Project Manager is responsible to
get a registered surveyor form the Deputy State Surveyor’s Office to set a
temporary witness to preserve the location of all existing land monuments during
construction and record such temporary witnesses in the project records.
8. After construction, permanent corner markers and witnesses can be established

to preserve the location of such monuments. Only existing monuments need to
be witnessed since lost or obliterated corners have no status unless their location
is established by a registered land surveyor. It is anticipated, however, that when
right-of-way is acquired, monuments will be found at all land corners since the
Right of Way Division is attempting to have the location of all lost or obliterated
corners established by the county surveyor or a deputy state surveyor before
construction is begun. In order to avoid confusion in the records, it is important
that the following instructions be carefully observed.
9. At some time before construction begins, the county surveyor, if available, should
be contacted to determine whether all land corners on the project have been
located and witnessed by permanent objects which are on record in his/her office.
If witnesses are shown in the plans, they should be compared with those on
record and any errors in the plans corrected. Information omitted from the plans
should be entered thereon. The witnesses can then be inspected in the field. If it
is found that any of the witnesses have been disturbed, or are within the limits of
construction, or are in locations where they cannot be protected during
construction operations, the county surveyor shall be requested to establish
additional witnesses in protected locations.
10. If the county surveyor neglects to set adequate witnesses or if a county surveyor
is not available and the witnesses shown in the plans have been disturbed or are
inadequate, the Project Manager will be responsible to get a registered land
surveyor to establish temporary witnesses to preserve the location of all existing
corner monuments. These witnesses shall be set in the same manner as that
later prescribed for establishing permanent witnesses, except that they may be
set in any protected location without specific relation to right-of-way lines.
11. During construction operations, existing stones or monuments shall not be

disturbed unless absolutely necessary. Should construction require disturbing a
stone or other government survey monument, the deputy state surveyor in the
Roadway Design Division should immediately be contacted before the stone is
disturbed. The procedure to be followed in this situation will vary with the situation
and the circumstances, however, the deputy state surveyor should be consulted
before a government land corner is destroyed. Original monuments which will be
under proposed embankments shall not be disturbed and every effort shall be
made to protect them during construction operations.
558
2002
12. If more than one monument is discovered for a land survey corner, the county
surveyor and the deputy state surveyor should be contacted so that he/she may
determine which marks the legal corner. In the event a county surveyor is not
available, both monuments should be witnessed and a detailed description of
each monument submitted to the Right of Way Division. In such instances, a
very careful examination should be made of the surrounding soil for evidence of
any deposit originally placed with the monument and charred stakes or pits and
mounds which may have existed when the corner was originally established.
These descriptions will be submitted to the state surveyor for a ruling as to which
monument marks the legal corner.
P. Perpetuation Of Section Corner Markers
1. After the work on the project is completed, permanent corner markers shall be
established. If a county surveyor has not been handling the work, the Project
Manager is responsible to schedule the deputy state surveyor to perpetuate
section corners using measurements from the temporary witness corners
previously set.
2. Permanent corner markers set by a registered land surveyor shall be ½ inch

(12.5 mm) or ¾ inch (19 mm) round steel bars at least 2 ft (600 mm) in length. If
monuments are set below paved surface, a hole will be dug each time a corner is
needed. Angle irons are also suitable. They shall be driven plumb to an elevation
6 inches (150 mm) below the road or ground surface. Corner markers in
bituminous pavement shall be driven to an elevation approximately 2 inches
(50 mm) below the surface and any depression filled with bituminous material.
3. Corner locations covered by concrete pavement shall be preserved by taking a

core and setting the marker in the core hole flush with the surface of the
pavement. The hole in the pavement shall be filled with concrete in the same
manner as other cores.
Q. Setting Witness Corners
1. Permanent witness corners to be set by the Project Manager shall be steel bars,
angle irons or old grader blades. Steel bars and angle irons shall be driven flush
with the ground surface and marked with an oak guide stake. Grader blades shall
be approximately 4 ft (1.2 m) in length and set with 2 ft (0.6 m) of the blade below
the ground surface. Witness points shall be set with a transit over the corner to
be witnessed. The horizontal distance between the corner marker and the
witness shall be measured and recorded. If right-of-way markers are in place,
they may be used as witness corners and the section corner tied to the near
corner of the right-of-way marker.
559
2002
2. Four witnesses shall be set for each section corner and for each subdivision
corner located at an intersection of the project and other roads or streets. They
shall be set on the Department right-of-way line not less than 5 ft (1.5 m), back of
the right-of-way lines of the intersecting roads or streets. Witnesses for section
corners not located at an intersection of the project with another road or street
shall be set on the Department right-of-way lines not less than 38 ft (11.6 m) (if
possible) from the intersecting landline.
c:\users\default\buddy.dgn Jan. 29, 1998 14:06:37
3. Two witnesses shall be set for each subdivision corner, except those located at
an intersection with another road or street. They shall be set on the Department
right-of-way lines at right angles to the land.
560
2002
c:\users\default\buddy.dgn Jan. 29, 1998 14:07:09
4. A “Section Corner Tie Sheet” DR-70 shall be prepared for each corner
perpetuated by the Project Manager. Three copies shall be submitted to the
Deputy State Surveyor by the Deputy State Surveyor employed by this
Department. The Deputy State Surveyor shall forward one of these copies to the
State Surveyor, and forward one to the county for their records. Signatures and
addresses of two local residents observing the perpetuation of the corner
markers and establishment of witnesses should be secured as witnesses. In the
event local residents are not present, signatures and permanent addresses of
other members of the party shall be secured as witnesses.
561
2002
R. Installation Of Right-Of-Way Markers
The Department’s right-of-way marker is international orange reinforced concrete block.

See SSHC Section 913.
S. Location Of Markers
1. Right-of-way markers shall be set accurately on the following points:
§ At each break in the right-of-way line.
§ At apparent intersections of railroad or county right-of-way line.
§ At beginning and end of each curve plus intermediate points on long

curves where necessary
§ At apparent intersection of government land lines.
§ At apparent intersection of street right-of-way lines.
§ At lot line intersections if lot corner was in place prior to construction.
§ Refer to Table 1300.4 for stake placement intervals.
2. Block corners at city street intersections must be referenced out if available. This
will simplify setting a pin on the apparent intersecting street right-of-way line and
projecting the new right-of-way line from street to street for proper location of
sidewalks or retaining walls.
T. Benchmarks
1. During construction of a highway project, many benchmarks may be destroyed

and alternate ones must be selected for future use. A permanent benchmark
should be established at approximately ½ mile (0.8 km) intervals along the
highway route in rural areas. Bridge abutments are good locations for permanent
benchmarks. Headwalls of culverts have also been a favorite place for
benchmark locations, but a certain amount of settlement may take place during
the first year in a new culvert and may result in erroneous benchmark elevations.
Best results can usually be obtained by establishing a benchmark circuit after
initial settlement has been completed, normally one year after construction. After
elevations are established on the new benchmarks, a DR Form 70 should be
completed and filed with the survey coordinator or the District office.
2. Utility poles, fence posts, ends of drainage pipes, and railroad rails should all be
avoided since these objects tend to be disturbed by frost, wind, and farming
operations. Casting of a permanent concrete monument within the right-of-way
appears to be the best solution in the absence of some other stable, permanent
object.
562
2002
3. Establishment of permanent benchmarks should be considered near the end of

every major grading and paving project. Monument location should be at the
direction of the Project Manager. Occasionally, the Project Manager will have
cast-in-place concrete monuments placed by contractor and paid by extra work
order. Standard brass shall be provided by the Project Manager to be set in
plastic concrete.
4. Locations for permanent benchmarks in urban areas include fire hydrants,
concrete sign bases, and other permanent objects. Interval of benchmarks
should be established at about one per city block.
U. Permanent Benchmarks Along Rural Highways
1. Permanent cast-in-place concrete benchmarks should be constructed using the
following guidelines. These should be considered minimum dimensions:
§ Excavate a 1 ft (300 mm) diameter hole 5 ft (1.5 m) deep.
§ Insert a #6 English (#20 metric) size diameter reinforcing bar in the center
of the excavation.
§ Place concrete around reinforcing bar to a depth of approximately

2 inches (50 mm) below ground elevation.
§ Finish concrete so surface is slightly rounded.
§ Insert a brass cap in center of plastic concrete.
2. Monument shall be tied to construction centerline by station and distance and

recorded on “as built” plans.
3. The DR Form 70 is required to report and describe all permanent benchmarks on
any construction project. “Bridge Plans” include details for placing benchmarks,
(brass caps), at bridge ends. (A district file with copies of these forms is
recommended.)
4. All permanent benchmarks must be tied into the highway reference system and
this information included on DR Form 70.
5. The benchmark’s DR Form 70 shall be sent to:

Roadway Design Division
Mr. Ken Hartwig, Preliminary Surveys
P.O. Box 94759
6. A district file of copies of these forms is also recommended.
7. A computer file of these permanent benchmarks will be maintained and the

highway reference post system will be used to identify the benchmarks.
563
2002
Taking Preconstruction Cross Sections
1300.04 TAKING PRECONSTRUCTION CROSS SECTIONS
A. Preliminary Survey Requirements: The designer and the District will work together to
determine the “Preliminary Survey Requirements”. The requirements can vary for each
project.
B. Preliminary Survey with Data Collector/GeoPak – When the preliminary survey is put in a
“Husky” or some other Data Collector and loaded in GeoPak, then preconstruction cross
sections can be taken mathematically at any plane.
C. Preconstruction Cross Sections. The preconstruction cross sections will, in most

cases, consist of additional and extended sections omitted from the preliminary survey.
Cross sections must be taken wherever necessary to show the true excavation quality.
Some of these points will include:
1. Zero sections between cut and fill.
2. P.C. and P.T. (T.S. and S.T.) of horizontal curves.
3. Points where width of side ditch and borrow changes.
4. Points where backslope changes.
5. Points where width of roadway changes in cut section.
6. Beginning and end of side borrow pits.
7. Extending preliminary cross sections where necessary.
D. Cross Section Accuracy. Cross sections shall be taken accurately, at right angles to the
centerline, at known locations so that final cross sections may be taken at the same
stations. Each section shall be an accurate profile of the ground at that location. The rod
shall be held vertically and the tape shall be read to the nearest 1 ft (300 mm) from the
centerline of the project. The rod shall be read to the nearest 1/10 foot (30 mm). All
sections shall be taken both left and right of centerline and shall extend at least 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the construction limits.
564
2002
CENTERLINE DESIGNATIONS
E. Preliminary Cross Sections Used to Compute Final Quantities. When final quantities are
to be computed in the field office and the preliminary cross sections are to be used as
the preconstruction sections, the Project Manager should request the plotted cross
sections by letter to the Construction Division. These cross sections should then be
carefully checked to determine that they are of sufficient width to cover the construction
limits. Preliminary cross sections are sometimes extended arbitrarily beyond the actual
cross section limits when the project is designed in the Lincoln Office.
F. Intersections. The Project Manager should take preconstruction cross sections on

intersections occurring in excavation sections. These cross sections shall be taken at
right angles to the intersecting road and may begin at the centerline of the project or at
the right-way-way line. In either case, they should “close” on a cross section taken at
right angles to the centerline of the project on each side of the intersecting road. The
notes should include a complete sketch showing the following:
1. The station of the intersecting road or approach road.
2. The location of the cross sections.
3. Ties to the project centerline and to the approach road line extended.
4. Angle of intersection.
5. North point.
565
2002
6. Station or plus of project cross sections on which intersecting road cross

sections are to “close”.
G. Other Excavation Areas – Channel changes and borrow pits that are not parallel to the
centerline of the project shall be cross sectioned separately and tied to the project
centerline in a manner similar to that described for intersections. Waste banks shall be
cross sectioned if overhaul is involved. They shall be tied to the project centerline and
haul routes shown.
H. Cross Section Notes. Notes on intersections, channels, approaches, etc., are usually
kept in a separate notebook. Cross section notes should be kept in a manner similar to
the example in Division III. Do not crowd the notes.
566
2002
Final Cross Sections and Final Quantities
1300.05 FINAL CROSS SECTIONS AND FINAL QUANTITIES
A. General
As a general rule, final cross sections are not required as long as the contractor has not
disputed the plan quantities and any correction made during construction and agreed to accept
the plan quantity as the final pay quantity.
B. Final Cross Section Guidance
When final cross sections must be taken, the following is provided as guidance:
1. Final cross sections may be taken on each 1 mile (1.7 km) as soon as the
grading work on that 1 mile (1.7 km) section has been completed and accepted.
Final cross sections may be taken while awaiting acceptance if the Project
Manager is sure there will be no further work which might change the elevation of
any excavation cross section.
2. Final cross sections must be taken at all points where a preconstruction or

preliminary cross section was taken, if excavation was made at that point. If it
develops that a final cross section must be taken at some plus station which has
no preconstruction cross section, a preconstuction section must be interpolated
at that point. The final cross section should extend well beyond the construction
limits [5 to 10 ft (1.5 to 3 m)]. A rod reading should always be taken on the first
definite “natural ground” and this information recorded in the notebook. In addition
the surveyor must locate all breaks in each cross section and the maximum
distance between shots in each cross section is 20-feet.
3. The excavation involved in undercutting slopes, ditches, borrow pits and

shoulders in preparing such areas for the placement of topsoil is not measured
for payment and final cross sections shall be taken after the topsoil has been
placed.
4. The Project Manager must clearly separate each borrow pit quantity from one
another. If the borrow pit is adjacent to the roadway excavation, the final cross
section notes must include a rod reading at the R.O.W. line (shear section) and
cross sections for the adjacent borrow pit must be separate from the roadway
cross sections and computed separately.
5. The option pit block on the plans should be stamped participating and at the end
of the detailed estimate breakdown of costs for each such borrow pit will appear.
The borrow material costs will be computed in the Lincoln Office. These
instructions are in addition to those required in Subsection 109.11, Paragraph V.
of this manual.
567
2002
6. On normal grading contracts, in which no changes in plans are made which

would involve overhaul, final cross sections will not be taken for sections which
include embankment only. However, when taking the final cross sections for
excavation, centerline and shoulder shots should be taken on the embankment at
each full station. At locations involving excavation only, or excavation and
embankment in the same location, final cross sections shall be taken as
necessary to include the excavation.
7. On linear grading contracts where the plans show a grade line elevation (not
county agreement projects), the Project Manager shall take a final cross section
at each station consisting of shots on centerline and each shoulder of the finished
roadway. This may be done at the time the final check is made on the roadway
surface to see that it meets the tolerance set forth in the specifications and/or
special provisions, and should be submitted as part of the final records. On
projects constructed under agreement by county forces, sufficient checks should
be made of the finished grade to substantiate conformance with plans,
specifications and special provisions.
8. Preconstruction surveys for rebalancing, or additional preconstruction cross

sections might be necessary to determine pay quantities. Changes in plan or
grade line which might involve overhaul cannot be anticipated during design or at
the start of work. It is essential that preconstruction information be complete, so
that if necessary, the final cross sections may be adjusted to reflect the existing
ground elevations at the start of the project if different from the original preliminary
cross sections.
9. When changes in plans involve overhaul, the final cross sections must include all
embankment as well as excavation for the balance that the overhaul has occurred
in. See Subsection 105.07 of this manual for additional instructions.
C. Earthwork Calculations
1. The final earthwork quantities on all in-house projects can be computed/verified

via Microsoft/GeoPak. The Finals Section of the Construction Division can assist
with or perform these calculations. However, the specific quantities and their
location are necessary to verify or calculate quantities. There are two basic ways
that projects are surveyed currently:
§ Total Stationing
§ Conventional Surveying
The Construction Division will convert conventional data to a Microsoft/GeoPak

file to accomplish any quantity calculations. The following are required when
requesting convention survey verification of quantities:
a. Final cross section notes
b H.I. data
568
2002
c. Curve data
d. Surfacing data
e. Preconstruction cross section notes
f. Zero-zero sections
g. Interpolated cross sections
h. Width of preconstruction (preliminary) cross sections
i. Preparation and submittal of records
2. Field Notebooks
a. Final Cross Section Notes – A special effort should be made to keep the
notes clear and legible. Do not crowd the notes. Not more than four
single line cross sections should be recorded on each page of a
4½ x 7½ inch (115 x 190 mm) field book. It is suggested that a 3H pencil
be used in taking notes.
b. Notes should be recorded with the stationing reading from the bottom of
the page to the top. If there is insufficient room for all readings on one line,
the readings should be completed on the next line. The station of each
line shall be shown. All shots must be recorded on the proper side of the
centerline. See Division III of this manual for example.
c. Rod readings shall be expressed in ± 1/10 foot (30 mm) on dirt. Surfacing
shots will be expressed in 1/100 foot (3 mm). Use a slightly elevated
decimal figure in lieu of a decimal point. All plus rod readings shall be
indicated by a plus symbol (+) preceding the reading. Horizontal
distances shall be recorded to the nearest 1 ft (300 mm).
d. A cross section shall be taken at all equations.
e. Final roadway cross sections may originate on either the right or left side
of centerline of the project. The cross section must have a centerline
(zero distance) rod reading. This also applies to borrow pits or channels
cross sectioned from a base (zero distance) line.
f. When it becomes necessary to take the final cross sections after

completion of the surfacing work, sufficient room shall be left by the note
recorder for inserting calculated rod readings. These rod readings will
reflect the elevation of the typical grading section shoulder-subgrade point.
569
2002
g. Don’t use any harder pencil than 3H. When the final earthwork
computation listing sheet is returned to the field, the correction notes are
to be reviewed thoroughly. All notes indicating further action are to be
addressed at the field office.
h. H.I. Data – The H.I. shall be shown on each page of notes near the
location of the centerline shots. When one cross section has been taken
from two or more H.I.’s, the portion of the section represented by each H.I.
shall be clearly indicated.
i. The Project Manager shall check the reduction of all H.I.’s with care. It is
essential that the following details be recorded:
(1) Six digits in the elevation shall be recorded for each H.I. entered in
the notes such as 1225.75 or 0925.87.
(2) If a correction in levels is made when “checking in “ or turning on a

benchmark, the correction shall be shown in the notes in the
following manner.
+5.20 0930.00 Correct to - B.M. Elev. 0924.80

^
-1.00 0924.75
0925.75
^
3. Curve Data – In order to permit the computation of corrections for curvature

electronically, it is essential for a cross section to be taken at each P.C. and P.T.,
for each P.C. and P.T. to be properly identified and the degree of curvature to be
shown in the notes for all simple curves. The direction of the curve shall be
shown as right or left. The degree of the curve shall be recorded to the nearest
hundredth of a degree (not degrees and minutes). The following example shows
the proper method of recording information for a 2º25’ simple curve to the left.
125 + 16.21 P.C. 2° 25’12” Curve 10² 106 113

Left
75 60 53
OG OG
The correction for a spiral curve is applied near the mid-points of the spiral
curvature. Accordingly, the cross section nearest the mid-points of spiral
curvature for curves with spiral easements shall be designated by the Project
Manager as the point to begin the curve correction.
570
2002
D. Surfacing Data
1. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement – The Project Manager should take

complete final cross sections after grading is complete prior to performing any
surfacing structure work. If cross sections are taken after the surfacing is
complete, the following three examples show where rod readings must be taken
to reflect the excavation due the contractor in each instance. The letter “S” which
indicates surfacing shall be placed under rod readings as shown in the examples.
If pavement thickness, foundation course and surfaced shoulders are constructed
other than as shown on the typical cross section of improvement sheet of the
plans or the station limits are changed from those shown on this plan sheet, this
information shall be shown in the notebook and also in the letter of transmittal.
571
2002
572
2002
2. Flexible Pavements (Asphaltic Concrete, Bituminous, and Base and Armour Coat
Surface Courses) – The Project Manager should take complete final cross
sections after grading is complete prior to surfacing and shoulder construction.
When cross sections are taken after the surfacing is complete, all rod readings
taken on the surfacing shall be identified with the letter “S” (indicating surfacing)
under the distance. If the surface structure is constructed other than as shown
on the typical cross section of the improvement sheet of the plans or the station
limits are changed from those shown on this plan sheet, this information shall be
shown in the notebook and also in the letter of transmittal. The following sketch
shows the rod readings and distances required on the roadway for a 7.3 m (24 ft)
asphaltic surface course constructed directly on the subgrade.
573
2002
3. Any rod readings, other than those shown in the above sketch, necessary to
show additional excavation required to be made in constructing variable width
surfacing shall be taken, recorded and identified by the letter “s” under the rod
reading. One such case would be at channelized intersections.
4. Rod readings beyond the shoulder will not be necessary in embankment

sections unless the elevation of the subgrade is below the grade line of the
existing embankment prior to grading (locations where the old embankment is
lowered or cored out to place a subbase or base course) or it is necessary to
accurately determine the quantity of embankment in order to compute overhaul.
5. The Project Manager will be responsible for inserting the shoulder rod readings
into the final cross sections.
6. Two (2) methods will be used to determine the shoulder point:
a. Slope Stake Data (preferred)
b. Theoretical Shoulder Point
(The Project Manager will state, in the transmittal letter, what method(s) was used
and where.)
574
2002
E. Shoulder Construction
1. On both rigid and flexible pavements, the quantity of material required for the earth
portion of the shoulder construction will usually be either subsidiary to the
subgrade preparation work or measured for payment as “Shoulder Construction”.
Accordingly, the excavation for the shouldering material is not a pay item. The
Project Manager should take complete final cross sections after grading is
complete and prior to surfacing and shoulder construction. If final cross sections
cannot be taken until shouldering is complete, the quantity of excavation for
shoulders should be deducted from the excavation pay quantity. If possible, this
deduction should be computed by cross section method of material at the source.
When it is not possible to cross section the material at the source, the volume
may be computed by using the typical section for shouldering and multiplying by a
balance factor of 1.35. If the typical cross section provided for the subgrade to be
graded “high” and the material trimmed is to provide the shoulder material, no
deduction is required.
2. Topsoil Placement – When the plans provide for topsoil placement as a part of
the grading construction, final cross sections should be taken after the topsoil has
been placed. This is in accordance with Subsection 929.04 of the specifications
which provides no payment for undercutting the topsoil placement.
F. Preconstruction Cross Section Notes
Where preconstruction cross section notes are taken to supplement or replace

preliminary cross sections, this fact shall be noted in the letter of transmittal. Give the
book and page number location of such notes. The letter of transmittal shall also contain
the book and page number location of all extensions to preconstruction and preliminary
cross sections.
G. Zero-Zero Sections
The location of zero areas for cut may be shown in the notes without taking a final cross
section when there is no cut whatever at the location. Examples: (1) Cut on Lt., C=00
Rt. take final cross section of Lt. (2) Cut on Rt., C=00 Lt. take final cross section on Rt.
(3) No Cut Rt. or Lt., C=00 Rt. or Lt., no final cross section is necessary.
H. Interpolated Cross Sections
Final cross sections for which a preliminary or preconstruction cross section is not
included in the original notes shall be identified by a note in the final cross section book
giving the location in the records where the interpolated cross section may be found. The
necessary interpolation shall be made by the Project Manager before submitting the note
to the Lincoln Office and shall consist of elevations and distances.
575
2002
I. Width Of Preliminary And Preconstruction Cross Sections
The Project Manager shall check the preliminary cross section notes, the “Slope Stake
Book” and his/her own preconstruction cross section notes to determine whether in all
instances these cross sections extend at least as far from centerline as the final cross
sections he/she has taken at the same locations. In instances where the preliminary or
preconstruction cross sections are not as wide as the final cross section, it will be
necessary to extend the preliminary cross section using other available information. This
will usually consist of reference hub elevations, slope stake elevations, or as a last resort,
the final cross section elevation. The data on which the closure is based shall be entered
in the final notes on the left-hand page opposite the inadequate cross section.
J. Example Of Note. The note should show the elevation and the distance from centerline
of the point to be used to extend the preliminary (preconstruction) cross section and the
manner in which it was established as shown in the following example.
17 Extd. Prelim. to El. 55.6 @ 90 m Lt. S.S. Bk. No. 4

+50 Extd. Prelim. to El. 55.0 @ 90 m Lt. Final Elev.
16 Extd. Prelim. to El. 54.4 @ 100 m Lt. S.S. Bk. No. 4
K. Extension Made Without Note. When no preliminary cross section extension note is
given by the Project Manager, the extension will be made by using the last final shot as
the last preliminary elevation and distance.
L. Preparation And Submittal of Records
The elevations of all H.I.’s should be reduced and carefully checked to insure their
accuracy.
1. The notes should not be reduced to show the elevations of the individual shots on
the cross sections except where necessary to check closing shots.
2. The closing shots of all final cross sections in excavated areas shall be checked
in the field office to verify closure with the preliminary survey. Cross sections
normally will be closed on undisturbed ground. However, this ground often is a
plowed field where 6-inch elevation differences are to be expected. Therefore the
Department’s tolerance on all cross section closures at or near the limits of
construction shall be + 6 inch (150 mm). Cross sections which do not close
within these limits shall be field checked or explained by an entry in the final notes.
If an error in the preliminary can be substantiated, for example, with slope stake
elevations, then an entry correcting the preliminary cross section elevations
should be placed in the final notes.
3. Notebooks shall be given a permanent number and completely indexed in the

front to show the location of all data included therein. The project number and the
name and address of the Project Manager shall be entered on the inside of the
front cover.
576
2002
4. Final cross section notebooks shall be prepared in accordance with these

instructions and submitted to the Construction Division. Projects up to
approximately 10 km long shall be submitted in their entirety. Projects over 10 km
may be submitted in two sections if this will speed up the processing of the final
records. If the preliminary notes are at the field office, those stations covered by
the final cross sections being submitted shall also be sent to the Construction
Division. Final notebooks will not be returned to the field unless specifically
requested by the Project Manager. The data submitted to the Construction
Division shall be addressed as follows:
Department of Roads
Construction Division – Finals Section
1500 Hwy 2
P.O. Box 94759
M. Plotting Cross Sections
1. Microstation/GeoPak may be used in lieu of hand calculations.
2. Final cross sections need to be plotted only on those projects not designed under
the computer program or those portions of projects (channels, borrow pits,
intersections, etc.) which are being computed in the field office.
3. For those projects computed in the field office, after checking all H.I.’s, the
preconstruction and final cross section notes are reduced and checked. The
points are then accurately plotted on cross section paper using a scale of
1 inch=5 ft (25 mm equals 1.5 m) vertically and 5 ft (1.5 m) horizontally, or 5 ft
(1.5 m) vertically and 10 ft (3.0 m) horizontally. All plotting should be checked by
reading the elevations and distances back form the cross section sheets.
Preconstruction cross sections shall not be inked.
4. The final cross sections for excavation only are plotted over the preliminary or the
preconstruction cross sections using the same coordinates and drawing in the
final with a dashed line.
577
2002
Contractor Furnished Construction Survey
1300.06 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
A. Construction Staking And Surveying As Contract Item. On projects with “Construction

Staking and Surveying” included as a contract item, the contractor is responsible for
construction staking. The prime contractor may subcontract this item.
B. Additional Survey Work Payment. Additional survey work required because of plan
revisions or changes directed by Project Manager shall be paid for as extra work
according to SSHC Subsection 109.05 or be done by the Department.
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities Include:
§ The Contractor’s Surveyor must comply with the minimum requirements in

Tables 1300.1 through 1300.5 and all other surveying requirements in this
manual.
§ Provide survey data in a format that is compatible with GeoPak.
§ Stake right-of-way, temporary easements, and right-of-entry reference.
§ Preserve and reestablish all centerline control points-point of curve (PC), point of
tangent (PT), point of intersection (PI), and point on tangent (POT); and all spirial
points (TS, SC, CS, and ST).
§ Establish relocation centerline and related points, including extensions of cross

sections, if not established in field by time of advertising for bids.
§ Staking culverts, bridges, sewers and all other structures and pavement
requirements.
§ Perform a level circuit to check benchmarks prior to start of construction. Report

the results of this survey to the PM immediately upon completion.
§ Stake right-of-way break points.
§ Establish permanent benchmarks and permanent ties to all required points. A

copy of all ties must be provided to the Project Manager.
§ Reestablish land corners and section corners. If this is pay item in the contract
then this is a contractor requirement.
•• Section corners are usually reestablished by the county.
•• In rural areas the property corners are usually not reestablished by a

registered land surveyor.
•• In urban areas property corners are reestablished by a registered land

surveyor and this is a separate pay item.
578
2002
Contractor Furnished Construction Survey
D. Department Responsibilities:
§ Take elevation reading of settlement plates.
§ Perform work identified in the special provisions of the contract.
E. Special Attention Items
1. The Project Manager should be notified and/or consulted for guidance if the
following conditions occur:
§ Proposed culvert is staked and its location does not fit existing ground
elevations.
§ Conflicting conditions occur such as existing water line located at same

location as the proposed sewer line.
§ Farm subdrains are present. Contractor will determine their location, size,
and elevation. The Project Manager will establish final size, location, and
elevation for construction of tile line to be staked by the contractor.
§ Slope stakes do not match design cross section.
F. Documentation
1. Field notes are to be kept in the bound field books. After project completion, field
books become the property of the Department.
G. Contract Administration
1. By Specification, “construction survey” is identified as a “specialty item.”
2. “Construction survey” is considered a professional service, therefore

Davis-Bacon requirements do not apply.
3. If survey work is performed by someone other than the contractor, a “Subcontract

Request and Approval” form shall be submitted. All requirements of
subcontractors are to be fulfilled with the exception of Davis-Bacon requirements.
579
2002
Engineering Equipment, Supplies and Services
1300.07 ENGINEERING EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES AND SERVICES
A. General
Engineering equipment and supplies are a significant annual expenditure of the

Department of Roads. It is Department policy to maintain equipment in reliable condition,
supplies in adequate amounts, and that expenditures be controlled. All employees are
expected to support this policy.
B. Responsibility
1. The employee is charged with full responsibility for the care of all equipment
issued to him/her. The employee should instruct assistants in the proper care
and handling of all equipment, particularly the more delicate equipment such as
transits, levels, balances, etc. When accepting responsibility for an instrument,
whether new or old, the person should inspect it carefully and make sure that it is
in good conditions and complete when received. When returning an instrument,
all missing or damaged parts should be reported.
2. The employee is held directly responsible for the loss or damage of equipment in
his/her charge caused by negligence or carelessness and may be required to pay
for repair or replacement of this equipment. Equipment when not in use should
be stored in a place where it is secure from damage or loss. When equipment is
left in an unattended automobile, the vehicle should be locked to prevent theft or
damage.
C. Engineering, Surveying And Testing Equipment
A supply of this equipment is maintained at Logistics. Equipment will be issued directly

to the employee as ordered and approved by the District Engineer or Division Head.
Equipment which is no longer needed should be returned to Logistics.
D. Requisition And Transfer
1. The following example cases are given to explain the procedures to be followed.
If your question is not answered, contact the Logistics Division.
Case I - Requests for Engineering, Surveying and Testing Equipment listed in the
Department’s Statewide Inventory System (SWIS) and included in the Supply
Catalog in Class 59, are non-stocked items and must be budgeted by districts
and purchased by the Logistics Division, Engineering Equipment Section.
Case II - Requests for Engineering, Surveying and Testing Equipment not listed
on the Department’s SWIS and included in the Supply Catalog in classes other
than Class 59 will be ordered on a DR Form 146, Stock Requisition. Equipment
not included in the Supply Catalog will be purchased on a DR Form 151,
Purchase Order. It will be coded in the District/Division ONE and Activity 5099.
580
2002
Case III – Material Sampling and Other Miscellaneous Supplies, sacks, cans,
molds, lath, stakes, nails, field books, cloth, etc. included in the Supply Catalog
will require a DR Form 146, Stock Requisition. Items not included in the Supply
Catalog will require a DR Form 151, Purchase Order. These are “direct
purchase” items and are to be charged to specific projects. “O” for participating,
“I” for nonparticipating, the OE code for your District/Division and the appropriate
activity (Constructing, Design, etc.).
Case IV – Office Supplies, Safety Gear and Medical Supplies included in the
Supply Catalog will require a DR Form 146, Stock Requisition. Items not included
in the Supply Catalog will require a DR Form 151, Purchase Order. These items
are not “direct purchase” items and are to be charged to OE code for your
District/Division and Activity 5099. Safety equipment is coded to AFE Y500.
Case V- Transfers of Engineering, Surveying and Testing Equipment listed on the

Department’s SWIS between Divisions, Districts or returned to Logistics will be
documented on DR Form 332, Furniture and Equipment Issue/Transfer. A DR
Form 332 must accompany the equipment transferred. Logistics Division will
always receive the original. The transferee, transferor and the Districts or
Divisions will all receive copies. The transferee is responsible for submitting this
form.
Case VI – Transfer of Engineering, Surveying and Testing Equipment not listed

on the Department’s SWIS and in classes other than 59 to Logistics will require a
DR Form 147 for cataloged equipment and a DR Form 147a for non-cataloged
equipment. A copy of the form will accompany the equipment. OE code for your
District/Division and Activity 5099 will be used.
2. All forms except the copies required to accompany the equipment will be routed
through the District/Division Office and then to the Logistics Division.
E. Precautions And Maintenance Of Survey Equipment
1. Total Stations (Precautions)
a. Never place the Total Stations directly on the ground. Avoid damaging the
tripod head and centering screw with sand or dust.
b. Do not aim the telescope at the sun. Avoid damaging the LED of the
EDM.
c. Protect the Total Stations with an umbrella against direct sunlight,

precipitation, and humidity.
d. Never carry the Total Station on the tripod to another site.
e. Handle the Total Stations with care. Avoid heavy shocks or vibration.
f. Always switch the power off before removing the standard battery.
581
2002
g. Remove the standard battery from the Total Station before putting it in the
case.
h. When the Total Station is placed in the carrying case, follow the layout
plan.
i. Make sure that the Total Stations and the protective lining of the carrying
case are dry before closing the case. The case is hermetically sealed
and if moisture is trapped inside, damage to the instrument could occur.
j. Someone should always be near the instruments when it is set up in the

roadway or in any other location where it may be disturbed.
F. Total Stations (Maintenance)
1. Wipe off moisture completely if the instrument gets wet during survey work.
2. Always clean the instrument before returning it to the case. The lens requires
special care. Dust it off with the lens brush first, to remove minute particles.
Then after providing a little condensation by breathing on this, wipe it with a soft
clean cloth or lens tissue.
3. Do not wipe the displays and keyboard or carrying case with an organic solvent.
4. Store Total Stations in a dry room where the temperature remains fairly constant.
5. If the battery is discharged excessively, its life may be shortened. If it is stored, it

should have somewhat of a charge in it.
6. Check the tripod for loose fit and loose screws.
7. When removing the Total Stations from the carrying case, never pull it out by
force. The empty carrying case should be closed to protect it from moisture.
8. Check the Total Stations for proper adjustment periodically to maintain the
instrument accuracy.
G. Electronic Digital Theodolite/Transit (Precautions)
1. When the theodolite/transit is not used for a long time, check it at least once every
three months.
2. Handle the theodolite/transit with care. Avoid heavy shocks or vibration.
3. If any problems are found with the rotatable portion, screws or optical parts (e.g.,
lens) send it in to the Engineering Equipment Shop.
582
2002
4. After removing the theodolite/transit from the carrying case, close the case to
exclude dust and moisture. Never place the theodolite/transit directly on the
ground. (Attached dirt may damage the base plate and centering screw.)
5. Never carry the theodolite/transit on the tripod to another site.
6. Protect the theodolite/transit with an umbrella against strong sunlight and

precipitation of any kind.
7. When the operator leaves the theodolite/transit, the vinyl cover should be placed
over the instrument.
8. Always switch the power off before removing the internal battery on the theodolite.
9. Make sure the theodolite/transit and the protective lining of the carrying case are
dry before closing the case. (The case is hermetically sealed; if moisture is
trapped inside, damage to the instrument could occur.)
10. Someone should always be near the instrument when it is set up in the roadway
or in any other location where it may be disturbed.
H. Electronic Digital Theodolite/Transit (Maintenance)
1. Wipe off any moisture if the instrument gets wet during operation.
2. Always clean the instrument before returning it to its case. The lens requires
special care. Dust it off with the lens brush first, to remove minute particles.
Then, after providing a little condensation by breathing on the lens, wipe it with a
soft, clean cloth or lens tissue. (Theodolite only) when cleaning the display,
keyboard and carrying case, never use any organic solvent (e.g., thinners).
3. Store the instrument in a dry room where the temperature remains fairly constant.
4. Check the tripod for loose fitting and loose screws.
I. Survey Levels (General Precautions)
1. Be sure to carry the instrument to the job site in the plastic case.
2. Handle with care.
3. Do not place the instrument directly on the ground.
4. After taking the instrument and accessories out of the plastic case, be sure to
close the case cover to keep out dust and dirt.
583
2002
5. Use both hands to hold the instrument when carrying it at the job site. Remember
that when moving the instrument form one job site to another, it must be removed
from the tripod for transporting.
6. If the instrument is left mounted on the tripod for any length of time, cap the
objective lens and cover the entire instrument with the vinyl cover.
7. Be careful not to expose the instrument to direct sunlight and precipitation. If it

gets wet, wipe it with a dry cloth before putting it back in the plastic case.
8. Store the accessories in the specified places in the case.
9. Use neutral cleanser or water to clean up the plastic case.
10. Someone should always be near the instrument when it is set up in the roadway
or in any other location where it may be disturbed.
J. Survey Levels (Maintenance)
1. Moisture affects the surveying instrument. Completely wipe off any moisture if the
instrument gets wet during surveying work.
2. After use, clean every part of the instrument before putting it back in the case.
Breathe on the lens to moisten them and gently clean then with a lens cloth, a
clean cloth (preferable, worn out cotton), or soft tissue paper.
3. The tripod shoes may become loose or the legs may become shaky due to faulty
wing nuts when used for a long period. Check them periodically.
4. If foreign matter appears to have entered any movable parts or screws or when
condensation or fungi appears on the lens, prisms, etc., in the telescope, put on
work order and send in to Engineering Equipment Shop.
5. It is recommended to subject the instrument to annual or semi-annual checking

and inspection to maintain the high quality necessary for your surveying work.
K. Adjustment Of Instruments
1. All instruments issued to Project Managers should be in proper adjustment when

received from the Lincoln Office. They should, however, be checked for accuracy
and necessary adjustments made at regular intervals. Adjustments should be
made only by the Project Manager or a qualified member of the party who had
been authorized by the Project Manager to perform such work. All adjustments
should be carefully made strictly in accordance with methods prescribed in
surveying handbooks. Any adjustment which requires dismantling must be made
in the Lincoln repair shop.
2. All Total Station adjustments should be made in the Lincoln repair shop.
584
2002
L. Transporting Equipment
1. Surveying equipment should be loaded into cars or trucks in such a manner as to

minimize the possibility of damage. Leveling rods, range poles, etc., are easily
damaged by rubbing or scratching against other objects. It is suggested that a
holder be installed on the car for each of these articles. Level rods should be kept
in a canvas case which may be ordered from Logistics.
2. Transits and levels should be carried in their cases when being transported by
car or truck over any appreciable distance. It is good practice to provide a special
protected holder within the vehicle for these cases. Instruments may be carried
out of case over short distances if carefully held in someone’s lap.
3. Equipment shall be placed in or on vehicles in the most “safe” position both for
the equipment and for the operator and passengers of the vehicle. Employees
are encouraged to conceive safe methods of transporting equipment. Any
alterations, etc., to the vehicle must be made only with the approval of the District
Mechanic.
M. Damaged Equipment
1. All damaged equipment listed in the Department’s Statewide Inventory System

missing (lost or stolen) is to be reported on DR Form 159.
2. Damaged equipment, especially surveying instruments, should not be used or

motions tested to determine the extent of damage until it has been inspected in
the Lincoln repair shop. This precaution is necessary for the reason that all
damage to the instrument may not be visible. For example, after an instrument
has had a fall, the delicate graduated edges of the plates may be seriously
damaged by the slightest movement of the plates.
3. All damaged equipment, together with all worn or broken parts, should be
promptly shipped to the Logistics Division for repair. Equipment returned to the
Logistics Division for repair, adjustment or exchange must be accompanied by
DR Form 124, Shop Work Orders. The action desired must be described on this
form. The appropriate OE and Activity Coding shall be shown.
N. Shipping
1. If at any time it becomes necessary to ship an instrument, it should be packed

securely in its case and arrangements shall be made through the District
Construction Engineer for the transfer of the instrument to Lincoln. Total stations
and electronic theodolites should be by truck or car and not be shipped.
2. Other equipment shall be carefully packed in the cases provided for that purpose.
If cases are not provided, the equipment should be packed in a box or carton of
ample strength for protection during shipment. All equipment should be sent to
Lincoln in the same manner as transits and levels.
585
2002
O. Care of Equipment
1. Cloth tapes, pie-tins and other items of similar nature are considered to be
expendable equipment for the reason that they depreciate rather rapidly with
normal use. The fact that these items are expendable does not relieve the
employees of the responsibility for their proper care and conservation.
2. Rods and range poles shall be carried in protective coverings or in holders which
prevent marring and scratching. To avoid breakage, they should never be used
for any purpose except that for which they are designed.
3. Chains are easily damages by kinking and by the action of traffic. When practical,
a cloth tape should be used instead of a chain, especially if measurements are
being made across the line of traffic. When wet or muddy, chains should be
cleaned and dried before rolling. They should be cleaned, oiled and inspected
occasionally and all kinks removed by hammering on a flat wood surface. Splices
are available for use in repairing broken chains.
P. Salvage Of Equipment
1. Marred, broken or worn rods and range poles, badly kinked or broken chains, cut
or torn cloth tapes, etc., shall be returned to the Engineering Equipment Repair
Section for painting, repair or salvage. Many other items of equipment, usually
considered expendable, may often be reconditioned for further use. District
Construction Engineers should make periodic checks with Project Managers
having such equipment. All broken or salvage equipment should be assembled at
the District Headquarters Office and sent to the Engineering Equipment Repair
Section using state transportation. The following items of equipment are
considered to have salvage value:
Cylinder molds Paving station numbers

Level rods Stoves (gasoline and electric)
Range poles Tapes, 100 ft, 200 ft, 300 ft [30 m, 60m, 90 m] steel
Sieves Tapes, 50 ft (15 m) filler
Tapes, 50 ft (15 m) steel, case
2. Also, any other broken or damaged equipment which the Project Manager
believes has salvage value.
Q. Supplies
1. The Department policy is to have central procurement of supplies. The Supply

Catalog lists the items usually stocked. The Supply Catalog can be accessed via
computer terminal. Items not listed in the Supply Catalog may be ordered on
DR Form 151, “Purchase Order”. Be sure and list adequate description of the
item desired.
586
2002
2. The Project Manager shall prepare a stock requisition DR Form 146 for such
office and field supplies as may be required for a reasonable length of time.
Additional stock requisitions may be submitted as field supplies are depleted. The
carrying of large quantities of supplies in the field office should be avoided.
R. Stakes
Construction stakes are stored at the Department’s supply base in Lincoln. The following
types of stakes are available and are listed in the Supply Catalog.
Class Stock No. Type Dimensions Package General Use

d
58 85700 “A” Oak 1” x 2” x 18” 50 Reference Stake; Blue Top
58 85705 “A” Oak 1” x 2” x 12” 50 Reference Stake; Blue Top
58 85712 “B” Oak 2” x 2” x 9” 50 Pavement Hub; Location Hub
58 85740 “C” Pine 1” x 2” x 16” 50 Reference Stake; Blue Top
58 85730 “D” Pine ½” x 2” x 16” 100 Lath; reference, guard and ROW
stakes
58 85720 “E” Oak 2” x 2” x 20” 25 Reference Hub
58 09700 Lath ½” x 2” x 36” 50 Reference Stake; Lath
S. Local Purchase Of Services
Local services shall be processed for payment by the Project Manager by coding
attachments and by indicating his/her approval signing and dating the bill. Coding
attachments are DR Form 160 for all services except telephone bills and DR Form 57 for
telephone bills. Chapter 4 of the accounting and DOR-1 80-9 should be reviewed.
T. Equipment Inventory
Equipment listed in the Department’s Statewide Inventory System will be inventoried

when requested by Logistics. The internal control and inventory of equipment not listed
will be established by the District/Division.
U. Non-NDOR Equipment Calibration Policy
1. Highway Construction Work
This policy is applicable to all non-NDOR equipment used for the inspection of
highway construction work under the jurisdiction of the Nebraska Department of
Roads.
a. NDOR will not provide calibration services for consultants, contractors, or

other testing firms performing inspection work; however, the calibration
must be performed by a commercial laboratory or business.
587
2002
b. All equipment shall be calibrated at least annually and at any other time
when the results of tests are questionable or unreliable. (With the
development of Nebraska’s Quality Assurance Program for Construction,
a set calibration schedule will be implemented for the various types of
inspection equipment. This calibration schedule may be other than
annual.)
c. A “Certificate of Calibration” shall be available for inspection by NDOR

personnel at any time. The “Certificate of Calibration” shall provide, at a
minimum, the following information:
§ Serial number or identification number of the equipment.

§ Date of calibration.
§ Results of the calibration.
§ Name of the laboratory or company performing the calibration.
d. NDOR inspection personnel have the right to verify the calibration of any
inspection equipment owned by a consultant, contractor, or other testing
firm by performing an independent calibration check. The decision to
perform an independent calibration check rests solely with NDOR
personnel and will not be performed on a request basis.
588
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
589
2002
Chapter Notes
CHAPTER NOTES:
590
2002
APPENDIX 1 - NDR FORMS
GENERAL ADMINISTRATION FORMS
DR 124 Shop Work Order .......................................................................................1 - 5

DR 146 Stock Requisition .......................................................................................1 - 6
DR 147a Stock Returned For Credit..........................................................................1 - 7
DR 151 Purchase Order..........................................................................................1 - 8
DR 159 Allowable Equipment Inventory Missing (Lost or Stolen) Damage Report ..1 - 9
DR 329 Imprest Inventory Adjustment.....................................................................1 - 10
DR 332 Furniture and Equipment Issue/Transfer Document ...................................1 - 11
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION FORMS
DR 16 Contract Time Extension Document ...........................................................1 - 13

DR 42 Field Approval of Subcontract Work ...........................................................1 - 14
DR 44 Summary and Distribution of Costs ............................................................1 - 15
DR 58 Force Account Agreement..........................................................................1 - 16
@ DR 74 Cost Overrun/Underrun Notification............................................................1 - 16a
DR 84 Record of Contractor Payrolls Received.....................................................1 - 17
@ DR 87 Safety Inspection Checklist ........................................................................1 - 18
DR 90 Flagger Certification ...................................................................................1 - 20
DR 91 Notification of Project Completion...............................................................1 - 21
DR 96 Inspectors Working Day Report..................................................................1 - 22
DR 98 Report of Labor Compliance Inquiries ........................................................1 - 24
DR 188 Work Order ................................................................................................1 - 25
@ DR 203 DBE Performance Record ..........................................................................1 - 26
DR 204 Weekly Force Account Statement ..............................................................1 - 27
@ DR 289 298 Special Training Provision Monthly On-the-Job Training Report.................1 - 28
DR 344 Evaluation of Contractor.............................................................................1 - 29
DR 439 EEO Contractor's Self-Analysis ..................................................................1 - 30
DR 441 Identification of DBE Goal Achievement .....................................................1 - 34
DR 442 Identification of Work Performed ................................................................1 - 35
Contractor EEO Compliance Record
Appendix 1 - 1
EARTHWORK FORMS
DR 8 Water Applied Haul Sheet ................................ ................................ ......... 1 - 37

DR23 Moisture Density Relations of Soils................................ ............................ 1 - 38
DR 64 Site Release ................................ ................................ .............................. 1 - 39
DR 86 Weekly Report of Moisture ad Density Tests (or Computer Printout) ......... 1 - 40
DR 99 Earthwork Computations ................................ ................................ ........... 1 – 41
DR 101 Truck Capacity Computations................................ ................................ .... 1 - 42
DR 210 Moisture Density Test ................................ ................................ ................ 1 - 43
DR 232 Final Status Material and Site Releases ................................ .................... 1 - 44
DR 264 Field Gradation Tests of Gravel For... ................................ ........................ 1 - 45
DR 309A,B,C Contractor's Estimate (Fuel Adjustment Computations) ............................. 1 - 46
DR 324 Source of Aggregate to be Used................................ ................................ 1 - 51
DR 348 Material Pit Contract Release ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 52
DR 478 Nuclear Density Record ................................ ................................ ............. 1 - 53
LIGHTING, SIGNS & TRAFFIC CONTROL FORMS
DR 502 Construction Signs and Posts ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 55
ASPHALT FORMS
DR 29 Daily Summary of Scale Weights ................................ ............................... 1 - 57

DR 62 Weight Ticket................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 58
DR 173 Test and Pay Factor Summary ................................ ................................ .. 1 - 59
DR 193 Transfer of Asphaltic Material ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 60
DR 194 Pavement Profile Measurements Using a California-Type Profilograph ..... 1 - 61
DR 418 Asphaltic Aggregate Design (Computer Generated Replacement) ............ 1 - 62
PCC PAVEMENT FORMS
DR 45 Concrete Proportioning and Cylinder Identification Report ......................... 1 - 64

DR 85 Daily Report of Concrete Pavement Laid ................................ ................... 1 - 65
DR 478 Low Slump/High Density Concrete Nuclear Density Record ...................... 1 - 66
BRIDGES, CULVERT & RELATED STRUCTURE FORMS
DR 24 Driveway Drainage Structures ................................ ................................ ... 1 - 68

DR 97 Pile Record................................ ................................ ................................ 1 - 69
DR 175 Reinforcing Steel Sample Identification Report ................................ .......... 1 - 70
DR 214 Report of Shipment of Prestressed and/or Precast Concrete Units From
Tested Stock ................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 71
@ RDP 50/504 Girder Shims ................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 72
Appendix 1 - 2
ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT FORMS
DR 61 Project Seeding Record ................................ ................................ ............. 1 - 75

DR 125 Fertilizer Certification ................................ ................................ ................. 1 - 76
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION FORMS
DR 5 Operation and Equipment Rental Agreement ................................ ............ 1 - 78

DR 195 Guardrail................................ ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 79
DR 247 Report of Shipment of Precast Concrete Right-of-Way Markers from
Approved Stock ................................ ................................ ......................... 1 - 80
DR 284 Report of Shipment of _________ Guardrail and/or Fittings ...................... 1 - 81
MATERIALS FORMS
DR 12 Sample Identification Form ................................ ................................ ........ 1 - 83

DR 181 Letter of Certification by Project Manager ................................ .................. 1 - 84
@ DR 274 Test Status Report................................ ................................ ..................... 1 - 85
Appendix 1 - 3
GENERAL ADMINISTRATION FORMS
DR 124 Shop Work Order ................................ ................................ ....................... 1 - 5

DR 146 Stock Requisition ................................ ................................ ....................... 1 - 6
DR 147a Stock Returned For Credit ................................ ................................ ......... 1 - 7
DR 151 Purchase Order ................................ ................................ ......................... 1 - 8
DR 159 Allowable Equipment Inventory Missing (Lost or Stolen) Damage Report.. 1 - 9
DR 329 Imprest Inventory Adjustment ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 10
DR 332 Furniture and Equipment Issue/Transfer Document ................................ ... 1 - 11
Appendix 1 - 4
Appendix 1 - 5
Appendix 1 - 6
Appendix 1 - 7
Appendix 1 - 8
Appendix 1 - 9
Appendix 1 - 10
Appendix 1 - 11
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION FORMS
DR 16 Contract Time Extension Document ................................ .......................... 1 - 13

DR 42 Field Approval of Subcontract Work ................................ ........................... 1 - 14
DR 44 Summary and Distribution of Costs ................................ ............................ 1 - 15
DR 58 Force Account Agreement ................................ ................................ ......... 1 - 16
DR 84 Record of Contractor Payrolls Received ................................ .................... 1 - 17
DR 87 Safety Inspection Checklist ................................ ................................ ........ 1 - 18
DR 90 Flagger Certification ................................ ................................ .................. 1 - 20
DR 91 Notification of Project Completion ................................ .............................. 1 - 21
DR 96 Inspectors Working Day Report ................................ ................................ . 1 - 22
DR 98 Report of Labor Compliance Interviews ................................ ..................... 1 - 24
DR 188 Work Order ................................ ................................ ................................ 1 - 25
DR 203 DBE Performance Record ................................ ................................ ......... 1 - 26
DR 204 Weekly Force Account Statement ................................ .............................. 1 - 27
DR 289 Special Training Provision Monthly On-the-Job Training Report ................ 1 - 28
DR 344 Evaluation of Contractor ................................ ................................ ............ 1 – 29
DR 439 EEO Contractor's Self-Analysis ................................ ................................ . 1 - 30
DR 441 Identification of DBE Goal Achievement ................................ .................... 1 - 34
DR 442 Identification of Work Performed ................................ ................................ 1 - 35
Contractor EEO Compliance Record
Appendix 1 - 12
Appendix 1 - 13
Appendix 1 - 14
Appendix 1 - 15
Appendix 1 - 16
@ Date:
Cost Overrun/Underrun Notification 1-5-2001
This form is to be prepared by the Project Manager and submitted to the Controller
Division in accordance with the instructions printed in the Construction Manual. Overrun Underrun
Project No.: Location: Control No.:
F-2-7(106) Nebraska City East 12345
Contractor: Contractor No.: Letting Date: 10/21/99
ABC Construction 9876 Contract No.: 1345X
Group Item of Work Quantity Units Unit Price Amount
1 Excavation of Unsuitable Material 25,000.00 Cu Yds $3.17 $79,250.00

4 Granular Material for Bedding 26.00 Tons $40.00 $1,040.00
3 8” Concrete Paving -1,395.00 Sq Yds $21.16 ($29,518.20)
3 9” Concrete Paving 1,395.00 Sq Yds $23.59 $32,908.05
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
$ $0.00
Net Change this Report è $83,679.85
Brief explanation of reason for Overrun / Underrun:
The marshy area shown on the plans was found to extend approximately 800 feet further than anticipated
(Station 60+00 and 68+00). The construction of a 48” pipe in the area was revised to be bedded with crushed
rock.
The pavement at several locations was changed from 8” PCC to 9” PCC using contract items for each to
accommodate heavy trucks.
Prepared by: Date:

Jack Frost, Project Manager 1/5/01
Approved by: (Construction Engineer) Date:
Controller will obtain proper approval
Signature: (Deputy Director for Engineering) – If over $150,000 Date:
Approval signatures not required for underruns.

DR Form 74, Dec 00/unique file name
Appendix 1 - 16a
Appendix 1 - 17
@
Appendix 1 - 18
@
possible violation, at any time the Project Manager or the designated representative believes a possible
violation exists.
Appendix 1 - 19
Appendix 1 - 20
Appendix 1 - 21
Appendix 1 - 22
Appendix 1 - 23
Appendix 1 - 24
Appendix 1 - 25
@
Appendix 1 - 26
Appendix 1 - 27
Appendix 1 - 28
Appendix 1 - 29
Appendix 1 - 30
Appendix 1 - 31
Appendix 1 - 32
Appendix 1 - 33
Appendix 1 - 34
Appendix 1 - 35
EARTHWORK FORMS
DR 8 Water Applied Haul Sheet ................................ ................................ ......... 1 - 37

DR23 Moisture Density Relations of Soils................................ ............................ 1 - 38
DR 64 Site Release ................................ ................................ .............................. 1 - 39
DR 86 Weekly Report of Moisture ad Density Tests (or Computer Printout) ......... 1 - 40
DR 99 Earthwork Computations ................................ ................................ ........... 1 - 41
DR 101 Truck Capacity Computations ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 42
DR 210 Moisture Density Test ................................ ................................ ................ 1 - 43
DR 232 Final Status Material and Site Releases ................................ .................... 1 - 44
DR 264 Field Gradation Tests of Gravel For... ................................ ........................ 1 - 45
DR 309A,B,C Contractor's Estimate (Fuel Adjustment Computations) ............................. 1 - 46
DR 324 Source of Aggregate to be Used ................................ ................................ 1 - 51
DR 348 Material Pit Contract Release ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 52
DR 478 Nuclear Density Record ................................ ................................ ............. 1 - 53
Appendix 1 - 36
Appendix 1 - 37
Appendix 1 - 38
Appendix 1 - 39
Appendix 1 - 40
Appendix 1 - 41
Appendix 1 - 42
Appendix 1 - 43
Appendix 1 - 44
Appendix 1 - 45
Appendix 1 - 46
Appendix 1 - 47
Appendix 1 - 48
Appendix 1 - 49
Appendix 1 - 50
Appendix 1 - 51
Appendix 1 - 52
Appendix 1 - 53
LIGHTING, SIGNS & TRAFFIC CONTROL FORMS
DR 502 Construction Signs and Posts ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 55
Appendix 1 - 54
Appendix 1 - 55
ASPHALT FORMS
DR 29 Daily Summary of Scale Weights ................................ ............................... 1 - 57

DR 62 Weight Ticket ................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 58
DR 173 Test and Pay Factor Summary ................................ ................................ .. 1 - 59
DR 193 Transfer of Asphaltic Material ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 60
DR 194 Pavement Profile Measurements Using a California-Type Profilograph ..... 1 - 61
DR 418 Asphaltic Aggregate Design (Computer Generated Replacement) ............ 1 - 62
Appendix 1 - 56
Appendix 1 - 57
Appendix 1 - 58
Appendix 1 - 59
Appendix 1 - 60
Appendix 1 - 61
Appendix 1 - 62
PCC PAVEMENT FORMS
DR 45 Concrete Proportioning and Cylinder Identificatio n Report......................... 1 - 64

DR 85 Daily Report of Concrete Pavement Laid ................................ ................... 1 - 65
DR 478 Low Slump/High Density Concrete Nuclear Density Record ...................... 1 - 66
Appendix 1 - 63
Appendix 1 - 64
Appendix 1 - 65
Appendix 1 - 66
BRIDGES, CULVERT & RELATED STRUCTURE FORMS
DR 24 Driveway Drainage Structures ................................ ................................ ... 1 - 68

DR 97 Pile Record................................ ................................ ................................ 1 - 69
DR 175 Reinforcing Steel Sample Identification Report ................................ .......... 1 - 70
DR 214 Report of Shipment of Prestressed and/or Precast Concrete Units From
Tested Stock ................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 71
RDP Girder Shims ................................ ................................ ............................. 1 - 72
Appendix 1 - 67
Appendix 1 - 68
Appendix 1 - 69
Appendix 1 - 70
Appendix 1 - 71
Appendix 1 - 72
Appendix 1 - 73
ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT FORMS
DR 61 Project Seeding Record................................ ................................ ............. 1 - 75

DR 125 Fertilizer Certification ................................ ................................ ................. 1 - 76
Appendix 1 - 74
Appendix 1 - 75
Appendix 1 - 76
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION FORMS
DR 5 Operation and Equipment Rental Agreement ................................ ............ 1 - 78

DR 195 Guardrail................................ ................................ ................................ .... 1 - 79
DR 247 Report of Shipment of Precast Concrete Right-of-Way Markers from
Approved Stock ................................ ................................ ......................... 1 - 80
DR 284 Report of Shipment of _________ Guardrail and/or Fittings ...................... 1 - 81
Appendix 1 - 77
Appendix 1 - 78
Appendix 1 - 79
Appendix 1 - 80
Appendix 1 - 81
MATERIALS FORMS
DR 12 Sample Identification Form ................................ ................................ ........ 1 - 83

DR 181 Letter of Certification by Project Manager ................................ .................. 1 - 84
DR 274 Test Status Report................................ ................................ ..................... 1 - 85
Appendix 1 - 82
Appendix 1 - 83
Appendix 1 - 84
TEST STATUS REPORT
MATERIALS & TESTS DIVISION
@
To John Plow (Project Manager) Project No. F-81-1(1018)
Location I-80
April 2, 1996 – Second Notice
Date February 13, 1996 – First Notice Contractor Cyclone Construction
The following summary shows the status of test data in the files on this date for the above project. Possibly some of
the missing tests have been completed but not yet reported. Some of the test data may have been lost, or the
materials may be represented by tests on other state work. Would you please review your files and send us copies of
the missing reports, or advise us of any pertinent information which you might have regarding these tests.
Need reports for the following items:

fasteners & reflectors for Type 1 delineators
5’chain link fence – 200 lineal feet
posts
std steel pipe
fittings & hardware
tie wire
pull box type PB-5 – 20 required 1) Rhonda Hergenrader, Materials &
Tests Division, sends this form out
traffic signals, Types:
TS-1 – 30 required 2) First Notice to Project Manager is
E-Mailed thru Office Vision
TS-1LL – 4 required
TS-1A – 4 required
pedestrian signal, type PS-1 – 16 required
pedestrian push button, PPB – 4 required
power installed foundations
luminaires types:
UD-200 – 4 required
HPS – 20 required
Conduits types:
2” PVC
3” PVC
2” PVC augered
2” on bridge
cc: District Engineer

District Construction Engineer
DR Form 274, Jan 82 THIS FORM REPLACES DR FORM 274, AUG 73,
PREVIOUS EDITIONS WILL BE USED.
Appendix 1 - 85
APPENDIX 2 - FEDERAL FORMS
FORM FHWA-47 Statement of Materials and Labor Used by Contractors ..... 2 - 2

on Highway Construction Involving Federal Funds
FORM WH-348 Statement of Compliance + Outline of Labor ..................... 2 - 3

Requirements
FORM FHWA 1022 Notice ................................ ................................ ................. 2 - 10
FORM FHWA-1391 Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractor's Annual ..... 2 - 11

EEO Report
STANDARD FORM 1444 Request for Authorization of Additional Classification ........ 2 - 12

and Rate
LIST Standard Labor Classifications and Descriptions for .......... 2 - 13

Highway Construction
FORM FHWA-1495 Wage Rate Information Federal-Aid Highway Project ......... 2 - 21
POSTER EEO is the Law................................ ................................ ... 2 - 22
POSTER Federal Minimum Way................................ ........................ 2 - 23
POSTER Employee Polograph Protection Act ................................ ... 2 - 24
POSTER Family & Medical Leave................................ ...................... 2 - 25
Appendix 2 - 1
Appendix 2 - 2
Appendix 2 - 3
Appendix 2 - 4
Appendix 2 - 5
Appendix 2 - 6
Appendix 2 - 7
Appendix 2 - 8
Appendix 2 - 9
Appendix 2 - 10
Appendix 2 - 11
Appendix 2 - 12
Appendix 2 - 13
Appendix 2 - 14
Appendix 2 - 15
Appendix 2 - 16
Appendix 2 - 17
Appendix 2 - 18
Appendix 2 - 19
Appendix 2 - 20
Appendix 2 - 21
Appendix 2 - 22
Appendix 2 - 23
Appendix 2 - 24
Appendix 2 - 25
APPENDIX 3 - EXAMPLE FIELD BOOK RECORDS
General Requirements ................................ ................................ ................................ .......... 3-3

Identification Page and Index Page ................................ ................................ ....................... 3-9
Inspector Information and Party Information ................................ ................................ .......... 3-9
Project Diary Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 3-11
Final Cross-Sections Roadway Final Closure Notes ................................ ............................. 3-11
Final Cross-Sections Borrow Pit How to Wrap Section Closure Shots (StaM) ...................... 3-12
Slope Stake Book ................................ ................................ ................................ .................. 3-12
Blue Tops ................................ ................................ ................................ .............................. 3-13
Pavement Grades ................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 3-14
Mobilization and Field Laboratory Records ................................ ................................ ........... 3-15
Estimate Quantities Excavation ................................ ................................ ............................. 3-15
Grading Diary ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 3-16
Large Tree Removal ( Rarely Used) ................................ ................................ ...................... 3-17
General Clearing & Grubbing ................................ ................................ ................................ 3-17
Driveway Culvert Pipe Record ................................ ................................ ............................... 3-18
Pre-Watering Computations ................................ ................................ ................................ ..3-19
Calibration of Water Equipment ................................ ................................ ............................ 3-19
Water, Applied Record, Meter ................................ ................................ ............................... 3-20
Water, Applied Record, Truck ................................ ................................ ............................... 3-20
Clear Tract Record and Remove Building Record ................................ ................................ .3-20
Select Placement Record and Undercut Excavation ................................ ............................. 3-21
Record of Right-of-Way Markers ................................ ................................ ........................... 3-22
Covercrop Seeding Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ...3-23
Erosion Control Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 3-24
Hay Bale Erosion Checks Record ................................ ................................ ......................... 3-24
Shipping Record and Summary Asphaltic Oil or Cement ................................ ...................... 3-25
Distribution of Asphaltic Oil or Cement ................................ ................................ .................. 3-26
Daily Scale Check, Digital or Platform Scale ................................ ................................ ......... 3-26
Trimming Tolerance Checks and Record of Density Samples ................................ ............... 3-27
Record of Pavement Patching and Equipment Rental Record ................................ .............. 3-28
Cement Car Shipment Record and Record of Cure Compound ................................ ............ 3-29
Cure Inspector Entry................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 3-29
Ready Mix Truck Checks and Shipping Record ................................ ................................ ....3-30
Record for Culvert Pipe ................................ ................................ ................................ ......... 3-31
Culvert Summary................................ ................................ ................................ ................... 3-32
Summary of Culverts -- Group 4 ................................ ................................ ............................ 3-33
Weekly Accumulative Totals ................................ ................................ ................................ .3-34
Estimate Quantities Record
Culvert Pipe Summary................................ ................................ ................................ ........... 3-35
Staking Information ................................ ................................ ................................ ............... 3-35
Excavation Record
Bridge Summary................................ ................................ ................................ .................... 3-36
Concrete Protection Barrier Rail, Cold Weather Concrete Temperature Data,
and Sheet Piling Record, ................................ ................................ ................................ ...3-37
Concrete Placement Record, Form and Reinforcing Steel Inspection Record and Structural
Steel Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... 3-38
Seed Received and Seeding Diary Records ................................ ................................ ......... 3-39
Appendix 3 - 1
Seeding Measurement Record ................................ ................................ .............................. 3-40
Fertilizer Records ................................ ................................ ................................ .................. 3-40
Mulch Received Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ........3-41
Mulch Placed Record ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 3-42
Nuclear Densities QA/QC ................................ ................................ ................................ ......3-43
Asphalt Plant Book Records Daily Plant Records ................................ ................................ .3-44
Excavation Record for Estimating Purposes Only (Not for Final Payment Measurements) ...3-45
Summary of Pavement Items ................................ ................................ ................................ 3-45
Sign Day Records ................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 3-46
Sign Day................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ 3-46
Barricade Records................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 3-47
Type III Barricades ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 3-47
Group Signs ................................ ................................ ................................ .......................... 3-48
Appendix 3 - 2
APPENDIX 3 - FIELD BOOK RECORDS
General - Field Book Requirements
The most important entries in the field books and diaries are records of conversations
with the contractor especially when agreements are made. Most agreements made in the
field should be documented in a diary or field book and both the inspector and the
contractor should sign the entry.
It is fairly easy to remeasure or estimate material quantities and those entries although
important are reproducible. This is not the case with agreements.
Verbal agreements are frequently misinterpreted or forgotten with significant adverse

consequences so get them in writing.
The examples of field book records included in this division are intended as examples that
fulfill the minimum record requirements. It is not mandatory that these exact methods be used.
when they are not used, the Project Manager shall ascertain that the minimum requirements
for contract records are being satisfied. If you have a simpler or better method for any of these
records you are encouraged to submit examples of your method to the Construction Office for
possible inclusion in this manual.
Book number, project number, project location, contractor when applicable, book name, field
district, property of notation, addresses and telephone numbers are required inside the front
covers of all books. All books will be indexed and have the pages numbered. Project
Managers Diaries shall be the first books in the numbering sequence. Inspectors Diaries can
be any number/numbers after Project Manager Diaries.
Field books for each contract should be numbered in sequence as the final documents for all
groups included in a contract are submitted to the Construction office in one transmittal. The
binding edge of the field book should not be marked because identification for storage in the
archives will be listed there by the Construction office. Utility diary records should not be
numbered or submitted with the final documents. they should be sent directly to the Utilities
Officer when the utility rehabilitation is complete.
Erasures shall not be made in source documents. This includes field books. If a corrected
entry is made, a line should be drawn through the original entry without obliterating it and the
correct information written above, below or to the side of the original entry. Erasures destroy
the legal validity of the records. Records with erasures are not admissible as evidence in a
court of law.
The examples in this section have been grouped together under subheadings of groups of
work that generally require the example records. Similar records may be required for other
than the groups of work used in this index.
General Information
Project Records and Reports (Except Measurement and Payment Records -- Included
in Section 109)
Appendix 3 - 3
A. General - The project construction records are the basis for all claims for
reimbursement under the contract and they verify that the work conforms
to the requirements specified. Accordingly, they should be authentic,
complete, understandable and open only to the interpretation intended
by the recorder. The project manager shall outline to his assistants the
manner in which the various records should be kept and should make
certain that they are being properly and adequately maintained. It is the
responsibility of the project manager to see that the project records are
accurate and complete.
MEASUREMENT OF PAY QUANTITIES AND RETENTION OF RECORDS
Measurement of Pay Quantities
Measurements in the units prescribed in the Specifications shall be entered directly in

the proper field book. Each entry must include the date, type of work covered, location,
proper measurements, and extensions. Names or initials of each inspector making
measurements must be included. Each entry shall close with the signature of the
individual who makes the entry. The location should be accurately identified by means
of station numbers, right or left side, pier number, etc.
Computation of areas, volumes, or lengths should be checked by a different inspector

using the figures entered in the field book. All checks are to be initialed by the
inspector making this verification.
Specifications provide that some items, such as reinforcing steel and structural steel,
are to be paid on the basis of design mass. Other items to be paid on a mass basis
must be supported by scale tickets. Scale tickets are to be authenticated by an
inspector or scalemaster at the point of measurement and again at the point of delivery
at the job site by the project inspector. For small quantities 200 Mg or less/day of
granular material delivered to the job site, minimum acceptable authentication may be
initialing by the inspector of the scale ticket at the point of delivery.
Quantities for each contract item and all extra work must stand on their own merits in
every case. Payment for legitimate work by means of increasing quantities on another
item to equal the money is not permitted.
Retention of Records
Project records retention is according to the current NDR Records "DOR1". The
required retention periods are minimums and may be increased at the direction of the
District Engineer. The Controller Office will notify field offices of the date of final
reimbursement.
At the time project files are disposed of by the Project Manager, some project data may
be determined to be of value in future years and selected for future retention,
preferably in the District Engineer's files. Examples include correspondence on
drainage problems, notice of pending litigation, or adjacent property owner concerns
about the right-of-way.
Appendix 3 - 4
After completing a project, prepare the final estimate, complete the as-built plans,
assemble all field books relating to that project (including diaries, cross-section notes,
bridge and culvert inspection books, paving, grading, right-of-way, etc.) and then ship
the documents with a copy of the final estimate to the Construction Division.
Payrolls and scale tickets are to be stored in each District and are not to be forwarded
to the Construction Division.
PROJECT DIARY
The project manager's diary is one of the important records of any project. It shall be
kept daily and show the following information: Date, day of the week, year, progress of
the work and any data not covered in other records which might have a bearing should
any details come into dispute. It shall be signed (not initialed) by the party making the
entry. The diary shall also contain the following:
1. Weather conditi ons during the day, noting rain, exceptional wind,
maximum and minimum temperatures, etc. If possible, show amount of
rainfall.
2. Major developments of any important matters pertaining to the contract.
3. Any understanding with the contractor or his representative.
4. Record of important conversations or verbal discussions with the

contractor relative to the work. These statements shall be specific, an
entry as: "Told the contractor that ***" is not satisfactory, whereas, "I told
Jones that ***" is satisfactory; or "The contractor seems to feel that his
progress is satisfactory" should be written, "Jones said that he is not
worried, that he will make up for lost time in June and July with more
men on the job". A general conclusion as to the effect of a conversation
in not helpful; whereas a statement of the conversation is important.
5. Important verbal instructions should also be confirmed by letter.
* 6. Dates on which major equipment or sizeable work forces are moved onto
or away from the job.
* 7. List general location where equipment is working each day, and a record
of major equipment not working or idle for repairs.
8. List the controlling operation each day.
9. Detail information regarding equipment and cost of explor atory work

made by the contractor on any state designated pit. The Construction
Division will then have supporting information on costs submitted by the
contractor in case he is obliged because of inadequate or unsuitable
material to move to a new location.
10. Agreements with property owners shall also be entered in the diary.
Appendix 3 - 5
11. Official visitors and inspections.
12. Work or materials rejected and reasons.
13. Time of shutting down of work or resuming of work and explanations.
14. Account of any time spent by contractor's men or equipment on

disputable items or work.
15. Length or cause of any delay.
16. Record of telegrams and telephone calls.
17. Unusual conditions, if any, such as high water, bridge failures, slides,
etc.
18. Running total of working days.
19. Progress of surveying and staking.
20. All Internal Time Allowance information. A separate Project Manager

diary shall be kept for each time allowance in the contract.
[*May be recorded in inspector diaries by inspectors.]
The diary information shall be recorded in a bound field notebook. Other

contract records may be contained in the diary. Separate field notebooks are
required for diary information pertinent to each contract time allowance.
Subcontractor diary records shall be included with the diary record of the prime
contractor. The diary shall be available to department and Federal Highway
Administration personnel on their visits to the project. The diary must be
submitted with the project records and final computations.
FIELD NOTEBOOKS
1. General - All measurements, placement records and other information,

except certain test results, taken in the field shall be entered directly in a
bound field notebook and initialed and dated. It will not be permissible to
enter any records or loose sheets, etc., and later copy them in a bound
notebook. All records shall be legible. No erasures shall be made in the
records. Erasures destroy the value of the notes in case of legal
disputes. Any corrections in the notes shall be made by drawing a line
through the original entry in such a manner that it will remain legible.
Inspector I.D. page is required.
The inside of the front cover of each notebook shall be labeled to

indicate the project number, book number and the character of the
notes, or records therein. Do not write on the outside of the notebook
cover with ink as they will be permanently labeled on reaching the
Lincoln Office. The project manager's diary record must be lowest book
Appendix 3 - 6
numbers in a set of books. Do not use numbers preceded by letters, i.e.
1-A, as this confuses the book of books' numbering. The project
manager's name and address, and the return address of the department
shall be shown on the inside of the cover. Each leaf in the notebook
shall be numbered; the first two to four pages to be reserved for
indexing.
Separate notebooks and field records shall be kept for each project or
group of projects under one contractor and for each contract awarded on
the same project. Each contract may then be submitted individually as
soon as work is completed.
Colored pencils shall be reserved for use in the District and Construction
Offices and should not be used for any computations or checking of
notebooks in the District offices.
2. Survey Staking Notebooks - The date and names of each member of the
survey party performing the work shall be recorded at the beginning of
each day's work and each page of notes should be dated when the work
is performed. The job performed by each person may be recorded
graphically:
7-13-96
Notes - J. P. Doe
Transit - R. A. Johnson
Rod - M. A. Smith
Chain - T. R. Brown
3. Inspection Notebooks - Field notebooks pertaining to construction

inspection should include the name of engineering personnel inspecting
work items or operations, particularly those for which inspection is not
documented by printed work report forms or test reports which would be
signed and dated by the person inspecting the work. Typical examples
of work items or operations which may not be documented by reports are
placement of reinforcing steel and forms for structures, backfilling
structures, bridge painting, rolling of armor coat, seeding and slope
protection work.
The construction and finish of such work items or operations shall be

done in accordance with specified requirements and should be attested
to by the engineer inspecting and approving the construction, include the
date of such inspection. In order that the same methods are used
statewide, use the following method of documentation: For each section
or pour, a notation shall be made in the notebook attesting to the
acceptance of that portion of work to the effect that "forms and
reinforcing steel have been inspected and are in accordance with the
specified requirements". A brief description of the section or pour
covered, date, and inspector's signature must be included.
An inspector's diary record shall be included in the field inspection

notebooks for contractor's operations. Example - concrete paving
Appendix 3 - 7
operation with five inspectors, only two diary records will be required,
one for roadway operations and one for plant operations.
4. As Built Plans - As builts shall be a full size set of plans. They are
prepared and submitted as a part of the final records for each project.
They are used as a reference in checking the final quantities and also as
a reference for future construction. They should be complete and
accurate. The preparation of as built plans is covered in
Subsection 109.11, Paragraph VIII. of this manual.
Metric Survey Guidelines
Alignment:
Station = 100M with +25 +50 +75 between stations.
For curves, use soft conversion (to convert foot distance to meters, divide by
3.2808333 or multiply by 0.30480061).
Levels:
Accuracy: 1st order = .003M V Kilometers

2nd order = .007M V Kilometers
3rd order = .010M V Kilometers (most work)
Three Wire Levels:
Rod readings to thousandths (3.102).
Difference between top hair and middle hair to bottom hair can be 4 mm (.004).
Cross Sections:
Dirt Shots: Read to nearest hundredth of a meter (3.11)
Hard Surface Shots: Read to nearest thousandth of a meter (3.105).
Topography:
Station plus (+) to nearest tenth of a meter (20.1)
Distance Rt./Lt. to nearest tent h of a meter (20.1)
Critical items measure to nearest hundredth of a meter (20.02)
Scale for Topog
1 mm = 1 m is 1 to 1000
2 mm = 1 m is 1 to 500
Appendix 3 - 8
Identification Page and Index Page
Group 1 Grading Book #7 Index

FIELD or TRANSIT BOOK Pg. No.
Index 1
Index 2
Index 3
Nebr. Dept. of Roads Construction Balance Information 4
Property of Box 94759 Estimate Quantities Excavation 5
Lincoln, NE 68509 6
7
James E. Erin 8
Address Box 77 9
Smith Square, NE 68881 Type III Barricades Required 10
Type IV Barricade Record
Telephone (308) 741-3999 Office Group 1 11
(308) 741-4112 Home 12
13
14
15
Project RS-601-1(102) 16
Smith Square - North 17
Contractor - O.K. Contractors Clearing and Grubbing Reward 18
District 4 Clearing and Grubbing Reward 19
20
21
22
This book is manufactured of a High Grade This type of index can be kept current if
50% Rog Paper having a Water Resisting entries are indexed as they are added to
Surface, and is sewed with Nylon the book.
Waterproof Thread.
Inspector Information and Party Information
Inspector Information
Printed Job
Date Inspector’s Name Title Inspector’s Signatures Used
4-4-96 Stanley D. Donnelson EA II S.D.D., S.D.D. & Stanley D. Donnelson
4-1-96 Ivan C. Smith Constructor’s I. C. Smith
Supt.
4-7-96 Donald D. Dugger EA I D.D.D., D.D.D., & Donald D. Dugger
5-9-96 Joseph L. Lunar PM II J.L.L. & J. L. Lunar
This information should be shown in each field
book, for inspectors making entries in the book.
Contractor
4-1-96
T. E. Simm
This information should be entered on the This information should be entered on
first page of Survey Records for a day. Subsequent pages of Survey Records for
a day.
3-9
Appendix 3 - 10
Project Diary Record
3-29-96 Friday
Mr. John Goodhammer (Keywitt Const.) requested that wet unsuitable material be replaced
with granular fill at Sta. 101+25.020 to Sta. 101+35.010. Estimated volume is 2000 m3.
I. M. Good, P.M., gave the contractor permission to remove 2000 m 3 of unsuitable material.
x___________________________________ x__________________________________
I. M. Good, P.M. John Goodhammer, Keywitt Const.
Project Diary Record
Date: Thursday, 4-21-96 Subcontractor, Water-Well, Inc.

Weather: Cloudy & Cool Working on prewatering from Sta. 330+ to
C.C.O.: Finishing Sta. 16+ to 43+ 360+ with women, one pickup, pipe and
Hours Worked C.C.O.: 0 Hrs. 7-6+10 1/2 Other pump. Moving pipe most of morning 9 hrs.
Working Day No Total W.D. to Date 18 work for men.
Official Visitors: Mr. R. T. Dooley DCE and
Mr. F. D. Good, DE Foreman
The contractor worked on clearing and grubbing DE & DCE looked at trees to be saved left
with three men, one D-7 dozer and one pickup Station 412+ to 417+ and concurred that
from Sta. 268+ to 300+, worked on rough trees as marked and counted are okay.
grading with nine men, four DW-31 scrapers,
two patrols, one self-propelled sheepsfoot roller J. P. Jones
and one pickup, two men worked on repairing H.P.M.
water trucks & tractor and drill for covercrop,
one mechanic and one greaser also working. A project diary is required for each Time
Rough grading from Sta. 83+ to 110+ today. Allowance included in the contracts for a
No water hauled as soil moisture good from project. Diary entries may be made prior to
yesterday rain. No working day charged as too the date the contractor begins work on the
wet from rain (1 1/2”) yesterday to finish Project in order to document informal
750,000 m2 plus open. Blue tops set today discussions with the contractor’s
from Sta. 43+ to 80+. representatives, landowners or other
interested parties. Diary entries shall begin
on the day the contractor begins work on
the project or the Notice to Proceed
beginning date whichever is first. Diary
entries, for such minor preliminary work as
the stockpiling of aggregates or the moving
of equipment onto the project site, are not
required. Diary entries should be made for
all other work done on the project, including
the setting of signs and placing of
barricades regardless of whether or not the
work is a pay item.
Appendix 3 - 11
Final Cross-Sections Roadway
Final Closure Notes
HI’s checked & OG & Red T.T.B. 5-7-96 4-26-96

Checked Red R.L.L. 5-9-96 R.L.L.
1009+91 Correct Prelim. Lt. 38 45 51 455 460 432 455 500 57 47 52

to Elev. 1243.340 m 78 66 57 28 20 0 20 43 50 56 82
@ 24.384 m SS Book OG OG 5 5 5 5 5 OG OG
#2 Pg. 19 C C
BM #12 +59.10 1244.520 Corr. To 1242.7180

Transit 04.070 1212.7120
76.1
75.8
1009+56 31 432 455 498 512 487 462 437 462 499 456 445 51 54
106 96 84 65 49 35 20 0 20 40 60 81 95 102
OG 5 S S S S S S S S S S OG OG
78.1 77.5 C C 75.6
72.4 78.0 76.2
1009+42 38 31 32 37 53 62 560 511 541 473 496 598 621 62 60 50

PC begin 117 105 97 82 74 66 58 40 27 20 0 20 40 56 63 66 67
1.25°
Curve Rt. OG OG C S S S S S S S S OG OG
1243.9530 C
Transit
Final Cross-Sections Borrow Pit

How to Wrap Section Closure Shots (StaM)
Borrow Pit #1 HI’s checked & Red TID 4-25-96

3-3-96 Checked Red R.L.L. 4-25-96
Ptly. Cldy.-Wind-Cold
R. S. Smith (Transit)
1 T. T. Dome (Rod)
8 0 8 5
8 J. S. Lane (Chain) 138+00 Lt. 8 6 4 3
R. L. Lane (Notes) 400 382 367 353
138+00 04 07 06 11 15 15 32 51 46 44 44 42 32 31 31
* 139 137 174 191 200 202 202 220 237 253 273 290 300 317 335
OG OG
7 6 6 1 5 6 5 2 8 8 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 4 5 7 7
138+00 0 1 2 4 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rt.
129 100 86 70 53 37 27 17 0 8 25 42 57 72 90 107 126 145 160 180 200
L OG OG
2 7 5 0 1 1 0 0 1 9 8 4 9 7 7 5 0
137+00 8 Rt.
8 8 8 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4
200 183 163 144 126 109 89 71 55 35 17 0 28 46 64 80 100
OG OG L
0 2 0 6 3 7 09 6 1 1 0 0 1 9 4 9 7 7 5 0
137+00 Lt. 4 4 4 1 0 +0 0 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 4 4
400 393 373 350 332 316 380 283 267 252 236 219 208 203 200 180 160 137 112
OG OG
TP Stake on Base Line 137+00 +7.19 1256.172 -7.110 1249.038
1256.148
* Arrows are helpful. Transit
Appendix 3 - 12
Slope Stake Book
PROJECT NO. T-130(17) *RDS* PLAN DATA Page 1
Station Lt. Cut Stake Lt. Fill Stake CL Rt. Full Stake Rt. Cut Stake
931+60 C 1.0 @ 53.1 F 1.4 C 3.0 @ 00.7
CLE=53.8 TO ELEV. 50.8 TO ELEV. 50.8
-0.9 -0.9 BS = 3.0 BS = 3.0
@ 27.0 @ 27.0 TBS = 50.0 TBS = 50.0
10.0 FBD 10.0 FBD
931+60 C 3.3 @ 60.0 F 1.0 C 2.5 @ 57.0
CLE=52.1 TO ELEV. 50.2 TO ELEV. 50.2
-0.9 -0.9 BS = 3.0 BS = 3.0
@ 27.1 @ 27.1 TBS = 50.0 TBS = 50.0
10.0 FBD 10.0 FBD
931+0 F 1.0 F 3.7 F 0.2
CLE=52.1 @ 45.7 @ 42.7
-0.8 -0.8 FS = 4.0 FS = 0.0
@ 27.0 @ 27.0 TO HP TO HP
-3.3 -3.3
@ 41.8 S 41.8
4-13-96
PROJECT NO. T-130(17) *RDS* STAKING DATA J. Jones Page 2
Station Lt. Hub Lt. Cut Stake Lt. Fill Stake C.L. Rt. Fill Stake Rt. Cut Stake Rt. Hub
931+60 7.1 10.1 8.7 8.4 8.5 10.1 7.1
60.0 60.9 4.8 9.2 8.0 7.1 8.0 6.6 5.3
53.8 50.8 @ 2.3 C 0.9 F 0.6 F 1.3 F 0.5 C 3.5 C 1.8
7.1 10.1 C to H C 52.7 8 C C C
3:1 30.6 30.0 60.5 66.3
10’FB 6:1 6:1 3:1 H
10’FB
TP Hub 65’Rt. Sta. 931+00 TBS = 50 +7.47 1860.85 -6.36 1853.38 TBS = 50
931+60 6.5 9.5 8.0 8.4 8.2 9.5 6.5
59.7 59.7 5.2 6.1 7.4 7.1 7.4 7.0 6.4
53.2 50.8 C 1.3 C 3.4 F 0.6 F 1.9 F 0.8 C 2.5 C 1.8
6.5 9.5 C C 60.2 C C C C
3:1 30.6 31.2 57.5 6.3
H @ 70 10’FB 6:1 6:1 3:1 H
10’FB
TBS = 50 TBS = 50
930+0 13.8 8.4 13.0 11.4 8.4 12.1 12.6
59.74 7.6 11.7 7.6 11.7 7.6
52.1 C 6.2 F 1.3 F 3.8 F 0.4 F 5.0
7.6 C C C C
47.0 44.2 65
H @ 70 4:1 6:1 H
1859.74
Transit
Appendix 3 - 13
Blue Tops
4-13-96
J. L. From
PROJECT NO. T-130(17) RD BLUE-TOPS Page 3
STATION RDWY. LEFT SHLD. LEFT EDGE RIGHT EDGE RIGHT SHLD.
435+0.0 A -0.65 @ 22.0 -0.24 @ 12.0 -0.24 @ 12.0 -0.65 @ 22.0

CL = 4254.880 4.550 4.140 4.140 4.550
58.780 4.500 4.100 4.150 4.660
3.900 C 0.050 C 0.040 F 0.010 F 0.110
3.890
C 0.040
435+0.0 A -0.65 @ 22.0 -0.24 @ 12.0 -0.24 @ 12.0 -0.65 @ 22.0

CL = 4254.130 5.300 4.890 4.890 5.300
58.780 5.170 4.780 4.900 5.350
4.650 C 0.130 C 0.110 F 0.010 F 0.050
4.610
C 0.040
931+95.00 A -0.56 @ 22.0 -0.25 @ 12.0 -0.25 @ 12.0 -0.65 @ 22.0

CL = 4254.09
Correct (4249.710)
-6.14 4249.720
BM #17 +9.07 4258.78 Transit
Appendix 3 - 14
Pavement Grades
F(130)17 RDS PAVEMENT GRADES PAGE 2

STATION LEFT EDGE CENTERLINE RIGHT EDGE
HI
59.680 59.680 69.680 4-13-96
931+75.000 4254.310 4254.550 4254.310 Mild
5.370 GR 5.130 GR 5.370 GR J. R. Smith
5.320 5.100 5.380 T. S. Bliss
C0.050 C09.030 F0.010 J. B. From
59.680 59.680 59.680
931+50.000 4254.080 4254.320 4254.080
5.600 GR 5.360 GR 5.600 GR
5.620 5.400 5.600
F0.020 F0.040 C0.000
HI
59.680 59.680 59.680
931+25.000 4253.850 4254.090 4253.850
5.830 GR 5.590 GR 5.830 GR
5.810 5.600 5.800
C-0.002 F 0.01 C-0.03
TP RT. STA. 931+000 +6.110 4259.68 -2.040 4258.57
Transit
55.610 55.610 55.610
931+0.000 4253.610 4253.350 4253.610
2.000 GR 1.760 GR 2.000 GR
2.210 1.800 2.040
F0.210 F0.04 F0.040
4255.61 Transit
F(130)17 RDS PAVEMENT GRADES PAGE 3
STATION LEFT EDGE CENTERLINE RIGHT EDGE
HI
59.680 59.680 59.680
932+75.000 4255.100 4255.340 4255.100
4.580 GR 4.340 GR 4.580 *Grade Rod
4.550 4.400 4.610 should be)
C0.030 F0.060 F0.030 identified. (GR)
59.680 59.680 59.680
932+50.000 4254.920 4255.100 4254.720
4.760 GR 4.520 GR 4.760 GR
4.560 4.500 4.500
C0.200 C0.020 C0.260
59.680 59.680 59.680
932+25.000 4254.720 4254.960 4254.720
4.960 GR 4.720 GR 4.960 GR
4.920 4.700 4.500
C0.040 C0.020 C0.460
59.680 59.680 59.680
932+0.000 4254.520 4254.760 4254.520
5.160 GR 4.920 GR 5.160 GR
5.100 4.900 5.090
C0.060 C0.020 C0.070
Appendix 3 - 15
Appendix 3 - 16
Mobilization and Field Laboratory Records
Group 1 - Mobilization Group 10 - Field Lab
Item No. 3 - Mobilization 1 Lump Sum Item No. 2 - Field Laboratory

Contract Price = $ 8,500.00 Type “C”, 1 each @ $300.00
5% Group = $13,6550.00 3-11-96
5% Group = 50% pay = $ 4,250.00 Set up on job and inspected at
10% Group = 100% pay = $ 8,500.00 Station 17+50 T. T. Smith
3-23-96 Estimate 100% T. T. S.

3-10-96
Contractor begin moving 3-31-96 moved to Sta. 84+60 T.T.S.
equipment to the project. T. T. Smith
4-18-96 moved to Sta. 270+10 T.T.S.
3-23-96 6% of group work T. T. Smith
complete. 5-10-96 finished with lab and
contractor advised. Removed
3-30-96 over 10% of group D.O.R. equipment T.T.S.
complete pay all at this item. T. T. Smith
Final Quantity 1 Lump Sum Final Quantity 1 Each
CompsT. T. Smith 3-28-96 Comps T.T.S. 3-30-96
Estimate Quantities Excavation
Plan Balances Plan Quantity Estimate #1 Estimate #2 Estimate #3 Estimate #4

Sta. to Sta. Excavation % m3 % m3 % m3 % m3
(m3)
5+73 25+10 21,000 40 8400 90 18900 95 19950 100 21,000
25+10 72+160 71,045 10 7105 90 63941 95 67493 100 71,045 #1 3-15-96
72+60 98+05 14,310 90 12879 95 13594 100 14,310 #2 4-1-96
48+05 117+40 14,989 90 13490 95 14240 100 14,989 #3 4-5-96
117+40 147+00 37,005 80 29604 95 33305 100 37,005 finish grade
147+00 170+00 24,063 15 3609 90 21657 100 24,063 to Sta. 120
170+00 211+00 48,702 90 43832 100 48,702
211+00 224+76 9,574 90 8617 100 9,574
224+76 260+01 21,001 80 40801 100 21,001
260+01 272+00 25,321 90 22784 100 25,321
317,010 15505 142433 100 317,010
Appendix 3 - 17
Grading Diary
Typical Grade Inspector’s Diary Entry
Date: 3-10-96 Thursday

Weather: Clear, Windy and Cool
Hours Worked: 6:30 to 6 = 11 hours
Official Visitors: Debra Blum, DCE & friend
Quality Assurance
Subcontractor, Tree Removal, Inc. working on a ripper would arrive on the project tomorrow
clearing and grubbing today. Removing trees and the necessary ripping will be performed. I
from Station 5+ to 25+ with 1 D-7 Dozer, talked with John Adams, landowner, right of
1 truck, 1 pickup and 3 men. Mr. Nollet supt. Sta. 70+60 to 140+ about moving fence. He
for sub plans to sell the saw logs, chip the plans to begin moving it next week.
limbs and bury the stumps, that aren’t ground,
on private property. I gave the project D. D. S.
manager a copy of the agreement for Grade Inspector
burying the stumps on Howard Plum’s
property.
Subcontractor, Great Plains irrigation began
prewatering today from Station 41+ to 62+ 3-10-96 I discussed with the project manager
working with 2 men, 1 pickup, 1 pump and this evening the need for contractor’s supt. on
assorted pipe. Contractor’s supt. Nick Winkle job while the subs are working. He said that
was on the job today. He plans to be here Nick Winkle plans to be on job every day
once or twice a week while the settling up equipment, etc. and when he isn’t,
subcontractors only are working. We will be reachable by phone #473-6632.
discussed prewatering of farm ground and
need for ripping to assure runoff is kept to a D. D. S.
minimum. Nick advised that a dozer with Grade Inspector
Appendix 3 - 18
Large Tree Removal ( Rarely Used)
Clearing/Grubbing
Large Meas. Trees Removed Complete
Sta. to Sta. Side Trees by Date (Date & Init.) Date Init. Remarks
3 6 Lt 26 KPB 6-3-96 6-21-96 GDP 6-22-96 GDP
6 10 Lt 17 KPB 6-3-96 6-24-96 CTV 6-28-96 CTV Hauled stumps
10 12 Lt 22 KPB 6-3-96 6-24-96 CTV 6-28-96 CTV off project.
12 14 Lt 29 KPB 6-3-96 6-24-96 CTV 6-28-96 CTV
3 5 Rt 23 KPB 6-4-96 6-21-96 GDP 6-22-96 GDP
5 6 Rt 20 KPB 6-4-96 6-21-96 GDP 6-22-96 GDP
6 10 Rt 41 KPB 6-4-96 6-18-96 GDP 6-20-96 GDP Burning by permit.
10 12 Rt 32 KPB 6-4-96 6-18-96 CTV 6-20-96 GDP
12 14 Rt 8 KPB 6-4-96 6-17-96 CTV 6-20-96 GDP
26 30 Lt 14 KPB 6-6-96 6-20-96 GDP 7-3-96 CTV
26 30 Rt 21 KPB 6-6-96 6-21-96 GDP 7-8-96 CTV
30 40 Lt 31 KPB 6-6-96 6-25-96 GDP 7-10-96 CTV
30 40 Rt 41 KPB 6-6-96 6-27-96 GDP 7-10-96 CTV
325
Final Pay Quantity = 325 Each CTV 7-11-96
General Clearing & Grubbing
Date Inspect. % Total

Sta. to Sta. Side Complete Init. Complet to Date Remarks
e
1+00 8+00 Lt 5-3-96 AJB 5 5 Clearing trees entire project.
1+00 8+00 Lt 5-10-96 AJB 20 25
8+10 15+00 Lt&Rt 5-10-96
15+00 20+00 Lt&Rt 5-17-96 CLD 30 55 Burning trees by permit.
20+00 27+00 Rt 5-17-96 Hauling stumps and trash off of
project.
20+00 27+00 Lt 5-22-96 CLD 10 Last trees cut and burned.
27+00 40+00 Lt 5-23-96 CLD 20
27+00 40+00 Rt 5-24-96 AJB 15 100 Finished last of clearing brush on
40+00 50+00 Lt&Rt 5-24-96 AJB left. Clearing and grubbing
complete.
Final Pay Quantity = 1 lump sum AJB 5-24-96
Appendix 3 - 19
Driveway Culvert Pipe Record
Driveway Culvert Pipe Record

Plan Data Construction Data
Installed Date
New Pipe Pipe &
Station Side (mm x m) (mm x m) Init. Remarks
10+60 Lt. 150 x 11 None Moved drive. No pipe required. 3-30-96 DDS
41+30 Rt. 300 x 12 300 x 12 HT#372207-12 DDS 4-7-96
41+30 Lt. 300 x 12 300 x 12 HT#312207-12 DDS 4-7-96
87+70 Rt. 300 x 9.75 300 x 9.75 HT#488806-9.75 DDS 4-7-96
122+80 Rt. 300 x 9.75 300 x 11 HT#372207-9
HT#488306-6 DDS 4-7-96
145+10 Lt. 400 x 12 450 x 17 HT#266309-12
HT#407737-16 DDS 4-25-96
174+30 Rt. 300 x 11 300 x 17 HT#7114117-56 DDS 4-7-96
#372207 = 12+12+9 - 110 m
#488806 = 7.78 +2 = 11.75 m
#266309 = 12 = 12 m
#7114117 = 17
17 m
#1077377 = 5
5m
Appendix 3 - 20
Pre-Watering Computations
Pre-Watering Computations
*
Mass
Soil Optimum Actual Moisture (kg) of *ML
m3 Curve Moisture Moisture Add. Soil Water Comps
Sta. to Sta. Excavation Number % % % per m3 Required Date by
10+ 31+ 27,000 576-112 13.1 5.0 8.1 2746 kg 720.0 3-7-96 DDS
48+ 73+ 69,000 576-118 17.4 9.9 7.5 2611 kg 1621.5 3-12-96 DDS
130+ 152+ 58,000 576-117 15.5 9.8 5.7 2645 kg 1049.8 3-17-96 DDS
234+ 265+ 71,000 576-117 15.5 10.1 5.4 2561 kg 1178.6 3-23-96 DDS
* See Pg. #34 for computations
Actual moisture is the average of tests reported on DR Form 86
Sta. 10+ to Sta. 31+
Max. Density = 1.81 kg/l
Estimated in place density = 90% of Max.
In Place Density = 1.63 kg/l
Mass of Cubic Meter of Water = 1000 kg
Mass of Cubic Meter inplace soil
1.63 x 1000 = 1630.0 kg 1810.0
Water required per m 3 = 180 L - 1630.0
Completed in place mass of soil 1810.0 180.0
Dry it to get dry mass of soil and mass of water
Mass in place - mass dry = In place water mass
% Moisture in place = mass of water
dry mass
Mass density species a certain moisture content per soil type
% Moisture at Max. Density
-% Moisture in-place
% Moisture deficit (Note if negative number “in place”is too wet and it must be dried).
(% Moisture deficit) 1000 = liters of water to add per cubic meter.
Mass = (in place density) (1000)
Water in liters = Mass in kilograms (1000 kg = 1000 Liters water)
Calibration of Water Equipment
Calibration of Water Equipment
Truck #3 filled from meter #73268 Meter Full = 1002000
Truck Full = 6276.1 kg Meter Empty = 996979
Truck Empty = 1250.1 kg 5021
See Scale Ticket #1 = 5026.1 kg
Meter Full = 1007070
Truck Full = 6321.1 kg Meter Empty = 1002000
Truck Empty = 1250.0 kg 5070
See Scale Ticket #2 = 5071.1 kg
Mass = 10097.2 kg
Meter = 10091.0 L
Av. Capacity of Truck #3 = 5026.1+5071.1 ÷ 2
10097.2 ÷ 10091.0 = 1.0006144 Factor
Say 5,050 L ZOK 3-8-96 No factor required ZOK 3-8-96
Calibration 3-7-96 DDS
Check Comps 3-8-96 ZOK
To convert gallons to liters, multiply the number of gallons times 3.79 to get liters.
Appendix 3 - 21
Water, Applied Record, Meter
Water Applied Record Pre-Watering Meter #73268
Beg. Ending Meter Pay Total

Meter Meter M. Gal. Calib. M. to
Date Sta. Sta. Reading Reading Applied Factor Gallon Date Insp. Time Remarks
3-8-96 10 31 07316 14450 7.074 1.000 7.074 7.074 DDS 4:30 p.m.
3-9-96 10 31 14450 5447 40.020 1.000 40.020 47.094 DDS 2:00 p.m.
3-10-96 10 31 54470 110760 56.290 1.000 56.290 103.384 DDS 4:00 p.m.
3-11-96 10 31 110760 207530 96.770 1.000 96.770 200.154 DDS 4:30 p.m.
3-14-96 10 31 207530 500250 292.720 1.000 292.720 492.874 DDS 2.00 p.m.
3-15-96 10 31 500250 600010 99.760 1.000 99.760 592.634 DDS 3:00 p.m. Est. #1
3-16-96 10 31 600010 728110 128.100 1.000 128.100 720.734 DDS 5:30 p.m. Area Comp.
3-17-96 5+ 45+ 728110 83730 83.730 1.000 83.730 83.130 DDS 5:30 p.m. Loaded
3-19-96 130 152 83730 205600 121.870 1.000 121.876 121.870 DDS 4:00 p.m. truck
+
3-21-96 130 152 205400 408310 202.710 1.000 202.710 324.580 DDS 4:00 p.m.
+
To convert to metric, multiply number of gallons by 3.79 to get number of liters
Water, Applied Record, Truck
Water, Applied Record Trucks

Cap.
M. L. Pay
Load Total @ M. Accum.
Date Sta.-Sta. Tally Truck Loads Load Liter Total Inspect. Remarks
3-1-96 10 31 11 3 2 5.050 10.10 10.10 AAW Cut Section
3-1-96 10 31 11 5 2 1.020 4.02 14.12 AAW Estimate #1
3-28-96 5 17 1111 1 3 6 5.050 30.30 44.42 AAW
3-28-96 5 35 1111 1111 5 10 1.020 10.20 54.62 AAW
3-29-96 5 35 111 3 3 5.050 15.15 69.77 AAW
3-29-96 5 35 1111 5 4 1.020 4.08 73.85 AAW Estimate #2
To convert gallons to liters, multiply number of gallons times 3.79 to get number of liters
Clear Tract Record and Remove Building Record
Clear Tract #4 @ Sta. 71+37 Remove Building @ Sta. 71+40
Plan Data: Sta. 71+37 Plan Data: Sta. 71+40

Clear Tract #4 Remove Building
3-17-96 This tract was cleared today. 3-15-96 This building was removed today.
Complete. Complete.
DDS 3-17-96 DDS 3-15-96
Appendix 3 - 22
Select Placement Record and Undercut Excavation
Select Placement Undercut Excavation
Plan Note: Sta. 31+20 to Sta. 42+80 3-11-96

All material excavated from these stations 00 Section at Sta. 10+14 to Sta. 10+40
shall be placed 1.2 m below finished
subgrade or more than 30 m right or left of (Drawing)
centerline.
Area Width: 45 m
Area Depth: 1.5 m
Area Length: 26 m
3-27-96 26 x 1.5 x 48 = 2702.7 m 3

This material was all placed at depths greater Call 69 m3
than 1.2 m below finished subgrade. Comps DDS 3-11-96
DDS 3-27-96
It was necessary to undercut this area as it is
an 00 Section and unstable under contractor’s
hauling equipment.
DDS 3-11-96
Appendix 3 - 23
Record of Right-of-Way Markers
Record of Right-of-Way Markers
LEFT RIGHT
M M
A A
R R
K K
E Staked Inspected E Staked Inspected
R by by Distance R by by
Station Distance S & Date & Date Station (meters) S & Date & Date
5+73.2 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 5+76.2 40 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
5+74.8 33 1 VOL & RCE DDS 3-1-96 5+77.9 60 1 VOL & DCE DDS 3-2-96
Pt. cldy & mild
7+00 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 9+00 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
17+00 60-70 2 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 15+00 80 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
20+80 74-32 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 25+00 80 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
26+00 80 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 30+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
34+00 80-60 2 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 33+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
42+00 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 39+60 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
51+17 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 47+00 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
51+89 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 51+05 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
59+00 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 51+85 60 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96
64+00 65 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-2-96 60+00 60 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
Fair & mild DDS 3-4-96
69+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 65+00 90 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
76+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 67+00 90 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
85+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 70+00 81.0 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
89+30 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 77+00 60 2 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
98+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 86+00 60-80 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
102+30 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 96+00 80 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
103+20 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 102+30 80 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
108+00 70 1 2-3-96 JBK DDS 3-1-96 103+20 80 1 2-4-96 JBK DDS 3-4-96
Total Pay 22 2-3-96 Total Pay 21
Comps 2-4-96 JBK
Comps 3-2-96 DDS
Appendix 3 - 24
COVERCROP SEEDING RECORD
(NOT FOR PAYMENT -- USE TO DOCUMENT QUANTITY APPLIED)
Covercrop Seeding Record

Kilogram Kilogram
Side of Approx. of Seed of Seed
Sta. to Sta. Centerline Hectare Required Used Date Inspect. Remarks
5+73 to 30+ Rt. & Lt. 7.5 528 500 4-11-96 AWL Oats bin ran
64+10% = 70.4
kg @ Ha using
drill
30+ to 98+ Rt. 8.1 570 600 4-12-96 DDS
30+ to 98+ Lt. 8.1 570 550 4-16-96 DDS Flat tire on tractor
4-13, 14 & 15,
1996
98+ to 120+ Rt. & Lt. 8.0 563 570 4-16-96 DDS
120+ to 170+ Rt. 9.2 648 650 4-22-96 DDS
120+ to 170+ Lt. 9.2 648 700 4-23-96 DDS
170+ to 225+ Rt. & Lt. 20.1 1415 1400 4-25-96 DDS
250+ to 272+ Rt. & Lt. 16.0 1126 1200 4-26-96 DDS
225+ to 250+ Rt. 8.4 591 600 4-28-96 DDS
225+ to 250+ Lt. 8.4 591 600 4-29-96 DDS Complete today
103.0 7251.2 7370
To convert pounds to kilograms, multiply number of pounds x 0.4536 to get kilograms.
To convert acres to hectares, multiply number of acres x 0.4047 to get hectares.
A notebook record similar to this is required for

Slope Protection Seeding work and the same
notification requirements to Roadside
Development Section is required.
Appendix 3 - 25
Erosion Control Record
Erosion Control Record
Plan Data: Sta. 79+16 to Sta. 81+16 Lt. 79+200

Build 767 m 2 Erosion Control 4.0 m
Construction Data: Sta. 79+20 to Sta. 81+00 Lt.
Built 720 m 2 Erosion Control
Soil Prep: by hand 4-16-96 DDS 180.0 m
Fertilizer: 25 kg Special Blend 4-16-96 DDS
Seed: 8 kg Blend 4-16-96 DDS
(Drawing) 10.0 m
2
4 x 180 = 720 m
Measurements & Comps DDS 4-17-96 81+000
Roadside Development Section must be
notified the first and last day work is
performed or suspended. Include Project
No., contractor performing work, type of
equipment used, seed used, etc., in the
notification. 0.1 ha or larger areas shall be
deducted from the seeding area if Erosion
Control is in the seeding area.
Hay Bale Erosion Checks Record
Hay Bale Erosion Checks

* Plans As-Built
Rt. or Quantity Quantity
Station Lt. (Bales) (Bales) Date Inspect. Remarks
8+70 Rt. 14 16 3-19-96 JDD
9+00 Rt. 14 14 3-19-96 JDD
9+30 Rt. 14 14 3-19-96 JDD
9+40 Rt. 14 14 3-20-96 JDD
9+50 Rt. 16 18 3-20-96 JDD
72 76
59+71 Lt. 10 10 4-1-96 JDD
59+91 Lt. 10 10 4-1-96 JDD
60+11 Lt. 10 10 4-1-96 JDD
60+31 Lt. 10 10 4-1-96 JDD
60+46 Lt. 12 14 4-2-96 JDD
60+61 Lt. --- 14 4-2-96 JDD Additional check approved ZOK
52 68 4-1-96
64+10 Rt. 10 10 4-3-96 JDD
64+30 Rt. 10 10 4-3-96 JDD
64+50 Rt. 10 10 4-3-96 JDD
64+70 Rt. 10 10 4-3-96 JDD Estimate quantity = 76+68+40 = 184
64+90 Rt. 10 10 4-6-96 JDD
65+15 Rt. 10 10 4-6-96 JDD
Page Totals = 184 204 Bales Comp. JDD 4-6-96

Comp. 30% 6-1-96
Appendix 3 - 26
* Show the distance Rt. or Lt. when deducting areas from seeding area.
Shipping Record and Summary Asphaltic Oil or Cement
Shipping Record & Summary Asphaltic Oil Emulsion for Tack or Prime
(Proj. Ident.) (Proj. Ident.) Other Use
Load
Date Ident. Refin. Dist. Refin. Dist. Refin. Dist. Refin. Dist.
Received Number kg kg Factor Insp. kg kg kg kg kg kg
3-29-96 151676 5409 --- 1.000 HHH 5409
3-29-96 151707 5503 5493 1.00182 HHH 5002 4993 501 500
3-29-96 157703 5527 5530 0.99946 HHH 3005 3007 2422 2423 100 100
3-29-96 157710 5631 5580 1.00914 HHH 570 565 5061 5015
3-29-96 157691 5312 5413 0.98134 HHH 4907 5000 405 413
3-30-96 158041 5376 HHH
(1) (2) (3) (4)
The sum of column (2), (3), and (4) should equal column (1).
Totals 32758 18893 8389 100

Comps HHH 6-3-96
Appendix 3 - 27
Distribution of Asphaltic Oil or Cement
Distribution Record of Asphaltic Oil Emulsion for Tack or Prime
Load Ident. No. TDR11337 Date Received 3-30-96

Type of Oil SSH-1 Sp. Gravity .9813
Refinery Gallons 6.703 (x 3.79) = Liters Water Added Liters (6700 x 3.79 = 25,362 Liters
Net Side Liter Liter
Dist. Load & °C Start Stop Net Liter per per
Sta. to Sta. Sta. No. Width Temp. Liter Liter Liter 15.5°C StaM Sq. m. Remarks
30+00-75+00 45.00 1 Rt. 4 63 700 430 270 264 5.87 0.0147 4-1-96 MLP
75+00-220+00 145.00 1 Rt. 4 66 430 40 390 381 2.63 0.00672 4-1-96 MLP
0+00 - 220+00 220.00 2 Lt. 4 54 1210 300 910 894 4.06 0.01034 4-2-96 MLP
Daily Scale Record
Daily Scale Check

Digital or Platform Scale
Daily Scale Record

Scale Check
7-5-96 Friday Plant Commercial
6:50 A. Balanced Scales Loaded Mass 88050 88020
7:00 A. First Load #714 Unloaded Mass 37000 37010
8:00 A. Begin Taring Trucks 51050 51010
9:00 A. Cleaned Scales Platform & Balance Tolerance = 0.5% of 88050 = 440 kg diff.
9:15 A. Completed Taring Trucks = 40 kg
3:00 P. Cleaned Scales & Balance Begin Load #747 is check load.
Taring Trucks
3:00 P. Trucks All Tared
4:30 P. Cleaned Platform & Balance J. C. Smith
5:35 P. Last Load #787 Inspector
7-6-96 Saturday - No Work

7-7-96 Sunday - No Work
7-8-96 Monday Scale Check
7:00 A. Balanced Scales & First Load #758 Plus 500 kg
8:00 A. Begin Taring Trucks Loaded Mass 87400 87910
9:00 A. End Taring Trucks (Plant down) Unloaded Mass 35980 36480
9:30 A. Balanced & Cleaned Scales
4:00 P. Balanced & Cleaned Scales Truck #7 Used Load #796
5:35 P. Last Load. Only one tare today due J. C. Smith
to Plant only operating 4+ hours. #815 Inspector
Appendix 3 - 28
Trimming Tolerance Checks and Record of Density Samples
Subgrade/Foundation Course
Trimming Tolerance Checks Template (mm)

4200 3600 3000 2400 1800 1200 700 CL 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4000
Date Sta. Insp. 840 660 600 480 360 240 160 0 160 240 360 480 600 720 840
4-1-96 750 EEL 780 660 510 420 390 240 160 030 160 270 450 510 600 720 840
4-1-96 760 EEL 810 660 540 450 360 240 160 00 160 240 360 540 630 690 810
4-1-96 765 EEL 840 720 600 450 360 210 909 030 090 240 360 570 630 690 810
4-5-96 770 EEL 840 780 600 480 360 240 090 060 060 210 390 570 600 690 810
4-5-96 780 EEL 810 720 600 480 390 210 090 00 060 240 360 480 600 720 840
4-5-96 784 JES 840 750 600 480 390 270 160 030 090 270 360 480 600 750 840
4-5-96 790 JES 840 720 600 480 360 240 160 00 060 180 330 480 600 780 870
4-5-96 800 JES 540 420 300 180 030 000 060 180 240 060 060 180 300 360 480
4-7-96 800 EEL 840 720 600 480 390 240 160 00 120 270 390 510 570 690 810
Record of Density Samples and Thickness of Asphaltic Concrete Cores
First Lift Second Lift Third Lift Totals

Dist. Th. Thick
& Side Th % Th % Th % Act. Req’d.
Sta. Date mm Dens. Ins. Date mm Dens. Ins. Date mm Dens. Ins. mm mm
67+20 2 m Rt 4-1-96 60 100 JDS 4-21-96 37 97 JDS 5-2-96 35 97 JDS 137 125
89+35 3 m Rt 4-1-96 50 98 JDS 4-21-96 38 98 JDS 5-3-96 38 98 JDS 132 125
52+70 2 m Rt 4-2-96 55 98 JDS 4-21-96 38 98 JDS 5-2-96 40 99 JDS 137 125
50+10 2 m Lt 4-2-96 65 97 JDS 4-21-96 37 98 JDS 5-10-96 45 96 JDS 142 125
10+00 5 m Lt 4-7-96 70 98 JDS 4-30-96 25 96 JDS 5-17-96 25 93 JDS 100 112
25+00 2.5 m Lt 4-7-96 70 93 JDS 4-16-96 25 92 JDS 5-10-96 38 93 JDS 137 125
Appendix 3 - 29
Record of Pavement Patching and Equipment Rental Record
Record of Pavement Patching
Lane
(Rt. Size Type Type Type
Date Or Ave. Width “A” “B” “C”
Patched Station Station Lt.) Ave. Length) (m2) (m2) (m2) Insp. Remarks
4-4-96 7+40 7+95 Rt. 10 m x 55 m 550 SDD
4-5-96 10+15 10+27 Rt. 8 m x 10 m 80 SDD
4-5-96 20+63 Rt. 8mx3m 24 SDD
4-5-96 62+20 62+31 Rt. 6 m x 11 m 66 SDD
4-12-96 23+10 23+29 Rt. 8 m x 18 m 144 SDD
Totals 24 146 694

Call 24 146 695
Equipment Rental - Motor Graders
Equipment No. 3-712 Conforms to Specification Requirements DDD 4-4-96

Location
Equip. Worked No Accum. Contractor
Date No. StaM to StaM Pay Pay Total Insp. Rep. Remarks
4-1-96 3-112 4+23-60+00 1/2 7.00 7.00 DDD JCSmith ripped wet spots
4-5-96 3-712 4+23-60+00 2.00 5.50 DDD JCSmith flat tire 1/2 hr.
4-5-96 3-606 4+23-60+00 2.00 2.50 DDD JCSmith
4-5-96 3-610 81+00-97+00 0 2.50 17.50 DDD JCSmith drying
4-6-96 3-610 81+00-97+00 0 2.00 DDD JCSmith replacing
Appendix 3 - 30
Cement Car Shipment Record and Record of Cure Compound
Cement Car Shipment Record
Kilograms Accum.
Shipment Date Date of Total Sample
Ident. Number Received Empty Cement Cement Insp. No. Remarks
MP 2146 5-3-96 5-4-96 151,520 151,520 FRS C-1
MP 2008 5-3-96 5-4-96 149,300 300,820 FRS C-2
MP 2248 5-3-96 5-5-96 151,680 452,500 FRS C-3
MP 3218 5-3-96 5-5-96 153,180 605,680 FRS C-4
MP 4157 5-4-96 5-6-96 143,320 749,000 FRS C-5
MP 2161 5-4-96 5-6-96 154,620 903,620 FRS C-6
MP 4188 5-5-96 5-6-96 148,000 1,051,620 FRS C-7
MP 2193 5-5-96 5-9-96 150,460 1,202,080 FRS C-8
MP 2003 5-5-96 5-9-96 156,700 1,358,780 FRS C-9
MP 2236 5-5-96 5-9-96 154,400 1,513,180 FRS C-10 everything empty for C.C.
Cure Inspector Entry
Record of Cure Compound

Application Checks
Square
Liters Lot Meters Liters App.
Date Received No. Insp. Date Concrete Used Rate Insp.
4-29-96 550 White Pigmented KEE 5-4-96 1867 100 84.8 KEE
5-2-96 1100 N012 White Pigmented KEE 5-6-96 5600 261 254.5 KEE
To convert gallons to liters, Required Application Rate _________

multiply number of gallons
by 3.79 to get liters.
Appendix 3 - 31
Ready Mix Truck Checks and Shipping Record
Random Check
Ready Mix Truck
Zero Mixing Rev. Agitate

Setting Rev. Change Rev.
Truck Load Rev. Per to Per Time
Date Time No. No. Counter Min. Agitate Min. Unloaded Insp.
4-20-96 9:00 A 3 17432 OK 16 53 6 9:45 A MRD
4-20-96 11:15 A 8 17449 OK 17 51 6 12:10 A MRD
4-20-96 3:40 P 5 17471 OK 16 57 5 4:28 P MRD
4-21-96 7:00 A 4 17497 OK 16 57 6 7:16 A MRD
added
water
Appendix 3 - 32
Record for Culvert Pipe
Box or Pipe Culvert
Plan Data: Station 74+35 Drawing
450 mm x 46 m: CMP with headwalls, Remove
Build 915 mm x 72 m reinforced concrete
pipe with flared end sections Plan 410
Excavation = 43 m 3
Construction Data: Station 74+35

450 mm x 15 m CMP with headwalls, Removed
Built 915 mm x 72 m reinforced concrete
pipe with flared end sections Plan 410 Hub=1779.43 @ 47 Hub=1777.30 @ 55
Excavation = D.Q. FL-1779.00 2 32 FL=1777.00 @ 40
C=0.43 = 15 C=0.30 = 15
Elevation Check Centerline 75+00
FL JDK 4-3-96
Elevation Check Centerline 74+00 FL DLL 4-9-96 (1782.80)
Final -4.29 1782.76
Pay (1784.20)
Quantities -2.85 1784.20
80.52 79.31 79.10 80.77 82.92 80.33 77.85 77.30 77.22 76.11
80.1 79.40 78.92 82.55 82.51 78.35 77.51 77.30 76.71
74+ 63 70 78 762 80 82 64 46 42 46 68 88 93 96 98 975 99 104 110
35
250 150 70 47 30 22 22 14 CL 15 24 24 26 37 52 55 60 150 250
off angle off hub FL FL hub off off angle
angle angle
ROW ROW
TP ROW Hub Lt Sta. 72+00 +3.07 1787.05 -9.37 1783.98
BM #8 +7.01 1793.35 1786.34

Station 74+35 Inspection Record
5-3-96 It was necessary to Excavation - Removal - Bedding OK 5-1-96 WAL
excavate the following area No Salvage
for backfill material. (Also use to Laying - Backfill OK 5-3-96 WAL
show unsuitable material volume removed.) See Moisture-Density Test No. 6
D W L
2.0 m x 30.0 m x 35.0 m = 2100 m 3
3
Say 2100 m required for additional Final Pay Quantities:
excavation for embankment and Excavation for Pipe Culverts
backfill. This culvert had to be & Headwalls = 43 m3
backfilled completely for local Additional Excavation for
traffic’s convenience. Backfill or Embankments = 2100 m 3
As a general rule, the unsuitable 1.0 m Reinforced Concrete Pipe = 72 m3
material replacement volume should equal 1.0 m Flared End Sections = 2 each
the volume excavated. Salvaging Culvert Pipe = None
Removal of Existing Headwalls = 2 each
Comp. 5-3-96 WAL
Besides the Final Record of Quantities shown below,
the inspector should maintain a summary record of all
pay items, completed to date, for the Project Manager’s
use in preparing weekending reports.
Appendix 3 - 33
Appendix 3 - 34
Culvert Summary
Construction Inspection: Pay Quantities

6-10-96 Excavated for box complete, rock at grade elevation. DEB 202 m3 exca.
6-11-96 Excavated rock and backfilled. Rock = 6 m x 6.5 m x 0.6 mm = 23.4 m 3 exca.
Backfill = 30 m x 20 m x 2 m = 1200 m 3 DEB 1200 m3 add. exca.
6-12-96 Begin forming footing. Mois. Density Test #17 DEB
represents backfill.
6-14-96 Steel & forms inspected, footing. DEB 1945 kg re-steel
6-15-96 Poured footing 38 m 3 poured. Cylinders 4A & B DEB 3571 m3 Concrete
6-16-96 Checked burlap cure for dampness. Stripped forms DEB
on footing.
6-20-96 Begin setting barrel forms. DEB
6-21-96 Forming barrel placing steel DEB
6-24-96 Barrel ready to pour. Steel & forms okay. DEB 4135 kg re-steel
6-25-96 Poured barrel. 75 m 3 batched. DEB 7125 m3 Concrete
3
1 m wasted - burlap cure.
6-26-96 Checked burlap. DEB
6-30-96 Stripping outside forms. DEB
7-5-96 Stripping forms. DEB
7-6-96 Completed stripping forms & grouted tie rod holes. DEB
7-15-96 Backfilling box. DEB m3
7-16-96 Backfilling, excavation necessary for
backfill = 20 m x 90 m x 3.76 m = 6768.0 m 3 add. exca.
7-20-96 Complete DEB
Appendix 3 - 35
Summary of Culverts -- Group 4
Weekly Accumulative Totals
(See Pg. XXX-XXX for locations)
Rem. Rem. Exc. Exc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Reinf. Reinf. Reinf. Reinf.
Inlets Of For For For For For For For For For For
Exist. Pipe Box Head- Box Inlets Collars Head- Box Inlets Collars
Head- Culverts Walls Culv. Walls Culv.
Walls
(ea) (ea) (m3) (m3) (m3) (m3) (m3) (m3) (m3) (kg) (kg) (kg)
181 31.36 2158.65
565.75 115.341 13445.4
1029.25 160.182 17402.4
1412.0 270.548 28694.4
1660.75 384.813 41978
2 176 1660.75 432.582 1.31 49006.7 99
6 517 1660.75 432.582 1.31 49006.7 99
6 594 1660.75 432.582 1.31 49006.7 99
9 1328 1660.75 432.582 1.31 49006.7 99
9 2184 1660.75 432.582 .348 2.146 49006.7 38 150
9 2184 1660.75 432.582 .348 2.146 49006.7 38 150
9 2184 1660.75 432.582 .348 2.146 49006.7 38 150
9 2875 1660.75 432.582 3.408 2.146 49006.7 230 150
9 3362 1660.75 432.582 5.76 2.146 49006.7 363 150
11 4168 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4244 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4251 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4345 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4408 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4846 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 4893 1660.75 426.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
11 5211 1660.75 436.814 5.76 2.15 48975.9 363 150
600 mm 900 mm 600 mm 900 mm 450 mm 600 mm 750 mm 900 mm 1050 mm 1200 mm 1350 mm 500 mm
Culv. Culv. F.E.S. F.E.S. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc.
Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe
(m) (m) (ea) (ea) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m)
16
16
16 32 66 112
32 132 32 328 144
32 132 32 484 144
40 469 163 609 144
40 469 163 609 112 142 144
40 469 281 609 112 142 144
40 469 521 609 112 142 144
80 559 528 609 112 142 144 106
80 559 528 609 112 142 144 106
88 559 660 609 112 142 144 106
88 607 704 609 112 142 144 106
88 617 704 609 112 142 144 106
82 60 2 2 88 617 704 609 112 142 144 106
82 60 2 2 88 663 704 609 112 142 144 106
82 60 2 2 98 713 704 609 112 142 144 106
144 60 4 2 98 759 704 609 112 142 144 106
144 60 4 2 98 759 760 609 112 142 144 106
Appendix 3 - 36
Appendix 3 - 37
Summary of Group 4 Continued
1800 mm 600 mm 750 mm 900 mm 1050 mm 1200 mm 600 mm 750 mm 900 mm 1050 mm 1200 mm 1350 mm
Culv. Class Class Class Class Class Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc. Conc.
Pipe V V V V V FES FES FES FES FES FES
Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (ea) (ea) (ea) (ea) (ea) (ea)
84 2
174 1 2 3 1
94 174 52.5 1 2 5 1
222 60 174 60 6 11 3 6 1
249 60 174 60 68 11 3 6 2 2 1
249 128 174 60 68 11 5 6 2 2 1
249 128 174 60 68 11 9 6 2 2 1
249 286 174 60 68 12 9 6 2 2 1
106 249 286 174 60 68 12 9 6 2 2 1
106 222 284 174 60 68 12 11 6 2 2 1
106 222 284 174 60 68 14 13 6 2 2 1
106 222 284 174 60 68 14 13 6 2 2 1
1500 mm 1800 mm JACK JACK JACK JACK JACK Rock Gravel Add Week
Conc. Conc. 600 mm 450 mm 400 mm 1050 mm 1200 mm Rip for Exc. for Ending
FES FES Class Class Class Class Class Rap Unsuitable Backfill
V V V V V Type Material &
Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe “B” Embank.
(ea) (ea) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (kg) (m3) Box (m3)
21 21 10-9-96
33 56 10-16-96
95 118 10-23-96
126 148 10-30-96
151 173 11-6-96
84 39.13 151 173 11-13-96
174 39.13 151 196 11-20-96
94 174 52.5 39.13 151 74 Add exc.
for pipe
84 11-27-96
222 60 174 60 68 313.03 151 84 12-4-96
222 68 174 60 68 313.03 151 84 12-11-96
222 68 174 60 68 313.03 151 84 12-18-96
222 286 174 60 68 459.40 151 84 12-25-96
1 222 286 174 60 68 750.31 151 84 1-1-97
1 1 222 286 174 60 68 750.31 151 84 1-8-97
1 1 222 284 174 60 68 1044.03 151 89 1-22-97
1 1 222 284 174 60 68 1044.03 151 89 5-14-97
1 1 222 284 174 60 68 1044.03 151 93 5-21-97
Appendix 3 - 38
Estimate Quantities Record
Culvert Pipe Summary
Item No. 46 600 mm Culvert Pipe Heat Numbers

Lengths Include Y’
‘ Distances (m)
Pipe Add. Total
Station Leng. Allow Leng. Date
(meter) (m) Elb. (m) Const. Ins. 262096 161834 260916 160935 260915A 162159
381+00 90 0 90 9-1-96 DMS 69 28
414+91 48 0 48 9-9-96 DMS 53
Rt
426+91 90 0 90 8-26-96 DMS 72 23
586+45 92 0 92 8-19-96 DMS 72 28
590+72 130 0 130 8-25-96 DMS 110 6 20
602+00 110 0 110 8-25-96 DMS 96 19
99+00 128 0 128 7-26-96 DMS 120 12.5
106+90 88 0 88 9-9-96 DMS 80 13
4616+30 54 0 54 9-10-96 DMS 23 40
396+40 44 5.0 m 49 10-13-96 DMS 20 28
Rt
160+00 70 0 70 7-26-96 DMS 60 18
944 5 949 492 76 191 180 43.5 28
392 #2 -42 #2 -143 #1 Report Report Report
198 week ending 7-31-96 DMS 100 bal 34 bal 48 bal
198 week ending 8-9-96 DMS Report Report Report
198 week ending 8-14-96 DMS
290 week ending 8-21-96 DMS Total 1990.5 m
290 Estimate #2 8-23-96 DMS
710 week ending 9-4-96 DMS A record similar to this for each pay item in a group may be
900 week ending 9-11-96 DMS recorded in a field book separate from other inspection
900 week ending 9-18-96 DMS records. The inspector keeps these pay quantities up to date
900 Estimate #3 9-23-96 DMS and then the project manager needs only the one book for
week ending quantity calculations.
Staking Information
Bridge at Station 310+41
3 - 40 m spans
3-10-96 Ptly. Cldy. - Cold
- WAL
- DDS
- JAM
- TSE
Abut #2 - 311+08
Bent #2 - 310+61
Bent #1 - 310+21
Abut #1 - 309+81
° = 1/2”rebars with center punch mark.
• = tacked hubs
LO = Line Only
∆ = 60 penny spike
Appendix 3 - 39
Appendix 3 - 40
Excavation Record
Bridge Summary
Excavation for Abutment #1 (Lump Sum)
Accumulative
Bridge Location %
Date Station in Bridge Complete Inspector
3-3-96 310+41 Abut #1 10 IMM
3-9-96 310+41 Abut #1 30 IMM
3-16-96 310+41 Abut #1 50 IMM
3-16-96 310+41 Abut #1 70 IMM
3-20-96 310+41 Abut #1 95
3-22-96 310+41 Abut #1 100
3-3-96 310+41 Bent #1 5

3-27-96 310+41 Bent #1 15
3-28-96 310+41 Bent #1 45
3-31-96 310+41 Bent #1 65
4-2-96 310+41 Bent #1 90
4-4-96 310+41 Bent #1 100
Appendix 3 - 41
Concrete Protection Barrier Rail,
Cold Weather Concrete Temperature Data
and Sheet Piling Record
Concrete Protection Barriers
Date Date
Sta. to Sta. Side m Installed Insp. Removed Insp. Remarks
703+17 700+62 Rt 255 4-7-96 WOL
703+17 704+62 Lt 145 4-12-96 WOL
Cold Weather Concrete Temperature (°C) Data
Concrete Temperature
°C
Min. °C
Air Water
Time Temp °C 1st 1st
Pour Sect. of at in 12 24 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Date Sta. Poured Pour Plant Forms Hrs. Hrs. Day Day Day Day Insp. Remarks
12-19-96 310+ Foot. 2 54 12 WEB Installed
Abut#1 forms air
1-13-96 310+ Abut#2 1 60 WEB air temp.
1-15-96 310+ Abut#1 1 60 14 WEB 24-hour forms
loosened air
Sheet Piling Record Station 310+41
Width
Length of
Date of Sheets Number Square Accum.
2
Driven Location Sheet (m) (mm) Driven Meters m Insp. Remarks
1-3-96 Abut #1 8.5 450 30 114.75 114.75 WEB Concrete sheets
1-3-96 Rt. Wing 7.5 450 18 60.75 175.50 WEB Estimate #1
Abut #1
1-4-96 Lt. Wing 7.5 450 14 47.25 222.75 WEB
Abut #1
Appendix 3 - 42
Concrete Placement Record, Form and Reinforcing
Steel Inspection Record and Structural Steel Record
Bridge/Culvert Records
Concrete Placement Record Type 47-B
Section m3 m3 Cylinder Total Pay

Date Poured Req’d. Placed Nos. m3
12-19-96 Footing Abut #1 12.109 12 1/2 1A & B 12.109 Station 310+41 WEB
1-13-96 Footing Abut #2 12.109 12 1/2 2A & B 24.218 Station 310+41 WEB
1-15-96 Abut #1 39.100 40 3A & B 63.318 Station 310+41 WEB
Forms & Reinforcing Steel Inspection Record Bridges
Accum.
kg Total
Station Section Forms Re-Steel Req’d. kg Insp. Date Remarks
310+ Abut #1 OK OK 1010 1010 WEB 12-18-96 23 A-402 bars &
checked A-501 bars
310+ Abut #2 OK OK 1010 2020 WEB 1-10-96 All bars checked.
Tying very good.
310+ Abut #1 OK OK 17107 19126 WEB 1-15-96 All bars checked.
Tying very good.
Structural Steel for Substructure
Date kg Accum.
Station Location Installed Req’d. Total Insp. Remarks
310+ Abut #1 4-1-96 640 640 WEB 2 coats red lead.
612+ Pier #1 6-2-96 704 2688 WEB 2 coats red lead.
612+ Pier #2 704
612+ Abut #2 704
Appendix 3 - 43
Seed Received and Seeding Diary Records
Seed Received Seeding Diary

3-17-96 7 1/2 bags Type “B”mixture at 2 Date: 3-21-96 Monday
bags/ha for 3.65 ha. 178 bags at Weather: Ptly. Cldy. & Mild
2 bags/ha where Type A Mixture Hours: 7-5:30 = 9 hours
for the 89 ha. stored in barn at Equipment on job includes 2 straight trucks, 1
Edward Hayes. tagged by DOR trailer, 1 mulch blower, 2 tractors, 1 disc, 1
inspector D. Gray. There are drill, 3 m wide and 2 pickups. One man
3.65 ha of Type “B”seeding and began soil preparation today with tractor and
89 ha Type “A”. disc. Working from Sta. 12 to 60 on the Rt.
AWL Supt. John James on job. He plans to use
native hay for mulch, the fertilizer will be bulk
and from co-op. Will have a load of fertilizer
here tomorrow. They will try to work 6 to 9 hr.
days a week.
Mulch began arriving on the job today, 2
loads. Two passes with disc is giving good
soil condition.
I marked with lathe 2.0 ha of Type “B”.
Fertilizer arrived today, so begin spreading
from 12+ to 40+ Rt. They broke the drive
chain.
AWL
Seeding Inspector
Seeding Diary Contractor’s Crew: 1 supt., 1 foreman, 12
Date: 3-22-96, Tuesday men
Weather: Fair, wind, & mild Date: 3-23-96
Hours: 7-5:30 = 9 hours Weather: Ptly. cldy., & Windy
Fertilizer spreader fixed and completed Hours: 7-5:30 = 9 hours
spreading fertilizer to Station 63 on Rt. Trying to mulch today but too windy from
Began seeding Type “A”seed from Station 10:00 to 3:30. Only got 300 bales spread.
12+ to 63+ on Rt. This is 32 ha. Started out One man working with tractor and disc on soil
with 5-2 ha areas until drill well adjusted and prep. to Sta. 80 Rt., then worked from Sta. 5+
then used a total of 16 bags from Sta. 12+ to to 70+ on left.
63+ on Rt. Seeded Type “B”from Station 12+ to 63+ on
Contractor is unable to get fertilizer until 3-25 Rt. one acre. Type “B”is 3 m wide. I talked
due to prior commitments by co-op. with Mr. James about using flagmen when
Begin mulching today; hay is blowing real mulching from road. He thought flashers on
well. 1,340 bales used 12+ to 40+ Rt. slightly equipment were working and light traffic. I
over. Using straight disc for punching mulch. asked Mr. Sharp about it, and he said we
It arrived on project last evening. Same needed flagmen. I then advised Mr. James.
tractor used on cupped disc used on puncher. He said he would set the temporary signs and
Project Manager over job today. No use flagmen when he has equipment on the
comments on work. Mulch being stored on roadway. The signs were picked up today.
right of way. See Page #94 for list of signs.
AWL AWL
Seeding Inspector Seeding Inspector
Appendix 3 - 44
Seeding Measurement Record
Seeding Comps. Type “A” *

Width Width
Station m Remarks Station m Remarks
6+70 0 3-17-96 Ptly. Cldy.-Warm 5+10 0 3-19-96 JJE, CFN, EJJ
JJE CFV, EJJ
7+00 7 +80 10
7+10 30 6+00 41
9+00 35 8+00 40
12+20 35 11+00 40
14+00 37 14+00 39
15+20 30 16+00 40
15+25 0 16+10 31
16+10 0
Drive Drive
15+65 0 16+40 0
15+80 27 16+45 7
17+00 30 17+00 40
17+00 73 20+00 40
20+00 75 21+40 36
23+00 75 23+00 37
26+00 75 26+00 39
27+40 75 27+00 40
27+50 30 29+00 35
30+00 30 29+50 35
30+00 30 30+00 41
* Use Marv Lech’s seed comp. program to compute and document areas seeded.
Fertilizer Records
Fertilizer Record Received and Used by kg

Quant. kg kg
Ship. Rec’d. Fert. Fert.
Date Ident. kg Remarks Date Sta.-Sta. Side Ha Req.d Used Insp. Remarks
3-21-96 TL127741 10,000 Bulk-300 3-21-96 12+ 40+ Rt. 21 10,000 10,000 AWL
kg/ha 3-22-96 40+ 63+ Rt. 12.3
spec. 33.3
blend JAS
3-25-96 TL127894 10,000 same as 3-25-96 5+ 60+ Lt. 33.3 10,000 10,000 AWL
above
AWL
3-28-96 TL127897 10,000 same as 3-28-96 60+ 103+ Lt. 33.3 10,000 10,000 AWL
TL127898 15,000 above 3-29-96 63+ 129+ Rt. 33.0 15,000 15,000 AWL
AWL
3-30-96 TL127941 10,220 same as 3-30-96 127+143 Rt. 16.2
above 103+143 Lt. 17.7 comp.
AWL 33.9 10,170 10,220 AWL today
Totals 55,220 183.8 55,140 55,220
Appendix 3 - 45
Mulch Received Record
Mulch Received
Mass Lb. Type
Ticket Quantity Mg Mass of
Date No. Received Received Bale Mulch Insp. Remarks
3-20-96 19877 18400 8.346 28.48 Hay AWL 293 bales
3-20-96 19878 17020 7.720 26.62 Hay AWL 290 bales
3-21-96 None 488 0.221 27.67 Hay AWL
3-22-96 None 450 0.204 25.51 Hay AWL 8 bales
3-22-96 19903 17800 8.073 27.84 Hay AWL 290 bales
3-22-96 19904 18320 8.309 28.56 Hay AWL 291 bales
27.45 30 kg
x lb. x 0.000454 mg/lb = mg Avg. A record similar to this
may be used for
documentation of the
require amount of hay
or straw in Slope
Protection Work.
Appendix 3 - 46
Mulch Placed Record
Mulch Placed Record

Mulch Mulch
Req’d Used
Date Sta.-Sta. Side Hectare Mg Mg Insp. Remarks
3-22-96 12+17-40+ Rt. 21 42 42.143 `AWL 1340 bales @ 31.5 kg = 42.143
3-23-96 40+ -63+ Rt. 12.3 24.6 9.435 Mg
3-24-96 40+ -63+ Rt. --- --- 15.411 AWL blower broke down @ 11:00 a.m.
12.3 24.6 24.846 490 bales @ 31.5 = 15.411 Mg
blower fixed @ 1:00 p.m.
3-26-96 5+ -60+ Lt. 33.3 66.6 30.507 AWL 970 bales @ 31.5 = 30.507 Mg
3-28-96 5+ -60+ Lt. --- --- 25.537 AWL 812 bales @ 31.5 = 25.537 Mg
3-29-96 5+ -60+ Lt. --- --- 10.064 AWL 320 bales @ 31.5 = 10.064 Mg
33.3 66.6 66.108
3-29-96 63+ -127+ Rt. 50.0 100.0 28.714 AWL 913 bales @ 31.5 = 28.714 Mg
3-30-96 63+ -127+ Rt. --- --- 31.450 AWL 1000 bales @ 31.5 = 31.450 Mg.
3-31-96 63+ -127+ Rt. --- --- 35.224 AWL 1120 bales @ 31.5 = 35.224 Mg
4-1-96 63+ -127+ Rt. --- --- 6.290 AWL 200 bales @ 31.5 = 6.290 Mg
50 100.0 11.678
Complete today
Example #1 Excess Placed 0.30 Mg

Amount Required: 8.20 Mg
Amounted Placed: 11.25 Mg
Excess 3.05 Mg
Amount Paid: 8.20 Mg
Example #2 Additional Order
Plan Required Amount: 8.20 Mg
Engineer Ordered Amount: 11.25 Mg
Difference 3.05 Mg
Amount Paid: (8.20) (1.05) = 8.61
11.25 - 8.61 = 2.64
8.20 + 2.64 = 10.84 Mg
Example #3 Order Cut by Engineer
Plan Amount: 8.20 Mg
Engineer Ordered Amount: 5.15 Mg
Difference 3.05 Mg
Amount Paid: 5.15 + 0.41 = 5.56
Example #4 Less Than 5% Excess Placed
Amount Specified: 8.20 Mg
Amount Placed: 8.50 Mg
Excess: 0.30 Mg
Example #5 Less Than 5% Short of Specified Amount
Amount Specified: 8.20 Mg
Amount Placed: 7.90 Mg
Deficit: 0.30 Mg
Project Totals 183.8 423.635 432.311 A record similar to this may be

used for documentation of the
required amount of hay or straw
105% Example in Slope Protection Work
Appendix 3 - 47
Nuclear Densities
QA/QC
Date: May 31, 1996 Remarks:

Operator: A Leinen - correlate with a minimum of three core
Gauge: Troxler Thin Lift Density Gauge densities for each mix type
Density #2-4 - the four readings were taken as follows:
Station: 251+81
Lane: Eastbound Rt.
Lift: Top
Dist. from outside edge: 1.2 m
Mix Type: 13R
Lift Thickness: 2”
1”Plate Used: Yes
EBM Voidless: Specific Gravity - 2.402
(Rice) Density - 2402 kg/m 3
Note: S.G. = density/1000 (metric)
Required: 94% of voidless=2402x.94=2257.88
Spec. (See Operator’s Manual)
Gauge: N - 2200 - if the densities were off by more than 1
Readings E - 2250 1/2%, a correction factor would be computed
S - 2300 as shown below:
W - 2350 Core S.G. - Nuclear S.G. = + correction factor
= 9100 - periodically, you may want to run an extra
Ave. of Readings: 91+00 ÷ 4 = 2275 correlation core to insure accuracy of
Density: 2275 gauge.
S.G.: 2275 ÷ 1000 = 2.275
Correction Factor: +0.0
Corrected S.G. = 2.275
% Voidless Density (Nuclear) = 2.275 = 94.7% A. Leinen
2.402 Inspector’s Signature
Correction Core Density = 2.30
From QA/QC Lab
% Voidless Density (Core) = 2.30 = 95.8%
2.402
Correlation within 1 1/2%: Yes, use nuclear
density # w/o correction factor
Correction Factor = N.A.
Record of Nuclear Densities for Asphalt
Date: 5-24-96 Operator: R. Vajgrt Date: 5-24-96 Operator: R. Vajgrt
Density 1-1
Station 263+66 EB-Lt. Dist. Outside Edge = 8’ Density 1-2
Type 13R Station 286+19 EB-Lt. Dist. outside Edge=7’
Gauge Reading = 2258 Mg/m 3 Type 13R
Specific Gravity = 2258 = 2.258 Gauge Reading = 2225
1000
Voidless (Rice) = 2.402 Specific Gravity = 2225 = 2.225
Density = 2.254 = 93.8% 1000
2.402 Voidless (Rice) = 2.402
Correlation Core = 2.220
Correlation Density = 2.200 = 91.6% Density = 2.225 = 92.6%
2.402 2.402
Notified contractor that density Correlation Core = 2.237
measured failed.
Correlation Density = 2.237 = 93.1%
2.402
Notified contractor that density
measurement failed.
Appendix 3 - 48
Asphalt Plant Book Records
Daily Plant Records
Asphalt Cement
Date: 6-2-96 Weather: Sunny-Ptly. Cldy. Start: 82.073 Mg.
Type 11 Added: 124.75 + 82.073 = 206.823 Mg.
Job Mix Start: 11:00 a.m. Stop: 1.96 m @ 138°=12643 gal. x
(.9253) = 10434 gal. @ 15 °C
ACC 8.4104 lb/gal ÷ 2000 lb/ton =
43.878 Ton x .907 Mg/Ton = 39.796 Mg
Mg Produced: 2783.07 Stop: 7:30 p.m. Used: 39.796 Mg
Mg Waste: 133.52 Temp: 80° A Cement Mg/ACC Mg = 0.058548653
Mg Pavement Pay: 2626.0 Mix Temp. 300° AC Non-Pay Mg.: 1.902 (waste=4.78%)
Mg Patching Pay: 23.55 AC Pay Mg.: 37.894
Mg Prod.: 2783.07 Accum. Mg.: 5731.92
AGG. 5.22%
Plant Waste: -133.52 Mix 5.85
Mg Delivered Total: 2649.55 Mg KKF
Road Waste: 0 Load ID Wt Per Gal Spec. Gravity Net Mg
Mg Plant Waste: 133.52 16761 8.3960 1.0086 24.61
Mg Total Waste: 133.52 17167 8.4320 1.0129 25.27
17169 8.4320 1.0129 25.22
16795 8.3960 1.0086 25.10
16806 8.3960 1.0086 25.55
8.4104 124.75
To convert ton to Mg., multiply number of tons
0.907 to get Mg.
Asphalt Cement
Date: 6-3-96 Weather: Cldy., occ. rain Start: 41.168 Mg. (volume may not be stop
Type 11 volume)
Job Mix Start: 1:15 p.m. * Added: 120.04 + 41.168 = 161.208 Mg.
Stop: 1.27 m @ 149°C = 19467 gal. =
ACC 81.863 Tons
Mg. Produced: 1282.41 Stop: 5.30 (81.863 Tons) x .907 Mg/tons=74.249 Mg
p.m. % Waste: 2.257%
Mg. Waste: 28.95 Temp.: 20°C Used: 74.249
Mg. Pavement Pay: 1237.46 Mix Temp. AC Mg/ACC Mg: 0.0586491139
Mg. Patching Pay: 16.00 * Due to AC Non-Pay Mg.: 1.677 Mg
Mg. Proc.: 1282.41 yesterday’s (Waste = 0.02257 x 74.299)
rain-plant site AC Pay Mg.: 72.572 Mg
Plant Waste: 28.95 saturated/fire in
Mg Del. Total: 1253.46 heated tank @ BIBA AGG. 6.58%
Road Waste: 0 4:00 p.m.-No DOR AML 6-2-96 Mix 6.17
Plant Waste: 28.95 damage KKF
Total Waste: 28.95 Accum. Mg.- Load ID Kg/L Spec. Gravity Net Mg
3082.37 17062 2.2275 1.0129 24.33
17064 2.2275 1.0129 23.42
17066 2.2275 1.0129 24.96
17070 2.1955 1.0129 23.12
17074 2.1955 1.0129 24.21
2.2147 120.04
Avg.
Appendix 3 - 49
Excavation Record for Estimating Purposes Only
(Not for Final Payment Measurements)
Excavation: * Truck haul 10 m 3 Per Load

Entries without * are 25 m 3 Scraper Loads
(End Work) Load Daily

Date Count Total Accum. m3 Insp. Location/Remarks
9-10-96 1040 26000.00 26000.00 DD 63800 to 62240
*9-12-96 377 3770.00 29770.00 SW 657+00-586
*9-17-96 2020 20200 49970 SW
9-17-96 1600 41600 91570 SW 664+00-603+00
9-24-96 1368 34200 125770 DW 528+00 Rt. - 477+00 Lt.
*9-24-96 1088 10880 136650 DW 664+00 - 570+00
*10-1-96 1654 12546 153190 DW 670+00 Lt. - 653+00
10-1-96 1652 41300 194490 DW 480+00 - 465+00
10-8-96 36 972 195462 SW 530+00
*10-8-96 600 6000 201462.0 DW 553+00 - 587 Rt.
*10-14-96 1453 14530 215992.0 SW 560+00 - 571+00 Rt. Side
10-14-96 1374 37071 253063.0 DD 445+00 - 480+00 Rt.
10-22-96 677 18279 271342.0 SW 470+477+00 1655+00 - 632+00
10-29-96 665 17955 289297.0 SW
11-5-96 448 12096 301393.0 DD 470+00 - 445+00 Lt.
11-11-96 378 10206.00 311599.0 GW 664+00 - 650+00
2-4-97 Deduct. to be paid 19967.50 DW 30045.5 farm site - 10068.0 credit
as borrow 291632.0 DW summary from exc. borrow
Summary of Pavement Items
255 to 205 mm Subgrade

255 mm PCC Pave. PCC Pavement Preparation Foundation Course
Daily Accum. Daily Accum. Daily Accum. Daily Accum.
Date Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Total m2 Insp.
8-2-96 Wed. 638.48 1890.63 X
8-3-96 Th. 4105.56 10493.04 1214.68 3105.31 Subgrade preparation and foundation course area is X
8-4-95 Fr. 8487.00 18980.04 2514.67 5619.98 same as the area paved X
8-5-96 Sat. 8061.00 27041.04 2388.44 8008.42 X
8-7-96 Mon. 9888.52 36929.56 2776.48 10,784.90 X
8-8-96 Tu. 7646.07 44575.63 2268.92 13,053.82 X
8-9-96 Wed. 7462.56 52038.19 2061.34 15115.16 X
8-10-96 Th. 10446.00 62484.19 3095.11 18210.27 X
8-11-96 Fr. 6107.13 68591.32 1805.79 20016.06 X
Appendix 3 - 50
Sign Day Records
August 1993
Weekly
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Date 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
No. of 6 6 12
Signs 29 30 31
6 6 6 18
1 2 3 4
6 6 6 6 24
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 42
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 42
Date 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
No. of 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 42
Signs 25 27 28 29 30
6 6 6 6 6 30
Sign Day
Weekly Accum. Total Locations Insp.
12 Co. Rd. Closure @ 1859+80 JS

210 Co. Rd. Closure @ 1859+80 VH
10-5-96 VH
Appendix 3 - 51
Barricade Records
Item No.
August 1993
Weekly
Total
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Date 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
No. of 4 4 8
Signs 29 30 31
4 4 4 12
September 1993
1 2 3 4
4 4 4 4 16
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 28
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 28
Date 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
No. of 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 28
Signs 25 27 28 29 30
4 4 4 4 4 20
Type III Barricades
Weekly Accum. Total Locations Insp.

120 Co. Rd. Closure @ 1859+80 SH
140 Co. Rd. Closure @ 1859+80 VH
Appendix 3 - 52
Sign Type Signs in a Group Number of Barricades
(1) (1A)
Road Closed = 2 2
Road Closed 1 Mi. Ahead 2 Totals
2 4
Type II Barr. 4
(2) (2A (2B)

Rt. Lane Closed Ahead = 1 2 2
Drop Off = 1 2 2
Shoulder Work = 1 2 2
Bump 2
Totals 3 6 8
(3) (3A)
Left Lane Closed 1/2 Mile = 1 1
Left Lane Closed 1500’ = 1
Merge = 1 1
Shoulder Work = 2 2
Drop Off = 4
Totals 5 8
64 Vertical Panels as of 6-22-96
53 Vertical Panels as of 8-6-96
Sign Group Purpose
4-17-96 Group 1 Shoulder Work
4-18-96 Group 1A Shoulder Work
4-20-96 Group 2 & (Group 2 Waverly Road) Shoulder Work
4-21-96 Groups 1 & 3 Shoulder Work
4-22-96 Groups 1A & 3A Shoulder Work
4-29-96 Groups 1, 2A, & 3 Shoulder Work
Appendix 3 - 53
APPENDIX 4 – TABLES
Metric Conversion Tables
Base Units ................................ ................................ ................................ ................. 4-3

Decimal Prefixes ................................ ................................ ................................ ........4-3
Derived Units ................................ ................................ ................................ ............. 4-3
Project Definition................................ ................................ ................................ ........4-4
Area, Length, and Volume Conversion Factors ................................ ......................... 4-5
Civil and Structural Engineering Conve rsion Factors ................................ ................. 4-6
Metric/English Area Conversion ................................ ................................ ................. 4-7
Drawing Sizes ................................ ................................ ................................ ............ 4-7
Units for Structural Steel Design ................................ ................................ ................ 4-8
Metric Bolt Designation ................................ ................................ .............................. 4-8
Structural Steel for Bridges ................................ ................................ ........................ 4-9
Reinforcing Steel ................................ ................................ ................................ .......4-10
Hard Conversions for Construction Materials ................................ ............................. 4-11
Sieves ................................ ................................ ................................ ........................ 4-12
Areas of Circular Segments................................ ................................ ................................ ...4-14
Areas of 90° Fillets ................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 4-17
Areas of Fillets Other Than 90° ................................ ................................ ............................. 4-18
Volume of Cylinder Tank ................................ ................................ ................................ .......4-19
Culvert Pipe Fill ................................ ................................ ................................ ..................... 4-20
English Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as Ft 2 ................................ ........................... 4-21
English Elliptical Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as Ft 2 ................................ ............. 4-22
English Circular Culvert Pipe Embankment End Areas as Ft 2 ................................ ............... 4-23
Metric Circular Culvert Pipe Embankment End Areas as m 2 ................................ ................. 4-24
Metric Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as m 2................................ .............................. 4-25
Metric Elliptical Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as m 2................................ ................ 4-26
Weights of Prestressed Concrete Bearing Pile ................................ ................................ .....4-27
Steel Pipe Pile Data ................................ ................................ ................................ .............. 4-27
Appendix 4 - 1
Appendix 4 - 2
Base Units
Quantity Unit Symbol

length meter m
mass* kilogram kg
time second s
electric current ampere A
temperature kelvin K
luminous intensity candela cd
* “Weight”in common practice often is used to mean “mass”.
Decimal Prefixes
Prefix Symbol Order of Expression

Magnitude
nano n 10-9 0,000,000,001 (1 billionth)
micro µ 10-6 0.000001 (one millionth)
milli m 10-3 0.001 (one thousandth)
kilo k 103 1000 (one thousand)
Mega M 106 1,000,000 (1 million)
Giga G 109 1,000,000,0000 (1 billion)
Derived Units
Quantity Name Symbol Expression

frequency hertz Hz Hz = s-1
force newton N N = kg•m/s 2
pressure, stress pascal Pa Pa = N/m2
energy, work, quantity of heat joule J J = N•m
power, radiant flux watt W W = J/s
electric charge, quantity coulomb C C = A•s
electric potential volt V V = W/A or J/C
capacitance farad F F = C/V
electric resistance ohm Ω Ω = V/A
S = A/V or Ω
-1
electric conductance siemens S
magnetic flux weber Wb Wb = V•s
2
magnetic flux density tesia T T = Wb/m
inductance henry H H = Wb/A
luminous flux lumen lm lm = cd•sr
illuminance lux lx lx = lm/m2
Appendix 4 - 3
Project Definition
Quantity Metric Unit Symbol English

Unit
Surveying Length kilometer, meter km, m mile, foot
area square kilometer km2 square mile
hectare ha acre
square meter m2 square foot
plane angle degree ° °
minute ‘ ‘
second “ “
Excavating length meter, millimeter m, mm foot, inch
volume cubic meter m3 cubic yard
Haul distance kilometer km mile
mass metric ton t English ton
Paving length meter, millimeter m, mm foot, inch
area square meter m2 square yard
Concrete length meter, millimeter m, mm foot
area square meter m2 square foot
temperature degree Celsius °C °F
water capacity liter L gallon, MG
mass (weight) kilogram, gram kg, g pound
x-sectional area square millimeter mm2 square inch
Drainage length meter, millimeter m, mm foot
area hectare ha acre
square meter m2 square foot
square kilometer km2 square mile
volume cubic meter m3 square foot
discharge cubic m3/s cubic foot/s
meter/second
velocity meter/second m/s foot/second
slope millimeter/meter mm/m feet/foot
Appendix 4 - 4
Area, Length, and Volume Conversion Factors
From To
Quantity Inch-Pound Metric Multiply
Units Units By
Length * mile (U.S. Statute) m 1609.347

mile (international) km 1.609344
yard m 0.9144
foot m 0.3048
* foot (U.S. Survey) m 0.30480061
mm 304.8
inch mm 25.4
2
Area * square mile (U.S. Statute) km 2.589998
2
* acre m 4046.873
2
ha (10,000 m ) 0.4046873
2
square yard m 0.83612736
2
square foot m 0.09290304
2
square inch mm 645.16
3
Volume acre foot m 1233.4894
3
cubic yard m 0.7645549
3
cubic foot cm 28316.85
3
@ cubic foot L (1000 cm ) 28,31685
3
cubic foot m 0.02831685
3
100 board feet L (1000 cm ) 0.235974
-3
gallon kL (1000 L) 3.785412 x 10
3
1000 gallons cm 3785412.
3
cubic inch mm 16387.064
Note: Underline denotes exact number.
* Any data, in feet, derived from and published as a result of geodetic surveys will
remain with the U.S. Survey foot including all stationing, land measure, and
coordinate conversions.
The U.S. Survey foot, as established in the U.S. Metric Law of 1886, is based on the
relationship of 1 m = 39.37 inches or 1 foot = 1200/3937 m. All conversion factors for
units of land measure in this table referenced to this footnote (*) are based on the
U.S. Survey foot.
Appendix 4 - 5
Civil and Structural Engineering
Conversion Factors
From To
Quantity Inch-Pound Metric Multiply
Units Units By
lb kg 0.4535924
@ Mass kip (1000 lb) megagram (1000 kg) 0.435924
ton MG 0.9071847
Mass/unit length plf kg/m 1.488164
Mass/unit area psf kg/m2 4.882428
Mass density pcf kg/m3 16l01846
Force lb N 4.448222
kip kN 4.448222
Force/unit length plf N/m 14.59390

klf Kn/m 14.59390
psf Pa 47.88026
Pressure, stress ksf kPa 47.88026
modulus of elasticity psi kPa 6.894757
@ psi Mpa 0.006894757
Bending moment, ft-lb N•m 1.355818

torque, moment of ft-kip kN•m 1.355818
force in-lb N•m 0.1129848
Moment of mass lb-ft kg•m 0.138255

2 2
Moment of inertia lb-ft kg•m 0.0421401
4
Second moment in mm4 416,231.4
4 4
of area ft m 0.008630975
Section modulus in3 mm3 16,387.064
Note: Underline denotes exact number.
Appendix 4 - 6
Metric/English Area Conversion
To Convert
Quantity From To Multiply
By
Length Meter (m) Foot 3937/1200=3.280833 ft/m
Foot Meter (m) 0.30480061 m/ft
Acre Hectare (ha) 0.40468726 ha/Acre
Acre Square Meter (m2) 4046.87260988 m 2/Acre
Acre Hectare (ha) Acre 2.47104393 Acre/ha

Square Meter (m2) Square Foot 10.76386736 ft 2/m2
Hectare (ha) Square Meter (m2) 10,000 m 2/ha
Drawing Sizes
ISO Metric
Designation Sheet Size Replaces
A0 841 x 1189 mm 34 x 44 inches
A1 594 x 841 mm 22x34 inches
A2 420 x 594 mm 17 x 22 inches
A3 297 x 420 mm 11 x 17 inches
A4 210 x 297 mm 8 1/2 x 11 inches
Appendix 4 - 7
Units for Structural Steel Design
Fraction Exact Conversion Rounded to:

(in.) (mm) (mm)
1/16 1.5875 2
1/8 3.175 3
3/16 4.7625 5
1/4 6.35 6
5/16 7.9375 8
3/8 9.525 10
7/16 11.1125 11
1/2 12.7 13
5/8 15.875 16
3/4 19.05 19
7/8 22.225 22
1 25.4 25
Metric Bolt Designation
Diameter Diameter
Designation
(mm) (in.)
M16 16 0.63
M20 20 0.79
M22 22 0.87
M24 24 0.94
M27 27 1.06
M30 30 1.18
M36 36 1.42
Appendix 4 - 8
Structural Steel for Bridges
Grade Grade Yield Strength

S.I. U.S. (MPa)
205 30 205
250 35 240
250 36 250
275 40 275
310 45 310
345 50 345
345W 50W 345
415 60 415
450 65 450
485W 70W 485
620 90 620
655 95 655
690 100 690
690W 100W 690
725 105 725
795 115 795
860 125 860
895 130 895
1000 145 1000
1035 150 1035
1105 160 1105
1140 165 1140
1240 180 1240
1450 210 1450
1795 260 1795
Appendix 4 - 9
Reinforcing Steel
Metric U.S.
Bar Customary Diameter Area Diameter Area
Designation Designation (in.) (in.2) (mm) (mm2)
#3 0.375 0.11 9.5 71
10 11.3 100
#4 0.500 0.20 12.7 127
#5 0.625 0.31 15.9 198
15 16.0 200
#6 0.750 0.44 19.1 285
20 19.5 300
#7 0.875 0.60 22.2 388
25 25.2 500
#8 1.000 0.79 25.4 507
#9 1.125 1.00 28.6 641
30 29.9 700
#10 1.270 1.27 32.3 817
35 35.7 1000
#11 1.410 1.56 35.8 1007
#14 1.693 2.25 43.0 1452
45 43.7 1500
55 56.4 2500
#18 2.257 4.00 57.3 2581
Appendix 4 - 10
Hard Conversions for Construction Materials
Reinforcing Bars, M31M
Grade Tensile and Yield Strengths

Tensile Minimum Yield Minimum Yield
Metric English Strength Strength Strength
Value Value (Mpa) (Mpa) (ksi)
300 40 500 300 40
400 60 600 400 60
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Metric Value English Value

Steel 0.0000117/°C 0.0000065/°F
Concrete 0.0000108/°C 0.000006/°F
Unit Weights
Metric Value English Value

3
Steel 7848.3 kg/m 490 pcf
Concrete 2402.5 kg/m 3 150 pcf
Appendix 4 - 11
Sieves
Sieve Designation, (W)

English
SI StandardB
Alternative
125 mm 5 in.
106 mm 4.24 in.
100 mm 4 in.
90 mm 3 1/2 in.
75 mm 3 in.
63 mm 2 1/2 in.
53 mm 2.12 in.
50 mm 2 in.
45 mm 1 3/4 in.
37.5 mm 11/2 in.
31.5 mm 1 1/4 in.
26.5 mm 1.06 in.
25.0 mm 1 in.
22.4 mm 7/8 in.
19.0 mm 3/4 in.
16.0 mm 5/8 in.
13.2 mm 0.530 in.
12.5 mm 1/2 in.
11.2 mm 7/16 in.
9.50 mm 3/8 in.
8.00 mm 5/16 in.
6.70 mm 0.265 in.
6.30 mm 1/4 in.
5.60 mm No. 3 1/2
4.75 mm No. 4
4.00 mm No. 5
3.35 mm No. 6
2.80 mm No. 7
2.36 mm No. 8
2.00 mm No. 10
1.70 mm No. 12
1.40 mm No. 14
1.18 mm No. 16
1.00 mm No. 18
850 µm No. 20
710 µm No. 25
600 µm No. 30
500 µm No. 35
425 µm No. 40
355 µm No. 45
Appendix 4 - 12
Sieves (Continued)
Sieve Designation, (W)

English
SI StandardB
Alternative
300 µm No. 50
250 µm No. 60
212 µm No. 70
180 µm No. 80
150 µm No. 100
125 µm No. 120
106 µm No. 140
90 µm No. 170
75 µm No. 200
63 µm No. 230
53 µm No. 270
45 µm No. 325
38 µm No. 400
32 µm No. 450
25 µm No. 500
20 µm No. 635
Appendix 4 - 13
Areas of Circular Segments
b
Given: rise, b x chord, c x coefficient for b/c
c Example. Given: rise = 2.10 and chord = 5.65.
b/c = 2.10/5.65 =0.3717
Coefficient by interpolation = 0.7354
Area = b x c x coeffi. = 2.10 x 5.65 x 0.7354 = 8.7255
A• Coefficient b/c A• Coefficient b/c A• Coefficient b/c A• Coefficient b/c

1 .6667 .0022 46 .6722 .1017 91 .6895 .2097 136 .7230 .3373
2 .6867 .0044 47 .6724 .1040 92 .6901 .2122 137 .7249 .3404
3 .6667 .0066 48 .6727 .1063 93 .6906 .2148 138 .7290 .3436
4 .6667 .0067 49 .6729 .1086 94 .6912 .2174 139 .7270 .3489
5 .6667 .0109 50 .6732 .1109 95 .6918 .2200 140 .7281 .3501
6 .6667 .0131 51 .6734 .1131 96 .6924 .2226 141 .7292 .3634

7 .6668 .0153 52 .6737 .1154 97 .6930 .2282 142 .7303 .3867
8 .6668 .0175 53 .6740 .1177 98 .6936 .2279 143 .7314 .3600
9 .6669 .0197 54 .6743 .1200 99 .6942 .2305 144 .7325 .3633
10 .6670 .0218 55 .6746 .1224 100 .6948 .2332 146 .7326 .3806
11 .6670 .0240 56 .6749 .1247 101 .6954 .2388 148 .7248 .3700
12 .6671 .0282 57 .6752 .1270 102 .6961 .2386 147 .7380 .3794
13 .6672 .0284 58 .6755 .1293 103 .6967 .2412 148 .7372 .3786
14 .6672 .0306 59 .6758 .1316 104 .6974 .2439 149 .7384 .3802
15 .6673 .0328 60 .6761 .1340 105 .6980 .2466 150 .7396 .3837
16 .6674 .0350 61 .6784 .1363 106 .6987 .2493 151 .7408 .3871
17 .6874 .0372 62 .6788 .1387 107 .6994 .2520 152 .7421 .3908
18 .6675 .0394 63 .6771 .1410 106 .7001 .2548 153 .7434 .3942
19 .6678 .0416 64 .6775 .1434 109 .7008 .2575 154 .7447 .3977
20 .6677 .0437 65 .6779 .1457 110 .701`5 .2603 155 .7480 .4013
21 .6678 .0459 66 .6782 .1481 111 .7022 .2631 156 .7473 .4049
22 .6679 .0481 67 .6788 .1505 112 .7030 .2659 157 .7488 .4085
23 .6880 .0504 68 .6790 .1529 113 .7037 .2887 158 .7500 .4122
24 .6681 .0582 69 .6794 .1553 114 .7045 .2715 159 .7514 .4159
25 .6682 .0548 70 .6797 .1577 115 .7052 .2743 160 .7528 .4196
26 .6684 .0570 71 .6801 .1901 116 .7080 .2772 161 .7542 .4233
27 .6685 .0592 72 .6805 .1625 117 .7088 .2800 162 .7567 .4270
28 .6687 .0614 73 .6809 .1649 118 .7076 .2829 163 .7571 .4308
29 .6688 .0636 74 .6814 .1673 119 .7084 .2858 164 .7596 .4346
30 .6890 .0658 75 .6818 .1697 120 .7092 .2887 165 .7801 .4385
31 .6691 .0681 76 .6822 .1722 121 .7100 .2916 168 .7818 .4424
32 .6693 .0703 77 .8826 .1748 122 .7109 .2945 167 .7832 .4463
33 .6894 .0725 78 .8831 .1771 123 .7117 .2975 167 .7948 .4502
34 .6696 .0747 79 .6835 .1795 124 .7128 .3004 169 .7864 .4542
35 .6698 .0770 80 .6840 .1820 125 .7134 .3034 170 .7680 .4582
36 .6700 .0792 81 .6844 .1845 126 .7143 .3064 171 .7896 .4822
37 .6702 .0814 82 .6849 .1869 127 .7152 .3094 172 .7712 .4663
38 .6704 .0637 83 .6854 .1894 1`28 .7161 .3124 173 .7729 .4704
39 .6706 .0859 84 .6859 .1919 129 .7170 .3155 174 .7746 .4745
40 .6708 .0882 85 .6864 .1944 130 .7180 .3185 175 .7763 .4787
41 .6710 .0904 86 .6869 .1970 131 .7189 .3216 178 .7781 .4828
42 .6712 .0927 87 .6874 .1996 132 .7199 .3247 177 .7799 .4871
43 .6714 .0449 88 .6879 .2020 133 .7209 .3278 178 .7817 .4914
44 .6717 .0972 89 .6884 .2046 134 .7219 .3309 179 .7835 .4967
45 .6719 .0995 90 .6890 .2071 135 .7229 .3341 180 .7854 .5000
Appendix 4 - 14
Areas of Circular Segments
b for Ratios of Rise and Diameter
b = Rise; d = Diameter
d
Area = d2 x Coefficient
b/d Coefficient b/d Coefficient b/c Coefficient b/c Coefficient b/d Coefficient
.001 .000042 .051 .015119 .101 .041477 .151 .074590 .201 .112625
.002 .000119 .052 .015561 .102 .042081 .152 .075307 .202 .113427
.003 .000219 .053 .016008 .103 .042687 .153 .076028 .203 .114231
.004 .000337 .054 .016458 .104 .043296 .154 .076747 .204 .115036
.005 .000471 .055 .016912 .105 .043908 .155 .077470 .205 .115842
.006 .000619 .056 .017369 .106 .044523 .156 .078194 .206 .116651
.007 .000779 .057 .017831 .107 .045140 .157 .078921 .207 .117460
.008 .000952 .058 .018297 .108 .045759 .158 .079650 .208 .118271
.009 .001135 .059 .018766 .109 .046381 .159 .080380 .209 .119084
.010 .001329 .060 .019239 .110 .047006 .160 .081112 .210 .119898
.011 .001533 .061 .019716 .111 .047633 .161 .081847 .211 .120713
.012 .001746 .062 .020197 .112 .048262 .162 .082582 .212 .121530
.013 .001969 .063 .020681 .113 .048894 .163 .083320 .213 .122348
.014 .002199 .064 .021168 .114 .049529 .164 .084060 .214 .123167
.015 .002438 .065 .021660 .115 .050165 .165 .084801 .215 .123938
.016 .002685 .066 .022155 .116 .050805 .166 .085545 .216 .124811
.017 .002940 .067 .022653 .117 .051446 .167 .086290 .217 .125634
.018 .003202 .068 .023155 .118 .052090 .168 .087037 .218 .126459
.019 .003472 .069 .023660 .119 .052737 .169 .087785 .219 .127286
.020 .003749 .070 .024168 .120 .053385 .170 .088536 .220 .128114
.021 .004032 .071 .024680 .121 .054037 .171 .089288 .221 .128943
.022 .004322 .072 .025196 .122 .054690 .172 .090042 .222 .129773
.023 .004619 .073 .025714 .123 .055346 .173 .090797 .223 .130606
.024 .004922 .074 .026236 .124 .056004 .174 .091555 .224 .131438
.025 .005231 .075 .026761 .125 .066684 .175 .092314 .225 .132273
.026 .005546 .076 .027290 .126 .057327 .176 .093074 .226 .133109
.027 .005867 .077 .027821 .127 .057991 .177 .093837 .227 .133948
.028 .006194 .078 .028356 .128 .058658 .178 .094601 .228 .134784
.029 .006527 .079 .028894 .129 .059328 .179 .095367 .229 .135624
.030 .006866 .080 .029435 .130 .059999 .180 .096135 .230 .136465
.031 .007209 .081 .029979 .131 .060673 .181 .096904 .231 .137307
.032 .007559 .082 .030526 .132 .061349 .182 .097675 .232 .138151
.033 .007913 .083 .031077 .133 .062027 .183 .098447 .233 .138996
.034 .008273 .084 .031630 .134 .062707 .184 .099221 .234 .139842
.035 .008638 .085 .032186 .135 .063389 .185 .099997 .235 .140689
.036 .009008 .086 .032746 .136 .064074 .186 .100774 .236 .141538
.037 .009383 .087 .033308 .137 .064761 .187 .101553 .237 `.152388
.038 .009764 .088 .033873 .138 .065449 .188 .102334 .238 .143239
.039 .010148 .089 .034441 .139 .066140 .189 .103116 .239 .144091
.040 .010538 .090 .035012 .140 .066833 .190 .103900 .240 .144945
.041 .010932 .091 .035588 .141 .067528 .191 .104686 .241 .145800
.042 .011331 .092 .036162 .142 .068225 .192 .105472 .242 .146658
.043 .011734 .093 .036742 .143 .068924 .193 .106262 .243 .147513
.044 .012142 .094 .037324 .144 .069626 .194 .107051 .244 .148371
.045 .012555 .095 .037909 .145 .070329 .195 .107843 .245 .149321
.046 .012971 .096 .038497 .148 .071034 .196 .108636 .246 .150091
.047 .013393 .097 .039087 .147 .071741 .197 .109431 .247 .150953
.048 .013818 .098 .039681 .148 .072450 .198 .110227 .248 .151816
.049 .0145248 .099 .040277 .149 .073162 .199 .111025 .249 .152681
.050 .014681 .100 .040875 .150 .073875 .200 .111824 .250 .153548
Appendix 4 - 15
Areas of Circular Segments (cont.)
b for Ratios of Rise and Diameter
d b = Rise; d = Diameter
Area = d2 x Coefficient
b/d Coefficient b/d Coefficient b/c Coefficient b/c Coefficient b/d Coefficient
.251 .154413 .301 .199085 .351 .245935 .401 .294350 .451 .343778
.252 .155281 .302 .200003 .352 .246890 .402 .295330 .452 .344773
.253 .156149 .303 .200922 .353 .247845 .403 .296311 .453 .345768
.254 .157019 .304 .201841 .354 .248801 .404 .297292 .454 .346764
.255 .157891 .305 .202782 .355 .249758 .405 .298274 .455 .347760
.256 .158763 .306 .203683 .356 .250715 .406 .299256 .456 .348756
.257 .159636 .307 .204605 .357 .251673 .407 .300238 .457 .349752
.258 .160511 .308 .205528 .358 .252632 .408 .301221 .458 .350749
.259 .161386 .309 .206452 .359 .253591 .409 .302204 .459 .351745
.260 .162263 .310 .207376 .360 .254551 .410 .303187 .460 .352742
.261 .163141 .311 .208302 .361 .255511 .411 .304171 .461 .353739
.262 .164020 .312 .209228 .362 .256472 .412 .305156 .462 .354736
.263 .164900 .313 .210155 .363 .257433 .413 .306140 .463 .355733
.264 .165781 .314 .211083 .364 .258395 .414 .307125 .464 .356730
.265 .166663 .315 .212011 .365 .259358 .415 .308110 .485 .357728
.266 .167546 .316 .212941 .366 .260321 .416 .309096 .466 .358725
.267 .168431 .317 .213871 .367 .261285 .417 .310082 .467 .359723
.268 .169316 .318 .214802 .368 .262249 .418 .311068 .468 .360721
.269 .170202 .319 .215734 .369 .263214 .419 .312055 .469 .361719
.270 .171090 .320 .216666 .370 .264179 .420 .313042 .470 .36271`7
.271 .171978 .321 .217600 .371 .265145 .421 .314029 .471 .363715
.272 .172868 .322 .218534 .372 .266111 .422 .315017 .472 .364714
.273 .173758 .323 .219469 .373 .267078 .423 .316005 .473 .365712
.274 .174650 .324 .2204040 .374 .268046 .424 .316993 .474 .366711
.275 .175542 .325 .221341 .375 .269014 .425 .317981 .475 .367710
.276 .176436 .326 .222278 .376 .269982 .426 .318970 .476 .368706
.277 .177330 .327 .223216 .377 .270951 .427 .319959 .477 .369707
.278 .178226 .328 .224154 .378 .271921 .428 .320949 .478 .370706
.279 .179122 .329 .225094 .379 .272891 .429 .321938 .479 .371706
.280 .180020 .330 .226034 .380 .273861 .430 .322928 .480 .372704
.281 .180918 .331 .226974 .381 .274832 .431 .323919 .481 .373704
.282 .181818 .332 .227916 .382 .275804 .432 .324909 .482 .374703
.283 .182718 .333 .228858 .383 .276776 .433 .325900 .483 .375702
.284 .183619 .334 .229801 .384 .277748 .434 .326891 .484 .376702
.285 .184522 .335 .230745 .385 .278721 .435 .327883 .485 .377701
.296 .185425 .336 .231689 .386 .279695 .438 .328874 .486 .378701
.287 .186329 .337 .232634 .387 .280669 .437 .329866 .487 .370701
.288 .18725 .338 .233580 .388 .281643 .438 .330858 .488 .380700
.289 .188141 .339 .234526 .389 .282618 .439 .331851 .489 381700
.290 .189048 .340 .235473 .390 .283593 .440 .332843 .490 .382706
.291 .189956 .341 .236421 .391 .284569 .441 .333836 .491 .383700
.292 .190865 .342 .237369 .392 .285545 .442 .334829 .492 .384690
.293 .191774 .343 .238319 .393 .286521 .443 .335823 .493 385699
.294 .192685 .344 .239268 .394 .287499 .444 .336816 .494 .386890
.295 .193597 .345 .240219 .395 .288476 .445 .337810 .495 .387699
.296 .194509 .384 .241170 .396 .289454 .446 .338804 .496 .388690
.297 .195423 .347 .242122 .397 .290432 .447 .339796 .498 .389698
.298 .196337 .348 .243074 .398 .291411 .448 .340793 .498 .390699
.299 .197252 .349 .244027 .399 .292393 .449 .341788 .499 .391698
.300 .198168 .350 .244980 .400 .293370 .450 .342783 .500 .392699
Appendix 4 - 16
Areas of 90° Fillets
R = Radius Area = R2 x .214602
R Lc
Lc = Length of Curve
A LC = .0174533 R90°
= 1.570796 x 12
R Lc Area R Lc Area
1 1.57 0.22 13.5 21.21 39.11
1.5 2.36 0.48 14 21.99 42.06
2 3.14 0.86 14.5 22.78 45.12
2.5 3.93 1.34 15 23.56 48.29
3 4.71 1.93 15.5 24.35 51.56
3.5 5.50 2.63 16 25.13 54.94
4 6.28 3.43 16.5 25.92 58.43
4.5 7.07 4.35 17 26.70 62.02
5 7.85 5.37 17.5 27.49 65.72
5.5 8.64 6.49 18 28.27 69.53
6 9.42 7.73 18.5 29.06 73.45
6.5 10.21 9.07 19 29.84 77.47
7 11.00 10.52 19.5 30.63 81.60
7.5 11.78 12.07 230 31.42 85.84
8 12.57 13.73 20.5 32.20 90.19
8.5 13.35 15.50 21 32.99 94.64
9 14.14 17.38 21.5 33.77 99.20
9.5 14.92 19.37 22 34.56 103.87
10 15.71 21.46 22.5 35.34 108.64
10.5 16.49 23.66 23 36.13 113.52
11 17.28 25.97 23.5 36.91 118.51
11.5 18.06 28.38 24 37.70 123.61
12 18.85 30.90 24.5 38.48 128.81
12.5 19.63 33.53 25 39.27 134.13
13 20.42 36.27 25.5 40.05 139.54
Appendix 4 - 17
Areas of Fillets Other Than 90° =
R2 [tan 4/2 - (.008727 x 4)]
Length of return other than 90° =

.0174533 x 4R
R Lc Area R Lc Area
26 40.84 145.07 38.5 60.47 318.09
26.5 41.63 150.70 39 61.26 326.41
27 42.41 156.44 39.5 62.05 334.83
27.5 43.20 162.29 40 62.83 343.36
28 43.98 168.25 40.5 63.62 352.00
28.5 44.77 174.31 41 64.40 360.75
29 45.55 180.48 41.5 65.19 369.60
29.5 46.34 186.76 42 65.97 378.56
30 47.12 193.14 42.5 6.76 387.62
30.5 47.91 199.63 43 67.54 396.80
31.0 48.69 206.23 43.5 68.33 406.08
31.5 49.48 212.94 44 69.11 415.47
32 50.26 219.75 44.5 69.90 424.97
32.5 51.05 226.67 45 70.68 434.57
33 51.84 233.70 45.5 71.47 444.28
33.5 52.62 240.84 46 72.26 454.10
34 53.40 248.08 46.5 73.04 464.02
34.5 54.19 255.43 47 73.83 474.06
35 54.98 262.89 47.5 74.61 484.20
35.5 55.76 270.45 48 75.40 494.44
36 56.55 278.12 48.5 76.18 504.80
36.5 57.33 285.90 49 76.97 515.26
37 58.12 293.79 49.5 77.75 525.83
37.5 58.90 301.78 50 78.54 536.50
38 59.69 309.89
Appendix 4 - 18
Volume of Cylinder Tank
Sketch showing the relation between the depth and the volume of a liquid in a right cylinder tank when
the axis of the tank is level. Percent of volume is set opposite percent of depth.
Exact Only for Right Cylinder tank
Percent of Total Volume of Tank
100.000
99.831
99.126 99.523
98.658
98.131
97.550
96.252 96.922
95.542
94.796
94.015
92.361 93.203
91.490
90.594
89.672
87.760 88.727
86.771
85.762
84.734
82.625 83.688
81.545
80.450
79.340
77.079 78.216
76.930
74.760
73.596
71.220 72.413
70.019
68.808
67.590
65.131 66.364
63.892
62.647
61.397
58.883 60.142
57.621
56.356
55.087
52.546 53.816
51.273
50.000
48.727
46.184 47.454
44.913
43.644
42.379
39.858 41.117
38.603
37.353
36.108
33.636 34.869
32.410
31.192
29.981
27.587 28.780
26.404
26.232
24.070
21.784 22.921
20.660
19.550
18.456
16.312 17.375
15.266
14.238
13.229
11.273 12.240
10.328
9.406
8.509
6.797 7.639
5.985
5.204
4.458
3.077 3.748
2.450
1.869
1.342
0.477 0.874
0.169
0.000
For Tanks with Crowned Ends, add to Volume of Right Cylinder Part of the Tank, the Volume of the
Two Crowned Ends and use table As Is for results which will be considerably less than One Percent In
Error when Height (h) of crown does not exceed Twelve Percent of the Diameter of the Tank and also
when Length (L) of the right cylinder part of the tank is not less than the Diameter (D) of the tank.
Percent of Error decreases as L/D increases.
Appendix 4 - 19
CULVERT PIPE FILL
600 mm on
both sides of
the pipe
2 : 1 Slope
AREA SHOWN IN THE

FOLLOWING CHARTS
Appendix 4 - 20
English Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas As Ft2
(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe as Feet)
Y 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”

0.1 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3
0.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.8
0.3 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.4
0.4 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9
0.5 2.8 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.5
0.6 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.2
0.7 4.6 4.6 4.5 4.4 4.2 4.1 4.5 4.7 4.9
0.8 5.5 5.6 5.6 5.5 5.3 5.0 4.9 5.4 5.6
0.9 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.7 6.5 6.2 5.9 5.8 5.7
1.0 7.5 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.8 7.5 7.1 6.8 6.7
1.1 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.1 9.1 8.9 8.6 8.1 7.8
1.2 9.7 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.4 10.3 10.0 9.6 9.2
1.3 10.8 11.2 11.5 11.7 11.8 11.7 11.5 11.2 10.8
1.4 12.0 12.4 12.8 13.1 13.2 13.2 13.1 12.8 12.4
1.5 13.2 13.7 14.1 14.5 14.7 14.7 14.6 14.4 14.1
1.6 14.5 15.0 15.5 15.9 16.2 16.3 16.3 16.1 15.8
1.7 15.8 16.4 16.9 17.4 17.7 17.9 17.9 17.8 17.6
1.8 17.1 17.8 18.4 18.;9 19.3 19.5 19.6 19.6 19.4
1.9 18.5 19.2 19.9 20.4 20.9 21.2 21.4 21.4 21.3
2.0 19.9 20.7 21.4 22.0 22.6 22.9 23.1 23.2 23.2
2.1 21.4 22.2 23.0 23.7 24.3 24.7 25.0 25.1 25.1
2.2 22.9 23.8 24.6 25.4 26.0 26.5 26.8 27.0 27.0
2.3 24.4 25.4 26.3 27.1 27.8 28.3 28.7 29.0 29.1
2.4 26.0 27.0 28.0 28.8 29.6 30.2 30.7 31.0 31.1
2.5 27.6 28.7 29.7 30.6 31.5 32.1 32.6 33.0 33.2
2.6 29.3 30.4 31.5 32.5 33.4 34.1 34.7 35.1 35.3
2.7 31.0 32.2 33.3 34.3 35.3 36.1 36.7 37.2 37.5
2.8 32.7 34.0 35.2 36.3 37.3 38.1 38.8 39.3 39.7
2.9 34.5 35.8 37.1 38.2 39.4 40.2 41.0 41.5 41.9
3.0 36.3 37.7 39.0 40.2 41.4 42.3 43.1 43.8 44.2
3.1 38.2 39.6 41.0 42.2 43.5 44.5 45.4 46.1 46.6
3.2 40.1 41.6 43.0 44.3 45.7 46.7 47.6 48.4 48.9
3.3 42.0 43.6 45.1 46.4 47.8 48.9 49.9 50.7 51.3
3.4 44.0 45.6 47.2 48.6 50.1 51.2 52.3 53.1 53.8
3.5 46.0 47.7 49.3 50.8 52.3 53.5 54.6 55.6 56.3
3.6 48.1 49.8 51.5 53.0 54.6 55.9 57.1 58.1 58.8
3.7 50.2 52.0 53.7 55.3 57.0 58.3 59.5 60.6 61.4
3.8 52.3 54.2 56.0 57.6 59.4 60.7 62.0 63.1 64.0
3.9 54.5 56.4 58.3 60.0 61.8 63.2 64.6 65.7 66.6
4.0 56.8 58.7 60.6 62.4 64.3 65.7 67.1 68.4 69.3
4.1 59.0 61.0 63.0 64.8 66.8 68.3 69.8 71.0 72.0
4.2 61.3 63.4 65.4 67.3 69.3 70.9 72.4 73.8 74.8
4.3 63.7 65.8 67.8 69.8 71.9 73.6 75.1 76.5 77.6
4.4 66.0 68.2 70.3 72.4 74.5 76.2 77.9 79.3 80.5
4.5 68.5 70.7 72.9 75.0 77.2 79.0 80.6 82.2 83.4
4.6 70.9 73.2 75.5 77.6 79.9 81.7 83.5 85.0 86.3
4.7 73.4 75.8 78.1 80.3 82.6 84.5 86.3 88.0 89.3
4.8 76.0 78.4 80.7 83.0 85.4 87.4 89.2 90.9 92.3
4.9 78.5 81.0 83.4 85.7 88.2 90.2 92.2 93.9 95.3
5.0 81.2 83.7 86.2 88.5 91.1 93.2 95.1 97.0 98.4
Appendix 4 - 21
English Elliptical Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as Ft2
(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe as Feet)
Y 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”
0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
0.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
0.4 2.0 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
0.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
0.6 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
0.7 4.0 4.0 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
0.8 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.7 4.7 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
0.9 5.9 5.7 5.6 5.5 5.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4
1.0 6.9 6.7 6.5 6.4 6.4 6.3 6.3 6.2 6.2
1.1 8.0 7.8 7.5 7.4 7.3 7.2 7.2 7.1 7.1
1.2 9.1 9.0 8.6 8.4 8.3 8.2 8.2 8.1 8.1
1.3 10.3 10.2 9.9 9.5 9.4 9.3 9.2 9.1 9.1
1.4 11.5 11.5 11.2 10.8 10.6 10.4 10.3 10.2 10.1
1.5 12.7 12.8 12.6 12.2 11.9 11.6 11.5 11.4 11.3
1.6 14.0 14.1 14.0 13.7 13.3 12.9 12.7 12.6 12.5
1.7 15.3 15.5 15.4 15.2 14.9 14.3 14.1 13.9 13.7
1.8 16.6 16.9 16.9 16.7 16.5 15.9 15.5 15.2 15.1
1.9 18.0 18.3 18.4 18.3 18.1 17.6 17.0 16.7 16.5
2.0 19.4 19.8 19.9 19.9 19.8 19.4 18.7 18.2 18.0
2.1 20.9 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.5 21.1 20.6 19.9 19.6
2.2 22.4 23.0 23.2 23.3 23.3 23.0 22.5 21.7 21.2
2.3 24.0 24.6 24.8 25.0 25.1 24.8 24.4 23.7 23.0
2.4 25.6 26.2 26.6 26.8 26.9 26.7 26.4 25.7 24.9
2.5 27.2 27.9 28.3 28.6 28.8 28.7 28.4 27.9 27.1
2.6 28.9 29.7 30.1 30.5 30.7 30.7 30.4 29.9 29.2
2.7 30.6 31.4 31.9 32.4 32.7 32.7 32.5 32.1 31.5
2.8 32.3 33.3 33.8 34.3 34.7 34.8 34.7 34.8 33.7
2.9 34.1 35.1 35.7 36.3 36.7 36.9 36.8 36.5 38.0
3.0 35.9 37.0 37.7 38.3 38.8 39.0 39.1 38.8 38.4
3.1 37.8 38.9 39.7 40.4 40.9 41.2 41.3 41.1 40.7
3.2 39.7 40.9 41.7 42.5 43.1 43.4 43.6 43.4 43.2
3.3 41.7 42.9 43.8 44.6 45.3 45.7 45.9 45.8 45.6
3.4 43.7 45.0 45.9 46.8 47.5 48.0 48.3 48.2 48.1
3.5 45.7 47.1 48.1 49.0 49.8 50.4 50.7 50.7 50.6
3.6 47.8 49.2 50.3 51.3 52.1 52.7 53.2 53.2 53.2
3.7 49.9 51.4 52.5 53.6 54.5 55.2 55.7 55.8 55.8
3.8 52.0 53.6 54.8 55.9 56.9 57.6 58.2 58.4 58.5
3.9 54.2 55.9 57.1 58.3 59.3 60.1 60.8 61.0 61.2
4.0 56.4 58.2 59.4 60.8 61.8 62.7 63.4 63.7 63.9
4.1 58.7 60.5 61.8 63.2 64.3 65.3 66.0 66.4 66.7
4.2 61.0 62.9 64.3 65.7 66.9 67.9 68.7 69.1 69.5
4.3 63.4 65.3 66.7 68.3 69.5 70.6 71.5 71.9 72.4
4.4 65.8 67.8 69.3 70.8 72.1 73.3 74.2 74.8 75.3
4.5 68.2 70.3 71.8 73.5 74.8 76.0 77.1 77.6 78.2
4.6 70.7 72.8 74.4 76.1 77.5 78.8 79.9 80.5 81.2
4.7 73.2 75.4 77.0 78.8 80.3 81.6 82.9 83.5 84.2
4.8 75.7 78.0 79.7 81.6 83.1 84.5 85.7 86.5 87.3
4.9 78.3 80.6 82.4 84.3 85.9 87.4 88.7 89.5 90.4
5.0 80.9 83.3 85.2 87.2 88.8 90.4 91.7 92.6 93.5
Appendix 4 - 22
English Circular Culvert Pipe Embankment End Areas as Ft2
(Y=Height to Center of Pipe as Feet)
Pipe Diameter
Y 12” 15” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 72”
0.1 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
0.2 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
0.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
0.4 2.0 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
0.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
0.6 3.3 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.1
0.7 4.1 4.0 4.0 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
0.8 4.9 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.5 4.5
0.9 5.7 5.7 5.7 5.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3
1.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.4 6.3 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.1 6.1
1.1 7.5 7.6 7.6 7.4 7.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.0 7.0 7.0
1.2 8.5 8.6 8.6 8.5 8.2 8.1 8.0 8.0 7.9 7.9 7.9
1.3 9.5 9.6 9.6 9.6 9.4 9.1 9.0 9.0 8.9 8.9 8.8
1.4 10.5 10.7 10.7 10.7 10.6 10.3 10.1 10.0 10.0 9.9 9.8
1.5 11.6 11.8 11.9 11.9 11.8 11.5 11.2 11.1 11.0 11.0 10.9
1.6 12.7 12.9 13.0 13.1 13.1 12.8 12.5 12.3 12.2 12.1 12.0
1.7 13.9 14.1 14.2 14.4 14.4 14.1 13.7 13.5 13.4 13.3 13.2
1.8 15.1 15.3 15.5 15.7 15.7 15.5 15.2 14.8 14.7 14.5 14.4
1.9 16.3 16.6 16.8 17.0 17.1 17.0 16.7 16.2 16.0 15.8 15.6
2.0 17.6 17.9 18.1 18.4 18.5 18.5 18.2 17.7 17.4 17.2 17.3
2.1 18.9 19.2 19.5 19.8 20.0 20.0 19.8 19.3 18.9 18.6 18.3
2.2 20.3 20.6 20.9 21.3 21.5 21.5 21.4 21.0 20.5 20.1 19.8
2.3 21.7 22.0 22.3 22.8 23.1 23.1 23.0 22.7 22.2 21.7 21.3
2.4 23.1 23.5 23.8 24.3 24.7 24.8 24.7 24.4 24.0 23.4 22.9
2.5 24.6 25.0 25.4 25.9 26.3 26.5 26.4 26.2 25.8 25.2 24.5
2.6 26.1 26.6 26.9 27.5 28.0 28.2 28.2 28.0 27.7 27.1 26.2
2.7 27.7 28.1 28.5 29.2 29.7 29.9 30.0 29.9 29.6 29.1 28.0
2.8 29.3 29.8 30.2 30.9 31.4 31.7 31.9 31.8 31.5 31.1 29.8
2.9 30.9 31.4 31.9 32.6 33.2 33.6 33.8 33.7 33.5 33.1 31.8
3.0 32.6 33.1 33.6 34.4 35.0 35.5 35.7 35.7 35.5 35.2 33.9
3.1 34.3 34.9 35.4 36.2 36.9 37.4 37.7 37.7 37.6 37.3 36.1
3.2 36.1 37.6 37.2 38.1 38.8 39.3 39.7 39.8 39.7 39.5 38.3
3.3 37.9 38.5 39.0 40.0 40.8 41.3 41.7 41.9 41.9 41.7 40.6
3.4 39.7 40.4 40.9 41.9 42.8 43.4 43.8 44.0 44.1 43.9 43.0
3.5 41.6 42.3 42.9 43.9 44.8 45.5 45.9 46.2 46.3 46.2 45.4
3.6 43.5 44.2 44.8 45.9 46.9 47.6 48.1 48.4 48.6 48.5 47.8
3.7 45.5 46.2 46.8 48.0 49.0 49.7 50.3 50.7 50.9 50.9 50.2
3.8 47.5 48.2 48.9 50.1 51.1 51.9 52.6 53.0 53.2 53.3 52.7
3.9 49.5 50.3 51.0 52.2 53.3 54.2 54.9 55.3 55.6 55.7 55.3
4.0 51.6 52.4 53.1 54.4 55.5 56.5 57.2 57.7 58.0 58.2 57.9
4.1 53.7 54.5 55.3 56.6 57.8 58.8 59.6 60.1 60.5 60.7 60.5
4.2 55.9 56.7 57.5 58.9 60.1 61.1 62.0 62.5 63.0 63.3 63.1
4.3 58.1 58.9 59.7 51.2 62.5 63.5 64.4 65.1 65.6 65.9 65.8
4.4 60.3 61.2 62.0 63.5 64.9 66.0 66.9 67.6 68.2 68.5 68.6
4.5 62.6 63.5 64.4 65.9 67.3 68.5 69.4 70.2 70.8 71.2 71.4
4.6 64.9 65.9 66.7 68.3 69.8 71.0 72.0 72.8 73.5 73.9 74.2
4.7 67.3 68.2 69.1 70.8 72.3 73.5 74.6 75.5 76.2 76.7 77.0
4.8 69.7 70.7 71.6 73.3 74.8 76.1 77.3 78.2 78.9 79.5 79.9
4.9 72.1 73.1 74.1 75.8 77.4 78.8 80.0 80.9 81.7 82.3 82.9
5.0 74.6 75.6 76.6 78.4 80.0 81.5 82.7 83.7 84.5 85.2 85.9
Appendix 4 - 23
Metric Circular Culvert Pipe Embankment End Areas as m2
(Y=Height to Center of Pipe as mm)
Pipe Diameter
Y 12” 15” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 72”
30 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161
60 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613
90 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064
122 0.185806 0.185806 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516
152 0.241548 0.241548 0.241548 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258
183 0.30658 0.30658 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.287999 0.287999
213 0.380902 0.371612 0.371612 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322 0.353032 0.353032 0.353032 0.353032 0.353032
244 0.455225 0.455225 0.445935 0.436644 0.427354 0.427354 0.427354 0.427354 0.427354 0.418064 0.418064
274 0.529547 0.529547 0.529547 0.510967 0.501676 0.501676 0.501676 0.492386 0.492386 0.492386 0.492386
305 0.61316 0.61316 0.61316 0.594579 0.585289 0.575999 0.575999 0.575999 0.575999 0.566709 0.566709
335 0.696773 0.706063 0.706063 0.687482 0.668902 0.659612 0.659612 0.659612 0.650321 0.650321 0.650321
365 0.789676 0.798966 0.798966 0.789676 0.761805 0.752515 0.743224 0.743224 0.733934 0.733934 0.733934
396 0.882579 0.891869 0.891869 0.891869 0.873289 0.845418 0.836127 0.836127 0.826837 0.826837 0.817547
427 0.975482 0.994063 0.994063 0.994063 0.984772 0.956901 0.938321 0.92903 0.92903 0.91974 0.91045
457 1.077675 1.096256 1.105546 1.105546 1.096256 1.068385 1.040514 1.031224 1.021933 1.021933 1.012643
488 1.179869 1.198449 1.20774 1.21703 1.21703 1.189159 1.161288 1.142707 1.133417 1.124127 1.114836
518 1.291352 1.309933 1.319223 1.337804 1.337804 1.309933 1.272772 1.254191 1.244901 1.23561 1.22632
550 1.402836 1.421417 1.439997 1.458578 1.458578 1.439997 1.412126 1.374965 1.365675 1.347094 1.337804
580 1.51432 1.54219 1.560771 1.579352 1.588642 1.579352 1.551481 1.505029 1.486449 1.467868 1.449287
610 1.635094 1.662964 1.681545 1.709416 1.718706 1.718706 1.690835 1.644384 1.616513 1.597932 1.607223
640 1.755867 1.783738 1.811609 1.83948 1.858061 1.858061 1.83948 1.793029 1.755867 1.727997 1.700126
670 1.885932 1.913803 1.941674 1.978835 1.997415 1.997415 1.988125 1.950964 1.904512 1.867351 1.83948
700 2.015996 2.043867 2.071738 2.118189 2.14606 2.14606 2.13677 2.108899 2.062447 2.015996 1.978835
732 2.14606 2.183221 2.211092 2.257544 2.294705 2.303995 2.294705 2.266834 2.229673 2.173931 2.12748
762 2.285415 2.322576 2.359737 2.406189 2.44335 2.461931 2.45264 2.43406 2.396898 2.341157 2.276124
793 2.424769 2.471221 2.499092 2.554834 2.601285 2.619866 2.619866 2.601285 2.573414 2.517672 2.43406
823 2.573414 2.610575 2.647737 2.712769 2.75922 2.777801 2.787091 2.777801 2.74993 2.703478 2.601285
854 2.722059 2.768511 2.805672 2.870704 2.917155 2.945026 2.963607 2.954317 2.926446 2.889285 2.768511
884 2.870704 2.917155 2.963607 3.028639 3.084381 3.121542 3.140123 3.130832 3.112252 3.075091 2.954317
914 3.028639 3.075091 31.21542 3.195865 3.251606 3.298058 3.316639 3.316639 3.298058 3.270187 3.149413
944 3.186574 3.242316 3.288768 3.36309 3.428122 3.474574 3.502445 3.502445 3.493154 3.465283 3.3538
974 3.3538 3.409542 3.455993 3.539606 3.604638 3.651089 3.688251 3.697541 3.688251 3.66967 3.558186
1005 3.521025 3.576767 3.623219 3.716122 3.790444 3.836896 3.874057 3.892637 3.892637 3.874057 3.771863
1036 3.688251 3.753283 3.799734 3.892637 3.97625 4.031992 4.069153 4.087734 4.097024 4.078443 3.994831
1066 3.864766 3.929799 3.98554 4.078443 4.162056 4.227088 4.26425 4.29212 4.301411 4.29212 4.217798
1097 4.041282 4.106314 4.162056 4.26425 4.357153 4.422185 4.468636 4.496507 4.515088 4.505797 4.440765
1127 4.227088 4.29212 4.347862 4.459346 4.552249 4.617281 4.673023 4.710184 4.728765 4.728765 4.663733
1158 4.412894 4.477927 4.542959 4.654442 4.747345 4.821668 4.8867 4.923861 4.942442 4.951732 4.89599
1188 4.5987 4.673023 4.738055 4.849539 4.951732 5.035345 5.100377 5.137538 5.165409 5.174699 5.137538
1219 4.793797 4.868119 4.933151 5.053925 5.156119 5.249022 5.314054 5.360505 5.388376 5.406957 5.379086
1250 4.988893 5.063216 5.137538 5.258312 5.369796 5.462699 5.537021 5.583473 5.620634 5.639215 5.620634
1280 5.19328 5.267602 5.341925 5.471989 5.583473 5.676376 5.759988 5.80644 5.852892 5.880762 5.862182
1311 5.397667 5.471989 5.546311 5.685666 5.80644 5.899343 5.982956 6.047988 6.094439 6.12231 6.11302
1341 5.602053 5.685666 5.759988 5.899343 6.029407 6.131601 6.215213 6.280246 6.335987 6.363858 6.373149
1372 5.81573 5.899343 5.982956 6.12231 6.252375 6.363858 6.447471 6.521793 6.577535 66.14696 6.633277
1402 6.029407 6.12231 6.196633 6.345278 6.484632 6.596116 6.689019 6.763341 6.828373 6.865535 6.893406
1433 6.252375 6.335987 6.4196 6.577535 6.71689 6.828373 6.930567 7.01418 7.079212 7.125663 7.153534
1463 6.475342 6.568245 6.651858 6.809793 6.949147 7.069921 7.181405 7.265018 7.33005 7.385792 7.422953
1494 6.698309 6.791212 6.884115 7.04205 7.190695 7.32076 7.432243 7.515856 7.590178 7.64592 7.701662
1524 6.930567 7.02347 7.116373 7.283598 7.432243 7.571598 7.683081 7.775984 7.850307 7.915339 7.980371
Appendix 4 - 24
Metric Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as m2
(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe as mm)
Y 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”

30 0.055742 0.055742 0.065032 0.065032 0.074322 0.083613 0.092903 0.111484 0.120774
60 0.102193 0.102193 0.102193 0.111484 0.120774 0.130064 0.139355 0.157935 0.167225
90 0.148645 0.148645 0.148645 0.157935 0.167225 0.176516 0.195096 0.204387 0.222967
122 0.185806 0.204387 0.204387 0.204387 0.222967 0.232258 0.241548 0.260129 0.269419
152 0.260129 0.250838 0.250838 0.250838 0.269419 0.287999 0.29729 0.31587 0.325161
183 0.343741 0.334451 0.325161 0.31587 0.31587 0.343741 0.353032 0.371612 0.390193
213 0.427354 0.427354 0.418064 0.408773 0.390193 0.380902 0.418064 0.436644 0.455225
244 0.510967 0.520257 0.520257 0.510967 0.492386 0.464515 0.455225 0.501676 0.520257
274 0.60387 0.61316 0.62245 0.62245 0.60387 0.575999 0.548128 0.538838 0.529547
305 0.696773 0.715353 0.724644 0.733934 0.724644 0.696773 0.659612 0.631741 0.62245
335 0.798966 0.817547 0.836127 0.845418 0.845418 0.826837 0.798966 0.752515 0.724644
365 0.901159 0.92903 0.947611 0.966192 0.966192 0.956901 0.92903 0.891869 0.854708
396 1.003353 1.040514 1.068385 1.086966 1.096256 1.086966 1.068385 1.040514 1.003353
427 1.114836 1.151998 1.189159 1.21703 1.22632 1.22632 1.21703 1.189159 1.151998
457 1.22632 1.272772 1.309933 1.347094 1.365675 1.365675 1.356384 1.337804 1.309933
488 1.347094 1.393546 1.439997 1.477158 1.505029 1.51432 1.51432 1.495739 1.467868
518 1.467868 1.52361 1.570061 1.616513 1.644384 1.662964 1.662964 1.653674 1.635094
550 1.588642 1.653674 1.709416 1.755867 1.793029 1.811609 1.8209 1.8209 1.802319
580 1.718706 1.783738 1.84877 1.895222 1.941674 1.969544 1.988125 1.988125 1.978835
610 1.84877 1.923093 1.988125 2.043867 2.099609 2.12748 2.14606 2.155351 2.155351
640 1.988125 2.062447 2.13677 2.201802 2.257544 2.294705 2.322576 2.331866 2.331866
670 2.12748 2.211092 2.285415 2.359737 2.415479 2.461931 2.489801 2.508382 2.508382
700 2.266834 2.359737 2.44335 2.517672 2.582705 2.629156 2.666317 2.694188 2.703478
732 2.415479 2.508382 2.601285 2.675608 2.74993 2.805672 2.852123 2.879994 2.889285
762 2.564124 2.666317 2.75922 2.842833 2.926446 2.982188 3.028639 3.0658 3.084381
793 2.722059 2.824252 2.926446 3.019349 3.102962 3.167994 3.223735 3.260897 3.279477
823 2.879994 2.991478 3.093671 3.186574 3.279477 3.3538 3.409542 3.455993 3.483864
854 3.037929 3.158703 3.270187 3.37238 3.465283 3.539606 3.604638 3.651089 3.688251
884 3.205155 3.325929 3.446703 3.548896 3.66038 3.734702 3.809025 3.855476 3.892637
914 3.37238 3.502445 3.623219 3.734702 3.846186 3.929799 4.004121 4.069153 4.106314
944 3.548896 3.67896 3.809025 3.920508 4.041282 4.134185 4.217798 4.28283 4.329282
974 3.725412 3.864766 3.994831 4.115605 4.245669 4.338572 4.422185 4.496507 4.542959
1005 3.901928 4.050573 4.189927 4.310701 4.440765 4.542959 4.635862 4.710184 4.765926
1036 4.087734 4.236379 4.385023 4.515088 4.654442 4.756636 4.858829 4.933151 4.998184
1066 4.27354 4.431475 4.58012 4.719474 4.858829 4.970313 5.072506 5.165409 5.230441
1097 4.468636 4.626571 4.784507 4.923861 5.072506 5.19328 5.304764 5.397667 5.462699
1127 4.663733 4.830958 4.988893 5.137538 5.295473 5.416247 5.527731 5.629924 5.704247
1158 4.858829 5.035345 5.20257 5.351215 5.518441 5.639215 5.759988 5.862182 5.945795
1188 5.063216 5.239731 5.416247 5.574182 5.741408 5.871472 6.001536 6.10373 6.187342
1219 5.276893 5.453408 5.629924 5.79715 5.973665 6.10373 6.233794 6.354568 6.438181
1250 5.481279 5.667085 5.852892 6.020117 6.205923 6.345278 6.484632 6.596116 6.689019
1280 5.694956 5.890053 6.075859 6.252375 6.438181 6.586826 6.72618 6.856244 6.949147
1311 5.917924 6.11302 6.298826 6.484632 6.679729 6.837664 6.977018 7.107083 7.209276
1341 6.131601 6.335987 6.531084 6.72618 6.921276 7.079212 7.237147 7.367211 7.478695
1372 6.363858 6.568245 6.772632 6.967728 7.172115 7.33934 7.487985 7.63663 7.748114
1402 6.586826 6.800503 7.01418 7.209276 7.422953 7.590178 7.757404 7.896758 8.017532
1433 6.819083 7.04205 7.255727 7.460114 7.673791 7.850307 8.017532 8.175468 8.296241
1463 7.060631 7.283598 7.497275 7.710952 7.93392 8.119726 8.286951 8.444886 8.574951
1494 7.292889 7.525146 7.748114 7.961791 8.194048 8.379854 8.56566 8.723595 8.85366
1524 7.543727 7.775984 8.008242 8.221919 8.463467 8.658563 8.835079 9.011595 9.141659
Appendix 4 - 25
Metric Elliptical Culvert Pipe-Arch Embankment Areas as m2
(Y=Height to Widest Section of Pipe as mm)
Y 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72”
30 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161 0.037161
60 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613 0.083613
90 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064 0.130064
122 0.185806 0.185806 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516 0.176516
152 0.241548 0.241548 0.241548 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258 0.232258
183 0.30658 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729 0.29729
213 0.371612 0.371612 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322 0.362322
244 0.455225 0.445935 0.436644 0.436644 0.436644 0.427354 0.427354 0.427354 0.427354
274 0.548128 0.529547 0.520257 0.510967 0.510967 0.501676 0.501676 0.501676 0.501676
305 0.641031 0.62245 0.60387 0.594579 0.594579 0.585289 0.585289 0.575999 0.575999
335 0.743224 0.724644 0.696773 0.687482 0.678192 0.668902 0.668902 0.659612 0.659612
365 0.845418 0.836127 0.798966 0.780386 0.771095 0.761805 0.761805 0.752515 0.752515
396 0.956901 0.947611 0.91974 0.882579 0.873289 0.863998 0.854708 0.845418 0.845418
427 1.068385 1.068385 1.040514 1.003353 0.984772 0.966192 0.956901 0.947611 0.938321
457 1.179869 1.189159 1.170578 1.133417 1.105546 1.077675 1.068385 1.059095 1.049804
488 1.300643 1.309933 1.300643 1.272772 1.23561 1.198449 1.179869 1.170578 1.161288
518 1.421417 1.439997 1.430707 1.412126 1.384255 1.328513 1.309933 1.291352 1.272772
550 1.54219 1.570061 1.570061 1.551481 1.5329 1.477158 1.439997 1.412126 1.402836
580 1.672255 1.700126 1.709416 1.700126 1.681545 1.635094 1.579352 1.551481 1.5329
610 1.802319 1.83948 1.84877 1.84877 1.83948 1.802319 1.737287 1.690835 1.672255
640 1.941674 1.988125 1.997415 2.006706 1.997415 1.960254 1.913803 1.84877 1.8209
670 2.081028 2.13677 2.155351 2.164641 2.164641 2.13677 2.090318 2.015996 1.969544
700 2.229673 2.285415 2.303995 2.322576 2.331866 2.303995 2.266834 2.201802 2.13677
732 2.378318 2.43406 2.471221 2.489801 2.499092 2.480511 2.45264 2.387608 2.313286
762 2.526963 2.591995 2.629156 2.657027 2.675608 2.666317 2.638446 2.591995 2.517672
793 2.684898 2.75922 2.796382 2.833543 2.852123 2.852123 2.824252 2.777801 2.712769
823 2.842833 2.917155 2.963607 3.010058 3.037929 3.037929 3.019349 2.982188 2.926446
854 3.000768 3.093671 3.140123 3.186574 3.223735 3.233026 3.223735 3.186574 3.130832
884 3.167994 3.260897 3.316639 3.37238 3.409542 3.428122 3.418832 3.390961 3.344509
914 3.335219 3.437412 3.502445 3.558186 3.604638 3.623219 3.632509 3.604638 3.567477
944 3.511735 3.613928 3.688251 3.753283 3.799734 3.827605 3.836896 3.818315 3.781154
974 3.688251 3.799734 3.874057 3.948379 4.004121 4.031992 4.050573 4.031992 4.013411
1005 3.874057 3.98554 4.069153 4.143476 4.208508 4.245669 4.26425 4.254959 4.236379
1036 4.059863 4.180637 4.26425 4.347862 4.412894 4.459346 4.487217 4.477927 4.468636
1066 4.245669 4.375733 4.468636 4.552249 4.626571 4.682313 4.654442 4.710184 4.700894
1097 4.440765 4.57083 4.673023 4.765926 4.840248 4.89599 4.942442 4.942442 4.942442
1127 4.635862 4.775216 4.87741 4.979603 5.063216 5.128248 5.174699 5.18399 5.18399
1158 4.830958 4.979603 5.091087 5.19328 5.286183 5.351215 5.406957 5.425538 5.434828
1188 5.035345 5.19328 5.304764 5.416247 5.50915 5.583473 5.648505 5.667085 5.685666
1219 5.239731 5.406957 5.518441 5.648505 5.741408 5.825021 5.890053 5.917924 5.936504
1250 5.453408 5.620634 5.741408 5.871472 5.973665 6.066569 6.131601 5.239731 6.196633
1280 5.667085 5.843601 5.973665 6.10373 6.215213 6.308116 6.382439 6.4196 6.456761
1311 5.890053 6.066569 6.196633 6.345278 6.456761 6.558955 6.642567 6.679729 6.72618
1341 6.11302 6.298826 6.438181 6.577535 6.698309 6.809793 6.893406 6.949147 6.995599
1372 6.335987 6.531084 6.670438 6.828373 6.949147 7.060631 7.162824 7.209276 7.079212
1402 6.568245 6.763341 6.911986 7.069921 7.199986 7.302179 7.422953 7.478695 7.543727
1433 6.800503 7.004889 7.153534 7.32076 7.460114 7.580888 7.701662 7.757404 7.822436
1463 7.03276 7.246437 7.404372 7.580888 7.720243 7.850307 7.961791 8.036113 8.110435
1494 7.274308 7.487985 7.65521 7.831726 7.980371 8.119726 8.2405 8.314822 8.398435
1524 7.515856 7.738823 7.915339 8.101145 8.24979 8.398435 8.519209 8.602822 8.686434
Appendix 4 - 26
Weights of Prestressed Concrete Bearing Pile
For computing bearing capacity required on Form RD-209
Constant Section Tapered Section

Wt. Per Lin. Ft. Total Weight
Pile Type (Pounds) (Pounds)
I 148 None
II 200 None
III 173 None
IV 212 None
V 124 1740
VI 169 2500
VII 221 2950
This table is based on and is for use only with Standard Plan 1720-C-R2.
Steel Pipe Pile Data

ARMCO Union Metal
Size O.D. (ins) 12 12¾ 12 (Nominal)
Wall T. (ins) .188 .188 7 Ga.
Wt. per Lin. Ft. (lbs.) 23.72 25.16 25.3
Conc. per Lin. Ft. (C.Y.) .0273 .0309 .0255
Union Metal 30’tapered Se. Type F. Total Wt. 589 Lbs. Conc. 0.55 Cu.Yd.
Size O.E. (ins.) 14 14 (Nominal)

Wall T. (ins.) .188 7 Ga.
Wt. per Lin. Ft. (Lbs.) 27.66 29.5
Conc. per Lin. Ft. (C.Y.) .0375 .0350
Union Metal 40’tapered Sec. Type F. Total Wt. 895 Lbs. Conc. 0.95 Cu.Yd.
For Raymond step tapered pile contact your District Construction Engineer.
Appendix 4 - 27

CST Ma 1

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CST Ma 1

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SUMMARY OF

300 Subgrade Preparation

400 Lighting, Signs, and Traffic Control

500 Bituminous Pavement

600 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

700 Bridges, Culverts, and Related Construction

800 Roadside Development and Erosion Control

900 Incidental Construction

1000 Material Details

1200 Site Manager

1300 Project Surveys

Table of Contents 100 - 1

Table of Contents 100 - 5

301.00 CHECKLISTS (See Division 200)...................................................................................175

302.00 BASE COURSE AND SUBGRADE INSPECTION .......................................................176

303.00 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND SHOULDER SUBGRADE PREPARATION........177

304.00 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION........................................................................................180

305.00 EARTH SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................181

306.00 FOUNDATION COURSE ...............................................................................................182

307.00 ROCK OR AGGREGATE SURFACING........................................................................186

Table of Contents 300 - 1

LIGHTING, SIGNS, TRAFFIC SIGNALS & TRAFFIC CONTROL

401.00 LIGHTING CHECKLIST .........................................................................................193

Table of Contents 400 - 1

Table of Contents 400 - 2

Table of Contents 500-2

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) PAVEMENT

Table of Contents 600 - 1

Table of Contents 600 - 2

Table of Contents 600 - 3

Table of Contents 700 - 2

Table of Contents 700 - 3

800.00 GENERAL COMMENTS ...........................................................................................435

Table of Contents 800 - 2

Table of Contents 900 - 1

1001.00 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................477

Table of Contents 1000-1

Table of Contents 1100 - 1

Table of Contents 1100 - 2

Table of Contents 1200 - 1

DIVISION 1300 -- PROJECT SURVEYS ...................................................................................531

Table of Contents 1300 - 2

101.01 PURPOSE OF MANUAL

• Establish uniform policies and procedures for contract administration and

• Serve as a collecting point for new instructions and guidelines relating to

• Describe the role of District Engineers, District Construction Engineers, Project

101.02 ENGINEER'S DUTIES AND AUTHORITY

I. Authority of the Director

A. General - The specifications are the Engineer's authority to decide

The authority exercised by the Engineer as provided in

1. Authority to enforce specific requirements and provisions of the

2. Authority to interpret the requirements and provisions of the plans

3. Authority to authorize (approve) revisions or modifications in the

4. Authority to suspend the work under certain conditions.

General - The Director, exercising the responsibilities given him/her by the

personnel the responsibility for the performance of certain functions of the

The assignment and designation of responsibility for the performance,

101.03 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION

• Direction and consultation to District Engineers, Construction Engineers, Project

• Final decision capability for all disputes or questions regarding contract

Responsibility for administering construction contracts on the roads, highways, and

Asst. Construction Asst. Construction Asst. Construction